2011 LEGACY SERVICE MANUAL QUICK REFERENCE INDEX

ENGINE 1 SECTION

FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS) FU(H4SO)

EMISSION CONTROL
EC(H4SO)
(AUX. EMISSION CONTROL DEVICES)

INTAKE (INDUCTION) IN(H4SO)

MECHANICAL ME(H4SO)
This service manual has been prepared
to provide SUBARU service personnel
with the necessary information and data EXHAUST EX(H4SO)
for the correct maintenance and repair
of SUBARU vehicles.
COOLING CO(H4SO)
This manual includes the procedures
for maintenance, disassembling, reas-
sembling, inspection and adjustment of LUBRICATION LU(H4SO)
components and diagnostics for guid-
ance of experienced mechanics.
Please peruse and utilize this manual SPEED CONTROL SYSTEMS SP(H4SO)
fully to ensure complete repair work for
satisfying our customers by keeping
their vehicle in optimum condition. IGNITION IG(H4SO)
When replacement of parts during
repair work is needed, be sure to use
SUBARU genuine parts. STARTING/CHARGING SYSTEMS SC(H4SO)

ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS) EN(H4SO)(diag)

GENERAL DESCRIPTION GD(H4SO)

All information, illustration and specifi-

cations contained in this manual are
based on the latest product information
available at the time of publication
approval.

FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD. G2470BE2

11LE_US.book 2 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

FU(H4SO)
Page
1. General Description ...................................................................................2
2. Throttle Body ............................................................................................15
3. Intake Manifold .........................................................................................16
4. Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor .......................................................23
5. Crankshaft Position Sensor ......................................................................24
6. Camshaft Position Sensor ........................................................................26
7. Knock Sensor ...........................................................................................28
8. Throttle Position Sensor ...........................................................................30
9. Mass Air Flow and Intake Air Temperature Sensor .................................31
10. Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor .........................................................32
11. EGR Valve ...............................................................................................33
12. Fuel Injector .............................................................................................34
13. Variable Valve Lift Diagnosis Oil Pressure Switch ...................................35
14. Oil Temperature Sensor ...........................................................................36
15. Front Oxygen (A/F) Sensor ......................................................................37
16. Rear Oxygen Sensor ................................................................................39
17. Engine Control Module (ECM) .................................................................41
18. Main Relay ...............................................................................................42
19. Fuel Pump Relay ......................................................................................44
20. Electronic Throttle Control Relay .............................................................46
21. Fuel ..........................................................................................................48
22. Fuel Tank .................................................................................................50
23. Fuel Filler Pipe .........................................................................................57
24. Fuel Pump ................................................................................................60
25. Fuel Level Sensor ....................................................................................62
26. Fuel Sub Level Sensor .............................................................................64
27. Fuel Filter .................................................................................................66
28. Fuel Delivery and Evaporation Lines .......................................................68
29. Fuel System Trouble in General ..............................................................74
11LE_US.book 2 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Description
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

1. General Description
A: SPECIFICATION
Capacity 70 2 (18.5 US gal, 15.4 Imp gal)
Fuel tank
Location Under rear seat
Type Impeller
Shutoff discharge pressure 677 kPa (6.9 kgf/cm2, 98.2 psi) or less
Fuel pump
105 2 (27.7 US gal, 23.1 Imp gal)
Discharge rate
[12 V at 300 kPa (3.06 kgf/cm2, 43.5 psi)]
Fuel filter In-tank type

FU(H4SO)-2
11LE_US.book 3 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Description
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

B: COMPONENT
1. INTAKE MANIFOLD

T3 T3

(3)
(4)

T2
T1

(8) (7)

(5)
(11)
(12)
(13) T2
(1)
(14)

(9)
(6)
(10)

(13)
(14)
(9)

(10)
(2)

(2)

FU-05594

FU(H4SO)-3
11LE_US.book 4 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Description
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

(1) Intake manifold (8) Fuel delivery pipe (14) Rubber

(2) Gasket (9) Injector
(3) Intake manifold protector RH (10) Seal ring Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(4) Intake manifold protector LH (11) Cap T1: 6.4 (0.7, 4.7)
(5) Fuel gallery RH (12) Clip T2: 19 (1.9, 14.0)
(6) Fuel gallery LH (13) O-ring T3: 25 (2.5, 18.4)
(7) Fuel pipe

FU(H4SO)-4
11LE_US.book 5 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Description
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

2. AIR INTAKE SYSTEM

(1) T3
(12)
T2
(13) (26)
(17) (18)
(14) T1 T2
(14)
(25) (24)
(15) (4) A
(2) T2
(5)
(16) (3)
(18) (28)
T2
(18)
A
(6) A (30)
(29)
(19)
(8)
(10)
T4 (18)
(11)

(21)
T2
(7)
(10)
(20)
(22)
(27) (9) T2

(23)

T4

FU-05595

(1) Throttle body (14) Clip (26) Bracket

(2) Gasket (15) PCV hose E (27) Engine harness
(3) Multi-function duct (16) Clip (28) Purge control solenoid valve (U5
model)
(4) Manifold absolute pressure sensor (17) Heater hose A (29) Evaporation hose B
(5) O-ring (18) Clip (30) Evaporation hose C
(6) Gasket (19) Heater hose B
(7) PCV pipe (20) EGR valve Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(8) PCV hose A (21) Gasket T1: 2 (0.2, 1.5)
(9) PCV hose B (22) Gasket T2: 6.4 (0.7, 4.7)
(10) Clip (23) EGR pipe adapter T3: 8 (0.8, 5.9)
(11) PCV hose C (24) Evaporation hose A T4: 19 (1.9, 14.0)
(12) PCV hose D (25) Purge control solenoid valve
(Other than U5 model)
(13) PCV valve

FU(H4SO)-5
11LE_US.book 6 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Description
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

3. CRANKSHAFT POSITION, CAMSHAFT POSITION AND KNOCK SENSORS

T1

(1) T2

(2)

T1

(3)
(4) T1

FU-04926

(1) Crankshaft position sensor (3) Camshaft position sensor Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Knock sensor (4) Camshaft position sensor support T1: 6.4 (0.7, 4.7)
T2: 24 (2.4, 17.7)

FU(H4SO)-6
11LE_US.book 7 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Description
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

4. FUEL TANK
(23)
T1

(8)
T1
T1

(7)
(14)
A B

(9) (24) (24)

(12)
(25) (25)
(10)
(1)
C (11)
(25)
(27)
(25)
(26)
(24)
(15)

(13)

T4
(2)
(25) B
(3)
T4 A
(16)
(17) (16)
T4
(6)
(16)

T3
C
T3
T3 (4)
(18)
(5) (16)
(19)
(20)

(21) (22)

T2 (22)
T3 T2
(22) (22)
T2 T3
T2

FU-05596

FU(H4SO)-7
11LE_US.book 8 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Description
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

(1) Fuel tank (12) Fuel sub level sensor upper plate (23) Rubber cap
(2) Fuel tank band RH (13) Fuel sub level sensor gasket (24) Cushion
(3) Fuel tank band LH (14) Fuel sub level sensor protector (25) Cushion
(4) Fuel delivery tube (15) Fuel sub level sensor filter (26) Cushion
(5) Tube clamp (16) Retainer (27) Cushion
(6) Fuel sub delivery tube (17) Stopper
(7) Fuel pump ASSY (18) Heat shield cover Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(8) Fuel pump upper plate (19) Fuel tank protector RH T1: 4.4 (0.4, 3.2)
(9) Fuel pump gasket (20) Fuel tank protector LH T2: 9 (0.9, 6.6)
(10) Fuel sub level sensor upper plate (21) Clip T3: 18 (1.8, 13.3)
cushion
(11) Fuel sub level sensor (22) Self-locking nut T4: 33 (3.4, 24.3)

FU(H4SO)-8
11LE_US.book 9 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Description
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

5. FUEL LINE

(20)

(13)
(23)
T3 (22)
(1) (19)
(15) F
G
(28) (1) F (17)
T2 G (21)
(1) (18)
(27) (24)
F
(30) H
I
(1) T5
(25) (14)
(29) H
T1 (16)
(26) F

(1)

I
(1) (12)

(10) (11)
C (1)

(1)
T3 T3

(9)

(4)
(1)
C
(1)
(2)
(8)

(1)
A
(1) (3)

B (7)
A

B
(5)

T4 (6)

FU-05597

FU(H4SO)-9
11LE_US.book 10 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Description
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

(1) Clip (14) Air vent tube (26) Clamp

(2) Fuel delivery hose (15) Circulate hose (27) Pressure hose
(3) Evaporation hose (16) Vent tube (28) Fuel tank pressure sensor
(4) Connect check cover (17) Drain valve (29) Fuel tank pressure sensor bracket
(5) Fuel damper holder (18) Canister (30) Vacuum hose
(6) Damper bracket (19) Drain filter
(7) Fuel pipe ASSY (20) Canister protector Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(8) Purge hose A (21) Charge tube T1: 2 (0.2, 1.5)
(9) Purge pipe (22) Canister drain tube T2: 2.5 (0.3, 1.8)
(10) Purge hose B (23) Drain tube ASSY T3: 7.35 (0.7, 5.4)
(11) Connector (24) Clamp T4: 7.5 (0.8, 5.5)
(12) Air vent hose A (25) Fuel filler hose T5: 8 (0.8, 5.9)
(13) Circulate tube

FU(H4SO)-10
11LE_US.book 11 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Description
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

6. FUEL FILLER PIPE

(3)
(1)

(2)

(4)

(5)
(10) (6)

(11) T3

(10)

(12) (7)

(14)
(13) T3
(8) T2
T1

(8)

(9)

(15)

T3

FU-05061

(1) Fuel filler cap (8) Fuel filler pipe bracket B (15) Grommet
(2) Fuel filler pipe protector (9) Fuel filler pipe bracket C
(3) Clip (10) Clip Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(4) Neck holder A (11) Evaporation hose T1: 1 (0.1, 0.7)
(5) Neck holder B (12) Grommet T2: 7.35 (0.7, 5.4)
(6) Fuel filler pipe (13) Evaporation pipe T3: 7.5 (0.8, 5.5)
(7) Fuel filler pipe bracket A (14) Evaporation pipe protector

FU(H4SO)-11
11LE_US.book 12 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Description
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

7. FUEL PUMP

(1)

(3)

B
A

(4)

(2)

(5) (2)

(6)

(7)

(11)
(10)

(8)

(11)
(9)

FU-08400

(1) Fuel filter assembly (5) Fuel pump (9) Fuel level sensor (model with fuel
level sensor bent in 3 locations)
(2) Pump module spring (6) Support rubber cushion (10) Fuel level sensor (model with fuel
level sensor bent in 2 locations)
(3) Fuel pump harness (7) Fuel pump holder (11) Fuel temperature sensor
(4) Gasket spacer (8) Fuel chamber ASSY

FU(H4SO)-12
11LE_US.book 13 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Description
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

C: CAUTION
• Wear appropriate work clothing, including a cap,
protective goggles and protective shoes when per-
forming any work.
• Remove contamination including dirt and corro-
sion before removal, installation or disassembly.
• Keep the disassembled parts in order and pro-
tect them from dust and dirt.
• Before removal, installation or disassembly, be
sure to clarify the failure. Avoid unnecessary re-
moval, installation, disassembly and replacement.
• Vehicle components are extremely hot after driv-
ing. Be wary of receiving burns from heated parts.
• Be sure to tighten fasteners including bolts and
nuts to the specified torque.
• Place shop jacks or rigid racks at the specified
points.
• Before disconnecting connectors of sensors or
units, be sure to disconnect the ground cable from
battery.
• Place “NO OPEN FLAMES” signs near the work-
ing area.
• Prepare a container and cloth to prevent scatter-
ing of fuels when performing work where fuels can
be spilled. If the oil spills, wipe it off immediately to
prevent from penetrating into floor or flowing out for
environmental protection.
• Follow all government and local regulations con-
cerning disposal of refuse when disposing fuel.

FU(H4SO)-13
11LE_US.book 14 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Description
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

D: PREPARATION TOOL
1. SPECIAL TOOL
ILLUSTRATION TOOL NUMBER DESCRIPTION REMARKS
1B022XU0 SUBARU SELECT Used for draining fuel and each inspection.
MONITOR III KIT

ST1B022XU0
18471AA000 FUEL PIPE Used for draining fuel.
ADAPTER

ST18471AA000
42099AE000 QUICK CONNEC- Used for removing the quick connector.
TOR RELEASE

ST42099AE000

2. GENERAL TOOL
TOOL NAME REMARKS
Circuit tester Used for measuring resistance and voltage.
Oscilloscope Used for inspecting the waveform of each sensor.

FU(H4SO)-14
 Throttle Body
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

2. Throttle Body
A: REMOVAL
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery.

FU-04956

(A)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
IG-02107 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18
2) Remove the air intake boot assembly. <Ref. to 34 33 32 31 30 29 28
IN(H4SO)-8, REMOVAL, Air Intake Boot.>
3) Disconnect the throttle position sensor connec-
tor (A).
4) Remove the bolts (B) which secure the throttle V
body to the multi-function duct assembly, and re- FU-04049
move the throttle body.
(A) To ECM connector

Throttle Accelerator
Terminal No. Standard
(B) (B) sensor pedal
Not
Main 18 (+) and 29 (–) Approx. 0.9 V
depressed
Not
Sub 28 (+) and 29 (–) Approx. 1.7 V
(A) depressed

5) After inspection, install the related parts in the

FU-06490
reverse order of removal.
B: INSTALLATION 2. THROTTLE SENSOR (METHOD WITH
Install in the reverse order of removal. SUBARU SELECT MONITOR)
NOTE: 1) Warm up the engine.
Use a new gasket. 2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. (engine OFF)
3) Read the throttle opening angle signal and volt-
Tightening torque: age of throttle sensor using Subaru Select Monitor.
8 N·m (0.8 kgf-m, 5.9 ft-lb) <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-34, READ CURRENT
C: INSPECTION DATA FOR ENGINE (NORMAL MODE), OPERA-
TION, Subaru Select Monitor.>
1. THROTTLE SENSOR (METHOD WITH
Throttle opening
CIRCUIT TESTER) Throttle sensor
angle signal
Standard
1) Warm up the engine. Main 5% Approx. 0.9 V
2) Remove the glove box lid assembly. <Ref. to EI- Sub 5% Approx. 1.7 V
65, REMOVAL, Glove Box.>
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. (engine OFF) 3. OTHER INSPECTIONS
4) Measure the voltage between ECM connector
1) Check that the throttle body has no deformation,
terminals.
cracks or other damages.
2) Check that the engine coolant hose has no
cracks, damage or loose part.

FU(H4SO)-15
 Intake Manifold
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

3. Intake Manifold 8) Remove the connector (A) from the fuel injector,
and remove the fuel delivery pipe (B) from the fuel
A: REMOVAL gallery RH.
1. INTAKE MANIFOLD NOTE:
Disconnect the quick connector as shown in the fig-
1) Release the fuel pressure. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-
ure.
48, RELEASING OF FUEL PRESSURE, PROCE-
DURE, Fuel.>
2) Disconnect the ground cable from battery.
(a)

(a)

IG-02107

3) Open the fuel filler lid and remove the fuel filler
cap.
4) Remove the air intake boot assembly. <Ref. to
IN(H4SO)-8, REMOVAL, Air Intake Boot.>
5) Disconnect the connector (A) from the ignition
coil of #3 cylinder.
6) Disconnect the PCV hose (B) from the rocker
cover RH.
FU-05483

(a) Slider
(A) (B)

(B)

(A) (A)

FU-04845

7) Remove the intake manifold protector RH.

FU-05097

9) Disconnect the fuel delivery hose (A) and evap-

oration hose (B).
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to spill fuel.
• Catch the fuel from hoses using a container
or cloth.
(1) Attach ST to the fuel delivery pipe and push
FU-04846 ST in the direction of arrow mark to disconnect
the quick connector of the fuel delivery hose
(A).
ST 42099AE000 QUICK CONNECTOR RE-
LEASE

FU(H4SO)-16
11LE_US.book 17 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Intake Manifold
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

(2) Remove the clip and disconnect the evapo- 16) Remove the connector (A) from the fuel injec-
ration hose (B) from the pipe. tor, and remove the fuel delivery pipe (B) from the
fuel gallery LH.
(A)
NOTE:
Disconnect the quick connector as shown in the fig-
ST
ure.

(B) (a)

FU-04950

10) Remove the generator cable clip (A) from the

intake manifold protector LH.
11) Remove the oil filler pipe (B) from the rocker (a)
cover LH.
12) Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose
(C).
(C)
(A)

(B)
FU-05483
FU-05098
(a) Slider
13) Disconnect the connector (A) from the ignition
coil of #2 cylinder.
14) Disconnect the PCV hose (B) from the rocker (B)
cover LH.
(A) (A)

FU-05100

(A)
(B) 17) Remove the clip (A) securing the engine har-
ness to the intake manifold, and remove the bolt (B)
FU-04850
securing the LH side of the multifunction duct as-
15) Remove the intake manifold protector LH. sembly.

(A)
(B)

FU-05099 FU-04853

FU(H4SO)-17
 Intake Manifold
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

18) Remove the bolts (A) which secure the RH side 2. MULTI-FUNCTION DUCT ASSEMBLY
of multi-function duct assembly to the intake mani- 1) Release the fuel pressure. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-
fold. 48, RELEASING OF FUEL PRESSURE, PROCE-
19) Remove the cap (B) from the intake manifold. DURE, Fuel.>
2) Disconnect the ground cable from battery.

(A)
(B)

FU-05701

20) Remove the intake manifold from cylinder IG-02107

head. 3) Open the fuel filler lid and remove the fuel filler
21) Remove the fuel gallery RH and fuel injector cap.
from the intake manifold. 4) Lift up the vehicle.
5) Remove the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35, RE-
MOVAL, Front Under Cover.>
6) Drain approximately 3.0 2 (3.2 US qt, 2.6 Imp
qt) of coolant. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-13, DRAINING
OF ENGINE COOLANT, REPLACEMENT, Engine
Coolant.>
7) Lower the vehicle.
8) Remove the intake manifold. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-16, INTAKE MANIFOLD, REMOVAL,
FU-04860 Intake Manifold.>
9) Remove the bolt, and disconnect the bulkhead
22) Remove the fuel gallery LH, fuel pipe and fuel
harness connector from the engine harness con-
injector from the intake manifold.
nector and rear engine hanger.

FU-05102
FU-03924

10) Slide the engine harness connector in the di-

rection of the arrow and remove it from the rear en-
gine hanger.

FU-05247

FU(H4SO)-18
11LE_US.book 19 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Intake Manifold
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

11) Disconnect the connector from the knock sen- 15) Disconnect the connectors from front oxygen
sor. (A/F) sensor (A) and rear oxygen sensor (B).
16) Disconnect the connector (C) from the ignition
coil of #1 cylinder.
17) Disconnect the connectors from oil switching
solenoid valve RH (D), oil temperature sensor RH
(E) and variable valve lift diagnosis switch (F), and
remove the bolt to detach the ground terminal (G).

(G)

(F) (A)
FU-05458
(E)
12) Disconnect the water hose (A) and EGR pipe
(B) from the LH side of multi-function duct assem- (D)
bly.

(B)
(A) (C) FU-05103

18) Slide the front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector

(B)
and rear oxygen sensor connector in the direction
of the arrow and remove them from the bracket.

FU-04855

13) Disconnect the PCV hose (A) and water hose

(B) from the RH side of multi-function duct assem-
bly.

FU-04857

19) Disconnect the connector from the ignition coil

(A) of #4 cylinder.
(B) 20) Disconnect the connectors from the oil switch-
ing solenoid valve LH (A) and camshaft position
sensor LH (B).
(A)
FU-04880

14) Disconnect the connectors from the engine

coolant temperature sensor (A), oil pressure switch
(B) and crankshaft position sensor (C).

(B)
(A)

(B) FU-04858

(C)

FU-04962

FU(H4SO)-19
11LE_US.book 20 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Intake Manifold
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

21) Remove the PCV pipe, multi-function duct as-

sembly and engine harness as a single unit from
the engine.

(a)

FU-04859

22) Remove the bolt (A) securing the multi-function

duct assembly to the PCV pipe, and remove the
multi-function duct assembly.
(a)
23) Remove the clip (B) securing the engine har-
ness to the PCV pipe, and remove the engine har-
ness.

FU-05484
(A)
(A)
(a) Slider

NOTE:
• Use a new gasket.
• If fuel hoses or clamps are damaged, replace
(B) them with new parts.

FU-04881
Tightening torque:
T1: 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
B: INSTALLATION T2: 19 N·m (1.9 kgf-m, 14.0 ft-lb)
1. INTAKE MANIFOLD
T1
Install in the reverse order of removal while being
careful of the following.
• Connect the quick connector as shown in the fig-
ure.
CAUTION:
• Check that there is no damage or dust on the T2 T2
quick connector. If necessary, clean the seal
surface of the pipe. FU-05104
• When connecting the quick connector, make
sure to insert the pipe all the way in before lock-
ing the slider.
• When it is difficult to lock the slider, check
that the pipe is fully inserted.
• Make sure that the quick connector is secure-
ly connected.

T2 T2

FU-04884

FU(H4SO)-20
11LE_US.book 21 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Intake Manifold
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

Tightening torque: Tightening torque:

6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb) 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)

FU-04927 FU-05107

2. MULTI-FUNCTION DUCT ASSEMBLY

Install in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
• Use a new gasket.
• The oil pressure switch harness must be posi-
tioned to be within the range of a 45° angle on ei-
ther left or right toward the rear of the vehicle.
Tightening torque:
FU-05106 1.5 N·m (0.2 kgf-m, 1.1 ft-lb)
Tightening torque:
25 N·m (2.5 kgf-m, 18.4 ft-lb)

45
(a)
45

FU-05471

(a) Front side of vehicle

FU-04846

FU-05099

FU(H4SO)-21
11LE_US.book 22 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Intake Manifold
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)

FU-04931

FU-04933

Tightening torque:
19 N·m (1.9 kgf-m, 14.0 ft-lb)

FU-04932

C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the intake manifold and fuel pipe
have no deformation, cracks and other damages.
2) Check that the hose has no cracks, damage or
loose part.

FU(H4SO)-22
 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

4. Engine Coolant Temperature

Sensor
A: REMOVAL
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery.
(A)

(B)

(C)

IG-02107

2) Remove the generator. <Ref. to SC(H4SO)-16,

REMOVAL, Generator.>
3) Drain engine coolant. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-13,
DRAINING OF ENGINE COOLANT, REPLACE-
MENT, Engine Coolant.> FU-04053
4) Disconnect the connector from the engine cool-
ant temperature sensor, and remove the engine (A) Thermometer
coolant temperature sensor. (B) Engine coolant temperature sensor
(C) Hexagonal part height: To approx.1/3

3) Raise water temperature gradually, measure the

resistance between the engine coolant tempera-
ture sensor terminals when the temperature is
20°C (68°F) and 80°C (176°F).
NOTE:
Agitate the water for even temperature distribution.

FU-04973

B: INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal. 2 1
NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
Tightening torque:
18 N·m (1.8 kgf-m, 13.3 ft-lb)
EC-02428
C: INSPECTION
Water temperature Terminal No. Standard
1) Check that the engine coolant temperature sen-
sor has no deformation, cracks or other damages. 20°C (68°F) 2.45+0.14 –0.13 kΩ
1 and 2
2) Immerse the engine coolant temperature sensor 80°C (176°F) 0.318±0.008 kΩ
and a thermometer in water.
CAUTION:
Take care not to allow water to get into the en-
gine coolant temperature sensor connector.
Completely remove any water inside.

FU(H4SO)-23
 Crankshaft Position Sensor
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

5. Crankshaft Position Sensor C: INSPECTION

A: REMOVAL 1. CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. (METHOD WITH CIRCUIT TESTER)
Measure the resistance between crankshaft posi-
tion sensor terminals.

2 1

IG-02107

2) Remove the bolt which secures crankshaft posi-

EC-02428
tion sensor to oil pump.
Terminal No. Standard
1 and 2 2.04±0.204 kΩ

2. CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR

(METHOD WITH OSCILLOSCOPE)
1) Prepare an oscilloscope.
2) Remove the glove box lid assembly. <Ref. to EI-
65, REMOVAL, Glove Box.>
3) Connect the probe to ECM connector.
FU-04974

3) Remove the crankshaft position sensor, and discon-

nect the connector from the crankshaft position sensor.

FU-04956

(A)

FU-04975 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
B: INSTALLATION 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18
31 30 29 28 27 26
Install in the reverse order of removal.
Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)

FU-04758

(A) To ECM connector

Terminal No. Probe

17 +
25 –

FU-04974 4) Start the engine and let it idle.

FU(H4SO)-24
11LE_US.book 25 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Crankshaft Position Sensor

FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

5) Check the pattern is the same as the waveform

and voltage shown below.

10ms

5V

(A)

FU-04057

(A) One crankshaft rotation

6) After inspection, install the related parts in the

reverse order of removal.
3. OTHER INSPECTIONS
Check that the crankshaft position sensor has no
deformation, cracks or other damages.

FU(H4SO)-25
 Camshaft Position Sensor
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

6. Camshaft Position Sensor 6) Remove the camshaft position sensor and the
camshaft position sensor support as a unit.
A: REMOVAL NOTE:
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. Slide in the arrowed direction until the camshaft po-
sition sensor contacts the rocker cover LH.

IG-02107

2) Disconnect the connector from camshaft posi- FU-05132

tion sensor. 7) Remove the camshaft position sensor from the

camshaft position sensor support.

FU-04890

3) Remove the ignition coil. (LH side only) <Ref. to FU-00179

IG(H4SO)-5, REMOVAL, Ignition Coil.> B: INSTALLATION
4) Remove the bolt which secures camshaft posi-
tion sensor to camshaft position sensor support. Install in the reverse order of removal.
Tightening torque:
Camshaft position sensor support
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
Camshaft position sensor
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)

FU-02724

5) Remove the bolt which secures camshaft posi-

tion sensor support to camshaft cap LH.

FU-02725

FU(H4SO)-26
 Camshaft Position Sensor
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

C: INSPECTION 2. OTHER INSPECTIONS

Check that the camshaft position sensor has no de-
1. CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (METH- formation, cracks or other damages.
OD WITH OSCILLOSCOPE)
1) Prepare an oscilloscope.
2) Remove the glove box lid assembly. <Ref. to EI-
65, REMOVAL, Glove Box.>
3) Connect the probe to ECM connector.

FU-04956

(A)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18
31 30 29 28 27 26

FU-04934

(A) To ECM connector

Terminal No. Probe

24 +
30 –

4) Start the engine and let it idle.

5) Check the pattern is the same as the waveform
and voltage shown below.

LH
0
(A)

RH
0
(A) 5V

40ms

FU-04209

(A) One camshaft rotation

6) After inspection, install the related parts in the

reverse order of removal.

FU(H4SO)-27
 Knock Sensor
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

7. Knock Sensor B: INSTALLATION

1) Install the knock sensor to the cylinder block.
A: REMOVAL
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. NOTE:
The portion of the knock sensor cord that is pulled
out must be positioned at a 60° angle relative to the
engine rear.
Tightening torque:
24 N·m (2.4 kgf-m, 17.7 ft-lb)

(A)

IG-02107

2) Remove the air intake boot assembly. <Ref. to

IN(H4SO)-8, REMOVAL, Air Intake Boot.>
60
3) Disconnect the knock sensor connector.
FU-02727

(A) Front side of vehicle

2) Connect the knock sensor connector.

FU-04698

4) Remove the knock sensor from cylinder block.

FU-04698

3) Install the air intake boot assembly. <Ref. to

IN(H4SO)-8, INSTALLATION, Air Intake Boot.>
4) Connect the ground cable to battery.

FU-02726

IG-02107

FU(H4SO)-28
11LE_US.book 29 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Knock Sensor
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the knock sensor has no deforma-
tion, cracks or other damages.
2) Measure the resistance between knock sensor
terminals.

2 1

EC-02426

Terminal No. Standard

1 and 2 560±28 kΩ

FU(H4SO)-29
 Throttle Position Sensor
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

8. Throttle Position Sensor

A: SPECIFICATION
Throttle body is a non-disassembled part, so do not
remove the throttle position sensor from throttle
body.
Refer to “Throttle Body” for removal and installation
procedure. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-15, REMOVAL,
Throttle Body.> <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-15, INSTAL-
LATION, Throttle Body.>

FU(H4SO)-30
11LE_US.book 31 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Mass Air Flow and Intake Air Temperature Sensor

FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

9. Mass Air Flow and Intake Air 2) Check the voltage changes when air is blown to
the mass air flow sensor unit in arrow direction.
Temperature Sensor
A: REMOVAL
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery.

FU-04063

2. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE

SENSOR UNIT
IG-02107 Measure the resistance between intake air temper-
2) Disconnect the connector from the mass air flow ature sensor terminals.
and intake air temperature sensor, and remove the
mass air flow and intake air temperature sensor.

5 4 3 2 1

FU-04064

FU-04699
Temperature Terminal No. Standard
–20°C (–4°F) 16.0±2.4 kΩ
B: INSTALLATION 20°C (68°F) 1 and 2 2.45±0.24 kΩ
Install in the reverse order of removal. 60°C (140°F) 0.58±0.087 kΩ
Tightening torque:
1 N·m (0.1 kgf-m, 0.7 ft-lb)
3. OTHER INSPECTIONS
1) Check that the mass air flow and intake air tem-
C: INSPECTION perature sensor has no deformation, cracks or oth-
er damages.
1. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR UNIT
2) Check that the mass air flow and intake air tem-
1) Connect the terminal No. 3 to the battery positive perature sensor has no dirt.
terminal and the terminal No. 4 to the battery
ground terminal, the circuit tester positive terminal
to terminal No. 5 and the circuit tester ground termi-
nal to terminal No. 4.

5 4 3 2 1

V
FU-04062

FU(H4SO)-31
 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

10.Manifold Absolute Pressure

Sensor
A: REMOVAL
3 2 1
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery.

IG-02107

2) Remove the air intake boot assembly. <Ref. to 1.5V 1.5V 1.5V
IN(H4SO)-8, REMOVAL, Air Intake Boot.>
3) Disconnect the connector from the manifold ab- 4.8 5.2V
solute pressure sensor and remove the manifold
absolute pressure sensor from throttle body. FU-04491

3) Connect the Mighty Vac to the pressure port (A)

of manifold absolute pressure sensor.

FU-04700

B: INSTALLATION (A)

Install in the reverse order of removal. FU-04492

NOTE: 4) Check the voltage when generating vacuum and

Use new O-rings. positive pressure using Mighty Vac.
CAUTION:
Tightening torque:
Do not apply vacuum of less than –88 kPa (–0.9
2 N·m (0.2 kgf-m, 1.5 ft-lb)
kgf/cm2, –12.8 psi). Doing so may damage the
C: INSPECTION manifold absolute pressure sensor.
1) Check that the manifold absolute pressure sen- NOTE:
sor has no deformation, cracks or other damages. When vacuum occurs at the pressure port of man-
2) Connect dry-cell battery positive terminal to ter- ifold absolute pressure sensor, the voltage will drop
minal No. 3 and dry-cell battery ground terminal to from the value as in step 3). When positive pres-
terminal No. 2, circuit tester ground terminal to ter- sure occurs, on the other hand, the voltage will rise.
minal No. 2 and the circuit tester positive terminal
Pressure Terminal No. Standard
to terminal No. 1.
–88 kPa (–0.9 kgf/cm2, Approx. 1 V
NOTE: –12.8 psi) (when 25°C (77°F))
• Use new dry-cell batteries. –35 kPa (–0.4 kgf/cm 2,
Approx. 2.6 V
2 (+) and 1 (–)
• Using circuit tester, check the voltage of a single –5.1 psi) (when 25°C (77°F))
dry-cell battery is 1.6 V or more. And also check the 19 kPa (–0.2 kgf/cm2, Approx. 4.2 V
voltage of three batteries in series is between 4.8 V 2.8 psi) (when 25°C (77°F))
and 5.2 V.

FU(H4SO)-32
 EGR Valve
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

11.EGR Valve C: INSPECTION

1) Check that the EGR valve has no deformation,
A: REMOVAL cracks or other damages.
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. 2) Measure the resistance between EGR valve ter-
minals.

3 2 1
6 5 4

IG-02107

2) Remove the multi-function duct assembly. <Ref. FU-04101

to FU(H4SO)-18, MULTI-FUNCTION DUCT AS-
Terminal No. Standard
SEMBLY, REMOVAL, Intake Manifold.>
3) Remove the EGR valve from the multi-function 2 and 1 22±2 Ω
duct assembly. 2 and 3 22±2 Ω
5 and 4 22±2 Ω
5 and 6 22±2 Ω

FU-04701

B: INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
Tightening torque:
19 N·m (1.9 kgf-m, 14.0 ft-lb)

FU(H4SO)-33
 Fuel Injector
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

12.Fuel Injector B: INSTALLATION

Install in the reverse order of removal.
A: REMOVAL
1) Release the fuel pressure. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)- NOTE:
48, RELEASING OF FUEL PRESSURE, PROCE- Use new O-rings, rubbers and seal rings.
DURE, Fuel.> Tightening torque:
2) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. 19 N·m (1.9 kgf-m, 14.0 ft-lb)

IG-02107 FU-04860
3) Open the fuel filler lid and remove the fuel filler C: INSPECTION
cap.
4) Remove the intake manifold. <Ref. to 1) Check that the fuel injector has no deformation,
FU(H4SO)-16, INTAKE MANIFOLD, REMOVAL, cracks or other damages.
Intake Manifold.> 2) Measure the resistance between fuel injector
5) Remove the bolts securing the fuel gallery to in- terminals.
take manifold.

2 1

EC-02428

FU-04860
Terminal No. Standard
6) Remove the fuel injector while lifting up the fuel Approx. 12.0 Ω
gallery. 1 and 2
(when 20°C (68°F))

FU-05133

FU(H4SO)-34
 Variable Valve Lift Diagnosis Oil Pressure Switch
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

13.Variable Valve Lift Diagnosis

Oil Pressure Switch
A: REMOVAL
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery.

IG-02107

2) Remove the air intake boot assembly. <Ref. to

IN(H4SO)-8, REMOVAL, Air Intake Boot.>
3) Disconnect the connector from the variable
valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch.
4) Remove the variable valve lift diagnosis oil pres-
sure switch.

FU-05108

B: INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
Apply liquid gasket to the variable valve lift diagno-
sis oil pressure switch threads.
Liquid gasket:
THREE BOND 1324 (Part No. 004403042) or
equivalent
Tightening torque:
17 N·m (1.7 kgf-m, 12.5 ft-lb)
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the variable valve lift diagnosis oil
pressure switch does not have deformation, cracks
or damage.
2) Check the variable valve lift diagnosis oil pres-
sure switch installation portion for oil leakage and
oil seepage.

FU(H4SO)-35
 Oil Temperature Sensor
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

14.Oil Temperature Sensor C: INSPECTION

1) Check that the oil temperature sensor has no de-
A: REMOVAL formation, cracks or other damages.
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. 2) Check the resistance between the oil tempera-
ture sensor terminals.

2 1

IG-02107

2) Remove the air intake boot assembly. <Ref. to EC-02428

IN(H4SO)-8, REMOVAL, Air Intake Boot.>
Terminal No. Standard
3) Disconnect the connector from oil temperature
sensor. 2.45±0.2
1 and 2
(when 20°C (68°F))
4) Remove the oil temperature sensor.

FU-04888

B: INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
Apply liquid gasket to the oil temperature sensor
threads.
Liquid gasket:
THREE BOND 1324 (Part No. 004403042) or
equivalent
Tightening torque:
18 N·m (1.8 kgf-m, 13.3 ft-lb)

FU-04888

FU(H4SO)-36
 Front Oxygen (A/F) Sensor
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

15.Front Oxygen (A/F) Sensor

A: REMOVAL (B)
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery.

(A)

FU-02735

(A) Front oxygen (A/F) sensor

(B) Rear oxygen sensor

IG-02107
B: INSTALLATION
2) Remove the air intake duct. <Ref. to IN(H4SO)-
9, REMOVAL, Air Intake Duct.> CAUTION:
3) Disconnect the front oxygen (A/F) sensor con- If lubricant is spilt onto the exhaust pipe, wipe it
nector, and remove the clip holding the front oxy- off completely with cloth to avoid emission of
gen (A/F) sensor harness. smoke or causing a fire.
1) Before installing front oxygen (A/F) sensor, ap-
ply anti-seize compound only to the threaded por-
tion of front oxygen (A/F) sensor to make the next
(B) removal easier.
(A)
CAUTION:
Never apply anti-seize compound to the protec-
tor of front oxygen (A/F) sensor.
Anti-seize compound:
NEVER-SEEZ NSN, JET LUBE SS-30 or
(C)
FU-04697 equivalent
2) Install the front oxygen (A/F) sensor.
(A) Front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector
(B) Rear oxygen sensor connector Tightening torque:
(C) Clip
21 N·m (2.1 kgf-m, 15.5 ft-lb)

4) Lift up the vehicle.

5) Remove the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35, RE- (B)
MOVAL, Front Under Cover.>
6) Apply spray-type lubricant to the threaded por-
tion of front oxygen (A/F) sensor, and leave it for
one minute or more.
7) Remove the front oxygen (A/F) sensor.
(A)
CAUTION:
When removing the front oxygen (A/F) sensor, FU-02735
wait until exhaust pipe cools, otherwise it will
(A) Front oxygen (A/F) sensor
damage the exhaust pipe.
(B) Rear oxygen sensor

FU(H4SO)-37
 Front Oxygen (A/F) Sensor
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

3) Install the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35, INSTAL-

LATION, Front Under Cover.>
4) Lower the vehicle.
5) Connect the front oxygen (A/F) sensor connec-
tor, and secure the front oxygen (A/F) sensor har-
ness by using the clip.

(B)
(A)

(C)
FU-04697

(A) Front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector

(B) Rear oxygen sensor connector
(C) Clip

6) Install the air intake duct. <Ref. to IN(H4SO)-9,

INSTALLATION, Air Intake Duct.>
7) Connect the battery ground terminal.

IG-02107

C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the front oxygen (A/F) sensor has no
deformation, cracks or other damages.
2) Measure the resistance between front oxygen
(A/F) sensor terminals.

1 2
3 4

FU-04937

Terminal No. Standard

2.4±0.24 Ω
3 and 4
(when 20°C (68°F))

FU(H4SO)-38
 Rear Oxygen Sensor
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

16.Rear Oxygen Sensor

A: REMOVAL (B)
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery.

(A)

FU-02735

(A) Front oxygen (A/F) sensor

(B) Rear oxygen sensor

IG-02107
B: INSTALLATION
2) Remove the air intake duct. <Ref. to IN(H4SO)-
9, REMOVAL, Air Intake Duct.> CAUTION:
3) Disconnect the rear oxygen sensor connector, If lubricant is spilt onto the exhaust pipe, wipe it
and remove the clip holding the rear oxygen sensor off completely with cloth to avoid emission of
harness. smoke or causing a fire.
1) Before installing rear oxygen sensor, apply the
anti-seize compound only to the threaded portion of
rear oxygen sensor to make the next removal eas-
(B) ier.
(A)
CAUTION:
Never apply anti-seize compound to the protec-
tor of rear oxygen sensor.
Anti-seize compound:
NEVER-SEEZ NSN, JET LUBE SS-30 or
(C)
FU-04697 equivalent
2) Install the rear oxygen sensor.
(A) Front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector
(B) Rear oxygen sensor connector Tightening torque:
(C) Clip
21 N·m (2.1 kgf-m, 15.5 ft-lb)

4) Lift up the vehicle.

5) Remove the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35, RE- (B)
MOVAL, Front Under Cover.>
6) Apply spray-type lubricant to the threaded por-
tion of rear oxygen sensor, and leave it for one
minute or more.
7) Remove the rear oxygen sensor.
(A)
CAUTION:
When removing the rear oxygen sensor, wait FU-02735
until exhaust pipe cools, otherwise it will dam-
(A) Front oxygen (A/F) sensor
age the exhaust pipe.
(B) Rear oxygen sensor

FU(H4SO)-39
 Rear Oxygen Sensor
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

3) Install the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35, INSTAL-

LATION, Front Under Cover.>
4) Lower the vehicle.
5) Connect the rear oxygen sensor connector, and
hold the rear oxygen sensor harness with the clip.

(B)
(A)

(C)
FU-04697

(A) Front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector

(B) Rear oxygen sensor connector
(C) Clip

6) Install the air intake duct. <Ref. to IN(H4SO)-9,

INSTALLATION, Air Intake Duct.>
7) Connect the battery ground terminal.

IG-02107

C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the rear oxygen sensor has no defor-
mation, cracks or other damages.
2) Measure the resistance between rear oxygen
sensor terminals.

2 1
4 3

FU-04073

Terminal No. Standard

5.6+1.7 –0.6 Ω
1 and 2
(when 20°C (68°F))

FU(H4SO)-40
 Engine Control Module (ECM)
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

17.Engine Control Module (ECM) B: INSTALLATION

Install in the reverse order of removal.
A: REMOVAL
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. CAUTION:
• When the ECM of model with immobilizer has
been replaced, be sure to perform the registra-
tion of immobilizer system. (Refer to “PC appli-
cation help for Subaru Select Monitor”.)
• If replacing ECM or the bracket, replace both
parts with new parts at a time.
• After installing the bracket to ECM, do not
separate the bracket.
• If the bracket has been installed to ECM in the
wrong direction, replace both parts to new
IG-02107 parts.
2) Remove the glove box lid assembly. <Ref. to EI- NOTE:
65, REMOVAL, Glove Box.> When replacing the ECM, be careful not to use the
3) Remove the connectors from ECM. wrong spec. ECM to avoid any damage on the fuel
injection system.
C: INSPECTION
Check that the ECM has no deformation, cracks or
other damages.

FU-04984

4) Remove the ECM from vehicle.

FU-04985

FU(H4SO)-41
 Main Relay
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

18.Main Relay C: INSPECTION

1) Check that the main relay has no deformation,
A: REMOVAL cracks or other damages.
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. 2) Measure the resistance between main relay ter-
minals.

(1)

(2) (1)
(2)

(3) (4)

(3) (4)
IG-02107

2) Remove the glove box lid assembly. <Ref. to EI-

65, REMOVAL, Glove Box.>
3) Remove the main relay from the relay holder.
1
2
3 4

IN-02836

FU-04986
Terminal No. Standard
B: INSTALLATION 1 and 2 1 MΩ or more
130.4 — 230.8 Ω
Install in the reverse order of removal. 3 and 4
(when 20°C (68°F))

FU(H4SO)-42
11LE_US.book 43 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Main Relay
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

3) Connect terminal No. 3 to battery positive termi-

nal and terminal No. 4 to the battery ground termi-
nal, and check the resistance between the main
relay terminals.

(1)

(2) (1)
(2)

(3) (4)

(3) (4)

1
2
3 4

FU-04077

Terminal No. Standard

1 and 2 Less than 1 Ω

FU(H4SO)-43
 Fuel Pump Relay
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

19.Fuel Pump Relay C: INSPECTION

1) Check that the fuel pump relay has no deforma-
A: REMOVAL tion, cracks or other damages.
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. 2) Measure the resistance between fuel pump relay
terminals.

(1)

(2) (1)
(2)

(3) (4)

(3) (4)
IG-02107

2) Remove the glove box lid assembly. <Ref. to EI-

65, REMOVAL, Glove Box.>
3) Remove the fuel pump relay from the relay hold-
er. 1
2
3 4

IN-02836

Terminal No. Standard

FU-04987
1 and 2 1 MΩ or more
B: INSTALLATION 93.8 — 136.4 Ω
3 and 4
(when 20°C (68°F))
Install in the reverse order of removal.

FU(H4SO)-44
11LE_US.book 45 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Fuel Pump Relay

FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

3) Connect terminal No. 3 to battery positive termi-

nal and terminal No. 4 to the battery ground termi-
nal, and check the resistance between the fuel
pump relay terminals.

(1)

(2) (1)
(2)

(3) (4)

(3) (4)

1
2
3 4

FU-04077

Terminal No. Standard

1 and 2 Less than 1 Ω

FU(H4SO)-45
 Electronic Throttle Control Relay
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

20.Electronic Throttle Control C: INSPECTION

Relay 1) Check that the electronic throttle control relay
has no deformation, cracks or other damages.
A: REMOVAL 2) Measure the resistance between electronic
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. throttle control relay terminals.

(1)

(2) (1)
(2)

(3) (4)

(3) (4)

IG-02107

2) Remove the glove box lid assembly. <Ref. to EI-

65, REMOVAL, Glove Box.>
3) Remove the electronic throttle control relay from
1
the relay holder. 2
3 4

IN-02836

Terminal No. Standard

1 and 2 1 MΩ or more
FU-04988
93.8 — 136.4 Ω
3 and 4
(when 20°C (68°F))
B: INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.

FU(H4SO)-46
11LE_US.book 47 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Electronic Throttle Control Relay

FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

3) Connect terminal No. 3 to battery positive termi-

nal and terminal No. 4 to the battery ground termi-
nal, and check the resistance between the
electronic throttle control relay terminals.

(1)

(2) (1)
(2)

(3) (4)

(3) (4)

1
2
3 4

FU-04077

Terminal No. Standard

1 and 2 Less than 1 Ω

FU(H4SO)-47
 Fuel
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

21.Fuel 2) Attach ST to the fuel delivery pipe and push ST

in the direction of arrow mark to disconnect the fuel
A: PROCEDURE delivery hose.
ST 42099AE000 QUICK CONNECTOR RE-
1. RELEASING OF FUEL PRESSURE LEASE
WARNING: CAUTION:
Place “NO OPEN FLAMES” signs near the • Be careful not to spill fuel.
working area. • Catch the fuel from hoses using a container
CAUTION: or cloth.
Be careful not to spill fuel.
1) Remove the fuse of fuel pump from main fuse
box.
ST

FU-04949

3) Connect ST to the fuel delivery hose.

ST 18471AA000 FUEL PIPE ADAPTER
FU-04800 4) Connect the gasoline proof hose to ST and put
2) Start the engine and run it until it stalls. the end of the hose in the container.
3) After the engine stalls, crank it for five more sec- 5) Drive the fuel pump and drain the fuel using Sub-
onds. aru Select Monitor. (Refer to “PC application help
4) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. for Subaru Select Monitor”.)
5) Install the fuse of fuel pump to the main fuse box. CAUTION:
2. DRAINING FUEL (WITH SUBARU SE- Be careful not to spill fuel.
LECT MONITOR) 6) Install the related parts in the reverse order after
draining the fuel.
WARNING:
Place “NO OPEN FLAMES” signs near the 3. DRAINING FUEL (THROUGH THE FUEL
working area. FILLER HOSE)
CAUTION: WARNING:
Be careful not to spill fuel. Place “NO OPEN FLAMES” signs near the
working area.
NOTE:
• If the fuel pump cannot be driven, refer to the CAUTION:
procedures for draining from the fuel filler hose. • Be careful not to spill fuel.
<Ref. to FU(H4SO)-48, DRAINING FUEL • Fuel may remain in the fuel filler pipe. Drain-
(THROUGH THE FUEL FILLER HOSE), PROCE- ing the fuel from the fuel filler pipe through the
DURE, Fuel.> fill opening using the gasoline proof pump and
• Be careful not to let the battery run-out. the gasoline proof hose (ø10 or less) before the
1) Release the fuel pressure. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)- operation.
48, RELEASING OF FUEL PRESSURE, PROCE- 1) Lift up the vehicle.
DURE, Fuel.> 2) Remove the rear exhaust pipe and muffler.
<Ref. to EX(H4SO)-8, REMOVAL, Rear Exhaust
Pipe.> <Ref. to EX(H4SO)-10, REMOVAL, Muf-
fler.>

FU(H4SO)-48
11LE_US.book 49 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Fuel
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

3) Open the fuel filler lid and remove the fuel filler
cap.
4) Drain the fuel from the fuel filler pipe through the
filler opening using the gasoline proof pump and
the gasoline proof hose (ø10 or less).
5) Disconnect the fuel filler hoses from the fuel filler
pipe.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to spill fuel.
• Catch the fuel from hoses using a container
or cloth.

FU-04803

6) Set the container under the vehicle and insert

the gasoline proof hose (ø10 or less) into the fuel
filler hose to drain the fuel.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to spill fuel.
7) Install the related parts in the reverse order after
draining the fuel.
Tightening torque:
2.5 N·m (0.3 kgf-m, 1.8 ft-lb)

FU(H4SO)-49
 Fuel Tank
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

22.Fuel Tank (3) Push the grommet (D) down and remove the
service hole cover.
A: REMOVAL (C)

WARNING:
Place “NO OPEN FLAMES” signs near the
working area. (D)

CAUTION:
Be careful not to spill fuel. (B)
1) Release the fuel pressure. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-
48, RELEASING OF FUEL PRESSURE, PROCE- (C)
DURE, Fuel.> (A) FU-04991
2) Drain fuel. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-48, DRAINING
FUEL (WITH SUBARU SELECT MONITOR), 7) Remove the service hole cover of fuel sub level
PROCEDURE, Fuel.> sensor.
3) Disconnect the ground cable from battery.

FU-05070
IG-02107 8) Disconnect the quick connector on the fuel deliv-
4) Remove the rear seat cushion. <Ref. to SE-32, ery tube (A). <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-68, REMOVAL,
REMOVAL, Rear Seat.> Fuel Delivery and Evaporation Lines.>
5) Remove the clips (A) and seat cushion hooks (A)
(B), and turn over the floor mat (C).

(C)

FU-05069

(B) (A) (A)

(B) 9) Remove the rear wheels.
FU-04990 10) Lift up the vehicle.
6) Remove the service hole cover of fuel pump. 11) Remove the rear ABS wheel speed sensor
(1) Disconnect the fuel cord connector (A), and from the rear housing.
remove the clip (B).
(2) Remove the screw (C).

FU-04994

FU(H4SO)-50
 Fuel Tank
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

12) Remove the rear ABS wheel speed sensor har- 15) Remove the parking brake cable from parking
ness bracket from the upper arm. brake assembly. <Ref. to PB-9, REMOVAL, Park-
ing Brake Assembly (Rear Disc Brake).>
16) Remove the rear exhaust pipe and muffler.
<Ref. to EX(H4SO)-8, REMOVAL, Rear Exhaust
Pipe.> <Ref. to EX(H4SO)-10, REMOVAL, Muf-
fler.>
17) Remove the heat shield cover.

FU-04087

13) Remove the rear brake hose bracket from rear

housing.

(A)

DS-00472

(A) Heat shield cover

18) Remove the propeller shaft. <Ref. to DS-10,

REMOVAL, Propeller Shaft.>
19) Remove the clip (A) securing the fuel tank pro-
FU-04995 tector and heat shield cover.
20) Remove the bolts (B) and nuts (C) securing the
14) Remove the rear disc brake assembly and tie it fuel tank protector, and remove the fuel tank pro-
to the body side of the vehicle. tector.
(B)

(B) (B)

(C) (C)

(A)

FU-05655

21) Remove the bolts and nuts securing the heat

shield cover and remove the heat shield cover.

FU-04996

FU-05656

FU(H4SO)-51
11LE_US.book 52 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Fuel Tank
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

22) Remove the rear suspension assembly. 1

WARNING: 2
A helper is required to perform this work.
(1) Support the rear differential with the trans-
mission jack.
(2) Remove the bolt and nut which secures rear
shock absorber to rear suspension arm.

1 FU-05002

FU-03359

(3) Remove the bolts which secure the rear

suspension assembly to the body.
FU-05003

25) Disconnect the fuel filler hose (A) and circulate

hose (B) from the fuel filler pipe assembly.

(B)

FU-04999

(4) Remove the rear suspension assembly. (A)

23) Disconnect the air vent hose from the fuel tank.
FU-05149

26) Support the fuel tank with a transmission jack,

remove the bolts from the fuel tank band, and re-
move the fuel tank from the vehicle.
WARNING:
• A helper is required to perform this work.
• Fuel may remain in the fuel tank. This will
cause the left and right sides to be unbalanced.
Be careful not to drop the fuel tank.
FU-05083

24) Disconnect the quick connector of the circulate

tube from evaporation pipe.
NOTE:
Disconnect the quick connector as shown in the fig-
ure.

FU-05004

FU(H4SO)-52
11LE_US.book 53 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Fuel Tank
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

B: INSTALLATION 3) Connect the quick connector of the circulate

tube to the evaporation pipe as shown in the figure.
1) Support the fuel tank with a transmission jack,
set the fuel tank in place, and temporarily tighten CAUTION:
the bolts of the fuel tank band. • Check that there is no damage or dust on the
WARNING: quick connector. If necessary, clean the seal
surface of the pipe.
A helper is required to perform this work.
• Make sure that the quick connector is secure-
ly connected.

FU-05004

2) Securely insert the fuel filler hose (A) and circu- FU-05036
late hose (B) to the spool, then attach the clamp or
clip as shown in the figure.
Tightening torque:
2.5 N·m (0.3 kgf-m, 1.8 ft-lb)

(B)

FU-05003

4) Connect the air vent hose to fuel tank.

(A)

FU-05149

(2) (3) (4)

(1)

FU-05083
L/2

L
FU-05646

(1) Hose
(2) Clamp or clip
(3) Spool
(4) Pipe

FU(H4SO)-53
11LE_US.book 54 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Fuel Tank
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

5) Move the fuel tank so that the distance between 6) Install the rear suspension assembly.
the center of the positioning hole for the body (A) WARNING:
and the front end of the fuel tank flange (B) be-
A helper is required to perform this work.
comes L, and tighten the bolts of the fuel tank
(1) Support the rear differential with the trans-
bands in the sequence shown in the figure.
mission jack.
CAUTION: (2) Support the rear suspension assembly and
To prevent the fuel tank from damage, after install the rear suspension assembly to the
tightening the bolts of the fuel tank bands, body.
make sure that the distance between the center
of the positioning hole for the body (A) and the Tightening torque:
front end of the fuel tank flange (B) is L. T1: 70 N·m (7.1 kgf-m, 51.6 ft-lb)
T2: 200 N·m (20.4 kgf-m, 147.5 ft-lb)
Distance L: Center of the positioning hole for
the body (A) — Front end of the fuel tank flange
(B)
14.5 mm (0.571 in) or less
T2 T2
Tightening torque:
33 N·m (3.4 kgf-m, 24.3 ft-lb)

T1 T1
(A)
L
(B) FU-05006

(3) Install the rear shock absorber to the rear

suspension arm.
NOTE:
Use a new self-locking nut.
Tightening torque:
120 N·m (12.2 kgf-m, 88.5 ft-lb)
1 2

3 4

FU-05585 FU-03359

7) Install the heat shield cover.

Tightening torque:
18 N·m (1.8 kgf-m, 13.3 ft-lb)

FU-05656

FU(H4SO)-54
 Fuel Tank
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

8) Install the bolts (B) and nuts (C) securing the fuel 14) Install the rear brake hose bracket to the rear
tank protector and install the clip (A) securing the housing.
fuel tank protector and heat shield cover.
Tightening torque:
Tightening torque: 33 N·m (3.4 kgf-m, 24.3 ft-lb)
Nut (C): 9 N·m (0.9 kgf-m, 6.6 ft-lb)
Bolt (B): 18 N·m (1.8 kgf-m, 13.3 ft-lb)
(B)

(B) (B)

(C) (C)

(A)

FU-04995

15) Install the rear ABS wheel speed sensor har-

FU-05655 ness bracket to the upper arm.
9) Install the propeller shaft. <Ref. to DS-11, IN-
Tightening torque:
STALLATION, Propeller Shaft.>
7.5 N·m (0.8 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb)
10) Install the rear exhaust pipe and muffler. <Ref.
to EX(H4SO)-8, INSTALLATION, Rear Exhaust
Pipe.> <Ref. to EX(H4SO)-10, INSTALLATION,
Muffler.>
11) Lower the vehicle.
12) Connect the parking brake cable to the parking
brake assembly. <Ref. to PB-12, INSTALLATION,
Parking Brake Assembly (Rear Disc Brake).>
13) Install the rear disc brake assembly.
Tightening torque:
FU-04087
66 N·m (6.7 kgf-m, 48.7 ft-lb)
16) Attach the rear ABS wheel speed sensor to the
rear housing.
Tightening torque:
7.5 N·m (0.8 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb)

FU-04546

FU-04994

FU(H4SO)-55
 Fuel Tank
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

17) Install the rear wheels. 21) Set the floor mat (C), and install clips (A) and
seat cushion hooks (B).
Tightening torque:
120 N·m (12.2 kgf-m, 88.5 ft-lb)
18) Connect the quick connector of the fuel delivery
tube (A). <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-71, INSTALLATION,
Fuel Delivery and Evaporation Lines.>
(A)
(C)

(B)
(B) (A) (A)
FU-04990

22) Install the rear seat cushion. <Ref. to SE-47,

INSTALLATION, Rear Seat.>
23) Connect the battery ground terminal.
FU-05069

19) Install the service hole cover of fuel sub level

sensor.

IG-02107

24) Inspect the wheel alignment and adjust if nec-

essary.
FU-05070
C: INSPECTION
20) Attach the service hole cover of the fuel pump, 1) Check that the fuel tank and fuel pipe have no
and attach the connector and clip. deformation, cracks and other damages.
(C) 2) Check that the fuel hose has no cracks, damage
or loose part.

(D)

(B)

(C)
(A) FU-04991

(A) Connector
(B) Clip
(C) Screw
(D) Grommet

FU(H4SO)-56
 Fuel Filler Pipe
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

23.Fuel Filler Pipe 10) Disconnect the fuel filler hose (A) and circulate
hose (B) from the fuel filler pipe assembly.
A: REMOVAL
WARNING: (B)
Place “NO OPEN FLAMES” signs near the
working area.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to spill fuel.
1) Release the fuel pressure. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)- (A)
48, RELEASING OF FUEL PRESSURE, PROCE-
DURE, Fuel.>
FU-05149
2) Drain fuel. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-48, DRAINING
FUEL (WITH SUBARU SELECT MONITOR), 11) Disconnect the evaporation hose (A) from fuel
PROCEDURE, Fuel.> filler pipe assembly and remove the bolts and nuts
3) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. securing the fuel filler pipe assembly to the vehicle
body.

(A)

IG-02107

4) Open the fuel filler lid, and remove the filler cap.
5) Turn the fuel filler pipe protector in the direction
of the arrow to unlock and remove it.

FU-05150

FU-04044 12) Remove the fuel filler pipe assembly from the
underside of the vehicle.
6) Remove the rear wheel RH.
7) Lift up the vehicle.
8) Remove the rear mud guard RH. <Ref. to EI-38,
REMOVAL, Mud Guard.>
9) Remove the rear sub frame. <Ref. to RS-16, RE-
MOVAL, Rear Sub Frame.>

FU(H4SO)-57
 Fuel Filler Pipe
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

B: INSTALLATION 5) Securely insert the fuel filler hose (A) and circu-
late hose (B) to the spool, then attach the clamp or
1) Open the fuel filler lid.
clip as shown in the figure.
2) Insert the fuel filler pipe assembly into the rubber
saucer from inside of the rear fender. Tightening torque:
3) Install the fuel filler pipe assembly to the vehicle 2.5 N·m (0.3 kgf-m, 1.8 ft-lb)
body and connect the evaporation hose (A) to the
fuel filler pipe assembly.
(B)
Tightening torque:
7.5 N·m (0.8 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb)

(A) (A)

FU-05149

(2) (3) (4)

(1)

L/2

L
FU-05646

(1) Hose
(2) Clamp or clip
(3) Spool
FU-05150 (4) Pipe
4) Align the cutout on the fuel filler pipe protector
6) Install the rear sub frame. <Ref. to RS-18, IN-
and the protrusion of the neck holder and insert
STALLATION, Rear Sub Frame.>
them all the way, and then turn the fuel filler pipe
7) Install the rear mud guard RH. <Ref. to EI-38, IN-
protector in the direction of the arrow until it is
STALLATION, Mud Guard.>
locked.
8) Lower the vehicle.
9) Install the rear wheel RH.
Tightening torque:
120 N·m (12.2 kgf-m, 88.5 ft-lb)
10) Connect the battery ground terminal.

FU-04104

IG-02107

11) Inspect the wheel alignment and adjust if nec-

essary.

FU(H4SO)-58
11LE_US.book 59 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Fuel Filler Pipe

FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

C: DISASSEMBLY E: INSPECTION
Remove the fuel filler pipe bracket from the fuel fill- 1) Check that the fuel filler pipe does not have de-
er pipe. formation, cracks or other damages.
2) Check that the fuel hose has no cracks, damage
or loose part.

FU-05009

D: ASSEMBLY
Install the fuel filler pipe bracket to the fuel filler
pipe.
Tightening torque:
7.35 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 5.4 ft-lb)

FU-05009

FU(H4SO)-59
 Fuel Pump
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

24.Fuel Pump 6) Remove the service hole cover.

(1) Disconnect the fuel cord connector (A), and
A: REMOVAL remove the clip (B).
WARNING: (2) Remove the screw (C).
Place “NO OPEN FLAMES” signs near the (3) Push the grommet (D) down and remove the
working area. service hole cover.
(C)
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to spill fuel.
• If the fuel gauge indicates that two thirds or
(D)
more of the fuel is remaining, be sure to drain
fuel before starting work to avoid the fuel to
spill. (B)
NOTE:
Fuel pump assembly consists of fuel pump, fuel fil- (C)
ter, fuel chamber and fuel level sensor. (A) FU-04991
1) Release the fuel pressure. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-
48, RELEASING OF FUEL PRESSURE, PROCE- 7) Disconnect the connector (A) from fuel pump,
DURE, Fuel.> and remove the clip (B) securing the harness.
2) Drain fuel. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-48, DRAINING 8) Disconnect the quick connector of fuel delivery
FUEL (WITH SUBARU SELECT MONITOR), tube (C) and fuel sub delivery tube (D). <Ref. to
PROCEDURE, Fuel.> FU(H4SO)-68, REMOVAL, Fuel Delivery and
3) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. Evaporation Lines.>

(D)

(C)

(A)

(B)
FU-05063
IG-02107

4) Remove the rear seat cushion. <Ref. to SE-32, 9) Remove the nuts securing the fuel pump upper
REMOVAL, Rear Seat.> plate to the fuel tank and remove the fuel pump up-
5) Remove the clips (A) and seat cushion hooks per plate.
(B), and turn over the floor mat (C).

(C)

FU-04534
(B)
(B) (A) (A) 10) Remove the fuel pump assembly from the fuel
FU-04990
tank.

FU(H4SO)-60
11LE_US.book 61 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Fuel Pump
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

B: INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal while being
careful of the following.
• Make sure the sealing portion is free from fuel or
foreign matter before installation.
• Align protrusion (A) of the gasket to the position
shown in the figure.
• Insert the protrusion (B) of gasket to the fuel
pump upper plate. (3 places)
• Align the protrusion (C) of fuel pump assembly
with the cutout on the fuel pump upper plate.
• Tighten the nuts to the specified torque in the or-
der as shown in the figure.
NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
Tightening torque:
4.4 N·m (0.4 kgf-m, 3.2 ft-lb)
(C)
2
4 7
(B) (B)

6 5

(a) 8 3

1 (A)
(B) FU-05064

(a) Front side of vehicle

C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the fuel pump has no deformation,
cracks or other damages.
2) Connect terminal No. 5 to battery positive termi-
nal and No. 6 terminal to the battery ground termi-
nal, and inspect the fuel pump operation.
WARNING:
• Wipe off fuel completely.
• Keep the battery as far apart from fuel pump
as possible.
• Do not run the fuel pump for a long time un-
der non-load condition.

2 1
4 3
6 5

FU-04110

FU(H4SO)-61
 Fuel Level Sensor
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

25.Fuel Level Sensor 4) Press two claws (A) of the fuel level sensor, and
slide the fuel level sensor in the direction of the ar-
A: REMOVAL row to remove the fuel level sensor.
WARNING:
Place “NO OPEN FLAMES” signs near the
working area. (A) (A)

CAUTION:
• Be careful not to spill fuel.
• If the fuel gauge indicates that two thirds or
more of the fuel is remaining, be sure to drain
fuel before starting work to avoid the fuel to
spill.
FU-05015
NOTE:
The fuel level sensor is built in fuel pump assembly. B: INSTALLATION
1) Remove the fuel pump assembly. <Ref. to Install in the reverse order of removal.
FU(H4SO)-60, REMOVAL, Fuel Pump.>
2) Disconnect the fuel level sensor connector from
the fuel filter assembly.

FU-05065

3) Remove the harness from the hooks (A) on the

fuel chamber assembly and remove the fuel tem-
perature sensor (B) from fuel chamber assembly.

(A)
(B)

FU-05066

FU(H4SO)-62
11LE_US.book 63 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Fuel Level Sensor

FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

C: INSPECTION 3) Measure the resistance between fuel level sen-

sor terminals.
1) Check that the fuel level sensor has no damage.
• Model with fuel level sensor bent in 3 locations
2) Measure the fuel level sensor float position.
NOTE:
When inspecting the fuel level sensor, perform the
work with the sensor installed to the fuel pump.
• Model with fuel level sensor bent in 3 locations (A)

(1)
(B)

(A)

(2) 2 1
(3)
(B) 4 3
FU-05067 6 5

(1) FULL
(2) EMPTY
(3) Fuel tank seating surface

Float position Standard FU-05068

FULL to Fuel tank seating 126.4±4 mm
surface (A) (4.976±0.157 in)
• Model with fuel level sensor bent in 2 locations
EMPTY to Fuel tank seating 11.0±4 mm
surface (B) (0.433±0.157 in)

• Model with fuel level sensor bent in 2 locations

(A)

(1)
(B)

(A)

(2)
(3) 2 1
(B)
FU-08401 4 3
6 5
(1) FULL
(2) EMPTY
(3) Fuel tank seating surface

Float position Standard

FULL to Fuel tank seating 120.9±4 mm FU-08402
surface (A) (4.759±0.157 in)
Float position Terminal No. Standard
EMPTY to Fuel tank seating
surface (B)
14.8±4 mm (0.583±0.157 in) FULL (A) 2.0+0.5 –1.0 Ω
1 and 4
EMPTY (B) 31.9±1.0 Ω

FU(H4SO)-63
 Fuel Sub Level Sensor
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

26.Fuel Sub Level Sensor 6) Disconnect the connector (A) from fuel sub level
sensor, and remove the clip (B) securing the fuel
A: REMOVAL cord from fuel sub level sensor protector.
WARNING:
Place “NO OPEN FLAMES” signs near the
working area.
CAUTION: (B) (A)
• Be careful not to spill fuel.
• If the fuel gauge indicates that two thirds or
more of the fuel is remaining, be sure to drain
fuel before starting work to avoid the fuel to
spill.
FU-05071
1) Release the fuel pressure. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-
48, RELEASING OF FUEL PRESSURE, PROCE- 7) Remove the bolts (A) securing the fuel sub level
DURE, Fuel.> sensor protector to the fuel sub level sensor upper
2) Drain fuel. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-48, DRAINING plate, and remove the fuel sub level sensor protec-
FUEL (WITH SUBARU SELECT MONITOR), tor.
PROCEDURE, Fuel.> 8) Disconnect the quick connector on the fuel sub
3) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. delivery tube (B). <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-68, REMOV-
AL, Fuel Delivery and Evaporation Lines.>
(A)

(B)

IG-02107
FU-05072
4) Remove the rear seat cushion. <Ref. to SE-32,
REMOVAL, Rear Seat.> 9) Remove the nuts securing the fuel sub level sen-
5) Remove the service hole cover. sor upper plate to the fuel tank and remove the fuel
sub level sensor upper plate.

FU-05070
FU-04569

10) Remove the fuel sub level sensor from the fuel
tank.

FU(H4SO)-64
11LE_US.book 65 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Fuel Sub Level Sensor

FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

B: INSTALLATION C: INSPECTION
Install in the reverse order of removal while being 1) Check that the fuel sub level sensor has no dam-
careful of the following. age.
• Make sure the sealing portion is free from fuel or 2) Measure the fuel sub level sensor float position.
foreign matter before installation.
• Align protrusion (A) of the gasket to the position (A)
(1) (3)
shown in the figure.
• Align protrusion (B) of the fuel sub level sensor to
the cutout in the fuel sub level sensor upper plate.
• After tightening the bolts to the specified torque (B)
in the order indicated in the figure, install the fuel
sub level sensor protector.
NOTE: (2)
Use a new gasket. FU-04213

Tightening torque: (1) FULL

4.4 N·m (0.4 kgf-m, 3.2 ft-lb) (2) EMPTY
4 (3) Datum points
2
Float position Standard
6
6.4±3.5 mm
FULL to Datum point (A)
(0.252±0.138 in)
5
163.3±3.5 mm
EMPTY to Datum point (B)
(6.429±0.138 in)
(a) 1 (B)
3
3) Measure the resistance between fuel sub level
(A)
FU-04533 sensor terminals.
(a) Front side of vehicle
(A)

(B)

FU-05073

2 1

FU-04214

Float position Terminal No. Standard

FULL (A) 2.0+0.5 –1.0 Ω
1 and 2
EMPTY (B) 62.1±1.0 Ω

FU(H4SO)-65
 Fuel Filter
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

27.Fuel Filter 5) Remove the fuel pump holder from the fuel filter
assembly.
A: REMOVAL
WARNING:
Place “NO OPEN FLAMES” signs near the
working area.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to spill fuel.
• If the fuel gauge indicates that two thirds or
more of the fuel is remaining, be sure to drain
fuel before starting work to avoid the fuel to
FU-05023
spill.
• Be careful not to drop or apply any impact to 6) Remove the fuel pump from the fuel filter assem-
the fuel pump during work. This may deterio- bly.
rate its performance.
NOTE:
The fuel filter is built in fuel pump assembly.
1) Remove the fuel pump assembly. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-60, REMOVAL, Fuel Pump.>
2) Remove the fuel level sensor and fuel tempera-
ture sensor. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-62, REMOVAL,
Fuel Level Sensor.>
3) Disconnect the connector from the fuel filter as-
sembly.

FU-05074
FU-05024
4) Disengage the claw connecting the fuel filter as-
sembly and fuel chamber assembly, and separate
fuel filter assembly and fuel chamber assembly.

FU-05075

FU(H4SO)-66
 Fuel Filter
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

B: INSTALLATION
1) Assemble the gasket spacer (A) and support
rubber cushion (B) to the fuel pump, and install the
fuel pump to the fuel filter assembly. (B)

NOTE:
• Use a new gasket spacer.
• Use a new support rubber cushion.
• Apply gasoline to the surface of gasket spacer
and support rubber cushion.

(A)
(B) (A)

(A)
FU-03889

FU-05025
FU-05075
2) Install the fuel pump holder to the fuel filter as-
sembly. 4) Connect the fuel pump connector.

FU-03886 FU-05074

3) Install the pump module spring (A) to fuel filter 5) Install the fuel level sensor and fuel temperature
assembly, and install the fuel chamber assembly sensor. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-62, INSTALLATION,
(B). Fuel Level Sensor.>
6) Inspect the fuel level sensor. <Ref. to
NOTE:
FU(H4SO)-63, INSPECTION, Fuel Level Sensor.>
• Use a new fuel chamber assembly.
7) Install the fuel pump assembly. <Ref. to
• Check that the claw connecting the fuel filter as- FU(H4SO)-61, INSTALLATION, Fuel Pump.>
sembly and fuel chamber assembly is securely fas-
tened.

FU(H4SO)-67
 Fuel Delivery and Evaporation Lines
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

28.Fuel Delivery and Evaporation Lines

A: REMOVAL

FU-05093

WARNING: (1) Remove the connect check cover from the

Place “NO OPEN FLAMES” signs near the fuel delivery hose.
working area.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to spill fuel.
1) Release the fuel pressure. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-
48, RELEASING OF FUEL PRESSURE, PROCE-
DURE, Fuel.>
2) Open the fuel filler lid and remove the fuel filler
cap.
3) Remove the floor mat. <Ref. to EI-162, REMOV-
AL, Floor Mat.> FU-05094
4) In the engine compartment, disconnect the fuel (2) Set the ST to the fuel pipe.
delivery hoses (A) and evaporation hose (B). ST 42099AE000 QUICK CONNECTOR RE-
CAUTION: LEASE
• Be careful not to spill fuel. (3) Disconnect the quick connector of the fuel
• Catch the fuel from hoses using a container delivery hose by pushing the ST in the direction
or cloth. of the arrow.

FU(H4SO)-68
 Fuel Delivery and Evaporation Lines
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

(4) Remove the clip and disconnect the evapo-

ration hose from the fuel pipe.
(D)

ST (C)
(B)

(A) (A)

(B) FU-05081

8) Remove the fuel pipe assembly from vehicle.

FU-05095
9) Disconnect the quick connector, and remove the
5) Remove the fuel tank. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-50, fuel delivery tube and fuel sub delivery tube from
REMOVAL, Fuel Tank.> the fuel tank.
6) Remove the rear mud guard LH. <Ref. to EI-38, • When using ST
REMOVAL, Mud Guard.> 1. Attach ST to the pipe and push ST in the direc-
7) Remove the purge hose (A), purge pipe (B), air tion of arrow mark to disconnect the quick connec-
vent hose (C) and drain tube assembly (D). tor.
NOTE: ST 42099AE000 QUICK CONNECTOR RE-
LEASE
Disconnect the quick connector as shown in the fig-
ure. CAUTION:
1 • Be careful not to spill fuel.
• Catch the fuel from hoses using a contain-
2
er or cloth.
• To disconnect the connector, hold (C)
shown in the figure and pull in axial direction.
• If the connector and pipe are sticking to
each other, push and pull the connector with
ST pushed, and then pull the connector after
it started moving freely.
1 • When disconnecting the connector, do not
(a)
bend or twist the tube forcibly. If the tube is
1
bent, replace with a new part.

2
NOTE:
Clean the pipe and quick connector, if they are cov-
ered with dust.

(C)
ST

1
(b) EC-02590
(A)
(a) Air vent hose (C), drain tube ASSY (D)
(C)
(b) Purge pipe (B)
(B)
FU-05506

(A) Quick connector

(B) Pipe
(C) Connector holding position

FU(H4SO)-69
 Fuel Delivery and Evaporation Lines
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

2. To prevent from damaging or entering foreign 2. To prevent from damaging or entering foreign
matter, wrap the pipes and quick connectors with matter, wrap the pipes and quick connectors with
plastic bag etc. plastic bag etc.
CAUTION: CAUTION:
When reusing the retainer, do not disconnect When reusing the retainer, do not disconnect
the retainer from the connector. the retainer from the pipe.

FU-01333 FU-05507

• When not using ST 10) Remove the evaporation pipe.

1. Push the retainer in the direction of the arrow, (1) Remove the rear mud guard RH. <Ref. to
disconnect the quick connector from pipe. EI-38, REMOVAL, Mud Guard.>
CAUTION: (2) Remove the evaporation hose.
• Be careful not to spill fuel.
• Catch the fuel from hoses using a contain-
er or cloth.
• To disconnect the connector, hold (D)
shown in the figure and pull in axial direction.
• If the connector and pipe are sticking to
each other, push and pull the connector with
the retainer pushed in the direction of the ar-
row, and then pull the connector after it start-
ed moving freely. FU-05082
• When disconnecting the connector, do not
(3) Remove the trunk side trim panel assembly -
bend or twist the tube forcibly. If the tube is
side on RH. <Ref. to EI-109, REMOVAL, Rear
bent, replace with a new part.
Quarter Trim.>
NOTE: (4) Remove the evaporation pipe protector.
Clean the pipe and quick connector, if they are cov-
ered with dust.

(D)

(B)

(C)
(A)

(D) FU-05032

FU-05510

(A) Quick connector

(B) Retainer
(C) Pipe
(D) Connector holding position

FU(H4SO)-70
 Fuel Delivery and Evaporation Lines
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

(5) Remove the evaporation pipe from vehicle. 4) Install the evaporation hose.

FU-05033 FU-05082

B: INSTALLATION 5) Install the rear mud guard RH. <Ref. to EI-38, IN-
STALLATION, Mud Guard.>
Install in the reverse order of removal while being
careful of the following. 2. CONNECTING THE FUEL LINE QUICK
CONNECTOR
1. INSTALLATION OF EVAPORATION PIPE
1) Install the evaporation pipe to the vehicle. CAUTION:
• Make sure there are no damage or dust on
connections. If necessary, clean seal surface of
pipe.
(A)

(a)

(b)

FU-05033

2) Install the evaporation pipe protector.

Tightening torque:
T1: 1 N·m (0.1 kgf-m, 0.7 ft-lb) (B)
T2: 7.5 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 5.4 ft-lb)

(a)
T2

(b)

T1

FU-05508

FU-05034
(A) When removed using ST
3) Install the trunk side trim panel assembly - side (B) When removed without using ST
on RH. <Ref. to EI-119, INSTALLATION, Rear (a) Seal surface
Quarter Trim.> (b) Pipe

• When reusing the retainer, make sure that

neither scratches nor deformation exist on the
retainer. If it is faulty, use a new part.

FU(H4SO)-71
11LE_US.book 72 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Fuel Delivery and Evaporation Lines

FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

1) Connect the quick connector to pipe.

(A) (a) (d)
CAUTION: (b)
• Make sure that the quick connector is secure-
ly connected.

(c)

(d)

(A)
(B)
(a) (d)

(B)
(C)
FU-05511
(b)

(A) Quick connector

(c)
(B) Retainer
(C) Pipe
(d)

• Make sure the two retainer pawls are en-

gaged in their mating positions in the quick FU-05509
connector.
• Be sure to inspect tubes and their connec- (A) When removed using ST
tions for any leakage of fuel. (B) When removed without using ST
• To connect the connector, hold (d) shown in (a) Quick connector
the figure and push in axial direction. (b) Retainer
• When connecting the connector, do not bend (c) Pipe
or twist the tube forcibly. If the tube is bent, re- (d) Connector holding position
place with a new part.
3. EVAPORATION HOSE CONNECTION
Connect the evaporation hose to the pipe with an
overlap of 15 to 20 mm (0.59 to 0.79 in).
L = 17.5±2.5 mm (0.689±0.098 in)
(2) (3)
(1)

L/2

L
FU-04501

(1) Hose
(2) Clip
(3) Pipe

FU(H4SO)-72
11LE_US.book 73 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Fuel Delivery and Evaporation Lines

FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

4. CONNECTING THE EVAPORATION LINE

QUICK CONNECTOR
CAUTION:
• Make sure there are no damage or dust on
connections. If necessary, clean the seal sur-
face of the pipe.
• Make sure that the quick connector is secure-
ly connected.
Connect the quick connector as shown in the fig-
ure.

FU-05035

C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the fuel pipe has no deformation,
cracks or other damages.
2) Check that the hose and tube have no cracks,
damage or loose part.

FU(H4SO)-73
11LE_US.book 74 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Fuel System Trouble in General

FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)

29.Fuel System Trouble in General

A: INSPECTION
Trouble Possible cause Corrective action
a. Fuel pump does not operate.
Inspect contact, especially ground, and tighten it
Defective terminal contact
securely.
Trouble in electromagnetic or electronic circuit
Replace the faulty parts.
parts
b. Decline of fuel pump function Replace the fuel pump.
Insufficient fuel
supply to injector Replace the fuel filter. Clean or replace the fuel tank if
c. Clogged fuel filter
necessary.
Clean, correct or replace the fuel line pipe, hose or
d. Clogged or bent fuel line pipe, hose or tube
tube.
Check the fuel line connections, correct or replace the
e. Air is mixed in fuel system.
defective part.
f. Damaged diaphragm of pressure regulator Replace the pressure regulator.
Check the fuel line connections, correct or replace the
a. Loose connections of fuel line pipe, hose or tube
defective part.
Leakage or blow b. Cracked fuel line pipe, hose or tube Replace the fuel line pipe, hose or tube.
out of fuel c. Cracked fuel tank or defective welded part Replace the fuel tank.
Clean, correct or replace the fuel line pipe, hose or
d. Clogged or bent fuel line pipe, hose or tube
tube.
Check the fuel line connections, correct or replace the
Gasoline smell a. Loose connections of fuel line pipe, hose or tube
defective part.
inside of compart-
b. Improper installation of rubber saucer Correct or replace the rubber saucer.
ment
c. Defective canister Replace the canister.
Defective fuel a. Defective operation of fuel level sensor Replace the fuel level sensor.
gauge b. Defective operation of combination meter Replace the combination meter.
Noise a. Large operation noise or vibration of fuel pump Replace the fuel pump.

NOTE:
• When the vehicle is left unattended for an extended period of time, water may accumulate in the fuel tank.
Fill fuel fully to prevent the problem.
• In snow-covered areas, mountainous areas, skiing areas, etc. where ambient temperatures drop to 0°C
(32°F) or less throughout the winter season, use a water removing agent in the fuel system to prevent freez-
ing fuel system and accumulating water.
• When water is accumulated in fuel filter, fill the water removing agent in the fuel tank.
• Before using water removing agent, follow the cautions noted on the bottle.

FU(H4SO)-74
EMISSION CONTROL (AUX. EMISSION
CONTROL DEVICES)

EC(H4SO)
Page
1. General Description ...................................................................................2
2. Front Catalytic Converter ...........................................................................3
3. Rear Catalytic Converter ............................................................................4
4. Canister ......................................................................................................5
5. Purge Control Solenoid Valve ....................................................................9
6. EGR Valve ...............................................................................................11
7. Fuel Level Sensor ....................................................................................12
8. Fuel Temperature Sensor ........................................................................13
9. Fuel Sub Level Sensor .............................................................................14
10. Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor .....................................................................15
11. Drain Filter ................................................................................................17
12. Drain Valve ...............................................................................................18
13. PCV Hose Assembly ................................................................................19
14. PCV Valve ................................................................................................20
11LE_US.book 2 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Description
EMISSION CONTROL (AUX. EMISSION CONTROL DEVICES)

1. General Description
A: CAUTION
• Wear appropriate work clothing, including a cap,
protective goggles and protective shoes when per-
forming any work.
• Remove contamination including dirt and corro-
sion before removal, installation or disassembly.
• Keep the disassembled parts in order and pro-
tect them from dust and dirt.
• Before removal, installation or disassembly, be
sure to clarify the failure. Avoid unnecessary re-
moval, installation, disassembly and replacement.
• Vehicle components are extremely hot after driv-
ing. Be wary of receiving burns from heated parts.
• Be sure to tighten fasteners including bolts and
nuts to the specified torque.
• Place shop jacks or rigid racks at the specified
points.
• Before disconnecting connectors of sensors or
units, be sure to disconnect the ground cable from
battery.
B: PREPARATION TOOL
1. SPECIAL TOOL
ILLUSTRATION TOOL NUMBER DESCRIPTION REMARKS
18353AA000 CLAMP PLIERS • Used for removing and installing the PCV
hose.
• This is a general tool made by the French
company CAILLAU. (code) 54.0.000.205
To make this easier to obtain, it has been pro-
vided with a tool number.

ST18353AA000

2. GENERAL TOOL
TOOL NAME REMARKS
Circuit tester Used for measuring resistance and voltage.
Mighty Vac Used for inspecting the fuel tank pressure sensor.

EC(H4SO)-2
 Front Catalytic Converter
EMISSION CONTROL (AUX. EMISSION CONTROL DEVICES)

2. Front Catalytic Converter

A: REMOVAL
The front catalytic converter is integrated into the
front exhaust pipe; therefore, refer to “Front Ex-
haust Pipe” for the removal procedure. <Ref. to
EX(H4SO)-4, REMOVAL, Front Exhaust Pipe.>
B: INSTALLATION
The front catalytic converter is integrated into the
front exhaust pipe; therefore, refer to “Front Ex-
haust Pipe” for the installation procedure. <Ref. to
EX(H4SO)-5, INSTALLATION, Front Exhaust
Pipe.>
C: INSPECTION
1) Check the connections and welds for exhaust
leaks.
2) Check for hole or rust.

EC(H4SO)-3
 Rear Catalytic Converter
EMISSION CONTROL (AUX. EMISSION CONTROL DEVICES)

3. Rear Catalytic Converter

A: REMOVAL
The rear catalytic converter is integrated into the
center exhaust pipe. Refer to “Center Exhaust
Pipe” for removal procedures. <Ref. to EX(H4SO)-
7, REMOVAL, Center Exhaust Pipe.>
B: INSTALLATION
The rear catalytic converter is integrated into the
center exhaust pipe. Refer to “Center Exhaust
Pipe” for installation procedures. <Ref. to
EX(H4SO)-7, INSTALLATION, Center Exhaust
Pipe.>
C: INSPECTION
1) Check the connections and welds for exhaust
leaks.
2) Check for hole or rust.

EC(H4SO)-4
 Canister
EMISSION CONTROL (AUX. EMISSION CONTROL DEVICES)

4. Canister 5) Remove the clip holding the rear wiring harness.

A: REMOVAL
1) Remove the rear wheel LH.
2) Lift up the vehicle.
3) Remove the rear mud guard LH. <Ref. to EI-38,
REMOVAL, Mud Guard.>
4) Disconnect the quick connectors of the vent tube
(A), canister drain tube (B) and charge tube (C),
and remove the tubes from clips (D).
NOTE: EC-02608
Disconnect the quick connector as shown in the fig- 6) Remove the canister from vehicle.
ure.
1

1
(a)
1

EC-02609
(b) 1
EC-02615
7) Disconnect the connector from drain valve.
(a) Vent tube (A) and canister drain tube (B)
(b) Charge tube (C)

(C)
(A)

EC-02610

(B) (D)

EC-02607

EC(H4SO)-5
11LE_US.book 6 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Canister
EMISSION CONTROL (AUX. EMISSION CONTROL DEVICES)

8) Disconnect the vent tube (A), canister drain tube B: INSTALLATION

(B) and charge tube (C), and remove the canister
1) Install the vent tube (A), canister drain tube (B)
drain tube (B) from clip (D).
and charge tube (C), and install the canister drain
NOTE: tube (B) to clip (D).
Disconnect the quick connector as shown in the fig- CAUTION:
ure.
• Make sure there are no damage or dust on
1 connections. If necessary, clean the seal sur-
2 face of the pipe.
• Make sure that the quick connector is secure-
ly connected.
NOTE:
Connect the quick connector as shown in the fig-
ure.

1
(a)
1

(a)

(b) 1
EC-02615

(a) Vent tube (A) and canister drain tube (B)

(b) Charge tube (C)

(B)

(A) (b) EC-02616

(a) Vent tube (A) and canister drain tube (B)

(b) Charge tube (C)

(C) (D)

EC-02611

EC(H4SO)-6
11LE_US.book 7 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Canister
EMISSION CONTROL (AUX. EMISSION CONTROL DEVICES)

3) Install the canister to the vehicle.

(B)
Tightening torque:
8 N·m (0.8 kgf-m, 5.9 ft-lb)
(A)

(C) (D)

EC-02611

2) Connect the connector to the drain valve.

EC-02609

4) Secure the rear wiring harness with clip.

EC-02610

EC-02608

EC(H4SO)-7
 Canister
EMISSION CONTROL (AUX. EMISSION CONTROL DEVICES)

5) Attach all tubes to clips (D), and connect the C: INSPECTION

quick connectors of the vent tube (A), canister drain
1) Check that the canister has no deformation,
tube (B) and charge tube (C).
cracks or other damages.
CAUTION: 2) Check that the tube has no cracks, damage or
• Make sure there are no damage or dust on loose part.
connections. If necessary, clean the seal sur-
face of the pipe.
• Make sure that the quick connector is secure-
ly connected.
NOTE:
Connect the quick connector as shown in the fig-
ure.

(a)

(b) EC-02616

(a) Vent tube (A) and canister drain tube (B)

(b) Charge tube (C)

(C)
(A)

(B) (D)

EC-02607

6) Install the rear mud guard LH. <Ref. to EI-38, IN-

STALLATION, Mud Guard.>
7) Lower the vehicle.
8) Install the rear wheel LH.
Tightening torque:
120 N·m (12.2 kgf-m, 88.5 ft-lb)

EC(H4SO)-8
 Purge Control Solenoid Valve
EMISSION CONTROL (AUX. EMISSION CONTROL DEVICES)

5. Purge Control Solenoid Valve • Other than U5 model

(B) (A)
A: REMOVAL
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery.

EC-02557

• U5 model
(A)
IG-02107

2) Remove the air intake boot assembly. <Ref. to

IN(H4SO)-8, REMOVAL, Air Intake Boot.>
3) Disconnect the purge control solenoid valve con-
nector (A) and evaporation hose (B), and then re- (B)
move the purge control solenoid valve.
• Other than U5 model

EC-02619
(A)
(A) To multifunction duct
(B) To evaporation line

Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
• Other than U5 model
(B)
EC-02556

• U5 model (A)

(A)

(B)
EC-02556

• U5 model
(B)
EC-02714

B: INSTALLATION (A)

Install in the reverse order of removal.

NOTE:
Connect the evaporation hose as shown in the fig-
ure.

(B)
EC-02714

EC(H4SO)-9
11LE_US.book 10 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Purge Control Solenoid Valve

EMISSION CONTROL (AUX. EMISSION CONTROL DEVICES)

C: INSPECTION 4) Connect the terminal No. 1 to the battery positive

terminal and the terminal No. 2 to the battery
1. PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ground terminal. Check that air is discharged from
1) Check that the purge control solenoid valve has (B), when supplying air to (A).
no deformation, cracks or other damages. • Other than U5 model
2) Measure the resistance between the purge con-
trol solenoid valve terminals.
2 1

2 1

EC-02426

• Other than U5 model (A) (B)

Terminal No. Standard
1 and 2 24±3 Ω (when 20°C (68°F))

• U5 model
Terminal No. Standard
1 and 2 24.5±1.5 Ω (when 20°C (68°F))
EC-02559
3) Check that air does not come out from (B) when
• U5 model
air is blown into (A).
• Other than U5 model
2 1
(A) (B)

EC-02558

• U5 model
(B)

(B)

(A)

(A)

EC-02621

EC-02620
2. OTHER INSPECTIONS
Check that the evaporation hose has no cracks,
damage or loose part.

EC(H4SO)-10
 EGR Valve
EMISSION CONTROL (AUX. EMISSION CONTROL DEVICES)

6. EGR Valve
A: REMOVAL
For removal procedures, refer to the “FU(H4SO)”
section. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-33, REMOVAL, EGR
Valve.>
B: INSTALLATION
For installation procedure, refer to “FU(H4SO)”
section. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-33, INSTALLATION,
EGR Valve.>
C: INSPECTION
For inspection procedures, refer to the “FU(H4SO)”
section. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-33, INSPECTION,
EGR Valve.>

EC(H4SO)-11
 Fuel Level Sensor
EMISSION CONTROL (AUX. EMISSION CONTROL DEVICES)

7. Fuel Level Sensor

A: REMOVAL
For removal procedures, refer to the “FU(H4SO)”
section. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-62, REMOVAL, Fuel
Level Sensor.>
B: INSTALLATION
For installation procedures, refer to the
“FU(H4SO)” section. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-62, IN-
STALLATION, Fuel Level Sensor.>
C: INSPECTION
For inspection procedures, refer to the “FU(H4SO)”
section. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-63, INSPECTION,
Fuel Level Sensor.>

EC(H4SO)-12
 Fuel Temperature Sensor
EMISSION CONTROL (AUX. EMISSION CONTROL DEVICES)

8. Fuel Temperature Sensor C: INSPECTION

1) Check that the fuel temperature sensor has no
A: REMOVAL deformation, cracks or other damages.
The fuel temperature sensor and fuel level sensor 2) Check the resistance between the fuel tempera-
are integrated into one unit; therefore, refer to “Fuel ture sensor terminals.
Level Sensor” for removal procedure. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-62, REMOVAL, Fuel Level Sensor.> CAUTION:
When measuring the resistance, check the cir-
cuit tester specification and be careful not to
turn on electricity 3 V or more to prevent dam-
aging the fuel temperature sensor.

1 2
3 4
(A)
EC-02391

(A) Fuel temperature sensor

B: INSTALLATION EC-02452

The fuel temperature sensor and fuel level sensor Temperature Terminal No. Standard
are integrated into one unit; therefore, refer to “Fuel 9.2±2.2 kΩ (when the mea-
Level Sensor” for installation procedure. <Ref. to –10°C (14°F)
sured current is 0.5 mA)
FU(H4SO)-62, INSTALLATION, Fuel Level Sen- 2.5±0.2 kΩ (when the mea-
sor.> 20°C (68°F) 2 and 3
sured current is 1.0 mA)
0.84+0.06 –0.05 kΩ (when the
50°C (122°F)
measured current is 1.0 mA)

(A)
EC-02391

(A) Fuel temperature sensor

EC(H4SO)-13
 Fuel Sub Level Sensor
EMISSION CONTROL (AUX. EMISSION CONTROL DEVICES)

9. Fuel Sub Level Sensor

A: REMOVAL
For removal procedures, refer to the “FU(H4SO)”
section. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-64, REMOVAL, Fuel
Sub Level Sensor.>
B: INSTALLATION
For installation procedures, refer to the
“FU(H4SO)” section. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-65, IN-
STALLATION, Fuel Sub Level Sensor.>
C: INSPECTION
For inspection procedures, refer to the “FU(H4SO)”
section. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-65, INSPECTION,
Fuel Sub Level Sensor.>

EC(H4SO)-14
11LE_US.book 15 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor

EMISSION CONTROL (AUX. EMISSION CONTROL DEVICES)

10.Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor B: INSTALLATION

Install in the reverse order of removal.
A: REMOVAL
Tightening torque:
WARNING:
7.35 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 5.4 ft-lb)
Place “NO OPEN FLAMES” signs near the
working area.
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery.

EC-02599

C: INSPECTION
IG-02107
1. FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR
2) Open the fuel filler lid and remove the fuel filler
cap. 1) Check that the fuel tank pressure sensor does
3) Lift up the vehicle. not have deformation, cracks or other damages.
4) Disconnect connector (A) from fuel tank pres- 2) Connect dry-cell battery positive terminal to ter-
sure sensor. minal No. 3 and dry-cell battery ground terminal to
5) Pull out the vacuum hose (B) from vehicle. terminal No. 1, circuit tester positive terminal to ter-
6) Remove the fuel tank pressure sensor from the minal No. 2 and the circuit tester negative terminal
bracket. to terminal No. 1.
(A)
NOTE:
• Use new dry-cell batteries.
• Using circuit tester, check the voltage of a single
(B) dry-cell battery is 1.6 V or more. And also check the
voltage of three batteries in series is between 4.8 V
and 5.2 V.

3 2 1
EC-02597

7) Disconnect the pressure hose from fuel tank

pressure sensor and remove the fuel tank pressure
sensor.

1.5V 1.5V 1.5V

EC-02598

4.8 5.2V

FU-04486

EC(H4SO)-15
11LE_US.book 16 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor

EMISSION CONTROL (AUX. EMISSION CONTROL DEVICES)

3) Check the voltage at a normal atmospheric pres-

sure.
NOTE:
The atmospheric pressure at higher altitude is low-
er than normal. Therefore, the voltage is lower than
the standard value.
Terminal No. Standard
Approx. 2.5 V
2 (+) and 1 (–)
(when 25°C (77°F))

4) Connect the Mighty Vac to the pressure port (A)

on the fuel tank pressure sensor.

(A)
EC-02586

5) Check the voltage when generating vacuum and

positive pressure using Mighty Vac.
CAUTION:
Be sure to apply pressure within a range of –10
— 20 kPa (–0.1 — 0.2 kgf/cm2, –1.45 — 2.90 psi).
Otherwise the fuel tank pressure sensor will be
damaged.
Terminal
Pressure Standard
No.
–6.67 kPa (–0.07 kgf/cm2, Approx. 0.5 V
–0.97 psi) 2 (+) and (when 25°C (77°F))
6.67 kPa (0.07 kgf/cm2, 1 (–) Approx. 4.5 V
0.97 psi) (when 25°C (77°F))

2. OTHER INSPECTIONS
Check that the hose has no cracks, damage or
loose part.

EC(H4SO)-16
 Drain Filter
EMISSION CONTROL (AUX. EMISSION CONTROL DEVICES)

11.Drain Filter
A: SPECIFICATION
Drain valve is a non-disassembled part, so do not
remove the drain filter from drain valve. Refer to
“Canister” for removal and installation procedures.
<Ref. to EC(H4SO)-5, REMOVAL, Canister.>
<Ref. to EC(H4SO)-6, INSTALLATION, Canister.>

EC(H4SO)-17
 Drain Valve
EMISSION CONTROL (AUX. EMISSION CONTROL DEVICES)

12.Drain Valve
A: REMOVAL
Drain valve is integrated with canister. Refer to
“Canister” for removal procedure. <Ref. to
EC(H4SO)-5, REMOVAL, Canister.>
B: INSTALLATION
Refer to “Canister” for the installation procedure.
<Ref. to EC(H4SO)-6, INSTALLATION, Canister.>
C: INSPECTION
Check the resistance between drain valve termi-
nals.

2 1

EC-02455

Terminal No. Standard

1 and 2 20 — 30 Ω

EC(H4SO)-18
 PCV Hose Assembly
EMISSION CONTROL (AUX. EMISSION CONTROL DEVICES)

13.PCV Hose Assembly B: INSTALLATION

1) Install the PCV hose assembly (B) to the cylinder
A: REMOVAL block RH and PCV pipe, and then connect the vac-
CAUTION: uum hose (A) to the PCV valve.
Do not remove except when the hose is broken. NOTE:
1) Remove the air intake boot assembly. <Ref. to Use a new clamp for the PCV hose assembly, fit
IN(H4SO)-8, REMOVAL, Air Intake Boot.> the cut out in the ST with the protrusion on the
2) Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) from PCV clamp as shown in the figure, and lock the clamp.
valve, and remove the PCV hose assembly (B) ST 18353AA000 CLAMP PLIERS
from cylinder block RH and PCV pipe.
NOTE:
Pinch the clamp of the PCV hose assembly by fit- ST
ting the cut out in the ST with the protrusion on the
clamp as shown in the figure, and unlock the
clamp.
ST 18353AA000 CLAMP PLIERS

ST
ME-04374

(A)

ME-04374
(B)

EC-02605

(A) 2) Install the air intake boot assembly. <Ref. to

IN(H4SO)-8, INSTALLATION, Air Intake Boot.>
(B) C: INSPECTION
Check the PCV hose assembly for cracks, damage
or looseness.
EC-02605

EC(H4SO)-19
 PCV Valve
EMISSION CONTROL (AUX. EMISSION CONTROL DEVICES)

14.PCV Valve
A: REMOVAL
(A)
1) Remove the air intake boot assembly. <Ref. to
IN(H4SO)-8, REMOVAL, Air Intake Boot.>
(B)
2) Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) and PCV hose
(B) from the PCV valve and remove the PCV valve.
NOTE:
Pinch the clamp of the PCV hose (B) by fitting the
cut out in the ST with the protrusion on the clamp as EC-02606
shown in the figure, and unlock the clamp. 2) Install the air intake boot assembly. <Ref. to
ST 18353AA000 CLAMP PLIERS IN(H4SO)-8, INSTALLATION, Air Intake Boot.>
C: INSPECTION
ST
1. PCV VALVE
1) Check that the PCV valve has no deformation,
cracks or other damages.
2) Check that air is discharged from (B) when air is
blown into (A).

ME-04374

(B) (A)
(A)

(B)

EC-02507

3) Check that air does not come out from (B) when
air is blown into (A).
EC-02606

B: INSTALLATION
1) Connect the vacuum hose (A) and PCV hose (B)
to the PCV valve.
NOTE: (A) (B)
Use a new clamp for the PCV hose (B), fit the cut
out in the ST with the protrusion on the clamp as
shown in the figure, and lock the clamp.
ST 18353AA000 CLAMP PLIERS EC-02508

2. OTHER INSPECTIONS
ST Check the vacuum hose for cracks, damage or
looseness.

ME-04374

EC(H4SO)-20
INTAKE (INDUCTION)

IN(H4SO)
Page
1. General Description ...................................................................................2
2. Air Cleaner Element ...................................................................................4
3. Air Cleaner Case ........................................................................................6
4. Air Intake Boot ............................................................................................8
5. Air Intake Duct ............................................................................................9
6. Resonator Chamber .................................................................................10
11LE_US.book 2 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Description
INTAKE (INDUCTION)

1. General Description
A: COMPONENT

(9)

T1
(8)
(16)
(7)

T4
(4)
(15)

(3)
T3

(5)
(6)

(12) (11)

(2)

(13)
(10)

(1)
T2

(14)

T2

(17)

IN-02661

IN(H4SO)-2
11LE_US.book 3 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Description
INTAKE (INDUCTION)

(1) Air intake duct (9) Clip (17) Blow-by hose

(2) Clip (10) Clamp
(3) Resonator chamber (11) Cover Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(4) Air cleaner case (front) (12) Clip T1: 1 (0.1, 0.7)
(5) Spacer (13) Air intake boot ASSY T2: 3 (0.3, 2.2)
(6) Cushion (14) Clamp T3: 6 (0.6, 4.4)
(7) Air cleaner element (15) Cushion T4: 7.5 (0.8, 5.5)
(8) Air cleaner case (rear) (16) Mass air flow and intake air tem-
perature sensor

B: CAUTION
• Wear appropriate work clothing, including a cap,
protective goggles and protective shoes when per-
forming any work.
• Remove contamination including dirt and corro-
sion before removal, installation or disassembly.
• Keep the disassembled parts in order and pro-
tect them from dust and dirt.
• Before removal, installation or disassembly, be
sure to clarify the failure. Avoid unnecessary re-
moval, installation, disassembly and replacement.
• Vehicle components are extremely hot after driv-
ing. Be wary of receiving burns from heated parts.
• Be sure to tighten fasteners including bolts and
nuts to the specified torque.
• Place shop jacks or rigid racks at the specified
points.
• Before disconnecting connectors of sensors or
units, be sure to disconnect the ground cable from
the battery.

IN(H4SO)-3
11LE_US.book 4 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Air Cleaner Element

INTAKE (INDUCTION)

2. Air Cleaner Element 5) Remove the clip (B) securing the upper side of
air cleaner case.
A: REMOVAL
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery.

(B) (A)

IN-02749

6) Pull the air cleaner case (rear) backward of the

IG-02107 vehicle, and remove the air cleaner element.
2) Disconnect the power steering oil pressure hose
(suction hose) from the clip on the side of air clean-
er case (rear).

IN-02664

B: INSTALLATION
IN-02762
Install in the reverse order of removal.
3) Disconnect the connector (A) from the mass air CAUTION:
flow and intake air temperature sensor, and re- Be sure to use SUBARU genuine air cleaner el-
move the clip (B). ement depending on the engine type when re-
placing the air cleaner elements. Using other air
cleaner element may affect the engine perfor-
mance.
(A)
NOTE:
• Check that there are no foreign objects in the air
(B)
cleaner case.
• When installing the air cleaner case (rear), align
the protrusion of the air cleaner case (rear) to the
hole on the air cleaner case (front) to install.
IN-02748

4) Loosen the clamp (A) which connects the air

cleaner case (rear) and air intake boot assembly.

IN-02438

IN(H4SO)-4
11LE_US.book 5 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Air Cleaner Element

INTAKE (INDUCTION)

Tightening torque:
Clamp (A)
3 N·m (0.3 kgf-m, 2.2 ft-lb)

(A)

IN-02750

C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the air cleaner element has no defor-
mation, cracks or other damages.
2) Check the air cleaner element for excessive dirt.

IN(H4SO)-5
 Air Cleaner Case
INTAKE (INDUCTION)

3. Air Cleaner Case 6) Remove the clips (B) from the air cleaner case
(front).
A: REMOVAL
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery.

(B) (A)

IN-02749

7) Remove the air cleaner case (rear) and air

IG-02107 cleaner element.
2) Remove the air intake duct. <Ref. to IN(H4SO)-
9, REMOVAL, Air Intake Duct.>
3) Disconnect the power steering oil pressure hose
(suction hose) from the clip on the side of air clean-
er case (rear).

IN-02666

8) Remove the bolt (A) and nut (B) which secure

the air cleaner case (front) to the body.

IN-02762 (B)

4) Disconnect the connector (A) from the mass air

flow and intake air temperature sensor, and re-
move the clip (B).

(A)
(A)
IN-02751

9) Remove the air cleaner case (front).

(B)

IN-02748

5) Loosen the clamp (A) which connects the air

cleaner case (rear) and air intake boot assembly.

IN(H4SO)-6
 Air Cleaner Case
INTAKE (INDUCTION)

B: INSTALLATION 4) Connect the connector (A) to the mass air flow

and intake air temperature sensor and secure the
1) Install the bolt (A) and nut (B) which secure the
harness with clip (B).
air cleaner case (front) to the body.
Tightening torque:
Bolt (A)
(A)
6 N·m (0.6 kgf-m, 4.4 ft-lb)
Nut (B)
7.5 N·m (0.8 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb)
(B)

(B)

IN-02748

5) Connect the power steering oil pressure hose

(suction hose) to the clip on the side of air cleaner
case (rear).
(A)

IN-02751

2) Install the air cleaner case (rear) and the air

cleaner element.
NOTE:
When installing the air cleaner case (rear), align the
protrusion of the air cleaner case (rear) to the hole
on the air cleaner case (front) to install.
IN-02762

6) Install the air intake duct. <Ref. to IN(H4SO)-9,

INSTALLATION, Air Intake Duct.>
7) Connect the ground cable to battery.

IN-02438

3) Install the clip (B) to the air cleaner case (front),

then tighten the clamp (A) that connects the air
cleaner case (rear) to the intake boot.
IG-02107
Tightening torque:
Clamp (A) C: INSPECTION
3 N·m (0.3 kgf-m, 2.2 ft-lb)
1) Check that the air cleaner case has no deforma-
tion, cracks or other damages.
2) Check that the air intake boot has no cracks,
damage or loose part.
(B) (A)

IN-02749

IN(H4SO)-7
11LE_US.book 8 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Air Intake Boot

INTAKE (INDUCTION)

4. Air Intake Boot

A: REMOVAL
1) Remove the cover (A) and clip (B) from air intake
boot assembly.

(A)

(B) (B)

IN-02668

2) Loosen the clamp (A) which connects the air in-

take boot assembly and air cleaner case.
3) Loosen the clamp (B) which connects the air in-
take boot assembly and throttle body.

(B)

(A)

IN-02669

4) Disconnect the blow-by hose and remove the air

intake boot assembly.
B: INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
Tightening torque:
Clamp (A), (B)
3 N·m (0.3 kgf-m, 2.2 ft-lb)

(B)

(A)

IN-02669

C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the air intake boot assembly does not
have deformation, cracks or other damages.
2) Check there is no foreign matter in the air intake
boot assembly.

IN(H4SO)-8
11LE_US.book 9 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Air Intake Duct

INTAKE (INDUCTION)

5. Air Intake Duct

A: REMOVAL
1) Detach the clip connecting the air intake duct to
the front vehicle body, and remove the air intake
duct.

IN-02752

B: INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the air intake duct has no deforma-
tion, cracks or other damages.
2) Inspect that no foreign objects are mixed in the
air intake duct.

IN(H4SO)-9
 Resonator Chamber
INTAKE (INDUCTION)

6. Resonator Chamber
A: REMOVAL
The resonator chamber and air cleaner case are in-
tegrated into one unit; therefore, refer to “Air Clean-
er Case” for removal procedure. <Ref. to
IN(H4SO)-6, REMOVAL, Air Cleaner Case.>
B: INSTALLATION
The resonator chamber and air cleaner case are in-
tegrated into one unit; therefore, refer to “Air Clean-
er Case” for installation procedure. <Ref. to
IN(H4SO)-7, INSTALLATION, Air Cleaner Case.>
C: INSPECTION
Check that the resonator chamber has no deforma-
tion, cracks or other damages.

IN(H4SO)-10
MECHANICAL

ME(H4SO)
Page
1. General Description ...................................................................................2
2. Compression ............................................................................................23
3. Idle Speed ................................................................................................24
4. Ignition Timing ..........................................................................................25
5. Intake Manifold Vacuum ...........................................................................26
6. Engine Oil Pressure .................................................................................27
7. Fuel Pressure ...........................................................................................28
8. Valve Clearance .......................................................................................29
9. Engine Assembly .....................................................................................31
10. Engine Mounting ......................................................................................38
11. Preparation for Overhaul ..........................................................................41
12. V-belt ........................................................................................................42
13. Crank Pulley .............................................................................................44
14. Timing Belt Cover .....................................................................................46
15. Timing Belt ...............................................................................................47
16. Cam Sprocket ..........................................................................................52
17. Crank Sprocket ........................................................................................53
18. Valve Rocker Assembly ...........................................................................54
19. Camshaft ..................................................................................................57
20. Cylinder Head ..........................................................................................61
21. Cylinder Block ..........................................................................................68
22. Oil Switching Solenoid Valve ...................................................................89
23. Intake and Exhaust Valve ........................................................................91
24. Piston .......................................................................................................92
25. Connecting Rod .......................................................................................93
26. Crankshaft ................................................................................................94
27. Engine Trouble in General .......................................................................95
28. Engine Noise ..........................................................................................101
11LE_US.book 2 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Description
MECHANICAL

1. General Description
A: SPECIFICATION
Model 2.5 L
Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled, 4-cylinder,
Cylinder arrangement
4-stroke gasoline engine
Belt driven,
Valve system mechanism single overhead camshaft,
4 valve/cylinder
Bore × Stroke mm (in) 99.5 × 79.0 (3.92 × 3.11)
Displacement cm3 (cu in) 2,457 (149.94)
Compression ratio 10.0
Compression pressure
kPa (kg/cm2, psi) Standard 1,020 — 1,275 (10.4 — 13.0, 148 — 185)
(at 200 — 300 rpm)
Number of piston rings Pressure ring: 2, Oil ring: 1
Open BTDC 0°
Constant
Close ABDC 58°
Engine Low Open BTDC 0°
Intake valve timing
speed Close ABDC –10°
High Open BTDC 14°
speed Close ABDC 62°
Open BBDC30°
Exhaust valve timing
Close ATDC14°
Intake 0.20±0.04 (0.0079±0.0016)
Valve clearance mm (in)
Exhaust 0.25±0.04 (0.0098±0.0016)
Idle speed (For CVT model, CVT model: 675±100
No load Standard
select lever in “P” or “N” range. MT model: 650±100
rpm
For MT model, gear shift lever in
neutral position.) A/C ON Standard 700 — 850
Ignition order 1→3→2→4
CVT model: 15°±10°/675
Ignition timing BTDC/rpm Standard
MT model: 10°±10°/650

ME(H4SO)-2
11LE_US.book 3 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Description
MECHANICAL

NOTE:
US: Undersize OS: Oversize
Belt tension
Adjuster rod protrusion amount mm (in) 5.2 — 6.2 (0.205 — 0.244)
adjuster
Clearance between arm and shaft mm (in) Standard 0.020 — 0.054 (0.0008 — 0.0021)
Valve rocker
Rocker arm inside diameter mm (in) Standard 22.020 — 22.041 (0.8669 — 0.8678)
arm
Rocker shaft diameter mm (in) Standard 21.987 — 22.000 (0.8656 — 0.8661)
Bending limit mm (in) 0.025 (0.00098)
Constant Standard 40.075 — 40.175 (1.5778 — 1.5817)
Cam lobe Intake Low speed Standard 35.496 — 35.596 (1.3975 — 1.4014)
mm (in)
height High speed Standard 40.315 — 40.415 (1.5872 — 1.5911)
Exhaust Standard 39.289 — 39.389 (1.5468 — 1.5507)
Cam base circle diameter mm (in) Standard 34.00 (1.3386)
Camshaft
Base circle step of adjacent intake cams
mm (in) Standard 0.03 (0.001) or less
(low speed and high speed)
Oil clearance mm (in) Standard 0.055 — 0.090 (0.0022 — 0.0035)
Journal O.D. mm (in) Standard 31.928 — 31.945 (1.2570 — 1.2577)
Cylinder head journal I.D. mm (in) Standard 32.000 — 32.018 (1.2598 — 1.2605)
Thrust clearance mm (in) Standard 0.030 — 0.090 (0.0012 — 0.0035)
Warping limit (mating surface with cylinder block) mm (in) 0.035 (0.0014)
Cylinder
Grinding limit mm (in) 0.1 (0.004)
head
Standard height mm (in) 97.5 (3.84)
Seating angle between valve and valve seat 90°
Valve seat Contacting width Intake Standard 0.8 — 1.4 (0.03 — 0.055)
between valve and valve mm (in)
seat Exhaust Standard 1.2 — 1.8 (0.047 — 0.071)
Clearance between the Intake Standard 0.035 — 0.062 (0.0014 — 0.0024)
valve guide and valve mm (in)
stem Exhaust Standard 0.040 — 0.067 (0.0016 — 0.0026)
Inside diameter mm (in) 6.000 — 6.012 (0.2362 — 0.2367)
Valve guide Intake 5.950 — 5.965 (0.2343 — 0.2348)
Valve stem outer diameters mm (in)
Exhaust 5.945 — 5.960 (0.2341 — 0.2346)
Intake 20.3 — 20.7 (0.799 — 0.815)
Valve guide protrusion amount mm (in)
Exhaust 16.8 — 17.2 (0.661 — 0.677)
Intake Standard 0.8 — 1.2 (0.03 — 0.047)
Head edge thickness mm (in)
Exhaust Standard 1.0 — 1.4 (0.039 — 0.055)
Valve
Intake 120.6 (4.75)
Overall length mm (in)
Exhaust 121.7 (4.79)
Free length mm (in) 55.2 (2.173)
235.3 — 270.7 (24 — 27.6, 52.9 — 60.8)/
Set
45.0 (1.772)
Valve spring Tension/spring height N (kgf, lb)/mm (in)
578.9 — 639.9 (59.1 — 65.3, 130.3 — 143.9)/
Lift
34.7 (1.366)
Squareness 2.5°, 2.4 mm (0.094 in) or less
Warping limit (mating surface with cylinder head) mm (in) 0.025 (0.00098)
Grinding limit mm (in) 0.1 (0.004)
Standard height mm (in) 201.0 (7.91)
Cylinder Cylindricality mm (in) Standard 0.015 (0.0006)
block Out-of-roundness mm (in) Standard 0.010 (0.0004)
Clearance between cylinder and piston
mm (in) Standard –0.015 — 0.005 (–0.00059 — 0.00020)
at 20°C (68°F)
Cylinder inner diameter boring limit (diameter) mm (in) To 100.005 (3.9372)

ME(H4SO)-3
11LE_US.book 4 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Description
MECHANICAL

Piston grade point mm (in) 38.2 (1.504)

A 99.510 — 99.520 (3.9177 — 3.9181)
Standard
Piston B 99.500 — 99.510 (3.9173 — 3.9177)
Outer diameter mm (in)
0.25 (0.0098) OS 99.750 — 99.770 (3.9272 — 3.9280)
0.50 (0.0197) OS 100.000 — 100.020 (3.9370 — 3.9378)
Piston pin must be fitted into position with
Degree of fit
thumb at 20°C (68°F).
Piston pin
Clearance between piston pin hole and
mm (in) Standard 0.004 — 0.008 (0.0002 — 0.0003)
piston pin
Top ring Standard 0.20 — 0.35 (0.0079 — 0.0138)
Piston ring gap mm (in) Second ring Standard 0.37 — 0.52 (0.0146 — 0.0205)
Piston ring Oil ring Standard 0.20 — 0.50 (0.0079 — 0.0197)
Clearance between pis- Top ring Standard 0.040 — 0.080 (0.0016 — 0.0031)
ton ring and piston ring mm (in)
groove Second ring Standard 0.030 — 0.070 (0.0012 — 0.0028)
Bend or twist per 100 mm (3.94 in) in
mm (in) Limit 0.10 (0.0039)
length
Thrust clearance mm (in) Standard 0.070 — 0.330 (0.0028 — 0.0130)
Connecting
rod and con- Oil clearance mm (in) Standard 0.016 — 0.044 (0.0006 — 0.0017)
necting rod Standard 1.492 — 1.501 (0.0587 — 0.0591)
bearing Bearing size 0.03 (0.0012) US 1.510 — 1.513 (0.0594 — 0.0596)
mm (in)
(Thickness at center) 0.05 (0.0020) US 1.520 — 1.523 (0.0598 — 0.0600)
0.25 (0.0098) US 1.620 — 1.623 (0.0638 — 0.0639)
Bushing of Clearance between piston pin and
mm (in) Standard 0 — 0.022 (0 — 0.0009)
small end bushing
Bending limit mm (in) 0.035 (0.0014)
Out-of-
mm (in) Standard 0.003 (0.0001)
roundness
Crank pin
Cylindricality mm (in) Standard 0.004 (0.0002)
Grinding limit (dia.) mm (in) To 51.750 (2.0374)
Out-of-
mm (in) Standard 0.005 (0.0002)
roundness
Crank journal
Cylindricality mm (in) Standard 0.006 (0.0002)
Grinding limit (dia.) mm (in) To 59.758 (2.3527)
Standard 51.984 — 52.000 (2.0466 — 2.0472)
0.03 (0.0012) US 51.954 — 51.970 (2.0454 — 2.0461)
Crank pin outer diameter mm (in)
0.05 (0.0020) US 51.934 — 51.950 (2.0446 — 2.0453)
Crankshaft 0.25 (0.0098) US 51.734 — 51.750 (2.0368 — 2.0374)
and crank- Standard 59.992 — 60.008 (2.3619 — 2.3625)
shaft bear-
Crank journal outer 0.03 (0.0012) US 59.962 — 59.978 (2.3607 — 2.3613)
ing mm (in)
diameter 0.05 (0.0020) US 59.942 — 59.958 (2.3599 — 2.3605)
0.25 (0.0098) US 59.742 — 59.758 (2.3520 — 2.3527)
Standard 1.998 — 2.011 (0.0787 — 0.0792)
0.03 (0.0012) US 2.017 — 2.020 (0.0794 — 0.0795)
#1, #3
0.05 (0.0020) US 2.027 — 2.030 (0.0798 — 0.0799)
Bearing size (Thickness 0.25 (0.0098) US 2.127 — 2.130 (0.0837 — 0.0839)
at center)
mm (in) Standard 2.000 — 2.013 (0.0787 — 0.0793)
0.03 (0.0012) US 2.019 — 2.022 (0.0795 — 0.0796)
#2, #4, #5
0.05 (0.0020) US 2.029 — 2.032 (0.0799 — 0.0800)
0.25 (0.0098) US 2.129 — 2.132 (0.0838 — 0.0839)
Thrust clearance mm (in) Standard 0.030 — 0.115 (0.0012 — 0.0045)
Oil clearance mm (in) Standard 0.010 — 0.030 (0.0004 — 0.0012)

ME(H4SO)-4
11LE_US.book 5 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Description
MECHANICAL

B: COMPONENT
1. V-BELT
(5)
(6)

(4)

(3)
(7)
T4

A
(11)
T2

(8)
T4 (2)
T6 T5

A
B
(12)

T1 B

T7 T7

(9) T5
(10)
C
C
(1)
(13)

T7
T3

ME-04541

(1) V-belt (8) Idler pulley ASSY Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) V-belt cover bracket (9) Stopper rod RH T1: 6.4 (0.7, 4.7)
(3) V-belt tensioner ASSY (10) Stopper rod LH T2: 20 (2.0, 14.8)
(4) Power steering pump bracket (11) A/C compressor T3: 22 (2.2, 16.2)
(5) Generator (12) A/C compressor bracket B T4: 25 (2.5, 18.4)
(6) Generator plate (13) Front cushion rubber T5: 26.5 (2.7, 19.5)
(7) A/C compressor bracket A T6: 33 (3.4, 24.3)
T7: 36 (3.7, 26.6)

ME(H4SO)-5
 General Description
MECHANICAL

2. TIMING BELT

(5) T1 (1)

(2)
T2
T5 (3)

(6)
(4)
T4 (7)

(8)
T1
(12) T3

T1

(9) T1
T4
T4

(10)

(15) (13)
(11)
T5

(16)
(14)

T6

T1

T6
ME-04539

(1) Timing belt cover No. 2 RH (9) Automatic belt tension adjuster Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
ASSY
(2) Timing belt guide (MT model) (10) Belt idler No. 2 T1: 5 (0.5, 3.7)
(3) Crank sprocket (11) Cam sprocket No. 2 T2: 9.75 (1.0, 7.2)
(4) Timing belt cover No. 2 LH (12) Timing belt T3: 24.5 (2.5, 18.1)
(5) Cam sprocket No. 1 (13) Front timing belt cover T4: 39 (4.0, 28.8)
(6) Belt idler (A) (14) Timing belt cover LH T5: 78 (8.0, 57.5)
(7) Tensioner bracket (15) Crank pulley (MT model) T6: <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-44, INSTAL-
LATION, Crank Pulley.>
(8) Belt idler (B) (16) Crank pulley (CVT model)

ME(H4SO)-6
11LE_US.book 7 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Description
MECHANICAL

3. CYLINDER HEAD AND CAMSHAFT

(1)
(20)
(2) T3
T9 T5 T2 T6

T6 (4) (26)
(22) (25)
T4
(7)

T7
(8)
(3)
(23)
T3
(24)

(6)
(8)

(5) T8
(9)
(10)
(30) (19)
T5
(8)
(14)

(15)

T8 (16)
(7)
T6 T2
(10) (2)
T4 (17)
(29) T3
(21) (18)
(11)
(28) (27) (19)
T2
(12)

(5) (13) T1
T6

(31) T7
T9
T3
(3)
T7
ME-04540

ME(H4SO)-7
 General Description
MECHANICAL

(1) Rocker cover RH (16) Oil filler duct (31) Seal washer
(2) Intake valve rocker ASSY (17) O-ring
(3) Exhaust valve rocker ASSY (18) Rocker cover LH Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(4) Camshaft cap RH (19) Stud bolt T1: 6 (0.6, 4.4)
(5) Oil seal (20) Rocker cover gasket RH T2: 6.4 (0.7, 4.7)
(6) Camshaft RH (21) Rocker cover gasket LH T3: 9.75 (1.0, 7.2)
(7) PLUG (22) Oil switching solenoid valve RH T4: 10 (1.0, 7.4)
(8) Spark plug pipe gasket (23) Oil switching solenoid valve T5: 17 (1.7, 12.5)
holder RH
(9) Cylinder head RH (24) Gasket T6: 18 (1.8, 13.3)
(10) Cylinder head gasket (25) Oil temperature sensor T7: 25 (2.5, 18.4)
(11) Cylinder head LH (26) Variable valve lift diagnosis oil T8: <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-61, INSTAL-
pressure switch RH LATION, Cylinder Head.>
(12) Camshaft LH (27) Oil switching solenoid valve LH T9: <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-54, INSTAL-
LATION, Valve Rocker Assem-
bly.>
(13) Camshaft cap LH (28) Oil switching solenoid valve
holder LH
(14) Oil filler cap (29) Gasket
(15) Gasket (30) Variable valve lift diagnosis oil
pressure switch LH

ME(H4SO)-8
11LE_US.book 9 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Description
MECHANICAL

4. VALVE ROCKER ASSY

T2

T3

(1)

(1)
T1
(5)

(2)

(2)
(4)
T2 (3)

(3)
T2

T3
ME-02691

(1) Intake valve rocker ASSY (4) Exhaust rocker shaft Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Valve rocker nut (5) Exhaust valve rocker arm T1: 6 (0.6, 4.4)
(3) Valve rocker adjusting screw T2: 9.75 (1.0, 7.2)
T3: 25 (2.5, 18.4)

ME(H4SO)-9
11LE_US.book 10 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Description
MECHANICAL

5. CYLINDER HEAD AND VALVE ASSEMBLY

(1) (1)

(4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

(3)

(2)

(2)

(3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

(3)

(4)
(9)
(6)
(7)
(3) (8)

(4)
(9)
(6)
(7)
(8)

ME-04786

(1) Exhaust valve (4) Valve spring seat (7) Retainer

(2) Intake valve (5) Intake valve oil seal (8) Retainer key
(3) Valve guide (6) Valve spring (9) Exhaust valve oil seal

ME(H4SO)-10
11LE_US.book 11 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Description
MECHANICAL

6. CYLINDER BLOCK

T5

T2
T6 (31) T2

(1)
(5)

(7) T10
(32)
(2) (3) (6)

(29) (4)
T2 T6

(32)
T9 T2
(10) (28)
(8) (11)
(9) T2
(10)
(4)

T2 (3)
T6
(27) (15)

(10) (28)
(4)
(14) T8

T9
(26)
T9
T3 (23) (29)
T2
(16) (3)
(10) T2 (22) (12)
(17) (33)
T6
T10
(35) (38) (34) T2

(37) T2
(24)
T4
T5 T2
(21)
(36)
(13)
(25)
(30)

(18)
T1
(20)

T7
(19)

ME-04941

ME(H4SO)-11
 General Description
MECHANICAL

(1) Oil pressure switch (18) Oil pan (35) O-ring

(2) Cylinder block RH (19) Drain plug (36) Oil drain pipe
(3) Service hole plug (20) Drain plug gasket (37) O-ring
(4) Gasket (21) Oil level gauge guide (38) Oil level switch
(5) Oil separator cover (22) Water pump sealing
(6) Water by-pass pipe (23) Oil filter Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(7) Oil pump (24) Gasket T1: 5 (0.5, 3.7)
(8) Front oil seal (25) Water pump hose T2: 6.4 (0.7, 4.7)
(9) Rear oil seal (26) Plug T3: 10 (1.0, 7.4)
(10) O-ring (27) Seal T4: First 12 (1.2, 8.9)
Second 12 (1.2, 8.9)
(11) Service hole cover (28) Seal washer T5: 16 (1.6, 11.8)
(12) Cylinder block LH (29) Washer T6: 25 (2.5, 18.4)
(13) Water pump (30) O-ring T7: 41.7 (4.3, 30.8)
(14) Baffle plate (31) Engine rear hanger T8: 45 (4.6, 33.2)
(15) Oil filter connector (32) Oil pump seal T9: 70 (7.1, 51.6)
(16) Oil strainer (33) Oil level gauge T10: <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-72, INSTAL-
LATION, Cylinder Block.>
(17) Cylinder block lower (34) O-ring

ME(H4SO)-12
 General Description
MECHANICAL

7. CRANKSHAFT AND PISTON

(2)
T2

(1)

(3)

T3

(10)
(4)
(9)
(5)
(6) (12)
(7)

(10) (8) (13)

(11)
T1 (15)
(13)
(14) (14)
(11)
(13) T1

(13) (8) (10)

(16)
(7)
(6)
(12) (5)

(10)

(9)

(19)
(18)
(17)
(18)
(17)
ME-04166

(1) Reinforcement (CVT model) (9) Piston pin (17) Crankshaft bearing #1, #3
(2) Drive plate (CVT model) (10) Snap ring (18) Crankshaft bearing #2, #4
(3) Flywheel (MT model) (11) Connecting rod nut (19) Crankshaft bearing #5
(4) Ball bearing (MT model) (12) Connecting rod
(5) Top ring (13) Connecting rod bearing Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(6) Second ring (14) Connecting rod cap T1: 45 (4.6, 33.2)
(7) Oil ring (15) Crankshaft T2: <Ref. to CVT-132, INSTALLA-
TION, Drive Plate.>
(8) Piston (16) Woodruff key T3: <Ref. to CL-14, INSTALLATION,
Flywheel.>

ME(H4SO)-13
11LE_US.book 14 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Description
MECHANICAL

8. ENGINE MOUNTING

T4 (3)

T1

B
T4

A (2)

T3

(1)
T2

T4

ME-04465

(1) Front mounting bracket (3) Engine mounting bracket Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Front cushion rubber T1: 25 (2.5, 18.4)
T2: 45 (4.6, 33.2)
T3: 58 (5.9, 42.8)
T4: 60 (6.1, 44.3)

ME(H4SO)-14
11LE_US.book 15 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Description
MECHANICAL

C: CAUTION
• Wear appropriate work clothing, including a cap, protective goggles and protective shoes when performing
any work.
• Remove contamination including dirt and corrosion before removal, installation or disassembly.
• Keep the disassembled parts in order and protect them from dust and dirt.
• Before removal, installation or disassembly, be sure to clarify the failure. Avoid unnecessary removal, in-
stallation, disassembly and replacement.
• Vehicle components are extremely hot after driving. Be wary of receiving burns from heated parts.
• Be sure to tighten fasteners including bolts and nuts to the specified torque.
• Place shop jacks or rigid racks at the specified points.
• Before disconnecting connectors of sensors or units, be sure to disconnect the ground cable from the bat-
tery.
• All parts should be thoroughly cleaned, paying special attention to engine oil passages, pistons and bear-
ings.
• Rotating parts and sliding parts such as piston, bearing and gear should be coated with oil prior to assem-
bly.
• Be careful not to let oil, grease or coolant contact the timing belt, clutch disc and flywheel.
• All removed parts, if to be reused, should be reinstalled in the original positions and directions.
• Bolts, nuts and washers should be replaced with new parts as required.
• Even if necessary inspections have been made in advance, proceed with assembly work while making re-
checks.
• Remove or install the engine in an area where chain hoists, lifting devices, etc. are available for ready use.
• Be sure not to damage coated surfaces of body panels with tools, or not to stain seats and windows with
coolant or oil. Place a cover over fender, as required, for protection.
• Prior to starting work, prepare the following:
Service tools, clean cloth, containers to catch coolant and oil, wire ropes, chain hoist, transmission jacks, etc.
• Lift up or lower the vehicle when necessary. Make sure to support the correct positions.
D: PREPARATION TOOL
1. SPECIAL TOOL
ILLUSTRATION TOOL NUMBER DESCRIPTION REMARKS
18231AA010 CAM SPROCKET Used for removing and installing cam sprocket.
WRENCH (LH side)
NOTE:
CAM SPROCKET WRENCH (499207100) can
also be used.

ST18231AA010
1B022XU0 SUBARU SELECT Used for various inspections.
MONITOR III KIT

ST1B022XU0

ME(H4SO)-15
11LE_US.book 16 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Description
MECHANICAL

ILLUSTRATION TOOL NUMBER DESCRIPTION REMARKS

498267800 CYLINDER HEAD • Used for replacing valve guides.
TABLE • Used for removing and installing valve spring.

ST-498267800
498277200 STOPPER SET Used for installing automatic transmission
assembly to engine.

ST-498277200
498457000 ENGINE STAND Used together with ENGINE STAND
ADAPTER RH (499817100).

ST-498457000
498457100 ENGINE STAND Used together with ENGINE STAND
ADAPTER LH (499817100).

ST-498457100
498747300 PISTON GUIDE Used for installing piston in cylinder.

ST-498747300

ME(H4SO)-16
11LE_US.book 17 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Description
MECHANICAL

ILLUSTRATION TOOL NUMBER DESCRIPTION REMARKS

498857100 VALVE OIL SEAL Used for press-fitting of intake and exhaust valve
GUIDE guide oil seals.

ST-498857100
499017100 PISTON PIN GUIDE Used for installing piston pin, piston and con-
necting rod.

ST-499017100
499037100 CONNECTING ROD Used for removing and installing connecting rod
BUSHING bushing.
REMOVER AND
INSTALLER

ST-499037100
499587200 CRANKSHAFT OIL • Used for installing crankshaft oil seal.
SEAL INSTALLER • Used together with CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL
GUIDE (499597100).

ST-499587200
499587500 OIL SEAL • Used for installing the camshaft oil seal.
INSTALLER • Used together with OIL SEAL GUIDE
(499597000).

ST-499587500

ME(H4SO)-17
11LE_US.book 18 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Description
MECHANICAL

ILLUSTRATION TOOL NUMBER DESCRIPTION REMARKS

499587700 CAMSHAFT OIL Used for installing cylinder head plug.
SEAL INSTALLER

ST-499587700
18320AA010 PISTON PIN • Used for removing piston pin.
REMOVER ASSY • PISTON PIN REMOVER ASSY (499097700)
can also be used.

ST18320AA010
499207400 CAM SPROCKET Used for removing and installing cam sprocket.
WRENCH (RH side)

ST-499207400
499497000 TORX® PLUS Used for removing and installing camshaft cap.

ST-499497000
499587100 OIL SEAL Used for installing oil pump oil seal.
INSTALLER

ST-499587100

ME(H4SO)-18
11LE_US.book 19 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Description
MECHANICAL

ILLUSTRATION TOOL NUMBER DESCRIPTION REMARKS

499597000 OIL SEAL GUIDE • Used for installing the camshaft oil seal.
• Used together with CAMSHAFT OIL SEAL
INSTALLER (499587500).

ST-499597000
499597100 CRANKSHAFT OIL • Used for installing crankshaft oil seal.
SEAL GUIDE • Used together with CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL
INSTALLER (499587200).

ST-499597100
499718000 VALVE SPRING Used for removing and installing valve spring.
REMOVER

ST-499718000
499767200 VALVE GUIDE Used for removing valve guides.
REMOVER

ST-499767200
499767400 VALVE GUIDE Used for reaming valve guides.
REAMER

ST-499767400

ME(H4SO)-19
11LE_US.book 20 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Description
MECHANICAL

ILLUSTRATION TOOL NUMBER DESCRIPTION REMARKS

499767700 VALVE GUIDE Used for installing valve guides. (Intake side)
ADJUSTER

ST-499767700
499767800 VALVE GUIDE Used for installing valve guides. (Exhaust side)
ADJUSTER

ST-499767800
499817100 ENGINE STAND • Stand used for engine disassembly and
assembly.
• Used together with ENGINE STAND
ADAPTER RH (498457000) & LH (498457100).

ST-499817100
499977100 CRANK PULLEY Used for removing and installing the crank pulley.
WRENCH (MT model)

ST-499977100
499977400 CRANK PULLEY Used for removing and installing the crank pulley.
WRENCH (CVT model)

ST-499977400

ME(H4SO)-20
11LE_US.book 21 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Description
MECHANICAL

ILLUSTRATION TOOL NUMBER DESCRIPTION REMARKS

499987500 CRANKSHAFT Used for rotating crankshaft.
SOCKET

ST-499987500
18854AA000 ANGLE GAUGE Used for installing the crank pulley.

ST18854AA000
42099AE000 QUICK CONNEC- Used for disconnecting quick connector of the
TOR RELEASE engine compartment.

ST42099AE000
18471AA000 FUEL PIPE Used for inspecting the fuel pressure.
ADAPTER

ST18471AA000
42075AG690 Fuel hose Used for inspecting the fuel pressure.
NOTE:
This is the SUBARU genuine part.

ST42075AG690

ME(H4SO)-21
11LE_US.book 22 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Description
MECHANICAL

ILLUSTRATION TOOL NUMBER DESCRIPTION REMARKS

18354AA000 VALVE ROCKER Used for installing the valve rocker assembly
HOLDER (intake). (2-piece set)

ST18354AA000
18258AA000 SPRING Used for installing the valve rocker assembly
INSTALLER (intake).

ST18258AA000

2. GENERAL TOOL
TOOL NAME REMARKS
Compression gauge Used for measuring compression.
Vacuum gauge Used for measuring intake manifold vacuum.
Oil pressure gauge Used for measuring engine oil pressure.
Fuel pressure gauge Used for measuring fuel pressure.
Timing light Used for measuring ignition timing.

ME(H4SO)-22
 Compression
MECHANICAL

2. Compression 11) Crank the engine by starter motor and read the
value when the needle of the compression gauge
A: INSPECTION becomes stable.
CAUTION: NOTE:
After warming-up, engine becomes very hot. Be • Perform at least two measurements per cylinder,
careful not to burn yourself during measure- and make sure that the values are correct.
ment. • If the compression pressure is out of standard,
1) After warming-up the engine, turn the ignition check or adjust the pistons, valves and cylinders.
switch to OFF. Compression (fully open throttle):
2) Make sure that the battery is fully charged. Standard
3) Remove the fuse of fuel pump from main fuse 1,020 — 1,275 kPa (10.4 — 13.0 kgf/cm2,
box. 148 — 185 psi)
Difference between cylinders
49 kPa (0.5 kgf/cm2, 7 psi) or less
12) After inspection, install the related parts in the
reverse order of removal.

FU-04800

4) Start the engine and run it until it stalls.

5) After the engine stalls, crank it for five more sec-
onds.
6) Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
7) Remove all spark plugs. <Ref. to IG(H4SO)-3,
REMOVAL, Spark Plug.>
8) Fully open the throttle valve.
9) Check the starter motor for satisfactory perfor-
mance and operation.
10) Install the compression gauge to the spark plug
hole.
NOTE:
When using a screw-in type compression gauge,
the screw should be less than 18 mm (0.71 in) long.

ME-00192

ME(H4SO)-23
 Idle Speed
MECHANICAL

3. Idle Speed
A: INSPECTION
1) Before checking the idle speed, check the fol-
lowing item:
(1) Check the air cleaner element is free from
clogging, ignition timing is correct, spark plugs
are in good condition, and hoses are connected
properly.
(2) Check the malfunction indicator light does
not illuminate.
2) Warm up the engine.
3) Read the engine idle speed using Subaru Select
Monitor. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-34, READ CUR-
RENT DATA FOR ENGINE (NORMAL MODE),
OPERATION, Subaru Select Monitor.>
NOTE:
• Idle speed cannot be adjusted manually, be-
cause the idle speed is automatically adjusted.
• If idle speed is out of standard, refer to the Gen-
eral Diagnosis Table under “Engine Control Sys-
tem”. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic
Procedure.>
(1) Check the idle speed when no-loaded.
(Headlight, heater fan, rear defroster, radiator
fan, A/C and etc. are OFF)
Idle speed (No load, and for CVT model, select
lever in “P” or “N” range, for MT model, gear
shift lever in neutral position.):
Standard
675±100 rpm (CVT model)
650±100 rpm (MT model)
(2) Check the idle speed when loaded. (Turn
the A/C switch to “ON” and operate the com-
pressor for at least one minute before measure-
ment.)
Idle speed (A/C on, and for CVT model, select
lever in “P” or “N” range, for MT model, gear
shift lever in neutral position.):
Standard
700 — 850 rpm

ME(H4SO)-24
 Ignition Timing
MECHANICAL

4. Ignition Timing
A: INSPECTION
CAUTION:
After warming-up, engine becomes very hot. Be
careful not to burn yourself at measurement.
1) Before checking the ignition timing, check the
following item:
(1) Check the air cleaner element is free from
clogging, spark plugs are in good condition, and
hoses are connected properly.
(2) Check the malfunction indicator light does
not illuminate.
2) Warm up the engine.
3) Read the ignition timing using Subaru Select
Monitor. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-34, READ CUR-
RENT DATA FOR ENGINE (NORMAL MODE),
OPERATION, Subaru Select Monitor.>
NOTE:
If ignition timing is out of standard, check the igni-
tion control system. Refer to “Engine Control Sys-
tem”. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic
Procedure.>
Ignition timing [BTDC/rpm]:
Standard
15°±10°/675 (CVT model)
10°±10°/650 (MT model)

ME(H4SO)-25
11LE_US.book 26 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Intake Manifold Vacuum

MECHANICAL

5. Intake Manifold Vacuum

A: INSPECTION
1) Warm up the engine.
2) Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from
the intake manifold, and attach the vacuum gauge.

ME-04467

3) Keep the engine at idle speed and read the vac-

uum gauge indication.
NOTE:
Condition of engine inside can be diagnosed by ob-
serving the behavior of the vacuum gauge needle
as described in table below.
Intake manifold vacuum (at idling, A/C OFF):
Standard
–60.0 kPa (–450 mmHg, –17.72 inHg) or
more
4) After inspection, install the related parts in the
reverse order of removal.
Diagnosis of engine condition by inspection of intake manifold vacuum
Vacuum gauge needle behavior Possible engine condition
1. Needle is steady but lower than standard value. This tendency Leakage around intake manifold gasket, disconnection or
becomes more evident as engine temperature rises. damage of vacuum hose
2. Needle intermittently drops to position lower than standard value. Leakage around cylinder
3. Needle drops suddenly and intermittently from standard value. Sticky valve
4. When engine speed is gradually increased, needle begins to Weak or broken valve springs
vibrate rapidly at certain speed, and then vibration increases as
engine speed increases.
5. Needle vibrates above and below standard value in narrow range. Defective ignition system

ME(H4SO)-26
 Engine Oil Pressure
MECHANICAL

6. Engine Oil Pressure Engine oil pressure:

Standard
A: INSPECTION 98 kPa (1.0 kgf/cm2, 14 psi) or more (at 600
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. rpm)
294 kPa (3.0 kgf/cm2, 43 psi) or more (at
5,000 rpm)
6) After inspection, install the related parts in the
reverse order of removal.

IG-02107

2) Remove the oil pressure switch. <Ref. to

LU(H4SO)-24, REMOVAL, Oil Pressure Switch.>
3) Install the oil pressure gauge to cylinder block.

ME-00196

4) Connect the battery ground terminal.

IG-02107

5) Start the engine, and check the oil pressure.

NOTE:
• Standard value is based on an engine oil temper-
ature of 80°C (176°F).
• If the oil pressure is out of specification, check oil
pump, oil filter and lubrication line. <Ref. to
LU(H4SO)-43, INSPECTION, Engine Lubrication
System Trouble in General.>
• If the oil pressure warning light is ON and oil
pressure is within specification, check the oil pres-
sure switch. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-43, INSPECTION,
Engine Lubrication System Trouble in General.>

ME(H4SO)-27
 Fuel Pressure
MECHANICAL

7. Fuel Pressure 5) Check the fuel pressure after warming up the en-
gine.
A: INSPECTION NOTE:
CAUTION: • The fuel pressure gauge registers 10 to 20 kPa
• Before removing the fuel pressure gauge, re- (0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm2, 1 to 3 psi) higher than standard
lease the fuel pressure. values during high-altitude operations.
• Be careful not to spill fuel. • Check or replace the fuel pump and fuel delivery
• Catch the fuel from hoses using a container line if the fuel pressure is out of the standard.
or cloth. Fuel pressure:
1) Release the fuel pressure. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)- Standard
48, RELEASING OF FUEL PRESSURE, PROCE- 340 — 400 kPa (3.5 — 4.1 kgf/cm2, 49 — 58
DURE, Fuel.> psi)
2) Open the fuel filler lid and remove the fuel filler 6) After inspection, install the related parts in the
cap. reverse order of removal.
3) Disconnect the fuel delivery hose and connect
the fuel pressure gauge.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to spill fuel.
• Catch the fuel from hoses using a container
or cloth.
(1) Attach ST to the fuel delivery pipe and push
ST1 in the direction of arrow mark to disconnect
the quick connector of the fuel delivery hose.
ST 42099AE000 QUICK CONNECTOR RE-
LEASE

ST

FU-05602

(2) Connect the fuel pressure gauge with ST2

and ST3.
NOTE:
ST2 is a SUBARU genuine part.
ST2 42075AG690 FUEL HOSE
ST3 18471AA000 FUEL PIPE ADAPTER

ST3

ST2

ME-04897

4) Start the engine.

ME(H4SO)-28
 Valve Clearance
MECHANICAL

8. Valve Clearance 8) When inspecting #2 and #4 cylinders

(1) Disconnect the ignition coil from spark plug
A: INSPECTION on LH side. <Ref. to IG(H4SO)-3, LH SIDE, RE-
MOVAL, Spark Plug.>
CAUTION:
If engine oil is spilt onto the exhaust pipe, wipe (2) Place a suitable container under the vehicle.
it off with cloth to avoid emission of smoke or (3) Disconnect the PCV hose from the rocker
causing a fire. cover LH.
(4) Remove the bolts, then remove the rocker
NOTE: cover LH.
Inspection of valve clearance should be performed 9) Set #1 cylinder piston to top dead center of com-
while engine is cold. pression stroke by rotating the crank pulley clock-
1) Lift up the vehicle. wise using the socket wrench.
2) Remove the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35, RE-
NOTE:
MOVAL, Front Under Cover.>
3) Lower the vehicle. When the arrow mark (A) on cam sprocket LH is at
the top position, the #1 cylinder piston is at top
4) Disconnect the ground cable from battery.
dead center of the compression stroke.
(A)

IG-02107
ME-00200
5) Remove the timing belt cover LH.
10) Measure #1 cylinder valve clearance by using
thickness gauge (A).
NOTE:
• Insert the thickness gauge (A) in as horizontally
as possible with respect to the valve stem end face.
• Lift up the vehicle, and then measure the ex-
haust valve clearances.
• If the measured value is not within the inspection
value, take notes of the value in order to adjust the
valve clearance later on.
ME-00199
Valve clearance (inspection value):
6) Remove the fuel injector. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-
Intake
34, REMOVAL, Fuel Injector.>
0.20±0.04 mm (0.0079±0.0016 in)
7) When inspecting #1 and #3 cylinders
Exhaust
(1) Disconnect the ignition coil from spark plug
on RH side. <Ref. to IG(H4SO)-3, RH SIDE, 0.25±0.04 mm (0.0098±0.0016 in)
REMOVAL, Spark Plug.> (A)

(2) Place a suitable container under the vehicle.

(3) Disconnect the PCV hose from the rocker
cover RH.
(4) Remove the bolts, then remove the rocker
cover RH.

ME-02696

ME(H4SO)-29
 Valve Clearance
MECHANICAL

11) Measure the valve clearance in #3, #2 and #4 2) Adjust the #1 cylinder valve clearance.
cylinder in the same measurement procedure as #1 (1) Loosen the valve rocker nut and screw.
cylinder in this order. (2) Set a suitable thickness gauge.
NOTE: (3) While noting the valve clearance, tighten the
• Be sure to set the cylinder pistons to their re- valve rocker adjusting screw.
spective top dead centers on compression stroke (4) When the specified valve clearance is ob-
before measuring valve clearances. tained, tighten the valve rocker nut.
• By rotating the crank pulley clockwise and turn- NOTE:
ing the cam sprocket LH at every 90° from the state • Insert a thickness gauge in a direction as hori-
that #1 cylinder piston is on the top dead center of zontal as possible with respect to the valve stem
compression stroke, #3, #2 and #4 cylinder pistons end face.
come to the top dead center of compression stroke • Lift up the vehicle and adjust the exhaust valve
in this order. clearances.
12) If necessary, adjust the valve clearance. <Ref.
to ME(H4SO)-30, ADJUSTMENT, Valve Clear- Valve clearance (adjustment value):
ance.> Intake
13) After inspection, install the related parts in the 0.20±0.04 mm (0.0079±0.0016 in)
reverse order of removal. Exhaust
0.25±0.04 mm (0.0098±0.0016 in)
NOTE:
Use a new rocker cover gasket. Tightening torque:
9.75 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ft-lb)
B: ADJUSTMENT
CAUTION:
If engine oil is spilt onto the exhaust pipe, wipe
it off with cloth to avoid emission of smoke or
causing a fire.
NOTE:
Adjustment of valve clearance should be per-
formed while engine is cold.
1) Set #1 cylinder piston to top dead center of com-
pression stroke by rotating the crank pulley clock- ME-00203
wise using the socket wrench. 3) Adjust the valve clearance in #3, #2 and #4 cyl-
NOTE: inder in the same adjustment procedure as #1 cyl-
When the arrow mark (A) on cam sprocket LH is at inder in this order.
the top position, the #1 cylinder piston is at top NOTE:
dead center of the compression stroke. • Be sure to set the cylinder pistons to their re-
spective top dead centers on compression stroke
(A)
before adjusting valve clearances.
• By rotating the crank pulley clockwise and turn-
ing the cam sprocket LH at every 90° from the state
that #1 cylinder piston is on the top dead center of
compression stroke, #3, #2 and #4 cylinder pistons
come to the top dead center of compression stroke
in this order.
4) Ensure the valve clearances of each cylinder are
ME-00200
within specifications. If necessary, readjust the
valve clearances.
5) After adjustment, install the related parts in the
reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
Use a new rocker cover gasket.

ME(H4SO)-30
 Engine Assembly
MECHANICAL

9. Engine Assembly 12) Remove the bolt, and disconnect the bulkhead
harness connector from the engine harness con-
A: REMOVAL nector and rear engine hanger.
1) Change the front hood damper mounting posi-
tion from (A) to (B), and completely open the front
hood.
Tightening torque:
20 N·m (2.0 kgf-m, 14.8 ft-lb)

(A) (A)

(B) (B) FU-05129

13) Slide the engine harness connector in the di-

rection of the arrow and remove it from the rear en-
gine hanger.

ME-04396

2) Remove the V-belt covers.

3) Collect the refrigerant from A/C system. <Ref. to
AC-20, Refrigerant Recovery Procedure.>
4) Release the fuel pressure. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-
48, RELEASING OF FUEL PRESSURE, PROCE-
DURE, Fuel.>
5) Disconnect the ground cable from battery.
FU-05247

14) Disconnect connector (A) and terminal (B) from

the generator, and remove the generator cord from
clip (C).
15) Disconnect connector (D) from the A/C com-
pressor.
(A) (B) (C)

IG-02107

6) Open the fuel filler lid and remove the fuel filler
cap.
7) Remove the air intake duct. <Ref. to IN(H4SO)- (D)
9, REMOVAL, Air Intake Duct.>
8) Remove the air intake boot assembly. <Ref. to
ME-04240
IN(H4SO)-8, REMOVAL, Air Intake Boot.>
9) Remove the radiator. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-19, 16) Remove the clip which secure the generator
REMOVAL, Radiator.> cord to the intake manifold protector LH.
10) Remove the front exhaust pipe. <Ref. to
EX(H4SO)-4, REMOVAL, Front Exhaust Pipe.>
11) Lower the vehicle.

ME-04241

ME(H4SO)-31
 Engine Assembly
MECHANICAL

17) Disconnect the following hoses. 20) Disconnect the ground cable on the engine
(1) A/C pressure hose <Ref. to AC-68, RE- side.
MOVAL, Hose and Pipe.>
(2) Brake booster vacuum hose

ME-04533

ME-04898

(3) Heater inlet hose and heater outlet hose

ME-03377

21) Lower the vehicle.

22) Separate the torque converter clutch from the
ME-04216 drive plate. (CVT model)
18) Remove the power steering pump. (1) Remove the throttle body. <Ref. to
(1) Remove the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)- FU(H4SO)-15, REMOVAL, Throttle Body.>
42, REMOVAL, V-belt.> (2) Remove the manifold absolute pressure
(2) Disconnect the connector (A) from power sensor. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-32, REMOVAL,
steering pump, and remove the power steering Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor.>
pump together with the power steering pump (3) Remove the service hole plug.
bracket from engine and stopper rod. (4) Insert the wrench into the crank pulley bolt,
and rotate the crank pulley to remove the four
bolts which hold torque converter clutch to the
(A) drive plate.

ME-04908

(3) Mount the power steering pump together

with the power steering pump bracket on RH
ME-00212
side wheel apron.
19) Lift up the vehicle. 23) Disconnect the fuel delivery hose (A) and evap-
oration hose (B).
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to spill fuel.
• Catch the fuel from hoses using a container
or cloth.

ME(H4SO)-32
11LE_US.book 33 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Engine Assembly
MECHANICAL

(1) Attach ST to the fuel delivery pipe and push 27) Lift up the vehicle.
ST in the direction of arrow mark to disconnect CAUTION:
the quick connector of the fuel delivery hose
When lifting up the vehicle, raise up wire ropes
(A).
at the same time.
ST 42099AE000 QUICK CONNECTOR RE-
28) Remove the bolts which secure the engine
LEASE
mounting onto the engine, and remove the engine
(2) Remove the clip and disconnect the evapo- mounting.
ration hose (B) from the evaporation pipe.

(A)

ST

(B)

ME-04247
FU-04950
29) Remove the bolts and nuts which hold the low-
24) Support the engine with a lifting device and er side of transmission to the engine.
wire ropes.
• CVT model

LU-00222
ME-04228
25) Remove the stopper rod.
• MT model

ME-04422
MT-00077
26) Remove the bolt and nut which secure engine
30) Lower the vehicle.
mounting to the cradle.
CAUTION:
When lifting down the vehicle, lower wire ropes
at the same time.

ME-04246

ME(H4SO)-33
 Engine Assembly
MECHANICAL

31) Support the transmission with a garage jack. • MT model

NOTE:
Fine adjustment of the transmission height can be
performed with this operation.

(A)
(B)

MT-01524

33) Remove the engine from vehicle.

(1) Slightly raise the engine.
ME-04959 (2) Adjust the height of the transmission with
garage jack.
(A) Transmission (3) Move the engine horizontally until main
(B) Garage jack shaft is withdrawn from clutch cover. (MT mod-
el)
32) Separation of engine and transmission (4) Slowly move the engine away from engine
CAUTION: compartment.
Before removing the engine away from trans- NOTE:
mission, check to be sure no work has been Be careful not to damage adjacent parts or body
overlooked. panels with crank pulley, oil level gauge, etc.
(1) Remove the starter. <Ref. to SC(H4SO)-9,
REMOVAL, Starter.> B: INSTALLATION
(2) Attach the ST to the torque converter clutch 1) Apply a small amount of grease to splines of
case. (CVT model) main shaft. (MT model)
ST 498277200 STOPPER SET
Grease:
NICHIMOLY N-130 or equivalent
2) Position the engine in engine compartment and
align it with transmission.
NOTE:
Be careful not to damage adjacent parts or body
panels with crank pulley, oil level gauge, etc.
3) Tighten the bolts which hold upper side of trans-
ST mission to engine.
ME-04960 Tightening torque:
(3) Remove the bolts which hold the upper side 50 N·m (5.1 kgf-m, 36.9 ft-lb)
of the transmission to the engine. • CVT model
• CVT model

ME-04227

ME-04227

ME(H4SO)-34
 Engine Assembly
MECHANICAL

• MT model • MT model

MT-01524 MT-00077

4) Remove the garage jack. 9) Set the engine mounting, and tighten the bolts
5) Remove the ST from torque converter clutch which hold engine mounting to the engine.
case. (CVT model)
Tightening torque:
NOTE: 58 N·m (5.9 kgf-m, 42.8 ft-lb)
Be careful not to drop the ST into the torque con-
verter clutch case when removing the ST.
ST 498277200 STOPPER SET

ME-04247

ST 10) Lower the vehicle.

ME-04960 CAUTION:
When lifting down the vehicle, lower wire ropes
6) Install the starter. <Ref. to SC(H4SO)-9, IN- at the same time.
STALLATION, Starter.>
11) Attach the bolts and nuts which secure engine
7) Lift up the vehicle.
mounting to the cradle.
CAUTION:
Tightening torque:
When lifting up the vehicle, raise up wire ropes
60 N·m (6.1 kgf-m, 44.3 ft-lb)
at the same time.
8) Attach the bolts and nuts which hold lower side
of the transmission to engine.
Tightening torque:
50 N·m (5.1 kgf-m, 36.9 ft-lb)
• CVT model

ME-04246

ME-04228

ME(H4SO)-35
 Engine Assembly
MECHANICAL

12) Install the stopper rod. 15) Lift up the vehicle.

Tightening torque: 16) Connect the ground cable.
36 N·m (3.7 kgf-m, 26.6 ft-lb) Tightening torque:
7.5 N·m (0.8 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb)

ME-04422

13) Remove the lifting device and wire ropes. ME-04533

LU-00222 ME-03377

14) Install the torque converter clutch to drive plate. 17) Lower the vehicle.
(CVT model) 18) Install the power steering pump.
(1) Insert the wrench into the crank pulley bolt, (1) Install the power steering pump together
and rotate the crank pulley to attach the four with the power steering pump bracket to engine
bolts which hold torque converter clutch to the and stopper rod, and connect the connector (A)
drive plate. to the power steering pump.
NOTE: Tightening torque:
Be careful not to drop bolts into the torque convert- Refer to “COMPONENT” of “STARTING/
er clutch case. CHARGING SYSTEMS” for the tightening
Tightening torque: torque. <Ref. to SC(H4SO)-7, GENERATOR
BRACKET, COMPONENT, General Descrip-
25 N·m (2.5 kgf-m, 18.4 ft-lb)
tion.>

(A)

ME-00212
ME-04908
(2) Fit the plug to service hole.
(2) Install the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-42,
(3) Install the throttle body. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-
INSTALLATION, V-belt.>
15, INSTALLATION, Throttle Body.>
(4) Install the manifold absolute pressure sen-
sor. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-32, INSTALLATION,
Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor.>

ME(H4SO)-36
 Engine Assembly
MECHANICAL

19) Connect the following hoses. 25) Install the radiator. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-20, IN-
(1) Fuel delivery hose STALLATION, Radiator.>
(2) Evaporation hose 26) Install the air intake boot assembly. <Ref. to
(3) Heater inlet hose and heater outlet hose IN(H4SO)-8, INSTALLATION, Air Intake Boot.>
(4) Brake booster vacuum hose 27) Install the air intake duct. <Ref. to IN(H4SO)-9,
(5) A/C pressure hose <Ref. to AC-68, INSTAL- INSTALLATION, Air Intake Duct.>
LATION, Hose and Pipe.> 28) Connect the battery ground terminal.
20) Install the clip which secure the generator cord
to the intake manifold protector LH.

IG-02107

29) Fill engine coolant. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-13,

ME-04241 FILLING OF ENGINE COOLANT, REPLACE-
21) Connect connector (D) to the A/C compressor. MENT, Engine Coolant.>
22) Install the generator cord to clip (C), and con- 30) Charge the A/C system with refrigerant. <Ref.
nect connector (A) and terminal (B) to the genera- to AC-21, PROCEDURE, Refrigerant Charging
tor. Procedure.>
31) Check the CVTF level and replenish it if neces-
Tightening torque: sary. (CVT model) <Ref. to CVT-37, ADJUST-
15 N·m (1.5 kgf-m, 11.1 ft-lb) MENT, CVTF.>
(A) (B) (C) 32) Install the V-belt cover.
33) Change the front hood damper mounting posi-
tion from (B) to (A), and close the front hood.
Tightening torque:
20 N·m (2.0 kgf-m, 14.8 ft-lb)

(D)
(A) (A)

ME-04240 (B) (B)

23) Connect the engine harness connector to the
bulkhead harness connector, attach it to the rear
engine hanger, and fasten with bolt.
Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb) ME-04396

C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the pipes, hoses, connectors and
clamps are securely connected.
2) Check that the engine coolant is up to specified
level.
3) Check CVTF is at the specified level. (CVT mod-
el)
4) Start the engine and check for exhaust gas leak-
age, engine coolant leakage, fuel leakage, noise or
FU-05129
vibration.
24) Install the front exhaust pipe. <Ref. to
EX(H4SO)-5, INSTALLATION, Front Exhaust
Pipe.>

ME(H4SO)-37
 Engine Mounting
MECHANICAL

10.Engine Mounting 9) Remove the stopper rod.

A: REMOVAL
1) Change the front hood damper mounting posi-
tion from (A) to (B), and completely open the front
hood.
Tightening torque:
20 N·m (2.0 kgf-m, 14.8 ft-lb)

(A) (A)
ME-04422

10) Remove the bolt and nut which secure engine

(B) (B) mounting to the cradle.

ME-04396

2) Disconnect the ground cable from battery.

ME-04249

11) Lift up the vehicle.

CAUTION:
When lifting up the vehicle, raise up wire ropes
at the same time.
12) Remove the bolts which secure the engine
IG-02107 mounting onto the engine, and remove the engine
3) Remove the radiator main fan motor assembly mounting.
and radiator sub fan motor assembly. <Ref. to
CO(H4SO)-23, REMOVAL, Radiator Main Fan and
Fan Motor.> <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-24, REMOVAL,
Radiator Sub Fan and Fan Motor.>
4) Lift up the vehicle.
5) Remove the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35, RE-
MOVAL, Front Under Cover.>
6) Remove the front exhaust pipe. <Ref. to
EX(H4SO)-4, REMOVAL, Front Exhaust Pipe.>
7) Lower the vehicle. ME-04247
8) Support the engine with a lifting device and wire
ropes.

LU-00222

ME(H4SO)-38
 Engine Mounting
MECHANICAL

B: INSTALLATION 5) Remove the lifting device and wire ropes.

1) Set the engine mounting, and tighten the bolts
which hold engine mounting to the engine.
Tightening torque:
58 N·m (5.9 kgf-m, 42.8 ft-lb)

LU-00222

6) Lift up the vehicle.

7) Install the front exhaust pipe. <Ref. to
EX(H4SO)-5, INSTALLATION, Front Exhaust
Pipe.>
ME-04247
8) Install the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35, INSTAL-
2) Lower the vehicle. LATION, Front Under Cover.>
CAUTION: 9) Lower the vehicle.
When lifting down the vehicle, lower wire ropes 10) Install the radiator main fan motor assembly
at the same time. and radiator sub fan motor assembly. <Ref. to
3) Attach the bolts and nuts which secure engine CO(H4SO)-23, INSTALLATION, Radiator Main
mounting to the cradle. Fan and Fan Motor.> <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-24, IN-
STALLATION, Radiator Sub Fan and Fan Motor.>
Tightening torque: 11) Connect the ground cable to battery.
60 N·m (6.1 kgf-m, 44.3 ft-lb)

IG-02107
ME-04249
12) Change the front hood damper mounting posi-
4) Install the stopper rod. tion from (B) to (A), and close the front hood.
Tightening torque: Tightening torque:
36 N·m (3.7 kgf-m, 26.6 ft-lb) 20 N·m (2.0 kgf-m, 14.8 ft-lb)

(A) (A)

(B) (B)

ME-04422 ME-04396

ME(H4SO)-39
11LE_US.book 40 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Engine Mounting
MECHANICAL

C: DISASSEMBLY 2) Install the front cushion rubber to the engine

mounting bracket.
1) Remove the front cushion rubber from the en-
gine mounting bracket. Tightening torque:
25 N·m (2.5 kgf-m, 18.4 ft-lb)

ME-04251

2) Remove the front cushion rubber from the front ME-04251

mounting bracket. E: INSPECTION

Check that the engine mounting does not have de-
formation, cracks and any other damage.

ME-04252

D: ASSEMBLY
1) Install the front cushion rubber to the front
mounting bracket.
Tightening torque:
45 N·m (4.6 kgf-m, 33.2 ft-lb)

ME-04252

ME(H4SO)-40
11LE_US.book 41 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Preparation for Overhaul

MECHANICAL

11.Preparation for Overhaul

A: PROCEDURE
1) After removing the engine from vehicle body, at-
tach the ST to the engine as shown in the figure.
ST1 498457000 ENGINE STAND ADAPTER
RH
ST2 498457100 ENGINE STAND ADAPTER
LH
ST3 499817100 ENGINE STAND

ST3 ST1
ST2
ME-00221

2) In this section the procedures described under

each index are all connected and stated in order.
Engine overhaul will be completed when you go
through all steps in the procedure.
Therefore, in this section, to conduct the particular
procedure within the flow of a section, you need to
go back and conduct the procedure described pre-
viously in order to do that particular procedure.

ME(H4SO)-41
 V-belt
MECHANICAL

12.V-belt 3) Remove the bolt securing the idler pulley to the

A/C compressor bracket, and remove the idler pul-
A: REMOVAL ley.
NOTE:
When replacing the single part, perform the work
with the engine installed to vehicle body.
1. V-BELT
1) Remove the V-belt covers.
2) Remove the air intake duct. <Ref. to IN(H4SO)-
9, REMOVAL, Air Intake Duct.>
3) Attach the tool to the V-belt tensioner assembly,
and rotate the tool clockwise to loosen and remove ME-04385
the V-belt.
B: INSTALLATION
1. V-BELT
Install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• When reusing the V-belt, wipe off dust and
water with cloth.
• Do not use the V-belt if there is any oil, grease
or coolant on the belt.
• Be careful not to rub the V-belt end surface
with bare hands; exposed core may cause inju-
ry.
• Wipe off any dust, oil and water on the groove
of each pulley with cloth.

(E)
(F) (G)

(D)

(B)

ME-04383 (A)
(C)
2. V-BELT TENSIONER ASSEMBLY AND
IDLER PULLEY ME-04386
1) Remove the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-42, V-
(A) V-belt
BELT, REMOVAL, V-belt.>
(B) V-belt tensioner ASSY
2) Remove the bolt securing the V-belt tensioner
assembly to the power steering pump bracket, and (C) Crank pulley
remove the V-belt tensioner assembly. (D) Idler pulley
(E) Generator pulley
(F) Power steering pump pulley
(G) A/C compressor pulley

ME-04384

ME(H4SO)-42
 V-belt
MECHANICAL

2. V-BELT TENSIONER ASSEMBLY AND C: INSPECTION

IDLER PULLEY 1) Check the V-belt for cracks, tear or wear.
Install in the reverse order of removal. 2) Remove the air intake duct. <Ref. to IN(H4SO)-
Tightening torque: 9, REMOVAL, Air Intake Duct.>
33 N·m (3.4 kgf-m, 24.3 ft-lb) 3) Check the V-belt tensioner assembly and idler
pulley for deformation, cracks or other damages.
4) Check that the V-belt tension indicator (A) is
within the limit (B).

(B) (A)

ME-04385

Tightening torque:
20 N·m (2.0 kgf-m, 14.8 ft-lb)

ME-04384
ME-04387

ME(H4SO)-43
 Crank Pulley
MECHANICAL

13.Crank Pulley (2) Draw reference lines (A) and (B) using a
marker to set the socket to the crank pulley bolt
A: REMOVAL as shown in the figure.
NOTE: ST 499977400 CRANK PULLEY WRENCH
(CVT MODEL)
When replacing the single part, perform the work
with the engine installed to vehicle body. ST 499977100 CRANK PULLEY WRENCH
(MT MODEL)
1) Remove the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-42,
REMOVAL, V-belt.> NOTE:
2) Use the ST to lock the crank pulley, and remove Set the socket onto the crank pulley bolt so that ref-
the crank pulley bolt. erence lines (A) and (B) is visible.
ST 499977400 CRANK PULLEY WRENCH
(CVT MODEL)
ST 499977100 CRANK PULLEY WRENCH
(MT MODEL)

(A) (B) (A) (B)

(a) (b)

ST

ME-04524

3) Remove the crank pulley.

B: INSTALLATION
ST
1. METHOD WITHOUT ANGLE GAUGE
(A)
1) Clean the crankshaft thread using compressed (B)
air.
ME-04945
2) Install the crank pulley.
3) Apply engine oil to the crank pulley bolt seat and (a) When using 6-point socket
thread. (b) When using 12-point socket
4) Tighten the crank pulley bolts.
(1) Use the ST to lock the crank pulley, and (3) Draw end line (C) on ST using a marker at
temporarily tighten the crank pulley bolt. the same position as reference line (B) was
ST 499977400 CRANK PULLEY WRENCH drawn on the socket in step (2).
(CVT MODEL) ST 499977400 CRANK PULLEY WRENCH
ST 499977100 CRANK PULLEY WRENCH (CVT MODEL)
(MT MODEL) ST 499977100 CRANK PULLEY WRENCH
Tightening torque: (MT MODEL)
47 N·m (4.8 kgf-m, 34.7 ft-lb)

(C)

ST ST

(B)
ME-04527

ME-04525

ME(H4SO)-44
 Crank Pulley
MECHANICAL

(4) Use the ST to lock the crank pulley, and (3) Set the ST2, use the ST1 to lock the crank
tighten the crank pulley bolt to the angle where pulley, and tighten the crank pulley bolt to the
reference line (A) and end line (C) are aligned. specified angle.
ST 499977400 CRANK PULLEY WRENCH ST1 499977400 CRANK PULLEY WRENCH
(CVT MODEL) (CVT MODEL)
ST 499977100 CRANK PULLEY WRENCH ST1 499977100 CRANK PULLEY WRENCH
(MT MODEL) (MT MODEL)
NOTE: ST2 18854AA000 ANGLE GAUGE
It should be approx. 60° when reference line (A) NOTE:
and end line (C) are aligned. Attach the magnet used for securing the ST2 (AN-
Tightening angle: GLE GAUGE) to ST1.
60°±5° Tightening angle:
60°±5°

(C)

ST1
ST

(A) ST2
ME-04528

5) Install the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-42, IN- ME-04530

STALLATION, V-belt.> (4) Install the radiator main fan motor assembly
and radiator sub motor assembly. <Ref. to
2. METHOD WITH ANGLE GAUGE CO(H4SO)-23, INSTALLATION, Radiator Main
1) Clean the crankshaft thread using compressed air. Fan and Fan Motor.> <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-24,
2) Install the crank pulley. INSTALLATION, Radiator Sub Fan and Fan
3) Apply engine oil to the crank pulley bolt seat and Motor.>
thread. 5) Install the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-42, IN-
4) Tighten the crank pulley bolts. STALLATION, V-belt.>
(1) Remove the radiator main fan motor assem-
bly and radiator sub motor assembly. <Ref. to C: INSPECTION
CO(H4SO)-23, REMOVAL, Radiator Main Fan Check that the crank pulley has no deformation,
and Fan Motor.> <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-24, RE- cracks or other damages.
MOVAL, Radiator Sub Fan and Fan Motor.>
(2) Use the ST1 to lock the crank pulley, and
temporarily tighten the crank pulley bolt.
ST1 499977400 CRANK PULLEY WRENCH
(CVT MODEL)
ST1 499977100 CRANK PULLEY WRENCH
(MT MODEL)
Tightening torque:
47 N·m (4.8 kgf-m, 34.7 ft-lb)

ST1

ME-04529

ME(H4SO)-45
 Timing Belt Cover
MECHANICAL

14.Timing Belt Cover 3) Install the stopper rod.

Tightening torque:
A: REMOVAL 36 N·m (3.7 kgf-m, 26.6 ft-lb)
1) Remove the crank pulley. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-
44, REMOVAL, Crank Pulley.>
2) Remove the stopper rod.

ME-04422

4) Install the crank pulley. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-44,

INSTALLATION, Crank Pulley.>
ME-04422

3) Remove the timing belt cover LH (A). C: INSPECTION

4) Remove the front timing belt cover (B). Check the timing belt cover for damage.

(A)

(B)

ME-04424

B: INSTALLATION
1) Install the front timing belt cover (B).
Tightening torque:
5 N·m (0.5 kgf-m, 3.7 ft-lb)
2) Install the timing belt cover LH (A).
Tightening torque:
5 N·m (0.5 kgf-m, 3.7 ft-lb)

(A)

(B)

ME-04424

ME(H4SO)-46
 Timing Belt
MECHANICAL

15.Timing Belt 4) If the alignment mark or arrow mark (which indi-

cates the direction of rotation) on timing belt fade
A: REMOVAL away, put new marks before removing the timing
belt as shown in procedures below.
NOTE:
(1) Use the ST to turn crankshaft. Align the
• When replacing the single part, perform the work
mark (a) of sprocket to the mark (b) of oil pump,
with the engine installed to vehicle body.
and then ensure the right side cam sprocket
• When performing the work with the engine in-
mark (c), cam cap and cylinder head matching
stalled to body, the following parts must also be re-
surface (d) or left side cam sprocket mark (e),
moved/installed.
timing belt cover notch (f) are properly adjusted.
• Radiator main fan motor assembly <Ref. to
ST 499987500 CRANKSHAFT SOCKET
CO(H4SO)-23, REMOVAL, Radiator Main Fan
and Fan Motor.> <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-23, IN-
STALLATION, Radiator Main Fan and Fan Mo-
tor.>
• Radiator sub fan motor assembly <Ref. to
CO(H4SO)-24, REMOVAL, Radiator Sub Fan
and Fan Motor.> <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-24, IN-
STALLATION, Radiator Sub Fan and Fan Mo-
tor.>
• When performing the work with the engine in- ST
stalled to body, protect the radiator with cardboards ME-00231
or blankets.
1. TIMING BELT
(d)
1) Remove the crank pulley. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-
44, REMOVAL, Crank Pulley.>
2) Remove the timing belt cover. <Ref. to (c)
ME(H4SO)-46, REMOVAL, Timing Belt Cover.>
3) Remove the timing belt guide. (MT model)

(b) (a)

(f)

ME-00065

(e)

ME-02533

ME(H4SO)-47
11LE_US.book 48 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Timing Belt
MECHANICAL

(2) Using white paint, put an alignment mark or 2. BELT IDLER AND AUTOMATIC BELT
an arrow mark on timing belts in relation to the TENSION ADJUSTER ASSEMBLY
crank sprocket and cam sprockets. 1) Remove the belt idler.

ME-02967
ME-03449
Z1: 46.8 teeth 2) Remove the automatic belt tension adjuster as-
Z2: 43.7 teeth sembly.

Z1 Z2

ME-00234
ME-00238
5) Remove the belt idler (A).
6) Remove the belt idler No. 2 (B). B: INSTALLATION
1. AUTOMATIC BELT TENSION ADJUST-
ER ASSEMBLY AND BELT IDLER
1) Prepare for installation of the automatic belt ten-
sion adjuster assembly.
CAUTION:
• Always use a vertical type pressing tool to
move the adjuster rod down.
• Do not use a lateral type vise.
(A) • Push the adjuster rod vertically.
(B) ME-02968
• Press-in the push adjuster rod gradually tak-
7) Remove the timing belt. ing three minutes or more.
• Do not allow press pressure to exceed 9,807
N (1,000 kgf, 2,205 lb).
• Push in the adjuster rod to the end face of the
cylinder. However, do not push in the adjuster
rod below the end face of the cylinder. Doing so
may damage the cylinder.
• Do not release the press pressure until stop-
per pin is completely inserted.
(1) Attach the automatic belt tension adjuster
ME-00236
assembly to vertical pressing tool.
(2) Slowly push in the adjuster rod with a pres-
sure of 165 N (16.8 kgf, 37.1 lbf) or more until
the adjuster rod is aligned with the stopper pin
hole in the cylinder.

ME(H4SO)-48
 Timing Belt
MECHANICAL

2. TIMING BELT
1) Prepare for installation of the automatic belt ten-
sion adjuster assembly. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-48,
AUTOMATIC BELT TENSION ADJUSTER AS-
SEMBLY AND BELT IDLER, INSTALLATION,
Timing Belt.>
2) Align the mark (B) on oil pump with the mark (A)
on crank sprocket.

ME-00239
(A) (B)
(3) With a 2 mm (0.08 in) dia. stopper pin or a 2
mm (0.08 in) (nominal) dia. hex wrench inserted
into the stopper pin hole in cylinder, secure the
adjuster rod.

ME-03975

3) Turn the camshaft sprocket No. 2 using ST1,

and turn the camshaft sprocket No. 1 using ST2 so
that their alignment marks (A) come to top posi-
tions.
ST1 18231AA010 CAM SPROCKET
ME-00350 WRENCH
2) Install the automatic belt tension adjuster as- NOTE:
sembly. CAM SPROCKET WRENCH (499207100) can
also be used.
Tightening torque: ST2 499207400 CAM SPROCKET WRENCH
39 N·m (4.0 kgf-m, 28.8 ft-lb)
(A)

ME-00243
ME-00241
4) While aligning the alignment mark (B) on timing
3) Install the belt idlers. belt with the mark (A) on sprockets, position the
Tightening torque: timing belt properly.
39 N·m (4.0 kgf-m, 28.8 ft-lb)

ME-00244
ME-03449

ME(H4SO)-49
 Timing Belt
MECHANICAL

5) Install the belt idler No. 2 (B). (2) Check and adjust the clearance between
timing belt and timing belt guide by using thick-
Tightening torque:
ness gauge.
39 N·m (4.0 kgf-m, 28.8 ft-lb)
6) Install the belt idler (A). Clearance:
1.0±0.5 mm (0.039±0.020 in)
Tightening torque:
39 N·m (4.0 kgf-m, 28.8 ft-lb)

ME-00246
(A)
(B) ME-02968 (3) Tighten the bolts mounting the timing belt
guide.
7) After ensuring the marks on timing belt and cam-
shaft sprockets are aligned, remove the stopper pin Tightening torque:
from belt tension adjuster. 9.75 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ft-lb)

ME-00245 ME-00247

8) Install the timing belt guide. (MT model) 9) Install the timing belt cover. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-
(1) Temporarily tighten the bolts mounting the 46, INSTALLATION, Timing Belt Cover.>
timing belt guide. 10) Install the crank pulley. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-44,
INSTALLATION, Crank Pulley.>

ME-00230

ME(H4SO)-50
11LE_US.book 51 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Timing Belt
MECHANICAL

C: INSPECTION CAUTION:
• Always use a vertical type pressing tool to
1. TIMING BELT move the adjuster rod down.
1) Check the timing belt teeth for breaks, cracks or • Do not use a lateral type vise.
wear. If any fault is found, replace the timing belt. • Push the adjuster rod vertically.
2) Check the condition on the back surface of the • Press the adjuster rod gradually taking three
timing belt. If cracks are found, replace the timing minutes or more.
belt. • Do not allow press pressure to exceed 9,807
CAUTION: N (1,000 kgf, 2,205 lb).
• Be careful not to let oil, grease or coolant • Push in the adjuster rod to the end face of the
contact the timing belt. Remove quickly and cylinder. However, do not press the adjuster
thoroughly if this happens. rod below the end face of the cylinder. Doing so
• Do not bend the timing belt sharply. may damage the cylinder.
4) Measure the amount of adjuster rod protrusion
In radial diameter h: “H” from the end surface of the cylinder. If it is not
60 mm (2.36 in) or more within specifications, replace the automatic belt
tension adjuster assembly with a new part.
Amount of adjuster rod protrusion H:
5.2 — 6.2 mm (0.205 — 0.244 in)
h

ME-00248

2. AUTOMATIC BELT TENSION ADJUSTER

1) Visually check the oil seals for leaks, and rod
ends for abnormal wear and scratches. If neces- ME-00249

sary, replace the automatic belt tension adjuster 3. BELT TENSION PULLEY
assembly.
1) Check the mating surfaces of timing belt and
NOTE: contact point of adjuster rod for abnormal wear or
Slight traces of oil at rod’s oil seal does not indicate scratches. Replace the automatic belt tension ad-
a problem. juster assembly with a new part if faulty.
2) Check that the adjuster rod does not move when 2) Check the belt tension pulley for smooth rota-
a pressure of 165 N (16.8 kgf, 37.1 lb) is applied to tion. Replace the automatic belt tension adjuster
it. This is to check adjuster rod stiffness. assembly with a new part if abnormal noise or ex-
3) If the adjuster rod is not stiff and moves freely cessive play occurs.
when applying 165 N (16.8 kgf, 37.1 lb), check it us- 3) Check the belt tension pulley for grease leakage.
ing the following procedures:
(1) Slowly press the adjuster rod down to the 4. BELT IDLER
end surface of cylinder. Repeat this operation 1) Check the belt idler for smooth rotation. Replace
two to three times. if noise or excessive play occurs.
(2) With the adjuster rod moved all the way up, 2) Check the outer contacting surfaces of idler pul-
apply a pressure of 165 N (16.8 kgf, 37.1 lb) to ley for abnormal wear and scratches.
it, and check the adjuster rod stiffness. 3) Check the belt idler for grease leakage.
(3) If the adjuster rod is not stiff and moves
down, replace the automatic belt tension adjust-
er assembly with a new part.

ME(H4SO)-51
 Cam Sprocket
MECHANICAL

16.Cam Sprocket ST 18231AA010 CAM SPROCKET WRENCH

NOTE:
A: REMOVAL CAM SPROCKET WRENCH (499207100) can
NOTE: also be used.
When replacing a single part, perform the work with Tightening torque:
the engine installed to body.
78 N·m (8.0 kgf-m, 57.5 ft-lb)
1) Remove the crank pulley. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-
44, REMOVAL, Crank Pulley.>
2) Remove the timing belt cover. <Ref. to
ME(H4SO)-46, REMOVAL, Timing Belt Cover.>
3) Remove the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-47,
REMOVAL, Timing Belt.>
4) Remove the camshaft position sensor. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-26, REMOVAL, Camshaft Position
Sensor.>
5) Use the ST to lock the cam sprocket, and re- ST
move the cam sprocket bolt. ME-00250
ST 18231AA010 CAM SPROCKET WRENCH ST 499207400 CAM SPROCKET WRENCH
NOTE: Tightening torque:
CAM SPROCKET WRENCH (499207100) can 78 N·m (8.0 kgf-m, 57.5 ft-lb)
also be used.
ST

ST ME-00251
ME-00250
3) Install the camshaft position sensor. <Ref. to
ST 499207400 CAM SPROCKET WRENCH FU(H4SO)-26, INSTALLATION, Camshaft Position
Sensor.>
ST 4) Install the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-48,
INSTALLATION, Timing Belt.>
5) Install the timing belt cover. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-
46, INSTALLATION, Timing Belt Cover.>
6) Install the crank pulley. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-44,
INSTALLATION, Crank Pulley.>
C: INSPECTION
ME-00251
1) Check the cam sprocket teeth for abnormal wear
and scratches.
6) Remove the cam sprocket. 2) Make sure there is no free play between cam
B: INSTALLATION sprocket and key.
3) Check the cam sprocket protrusion used for sen-
1) Install the cam sprocket.
sor for damage and contamination of foreign mat-
2) Use the ST to lock the cam sprocket, and install ter.
the cam sprocket bolt.
NOTE:
• Do not confuse cam sprockets (LH) and (RH)
during installation.
• They can be distinguished by the L or R indica-
tion.

ME(H4SO)-52
 Crank Sprocket
MECHANICAL

17.Crank Sprocket
A: REMOVAL
NOTE:
When replacing a single part, perform the work with
the engine installed to body.
1) Remove the crank pulley. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-
44, REMOVAL, Crank Pulley.>
2) Remove the timing belt cover. <Ref. to
ME(H4SO)-46, REMOVAL, Timing Belt Cover.>
3) Remove the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-47,
REMOVAL, Timing Belt.>
4) Remove the crank sprocket.

ME-00103

B: INSTALLATION
1) Install the crank sprocket.

ME-00103

2) Install the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-48,

INSTALLATION, Timing Belt.>
3) Install the timing belt cover. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-
46, INSTALLATION, Timing Belt Cover.>
4) Install the crank pulley. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-44,
INSTALLATION, Crank Pulley.>
C: INSPECTION
1) Check the crank sprocket teeth for abnormal
wear and scratches.
2) Make sure there is no free play between crank
sprocket and key.
3) Check the crank sprocket protrusion used for
sensor for damage and contamination of foreign
matter.

ME(H4SO)-53
 Valve Rocker Assembly
MECHANICAL

18.Valve Rocker Assembly (d)

(a) (j) (h)
(b)
A: REMOVAL (f)
NOTE:
When replacing the single part, perform the work
with the engine installed to vehicle body. Refer to
“Valve Clearance” for preparation procedures.
<Ref. to ME(H4SO)-29, Valve Clearance.> (c)
1) Remove the ignition coil. <Ref. to IG(H4SO)-5, (e)
(g) (i)
REMOVAL, Ignition Coil.> ME-02975
2) Disconnect the PCV hose and remove the rock- (3) Remove the valve rocker assembly.
er cover.
3) Remove the valve rocker assembly. NOTE:
(1) Use the ST to rotate the spring stopper in Set the ST in the position shown in the drawing to
the direction of the arrow to remove it from ad- remove the intake valve rocker assembly.
juster pin. ST 18354AA000 VALVE ROCKER HOLDER
ST 18258AA000 SPRING INSTALLER

ST ST
ME-02794

ME-02704 B: INSTALLATION
1) Install the valve rocker assembly.
(1) Temporarily tighten the bolts equally in al-
phabetical order as shown in the figure.
NOTE:
(A) • Do not temporarily tighten the bolts (i) and (j).
• Set the ST in the position shown in the drawing to
(B) mount the intake valve rocker assembly.
ST 18354AA000 VALVE ROCKER HOLDER
(C)
ME-02744

(A) Adjuster pin

(B) Spring stopper
(C) Spring

(2) Remove the bolts (a) through (j) in alphabet-

ical sequence.
NOTE: ST
Leave two or three threads of bolts (i) and (j) en- ME-02794

gaged in order to retain the valve rocker assembly. (2) Tighten the bolts (a) through (h) to specified
torque.
Tightening torque:
25 N·m (2.5 kgf-m, 18.4 ft-lb)

ME(H4SO)-54
 Valve Rocker Assembly
MECHANICAL

(3) Tighten the bolts (i) through (j) to specified 5) Install the rocker cover.
torque. (1) Install the rocker cover gasket to the rocker
cover.
Tightening torque:
6 N·m (0.6 kgf-m, 4.4 ft-lb) NOTE:
(i) (a) (c)
Use a new rocker cover gasket.
(g)
(j) (2) Temporarily tighten the bolts in alphabetical
order shown in the figure, tighten them in two
(e)
stages.
Tightening torque:
1st
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
(h) 2nd (only (a) and (b) are tightened)
(f)
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
(d) (b) ME-02703 RH side
(4) Use the ST to rotate the spring stopper in (f) (a) (c)
the direction of the arrow to fasten the adjuster
pin.
ST 18258AA000 SPRING INSTALLER

(d) (b) (e)

ME-02715

LH side
ST (f) (a) (c)

ME-02704

(A)
(d) (b) (e)
ME-02716
(B)
(3) Connect the PCV hose.
(C) 6) Install the ignition coil. <Ref. to IG(H4SO)-5, IN-
ME-02705 STALLATION, Ignition Coil.>
(A) Adjuster pin C: DISASSEMBLY
(B) Spring stopper NOTE:
(C) Spring Intake valve rocker assembly cannot be disassem-
bled.
2) Remove the timing belt cover LH. 1) Remove the exhaust valve rocker arm from the
3) Adjust the valve clearance. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)- rocker shaft.
30, ADJUSTMENT, Valve Clearance.>
4) Install the timing belt cover LH. NOTE:
Keep all the removed parts in order for re-installing
Tightening torque: in their original positions.
5 N·m (0.5 kgf-m, 3.7 ft-lb) 2) Remove the nut and adjusting screw from ex-
haust valve rocker.

ME(H4SO)-55
11LE_US.book 56 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Valve Rocker Assembly

MECHANICAL

D: ASSEMBLY 2) If the oil clearance exceeds the limit, replace the

valve rocker arm or shaft, whichever shows the
NOTE: greater amount of wear.
Intake valve rocker assembly cannot be disassem-
bled. Rocker arm inside diameter:
1) Install the adjusting screw and nut to the exhaust 22.020 — 22.041 mm (0.8669 — 0.8678 in)
valve rocker. Rocker shaft diameter:
2) Insert the exhaust valve rocker arm to rocker 21.987 — 22.000 mm (0.8656 — 0.8661 in)
shaft. 3) If the roller or valve contact surface of valve
NOTE: rocker arm is worn or dented excessively, replace
Valve rocker arms, and rocker shaft have identifica- the valve rocker arm.
tion marks. Make sure the parts with same mark- 4) Check that the valve rocker arm roller rotates
ings are properly assembled. smoothly. If not, replace the valve rocker arm.
E: INSPECTION
1. INTAKE VALVE ROCKER ASSEMBLY
1) If the roller or valve contact surface of valve
rocker arm is worn or dented excessively, replace
the valve rocker assembly.
2) Check that the valve rocker arm roller rotates
smoothly. If not, replace the valve rocker assembly.
2. EXHAUST VALVE ROCKER ASSEMBLY
1) Measure the inner diameter of valve rocker arm
and outer diameter of valve rocker shaft, and con-
firm the difference (oil clearance) between the two
values.
Clearance between arm and shaft:
Standard
0.020 — 0.054 mm (0.0008 — 0.0021 in)

ME-02706

ME-00257

ME(H4SO)-56
 Camshaft
MECHANICAL

19.Camshaft 10) Remove the camshaft cap.

(1) Remove the bolts (a) and (b) in alphabetical
A: REMOVAL sequence.
NOTE:
When replacing a single part, perform the work with
the engine installed to body. Refer to “Valve Clear-
ance” for preparation procedures. <Ref. to (a)

ME(H4SO)-29, Valve Clearance.>

1) Remove the crank pulley. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-
44, REMOVAL, Crank Pulley.> (b)
2) Remove the timing belt cover. <Ref. to
ME(H4SO)-46, REMOVAL, Timing Belt Cover.>
3) Remove the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-47, ME-02707
REMOVAL, Timing Belt.> (2) Equally loosen the bolts (c) through (j) all the
4) Remove the cam sprocket. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)- way in alphabetical sequence.
52, REMOVAL, Cam Sprocket.>
(j) (h)
5) Remove the timing belt cover No. 2 LH.
6) Remove the timing belt cover No. 2 RH.
(d) (f)
NOTE:
Do not damage or lose the seal rubber when re-
moving the timing belt covers.

(e)
(c)

(g) (i) ME-02708

(3) Remove the bolts (k) through (p) in alpha-

betical sequence using ST.
ST 499497000 TORX® PLUS
(n) (p) (l)

ME-00258

7) Remove the tensioner bracket.

(m)
(k)
(o) ME-02709

(4) Remove the camshaft cap.

11) Remove the camshaft.
12) Remove the oil seal.
ME-00259
13) Remove the plug from rear side of camshaft.
8) Remove the camshaft position sensor support. CAUTION:
(LH side only)
Do not scratch the journal surface when remov-
9) Remove the valve rocker assembly. <Ref. to ing the oil seal.
ME(H4SO)-54, REMOVAL, Valve Rocker Assem-
14) Similarly, remove the camshaft RH and related
bly.>
parts.

ME(H4SO)-57
 Camshaft
MECHANICAL

B: INSTALLATION (4) Tighten the TORX® bolts (e) through (j) in al-
phabetical sequence using the ST.
1) Apply a thin coat of engine oil to camshaft jour-
ST 499497000 TORX® PLUS
nals, and install the camshaft.
2) Install the camshaft cap. Tightening torque:
(1) Apply liquid gasket to the mating surfaces of 18 N·m (1.8 kgf-m, 13.3 ft-lb)
camshaft cap. (g) (e) (i)
NOTE:
Install within 5 min. after applying liquid gasket.
Liquid gasket:
THREE BOND 1217G (Part No. K0877Y0100)
or equivalent
(h)
(j)
(f) ME-02712

(5) Tighten the bolts (k) through (r) in alphabet-

ical sequence.
Tightening torque:
9.75 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ft-lb)
(k) (m)
ME-02710

NOTE: (q) (o)

Apply a coat of liquid gasket of 3 mm (0.12 in) in di-
ameter (A) along the edge (B) of camshaft cap (C)
mating surface.
(p)
(A)
(r)

(n) (l) ME-02713

(6) Tighten the bolts (s) and (t) in alphabetical

(B) sequence.
(C) NOTE:
• Use a new seal washer.
• Install and tighten the seal washer to the bolt.
ME-00265
Tightening torque:
(2) Temporarily tighten the bolts (a) through (d) 9.75 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ft-lb)
in alphabetical sequence.

(c) (a) (s)

(t)
(b)
(d)
ME-02714
ME-02711
3) Apply a coat of engine oil to camshaft oil seal pe-
(3) Install the valve rocker assembly. <Ref. to riphery and oil seal lips and install the oil seal (A) on
ME(H4SO)-54, INSTALLATION, Valve Rocker camshaft using ST1 and ST2.
Assembly.>
NOTE:
Use a new oil seal.

ME(H4SO)-58
 Camshaft
MECHANICAL

ST1 499597000 OIL SEAL GUIDE

ST2 499587500 OIL SEAL INSTALLER

ST1

ST2
ME-00274

(A) 10) Install the cam sprocket. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-

ME-02596 52, INSTALLATION, Cam Sprocket.>
4) Apply a coat of engine oil to plug periphery and 11) Install the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-48,
install the plug (A) using ST. INSTALLATION, Timing Belt.>
ST 499587700 CAMSHAFT OIL SEAL IN- 12) Adjust the valve clearance. <Ref. to
STALLER ME(H4SO)-30, ADJUSTMENT, Valve Clearance.>
13) Install the rocker cover.
(1) Install the rocker cover gasket to the rocker
cover.
(A) NOTE:
Use a new rocker cover gasket.
ST (2) Temporarily tighten the bolts in alphabetical
order shown in the figure, tighten them in two
stages.
Tightening torque:
ME-02717 1st
5) Install the camshaft position sensor support. (LH 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
side only) Second (only (a) and (b) are tightened)
Tightening torque: 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb) RH side
6) Similarly, install the parts on right-hand side. (f) (a) (c)
7) Install the tensioner bracket.
Tightening torque:
24.5 N·m (2.5 kgf-m, 18.1 ft-lb)

(d) (b) (e)

ME-04696

LH side
(f) (a) (c)

ME-00273

8) Install the timing belt cover No. 2 RH.

Tightening torque:
5 N·m (0.5 kgf-m, 3.7 ft-lb)
9) Install the timing belt cover No. 2 LH.
Tightening torque: (d) (b) (e)
ME-02716
5 N·m (0.5 kgf-m, 3.7 ft-lb)
(3) Connect the PCV hose.

ME(H4SO)-59
 Camshaft
MECHANICAL

14) Install the timing belt cover. <Ref. to Cam base circle diameter A:
ME(H4SO)-46, INSTALLATION, Timing Belt Cov- Standard
er.> 34.00 mm (1.3386 in)
15) Install the ignition coil. <Ref. to IG(H4SO)-5,
INSTALLATION, Ignition Coil.> Base circle step of adjacent intake cams (low
speed and high speed):
16) Install the crank pulley. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-44,
Standard
INSTALLATION, Crank Pulley.>
0.03 mm (0.001 in) or less
C: INSPECTION
1) Measure the bend, and repair or replace if nec-
essary.
Camshaft bend limit: H
0.025 mm (0.00098 in)

A
ME-00276

5) Measure the outer diameter of camshaft journal

and inner diameter of cylinder head journal, and
check the difference (oil clearance) between the
two values. If the oil clearance is not within the
standard, replace the camshaft or cylinder head as
ME-00275
necessary.
2) Check the journal for damage and wear. Re-
Unit: mm (in)
place if faulty.
3) Check the cam face condition, and remove the 0.055 — 0.090
Oil clearance Standard
(0.0022 — 0.0035)
minor faults by grinding with oil stone. If offset wear
occurs, replace it. 31.928 — 31.945
Camshaft journal O.D. Standard
(1.2570 — 1.2577)
4) Measure the Cam height “H”, Cam base circle
diameter “A”, and base circle step of adjacent in- Cylinder head journal 32.000 — 32.018
Standard
I.D. (1.2598 — 1.2605)
take cams (low speed and high speed). If it ex-
ceeds the standard or offset wear occurs, replace
6) Measure the thrust clearance with setting the
it.
dial gauge at end surface of camshaft. If the thrust
Cam lobe height H: clearance is not within the standard or there is off-
Unit: mm (in)
set wear, replace the camshaft caps and cylinder
head as a set. If necessary, replace the camshaft.
40.075 — 40.175
Constant Standard
(1.5778 — 1.5817) Camshaft thrust clearance:
35.496 — 35.596 Standard
Intake Low speed Standard
(1.3975 — 1.4014) 0.030 — 0.090 mm (0.0012 — 0.0035 in)
40.315 — 40.415
High speed Standard
(1.5872 — 1.5911)
39.289 — 39.389
Exhaust Standard
(1.5468 — 1.5507)

ME(H4SO)-60
 Cylinder Head
MECHANICAL

20.Cylinder Head 11) While tapping the cylinder head with a plastic
hammer, separate it from cylinder block. Remove
A: REMOVAL the bolts (a) and (c) to remove cylinder head.
NOTE:
(e) (c)
• When replacing a single part, perform the work
with the engine installed to body. Refer to “Valve
Clearance” for preparation procedures. <Ref. to (a)
ME(H4SO)-29, Valve Clearance.>
• When performing the work with the engine in-
stalled to body, the following parts must also be re- (b)
moved/installed.
Front exhaust pipe <Ref. to EX(H4SO)-4, RE- (f)
MOVAL, Front Exhaust Pipe.> <Ref. to (d) ME-02745
EX(H4SO)-5, INSTALLATION, Front Exhaust 12) Remove the cylinder head gasket.
Pipe.>
1) Remove the intake manifold. <Ref. to CAUTION:
FU(H4SO)-16, REMOVAL, Intake Manifold.> Be careful not to scratch the mating surface of
2) Remove the crank pulley. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)- cylinder head and cylinder block.
44, REMOVAL, Crank Pulley.> 13) Similarly, remove the right side cylinder head.
3) Remove the timing belt cover. <Ref. to B: INSTALLATION
ME(H4SO)-46, REMOVAL, Timing Belt Cover.>
4) Remove the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-47, 1) Install the cylinder head to the cylinder block.
REMOVAL, Timing Belt.> CAUTION:
5) Remove the cam sprocket. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)- Be careful not to scratch the mating surface of
52, REMOVAL, Cam Sprocket.> cylinder head and cylinder block.
6) Remove the bolts which secure A/C compressor
NOTE:
bracket to cylinder head.
Use a new cylinder head gasket.
7) Remove the valve rocker assembly. <Ref. to
(1) Clean the bolt threads and the bolt holes in
ME(H4SO)-54, REMOVAL, Valve Rocker Assem-
the cylinder block
bly.>
8) Remove the camshaft. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-57, CAUTION:
REMOVAL, Camshaft.> To avoid erroneous tightening of the bolts,
9) Remove the oil level gauge guide. (LH side) clean out the bolt holes sufficiently by blowing
10) Remove the cylinder head bolts in alphabetical with compressed air to eliminate engine cool-
sequence as shown in the figure. ant etc.
(2) Apply a sufficient coat of engine oil to the
NOTE:
washer and bolt thread.
Leave bolts (a) and (c) engaged by three or four
(3) Tighten all bolts to 40 N·m (4.1 kgf-m, 29.5
threads to prevent the cylinder head from falling.
ft-lb) in alphabetical order.
(4) Retighten all bolts to 95 N·m (9.7 kgf-m,
(c)
(e) 70.1 ft-lb) in alphabetical order.
CAUTION:
(a) If the bolt makes stick-slip sound during tight-
ening, repeat the procedure from step (1). In
this case, the cylinder head gasket can be re-
(b)
used.
(f)
(5) Loosen all the bolts by 180° in the reverse
order of installing, and loosen them further by
(d) ME-02745
180°.

ME(H4SO)-61
 Cylinder Head
MECHANICAL

(6) Tighten all bolts to 10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.4 ft- 9) Install the rocker cover.
lb) in alphabetical order. (1) Install the rocker cover gasket to the rocker
(7) Retighten all bolts to 30 N·m (3.1 kgf-m, cover.
22.1 ft-lb) in alphabetical order. NOTE:
(8) Retighten all bolts to 60 N·m (6.1 kgf-m, Use a new rocker cover gasket.
44.3 ft-lb) in alphabetical order.
(2) Temporarily tighten the bolts in alphabetical
(9) Retighten all bolts by 80 — 90° in alphabet- order shown in the figure, tighten them in two
ical order. stages.
(10) Retighten all bolts by 40 — 45° in alphabet-
ical order. Tightening torque:
1st
CAUTION:
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
The tightening angle of the bolt should not ex-
ceed 45°. Second (only (a) and (b) are tightened)
(11) Retighten bolts (a) and (b) by 40 — 45°. 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
RH side
CAUTION:
Make sure the total “tightening angle” of steps (f) (a) (c)
(10) and (11) does not exceed 90°.

(a) (f)

(c)

(d) (d) (b) (e)

ME-04696

(b) LH side
(e) ME-02746 (a)
(f) (c)
2) Install the oil level gauge guide. (LH side)
Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
3) Install the camshaft. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-58, IN-
STALLATION, Camshaft.>
4) Install the valve rocker assembly. <Ref. to
ME(H4SO)-54, INSTALLATION, Valve Rocker As-
(d) (b) (e)
sembly.> ME-02716
5) Install the A/C compressor bracket on cylinder
10) Install the timing belt cover. <Ref. to
head.
ME(H4SO)-46, INSTALLATION, Timing Belt Cov-
Tightening torque: er.>
36 N·m (3.7 kgf-m, 26.6 ft-lb) 11) Install the crank pulley. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-44,
6) Install the cam sprocket. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-52, INSTALLATION, Crank Pulley.>
INSTALLATION, Cam Sprocket.> 12) Install the intake manifold. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-
7) Install the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-48, 20, INSTALLATION, Intake Manifold.>
INSTALLATION, Timing Belt.>
8) Adjust the valve clearance. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-
30, ADJUSTMENT, Valve Clearance.>

ME(H4SO)-62
 Cylinder Head
MECHANICAL

C: DISASSEMBLY
1) Place the cylinder head on the ST.
ST
ST 498267800 CYLINDER HEAD TABLE
2) Compress the valve spring and remove the
valve spring retainer key using ST. Remove each
valve and valve spring.
ST 499718000 VALVE SPRING REMOVER
NOTE:
• Keep all the removed parts in order for re-install-
ME-00280
ing in their original positions.
• Mark each valve to prevent confusion.
• Pay careful attention not to damage the lips of in-
take valve oil seals and exhaust valve oil seals.
• For removal and installation procedures of the
valve guide, intake valve oil seal and exhaust valve
oil seal, refer to “INSPECTION”. <Ref. to
ME(H4SO)-65, VALVE GUIDE, INSPECTION, Cyl-
inder Head.> <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-67, INTAKE AND
EXHAUST VALVE OIL SEAL, INSPECTION, Cyl-
inder Head.>
D: ASSEMBLY
(3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
(2)
(1)

(11)

(8)

(9)

(12)

(10)
(2) (13)
(3)
(4) (14)

(5)
(6)
(7)

ME-04771

(1) Valve (6) Retainer (11) Plug

(2) Valve guide (7) Retainer key (12) Camshaft cap
(3) Valve spring seat (8) Spark plug pipe gasket (13) Valve rocker ASSY
(4) Oil seal (9) Camshaft (14) Seal washer
(5) Valve spring (10) Oil seal

ME(H4SO)-63
11LE_US.book 64 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Cylinder Head
MECHANICAL

1) Install the valve spring and valve. 3) Measure the warping of the cylinder head sur-
(1) Coat the stem of each valve with engine oil face that mates with cylinder block using a straight
and insert the valve into valve guide. edge (A) and thickness gauge (B).
NOTE: If the warping exceeds the limit, correct the surface
by grinding it with a surface grinder.
When inserting the valve into valve guide, use spe-
cial care not to damage the oil seal lip. Warping limit:
(2) Set the cylinder head on ST. 0.035 mm (0.0014 in)
ST 498267800 CYLINDER HEAD TABLE
Grinding limit:
(3) Install the valve spring and retainer.
0.1 mm (0.004 in)
NOTE:
Standard height of cylinder head:
Be sure to install the valve spring with its close-
coiled end facing the cylinder head side. 97.5 mm (3.84 in)
(4) Set the ST on valve spring. NOTE:
ST 499718000 VALVE SPRING REMOVER Uneven torque for the cylinder head bolts can
cause warpage. When reassembling, pay special
attention to the torque so as to tighten evenly.
ST (A)

(B)

ME-00280

(5) Compress the valve spring and fit the valve ST

ME-00285
spring retainer key.
2. VALVE SEAT
Inspect the intake and exhaust valve seats, and
(B) (C)
correct the contact surfaces with a valve seat cutter
if they are defective or when valve guides are re-
placed.
Contacting width of valve and valve seat W:

(B)
(A) Standard
(C)
Intake (A)
ME-02816 0.8 — 1.4 mm (0.03 — 0.055 in)
Exhaust (B)
(A) Retainer key 1.2 — 1.8 mm (0.047 — 0.071 in)
(B) Valve spring
(C) Retainer

(6) After installing, tap the valve spring retainers (A) (B)

lightly with a plastic hammer for better seating.

E: INSPECTION
W
W
1. CYLINDER HEAD
1) Check for cracks or damage. Use liquid pene-
trant tester on the important sections to check for ME-00397
fissures.
Check that there are no marks of gas leaking or wa-
ter leaking on gasket installing surface.
2) Place the cylinder head on the ST.
ST 498267800 CYLINDER HEAD TABLE

ME(H4SO)-64
11LE_US.book 65 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Cylinder Head
MECHANICAL

2) If the clearance between the valve guide and

valve stem exceeds the standard, replace the valve
guide or valve itself, whichever shows greater
amount of wear or damage. See the following pro-
cedure for valve guide replacement.
Valve guide inner diameter:
6.000 — 6.012 mm (0.2362 — 0.2367 in)
Valve stem outer diameters:
Intake
ME-00287
5.950 — 5.965 mm (0.2343 — 0.2348 in)
3. VALVE GUIDE Exhaust
1) Check the clearance between valve guide and 5.945 — 5.960 mm (0.2341 — 0.2346 in)
valve stem. The clearance can be checked by mea- (1) Place the cylinder head on ST1 with the
suring respectively the outer diameter of valve combustion chamber upward so that valve
stem with a micrometer and the inner diameter of guides fit the holes in ST1.
valve guide with a caliper gauge. (2) Insert the ST2 into valve guide and press it
down to remove the valve guide.
Clearance between the valve guide and valve ST1 498267800 CYLINDER HEAD TABLE
stem: ST2 499767200 VALVE GUIDE REMOVER
Standard
Intake
0.035 — 0.062 mm (0.0014 — 0.0024 in)
Exhaust ST2
0.040 — 0.067 mm (0.0016 — 0.0026 in)

ST1
ME-00290

(3) Turn the cylinder head upside down and

place the ST as shown in the figure.
Intake side
(A) ST 499767700 VALVE GUIDE ADJUSTER
ME-00763 Exhaust side
ST 499767800 VALVE GUIDE ADJUSTER
(A) Valve guide

X
ST

(A)

ME-00291

ME-00289
(A) Valve guide

(4) Before installing a new valve guide, make

sure that neither scratches nor damages exist
on the inner surface of valve guide holes in cyl-
inder head.

ME(H4SO)-65
11LE_US.book 66 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Cylinder Head
MECHANICAL

(5) Put a new valve guide, coated with sufficient ST 499767400 VALVE GUIDE REAMER
oil, in the cylinder head, and insert the ST1 into
valve guide. Press in until the valve guide upper
end is flush with the upper surface of ST2.
ST1 499767200 VALVE GUIDE REMOVER
Intake side
ST2 499767700 VALVE GUIDE ADJUSTER ST
Exhaust side
ST2 499767800 VALVE GUIDE ADJUSTER

ST1 ME-04393
ST2
(8) After reaming, clean the valve guide to re-
move chips.
(9) Recheck the contact condition between
valve and valve seat after replacing the valve
guide.
4. INTAKE AND EXHAUST VALVE
ME-00292 1) Inspect the flange of valve and valve stem, and
(6) Check the valve guide protrusion amount replace the valve with a new part if damaged, worn,
“L”. deformed, or if dimension “H” in the figure is out-
side of the specified limit.
Valve guide protrusion amount L:
Intake Head edge thickness H:
20.3 — 20.7 mm (0.799 — 0.815 in) Intake (A)
Exhaust Standard
16.8 — 17.2 mm (0.661 — 0.677 in) 0.8 — 1.2 mm (0.03 — 0.047 in)
Exhaust (B)
Standard
1.0 — 1.4 mm (0.039 — 0.055 in)
L

(A)

(A)
ME-04917 H

(A) Valve guide

(7) Ream the inside of valve guide using ST.

Put the ST in valve guide, and rotate the ST
slowly clockwise while pushing it lightly. Bring
the ST back while rotating it clockwise.
(B)
NOTE:
• Apply engine oil to the ST when reaming.
• If the inner surface of valve guide is damaged,
the edge of ST should be slightly ground with oil H
stone.
• If the inner surface of valve guide becomes lus-
trous and the ST does not chip, use a new ST or
remedy the ST. ME-04825

ME(H4SO)-66
11LE_US.book 67 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Cylinder Head
MECHANICAL

2) Put a small amount of grinding compound on the 2) Place the cylinder head on ST1, and use ST2 to
valve seat surface, and lap the valve and valve seat press-fit the oil seal.
surface. Replace with a new valve oil seal after lap- ST1 498267800 CYLINDER HEAD TABLE
ping. ST2 498857100 VALVE OIL SEAL GUIDE
NOTE: NOTE:
It is possible to differentiate between the intake • Apply engine oil to oil seal before press-fitting.
valve and the exhaust valve by their overall length. • When press-fitting the oil seal, do not use a ham-
Valve overall length: mer or strike in.
Intake • The intake valve oil seals and exhaust valve oil
120.6 mm (4.75 in) seals are distinguished by their colors.
Exhaust Color of rubber part:
121.7 mm (4.79 in) Intake [Gray]
Exhaust [Green]
5. VALVE SPRING
1) Check the valve springs for damage, free length,
and tension. Replace the valve spring if it is not ST2
within the standard value presented in the table.
2) To measure the squareness of the valve spring,
stand the valve spring on a surface plate and mea- ST1
sure its deflection at the top of the valve spring us-
ing a try square.
Free length mm (in) 55.2 (2.173)
235.3 — 270.7 ME-00284
Set (24 — 27.6, 52.9 — 60.8)/
Tension/spring 45.0 (1.772)
height
N (kgf, lb)/mm (in) 578.9 — 639.9
Lift (59.1 — 65.3, 130.3 — 143.9)/
34.7 (1.366)
Squareness 2.5°, 2.4 mm (0.094 in) or less

ME-00283

6. INTAKE AND EXHAUST VALVE OIL

SEAL
1) For the following, replace the oil seal with a new
part.
See the procedure 2) and subsequent for replace-
ment procedures.
• When the lip is damaged.
• When the spring is out of the specified position.
• When readjusting the surfaces of valve and
valve seat.
• When replacing the valve guide.

ME(H4SO)-67
 Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL

21.Cylinder Block 15) Remove the oil pump from cylinder block using
a flat tip screwdriver.
A: REMOVAL CAUTION:
NOTE: Be careful not to scratch the mating surface of
Before conducting this procedure, drain the engine cylinder block and oil pump.
oil completely.
1) Remove the engine from the vehicle. <Ref. to
ME(H4SO)-31, REMOVAL, Engine Assembly.>
2) Remove the intake manifold. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-16, REMOVAL, Intake Manifold.>
3) Remove the crank pulley. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-
44, REMOVAL, Crank Pulley.>
4) Remove the timing belt cover. <Ref. to
ME(H4SO)-46, REMOVAL, Timing Belt Cover.>
5) Remove the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-47, ME-00138
REMOVAL, Timing Belt.>
6) Remove the crank sprocket. <Ref. to 16) Remove the front oil seal from the oil pump.
ME(H4SO)-53, REMOVAL, Crank Sprocket.> 17) Remove the oil pan and cylinder block lower.
7) Remove the generator and A/C compressor with (1) Set the part so that the cylinder block LH is
their brackets. on the upper side.
8) Remove the cylinder head. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)- (2) Remove the bolts which secure the oil pan
61, REMOVAL, Cylinder Head.> to the cylinder block lower.
9) Remove the drive plate. (CVT model) <Ref. to (3) Insert an oil pan cutter blade into the gap be-
CVT-132, REMOVAL, Drive Plate.> tween cylinder block lower and oil pan, and re-
10) Remove the clutch disc and cover. (MT model) move the oil pan.
<Ref. to CL-11, REMOVAL, Clutch Disc and Cov- CAUTION:
er.> Do not use a screwdriver or similar tools in
11) Remove the oil separator cover. place of oil pan cutter.
12) Remove the water by-pass pipe for heater. (4) Remove the bolts which secure the cylinder
13) Remove the water pump. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)- block lower to the cylinder block, and remove
15, REMOVAL, Water Pump.> the cylinder block lower by using flat tip screw-
14) Remove the bolts which secure oil pump to cyl- driver.
inder block.
CAUTION:
NOTE: Insert the flat tip screwdriver to the position
When disassembling and checking the oil pump, shown in the figure, and be careful not to dam-
loosen the relief valve plug before removing the oil age the mating surface of the cylinder block
pump. and cylinder block lower.

LU-00015 ME-04426

ME(H4SO)-68
 Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL

18) Remove the oil strainer.

19) Remove the baffle plate.
20) Remove the oil filter. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-34,
REMOVAL, Engine Oil Filter.>
21) Remove the water pipe assembly.

ME-00300

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(6)

(4)

(5)
(3)

(4)
(3)
(2)
(1)

(7)

(8)
(4)
(7)
(3)
(2)
(1)
ME-04723

(1) Service hole plug (4) Piston pin (7) Seal washer
(2) Gasket (5) Service hole cover (8) Washer
(3) Snap ring (6) O-ring

ME(H4SO)-69
11LE_US.book 70 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL

22) Remove the service hole plugs using a hexa-

gon wrench [14 mm].

ME-00140

23) Remove the service hole cover.

24) Rotate the crankshaft to bring #1 and #2 pis-
tons to bottom dead center position, then remove
the piston snap ring through service hole of #1 and
#2 cylinders.

ME-00141

25) Draw out the piston pin from #1 and #2 pistons

using ST.
ST 18320AA010 PISTON PIN REMOVER
ASSY
NOTE:
• PISTON PIN REMOVER ASSY (499097700)
can also be used.
• Be careful not to confuse the original combina-
tion of piston, piston pin and cylinder.

ST

ME-03325

26) Similarly draw out the piston pins from #3 and

#4 pistons.
27) Remove the cylinder block connecting bolt on
the RH side.
28) Loosen the cylinder block connecting bolt on
the LH side by 2 to 3 turns.

ME(H4SO)-70
11LE_US.book 71 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL

29) Set the part so that the cylinder block LH is on

the upper side, and remove the cylinder block con-
necting bolt.
30) Separate the cylinder block LH and RH.
NOTE:
When separating the cylinder block, do not allow
the connecting rod to fall or damage the cylinder
block.

(5)
(7)

(1)
(4)

(2)

(6) (4)

(3)

(1)

(5)
ME-04724

(1) Cylinder block (4) Crankshaft bearing (6) Seal washer

(2) Rear oil seal (5) Piston (7) Washer
(3) Crankshaft
31) Remove the rear oil seal.
32) Remove the crankshaft along with the connect-
ing rods.
33) Remove the crankshaft bearings from cylinder
block using a hammer handle.
NOTE:
• Press the crankshaft bearing at the end opposite
to locking lip to remove.
• Be careful not to confuse the crankshaft bearing
combination.
34) Remove each piston from the cylinder block us-
ing a wooden bar or hammer handle.
NOTE:
Be careful not to confuse the original combination
of piston and cylinder.

ME(H4SO)-71
11LE_US.book 72 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL

B: INSTALLATION

(6)

(5)
(4)

(1) (7)

(3)

(3)
(7) (2)
(6)
(7)

(6)

ME-04725

(1) Crankshaft bearing (4) Rear oil seal (6) Seal washer
(2) Crankshaft (5) O-ring (7) Washer
(3) Cylinder block
1) Remove oil on the mating surface of cylinder Liquid gasket:
block before installation. Apply a coat of engine oil THREE BOND 1217G (Part No. K0877Y0100)
to the bearing and crankshaft journal. or equivalent
2) Position the crankshaft and O-ring on cylinder
block RH.
NOTE:
Use new O-rings.
3) Apply liquid gasket to the mating surfaces of cyl-
inder block RH, and position cylinder block LH.
NOTE:
• Install within 5 min. after applying liquid gasket.
• Do not allow liquid gasket to jut into O-ring
grooves, oil passages, bearing grooves, etc. ME-00145

ME(H4SO)-72
11LE_US.book 73 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL

4) Apply a coat of engine oil to the washer and bolt 8) Tighten the RH side cylinder block connecting
thread. bolts (E — J) further in alphabetical order.
NOTE: Tightening torque:
Use a new seal washer. 18 N·m (1.8 kgf-m, 13.3 ft-lb)
5) Tighten the 10 mm cylinder block connecting
bolts on the LH side (A — D) in alphabetical order.
Tightening torque: (E)
(G)
10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.4 ft-lb) (J)

(A)
(H)
(D) (I) (F)
ME-00841

9) Tighten the LH side cylinder block connecting

(B) bolts (A — D) further in alphabetical order.
(C) • (A), (C): Angle tightening
ME-00840
Tightening angle:
6) Tighten the 10 mm cylinder block connecting 90°
bolts on the RH side (E — J) in alphabetical order. • (B), (D): Torque tightening
Tightening torque: Tightening torque:
10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.4 ft-lb) 40 N·m (4.1 kgf-m, 29.5 ft-lb)

(G) (E) (A)

(J)
(D)

(B)
(H)
(I) (F) (C)
ME-00841 ME-00840
7) Tighten the LH side cylinder block connecting 10) Tighten the RH side cylinder block connecting
bolts (A — D) further in alphabetical order. bolts (E — J) further in alphabetical order.
Tightening torque: Tightening angle:
18 N·m (1.8 kgf-m, 13.3 ft-lb) 90°

(A) (G) (E)

(J)
(D)

(B)

(C) (H)
(I) (F)
ME-00840 ME-00841

ME(H4SO)-73
11LE_US.book 74 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL

11) Tighten the 8 mm and 6 mm cylinder block con- 15) Position the upper rail gap at (C) in the figure.
necting bolts on the LH side (A — H) in alphabetical
order.
Tightening torque: (C)

(A) — (G): 25 N·m (2.5 kgf-m, 18.4 ft-lb) 25

(H): 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
25
(G)
(C)
(C) (A) (B)
(E)
RH LH

ME-02722

16) Align the upper rail spin stopper (E) to the side
hole (D) on the piston.
(D) (E)

(D) (F)
(H) ME-00147

12) Apply a coat of engine oil to the oil seal inner

periphery and outer periphery, and install the rear
oil seal using ST1 and ST2.
NOTE:
Use a new rear oil seal.
ST1 499597100 CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL
ME-02471
GUIDE
ST2 499587200 CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL IN- 17) Position the expander gap at (F) in the figure on
STALLER the 180° opposite direction of (C).
(B) (A)
180
ST2
(F) (C)

(C) (F)
180
RH LH
ST1
ME-00148 ME-02723

(A) Rear oil seal

18) Set the lower rail gap at position (G), located
120° clockwise from (C) in the figure.
(B) Flywheel attaching bolt
120
13) Position the top ring gap at (A) or (B) in the fig- (G)
ure. (C)
14) Position the second ring gap at 180° on the re-
verse side the top ring gap.

180 180 (C)

(G)
120
RH LH
ME-02724
(B) (A) (A) (B) NOTE:
• Make sure ring gaps do not face the same direc-
tion.
RH LH • Make sure ring gaps are not within the piston
ME-02721 skirt area.

ME(H4SO)-74
11LE_US.book 75 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL

19) Install the snap ring.

Before positioning the piston on the cylinder block,
attach the snap ring in the service hole of the cylin-
der block, and the piston pin hole on the opposite
side.
NOTE:
Use new snap rings.
#3

#1

#4

(A)
#2
ME-04764

(A) Front side

(5) T
(4) (5)

(1) (3) (4)

(3)
(2)
(2)

(1)

ME-04730

(1) Piston (4) Gasket Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)

(2) Piston pin (5) Service hole plug T: 70 (7.1, 51.6)
(3) Snap ring

ME(H4SO)-75
11LE_US.book 76 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL

20) Install the piston. (3) Apply a coat of engine oil to piston pin, and
(1) Set the parts so that the #1 and #2 cylinders insert the piston pin into piston and connecting
are on the upper side. rod through service hole.
(2) Using the ST1, turn the crankshaft so that (4) Install the snap ring.
#1 and #2 connecting rods are set at bottom NOTE:
dead center. Use new snap rings.
ST1 499987500 CRANKSHAFT SOCKET
(3) Apply a coat of engine oil to the pistons and
cylinders and insert pistons in their cylinders us-
ing ST2.
ST2 498747300 PISTON GUIDE
ST1

ME-00159

(5) Apply liquid gasket to the threaded portion

of the service hole plug.
ST2 Liquid gasket:
ME-00157 THREE BOND 1105 (Part No. 004403010) or
NOTE: equivalent
Face the piston front mark towards the front of the
engine.

ME-00160
RH (A) LH
(6) Install the service hole plug and gasket.
ME-04918
NOTE:
(A) Front mark Use a new gasket.
Tightening torque:
21) Install the piston pin. 70 N·m (7.1 kgf-m, 51.6 ft-lb)
(1) Apply a coat of engine oil to ST3.
(2) Insert ST3 into the service hole to align pis-
ton pin hole with connecting rod small end.
ST3 499017100 PISTON PIN GUIDE

ST1
ST3

ME-00140

ME-00158

ME(H4SO)-76
11LE_US.book 77 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL

(5)
T2 T1
(6)
(4)
(3)
(1) (2) (7)

(3)

(2)

(1)
ME-04731

(1) Piston (5) Service hole plug Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Piston pin (6) Service hole cover T1: 6.4 (0.7, 4.7)
(3) Snap ring (7) O-ring T2: 70 (7.1, 51.6)
(4) Gasket
(7) Set the parts so that the #3 and #4 cylinders 22) Install the water pipe assembly.
are on the upper side. Following the same pro- NOTE:
cedures as used for #1 and #2 cylinders, install
Use new O-rings.
the pistons and piston pins.
(8) Install the service hole cover. Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
NOTE:
Use new O-rings.
Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)

ME-00300

ME(H4SO)-77
11LE_US.book 78 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL

23) Install the baffle plate.

NOTE:
• Use a new seal.
• Make sure that the seals (A) are installed secure-
ly on the baffle plate in a direction as shown in the
figure below.

(A)
T1
T2
ME-04327

25) Apply liquid gasket to the mating surfaces of oil

pan, and install the oil pan.
NOTE:
• Before installing the oil pan, clean the mating
surface of oil pan and cylinder block.
LU-00052 • Install within 5 min. after applying liquid gasket.
Tightening torque: Liquid gasket:
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb) THREE BOND 1217G (Part No. K0877Y0100)
24) Apply liquid gasket to the mating surfaces of or equivalent
cylinder block lower, and install the cylinder block
lower.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to apply any liquid gasket to the
O-ring attachment section.
NOTE:
• Use new O-rings.
• Before installing the cylinder block lower, clean
the mating surface of cylinder block lower and cyl-
inder block. LU-02580
• Install within 5 min. after applying liquid gasket. Tightening torque:
Liquid gasket: 5 N·m (0.5 kgf-m, 3.7 ft-lb)
THREE BOND 1217G (Part No. K0877Y0100)
or equivalent

(A)

LU-02583

26) Apply liquid gasket to the mating surfaces of

LU-02581 the oil separator cover and the threaded portion of
(A) O-ring
bolt (A) shown in the figure (when reusing the bolt),
and then install the oil separator cover.
Tightening torque: NOTE:
T1: 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb) • Install within 5 min. after applying liquid gasket.
T2: 16 N·m (1.6 kgf-m, 11.8 ft-lb) • Use new oil separator cover.
Liquid gasket: • (A) bolt thread (when reusing bolts)
• Mating surface THREE BOND 1324 (Part No. 004403042) or
THREE BOND 1217G (Part No. equivalent
K0877Y0100) or equivalent

ME(H4SO)-78
 Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL

Tightening torque: (3) Apply a coat of engine oil to the inside of oil
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb) seal.
(A)

ME-03333 ME-00312

27) Install the clutch disc and cover. (MT model) (4) Install the oil pump to cylinder block.
<Ref. to CL-11, INSTALLATION, Clutch Disc and CAUTION:
Cover.> • Be careful not to damage the front oil seal
28) Install the drive plate. (CVT model) <Ref. to during installation.
CVT-132, INSTALLATION, Drive Plate.> • Make sure the front oil seal lip is not folded.
29) Install the oil pump.
(1) Using the ST, install the front oil seal. NOTE:
ST 499587100 OIL SEAL INSTALLER • Align the flat surface of oil pump’s inner rotor with
that of crankshaft before installation.
NOTE: • Use new O-rings.
Use a new front oil seal. • Do not forget to assemble O-rings.
(5) Apply liquid gasket to the three bolts thread
shown in figure. (when reusing bolts)
Liquid gasket:
THREE BOND 1324 (Part No. 004403042) or
equivalent
ST
Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)

LU-00021

(2) Apply liquid gasket to the mating surfaces of

oil pump.
NOTE:
Install within 5 min. after applying liquid gasket.
Liquid gasket:
THREE BOND 1217G (Part No. K0877Y0100)
or equivalent ME-04946

(A)

ME-00165

(A) O-ring

ME(H4SO)-79
 Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL

30) Install the water pump and gasket. Tightening torque:

NOTE: 1st
• When installing the water pump, tighten bolts in 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
two stages in alphabetical order as shown in the Second (only (a) and (b) are tightened)
figure. 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
• Use a new gasket. RH side
Tightening torque: (f) (a) (c)
First: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.9 ft-lb)
Second: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.9 ft-lb)
(B)
(C)
(A)
(D)

(E) (F) (d) (b) (e)

ME-04696

LH side
(f) (a) (c)
ME-04425

31) Install the water by-pass pipe for heater.

Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
32) Install the oil filter.
<Ref. to LU(H4SO)-34, INSTALLATION, Engine
Oil Filter.>
(d) (b) (e)
33) Install the cylinder head. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)- ME-02716
61, INSTALLATION, Cylinder Head.>
39) Install the timing belt cover. <Ref. to
34) Install the generator and A/C compressor with
ME(H4SO)-46, INSTALLATION, Timing Belt Cov-
their brackets.
er.>
Tightening torque: 40) Install the crank pulley. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-44,
36 N·m (3.7 kgf-m, 26.6 ft-lb) INSTALLATION, Crank Pulley.>
35) Install the crank sprocket. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)- 41) Install the intake manifold. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-
53, INSTALLATION, Crank Sprocket.> 20, INSTALLATION, Intake Manifold.>
36) Install the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-48, 42) Install the engine to the vehicle. <Ref. to
INSTALLATION, Timing Belt.> ME(H4SO)-34, INSTALLATION, Engine Assem-
37) Adjust the valve clearance. <Ref. to bly.>
ME(H4SO)-30, ADJUSTMENT, Valve Clearance.>
38) Install the rocker cover.
(1) Install the rocker cover gasket to the rocker
cover.
NOTE:
Use a new rocker cover gasket.
(2) Temporarily tighten the rocker cover bolts in
alphabetical order shown in the figure, and then
tighten to specified torque in alphabetical order
in two steps.

ME(H4SO)-80
11LE_US.book 81 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL

C: DISASSEMBLY
(7)
(6)

(6)

(5)

(3)
(2)
(1)

(4)

ME-04732

(1) Top ring (4) Snap ring (6) Connecting rod bearing
(2) Second ring (5) Connecting rod (7) Connecting rod cap
(3) Oil ring
1) Remove the connecting rod cap.
2) Remove the connecting rod bearing.
NOTE:
Keep the removed connecting rods, connecting rod
caps and bearings in order so that they are kept in
their original combinations/groups, and not mixed
together.
3) Remove the piston rings using piston ring ex-
pander.
4) Remove the oil ring by hand.
NOTE:
Arrange the removed piston rings in proper order,
to prevent confusion.
5) Remove the snap ring.

ME(H4SO)-81
11LE_US.book 82 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL

D: ASSEMBLY
(8)
T (7)

(7)

(6)

(3)
(2)
(1)
(5)

(4)

ME-04733

(1) Top ring (5) Side mark Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Second ring (6) Connecting rod T: 45 (4.6, 33.2)
(3) Oil ring (7) Connecting rod bearing
(4) Snap ring (8) Connecting rod cap
1) Apply engine oil to the surface of the connecting E: INSPECTION
rod bearings, and install the connecting rod bear-
ings on connecting rods and connecting rod caps. 1. CYLINDER BLOCK
2) Position each connecting rod with the side with a 1) Check for cracks or damage. Use liquid pene-
side mark facing forward, and install it. trant tester on the important sections to check for
3) Attach the connecting rod cap, and tighten with fissures. Check that there are no marks of gas leak-
connecting rod nut. ing or water leaking on gasket installing surface.
Make sure the arrow on connecting rod cap faces 2) Check the oil passages for clogging.
the front during installation. 3) Inspect the cylinder head surface that mates
NOTE: with cylinder block for warping by using a straight
• Each connecting rod has its own mating cap. edge, and correct by grinding if necessary.
Make sure that they are assembled correctly by Warping limit:
checking their matching number. 0.025 mm (0.00098 in)
• When tightening the connecting rod nuts, apply
oil on the threads. Grinding limit:
0.1 mm (0.004 in)
Tightening torque:
45 N·m (4.6 kgf-m, 33.2 ft-lb) Standard height of cylinder block:
4) Install the oil ring upper rail, expander and lower 201.0 mm (7.91 in)
rail by hand.
5) Install the second ring and top ring using piston
ring expander.
NOTE:
Assemble so that the piston ring mark “R” faces the
top side of the piston.

ME(H4SO)-82
11LE_US.book 83 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL

2. CYLINDER AND PISTON 2) Measure inner diameter of each cylinder.

1) The cylinder bore size is stamped on the front Measure the inner diameter of each cylinder in both
upper face of the cylinder block. the thrust and piston pin directions at the heights as
shown in the figure, using a cylinder bore gauge.
NOTE:
• Measurement should be performed at a temper- NOTE:
ature of 20°C (68°F). Measurement should be performed at a tempera-
• Standard sized pistons are classified into two ture of 20°C (68°F).
grades, “A” and “B”. These grades should be used Cylindricality:
as guide lines in selecting a standard piston. Standard
Standard diameter: 0.015 mm (0.0006 in)
A: 99.510 — 99.520 mm (3.9177 — 3.9181 in) Out-of-roundness:
B: 99.500 — 99.510 mm (3.9173 — 3.9177 in) Standard
0.010 mm (0.0004 in)

(A) (B)

(A) (B)

#5
4

#4
5

H1
#3 H2
#2 (F) H3
B

#1 (D) H4
A

(E) (C)

ME-00170
ME-00171
(A) Main journal size mark
(B) Cylinder block (RH) — (LH) combination mark (A) Piston pin direction
(C) #1 cylinder bore size mark (B) Thrust direction
(D) #2 cylinder bore size mark H1 10 mm (0.39 in)
(E) #3 cylinder bore size mark H2 45 mm (1.77 in)
(F) #4 cylinder bore size mark H3 80 mm (3.15 in)
H4 115 mm (4.53 in)

3) When the piston is to be replaced due to general

or cylinder wear, select a suitable sized piston by
measuring the piston clearance.

ME(H4SO)-83
11LE_US.book 84 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL

4) Measure outer diameter of each piston. (2) If the cylinder inner diameter exceeds the
Measure the outer diameter of each piston at the limit after boring and honing, replace the cylin-
height as shown in the figure. (Thrust direction) der block.
NOTE: NOTE:
Measurement should be performed at a tempera- Immediately after reboring, the cylinder diameter
ture of 20°C (68°F). may differ from its real diameter due to temperature
rise. Thus, when measuring the cylinder diameter,
Piston grade point H:
wait until it has cooled to room temperature.
38.2 mm (1.504 in)
Cylinder inner diameter boring limit:
Piston outer diameter: To 100.005 mm (3.9372 in)
Standard
A: 99.510 — 99.520 mm (3.9177 — 3.9181 in)
3. PISTON AND PISTON PIN
B: 99.500 — 99.510 mm (3.9173 — 3.9177 in) 1) Check the piston and piston pin for damage,
cracks or wear. Replace if faulty.
0.25 mm (0.0098 in) oversize: 2) Check the piston ring groove for wear or dam-
99.750 — 99.770 mm (3.9272 — 3.9280 in) age. Replace if faulty.
0.50 mm (0.0197 in) oversize: 3) Make sure the piston pin can be inserted into the
100,000 — 100.020 mm (3.9370 — 3.9378 in) piston pin hole by a thumb at 20°C (68°F). Replace
if faulty.
Clearance between piston pin hole and piston
pin:
Standard
0.004 — 0.008 mm (0.0002 — 0.0003 in)

ME-00172

5) Calculate the clearance between cylinder and

piston.
NOTE:
Measurement should be performed at a tempera-
ME-00173
ture of 20°C (68°F).
Clearance between cylinder and piston at 20°C
(68°F):
Standard
–0.015 — 0.005 mm (–0.00059 — 0.00020 in)
6) Boring and honing
(1) If any of the measured value of cylindricality,
out-of-roundness or cylinder-to-piston clear-
ance is out of standard or if there is any damage
on the cylinder wall, rebore it to replace with an
oversize piston. ME-00174

CAUTION:
When any of the cylinders needs reboring, all
other cylinders must be bored at the same time,
and replaced with oversize pistons.

ME(H4SO)-84
11LE_US.book 85 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL

4) Check the snap ring installation groove (A) on 2) Using the piston, insert the piston ring and oil
the piston for burr. If necessary, remove burr from ring into the cylinder so that they are perpendicular
the groove so that the piston pin can lightly move. to the cylinder wall, and measure the piston ring
gap with a thickness gauge.
Standard
mm (in)
(A) 0.20 — 0.35
Top ring
(0.0079 — 0.0138)
0.37 — 0.52
Piston ring gap Second ring
(0.0146 — 0.0205)
0.20 — 0.50
Oil ring rail
(0.0079 — 0.0197)
ME-00175

5) Check the piston pin snap ring for distortion,

cracks and wear.
4. PISTON RING
1) If the piston ring is broken, damaged or worn, or
if its tension is insufficient, or when the piston is re-
placed, replace the piston ring with a new part of
the same size as piston.
NOTE:
ME-00177
• The top ring and second ring have the mark to
determine the direction for installing. When attach- 3) Fit the piston ring straight into the piston ring
ing the ring to the piston, face these marks towards groove, then measure the clearance between pis-
the top side. ton ring and piston ring groove with a thickness
• Oil ring consists of the upper rail, expander and gauge.
lower rail. When attaching the oil ring to the piston, NOTE:
pay attention to the direction of each rail. Before measuring the clearance, clean the piston
ring groove and piston ring.
Standard
mm (in)
(A)
0.040 — 0.080
Clearance between Top ring
(B)
(0.0016 — 0.0031)
piston ring and pis-
ton ring groove 0.030 — 0.070
Second ring
(C) (0.0012 — 0.0028)

(A)

(B)

(C)

ME-00178

ME-02480

(A) Upper rail

(B) Expander
(C) Lower rail

ME(H4SO)-85
11LE_US.book 86 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL

5. CONNECTING ROD 4) Inspect the connecting rod bearing for scar,

1) Replace the connecting rod, if the large or small peeling, seizure, melting, wear, etc.
end thrust surface is damaged. 5) Measure the oil clearance on each connecting
2) Check for bend or twist using a connecting rod rod bearing using plastigauge. If any oil clearance
aligner. Replace the connecting rod if the bend or is not within the standard, replace the defective
twist exceeds the limit. bearing with a new part of standard size or under-
size as necessary.
Limit of bend or twist per 100 mm (3.94 in) in
length: Connecting rod oil clearance:
0.10 mm (0.0039 in) Standard
0.016 — 0.044 mm (0.0006 — 0.0017 in)
(A) Unit: mm (in)
Bearing size Outer diameter of
Bearing
(Thickness at center) crank pin
1.492 — 1.501 51.984 — 52.000
(B) Standard
(0.0587 — 0.0591) (2.0466 — 2.0472)
0.03
1.510 — 1.513 51.954 — 51.970
(0.0012)
(0.0594 — 0.0596) (2.0454 — 2.0461)
Undersize
0.05
1.520 — 1.523 51.934 — 51.950
(0.0020)
(0.0598 — 0.0600) (2.0446 — 2.0453)
Undersize
0.25
1.620 — 1.623 51.734 — 51.750
(0.0098)
(0.0638 — 0.0639) (2.0368 — 2.0374)
Undersize
(A)
6) Inspect the bushing at connecting rod small end,
and replace with a new part if worn or damaged.
(B) 7) Measure the piston pin clearance at connecting
rod small end. Replace it with a new part if the val-
ue is not within the standard,
ME-00179 Clearance between piston pin and bushing:
(A) Thickness gauge
Standard
0 — 0.022 mm (0 — 0.0009 in)
(B) Connecting rod

3) Install the connecting rod with bearings attached

to the crankshaft, and using a thickness gauge,
measure the thrust clearance. If the thrust clear-
ance exceeds the standard or uneven wear is
found, replace the connecting rod.
Connecting rod thrust clearance:
Standard
0.070 — 0.330 mm (0.0028 — 0.0130 in)
ME-00181

ME-00180
ME-00174

ME(H4SO)-86
11LE_US.book 87 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL

8) The replacement procedure for the connecting 3) Inspect the crank journal and crank pin for wear.
rod small end bushing is as follows. If they are not within the standard, replace the bear-
(1) Remove the bushing from connecting rod ing with a suitable (undersize) one, and replace or
with ST and press. grind to correct the crankshaft as necessary. When
(2) Press the bushing with the ST after applying grinding the crank journal or crank pin, finish them
oil on the periphery of new bushing. to the specified dimensions according to the under-
ST 499037100 CONNECTING ROD BUSH- size bearing to be used.
ING REMOVER AND IN- Crank pin:
STALLER Out-of-roundness
Standard
0.003 mm (0.0001 in)
ST
Cylindricality
Standard
0.004 mm (0.0002 in)
Grinding limit (dia.)
To 51.750 mm (2.0374 in)
Crank journal:
Out-of-roundness
ME-00182
Standard
(3) Make two 3 mm (0.12 in) holes in the 0.005 mm (0.0002 in)
pressed bushing to match the pre-manufac- Cylindricality
tured holes on the connecting rod, then ream Standard
the inside of the bushing. 0.006 mm (0.0002 in)
(4) After completion of reaming, clean the bush- Grinding limit (dia.)
ing to remove chips. To 59.758 mm (2.3527 in)
6. CRANKSHAFT AND CRANKSHAFT
BEARING
1) Clean the crankshaft completely, and check it for
cracks using liquid penetrant tester. If defective, re-
place the crankshaft.
2) Measure warping of the crankshaft. If it exceeds
the limit, correct or replace it.
NOTE:
If a suitable V-block is not available, using just the
ME-00184
#1 and #5 crankshaft bearings on cylinder block,
position the crankshaft on cylinder block. Then,
measure the crankshaft bend using a dial gauge.
Crankshaft bend limit:
0.035 mm (0.0014 in)

ME-00183

ME(H4SO)-87
11LE_US.book 88 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL

Unit: mm (in)
Crank journal outer diameter
Crank pin outer diameter
#1, #3 #2, #4, #5
59.992 — 60.008 59.992 — 60.008 51.984 — 52.000
Journal O.D.
(2.3619 — 2.3625) (2.3619 — 2.3625) (2.0466 — 2.0472)
Standard
Bearing size 1.998 — 2.011 2.000 — 2.013 1.492 — 1.501
(Thickness at center) (0.0787 — 0.0792) (0.0787 — 0.0793) (0.0587 — 0.0591)
59.962 — 59.978 59.962 — 59.978 51.954 — 51.970
Journal O.D.
0.03 (0.0012) (2.3607 — 2.3613) (2.3607 — 2.3613) (2.0454 — 2.0461)
undersize Bearing size 2.017 — 2.020 2.019 — 2.022 1.510 — 1.513
(Thickness at center) (0.0794 — 0.0795) (0.0795 — 0.0796) (0.0594 — 0.0596)
59.942 — 59.958 59.942 — 59.958 51.934 — 51.950
Journal O.D.
0.05 (0.0020) (2.3599 — 2.3605) (2.3599 — 2.3605) (2.0446 — 2.0453)
Undersize Bearing size 2.027 — 2.030 2.029 — 2.032 1.520 — 1.523
(Thickness at center) (0.0798 — 0.0799) (0.0799 — 0.0800) (0.0598 — 0.0600)
59.742 — 59.758 59.742 — 59.758 51.734 — 51.750
Journal O.D.
0.25 (0.0098) (2.3520 — 2.3527) (2.3520 — 2.3527) (2.0368 — 2.0374)
Undersize Bearing size 2.127 — 2.130 2.129 — 2.132 1.620 — 1.623
(Thickness at center) (0.0837 — 0.0839) (0.0838 — 0.0839) (0.0638 — 0.0639)
4) Use a thickness gauge to measure the thrust
clearance of crankshaft at #5 crank journal bearing.
If clearance exceeds the standard, replace the
bearing.
Crankshaft thrust clearance:
Standard
0.030 — 0.115 mm (0.0012 — 0.0045 in)

ME-00322

5) Inspect individual crankshaft bearings for signs

of flaking, seizure, melting and wear.
6) Measure the oil clearance on each crankshaft
bearing using plastigauge. If the measured value is
out of standard, replace the defective bearing with
an undersize one, and replace or grind to correct
the crankshaft as necessary.
Crankshaft oil clearance:
Standard
0.010 — 0.030 mm (0.0004 — 0.0012 in)

ME(H4SO)-88
 Oil Switching Solenoid Valve
MECHANICAL

22.Oil Switching Solenoid Valve 9) Remove the oil switching solenoid valve holder
from the cylinder head.
A: REMOVAL (A) (C)
(B)
1. RH SIDE
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery.

(D)
(E)

ME-02726

(A) Oil switching solenoid valve

(B) Variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch
IG-02107 (C) Oil temperature sensor
2) Remove the air intake boot assembly. <Ref. to (D) Oil switching solenoid valve holder
IN(H4SO)-8, REMOVAL, Air Intake Boot.> (E) Gasket
3) Remove the bolt, and disconnect the bulkhead
harness connector from the engine harness con- 2. LH SIDE
nector and rear engine hanger. 1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery.

FU-05129 IG-02107
4) Slide the engine harness connector in the direc- 2) Remove the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-42,
tion of the arrow and remove it from the rear engine REMOVAL, V-belt.>
hanger. 3) Remove the crank pulley. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-
44, REMOVAL, Crank Pulley.>
4) Remove the timing belt cover. <Ref. to
ME(H4SO)-46, REMOVAL, Timing Belt Cover.>
5) Remove the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-47,
REMOVAL, Timing Belt.>
6) Remove the cam sprocket. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-
52, REMOVAL, Cam Sprocket.>
7) Remove the timing belt cover No. 2 LH.
8) Disconnect the connector from the oil switching
FU-05247 solenoid valve.
9) Remove the oil switching solenoid valve.
5) Disconnect the connector from the oil switching 10) Remove the variable valve lift diagnosis oil
solenoid valve. pressure switch. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-35, REMOV-
6) Remove the oil switching solenoid valve. AL, Variable Valve Lift Diagnosis Oil Pressure
7) Remove the variable valve lift diagnosis oil pres- Switch.>
sure switch. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-35, REMOVAL,
Variable Valve Lift Diagnosis Oil Pressure Switch.>
8) Remove the oil temperature sensor. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-36, REMOVAL, Oil Temperature Sen-
sor.>

ME(H4SO)-89
11LE_US.book 90 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Oil Switching Solenoid Valve

MECHANICAL

11) Remove the oil switching solenoid valve holder Tightening torque:
from the cylinder head. 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
(B)

(D)

(C) (A) ME-02727 FU-05129

(A) Oil switching solenoid valve 2. LH SIDE

(B) Variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch Install in the reverse order of removal.
(C) Oil switching solenoid valve holder
NOTE:
(D) Gasket • Use a new gasket.
• Apply liquid gasket to variable valve lift diagnosis
B: INSTALLATION oil pressure switch threads.
1. RH SIDE • Install the oil switching solenoid valve to the
holder, then install it to the cylinder head.
Install in the reverse order of removal.
Tightening torque:
NOTE:
T1: 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
• Use a new gasket.
T2: 10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.4 ft-lb)
• Apply liquid gasket to variable valve lift diagnosis
T3: 17 N·m (1.7 kgf-m, 12.5 ft-lb)
oil pressure switch threads.
• Install the oil switching solenoid valve to the Liquid gasket:
holder, then install it to the cylinder head. THREE BOND 1324 (Part No. 004403042) or
equivalent
Tightening torque:
T1: 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb) (B)
T3
T2: 10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.4 ft-lb)
T3: 17 N·m (1.7 kgf-m, 12.5 ft-lb)
T4: 18 N·m (1.8 kgf-m, 13.3 ft-lb)
Liquid gasket:
THREE BOND 1324 (Part No. 004403042) or
equivalent
T2
(A) (C) (D)
T1
(C) (A) T1
T4 ME-03003
(B)
T2 (A) Oil switching solenoid valve
T3
(B) Variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch
(C) Oil switching solenoid valve holder
(D)
(D) Gasket
(E)

ME-03002

(A) Oil switching solenoid valve

(B) Variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch
(C) Oil temperature sensor
(D) Oil switching solenoid valve holder
(E) Gasket

ME(H4SO)-90
 Intake and Exhaust Valve
MECHANICAL

23.Intake and Exhaust Valve

A: SPECIFICATION
Refer to “Cylinder Head” for removal and installa-
tion procedures of the intake and exhaust valves.
<Ref. to ME(H4SO)-61, REMOVAL, Cylinder
Head.> <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-61, INSTALLATION,
Cylinder Head.>

ME(H4SO)-91
 Piston
MECHANICAL

24.Piston
A: SPECIFICATION
Refer to “Cylinder Block” for removal and installa-
tion procedures of pistons. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-68,
REMOVAL, Cylinder Block.> <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-
72, INSTALLATION, Cylinder Block.>

ME(H4SO)-92
 Connecting Rod
MECHANICAL

25.Connecting Rod
A: SPECIFICATION
Refer to “Cylinder Block” for removal and installa-
tion procedures of connecting rods. <Ref. to
ME(H4SO)-68, REMOVAL, Cylinder Block.> <Ref.
to ME(H4SO)-72, INSTALLATION, Cylinder
Block.>

ME(H4SO)-93
 Crankshaft
MECHANICAL

26.Crankshaft
A: SPECIFICATION
Refer to “Cylinder Block” for removal and installa-
tion procedures of the crankshaft. <Ref. to
ME(H4SO)-68, REMOVAL, Cylinder Block.> <Ref.
to ME(H4SO)-72, INSTALLATION, Cylinder
Block.>

ME(H4SO)-94
 Engine Trouble in General
MECHANICAL

27.Engine Trouble in General

A: INSPECTION
NOTE:
The “RANK” shown in the chart shows the possibilities of the cause of trouble in order from “Very often” to
“Rarely”.
A — Very often
B — Sometimes
C — Rarely
Symptoms Problem parts etc. Possible cause RANK
1. Engine does not start.
1) Starter does not turn. Starter Defective battery-to-starter harness B
Defective starter switch C
Defective inhibitor switch C
Defective starter B
Battery Improper connection of terminal A
Run-down battery A
Defective charging system B
Friction Seizure of crankshaft and connecting rod bearing C
Seized camshaft C
Seized or stuck piston and cylinder C
Immobilizer system <Ref. to IM(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
2) Initial combustion does Starter Defective starter C
not occur. Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
Fuel line Defective fuel pump and relay A
Clogged fuel line C
Lack of fuel or insufficient fuel B
Timing belt Degradation, etc. B
Defective timing B
Compression Incorrect valve clearance C
Loosened spark plug or defective gasket C
Loosened cylinder head bolt or defective cylinder head C
gasket
Improper valve sealing C
Defective valve stem C
Worn or broken valve spring B
Worn or stuck piston rings, cylinder and piston C
Incorrect valve timing B
Improper engine oil (low viscosity) B

ME(H4SO)-95
 Engine Trouble in General
MECHANICAL

Symptoms Problem parts etc. Possible cause RANK

3) Initial combustion occurs. Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
Intake system Defective intake manifold gasket B
Defective throttle body gasket B
Fuel line Defective fuel pump and relay C
Clogged fuel line C
Lack of fuel or insufficient fuel B
Timing belt Degradation, etc. B
Defective timing B
Compression Incorrect valve clearance C
Loosened spark plug or defective gasket C
Loosened cylinder head bolt or defective cylinder head C
gasket
Improper valve sealing C
Defective valve stem C
Worn or broken valve spring B
Worn or stuck piston rings, cylinder and piston C
Incorrect valve timing B
Improper engine oil (low viscosity) B
4) Engine stalls after initial Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
combustion. Intake system Loosened or cracked intake duct B
Loosened or cracked PCV hose C
Loosened or cracked vacuum hose C
Defective intake manifold gasket B
Defective throttle body gasket B
Dirty air cleaner element C
Fuel line Clogged fuel line C
Lack of fuel or insufficient fuel B
Timing belt Degradation, etc. B
Defective timing B
Compression Incorrect valve clearance C
Loosened spark plug or defective gasket C
Loosened cylinder head bolt or defective cylinder head C
gasket
Improper valve sealing C
Defective valve stem C
Worn or broken valve spring B
Worn or stuck piston rings, cylinder and piston C
Incorrect valve timing B
Improper engine oil (low viscosity) B

ME(H4SO)-96
 Engine Trouble in General
MECHANICAL

Symptoms Problem parts etc. Possible cause RANK

2. Rough idle and engine Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
stall Intake system Loosened or cracked intake duct A
Loosened or cracked PCV hose A
Loosened or cracked vacuum hose A
Defective intake manifold gasket B
Defective throttle body gasket B
Defective PCV valve C
Loosened oil filler cap B
Dirty air cleaner element C
Fuel line Defective fuel pump and relay C
Clogged fuel line C
Lack of fuel or insufficient fuel B
Timing belt Defective timing C
Compression Incorrect valve clearance B
Loosened spark plug or defective gasket B
Loosened cylinder head bolt or defective cylinder head B
gasket
Improper valve sealing B
Defective valve stem C
Worn or broken valve spring B
Worn or stuck piston rings, cylinder and piston B
Incorrect valve timing A
Improper engine oil (low viscosity) B
Lubrication system Incorrect oil pressure B
Defective rocker cover gasket C
Cooling system Over-heating C
Others Evaporative emission control system malfunction A
Stuck or damaged throttle valve B

ME(H4SO)-97
 Engine Trouble in General
MECHANICAL

Symptoms Problem parts etc. Possible cause RANK

3. Low output, hesitation and Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
poor acceleration Intake system Loosened or cracked intake duct A
Loosened or cracked PCV hose A
Loosened or cracked vacuum hose B
Defective intake manifold gasket B
Defective throttle body gasket B
Defective PCV valve B
Loosened oil filler cap B
Dirty air cleaner element A
Fuel line Defective fuel pump and relay B
Clogged fuel line B
Lack of fuel or insufficient fuel C
Timing belt Defective timing B
Compression Incorrect valve clearance B
Loosened spark plug or defective gasket B
Loosened cylinder head bolt or defective cylinder head B
gasket
Improper valve sealing B
Defective valve stem C
Worn or broken valve spring B
Worn or stuck piston rings, cylinder and piston C
Incorrect valve timing A
Improper engine oil (low viscosity) B
Lubrication system Incorrect oil pressure B
Cooling system Over-heating C
Over-cooling C
Others Evaporative emission control system malfunction A

ME(H4SO)-98
 Engine Trouble in General
MECHANICAL

Symptoms Problem parts etc. Possible cause RANK

4. Surging Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
Intake system Loosened or cracked intake duct A
Loosened or cracked PCV hose A
Loosened or cracked vacuum hose A
Defective intake manifold gasket B
Defective throttle body gasket B
Defective PCV valve B
Loosened oil filler cap B
Dirty air cleaner element B
Fuel line Defective fuel pump and relay B
Clogged fuel line B
Lack of fuel or insufficient fuel C
Timing belt Defective timing B
Compression Incorrect valve clearance B
Loosened spark plug or defective gasket C
Loosened cylinder head bolt or defective cylinder head C
gasket
Improper valve sealing C
Defective valve stem C
Worn or broken valve spring C
Worn or stuck piston rings, cylinder and piston C
Incorrect valve timing A
Improper engine oil (low viscosity) B
Cooling system Over-heating B
Others Evaporative emission control system malfunction C
5. Engine does not return to Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
idle. Intake system Loosened or cracked vacuum hose A
Others Stuck or damaged throttle valve A
6. Dieseling (Run-on) Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
Cooling system Over-heating B
Others Evaporative emission control system malfunction B
7. After burning in exhaust Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
system Intake system Loosened or cracked intake duct C
Loosened or cracked PCV hose C
Loosened or cracked vacuum hose B
Defective PCV valve B
Loosened oil filler cap C
Timing belt Defective timing B
Compression Incorrect valve clearance B
Loosened spark plug or defective gasket C
Loosened cylinder head bolt or defective cylinder head C
gasket
Improper valve sealing B
Defective valve stem C
Worn or broken valve spring C
Worn or stuck piston rings, cylinder and piston C
Incorrect valve timing A
Lubrication system Incorrect oil pressure C
Cooling system Over-cooling C
Others Evaporative emission control system malfunction C

ME(H4SO)-99
 Engine Trouble in General
MECHANICAL

Symptoms Problem parts etc. Possible cause RANK

8. Knocking Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
Intake system Loosened oil filler cap B
Timing belt Defective timing B
Compression Incorrect valve clearance C
Incorrect valve timing B
Cooling system Over-heating A
9. Excessive engine oil con- Intake system Loosened or cracked PCV hose A
sumption Defective PCV valve B
Loosened oil filler cap C
Compression Defective valve stem A
Worn or stuck piston rings, cylinder and piston A
Lubrication system Loosened oil pump attaching bolts and defective gas- B
ket
Defective oil filter gasket B
Defective crankshaft oil seal B
Defective rocker cover gasket B
Loosened oil drain plug or defective gasket B
Loosened oil pan fitting bolts or defective oil pan B
10. Excessive fuel consump- Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
tion Intake system Dirty air cleaner element A
Timing belt Defective timing B
Compression Incorrect valve clearance B
Loosened spark plug or defective gasket C
Loosened cylinder head bolt or defective cylinder head C
gasket
Improper valve sealing B
Defective valve stem C
Worn or broken valve spring C
Worn or stuck piston rings, cylinder and piston B
Incorrect valve timing B
Lubrication system Incorrect oil pressure C
Cooling system Over-cooling C

ME(H4SO)-100
 Engine Noise
MECHANICAL

28.Engine Noise
A: INSPECTION
Type of sound Condition Possible cause
• Valve mechanism is defective.
• Incorrect valve clearance
Sound increases as engine
Regular clicking sound • Worn valve rocker
speed increases.
• Worn camshaft
• Broken valve spring
• Worn crankshaft main bearing
Oil pressure is low.
• Worn connecting rod bearing (large end)
Heavy and dull clank
• Damaged engine mounting
Oil pressure is normal.
• Loosened flywheel mounting bolt
• Ignition timing advanced
Sound is noticeable when
High-pitched clank (Spark • Accumulation of carbon inside combustion chamber
accelerating with an overload
knock) • Wrong heat range of spark plug
condition.
• Improper octane value gasoline
Sound is reduced when fuel • Worn crankshaft main bearing
Clank when engine speed is
injector connector of noisy cyl- • Worn connecting rod bearing (large end)
1,000 to 2,000 rpm
inder is disconnected. *
Sound is reduced when fuel • Worn cylinder liner and piston ring
injector connector of noisy cyl- • Broken or stuck piston ring
Knocking sound when engine inder is disconnected. * • Worn piston pin and hole at piston end of connecting rod
is operating under idling speed
and engine is warm Sound is not reduced if each • Worn cam sprocket
fuel injector connector is dis- • Worn camshaft journal bore in cylinder head
connected in turn. *
Squeaky sound — Insufficient generator lubrication
Rubbing sound — Poor contact of generator brush and rotor
Gear scream when starting • Defective ignition starter switch
—
engine • Worn gear and starter pinion
Sound like polishing glass with • Loose V-belt
—
a dry cloth • Defective water pump shaft
• Insufficient compression
Hissing sound —
• Air leakage in air intake system, hose, connection or manifold
• Loose timing belt
Timing belt noise —
• Timing belt contacting with adjacent part
Valve noise — Incorrect valve clearance

* When disconnecting the fuel injector connector, the malfunction indicator light illuminates and DTC is stored in ECM memory.
Therefore, perform the Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51, OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.> and Inspection
Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE, Inspection Mode.> after connecting the fuel injector connector.

ME(H4SO)-101
11LE_US.book 102 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Engine Noise
MECHANICAL

ME(H4SO)-102
EXHAUST

EX(H4SO)
Page
1. General Description ...................................................................................2
2. Front Exhaust Pipe .....................................................................................4
3. Center Exhaust Pipe ..................................................................................7
4. Rear Exhaust Pipe .....................................................................................8
5. Muffler ......................................................................................................10
11LE_US.book 2 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Description
EXHAUST

1. General Description
A: COMPONENT

(5) (30)
(8)
(6) T1
(7)
T8

(9) (31)
(2)
(5)

(6)
(1) (4) T8

(3)
T10
(18) (11)
T2 T3

T9
(28)
(16) (24)

(10) T3
(23) (22)

T2
(12) (13)
T2
(20)
(14)

(17) (15)
T2
(19) T2
T7

(20)
T5
(25)
(32)
T5
T4
T2 T5

(21)
(29)
T2

(26) T6

T2
(27) T2

EX-02698

EX(H4SO)-2
 General Description
EXHAUST

(1) Gasket (16) Front oxygen (A/F) sensor (31) Cushion rubber (with protrusion)
(2) Spring (17) Front catalytic converter (32) Hanger bracket (MT model)
(3) Chamber (18) Rear oxygen sensor
(4) Rear exhaust pipe (19) Gasket Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(5) Cushion rubber (without protru- (20) Gasket T1: 7.5 (0.8, 5.5)
sion)
(6) Self-locking nut (21) Front exhaust pipe T2: 13 (1.3, 9.6)
(7) Gasket (22) Front exhaust pipe upper cover LH T3: 18 (1.8, 13.3)
(8) Muffler (23) Front exhaust pipe upper cover T4: 23 (2.3, 17.0)
RH
(9) Bolt (24) Front catalytic converter upper T5: 30 (3.1, 22.1)
cover
(10) Center exhaust pipe front upper (25) Front catalytic converter lower T6: 35 (3.6, 25.8)
cover cover
(11) Rear catalytic converter upper (26) Front exhaust pipe lower cover RH T7: 40 (4.1, 29.5)
cover
(12) Center exhaust pipe (27) Front exhaust pipe lower cover LH T8: 48 (4.9, 35.4)
(13) Rear catalytic converter (28) Band T9: <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-37, INSTAL-
LATION, Front Oxygen (A/F)
Sensor.>
(14) Rear catalytic converter lower (29) Hanger bracket (CVT model) T10: <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-39, INSTAL-
cover LATION, Rear Oxygen Sensor.>
(15) Center exhaust pipe front lower (30) Muffler cutter (Models with muffler
cover cutter)

B: CAUTION
• Wear appropriate work clothing, including a cap,
protective goggles and protective shoes when per-
forming any work.
• Remove contamination including dirt and corro-
sion before removal, installation or disassembly.
• Keep the disassembled parts in order and pro-
tect them from dust and dirt.
• Before removal, installation or disassembly, be
sure to clarify the failure. Avoid unnecessary re-
moval, installation, disassembly and replacement.
• Vehicle components are extremely hot after driv-
ing. Be wary of receiving burns from heated parts.
• Be sure to tighten fasteners including bolts and
nuts to the specified torque.
• Place shop jacks or rigid racks at the specified
points.
• Before disconnecting connectors of sensors or
units, be sure to disconnect the ground cable from
the battery.
• If any fat adheres to the exhaust pipe, wipe it off.
Otherwise a fire may happen.

EX(H4SO)-3
 Front Exhaust Pipe
EXHAUST

2. Front Exhaust Pipe 7) Remove the nuts which hold front exhaust pipe
onto cylinder heads.
A: REMOVAL CAUTION:
CAUTION: Be careful not to drop the front exhaust pipe
Vehicle components are extremely hot after and center exhaust pipe assembly.
driving. Be wary of receiving burns from heated
parts.
1) Remove the air intake duct. <Ref. to IN(H4SO)-
9, REMOVAL, Air Intake Duct.>
2) Disconnect the ground cable from battery.

EX-02529

8) Remove the bolt which holds center exhaust

pipe to hanger bracket.

IG-02107

3) Disconnect the front oxygen (A/F) sensor con-

nector (A) and rear oxygen sensor connector (B)
and remove the clip (C) fastening the harness.

(B)
EX-02530
(A)
9) Remove the front exhaust pipe and center ex-
haust pipe from vehicle as a unit.
CAUTION:
• The front exhaust pipe and center exhaust
(C)
EX-02527
pipe assembly are very heavy. Be careful not to
drop the exhaust pipes when removing.
4) Lift up the vehicle. • After removing the front exhaust pipe and
5) Remove the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35, RE- center exhaust pipe assembly, do not pull the
MOVAL, Front Under Cover.> rear exhaust pipe with excessive force.
6) Remove the rear exhaust pipe from center ex- 10) Remove the center exhaust pipe from the front
haust pipe. exhaust pipe.

EX-02528 EX-02712

11) Remove the front oxygen (A/F) sensor and rear

oxygen sensor from front exhaust pipe. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-37, REMOVAL, Front Oxygen (A/F)
Sensor.> <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-39, REMOVAL, Rear
Oxygen Sensor.>

EX(H4SO)-4
 Front Exhaust Pipe
EXHAUST

B: INSTALLATION 5) Install the rear exhaust pipe to center exhaust

pipe.
1) Install the front oxygen (A/F) sensor and rear ox-
ygen sensor to the front exhaust pipe. <Ref. to NOTE:
FU(H4SO)-37, INSTALLATION, Front Oxygen (A/ Use a new gasket.
F) Sensor.> <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-39, INSTALLA-
Tightening torque:
TION, Rear Oxygen Sensor.>
18 N·m (1.8 kgf-m, 13.3 ft-lb)
2) Install the center exhaust pipe to front exhaust
pipe.
NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
Tightening torque:
40 N·m (4.1 kgf-m, 29.5 ft-lb)

EX-02528

6) Tighten the bolts which secure the center ex-

haust pipe to the hanger bracket.
Tightening torque:
35 N·m (3.6 kgf-m, 25.8 ft-lb)
EX-02712

3) Install the front exhaust pipe and center exhaust

pipe as a unit to the vehicle.
NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
4) Temporarily tighten the nuts which hold front ex-
haust pipe to cylinder heads.

EX-02530

7) Tighten the nuts which hold front exhaust pipe to

cylinder heads.
Tightening torque:
30 N·m (3.1 kgf-m, 22.1 ft-lb)

EX-02529

EX-02529

EX(H4SO)-5
 Front Exhaust Pipe
EXHAUST

8) Install the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35, INSTAL-

LATION, Front Under Cover.>
9) Lower the vehicle.
10) Connect the front oxygen (A/F) sensor connec-
tor (A) and rear oxygen sensor connector (B), and
fasten the harness with the clip (C).

(B)
(A)

(C)
EX-02527

11) Connect the battery ground terminal.

IG-02107

12) Install the air intake duct. <Ref. to IN(H4SO)-9,

INSTALLATION, Air Intake Duct.>
C: INSPECTION
1) Check the connections and welds for exhaust
leaks.
2) Make sure there are no holes or rusting.

EX(H4SO)-6
 Center Exhaust Pipe
EXHAUST

3. Center Exhaust Pipe

A: REMOVAL
After removing the center exhaust pipe and front
exhaust pipe as a unit, separate them. Refer to
“Front Exhaust Pipe” for the removal procedure.
<Ref. to EX(H4SO)-4, REMOVAL, Front Exhaust
Pipe.>
B: INSTALLATION
Install the center exhaust pipe and front exhaust
pipe as a unit. Refer to “Front Exhaust Pipe” for the
installation procedure. <Ref. to EX(H4SO)-5, IN-
STALLATION, Front Exhaust Pipe.>
C: INSPECTION
1) Check the connections and welds for exhaust
leaks.
2) Make sure there are no holes or rusting.

EX(H4SO)-7
11LE_US.book 8 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Rear Exhaust Pipe

EXHAUST

4. Rear Exhaust Pipe B: INSTALLATION

1) Apply a coat of spray type lubricant to the mating
A: REMOVAL area of cushion rubber.
CAUTION: 2) Install the rear exhaust pipe to cushion rubber.
Vehicle components are extremely hot after NOTE:
driving. Be wary of receiving burns from heated
After assembling, degrease the lubricant which
parts. was applied to the cushion rubber while removing/
1) Lift up the vehicle. installing.
2) Remove the center exhaust pipe from rear ex-
haust pipe.

EX-02598

EX-02528 3) Install the rear exhaust pipe to the muffler.

3) Remove the muffler from rear exhaust pipe. NOTE:
Use a new gasket and self-locking nut.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to drop the rear exhaust pipe. Tightening torque:
48 N·m (4.9 kgf-m, 35.4 ft-lb)

EX-02531
EX-02531
4) Apply a coat of spray type lubricant to the mating
area of cushion rubber. 4) Install the center exhaust pipe to rear exhaust
5) Remove the rear exhaust pipe from the cushion pipe.
rubber. NOTE:
CAUTION: Use a new gasket.
Be careful not to let the muffler contact the rear Tightening torque:
bumper. 18 N·m (1.8 kgf-m, 13.3 ft-lb)

EX-02598
EX-02528

5) Lower the vehicle.

EX(H4SO)-8
11LE_US.book 9 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Rear Exhaust Pipe

EXHAUST

C: INSPECTION
1) Check the connections and welds for exhaust
leaks.
2) Make sure there are no holes or rusting.
3) Check the cushion rubber for wear or crack.

EX(H4SO)-9
11LE_US.book 10 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Muffler
EXHAUST

5. Muffler B: INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
A: REMOVAL
NOTE:
CAUTION:
• Use a new gasket and self-locking nut.
Vehicle components are extremely hot after
• After assembling, degrease the lubricant which
driving. Be wary of receiving burns from heated
was applied to the cushion rubber while removing/
parts. installing.
1) Lift up the vehicle.
2) Remove the rear exhaust pipe from the muffler. Tightening torque:
48 N·m (4.9 kgf-m, 35.4 ft-lb)

EX-02531
EX-02531
3) Apply a coat of spray type lubricant to the mating
area of cushion rubber. C: INSPECTION
4) Remove the muffler from the cushion rubber.
1) Check the connections and welds for exhaust
CAUTION: leaks.
Be careful not to drop the muffler during remov- 2) Make sure there are no holes or rusting.
al. 3) Check the cushion rubber for wear or crack.

EX-02532

EX(H4SO)-10
COOLING

CO(H4SO)
Page
1. General Description ...................................................................................2
2. Radiator Fan System .................................................................................7
3. Engine Coolant .........................................................................................13
4. Water Pump .............................................................................................15
5. Thermostat ...............................................................................................17
6. Radiator ....................................................................................................19
7. Radiator Cap ............................................................................................22
8. Radiator Main Fan and Fan Motor ...........................................................23
9. Radiator Sub Fan and Fan Motor .............................................................24
10. Reservoir Tank .........................................................................................25
11. Engine Cooling System Trouble in General .............................................26
11LE_US.book 2 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Description
COOLING

1. General Description
A: SPECIFICATION
Electric fan + Forced engine coolant
Cooling system
circulation system
Total engine
coolant 2 (US qt, Imp qt) Approx. 6.5 (6.9, 5.7)
capacity
Type Centrifugal impeller type
Discharge rate 2 (US gal, Imp gal) /min. 200 (52.8, 44.0)
Discharge perfor-
Pump speed — Discharge pressure 6,000 rpm — 225.4 kPa (23 mAq)
mance
Engine coolant temperature 80°C (176°F)
Water pump
Impeller diameter mm (in) 76 (2.99)
Number of impeller vanes 8
Pump pulley diameter mm (in) 60 (2.36)
Clearance between impeller and case mm (in) Standard 0.5 — 1.5 (0.020 — 0.060)
Type Wax pellet type
Starting temperature to open 86 — 90°C (187 — 194°F)
Thermostat Fully opens 95°C (203°F)
Valve lift mm (in) 9.0 (0.354) or more
Valve bore mm (in) 35 (1.38)
Main fan W 90
Motor input
Sub fan W 90
Radiator fan
Main fan 300 mm (11.81 in)/4
Fan diameter / Blade
Sub fan 300 mm (11.81 in)/5
Type Down flow, pressure type
687.4 × 340 × 16
Core dimensions Width × Height × Thickness mm (in)
(27.06 × 13.39 × 0.63)
Positive pres- Standard 93 — 123 (0.95 — 1.25, 14 — 18)
Radiator Pressure range in sure side Service limit 83 (0.85, 12)
which cap valve is kPa (kg/cm2, psi)
open Negative –1.0 to –4.9 or less
Standard
pressure side (–0.01 — –0.05, –0.1 — –0.7)
Fins Corrugated fin type
Reservoir
Capacity 2 (US qt, Imp qt) 0.45 (0.48, 0.40)
tank

Recommended materials Item number Alternative

SUBARU SUPER COOLANT
—
(Concentrated type)
Coolant —
SUBARU SUPER COOLANT
K0670Y0001
(Diluted type)
Water for dilution Distilled water — Soft water or tap water
Cooling system protecting agent Cooling system conditioner SOA345001 —

CO(H4SO)-2
11LE_US.book 3 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Description
COOLING

B: COMPONENT
1. WATER PUMP

(2)

(1)

T1

(7)

T1 (3)

(7)
(4)

T2 (5)

(6)

CO-02648

(1) Water pump ASSY (5) Gasket Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Gasket (6) Thermostat cover T1: First 12 (1.2, 8.9)
(3) Heater by-pass hose (7) Clip Second 12 (1.2, 8.9)
(4) Thermostat T2: 12 (1.2, 8.9)

CO(H4SO)-3
11LE_US.book 4 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Description
COOLING

2. RADIATOR & RADIATOR FAN

(5)

(6) (8)

(5)
T2
T1

T2
(7)
T1
(10)
T3

(9)

(4) (11)

(3)
(20) (12)

(2)

(13)

(5)
B

B (14)
A (14)
(16)
(17) A (14)

(19) (1)
(5)
(18)

(15)

CO-02663

(1) Radiator lower cushion (10) Radiator sub fan shroud (19) O-ring
(2) Radiator (11) Radiator sub fan, radiator sub fan (20) Radiator cap
motor ASSY
(3) Radiator upper cushion (12) Radiator main fan shroud
(4) Radiator upper bracket (13) Radiator main fan, radiator main Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
fan motor ASSY
(5) Clip (14) CVTF hose clip (CVT model) T1: 5 (0.5, 3.7)
(6) Radiator inlet hose (15) CVTF hose A (CVT model) T2: 7.5 (0.8, 5.5)
(7) Engine coolant reservoir tank cap (16) CVTF hose B (CVT model) T3: 12 (1.2, 8.9)
(8) Over flow hose (17) Radiator outlet hose
(9) Engine coolant reservoir tank (18) Radiator drain plug

CO(H4SO)-4
11LE_US.book 5 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Description
COOLING

C: CAUTION
• Wear appropriate work clothing, including a cap,
protective goggles and protective shoes when per-
forming any work.
• Remove contamination including dirt and corro-
sion before removal, installation or disassembly.
• Keep the disassembled parts in order and pro-
tect them from dust and dirt.
• Before removal, installation or disassembly, be
sure to clarify the failure. Avoid unnecessary re-
moval, installation, disassembly and replacement.
• Vehicle components are extremely hot after driv-
ing. Be wary of receiving burns from heated parts.
• Be sure to tighten fasteners including bolts and
nuts to the specified torque.
• Place shop jacks or rigid racks at the specified
points.
• Before disconnecting connectors of sensors or
units, be sure to disconnect the ground cable from
battery.
• Prepare a container and cloth to prevent scatter-
ing of engine coolant when performing work where
engine coolant can be spilled. If the fuel spills, wipe
it off immediately to prevent from penetrating into
floor or flowing out for environmental protection.
• Follow all government and local regulations con-
cerning disposal of refuse when disposing engine
coolant.

CO(H4SO)-5
11LE_US.book 6 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Description
COOLING

D: PREPARATION TOOL
1. SPECIAL TOOL
ILLUSTRATION TOOL NUMBER DESCRIPTION REMARKS
499977400 CRANK PULLEY Used for removing and installing the crank pul-
WRENCH ley. (CVT model)

ST-499977400
499977100 CRANK PULLEY Used for removing and installing the crank pul-
WRENCH ley. (MT model)

ST-499977100
18231AA010 CAM SPROCKET Used for removing and installing cam sprocket.
WRENCH NOTE:
CAM SPROCKET WRENCH (499207100) can
also be used.

ST18231AA010
1B022XU0 SUBARU SELECT Used for troubleshooting the electrical system.
MONITOR III KIT

ST1B022XU0

2. GENERAL TOOL
TOOL NAME REMARKS
Circuit tester Used for measuring resistance and voltage.
Radiator cap tester Used for checking radiator and radiator cap.

CO(H4SO)-6
11LE_US.book 7 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Radiator Fan System

COOLING

2. Radiator Fan System

A: WIRING DIAGRAM

TO POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

MB-6 FB-35 MB-7 FB-39

M/B FUSE NO. 8 F/B FUSE NO. 26 M/B FUSE NO. 7 F/B FUSE NO. 22
(B) (IG) (B) (IG)

14

17

20

21

10
13
2

MAIN
FAN A/C
MOTOR MAIN MAIN SUB RELAY HOLDER
FAN FAN FAN
B473 RELAY 1 RELAY 2 RELAY B497
1

15
16

22
19
18

11
12

B482
1

B12

B11

J/C
3

B479

B : B135 ECM

SUB FAN MOTOR

B473 B479 B497 B: B135

B482 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
3 4 5 1
2 1 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
6
2 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
8 9 7
18
12 16 19
10 11 14 15
13 17 20 21 22

A/C RELAY HOLDER

CO-02650

CO(H4SO)-7
11LE_US.book 8 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Radiator Fan System

COOLING

B: INSPECTION
Operating condition:
Radiator fan operates depending on the radiator fan operation mode related to engine coolant temperature or
the radiator fan operation mode related to A/C compressor load, whichever is higher as an operation mode.
• Radiator fan operation mode related to engine coolant temperature

(A)

(1)

(2)

(3) (B)
(4) (5)(6) (7)
CO-02661

(A) Radiator fan operation mode (B) Engine coolant temperature

(1) High-Speed (4) 96°C (205°F) (7) 100°C (212°F)

(2) Low-Speed (5) 97.5°C (207°F)
(3) OFF (6) 98°C (208°F)

• Radiator fan operation mode related to A/C compressor load

(A)

(1)

(2)

(3) (B)
(4) (5) (6) (7)
CO-02662

(A) Radiator fan operation mode (B) A/C compressor refrigerant pressure

(1) High-Speed (4) 0.8 MPa (8.16 kgf/cm2, 116 psi) (7) 1.5 MPa (15.30 kgf/cm2, 218 psi)
(2) Low-Speed (5) 1.125 MPa (11.47 kgf/cm2,
163 psi)
(3) OFF (6) 1.25 MPa (12.75 kgf/cm2, 181 psi)

CO(H4SO)-8
 Radiator Fan System
COOLING

DIAGNOSIS:
Radiator main fan and radiator sub fans do not rotate under the above operating conditions.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK OPERATION OF RADIATOR FAN. Do the radiator main fans and Go to step 2. Go to step 3.
1) Connect the delivery mode fuse. radiator sub fans rotate at low
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. speed?
3) Using the Subaru Select Monitor, check the
forced operation of the radiator fan relay.
NOTE:
• When performing a forced operation radiator
fan relay check using the Subaru Select Moni-
tor, the radiator main fan and radiator sub fan
will repeat low speed revolution → high speed
revolution → OFF in this order.
• Subaru Select Monitor
For detailed operation procedures, refer to “PC
application help for Subaru Select Monitor”.
2 CHECK OPERATION OF RADIATOR FAN. Do the radiator main fans and Radiator main fan Go to step 27.
1) Connect the delivery mode fuse. radiator sub fans rotate at high system is normal.
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. speed?
3) Using the Subaru Select Monitor, check the
forced operation of the radiator fan relay.
NOTE:
• When performing a forced operation radiator
fan relay check using the Subaru Select Moni-
tor, the radiator main fan and radiator sub fan
will repeat low speed revolution → high speed
revolution → OFF in this order.
• Subaru Select Monitor
For detailed operation procedures, refer to “PC
application help for Subaru Select Monitor”.
3 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO SUB FAN RE- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 4. Go to step 5.
LAY.
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
2) Remove the sub fan relay from A/C relay
holder.
3) Measure the voltage between sub fan relay
connector and chassis ground.
Connector & terminal
(B497) No. 10 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
4 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO SUB FAN RE- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 7. Go to step 6.
LAY.
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON.
2) Measure the voltage between sub fan relay
connector and chassis ground.
Connector & terminal
(B497) No. 13 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
5 CHECK FUSE. Is the fuse blown out? Replace the fuse. Repair the power
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. supply line.
2) Remove the fuse No. 7.
3) Check the condition of fuse.
6 CHECK FUSE. Is the fuse blown out? Replace the fuse. Repair the power
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. supply line.
2) Remove the fuse No. 22.
3) Check the condition of fuse.

CO(H4SO)-9
 Radiator Fan System
COOLING

Step Check Yes No

7 CHECK SUB FAN RELAY. Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 8. Replace the sub
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. more? fan relay. <Ref. to
2) Measure the resistance between sub fan AC-25, Relay and
relay terminals. Fuse.>
Terminals
No. 10 — No. 11:
8 CHECK SUB FAN RELAY. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 9. Replace the sub
1) Connect the battery to terminals No. 13 and fan relay. <Ref. to
No. 12 of the sub fan relay. AC-25, Relay and
2) Measure the resistance between sub fan Fuse.>
relay terminals.
Terminals
No. 10 — No. 11:
9 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN SUB FAN RE- Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 10. Repair the open
LAY CONNECTOR AND SUB FAN MOTOR circuit of harness
CONNECTOR. between sub fan
1) Disconnect the connector from the sub fan relay connector
motor. and sub fan motor
2) Measure the resistance of harness between connector.
sub fan relay connector and sub fan motor con-
nector.
Connector & terminal
(B482) No. 2 — (B497) No. 11:
10 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN SUB FAN MO- Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 11. Repair the open
TOR CONNECTOR AND MAIN FAN RELAY 2 circuit of the har-
CONNECTOR. ness between sub
1) Remove the main fan relay 2 from A/C relay fan motor connec-
holder. tor and main fan
2) Measure the resistance of harness between relay 2 connector.
sub fan motor connector and main fan relay 2
connector.
Connector & terminal
(B482) No. 1 — (B497) No. 18:
11 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of the sub Repair the poor Go to step 12.
Check poor contact of sub fan motor connector. fan motor connector? contact of sub fan
motor connector.
12 CHECK SUB FAN MOTOR. Does the radiator sub fan Go to step 13. Replace the sub
Connect the battery positive (+) terminal to ter- rotate? fan motor. <Ref. to
minal No. 2 of the sub fan motor, and the ground CO(H4SO)-24,
(–) terminal to terminal No. 1. Radiator Sub Fan
and Fan Motor.>
13 CHECK MAIN FAN RELAY 2. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 14. Replace the main
Measure the resistance between main fan relay fan relay 2. <Ref. to
2 terminals. AC-25, Relay and
Terminals Fuse.>
No. 21 — No. 18:
14 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN MAIN FAN Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 15. Repair the open
RELAY 2 CONNECTOR AND MAIN FAN MO- circuit of the har-
TOR CONNECTOR. ness between
1) Disconnect the connector from the main fan main fan relay 2
motor. connector and
2) Measure the resistance of the harness main fan motor
between main fan relay 2 connector and main connector.
fan motor connector.
Connector & terminal
(B473) No. 2 — (B497) No. 21:

CO(H4SO)-10
 Radiator Fan System
COOLING

Step Check Yes No

15 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT OF MAIN FAN Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Go to step 16. Repair the open
MOTOR. circuit of the har-
Measure the resistance between main fan ness between the
motor connector and chassis ground. main fan motor
Connector & terminal connector and
(B473) No. 1 — Chassis ground: chassis ground or
poor contact of the
joint connector.
16 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of the
Repair the poor Go to step 17.
Check poor contact of main fan motor connec- main fan motor connector? contact of main fan
tor. motor connector.
17 CHECK MAIN FAN MOTOR. Does the radiator main fan Go to step 18. Replace the main
Connect the battery positive (+) terminal to ter-
rotate? fan motor. <Ref. to
minal No. 2 of the main fan motor, and the CO(H4SO)-23,
ground (–) terminal to terminal No. 1. Radiator Main Fan
and Fan Motor.>
18 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN SUB FAN RE- Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 19. Repair the open
LAY CONNECTOR AND ECM. circuit of harness
1) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. between sub fan
2) Measure the resistance between the sub relay connector
fan relay connector and ECM connector. and ECM.
Connector & terminal
(B135) No. 11 — (B497) No. 12:
19 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of ECM Repair the poor Check the DTC.
Check for poor contact of ECM connector. connector? contact of ECM Repair the trouble
connector. cause. <Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
40, Read Diagnos-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
20 CHECK MAIN FAN RELAY 1. Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 21. Replace the main
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. more? fan relay 1. <Ref. to
2) Remove the main fan relay 1 from A/C relay AC-25, Relay and
holder. Fuse.>
3) Measure the resistance between main fan
relay 1 terminals.
Terminals
No. 14 — No. 15:
21 CHECK MAIN FAN RELAY 1. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 22. Replace the main
1) Connect terminals No. 17 and No. 16 of the fan relay 1. <Ref. to
main fan relay 1 to the battery. AC-25, Relay and
2) Measure the resistance between terminals Fuse.>
of main fan relay 1 switch.
Terminals
No. 14 — No. 15:
22 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN MAIN FAN Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 23. Repair the open
RELAY 1 CONNECTOR AND MAIN FAN MO- circuit of the har-
TOR CONNECTOR. ness between
1) Disconnect the connector from the main fan main fan relay 1
motor. connector and
2) Measure the resistance of the harness main fan motor
between main fan relay 1 connector and main connector.
fan motor connector.
Connector & terminal
(B473) No. 2 — (B497) No. 15:

CO(H4SO)-11
 Radiator Fan System
COOLING

Step Check Yes No

23 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN MAIN FAN Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 24. Repair the open
RELAY 1 CONNECTOR AND ECM. circuit of the har-
1) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. ness between
2) Measure the resistance between the main main fan relay 1
fan relay 1 connector and ECM connector. connector and
Connector & terminal ECM.
(B135) No. 12 — (B497) No. 16:
24 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN MAIN FAN Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 25. Repair the open
RELAY 2 CONNECTOR AND ECM. circuit of the har-
Measure the resistance between the main fan ness between
relay 2 connector and ECM connector. main fan relay 2
Connector & terminal connector and
(B135) No. 12 — (B497) No. 22: ECM.
25 CHECK FUSE. Is the fuse blown out? Replace the fuse. Go to step 26.
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
2) Remove the fuse No. 8 and 26.
3) Check the condition of fuse.
26 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of ECM Repair the poor Repair the power
Check for poor contact of ECM connector. connector? contact of ECM supply circuit to the
connector. main fuse box.
27 CHECK OPERATION OF RADIATOR FAN. Does the radiator sub fan Go to step 20. Go to step 28.
If the both fans do not rotate at high speed in the rotate?
condition of step 2, check whether the radiator
sub fan is rotating.
28 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT OF MAIN FAN Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 29. Repair the open
RELAY 2. circuit of the har-
1) Remove the main fan relay 2 from A/C relay ness between
holder. main fan relay 2
2) Measure the resistance between main fan connector and
relay 2 connector and chassis ground. chassis ground or
Connector & terminal poor contact of the
(B497) No. 19 — Chassis ground: joint connector.
29 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO MAIN FAN RE- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 30. Repair the power
LAY 2. supply line.
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON.
2) Measure the voltage between main fan relay
2 connector and chassis ground.
Connector & terminal
(B497) No. 20 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
30 CHECK MAIN FAN RELAY 2. Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 31. Replace the main
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. more? fan relay 2. <Ref. to
2) Remove the main fan relay 2. AC-25, Relay and
3) Measure the resistance between main fan Fuse.>
relay 2 terminals.
Terminals
No. 18 — No. 19:
31 CHECK MAIN FAN RELAY 2. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 23. Replace the main
1) Connect the battery to terminals No. 20 and fan relay 2. <Ref. to
No. 22 of the main fan relay 2. AC-25, Relay and
2) Measure the resistance between main fan Fuse.>
relay 2 terminals.
Terminals
No. 18 — No. 19:

CO(H4SO)-12
 Engine Coolant
COOLING

3. Engine Coolant NOTE:

The SUBARU Super Coolant is especially made for
A: REPLACEMENT SUBARU engine, which has an aluminum cylinder
block, and contains anti-freeze and anti-rust
1. DRAINING OF ENGINE COOLANT agents. Always use SUBARU Super Coolant, since
1) Lift up the vehicle. other coolant may cause corrosion.
2) Remove the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35, RE- 3) Fill engine coolant into the reservoir tank up to
MOVAL, Front Under Cover.> “FULL” level.
3) Remove the drain plug to drain engine coolant
into container.
NOTE:
Remove the radiator cap so that engine coolant will
drain faster.
FULL
FULL

LOW
LOW

CO-00269

4) Close the radiator cap and start the engine.

Race 5 to 6 times at 3,000 rpm or less, then stop
the engine. (Complete this operation within 40 sec-
onds.)
CO-02632 5) Wait for one minute after the engine stops, and
4) Install the drain plug. open the radiator cap. If the engine coolant level
5) Install the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35, INSTAL- drops, add engine coolant into radiator up to the fill-
LATION, Front Under Cover.> er neck position.
6) Perform the procedures 4) and 5) again.
2. FILLING OF ENGINE COOLANT 7) Attach the radiator cap and reservoir tank cap
1) Pour cooling system conditioner from the filler properly.
neck. 8) Start the engine and operate the heater at max-
imum hot position and the blower speed setting to
Cooling system protecting agent: “LO”.
Refer to “SPECIFICATION” for cooling sys- 9) Run the engine at 2,000 rpm or less until radiator
tem protecting agent. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-2, fan starts and stops.
SPECIFICATION, General Description.>
2) Pour engine coolant into the radiator up to the NOTE:
filler neck position. Be careful with the engine coolant temperature
gauge to prevent overheating.
Recommended engine coolant: 10) Stop the engine and wait until the engine cool-
Refer to “SPECIFICATION” for recommended ant temperature lowers to 30°C (86°F) or less.
engine coolant. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-2, SPECI- 11) Open the radiator cap. If the engine coolant lev-
FICATION, General Description.> el drops, fill engine coolant up to the radiator filler
Engine coolant level: neck position and to the reservoir tank “FULL” lev-
Refer to “SPECIFICATION” for engine cool- el.
ant level. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-2, SPECIFICA- 12) Attach the radiator cap correctly.
TION, General Description.> 13) Set the heater setting to maximum hot position
and the blower speed setting to “LO” and start the
Engine coolant concentration: engine. Perform racing at 3,000 rpm or less. If the
Refer to “ADJUSTMENT” for the recommend- flowing sound is heard from heater core, repeat the
ed engine coolant concentration. <Ref. to procedures from step 9).
CO(H4SO)-14, ADJUSTMENT, Engine Cool-
ant.>

CO(H4SO)-13
 Engine Coolant
COOLING

B: ADJUSTMENT
1. PROCEDURE TO ADJUST THE SUBARU SUPER COOLANT CONCENTRATION
CAUTION:
SUBARU Super Coolant concentration must be used from 50 to 60% to assure the best performance
of the anti-freeze and anti-rust agents.
To adjust the concentration of SUBARU Super Coolant according to temperature, find the proper SUBARU
Super Coolant concentration in the table, and add diluting water to the SUBARU Super Coolant (concentrat-
ed type) until it reaches the proper dilution.
Relationship of SUBARU Super Coolant concentration and freezing temperature
SUBARU Super Coolant concentration 50% 55% 60%
Freezing temperature –36°C (–33°F) –41°C (–42°F) –50°C (–58°F)

Recommended Engine Coolant and Water for Dilution:

Refer to “SPECIFICATION” for the recommended engine coolant and diluting water. <Ref. to
CO(H4SO)-2, SPECIFICATION, General Description.>

CO(H4SO)-14
 Water Pump
COOLING

4. Water Pump 11) Disconnect the hose from water pump.

12) Remove the water pump.
A: REMOVAL
1) Remove the radiator. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-19,
REMOVAL, Radiator.>
2) Remove the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-42,
REMOVAL, V-belt.>
3) Remove the crank pulley. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-
44, REMOVAL, Crank Pulley.>
4) Remove the timing belt cover. <Ref. to
ME(H4SO)-46, REMOVAL, Timing Belt Cover.>
5) Remove the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-47, CO-00021
TIMING BELT, REMOVAL, Timing Belt.>
6) Remove the automatic belt tension adjuster. B: INSTALLATION
1) Install the water pump onto cylinder block LH.
NOTE:
• Use a new gasket.
• When installing the water pump, tighten the bolts
in two stages in alphabetical sequence as shown in
figure.
Tightening torque:
First
CO-00016
12 N·m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.9 ft-lb)
Second
7) Remove the camshaft position sensor. <Ref. to 12 N·m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.9 ft-lb)
FU(H4SO)-26, REMOVAL, Camshaft Position
Sensor.> (B)
(C)
8) Remove the cam sprocket LH. <Ref. to (A)
ME(H4SO)-52, REMOVAL, Cam Sprocket.> (D)
9) Remove the belt cover No. 2 LH.
(E) (F)

ME-04425

2) Install the hose to water pump.

3) Install the tensioner bracket.
Tightening torque:
CO-00019 24.5 N·m (2.5 kgf-m, 18.1 ft-lb)
10) Remove the tensioner bracket.

ME-04984
ME-04984

CO(H4SO)-15
 Water Pump
COOLING

4) Install the belt cover No. 2 LH. C: INSPECTION

Tightening torque: 1) Check the water pump bearing for smooth rota-
5 N·m (0.5 kgf-m, 3.7 ft-lb) tion.
2) Check the water pump pulley for abnormalities.
3) Make sure the impeller is not abnormally de-
formed or damaged.
4) Inspect the clearance between impeller and
pump case.
Clearance between impeller and pump case:
Standard
0.5 — 1.5 mm (0.020 — 0.060 in)

CO-00019

5) Install the cam sprocket LH. <Ref. to

ME(H4SO)-52, INSTALLATION, Cam Sprocket.>
6) Install the camshaft position sensor. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-26, INSTALLATION, Camshaft Position
Sensor.>
7) Install an automatic belt tension adjuster with the
tension rod held by a pin. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-48,
AUTOMATIC BELT TENSION ADJUSTER AS- CO-00293
SEMBLY AND BELT IDLER, INSTALLATION,
Timing Belt.> 5) After water pump installation, check pulley shaft
for engine coolant leaks or noise. If leaks or noise
8) Install the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-49,
are noted, replace the water pump assembly.
TIMING BELT, INSTALLATION, Timing Belt.>
9) Install the timing belt cover. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-
46, INSTALLATION, Timing Belt Cover.>
10) Install the crank pulley. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-44,
INSTALLATION, Crank Pulley.>
11) Install the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-42, IN-
STALLATION, V-belt.>
12) Install the radiator. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-20, IN-
STALLATION, Radiator.>

CO(H4SO)-16
 Thermostat
COOLING

5. Thermostat B: INSTALLATION
1) Install a gasket to thermostat.
A: REMOVAL
1) Lift up the vehicle. NOTE:
2) Remove the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35, RE- Use a new gasket.
MOVAL, Front Under Cover.> 2) Install the thermostat and thermostat cover.
3) Drain engine coolant. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-13, NOTE:
DRAINING OF ENGINE COOLANT, REPLACE- Install the parts with the jiggle pin facing upward.
MENT, Engine Coolant.>
Tightening torque:
4) Disconnect the radiator outlet hose from thermo-
12 N·m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.9 ft-lb)
stat cover.

CO-00270
(D)
5) Remove the thermostat cover, and then remove
the gasket and thermostat.

(C)

(B)

(A)

CO-02762

(A) Thermostat cover

(B) Gasket
(C) Thermostat
(D) Jiggle pin

3) Connect the radiator outlet hose to thermostat

(C)
cover.
(B)
4) Install the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35, INSTAL-
LATION, Front Under Cover.>
5) Lower the vehicle.
(A)
6) Fill engine coolant. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-13,
CO-02649
FILLING OF ENGINE COOLANT, REPLACE-
MENT, Engine Coolant.>
(A) Thermostat cover
(B) Gasket
(C) Thermostat

CO(H4SO)-17
11LE_US.book 18 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Thermostat
COOLING

C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the thermostat does not have defor-
mation, cracks or damage.
2) Check that the thermostat valve closes com-
pletely at an ambient temperature.
3) Immerse the thermostat and a thermometer in
water. Raise water temperature gradually, and
check the temperature and valve lift when the valve
begins to open and when the valve is fully opened.
Replace the thermostat if faulty.
NOTE:
• During the test, agitate the water for even tem-
perature distribution.
• Leave the thermostat in the boiling water for
five minutes or more before measuring the valve
lift.
• Hold the thermostat with a wire or the like to
avoid contacting the container bottom.
Starting temperature to open:
86 — 90°C (187 — 194°F)
Full open temperature:
95°C (203°F)
Total valve lift:
9.0 mm (0.354 in) or more

(A)

(B)

CO-02420

(A) Thermometer
(B) Thermostat

CO(H4SO)-18
 Radiator
COOLING

6. Radiator 8) Remove the air intake duct. <Ref. to IN(H4SO)-

9, REMOVAL, Air Intake Duct.>
A: REMOVAL 9) Remove the reservoir tank. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-
25, REMOVAL, Reservoir Tank.>
CAUTION:
The radiator is pressurized when the engine 10) Disconnect the connectors of main fan motor
and radiator are hot. Wait until engine and radi- (A) and sub fan motor (B).
ator cools down before working on the radiator.
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery.

(A)
CO-02624

IG-02107

2) Lift up the vehicle. (B)

3) Remove the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35, RE-
MOVAL, Front Under Cover.>
4) Drain engine coolant. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-13,
DRAINING OF ENGINE COOLANT, REPLACE-
MENT, Engine Coolant.>
5) Disconnect the radiator outlet hose from thermo-
stat cover. CO-02625

11) Disconnect the radiator inlet hoses from the en-

gine.

CO-00270

6) Disconnect the CVTF cooler hoses from CVTF

pipes. (CVT model) CO-02617

NOTE: 12) Remove the grille bracket.

Plug the CVTF pipe to prevent CVTF from leaking. NOTE:
Remove ten clips when removing the grille bracket.

CO-02664

7) Lower the vehicle. CO-02618

CO(H4SO)-19
11LE_US.book 20 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Radiator
COOLING

13) Remove the radiator upper brackets. 3) Install the radiator upper brackets.
Tightening torque:
12 N·m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.9 ft-lb)

CO-02619

14) Lift the radiator up and away from vehicle.

15) Remove the radiator lower cushion from the ve- CO-02619
hicle body.
4) Attach the grille bracket.

CO-02620
CO-02618
B: INSTALLATION 5) Connect the radiator inlet hose.
1) Install the radiator lower cushion to the vehicle
body.

CO-02617

6) Connect the connectors of radiator main fan mo-

CO-02620 tor connector (A) and sub fan motor connector (B).
2) Install the radiator to the vehicle.
NOTE:
Insert the pin on the lower side of radiator into the
radiator lower cushion.

(A)
CO-02624

CO(H4SO)-20
 Radiator
COOLING

15) Fill engine coolant. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-13,

FILLING OF ENGINE COOLANT, REPLACE-
MENT, Engine Coolant.>
(B)
16) Adjust the CVTF level. (CVT model) <Ref. to
CVT-37, ADJUSTMENT, CVTF.>
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the radiator does not have deforma-
tion, cracks or damage.
2) Check that the hose has no cracks, damage or
CO-02625
loose part.
7) Install the air intake duct. <Ref. to IN(H4SO)-9, 3) Remove the radiator cap, fill the radiator with en-
INSTALLATION, Air Intake Duct.> gine coolant, and then install the radiator cap tester
8) Install the reservoir tank. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)- to the filler neck of radiator.
25, INSTALLATION, Reservoir Tank.>
9) Lift up the vehicle.
10) Connect the CVTF cooler hoses. (CVT model)
NOTE:
Use a new CVTF hose.

CO-02588

4) Apply a pressure of 157 kPa (1.6 kgf/cm2, 23

psi) to the radiator, and check the following items.
• Leakage from the radiator or its vicinity
• Leakage from the hose or its connections
CO-02664
CAUTION:
11) Connect the radiator outlet hose. • Engine should be turned off.
• Wipe engine coolant from check points in ad-
vance.
• Be careful of engine coolant from spurting
out when removing the radiator cap tester.
• Be careful not to deform the filler neck of ra-
diator when installing and removing the radia-
tor cap tester.

CO-00270

12) Install the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35, INSTAL-

LATION, Front Under Cover.>
13) Lower the vehicle.
14) Connect the ground cable to battery.

IG-02107

CO(H4SO)-21
11LE_US.book 22 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Radiator Cap
COOLING

7. Radiator Cap
A: INSPECTION
1) Check that the radiator cap does not have defor-
mation, cracks or damage.
2) Attach the radiator cap tester to radiator cap.

CO-00044

3) Increase pressure until the radiator cap tester

gauge needle stops. Radiator cap is functioning
properly if it holds the service limit pressure for 5 —
6 seconds. Replace the radiator cap if its valve
opens at less than the service limit.
Standard:
93 — 123 kPa (0.95 — 1.25 kgf/cm2, 14 — 18
psi)
Service limit:
83 kPa (0.85 kgf/cm2, 12 psi)
CAUTION:
Be sure to remove foreign matter and rust from
the cap in advance. Otherwise, results of pres-
sure test will be incorrect.

CO(H4SO)-22
 Radiator Main Fan and Fan Motor
COOLING

8. Radiator Main Fan and Fan Tightening torque:

7.5 N·m (0.8 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb)
Motor
A: REMOVAL
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery.

CO-02621

C: DISASSEMBLY
1) Remove the clip which holds the main fan motor
IG-02107 assembly connector onto the radiator main fan
2) Remove the reservoir tank. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)- shroud.
25, REMOVAL, Reservoir Tank.> 2) Remove the bolts which hold the main fan motor
3) Disconnect the connector (A) of the main fan assembly onto the radiator main shroud.
motor assembly.

CO-00098
(A)
CO-02624
D: ASSEMBLY
4) Remove the CVTF hose from the clip of the radi-
Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.
ator main fan shroud. (CVT model)
5) Remove the bolts which hold the radiator main Tightening torque:
fan shroud to the radiator. 5 N·m (0.5 kgf-m, 3.7 ft-lb)

CO-02621 CO-00098

6) Remove the radiator main fan and fan motor E: INSPECTION

from vehicle.
Check that the radiator main fan, radiator main fan
B: INSTALLATION shroud and main fan motor assembly do not have
CAUTION: deformation, cracks or damage.
Confirm that the radiator hose is securely con-
nected.
Install in the reverse order of removal.

CO(H4SO)-23
 Radiator Sub Fan and Fan Motor
COOLING

9. Radiator Sub Fan and Fan Tightening torque:

7.5 N·m (0.8 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb)
Motor
A: REMOVAL
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery.

CO-02622

C: DISASSEMBLY
1) Remove the clip which holds the radiator sub fan
IG-02107 motor assembly connector onto the radiator sub
2) Remove the air intake duct. <Ref. to IN(H4SO)- fan shroud.
9, REMOVAL, Air Intake Duct.> 2) Remove the bolts which hold the sub fan motor
3) Remove the connector (B) of sub fan motor as- assembly onto the radiator sub fan shroud.
sembly.

(B)

CO-00098
CO-02625
D: ASSEMBLY
4) Remove the CVTF hose from the clip of the radi-
ator sub fan & fan motor assembly. (CVT model) Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.
5) Remove the bolts which hold the radiator sub fan Tightening torque:
shroud to the radiator. 5 N·m (0.5 kgf-m, 3.7 ft-lb)

CO-02622 CO-00098

6) Remove the radiator sub fan and fan motor from E: INSPECTION
vehicle.
Check that the radiator sub fan, radiator sub fan
B: INSTALLATION shroud and sub fan motor assembly do not have
CAUTION: deformation, cracks or damage.
Confirm that the radiator hose is securely con-
nected.
Install in the reverse order of removal.

CO(H4SO)-24
11LE_US.book 25 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Reservoir Tank
COOLING

10.Reservoir Tank
A: REMOVAL
1) Pull out the over flow hose (A) from the reservoir
tank.
2) Pull out the reservoir tank to the arrow direction
while pushing the claw (B).

(B)

(A)

CO-02623

B: INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the reservoir tank does not have de-
formation, cracks or damage.
2) Make sure the over flow hoses are not cracked,
damaged or loose.
3) Make sure the engine coolant level is between
“FULL” and “LOW”.

CO(H4SO)-25
 Engine Cooling System Trouble in General
COOLING

11.Engine Cooling System Trouble in General

A: INSPECTION
Trouble Possible cause Corrective action
Replenish engine coolant, inspect for leakage, and
a. Insufficient engine coolant
repair it if necessary.
b. Loose timing belt Repair or replace timing belt tensioner.
c. Oil on timing belt Replace.
d. Malfunction of thermostat Replace.
e. Malfunction of water pump Replace.
f. Clogged engine coolant passage Clean.
Inspect and repair ignition control system. <Ref. to
g. Improper ignition timing
EN(H4SO)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.>
h. Clogged or leaking radiator Clean, repair or replace.
Over-heating i. Defective radiator fan Replace.
Replace the engine coolant. If ineffective, check, repair
j. Improper engine oil in engine coolant
or replace engine components.
Inspect and repair the fuel injection system. <Ref. to
k. Air/fuel mixture ratio too lean
EN(H4SO)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.>
l. Excessive back pressure in exhaust system Clean or replace.
m. Insufficient clearance between piston and cylinder Adjust or replace.
n. Slipping clutch Repair or replace.
o. Dragging brake Adjust.
Inspect the radiator fan relay, engine coolant tempera-
p. Defective radiator fan
ture sensor or fan motor and replace them.
a. Ambient temperature extremely low Partly cover radiator front area.
Over-cooling
b. Defective thermostat Replace.
a. Loosened or damaged connecting units on hoses Repair or replace.
b. Leakage from water pump Replace.
c. Leakage from water pipe Repair or replace.
Retighten cylinder head bolts or replace cylinder head
Engine coolant d. Leakage around cylinder head gasket
gasket.
leaks
e. Damaged or cracked cylinder head and cylinder
Repair or replace.
block
f. Damaged or cracked thermostat cover Repair or replace.
g. Leakage from radiator Repair or replace.
a. Timing belt problem Replace.
b. Defective radiator fan Replace.
Noise
c. Defective water pump bearing Replace water pump.
d. Defective water pump mechanical seal Replace water pump.

CO(H4SO)-26
LUBRICATION

LU(H4SO)
Page
1. General Description ...................................................................................2
2. Oil Pressure System ................................................................................11
3. Engine Oil .................................................................................................13
4. Oil Pump ..................................................................................................15
5. Oil Pan and Strainer .................................................................................19
6. Oil Pressure Switch ..................................................................................24
7. Engine Oil Cooler .....................................................................................25
8. Oil Catch Tank .........................................................................................27
9. Scavenge Pump .......................................................................................28
10. Oil Pipe .....................................................................................................29
11. Engine Oil Filter ........................................................................................34
12. Oil Level Switch ........................................................................................35
13. Engine Lubrication System Trouble in General ........................................43
11LE_US.book 2 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Description
LUBRICATION

1. General Description
A: SPECIFICATION
• Non-turbo model
Lubrication method Forced lubrication
Pump type Trochoid type
Inner rotor 9
Number of teeth
Outer rotor 10
Outer rotor diameter × thickness mm (in) 76 × 10 (2.99 × 0.39)
Tip clearance between inner and
mm (in) Standard 0.04 — 0.14 (0.0016 — 0.0055)
outer rotors
Case clearance between outer
mm (in) Standard 0.10 — 0.175 (0.0039 — 0.0069)
rotor and pump case
Side clearance between inner
mm (in) Standard 0.02 — 0.07 (0.0008 — 0.0028)
rotor and pump case
Oil pump
Free length mm (in) 73.7 (2.902)
Relief valve spring Installed length mm (in) 54.7 (2.154)
Load when installed N (kgf, lbf) 93.1 (9.49, 20.93)
Discharge
kPa (kgf/cm2, psi) 98 (1.0, 14)
600 rpm pressure
Performance Discharge rate 2 (US qt, Imp qt)/min. 4.6 (4.9, 4.0) or more
(Oil temperature
Discharge
80°C (176°F)) kPa (kgf/cm2, psi) 294 (3.0, 43)
5,000 rpm pressure
Discharge rate 2 (US qt, Imp qt)/min. 47.0 (49.7, 41.4) or more
Relief valve working pressure kPa (kgf/cm2, psi) 588 (6.0, 85)
Filter type Full-flow filter type
Outer diameter: 68 mm (2.68 in) (Black) 800 (124)
Filtration area cm2 (sq in)
Outer diameter: 67.4 mm (2.65 in) (Blue) 555 (86)
Oil filter By-pass valve opening pressure kPa (kgf/cm2, psi) 160 (1.63, 23.2)
Outer diameter × Outer diameter: 68 mm (2.68 in) (Black) 68 × 65 (2.68 × 2.56)
mm (in)
width Outer diameter: 67.4 mm (2.65 in) (Blue) 67.4 × 65.3 (2.65 × 2.57)
Installation screw specifications M 20 × 1.5
Type Immersed contact point type
Oil pressure Operating voltage — power consumption 12 V — 3.4 W or less
switch Warning light operating pressure kPa (kgf/cm2, psi) 14.7 (0.15, 2.1)
Proof pressure kPa (kgf/cm2, psi) 981 (10, 142) or more
Total capacity (at overhaul) 2 (US qt, Imp qt) 4.8 (5.1, 4.2)
Engine oil When replacing engine oil and oil filter 2 (US qt, Imp qt) 4.2 (4.4, 3.7)
When replacing engine oil only 2 (US qt, Imp qt) 4.0 (4.2, 3.5)

LU(H4SO)-2
11LE_US.book 3 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Description
LUBRICATION

Recommended oil:
CAUTION:
It is acceptable to fill an engine with oil of another brand when replacing the oil, but make sure to use
following oil specified by Subaru.
Engine oil standard SAE viscosity No.
5W-30 (synthetic oil)

TR OLEUM
PE

IN
FOR
AM ER I CA

ST I
GASOLINE

TUTE
or ENGINES
C
ER D
T I F IE
RM-00076 RM-00002
For API standard, oil with SM “Energy Those with the ILSAC standard GF-4
Conserving” or SN “Resource Con- or GF-5 “starburst mark” displayed on
serving” logo. top of the container.

NOTE:
The proper viscosity oil helps the engine maintain its ideal temperature, and cranking speed increased by re-
ducing viscosity friction in hot condition.

LU(H4SO)-3
11LE_US.book 4 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Description
LUBRICATION

• Turbo model
Lubrication method Forced lubrication
Pump type Trochoid type
Inner rotor 9
Number of teeth
Outer rotor 10
Outer rotor diameter × thickness mm (in) 78 × 11 (3.07 × 0.43)
Tip clearance between inner and
mm (in) Standard 0.04 — 0.14 (0.0016 — 0.0055)
outer rotors
Case clearance between outer
mm (in) Standard 0.10 — 0.175 (0.0039 — 0.0069)
rotor and pump case
Side clearance between inner
mm (in) Standard 0.02 — 0.07 (0.0008 — 0.0028)
rotor and pump case
Oil pump
Free length mm (in) 73.7 (2.902)
Relief valve spring Installed length mm (in) 54.7 (2.154)
Load when installed N (kgf, lbf) 93.1 (9.49, 20.93)
Discharge
kPa (kg/cm2, psi) 98 (1.0, 14)
600 rpm pressure
Performance Discharge rate 2 (US qt, Imp qt)/min. 6.4 (6.8, 5.6) or more
(Oil temperature
Discharge
80°C (176°F)) kPa (kg/cm2, psi) 392 (4.0, 56.8)
6,000 rpm pressure
Discharge rate 2 (US qt, Imp qt)/min. 63.0 (66.6, 55.4) or more
Relief valve working pressure kPa (kg/cm2, psi) 538 (5.5, 78)
Filter type Full-flow filter type
Outer diameter: 68 mm (2.68 in) (Black) 800 (124)
Filtration area cm2 (sq in)
Outer diameter: 67.4 mm (2.65 in) (Blue) 555 (86)
Oil filter By-pass valve opening pressure kPa (kg/cm2, psi) 160 (1.63, 23.2)
Outer diameter × Outer diameter: 68 mm (2.68 in) (Black) 68 × 65 (2.68 × 2.56)
mm (in)
width Outer diameter: 67.4 mm (2.65 in) (Blue) 67.4 × 65.3 (2.65 × 2.57)
Installation screw specifications M 20 × 1.5
Type Immersed contact point type
Oil pressure Operating voltage — power consumption 12 V — 3.4 W or less
switch Warning light operating pressure kPa (kg/cm2, psi) 14.7 (0.15, 2.1)
Proof pressure kPa (kg/cm2, psi) 981 (10, 142) or more
Total capacity (at overhaul) 2 (US qt, Imp qt) 5.2 (5.5, 4.6)
Engine oil When replacing engine oil and oil filter 2 (US qt, Imp qt) 4.3 (4.5, 3.8)
When replacing engine oil only 2 (US qt, Imp qt) 4.0 (4.2, 3.5)

LU(H4SO)-4
11LE_US.book 5 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Description
LUBRICATION

Required oil:
CAUTION:
• Use 5W-30 (synthetic oil).
• It is acceptable to fill an engine with oil of another brand when replacing the oil, but make sure
to use following oil specified by Subaru.
Engine oil standard SAE viscosity No.
5W-30 (synthetic oil)

TR OLEUM
PE

IN
FOR
AM ER I CA

ST I
GASOLINE

TUTE
or ENGINES
C
ER D
T I F IE
RM-00076 RM-00002
For API standard, oil with SM “Energy Those with the ILSAC standard GF-4
Conserving” or SN “Resource Con- or GF-5 “starburst mark” displayed on
serving” logo. top of the container.

NOTE:
The proper viscosity oil helps the engine maintain its ideal temperature, and cranking speed increased by re-
ducing viscosity friction in hot condition.

LU(H4SO)-5
11LE_US.book 6 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Description
LUBRICATION

B: COMPONENT
• Non-turbo model
T6 (13)

(16)

(15)
(14)

T3

(17)
(12)

(29)

(11) (28)

T3 (18)

(32)

T3 T10

T3
T4
T3
(9)
T2
(20)
(8) T9 (31) (19) T3

(7) (33)
(6)
(36)
(24)
(27)
(35) (30)
T3
(5) (10)

(4) (2)
T5
(34) T3
(21)

(3) T8
(1) (23) (22)

T1
(26)
T7 (25) LU-02686

LU(H4SO)-6
11LE_US.book 7 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Description
LUBRICATION

(1) Plug (17) O-ring (33) O-ring

(2) Gasket (18) Baffle plate (34) Oil drain pipe
(3) Relief valve spring (19) O-ring (35) O-ring
(4) Relief valve (20) Oil strainer (36) Oil level switch
(5) Front oil seal (21) Oil level gauge guide
(6) Oil pump case (22) O-ring Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(7) Inner rotor (23) Oil pan T1: 5 (0.5, 3.7)
(8) Outer rotor (24) Oil level gauge T2: 5.4 (0.6, 4.0)
(9) Oil pump cover (25) Drain plug T3: 6.4 (0.7, 4.7)
(10) Oil filter (26) Drain plug gasket T4: 10 (1.0, 7.4)
(11) O-ring (27) Cylinder block lower T5: 16 (1.6, 11.8)
(12) Oil pump ASSY (28) Seal T6: 25 (2.5, 18.4)
(13) Oil pressure switch (29) Rocker cover T7: 41.7 (4.3, 30.8)
(14) Oil filler duct (30) O-ring T8: 44 (4.5, 32.5)
(15) Gasket (31) Oil filter connector T9: 45 (4.6, 33.2)
(16) Oil filler cap (32) Plug T10: 70 (7.1, 51.6)

LU(H4SO)-7
11LE_US.book 8 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Description
LUBRICATION

• Turbo model

(16) (30)
T6
(33)
T3
(17)

(18)
(44)

T3 (19)
(31)
(15) (20)

T10
(14)
(35)
(37)
(29)
T3 (36) T4
T3
(13)
(37)
(37)
T3 (9) T2
(22)
(36) (21) T3
(8) (37)

T3 (42)
(7) (11) (23)
(6) (41)
(38) (34)
T9
(12) T3 (40) (26)
T3

(5) (39)

(4) T3 T5 T3
(2) (43)
(24)

(25)
(3) T8 (32)
(1)
T1
(10) (27)
T7 (28)
LU-02679

LU(H4SO)-8
11LE_US.book 9 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Description
LUBRICATION

(1) Plug (21) O-ring (41) Oil level switch

(2) Gasket (22) Oil strainer (42) O-ring
(3) Relief valve spring (23) Cylinder block lower (43) Oil drain pipe
(4) Relief valve (24) Oil level gauge guide (44) Scavenge pump
(5) Front oil seal (25) Oil pan
(6) Oil pump case (26) O-ring Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(7) Inner rotor (27) Drain plug gasket T1: 5 (0.5, 3.7)
(8) Outer rotor (28) Drain plug T2: 5.4 (0.6, 4.0)
(9) Oil pump cover (29) Gasket T3: 6.4 (0.7, 4.7)
(10) Oil filter (30) Oil filler cap T4: 10 (1.0, 7.4)
(11) Oil cooler connector (31) Seal T5: 16 (1.6, 11.8)
(12) Oil cooler pipe (32) O-ring T6: 25 (2.5, 18.4)
(13) Oil cooler (33) Gasket T7: 41.7 (4.3, 30.8)
(14) O-ring (34) Oil level gauge T8: 44 (4.5, 32.5)
(15) Oil pump ASSY (35) Plug T9: 54 (5.5, 39.8)
(16) Oil pressure switch (36) Oil cooler hose T10: 69 (7.0, 50.9)
(17) Oil filler duct (37) Clip
(18) O-ring (38) Oil cooler pipe stay
(19) Rocker cover (39) O-ring
(20) Baffle plate (40) O-ring

C: CAUTION
• Wear appropriate work clothing, including a cap,
protective goggles and protective shoes when per-
forming any work.
• Remove contamination including dirt and corro-
sion before removal, installation or disassembly.
• Keep the disassembled parts in order and pro-
tect them from dust and dirt.
• Before removal, installation or disassembly, be
sure to clarify the failure. Avoid unnecessary re-
moval, installation, disassembly and replacement.
• Vehicle components are extremely hot after driv-
ing. Be wary of receiving burns from heated parts.
• Be sure to tighten fasteners including bolts and
nuts to the specified torque.
• Place shop jacks or rigid racks at the specified
points.
• Before disconnecting connectors of sensors or
units, be sure to disconnect the ground cable from
battery.
• If the engine oil is spilt over exhaust pipe or the
under cover, wipe it off with cloth to avoid emitting
smoke or causing a fire.
• Prepare a container and cloth when performing
work which oil possibly spills. If oil spills, wipe it off
immediately to prevent from penetrating into floor
or flowing out for environmental protection.
• Follow all government and local regulations con-
cerning disposal of refuse when disposing of oil.

LU(H4SO)-9
11LE_US.book 10 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Description
LUBRICATION

D: PREPARATION TOOL
1. SPECIAL TOOL
ILLUSTRATION TOOL NUMBER DESCRIPTION REMARKS
18332AA000 OIL FILTER Used for removing and installing black oil filter
WRENCH (outer diameter: 68 mm (2.68 in)).

ST18332AA000
499587100 OIL SEAL Used for installing oil pump oil seal.
INSTALLER

ST-499587100

2. GENERAL TOOL
TOOL NAME REMARKS
Oil filter wrench (65/67 mm 14 flutes) Used for removing and installing blue oil filter (outer diameter:
67.4 mm (2.65 in)).
Circuit tester Used for measuring resistance and voltage.

LU(H4SO)-10
11LE_US.book 11 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Oil Pressure System

LUBRICATION

2. Oil Pressure System

A: WIRING DIAGRAM

TO POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

FB-30
F/B FUSE NO. 5
(IG)

19
OIL PRESSURE

COMBINATION
WARNING

METER
LIGHT

i 10
8

i1
35

B 36

B 21
*

E2

E 11

: 2.5 L NON-TURBO MODEL : 31

* 2.5 L TURBO MODEL : 45

OIL
PRESSURE
SWITCH

i10 B21 (BLACK) B36

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 28 42
43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54

LU-02597

LU(H4SO)-11
 Oil Pressure System
LUBRICATION

B: INSPECTION
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK COMBINATION METER. Does the warning light illumi- Go to step 2. Repair or replace
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. (engine OFF) nate? the combination
2) Check the warning light in the combination meter. <Ref. to IDI-
meter. 10, INSPECTION,
Combination Meter
System.>
2 CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR BETWEEN Is the voltage 10 V or more? Replace the oil Go to step 3.
COMBINATION METER AND OIL PRES- pressure switch.
SURE SWITCH. <Ref. to
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. LU(H4SO)-24, Oil
2) Disconnect the connector from oil pressure Pressure Switch.>
switch.
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON.
4) Measure the voltage of harness between oil
pressure switch connector and chassis ground.
Connector & terminal
(E11) No. 1 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
3 CHECK COMBINATION METER. Is the resistance less than 10 Repair the harness Repair or replace
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. Ω? and connector. the combination
2) Remove the combination meter. NOTE: meter. <Ref. to IDI-
3) Measure the resistance of combination In this case, repair 10, INSPECTION,
meter. the following item: Combination Meter
Terminals • Open circuit of System.>
No. 8 — No. 19: harness between
combination meter
and oil pressure
switch
• Poor contact of
combination meter
connector
• Poor contact of
oil pressure switch
connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector

LU(H4SO)-12
11LE_US.book 13 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Engine Oil
LUBRICATION

3. Engine Oil B: REPLACEMENT

A: INSPECTION CAUTION:
If the engine oil is spilt over exhaust pipe or the
CAUTION: under cover, wipe it off with cloth to avoid emit-
If the engine oil is spilt over exhaust pipe or the ting smoke or causing a fire.
under cover, wipe it off with cloth to avoid emit- 1) Open the oil filler cap for quick draining of engine
ting smoke or causing a fire. oil.
1) Park the vehicle on a level surface. 2) Lift up the vehicle.
2) Remove the oil level gauge and wipe away the 3) Remove the service hole cover of under cover.
oil. (Large under cover model)
3) Reinsert the oil level gauge all the way. Be sure
that the oil level gauge is correctly inserted and
properly orientated.
4) Pull out the oil level gauge again, and check the
oil level. If the engine oil level is below “L” line,
check for oil leakage from engine and add oil to
bring the level up to “F” line.
5) Start the engine to circulate the oil in engine
room.
6) After turning off the engine, wait a few minutes
for the oil to return to the oil pan before checking LU-02570
the level. 4) Drain engine oil by loosening the drain plug.
NOTE: NOTE:
• Just after driving or while the engine is warm, en- Prepare the container for draining of engine oil.
gine oil level shows in the range between the “F” • Models with small and medium under cover
line and the notch mark. This is caused by thermal
expansion of engine oil.
• To prevent overfilling of engine oil, do not add oil
above “F” line when the engine is cold.
• As the oil level gauge is used for daily inspection,
“F” line and “L” line are set assuming that the en-
gine is cold.

(A) (B) (F)

LU-02571
(C)
• Models with large under cover
(E)

(D)

LU-02569

(A) Oil level gauge

(B) Oil filler cap
(C) “F” line
(D) “L” line LU-02572
(E) Approx. 1.0 2 (1.1 US qt, 0.9 Imp qt)
(F) Notch mark

LU(H4SO)-13
 Engine Oil
LUBRICATION

5) Tighten the drain plug after draining engine oil. 9) Close the oil filler cap.
NOTE: 10) Start the engine to circulate the oil in engine
Use a new drain plug gasket. room.
11) After stopping the engine, recheck the oil level.
Tightening torque: If necessary, add engine oil up to the “F” line on oil
41.7 N·m (4.3 kgf-m, 30.8 ft-lb) level gauge.
• Models with small and medium under cover
(A) (B) (F)

(C)

(E)

(D)

LU-02569
LU-02571
(A) Oil level gauge
• Models with large under cover
(B) Oil filler cap
(C) “F” line
(D) “L” line
(E) Approx. 1.0 2 (1.1 US qt, 0.9 Imp qt)
(F) Notch mark

LU-02572

6) Install the service hole cover of under cover.

(Large under cover model)

LU-02570

7) Lower the vehicle.

8) Using engine oil of proper quality and viscosity,
fill engine oil through the oil filler duct to the “F” line
on oil level gauge. Make sure that the vehicle is
parked on a level surface when checking oil level.
Recommended oil:
Refer to “SPECIFICATION” for recommended
oil. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-2, SPECIFICATION,
General Description.>
Engine oil capacity:
Refer to “SPECIFICATION” for engine oil ca-
pacity. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-2, SPECIFICA-
TION, General Description.>

LU(H4SO)-14
 Oil Pump
LUBRICATION

4. Oil Pump 8) Remove the oil pump by using flat tip screwdriv-
er.
A: REMOVAL CAUTION:
1) Remove the collector cover. (turbo model) Be careful not to damage the mating surface of
2) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. the cylinder block and oil pump.

IG-02107 LU-00016

3) Remove the radiator. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-19, 9) Remove the front oil seal from the oil pump.
REMOVAL, Radiator.> <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-21,
REMOVAL, Radiator.> B: INSTALLATION
4) Remove the crankshaft position sensor. <Ref. to 1) Using the ST, install the front oil seal.
FU(H4SO)-24, REMOVAL, Crankshaft Position ST 499587100 OIL SEAL INSTALLER
Sensor.> <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-34, REMOVAL, NOTE:
Crankshaft Position Sensor.>
Use a new front oil seal.
5) Remove the water pump. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-
15, REMOVAL, Water Pump.> <Ref. to
CO(H4DOTC)-16, REMOVAL, Water Pump.>
6) Remove the crank sprocket. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-
53, REMOVAL, Crank Sprocket.> <Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-60, REMOVAL, Crank Sprocket.>
ST

LU-00021

2) Apply liquid gasket to the mating surfaces of oil

pump.
NOTE:
Install within 5 min. after applying liquid gasket.
LU-02111
Liquid gasket:
7) Remove the bolts which install oil pump onto cyl- THREE BOND 1217G (Part No. K0877Y0100)
inder block. or equivalent
NOTE:
When disassembling and checking the oil pump, loos-
en the relief valve plug before removing the oil pump.

(A)

ME-00165

(A) O-ring
LU-00015

LU(H4SO)-15
 Oil Pump
LUBRICATION

3) Apply a coat of engine oil to the inside of front oil 10) Connect the battery ground terminal.
seal.

IG-02107
ME-00312
C: DISASSEMBLY
4) Install the oil pump to cylinder block.
Remove the screw which secures oil pump cover
CAUTION: and then disassemble oil pump. Inscribe alignment
• Be careful not to damage the front oil seal marks on the inner and outer rotors so that they can
during installation. be replaced in their original positions during reas-
• Make sure the front oil seal lip is not folded. sembly.
NOTE: NOTE:
• Align the flat surface of oil pump’s inner rotor with Before disassembling the oil pump, remove the re-
that of crankshaft before installation. lief valve.
• Use new O-rings.
• Do not forget to assemble O-rings.
5) Apply liquid gasket to the three bolts thread (E)
shown in figure. (when reusing bolts)
(D)
Liquid gasket:
THREE BOND 1324 (Part No. 004403042) or
(C)
equivalent (B)

Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
(A)

(F) (I)

(G)
(H)

ME-04946

6) Install the crank sprocket. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)- LU-00020

53, INSTALLATION, Crank Sprocket.> <Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-60, INSTALLATION, Crank Sprock- (A) Front oil seal
et.> (B) Oil pump case
7) Install the water pump. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-15, (C) Inner rotor
INSTALLATION, Water Pump.> <Ref. to (D) Outer rotor
CO(H4DOTC)-17, INSTALLATION, Water Pump.> (E) Oil pump cover
8) Install the crankshaft position sensor. <Ref. to (F) Relief valve
FU(H4SO)-24, INSTALLATION, Crankshaft Posi-
(G) Relief valve spring
tion Sensor.> <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-34, INSTAL-
LATION, Crankshaft Position Sensor.> (H) Plug
9) Install the radiator. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-20, IN- (I) Gasket
STALLATION, Radiator.> <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-
22, INSTALLATION, Radiator.>

LU(H4SO)-16
11LE_US.book 17 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Oil Pump
LUBRICATION

D: ASSEMBLY
1) Using the ST, install the front oil seal. T1
ST 499587100 OIL SEAL INSTALLER
(E)
NOTE:
Use a new front oil seal. (D)

(C)
(B)

(A)
ST
(F) (G) (I)
(H)

LU-00021

2) Apply a coat of engine oil to inner and outer ro-

tors. T2
3) Install the inner and outer rotors.
4) Install the oil relief valve and relief valve spring
and plug. LU-02134

NOTE: (A) Front oil seal

Use a new gasket.
(B) Oil pump case
5) Install the oil pump cover.
(C) Inner rotor
Tightening torque: (D) Outer rotor
T1: 5.4 N·m (0.6 kgf-m, 4.0 ft-lb) (E) Oil pump cover
T2: 44 N·m (4.5 kgf-m, 32.5 ft-lb) (F) Relief valve
(G) Relief valve spring
(H) PLUG
(I) Gasket

E: INSPECTION
1. TIP CLEARANCE
Measure the tip clearance of rotors. If the clearance
is out of standard, replace the rotors as a set.
Tip clearance between inner and outer rotors:
Standard
0.04 — 0.14 mm (0.0016 — 0.0055 in)

LU-00023

LU(H4SO)-17
11LE_US.book 18 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Oil Pump
LUBRICATION

2. CASE CLEARANCE 5. OIL PUMP CASE

Measure the clearance between outer rotor and oil Check for worn shaft hole, clogged oil passage,
pump case. If clearance is out of standard, replace worn rotor chamber, cracks and other faults.
the oil pump case.
6. FRONT OIL SEAL
Case clearance between outer rotor and pump Check the front oil seal lips for deformation and
case: hardening, wear.
Standard
0.10 — 0.175 mm (0.0039 — 0.0069 in)

LU-00024

3. SIDE CLEARANCE
Measure the gap between the inner rotor and the
oil pump case to measure the clearance between
the inner rotor and the oil pump cover as shown in
the figure. If clearance is out of standard, replace
the rotor or the oil pump case.
Side clearance between inner rotor and pump
case:
Standard
0.02 — 0.07 mm (0.0008 — 0.0028 in)

LU-00025

4. OIL RELIEF VALVE

Check the valve for assembly condition and dam-
age, and the relief valve spring for damage and de-
terioration. Replace the parts if defective.
Relief valve spring:
Free length
73.7 mm (2.902 in)
Installed length
54.7 mm (2.154 in)
Load when installed
93.1 N (9.49 kgf, 20.93 lbf)

LU(H4SO)-18
 Oil Pan and Strainer
LUBRICATION

5. Oil Pan and Strainer 2) Disconnect the ground cable from battery.

A: REMOVAL
1. OIL PAN
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery.

IG-02107

3) Remove the air intake boot assembly. (non-tur-

bo model) <Ref. to IN(H4SO)-8, REMOVAL, Air In-
take Boot.>
4) Remove the intercooler. (turbo model) <Ref. to
IG-02107
IN(H4DOTC)-17, REMOVAL, Intercooler.>
2) Lift up the vehicle. 5) Support the engine with a lifting device and wire
3) Remove the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35, RE- ropes.
MOVAL, Front Under Cover.>
4) Drain the engine oil. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-13, RE-
PLACEMENT, Engine Oil.>
5) Remove the front exhaust pipe. <Ref. to
EX(H4SO)-4, REMOVAL, Front Exhaust Pipe.>
<Ref. to EX(H4DOTC)-5, REMOVAL, Front Ex-
haust Pipe.>
6) Remove the bolts which secure the oil pan to the
cylinder block lower.
LU-00222

6) Lift up the vehicle.

CAUTION:
When lifting up the vehicle, raise up wire ropes
at the same time.
7) Remove the oil pan. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-19, OIL
PAN, REMOVAL, Oil Pan and Strainer.>
8) Remove the engine mounting. <Ref. to
LU-02583 ME(H4SO)-38, REMOVAL, Engine Mounting.>
<Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-37, REMOVAL, Engine
7) Insert an oil pan cutter blade into the gap be-
Mounting.>
tween cylinder block lower and oil pan, and remove
9) Remove the bolt which secures the cylinder
the oil pan.
block lower to the cylinder block.
CAUTION:
Do not use a screwdriver or similar tool in place
of oil pan cutter.
2. CYLINDER BLOCK LOWER
1) Remove the collector cover. (turbo model)

LU-02635

10) Use a flat tip screwdriver through the gap be-

tween the cylinder block and cylinder block lower to
remove the cylinder block lower.

LU(H4SO)-19
 Oil Pan and Strainer
LUBRICATION

CAUTION: B: INSTALLATION
Insert the flat tip screwdriver to the position
shown in the figure, and be careful not to dam- 1. OIL PAN
age the mating surface of the cylinder block NOTE:
and cylinder block lower. Before installing the oil pan, clean the mating sur-
face of oil pan and cylinder block.
1) Apply liquid gasket to the mating surfaces of oil
pan, and install the oil pan.
NOTE:
Install within 5 min. after applying liquid gasket.
Liquid gasket:
THREE BOND 1217G (Part No. K0877Y0100)
or equivalent
ME-04426

11) Remove the oil strainer from the cylinder block

lower.
12) Remove the oil level switch from the cylinder
block lower. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-35, REMOVAL, Oil
Level Switch.>
13) Remove the baffle plate.

(G)
LU-02580

2) Tighten the bolts to install the oil pan to the cyl-

inder block lower.
Tightening torque:
(I) 5 N·m (0.5 kgf-m, 3.7 ft-lb)

(F)

(E)
(H)
(D)
(K)
(C) (J)

LU-02583
(B)
(A) 3) Install the front exhaust pipe. <Ref. to
EX(H4SO)-5, INSTALLATION, Front Exhaust
LU-02598
Pipe.> <Ref. to EX(H4DOTC)-7, INSTALLATION,
Front Exhaust Pipe.>
(A) Oil pan 4) Install the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35, INSTAL-
(B) Oil drain pipe LATION, Front Under Cover.>
(C) Cylinder block lower 5) Lower the vehicle.
(D) O-ring
(E) Oil strainer
(F) Baffle plate
(G) Cylinder block
(H) O-ring
(I) Seal
(J) O-ring
(K) Oil level switch

LU(H4SO)-20
 Oil Pan and Strainer
LUBRICATION

6) Connect the battery ground terminal. (2) Insert the oil drain pipe up to the reference
line (A) using a plastic hammer.
NOTE:
Be careful not to deform the oil drain pipe.

(A)

IG-02107

7) Refill the engine oil. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-13, RE-

PLACEMENT, Engine Oil.>
LU-02601
2. CYLINDER BLOCK LOWER
(3) Measure the oil drain pipe protrusion “L” and
NOTE: check that the value is within the specified
Before installing the cylinder block lower, clean the range.
mating surface of cylinder block lower and cylinder
block. Oil drain pipe protrusion L:
1) Make sure that the seals (A) are installed se- Standard
curely on the baffle plate in a direction as shown in 89.0 — 91.0 mm (3.50 — 3.58 in)
the figure below.
NOTE:
Use a new seal.
L

(A)

LU-02600

4) Install the oil level switch to the cylinder block

lower. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-36, INSTALLATION, Oil
LU-00052 Level Switch.>
5) Install the oil strainer to the cylinder block lower.
2) Install the baffle plate.
NOTE:
Tightening torque:
Use new O-rings.
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
3) Install the oil drain pipe to the cylinder block lower. Tightening torque:
(1) Draw a reference line (A) on the oil drain 10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.4 ft-lb)
pipe using a marker as shown in the figure. 6) Install the O-ring to the cylinder block lower.
Oil drain pipe protrusion L: NOTE:
90.0 mm (3.54 in) • Use new O-rings.
• Install the O-ring with the metal side facing up-
ward.
7) Apply liquid gasket to the mating surfaces of the
oil pan, and install the cylinder block lower.
L CAUTION:
Be careful not to apply any liquid gasket to the
(A)
O-ring (A).
NOTE:
Install within 5 min. after applying liquid gasket.
LU-02608

LU(H4SO)-21
 Oil Pan and Strainer
LUBRICATION

Liquid gasket:
THREE BOND 1217G (Part No. K0877Y0100) (G)
or equivalent

(A)

(I)

(F)

T2 T3
(E)
T2
LU-02581 (H)
(D)
(A) O-ring (K)
(C)
(J)
8) Tighten the bolts to install the cylinder block low-
er to the cylinder block. T4
T2
(B)
Tightening torque: (A)
T1: 5 N·m (0.5 kgf-m, 3.7 ft-lb)
T1
T2: 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb) LU-02599
T3: 10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.4 ft-lb)
T4:16 N·m (1.6 kgf-m, 11.8 ft-lb) (A) Oil pan
(B) Oil drain pipe
(C) Cylinder block lower
(D) O-ring
(E) Oil strainer
(F) Baffle plate
(G) Cylinder block
(H) O-ring
(I) Seal
(J) O-ring
(K) Oil level switch

9) Install the engine mount. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-

39, INSTALLATION, Engine Mounting.> <Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-38, INSTALLATION, Engine Mount-
ing.>
10) Install the oil pan. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-20, OIL
PAN, INSTALLATION, Oil Pan and Strainer.>
11) Lower the vehicle.
CAUTION:
When lowering the vehicle, lower the lift up de-
vice and wire ropes at the same time.

LU(H4SO)-22
 Oil Pan and Strainer
LUBRICATION

12) Remove the lifting device and wire ropes.

LU-00222

13) Install the intercooler. (turbo model) <Ref. to

IN(H4DOTC)-18, INSTALLATION, Intercooler.>
14) Install the air intake boot assembly. (non-turbo
model) <Ref. to IN(H4SO)-8, INSTALLATION, Air
Intake Boot.>
15) Connect the battery ground terminal.

IG-02107

16) Install the collector cover. (turbo model)

17) Refill the engine oil. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-13,
REPLACEMENT, Engine Oil.>
C: INSPECTION
Check that the oil pan, oil strainer and baffle plate
do not have deformation, cracks or damage.

LU(H4SO)-23
 Oil Pressure Switch
LUBRICATION

6. Oil Pressure Switch

A: REMOVAL
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery.

LU-00129

2) Install the oil pressure switch to cylinder block.

Tightening torque:
25 N·m (2.5 kgf-m, 18.4 ft-lb)
IG-02107

2) Remove the generator. <Ref. to SC(H4SO)-16,

REMOVAL, Generator.>
3) Disconnect the terminal from oil pressure switch.

LU-02616

3) Connect the terminal to the oil pressure switch.

LU-02615

4) Remove the oil pressure switch.

LU-02615

4) Install the generator. <Ref. to SC(H4SO)-16, IN-

STALLATION, Generator.>
5) Connect the ground cable to battery.
LU-02616

B: INSTALLATION
1) Apply liquid gasket to the oil pressure switch
threads.
Liquid gasket:
THREE BOND 1324 (Part No. 004403042) or
equivalent

IG-02107

C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the oil pressure switch does not have
deformation, cracks or damage.
2) Check the oil pressure switch installation portion
for oil leakage and oil seepage.

LU(H4SO)-24
 Engine Oil Cooler
LUBRICATION

7. Engine Oil Cooler 8) Remove the oil cooler connector (D) and oil cool-
er (E).
A: REMOVAL
CAUTION:
If engine oil is spilt onto the exhaust pipe, wipe
it off with cloth to avoid emission of smoke or
causing a fire.
NOTE:
Turbo model is equipped with engine oil cooler.
1) Lift up the vehicle.
2) Remove the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35, RE- (G)
MOVAL, Front Under Cover.> (F)
3) Drain engine coolant. <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)- (C)
14, DRAINING OF ENGINE COOLANT, RE- (E)
PLACEMENT, Engine Coolant.> (G)
4) Remove the front exhaust pipe. <Ref. to
EX(H4DOTC)-5, REMOVAL, Front Exhaust Pipe.>
(C) (G)
5) Remove the engine oil filter. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)- (B)
(G) (H)
34, REMOVAL, Engine Oil Filter.>
6) Remove the bolt (B) holding the oil cooler pipe (B)
(A) to the oil pump. (D) (A)

7) Remove the oil cooler pipe (A) and oil cooler (B) (I)
hose (C). LU-02573

(A) Oil cooler pipe

(B) Bolt
(C) Oil cooler hose
(D) Oil cooler connector
(E) Oil cooler
(F) Gasket
(G) Clip
(H) Oil cooler pipe stay
(I) O-ring

B: INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
• Use new gaskets and O-rings.
• Use a new oil cooler hose.
• After installing, check the engine oil level and re-
plenish it if necessary. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-13, IN-
SPECTION, Engine Oil.>
• After temporarily installing the oil cooler pipe,
tighten the bolts in alphabetical order as shown be-
low.

LU(H4SO)-25
11LE_US.book 26 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Engine Oil Cooler

LUBRICATION

C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the engine oil cooler, oil cooler pipe
and oil cooler connector do not have deformation,
(B)
cracks or damage.
2) Make sure the oil cooler hoses are not cracked,
damaged or loose.
(C)
3) Check the coolant paths for clogs while spraying
(A) compressed air.
4) Make sure the mating surfaces of the cylinder
LU-02613 block do not have damage.
Tightening torque:
T1: 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
T2: 54 N·m (5.5 kgf-m, 39.8 ft-lb)

(G)
(F)
(C)
(E)
(G)

(C) (G)
(G) (B)
(H)
T1
(A) (B)
(D) T2
(B) T1
T1 (I)
LU-02574

(A) Oil cooler pipe

(B) Bolt
(C) Oil cooler hose
(D) Oil cooler connector
(E) Oil cooler
(F) Gasket
(G) Clip
(H) Oil cooler pipe stay
(I) O-ring

LU(H4SO)-26
 Oil Catch Tank
LUBRICATION

8. Oil Catch Tank

A: REMOVAL
For the removal procedures, refer to IN (H4DOTC)
section. <Ref. to IN(H4DOTC)-23, REMOVAL, Oil
Catch Tank.>
B: INSTALLATION
For the installation procedures, refer to IN
(H4DOTC) section. <Ref. to IN(H4DOTC)-23, IN-
STALLATION, Oil Catch Tank.>
C: INSPECTION
For the inspection procedures, refer to IN
(H4DOTC) section. <Ref. to IN(H4DOTC)-24, IN-
SPECTION, Oil Catch Tank.>

LU(H4SO)-27
 Scavenge Pump
LUBRICATION

9. Scavenge Pump B: INSTALLATION

Install in the reverse order of removal.
A: REMOVAL
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Do not start applying liquid gasket from (A) as
If engine oil is spilt onto the exhaust pipe, wipe shown in the following figure.
it off with cloth to avoid emission of smoke or
causing a fire. NOTE:
• Use a new gasket.
NOTE:
• Install within 5 min. after applying liquid gasket.
Turbo model is equipped with scavenge pump.
1) Lift up the vehicle. Liquid gasket:
2) Remove the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35, RE- THREE BOND 1217G (Part No. K0877Y0100)
MOVAL, Front Under Cover.> or equivalent
3) Remove the union bolt (A) that holds the oil pipe
(C) to the scavenge pump (E). (A)
4) Remove the bolt (D) that holds the scavenge
pump (E) to the cylinder head, and remove the
scavenge pump using a flat tip screwdriver.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the mating surface of
the cylinder head and scavenge pump.

LU-02602

Tightening torque:
(A)
T1: 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
(B)
(C) T2: 29 N·m (3.0 kgf-m, 21.4 ft-lb)

T2
(E)
(A)
(D) LU-02577
(B)
(C)
(A) Union bolt
(B) Gasket T1

(C) Oil pipe

(E)
(D) BOLT (D) LU-02578
(E) Scavenge pump
(A) Union bolt
(B) Gasket
(C) Oil pipe
(D) BOLT
(E) Scavenge pump

C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the scavenge pump and oil pipe have
no deformation, cracks and other damages.
2) Check that the scavenge pump has no cracks,
damage or loose part.

LU(H4SO)-28
 Oil Pipe
LUBRICATION

10.Oil Pipe
A: REMOVAL
NOTE:
Turbo model is equipped with oil pipe.
1) Remove the collector cover.
2) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. (a)

EX-02549

(C)

IG-02107
(B) (A)
3) Remove the intercooler. <Ref. to IN(H4DOTC)-
17, REMOVAL, Intercooler.>
4) Lift up the vehicle. EX-02550
5) Remove the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35, RE- 9) Lower the vehicle.
MOVAL, Front Under Cover.> 10) Remove the union bolt (B) securing the oil out-
6) Remove the ground cable from the oil outlet let pipe (A) from the scavenge pump.
pipe. 11) Remove the bolts (C) and (D) securing the oil
7) Disconnect the oil outlet hose from the oil outlet outlet pipe (A) to the cylinder head, and remove the
pipe. oil outlet pipe (A).
(B)

(D)

(A)

EX-02548
A
8) Remove oil inlet pipe B (B) from oil inlet pipe A
(A), and remove the bolt which holds oil outlet pipe
C (C) and oil inlet pipe A (A).
CAUTION:
In order to prevent damaging the oil inlet pipe,
fix the section (a) shown in the figure when A
loosing the oil inlet pipe flare nut, and avoid the
part from rotating together while loosening the
(C)
nut.

LU-02585

LU(H4SO)-29
 Oil Pipe
LUBRICATION

12) Remove the oil inlet pipe B (A) from the oil inlet 17) Remove the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-
pipe C (C). 41, REMOVAL, V-belt.>
CAUTION: 18) Remove the crank pulley. <Ref. to
In order to avoid damaging the oil inlet pipe C ME(H4DOTC)-43, REMOVAL, Crank Pulley.>
(C), fix the section (a) shown in the figure so 19) Remove the timing belt cover. <Ref. to
that it will not rotate together when loosening ME(H4DOTC)-45, REMOVAL, Timing Belt Cover.>
the flare nut of the oil inlet pipe B (A). 20) Remove the timing belt. <Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-50, REMOVAL, Timing Belt.>
21) Remove the cam sprocket LH. <Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-59, REMOVAL, Cam Sprocket.>
22) Remove the belt cover No. 2 LH.

(a)

LU-02586

13) Remove the bolt (B) securing the oil inlet pipe B
(A) to the cylinder head and stay, and remove the
oil inlet pipe B (A). ME-04191
14) Remove the union bolt (D) securing the oil inlet
pipe C (C) to the cylinder head, and remove the oil 23) Remove the oil pipe.
inlet pipe C (C). (B) (A)

(B)
(D)
(C) (D)
(D)

(A) (C)
(D)

(B)

(B)

(D)
(C)

(A)

(D)
ME-04320

LU-02587
(A) Union bolt with filter (with protrusion)
15) Remove the intake manifold. <Ref. to (B) Union bolt without filter (without protrusion)
FU(H4DOTC)-17, REMOVAL, Intake Manifold.> (C) Oil pipe
16) Remove the radiator main fan and radiator sub (D) Gasket
fan. <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-25, REMOVAL, Radia-
tor Main Fan and Fan Motor.> <Ref. to
CO(H4DOTC)-27, REMOVAL, Radiator Sub Fan
and Fan Motor.>

LU(H4SO)-30
 Oil Pipe
LUBRICATION

B: INSTALLATION 4) Install the cam sprocket LH. <Ref. to

ME(H4DOTC)-59, INSTALLATION, Cam Sprock-
1) Inspect the union bolt with filter. <Ref. to
et.>
LU(H4SO)-33, INSPECTING UNION BOLT WITH
5) Install the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-53,
FILTER, INSPECTION, Oil Pipe.>
TIMING BELT, INSTALLATION, Timing Belt.>
2) Install the oil pipe.
6) Install the timing belt cover. <Ref. to
NOTE: ME(H4DOTC)-48, INSTALLATION, Timing Belt
• Be careful of the install location of the union bolt; Cover.>
the location will differ depending on the presence of 7) Install the crank pulley. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-
filter. 43, INSTALLATION, Crank Pulley.>
• Use a new gasket. 8) Install the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-41,
Tightening torque: INSTALLATION, V-belt.>
T1: 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb) 9) Install the radiator main fan and the radiator sub
T2: 29 N·m (3.0 kgf-m, 21.4 ft-lb) fan. <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-25, INSTALLATION,
Radiator Main Fan and Fan Motor.> <Ref. to
(B) (A) CO(H4DOTC)-27, INSTALLATION, Radiator Sub
T2
T2 T1
Fan and Fan Motor.>
(D) 10) Install the intake manifold. <Ref. to
(C) (D)
(D) FU(H4DOTC)-21, INSTALLATION, Intake Mani-
fold.>
11) Install the oil inlet pipe C (C) to the cylinder
head with the union bolt (D).
NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
Tightening torque:
29 N·m (3.0 kgf-m, 21.4 ft-lb)
(B) 12) Temporarily install the oil inlet pipe B (A) to the
T2
oil inlet pipe C (C).
(D) 13) Install the oil inlet pipe B (A) to the cylinder
(C)
head with the bolt (B).
Tightening torque:
(A) 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
14) Tighten the flare nut of the oil inlet pipe B (A).
(D)
T2 CAUTION:
ME-03922
In order to avoid damaging the oil inlet pipe C
(A) Union bolt with filter (with protrusion) (C), fix the section (a) shown in the figure so
(B) Union bolt without filter (without protrusion) that it will not rotate together when tightening
the flare nut of the oil inlet pipe B (A).
(C) Oil pipe
(D) Gasket

3) Install the belt cover No. 2 LH.

Tightening torque:
5 N·m (0.5 kgf-m, 3.7 ft-lb) (a)

LU-02586

ME-04191

LU(H4SO)-31
11LE_US.book 32 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Oil Pipe
LUBRICATION

Tightening torque: 17) Tighten the union bolt (B) of the oil outlet pipe
20 N·m (2.0 kgf-m, 14.8 ft-lb) (A).
(B) Tightening torque:
29 N·m (3.0 kgf-m, 21.4 ft-lb)
(B)

(A) (C)
(D)
(D)

(A)
(B)

LU-02587 (C)
15) Temporarily install the oil outlet pipe (A) to the
scavenge pump using the union bolt (B). LU-02585
16) Secure the oil outlet pipe (A) to the cylinder
18) Lift up the vehicle.
head and stay with bolts (C) and (D).
19) Install the bolt which holds oil outlet pipe (C)
Tightening torque: and oil inlet pipe A (A), and install oil inlet pipe B (B)
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb) to oil inlet pipe A (A).
CAUTION:
In order to prevent damaging the oil inlet pipe,
fix the section (a) shown in the figure when
tightening the oil inlet pipe flare nut, and avoid
the part from rotating together while tightening
the nut.

(a)

EX-02549

LU(H4SO)-32
 Oil Pipe
LUBRICATION

Tightening torque: C: INSPECTION

T1: 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
T2: 20 N·m (2.0 kgf-m, 14.8 ft-lb) 1. INSPECTING UNION BOLT WITH FILTER
Check the filter part of union bolt for clogging or
damage, and if defective, replace the union bolt
T1 with filter with the new part.
(C)
(B) (A)

(D)
(C) (D)
(D)
(B) T2 (A)

EX-02555

20) Attach the ground cable to the oil outlet pipe.

Tightening torque:
7 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 5.2 ft-lb)
21) Connect the oil outlet hose to the oil outlet pipe.
(B)

(D)
(C)

(A)

(D)
ME-04320
EX-02548
(A) Union bolt with filter (with protrusion)
22) Install the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35, INSTAL-
(B) Union bolt without filter (without protrusion)
LATION, Front Under Cover.>
(C) Oil pipe
23) Lower the vehicle.
24) Install the intercooler. <Ref. to IN(H4DOTC)- (D) Gasket
18, INSTALLATION, Intercooler.>
25) Connect the battery ground terminal. 2. OTHER INSPECTIONS
1) Check that the oil pipe and union bolt have no
deformation, cracks and other damages.
2) Check that there are no oil leaks or oil oozing
from the oil pipe attachment section.

IG-02107

26) Install the collector cover.

LU(H4SO)-33
 Engine Oil Filter
LUBRICATION

11.Engine Oil Filter B: INSTALLATION

A: REMOVAL CAUTION:
Do not tighten excessively, or oil may leak.
CAUTION: 1) Clean the oil filter installation surface on the cyl-
If the engine oil is spilt over exhaust pipe or the inder block or engine oil cooler.
under cover, wipe it off with cloth to avoid emit- 2) Obtain a new oil filter and apply a thin coat of en-
ting smoke or causing a fire. gine oil to the seal rubber.
1) Lift up the vehicle. 3) Install the oil filter turning it by hand, being care-
2) Remove the service hole cover of under cover. ful not to damage the seal rubber of the oil filter.
• Medium under cover model • Tighten the oil filter (Black) with an outer diame-
ter of 68 mm (2.68 in) (approx. 1 rotation) after the
seal rubber of the oil filter comes in contact with cyl-
inder block. When using a torque wrench, tighten to
14 N·m (1.4 kgf-m, 10.3 ft-lb).
• Tighten the oil filter (Blue) with an outer diameter
of 67.4 mm (2.65 in) (approx. 7/8 rotation) after the
seal rubber of the oil filter comes in contact with cyl-
inder block. When using a torque wrench, tighten to
12 N·m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.9 ft-lb).
LU-02575
4) Return the service hole cover to its original posi-
tion.
• Models with large under cover 5) Lower the vehicle.
6) After installing, check the engine oil level and re-
plenish it if necessary. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-13, IN-
SPECTION, Engine Oil.>
C: INSPECTION
1) After installing the oil filter, run the engine and
make sure that no oil is leaking around seal rubber.
NOTE:
The filter element and filter case are permanently
LU-02570 jointed; therefore, interior cleaning is not neces-
3) Remove the oil filter. sary.
• Black oil filter 2) Check the engine oil level. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-
Remove it using the ST. 13, INSPECTION, Engine Oil.>
ST 18332AA000 OIL FILTER WRENCH (OUT-
ER DIAMETER: 68 MM (2.68
IN) FOR OIL FILTER)
• Blue oil filter
Remove it using the general tool (65/67 mm 14
flutes).

LU-02576

LU(H4SO)-34
 Oil Level Switch
LUBRICATION

12.Oil Level Switch 6) Remove the clip holding the oil level switch har-
ness.
A: REMOVAL • Turbo model
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery.

IG-02107

2) Lift up the vehicle.

3) Remove the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35, RE-
MOVAL, Front Under Cover.>
4) Drain the engine oil. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-13, RE-
PLACEMENT, Engine Oil.>
5) Disconnect the connector of the oil level switch
from the engine harness.

LU-02619

• Non-turbo model

LU-02617

LU-02714

LU(H4SO)-35
11LE_US.book 36 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Oil Level Switch

LUBRICATION

7) Remove the oil level switch from the cylinder 2) Hold the oil level switch harness with the clip.
block lower. • Turbo model

LU-02618

B: INSTALLATION
1) Install the oil level switch to the cylinder block
lower.
NOTE:
• Use new O-rings.
• Apply a coat of engine oil to the O-rings.
Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
LU-02619

• Non-turbo model

LU-02618

LU-02715

LU(H4SO)-36
 Oil Level Switch
LUBRICATION

3) Connect the connector of the oil level switch to

the engine harness.

LU-02617

4) Install the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35, INSTAL-

LATION, Front Under Cover.>
5) Lower the vehicle.
6) Refill the engine oil. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-13, RE-
PLACEMENT, Engine Oil.>
7) Check the engine oil level. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-
13, INSPECTION, Engine Oil.>
8) Connect the battery ground terminal.

IG-02107

LU(H4SO)-37
11LE_US.book 38 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Oil Level Switch

LUBRICATION

C: WIRING DIAGRAM

TO POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

FB-30 FB-17
F/B FUSE NO. 5 F/B FUSE NO. 7
(IG) (B) : TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT
*1 AMONG 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 AND 6
J/C : TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT
2 2
*2 AMONG 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 AND 12
* * *3 : NON-TURBO MODEL : 10
i82 TURBO MODEL : 1
19

20 COMBINATION
I/F POWER SUPPLY METER
LOW CIRCUIT
ENGINE OIL i10
WARNING LIGHT

DRIVE CIRCUIT MICRO COMPUTER

CAN TRANSCEIVER &

RECEIVER
32

33

39
*1
28
17

J/C
i 98
B 1 3 6 ECM
*1
26

B 21
OIL LEVEL SWITCH
3
*

E2

E 130

B21

i82 B136 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
i10
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
i98 1 2 3 4 5 6
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
1 2 3 4 5 6 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
7 8 9 10 11 12 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54

LU-02653

LU(H4SO)-38
 Oil Level Switch
LUBRICATION

D: INSPECTION
1. INSPECTION WHILE OIL LEVEL SWITCH WARNING LIGHT IS ON
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK ENGINE OIL LEVEL. Is engine oil level normal? Go to step 2. Replace engine oil
or refill, and check
again while the oil
level is normal con-
dition. <Ref. to
LU(H4SO)-13,
REPLACEMENT,
Engine Oil.>
To turn off the oil
level warning light,
install the spare
fuse at the delivery
(test) mode fuse in
the main fuse box.
Then turn the igni-
tion switch to ON
(engine off) again,
to confirm the
warning light turns
off. Remove the
spare fuse
installed to finish
this step.
NOTE:
The engine oil level
switch is normal, if
the low engine oil
level warning light
turns off with the
delivery (test)
mode fuse in-
stalled.
2 CHECK LAN SYSTEM. Has a DTC of the LAN system Perform the diag- Go to step 3.
been input? nosis according to
DTC.

LU(H4SO)-39
 Oil Level Switch
LUBRICATION

Step Check Yes No

3 CHECK OIL LEVEL SWITCH CIRCUIT. Is the “Oil level switch” signal To turn off the oil Go to step 4.
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON (engine OFF). displayed in Subaru Select level warning light,
2) Read the current data for engine in the Sub- Monitor HIGH? install the spare
aru Select Monitor to confirm the item for “Oil fuse at the delivery
level switch”. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-34, (test) mode fuse in
READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE (NOR- the main fuse box.
MAL MODE), OPERATION, Subaru Select Then turn the igni-
Monitor.> <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-36, tion switch to ON
READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE (NOR- (engine off) again,
MAL MODE), OPERATION, Subaru Select to confirm the
Monitor.> warning light turns
off. Remove the
spare fuse
installed to finish
this step.
NOTE:
The engine oil level
switch is normal, if
the low engine oil
level warning light
turns off with the
delivery (test)
mode fuse in-
stalled.
4 CHECK COMBINATION METER. Is combination meter OK? Go to step 5. Replace the com-
Perform the self-diagnosis of combination bination meter.
meter to check if there are any faults in the com- <Ref. to IDI-20,
bination meter. <Ref. to IDI-6, OPERATION, REMOVAL, Com-
Combination Meter System.> bination Meter.>
5 CHECK SECURE CONNECTION OF CON- Is there any insecure connec- Remedy the con- Go to step 6.
NECTOR BETWEEN ENGINE HARNESS tion? nection condition.
AND OIL LEVEL SWITCH. Then, to turn off
the oil level warn-
ing light, install the
spare fuse at the
delivery (test)
mode fuse in the
main fuse box.
Then turn the igni-
tion switch to ON
(engine off) again,
to confirm the
warning light turns
off. Remove the
spare fuse
installed to finish
this step.
NOTE:
The engine oil level
switch is normal, if
the low engine oil
level warning light
turns off with the
delivery (test)
mode fuse in-
stalled.

LU(H4SO)-40
 Oil Level Switch
LUBRICATION

Step Check Yes No

6 CHECK OIL LEVEL SWITCH. Is the “Oil level switch” signal Replace the oil Go to step 7.
1) Deliberately short circuits by connecting the displayed in Subaru Select level switch. <Ref.
engine harness connector terminal and chassis Monitor HIGH? to LU(H4SO)-35,
ground. REMOVAL, Oil
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON (engine OFF). Level Switch.>
3) Read the current data for engine in the Sub-
aru Select Monitor to confirm the item for “Oil
level switch”. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-34,
READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE (NOR-
MAL MODE), OPERATION, Subaru Select
Monitor.> <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-36,
READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE (NOR-
MAL MODE), OPERATION, Subaru Select
Monitor.>
Connector & terminal
(E130) No. 1 — Chassis ground:
7 CHECK SECURE CONNECTION OF CON- Is there any insecure connec- Remedy the con- Go to step 8.
NECTOR BETWEEN BULKHEAD HARNESS tion? nection condition.
AND ENGINE HARNESS. Then, to turn off
the oil level warn-
ing light, install the
spare fuse at the
delivery (test)
mode fuse in the
main fuse box.
Then turn the igni-
tion switch to ON
(engine off) again,
to confirm the
warning light turns
off. Remove the
spare fuse
installed to finish
this step.
NOTE:
The engine oil level
switch is normal, if
the low engine oil
level warning light
turns off with the
delivery (test)
mode fuse in-
stalled.
8 CHECK ENGINE HARNESS. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 9. Repair or replace
1) Disconnect the connector on the oil level the open circuit of
switch side for the engine harness. engine harness.
2) Disconnect the connector on the bulkhead
harness side for the engine harness.
3) Measure the resistance between connector
terminals.
Connector & terminal
•Non-turbo model
(E2) No. 10 — (E130) No. 1:
•Turbo model
(E2) No. 1 — (E130) No. 1:

LU(H4SO)-41
 Oil Level Switch
LUBRICATION

Step Check Yes No

9 CHECK SECURE CONNECTION OF CON- Is there any insecure connec- Remedy the con- Go to step 10.
NECTOR BETWEEN ENGINE CONTROL tion? nection condition.
MODULE (ECM) AND BULKHEAD HAR- Then, to turn off
NESS. the oil level warn-
Remove the glove box lid assembly. <Ref. to EI- ing light, install the
65, REMOVAL, Glove Box.> spare fuse at the
delivery (test)
mode fuse in the
main fuse box.
Then turn the igni-
tion switch to ON
(engine off) again,
to confirm the
warning light turns
off. Remove the
spare fuse
installed to finish
this step.
NOTE:
The engine oil level
switch is normal, if
the low engine oil
level warning light
turns off with the
delivery (test)
mode fuse in-
stalled.
10 CHECK BULKHEAD HARNESS. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Replace the Repair or replace
1) Remove the glove box lid assembly. <Ref. to engine control the open circuit of
EI-65, REMOVAL, Glove Box.> module (ECM). the bulkhead har-
2) Disconnect the engine control module <Ref. to ness.
(ECM) side connector for the bulkhead har- FU(H4SO)-41,
ness. REMOVAL, Engine
3) Disconnect the engine harness connectors Control Module
from the bulkhead harness. (ECM).> <Ref. to
4) Measure the resistance between connector FU(H4DOTC)-58,
terminals. REMOVAL, Engine
Connector & terminal Control Module
•Non-turbo model (ECM).>
(B136) No. 26 — (B21) No. 10:
•Turbo model
(B136) No. 26 — (B21) No. 1:

2. OTHER INSPECTIONS
1) Check that the oil level switch does not have deformation, cracks, or damage.
2) Check the oil level switch installation part for oil leakage and oil seepage.

LU(H4SO)-42
11LE_US.book 43 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Engine Lubrication System Trouble in General

LUBRICATION

13.Engine Lubrication System Trouble in General

A: INSPECTION
Before performing diagnostics, make sure that the engine oil level is correct and no oil leakage exists.
Trouble Possible cause Corrective action
a. Oil pressure switch failure
Cracked diaphragm or oil leakage within switch Replace.
Broken spring or seized contacts Replace.
b. Low oil pressure
Clogging of oil filter Replace.
Malfunction of oil by-pass valve in oil filter Replace.
Malfunction of oil relief valve in oil pump Clean or replace.
Warning light remains ON. Clogged oil passage Clean.
Excessive tip clearance and side clearance of oil pump
Replace.
rotor
Clogged oil strainer or broken pipe Clean or replace.
c. No oil pressure
Insufficient engine oil (degradation, etc.) Replace.
Broken pipe of oil strainer Replace.
Stuck oil pump rotor Replace.
a. Defective combination meter Replace.
Warning light does not illu-
b. Poor contact of switch contact points Replace.
minate.
c. Disconnection of wiring Repair.
a. Defective terminal contact Repair.
b. Defective wiring harness Repair.
c. Oil pressure switch failure
Cracked diaphragm or oil leakage within switch Replace.
Broken spring or seized contacts Replace.
d. Low oil pressure
Warning light flickers
momentarily. Clogging of oil filter Replace.
Malfunction of oil by-pass valve in oil filter Replace.
Malfunction of oil relief valve in oil pump Clean or replace.
Clogged oil passage Clean.
Excessive tip clearance and side clearance of oil pump
Replace.
rotor
Clogged oil strainer or broken pipe Clean or replace.

LU(H4SO)-43
11LE_US.book 44 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Engine Lubrication System Trouble in General

LUBRICATION

LU(H4SO)-44
SPEED CONTROL SYSTEMS

SP(H4SO)
Page
1. General Description ...................................................................................2
2. Accelerator Pedal .......................................................................................4
11LE_US.book 2 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Description
SPEED CONTROL SYSTEMS

1. General Description
A: SPECIFICATION
Accelerator pedal Stroke At pedal pad 54 — 59 mm (2.13 — 2.32 in)

B: COMPONENT

(2)
(1)

(4)

(3)

SP-02085

(1) Accelerator pedal ASSY (3) Accelerator plate Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Clip (4) Accelerator stopper T: 18 (1.8, 13.3)

C: CAUTION
• Wear appropriate work clothing, including a cap,
protective goggles and protective shoes when per-
forming any work.
• Remove contamination including dirt and corro-
sion before removal or installation.
• Keep the parts in order and protect them from
dust and dirt.
• Before removal or installation, be sure to clarify
the failure. Avoid unnecessary removal, installa-
tion, disassembly and replacement.
• Vehicle components are extremely hot after driv-
ing. Be wary of receiving burns from heated parts.
• Be sure to tighten fasteners including bolts and
nuts to the specified torque.
• Place shop jacks or rigid racks at the specified
points.
• Before disconnecting connectors of sensors or
units, be sure to disconnect the ground cable from
the battery.

SP(H4SO)-2
11LE_US.book 3 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Description
SPEED CONTROL SYSTEMS

D: PREPARATION TOOL
1. SPECIAL TOOL
ILLUSTRATION TOOL NUMBER DESCRIPTION REMARKS
1B022XU0 SUBARU SELECT Used for inspecting the accelerator pedal.
MONITOR III KIT

ST1B022XU0

2. GENERAL TOOL
TOOL NAME REMARKS
Circuit tester Used for measuring voltage.

SP(H4SO)-3
 Accelerator Pedal
SPEED CONTROL SYSTEMS

2. Accelerator Pedal D: INSPECTION

A: REMOVAL 1. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL SENSOR
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. AREA (METHOD WITH CIRCUIT TESTER)
1) Remove the glove box lid assembly, glove box
lower cover, instrument panel side cover RH and
glove box back panel. <Ref. to EI-65, REMOVAL,
Glove Box.>
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. (engine OFF)
3) Measure the voltage between ECM connector
terminals.

IG-02107

2) Disconnect the connector (A).

3) Remove the nut (B) securing accelerator pedal
assembly and remove the accelerator pedal as-
sembly.

(A)
FU-04956

Main sensor side

(A)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28

V
SP-02078

(B)
Sub sensor side

(A)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28
SP-02086

B: INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal. V
Tightening torque: SP-02079
18 N·m (1.8 kgf-m, 13.3 ft-lb)
(A) To ECM connector
C: DISASSEMBLY
NOTE:
The accelerator pedal cannot be disassembled.

SP(H4SO)-4
 Accelerator Pedal
SPEED CONTROL SYSTEMS

Accelerator Accelerator
Terminal No. Standard
pedal sensor pedal
Not depressed
1V
(Full closed)
Main 23 (+) and 29 (–)
Depressed
3.5 V
(Full opened)
Not depressed
1V
(Full closed)
Sub 31 (+) and 30 (–)
Depressed
3.5 V
(Full opened)

4) After inspection, install the related parts in the

reverse order of removal.
2. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL SEN-
SOR AREA (METHOD WITH SUBARU SE-
LECT MONITOR)
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. (engine OFF)
2) Read the accelerator pedal opening angle signal
and voltage of accelerator pedal sensor using Sub-
aru Select Monitor. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-34,
READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE (NORMAL
MODE), OPERATION, Subaru Select Monitor.>
<Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-36, READ CURRENT
DATA FOR ENGINE (NORMAL MODE), OPERA-
TION, Subaru Select Monitor.> <Ref. to
EN(H6DO)(diag)-35, READ CURRENT DATA
FOR ENGINE (NORMAL MODE), OPERATION,
Subaru Select Monitor.>
Accelerator pedal Accelerator pedal
Standard
sensor opening angle signal
0.0% 1V
Main
100.0% 3.5 V
0.0% 1V
Sub
100.0% 3.5 V

3. OTHER INSPECTIONS
1) Check that the accelerator pedal does not have
deformation, cracks or damage.
2) Check for smooth operation when the accelera-
tor pedal is depressed.
3) Check if the accelerator pedal returns to its orig-
inal position smoothly when the pedal is released.

SP(H4SO)-5
11LE_US.book 6 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Accelerator Pedal
SPEED CONTROL SYSTEMS

SP(H4SO)-6
IGNITION

IG(H4SO)
Page
1. General Description ...................................................................................2
2. Spark Plug ..................................................................................................3
3. Ignition Coil ................................................................................................5
11LE_US.book 2 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Description
IGNITION

1. General Description
A: SPECIFICATION
Item Specifications
Type FK 0376
Ignition coil Ignition system Independent ignition coil
Manufacturer Diamond Electric
Manufacturer and type NGK: SIFR6A11
Thread size (diameter, pitch, length) mm 14, 1.25, 19
Spark plug
Spark plug gap mm (in) Standard 1.0 — 1.1 (0.039 — 0.043)
Electrode Iridium

B: COMPONENT

T1

T2

(1)

(2)

T2 T1

(1)

(2)

IG-02103

(1) Spark plug (2) Ignition coil Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
T1: 9 (0.9, 6.6)
T2: 21 (2.1, 15.5)

C: CAUTION
• Wear appropriate work clothing, including a cap, protective goggles and protective shoes when performing
any work.
• Remove contamination including dirt and corrosion before removal, installation or disassembly.
• Keep the disassembled parts in order and protect them from dust and dirt.
• Before removal, installation or disassembly, be sure to clarify the failure. Avoid unnecessary removal, in-
stallation, disassembly and replacement.
• Vehicle components are extremely hot after driving. Be wary of receiving burns from heated parts.
• Be sure to tighten fasteners including bolts and nuts to the specified torque.
• Place shop jacks or rigid racks at the specified points.
• Before disconnecting connectors of sensors or units, be sure to disconnect the ground cable from the battery.

IG(H4SO)-2
 Spark Plug
IGNITION

2. Spark Plug 3) Remove the bolt (B), and remove the ignition
coil.
A: REMOVAL
Spark plug:
(B) (B)
Refer to “SPECIFICATION” for the spark
plug. <Ref. to IG(H4SO)-2, SPECIFICATION,
General Description.>
1. RH SIDE (A)
(A)
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery.

IG-02105

4) Remove the spark plug with a spark plug socket.

B: INSTALLATION
1. RH SIDE
Install in the reverse order of removal.
Tightening torque (Spark plug):
IG-02107 21 N·m (2.1 kgf-m, 15.5 ft-lb)
2) Remove the air cleaner case. <Ref. to Tightening torque (Ignition coil):
IN(H4SO)-6, REMOVAL, Air Cleaner Case.> 9 N·m (0.9 kgf-m, 6.6 ft-lb)
3) Disconnect the connector (A) from ignition coil.
4) Remove the bolt (B), and remove the ignition 2. LH SIDE
coil. Install in the reverse order of removal.
Tightening torque (Spark plug):
(B)
21 N·m (2.1 kgf-m, 15.5 ft-lb)
(B)
Tightening torque (Ignition coil):
9 N·m (0.9 kgf-m, 6.6 ft-lb)
C: INSPECTION
1) Check the spark plug for abnormalities. If defec-
(A)
(A) tive, replace the spark plug.
IG-02104 (C)
5) Remove the spark plug with a spark plug socket.
2. LH SIDE
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery.

(A)

(B) IG-02094

(A) Terminal damage

(B) Crack or damage in insulator
(C) Damaged gasket

IG-02107

2) Disconnect the connector (A) from ignition coil.

IG(H4SO)-3
11LE_US.book 4 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Spark Plug
IGNITION

2) Check the spark plug electrode and condition of (4) Overheating:

the insulator. If abnormal, check and repair the White or light gray insulator with black or brown
cause and replace the spark plug. spots and bluish burnt electrodes indicate en-
(1) Normal: gine overheating, wrong selection of fuel, or
Brown to grayish-tan deposits and slight elec- loose spark plugs.
trode wear indicate correct spark plug heat
range.

IG-00014

3) Using a nylon brush, etc., clean and remove the

IG-00011 carbon or oxide deposits from the spark plug. If de-
(2) Carbon fouled: posits are too stubborn, replace the spark plugs.
Dry fluffy carbon deposits on insulator and elec- After cleaning the spark plugs, check the spark
trode are mostly caused by slow speed driving plug gap “L” using a gap gauge. If it is not within the
in the city, weak ignition, too rich fuel mixture, standard, replace the spark plug.
etc. NOTE:
• Never use a plug cleaner.
• Do not use a metal brush as it may damage the
electrode area.
Spark plug gap L:
Standard
1.0 — 1.1 mm (0.039 — 0.043 in)

IG-00012
L
(3) Oil fouled:
Wet black deposits show oil entrance into com-
bustion chamber through worn piston rings or
increased clearance between valve guides and
valve stems.
IG-02108

IG-00013

IG(H4SO)-4
 Ignition Coil
IGNITION

3. Ignition Coil
A: REMOVAL
Direct ignition type is adopted. Refer to “Spark
Plug” for removal procedure. <Ref. to IG(H4SO)-3,
REMOVAL, Spark Plug.>
B: INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
Tightening torque:
9 N·m (0.9 kgf-m, 6.6 ft-lb)
C: INSPECTION
For inspection procedure, refer to “Diagnostics for
Engine Starting Failure”. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-
69, IGNITION CONTROL SYSTEM, Diagnostics
for Engine Starting Failure.>

IG(H4SO)-5
11LE_US.book 6 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Ignition Coil
IGNITION

IG(H4SO)-6
STARTING/CHARGING SYSTEMS

SC(H4SO)
Page
1. General Description ...................................................................................2
2. Starter ........................................................................................................9
3. Generator .................................................................................................16
4. Battery ......................................................................................................25
11LE_US.book 2 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Description
STARTING/CHARGING SYSTEMS

1. General Description
A: SPECIFICATION
1. 2.5 L MODEL
Item Specification
Vehicle model AT and CVT MT
Type Reduction type
Model 428000-4790 428000-4780
Manufacturer DENSO
Voltage and output 12 V — 1.6 kW
Direction of rotation Counterclockwise (when observed from pinion)
Number of pinion teeth 9
Voltage 11 V
Current 90 A or less
No-load character-
istics Rotat-
Starter ing 1,900 rpm or more
speed
Voltage 8V
Current 370 A
Load characteris- Torque 11.1 N·m (1.1 kgf-m, 8.2 ft-lb) or more
tics Rotat-
ing 910 rpm or more
speed
Voltage 3V
Lock characteris-
Current 750 A or less
tics
Torque 15.5 N·m (1.6 kgf-m, 11.4 ft-lb) or more
Rotating-field three-phase type, voltage regulator built-in type, with load
Type
response control system
Model A3TG6191
Manufacturer MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Voltage and output 12 V — 110 A
Polarity on ground side Negative
Direction of rotation Clockwise (when observed from pulley side)
Armature connection 3-phase Y-type
Generator 1,500 rpm — 50 A or more
Output current 2,500 rpm — 91 A or more
5,000 rpm — 105 A or more
Regulated voltage 14.1 — 14.8 V [20°C (68°F)]
Stan-
Rotor slip ring outer 22.7 mm (0.894 in)
dard
diameter
Limit 22.1 mm (0.870 in)
Stan-
18.5 mm (0.728 in)
Brush length dard
Limit 5.0 mm (0.197 in)
Battery Type and capacity 12 V — 52 AH (75D 23R)

SC(H4SO)-2
11LE_US.book 3 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Description
STARTING/CHARGING SYSTEMS

2. 3.6 L MODEL
Item Specification
Vehicle model AT
Type Reduction type
Model 428000-5250
Manufacturer DENSO
Voltage and output 12 V — 1.6 kW
Direction of rotation Counterclockwise (when observed from pinion)
Number of pinion teeth 9
Voltage 11 V
Current 90 A or less
No-load character-
istics Rotat-
Starter ing 1,550 rpm or more
speed
Voltage 8V
Current 370 A
Load characteris- Torque 12.8 N·m (1.3 kgf-m, 9.4 ft-lb) or more
tics Rotat-
ing 800 rpm or more
speed
Voltage 3V
Lock characteris-
Current 750 A or less
tics
Torque 19.0 N·m (1.9 kgf-m, 14.0 ft-lb) or more
Rotating-field three-phase type, voltage regulator built-in type, with load
Type
response control system
Model A3TJ3591
Manufacturer MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Voltage and output 12 V — 130 A
Polarity on ground side Negative
Direction of rotation Clockwise (when observed from pulley side)
Armature connection 3-phase type
1,500 rpm — 55 A or more
Generator Output current 2,500 rpm — 108 A or more
5,000 rpm — 127 A or more
Regulated voltage 14.1 — 14.8 V [20°C (68°F)]
Stan-
22.7 mm (0.894 in)
Outer diameter of dard
rotor slip ring Service
22.1 mm (0.870 in)
limit
Stan-
18.5 mm (0.728 in)
dard
Brush length
Service
5.0 mm (0.197 in)
limit
Battery Type and capacity 12 V — 52 AH (75D 23R)

SC(H4SO)-3
11LE_US.book 4 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Description
STARTING/CHARGING SYSTEMS

B: COMPONENT
1. STARTER

T4

(2)
(5)

(4)

(3)

T2

T3

(11)

(10) T1

(13)
(9)
(12)

(8)
(1)

(6)

(7)
SC-02441

(1) Starter housing (8) Starter plate Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Magnet switch ASSY (9) Yoke T1: 1.4 (0.1, 1.0)
(3) Shift lever (10) Armature T2: 6 (0.6, 4.4)
(4) Starter seal (11) Brush holder ASSY T3: 7.5 (0.8, 5.5)
(5) Overrunning clutch ASSY (12) Drain duct T4: 10 (1.0, 7.4)
(6) Washer (13) Starter cover
(7) Planetary gear

SC(H4SO)-4
11LE_US.book 5 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Description
STARTING/CHARGING SYSTEMS

2. GENERATOR
• 2.5 L model

(6) (7)

(5)

(4)

(3)

T1

(2)

(1)

T1

T2

(13)

(12)

(11)

(10)

(9)

(8)
SC-02121

(1) Pulley nut (7) Bearing (13) Terminal B

(2) Pulley (8) Stator coil
(3) Front cover (9) IC regulator Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(4) Ball bearing (10) Brush T1: 4.7 (0.5, 3.5)
(5) Bearing retainer (11) Rectifier T2: 108 (11.0, 79.8)
(6) Rotor (12) Rear cover

SC(H4SO)-5
11LE_US.book 6 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Description
STARTING/CHARGING SYSTEMS

• 3.6 L model

(7) (8)

(6)
(5)

(4)

(3)

T1

(2)

(1)
T5

T2

T3
(14)

T2
(13)

T4 (12)

(11)

(10)

T4

(9)
SC-02298

(1) Pulley nut (8) Bearing Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)

(2) Pulley (9) Stator coil T1: 4.4 (0.4, 3.2)
(3) Front cover (10) IC regulator T2: 3.9 (0.4, 2.9)
(4) Ball bearing (11) Brush T3: 117.5 (12.0, 86.7)
(5) Bearing retainer (12) Rectifier T4: 2 (0.2, 1.5)
(6) Spacer (13) Rear cover T5: 8.9 (0.9, 6.6)
(7) Rotor (14) Terminal B

SC(H4SO)-6
11LE_US.book 7 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Description
STARTING/CHARGING SYSTEMS

3. GENERATOR BRACKET
• 2.5 L model

T2 (5)
(6)

(4)

T4

(3)
(7)
T5

T3

T4

(2)

(8) A
(1)
T5
T6

T7 (9) T7
(10)

T1

T7
T4

SC-02439

(1) V-belt cover bracket (6) Generator plate Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Collector cover bracket (7) A/C compressor bracket T1: 6.4 (0.7, 4.7)
(3) V-belt tensioner ASSY (8) Idler pulley T2: 16 (1.6, 11.8)
(4) Power steering pump bracket (9) Stopper rod RH T3: 20 (2.0, 14.8)
(5) Generator (10) Stopper rod LH T4: 22 (2.2, 16.2)
T5: 25 (2.5, 18.4)
T6: 33 (3.4, 24.3)
T7: 36 (3.7, 26.6)

SC(H4SO)-7
11LE_US.book 8 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Description
STARTING/CHARGING SYSTEMS

• 3.6 L model

T2

(1)

(2)

(3)

T3

T1

T3

SC-02368

(1) Generator (3) Collector cover bracket Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Power steering pump bracket T1: 6.4 (0.7, 4.7)
T2: 16 (1.6, 11.8)
T3: 25 (2.5, 18.4)

C: CAUTION
• Wear appropriate work clothing, including a cap, protective goggles and protective shoes when performing
any work.
• Remove contamination including dirt and corrosion before removal, installation or disassembly.
• Keep the disassembled parts in order and protect them from dust and dirt.
• Before removal, installation or disassembly, be sure to clarify the failure. Avoid unnecessary removal, in-
stallation, disassembly and replacement.
• Vehicle components are extremely hot after driving. Be wary of receiving burns from heated parts.
• Be sure to tighten fasteners including bolts and nuts to the specified torque.
• Place shop jacks or rigid racks at the specified points.
• Before disconnecting connectors of sensors or units, be sure to disconnect the ground cable from the bat-
tery.
D: PREPARATION TOOL
1. GENERAL TOOL
TOOL NAME REMARKS
Circuit tester Used for measuring resistance, voltage and current.

SC(H4SO)-8
 Starter
STARTING/CHARGING SYSTEMS

2. Starter Tightening torque:

50 N·m (5.1 kgf-m, 36.9 ft-lb)
A: REMOVAL (A)
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery.

SC-02363

Tightening torque:
IG-02107 10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.4 ft-lb)
2) Remove the air intake boot assembly. (non-tur-
bo model) <Ref. to IN(H4SO)-8, REMOVAL, Air In-
take Boot.> <Ref. to IN(H6DO)-7, REMOVAL, Air
Intake Boot.>
3) Remove the intercooler. (turbo model) <Ref. to
IN(H4DOTC)-17, REMOVAL, Intercooler.>
4) Disconnect connector (B) and terminal (A) from
starter.

SC-00006

C: DISASSEMBLY
1) Remove the nut which holds terminal M (A) of
the magnet switch assembly, then disconnect the
harness from the terminal.

SC-00006

5) Remove the starter from transmission. (A)

NOTE:
For the MT model, a bolt is used in place (A).
(A)

SC-02128

2) Remove the nuts fastening the magnet switch

assembly to the starter housing, then remove the
magnet switch assembly.

SC-02363

B: INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
For the MT model, a bolt is used in place (A).
SC-02129

SC(H4SO)-9
11LE_US.book 10 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Starter
STARTING/CHARGING SYSTEMS

3) Remove the starter seal. 6) Remove the overrunning clutch assembly from
the yoke.

SC-02130

4) Remove the through bolts on both sides, and re-

move the starter housing.

SC-02136
SC-02131
7) Remove the starter plate.

SC-02132
SC-02442
5) Remove the shift lever.
8) Remove the planetary gear (A) and washer (B)
from internal gear.

(A)

(A) (B)

(A)
SC-02133

SC-02443

SC(H4SO)-10
11LE_US.book 11 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Starter
STARTING/CHARGING SYSTEMS

9) Remove the screws, and remove the starter cov- D: ASSEMBLY

er from the brush holder assembly.
1) Install the armature to the yoke.
NOTE:
Separate the starter cover by pressing the brush
holder assembly using the screws so that the as-
sembly stays onto the armature side.

SC-02145

2) Install the brush holder assembly to the arma-

ture.
SC-02142 NOTE:
Spread the brush with your fingers, being careful
not to damage the brush.

SC-02143

10) Remove the brush holder assembly from the SC-02144

armature.
3) Install the starter cover, and secure it to the
NOTE: brush holder assembly with the screws.
Spread the brush with your fingers, being careful
not to damage the brush.

SC-02142

4) Assemble the planetary gear (A) and washer (B)

SC-02144
to the internal gear.
11) Remove the armature from the yoke. (1) Apply grease to the planetary gear installa-
tion position.
Grease:
DENSO HL50
(2) Install the planetary gear to the pin.
(3) Apply grease to the planetary gear, internal
gear, washer, and upper part of the pin.

SC-02145

SC(H4SO)-11
11LE_US.book 12 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Starter
STARTING/CHARGING SYSTEMS

NOTE: 6) Install the shift lever.

• Apply grease so that it contacts each gear. NOTE:
• Be careful not to allow dirt to get in. Apply grease to the contact portion of the shift le-
Grease: ver.
DENSO HL50 Grease:
DENSO HL50
(A)

(A) (B)

(A)

SC-02443

(4) Install the starter plate. SC-02133

7) Install the starter housing, and tighten through

bolts on both sides.
Tightening torque:
6 N·m (0.6 kgf-m, 4.4 ft-lb)

SC-02442

5) Assemble the overrunning clutch assembly to

the yoke.

SC-02132

SC-02131

8) Install the starter seal.

SC-02136

SC-02130

SC(H4SO)-12
11LE_US.book 13 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Starter
STARTING/CHARGING SYSTEMS

9) Install the magnet switch assembly to the starter E: INSPECTION

housing, and tighten the nuts.
1. SWITCH ASSEMBLY
NOTE:
Apply grease to the shift lever installation position. Using a circuit tester (set to “ohm”), check that
there is continuity between terminals S and M, and
Grease: between terminal S and ground.
DENSO HL50 Also check to be sure there is no continuity be-
Tightening torque: tween terminals M and B.
7.5 N·m (0.8 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb) Terminal/Resistance:
S — M/1 Ω or less
S — Ground/1 Ω or less
M — B/1 MΩ or more

(C)

SC-02129
(A)
10) Install the harness to the terminal M (A) of the (B)
magnet switch assembly, and tighten the nut.
SC-00181
Tightening torque:
10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.4 ft-lb) (A) Terminal S
(B) Terminal M
(C) Terminal B

2. SWITCH ASSEMBLY OPERATION

(A)
NOTE:
Perform each test in a short period of time (3 — 5
sec).
1) Suction test
Check that the pinion gear comes flying out when
SC-02128 the harness is disconnected from terminal M and
connected as shown in the figure.

(B)

(A)

SC-02086

(A) Terminal S
(B) Terminal M

SC(H4SO)-13
11LE_US.book 14 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Starter
STARTING/CHARGING SYSTEMS

2) Holding test 3. PERFORMANCE TEST

Check that the pinion gear remains flying out after The starter should be submitted to performance
the cable is disconnected from terminal M. tests whenever it has been overhauled, to assure
its satisfactory performance when installed on the
(B)
engine.
Three performance tests, no-load test, load test,
and lock test, are presented here; however, if the
load test and lock test cannot be performed, carry
out at least the no-load test.
For these performance tests, use the circuit shown
(A)
in figure.

SC-02087

(A) Terminal S B
(B)
S (A)
(B) Terminal M M

3) Returning test (C) +

With terminal S connected to the positive terminal, 12V
and terminal M and starter body connected to the V A
battery ground terminal to suction the main contact
SC-00077
point, check that the pinion gear returns to its orig-
inal position when terminal S is disconnected. (A) Variable resistance
(B) Magnetic switch
(B)
(C) Starter body

1) No-load test
Adjust the variable resistance with the switch on
until the voltage is 11 V, and read the value dis-
played on the ammeter to measure rotating speed.
Compare these values with the standard.
(A)
No-load test (standard):
SC-02088
Voltage/Current
(A) Terminal S Max. 11 V/90 A or less
(B) Terminal M
Rotating speed
2.5 L model
1,900 rpm or more
3.6 L model
1,550 rpm or more
2) Load test
Apply the specified braking torque to starter. The
condition is normal if the current draw and rotating
speed are within standard.
Load test (standard):
Voltage/Load
2.5 L model
8 V/11.1 N·m (1.1 kgf-m, 8.2 ft-lb) or more
3.6 L model
8 V/12.8 N·m (1.3 kgf-m, 9.4 ft-lb) or more

SC(H4SO)-14
11LE_US.book 15 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Starter
STARTING/CHARGING SYSTEMS

Current/Rotating speed
2.5 L model
370 A/910 rpm or more
3.6 L model
370 A/800 rpm or more
3) Lock test
With the starter stalled, or not rotating, measure the
torque developed and current draw when the volt-
age is adjusted to standard voltage.
Lock test (standard):
Voltage/Current
3 V/750 A or less
Torque
2.5 L model
15.5 N·m (1.6 kgf-m, 11.4 ft-lb) or more
3.6 L model
19.0 N·m (1.9 kgf-m, 14.0 ft-lb) or more
4. OTHER INSPECTIONS
Check that the starter does not have deformation,
cracks and any other damage.

SC(H4SO)-15
 Generator
STARTING/CHARGING SYSTEMS

3. Generator B: INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
A: REMOVAL
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. Tightening torque:
T1: 25 N·m (2.5 kgf-m, 18.4 ft-lb)
T2: 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)

T1 T2
IG-02107

2) Remove the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-42, V- SC-02374

BELT, REMOVAL, V-belt.> <Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-41, V-BELT, REMOVAL, V-belt.> C: DISASSEMBLY
<Ref. to ME(H6DO)-49, REMOVAL, V-belt.>
3) Disconnect the connector and terminal from 1. 2.5 L MODEL
generator. 1) Remove the four through bolts.

SC-02372 SC-00078

4) Remove the collector cover bracket or v-belt 2) Use a drier to heat the rear cover (A) portion to
cover bracket. 50°C (122°F).

(A)

SC-02373 SC-00079

5) Remove the generator from the bracket.

SC-02375

SC(H4SO)-16
11LE_US.book 17 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Generator
STARTING/CHARGING SYSTEMS

3) Insert the end of a flat tip screwdriver into the (1) Remove the bolt, and then detach the bear-
gap between stator core and front cover. Pry them ing retainer.
apart to disassemble.

(A)

(A)
SC-00081
SC-00080
(2) Firmly attach an appropriate tool (such as a
(A) Screwdriver
correct size socket wrench) to the bearing inner
race.
4) Using a vise, support the rotor and remove the
pulley bolt.

SC-00082

(3) Use the press to push the ball bearings out

SC-00035 from the front cover.
CAUTION: 6) Using the bearing puller, remove the bearings
When holding the rotor with a vise, place alumi- from the rotor.
num plates or wooden pieces on the vise jaws
to prevent rotor from damage.
(A)

(B)

SC-00046
(C)
(D)
SC-00036

(A) Front cover

(B) Pulley
(C) Nut
(D) Rotor

5) Use the following procedures to remove the ball

bearings.

SC(H4SO)-17
11LE_US.book 18 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Generator
STARTING/CHARGING SYSTEMS

7) Disconnect the connection between the rectifier (1) Remove the cover A.
and stator coil, then remove the stator coil.
CAUTION:
(A)
The rectifier is easily damaged by heat. Do not
allow a 180 — 270 W soldering iron to contact
the terminals for 5 seconds or more at a time.

SC-00086

(A) Cover A

(2) Remove the cover B.

SC-00083 (A)

8) Use the following procedures to remove the IC

regulator.
(1) Remove the screws which secure the IC
regulator to the rear cover.

SC-00087

(A) Cover B

(3) Disconnect the connection and remove the

brush.
SC-00084

(2) Disconnect the connection between the IC

regulator and rectifier, then remove the IC reg-
ulator.

SC-00088

10) Remove the rectifier as follows.

(1) Remove the bolts which secure the rectifier.

SC-00085

9) Use the following procedures to remove the

brush.

SC-00089

SC(H4SO)-18
11LE_US.book 19 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Generator
STARTING/CHARGING SYSTEMS

(2) Remove the cover on terminal B. 3) Insert the end of a flat tip screwdriver into the
gap between stator core and front cover. Pry them
apart to disassemble.

(A)

SC-00090 (A)

(3) Remove the nuts of terminal B, then remove

SC-00080
the rectifier.
(A) Screwdriver

4) Using a vise, support the rotor and remove the

pulley bolt.

SC-00091

2. 3.6 L MODEL
1) Remove the four through bolts.
SC-00035

CAUTION:
When holding the rotor with a vise, place alumi-
num plates or wooden pieces on the vise jaws
to prevent rotor from damage.
(A)

(B)
SC-00078

2) Use a drier to heat the rear cover (A) portion to

50 — 60°C (122 — 140°F).

(C)
(A)
(D)
SC-02300

(A) Front cover

(B) Pulley
(C) Nut
(D) Rotor

SC-02299 5) Use the following procedures to remove the ball

bearings.

SC(H4SO)-19
11LE_US.book 20 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Generator
STARTING/CHARGING SYSTEMS

(1) Remove the bolt, and then detach the bear- 8) Remove four screws which secure the IC regu-
ing retainer. lator to the rear cover, then remove the IC regula-
tor.

SC-00081
SC-02302
(2) Firmly attach an appropriate tool (such as a
correct size socket wrench) to the bearing inner 9) Use the following procedures to remove the
race. brush.
(1) Remove the cover A.
(A)

SC-00082
SC-02303
(3) Use the press to push the ball bearings out
from the front cover. (A) Cover A
6) Using the bearing puller, remove the bearings
from the rotor. (2) Remove the cover B.

(A)

SC-00046 SC-02304
7) Remove six bolts between the rectifier and stator
coil, then remove the stator coil. (A) Cover B

(3) Disconnect the connection and remove the

brush.

SC-02301

SC-02305

SC(H4SO)-20
 Generator
STARTING/CHARGING SYSTEMS

10) Remove the rectifier as follows. D: ASSEMBLY

(1) Remove the cover on terminal B.
1. 2.5 L MODEL
Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.
1) Before assembling, press the brush down into
the brush holder, then fix the brush in that position
by inserting a [1 mm (0.04 in) dia., 40 — 50 mm (1.6
— 2.0 in) long] wire through the hole as shown in
the figure.
CAUTION:
After re-assembling, remove the wire.
SC-02307
(A)
(2) Remove the nut on terminal B.

SC-00092

(A) Wire
SC-02308

(3) Remove the bolts which secure the rectifier, 2) Install the ball bearings.
and remove the rectifier. (1) Set the ball bearings in the front cover, then
securely install an appropriate tool (such as a
socket wrench of proper size) to the bearing
outer race.
(2) Using a press to press the ball bearings into
the specified location.
(3) Install the bearing retainer.
3) Use a press to install the bearings (rear side) to
the rotor shaft.
4) Heat the bearing box in rear cover [50 to 60°C
(122 to 140°F)], and then press the rear bearing
SC-02306
into rear cover.
CAUTION:
Do not apply grease to the rear bearings. If
there is any oil on the bearing box, remove it
completely.
5) After re-assembling, manually turn the pulley to
check that the rotor rotates smoothly.
2. 3.6 L MODEL
Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.
NOTE:
Refer to component for tightening torque of each
part. <Ref. to SC(H4SO)-5, GENERATOR, COM-
PONENT, General Description.>

SC(H4SO)-21
11LE_US.book 22 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Generator
STARTING/CHARGING SYSTEMS

1) Push of the brush 1) Check for continuity between the diode lead and
Before assembling the front and rear parts, press positive side heat sink. If resistance is 1 Ω or more
the brush down into the brush holder, then fix the only in the direction from the diode lead to the heat
brush in that position by inserting a [1 mm (0.08 in) sink, replace the rectifier.
dia., 40 — 50 mm (1.6 — 2.0 in) long] wire through (A) (B)
the hole as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
After re-assembling, remove the wire.

(A)

SC-00042

(A) Diode lead

(B) Heat sink (positive side)

SC-00092 2) Check for continuity between the negative side

heat sink and diode lead. If resistance is 1 Ω or
(A) Wire
more only in the direction from the heat sink to the
2) Install the ball bearings. diode lead, replace the rectifier.
(1) Set the ball bearings in the front cover, then
(A)
securely install an appropriate tool (such as a
socket wrench of proper size) to the bearing
outer race.
(2) Using a press to press the ball bearings into
the specified location. (B)
(3) Install the bearing retainer.
3) Use a press to install the bearings (rear side) to
the rotor shaft.
4) Heat the bearing box in rear cover to 50 — 60°C SC-00043
(122 — 140°F), and then press the rear bearing
into rear cover. (A) Diode lead
(B) Heat sink (negative side)
CAUTION:
Do not apply grease to the rear bearings. If
there is any oil on the bearing box, remove it
2. DIODE (3.6 L MODEL)
completely. CAUTION:
5) After re-assembling, manually turn the pulley to There is the possibility of damaging the diodes
check that the rotor rotates smoothly. if a mega-tester (used to measure high voltag-
es) or a similar measuring instrument is used.
E: INSPECTION Never use a mega tester or equivalent for this
1. DIODE (2.5 L MODEL) test.
1) Check for continuity between the diode lead and
CAUTION: terminal E or B. If continuity is not as shown in the
There is the possibility of damaging the diodes table, replace the rectifier.
if a mega-tester (used to measure high voltag- • At analog type tester
es) or a similar measuring instrument is used.
Never use a mega tester or equivalent for this Tester lead
Continuity
test. –lead +lead
E P1, P2, P3, P4, Yes
B P5, P6 None
P1, P2, P3, P4, E None
P5, P6 B Yes

SC(H4SO)-22
11LE_US.book 23 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Generator
STARTING/CHARGING SYSTEMS

• At digital type tester 4) Check the continuity between slip ring and rotor
Tester lead
core or shaft. If the resistance is 1 Ω or less, re-
Continuity place the rotor assembly.
–lead +lead
E P1, P2, P3, P4, None
B P5, P6 Yes
P1, P2, P3, P4, E Yes
P5, P6 B None

P4 P5 P6
P3

P2
SC-00045
P1
5) Check the rear ball bearing. If there is any noise,
E or the rotor does not rotate smoothly, replace the
B bearings.
4. STATOR COIL (2.5 L MODEL)
SC-02310
1) Inspect continuity between the stator coil lead
3. ROTOR wire terminals. If the resistance is 1 MΩ or more, re-
place the stator assembly.
1) Inspect the slip rings for contamination or any
roughness on the sliding surface. Repair the slip (A)
ring surface using a lathe or sand paper.
2) Measure the slip ring outer diameter. Replace
the rotor assembly if the slip ring is worn.
Slip ring outer diameter:
Standard
22.7 mm (0.894 in)
Limit
22.1 mm (0.870 in) SC-00047
3) Using a circuit tester, check the resistance be-
tween slip rings. If the resistance is not within the (A) Stator
standard, replace the rotor assembly.
2) Inspect the continuity between the stator coil sta-
Standard:
tor core and lead wire terminals. If the resistance is
Approx. 1.8 — 2.2 Ω
1 Ω or less, replace the stator assembly.

SC-00044
SC-00048

SC(H4SO)-23
11LE_US.book 24 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Generator
STARTING/CHARGING SYSTEMS

5. 3.6 L MODEL 6. BRUSH

1) Continuity test 1) Measure the length of each brush. Replace the
Inspect the continuity between the stator coil termi- brush if wear exceeds service limits. There is a ser-
nals. If continuity is not as shown in the table, re- vice limit mark (A) on each brush.
place the stator coil.
Brush length:
(A) • 2.5 L model
1 2 3 4 5 6 Standard (1)
18.5 mm (0.728 in)
Limit (2)
5.0 mm (0.197 in)
• 3.6 L model
Standard (1)
22.5 mm (0.886 in)
SC-02349 Limit (2)
5.0 mm (0.197 in)
(A) Terminals

3 (2)
2 4 (A)
1
5

6 (1)

SC-02313

SC-02311 2) Using a spring pressure indicator, push the

brush into the brush holder until its tip protrudes 2
2) Insulation test
mm (0.08 in). Then measure the pressure of brush
Inspect the continuity between the stator coil stator
spring. If the pressure is 2.648 N (270 g, 9.52 oz) or
core and lead wire terminals. If there is continuity,
less, replace the brush spring with a new part.
replace the stator coil because the stator coil is
4.609 — 5.786 N (470 — 590 g, 16.58 — 20.810
grounded.
oz) pressure is required on the new spring.

SC-02314
SC-00093

7. BALL BEARING (FRONT SIDE)

Check the front ball bearings. Replace the ball
bearings if there is resistance in the rotation, or if
there is any abnormal noise.
8. OTHER INSPECTIONS
Check that the generator does not have deforma-
tion, cracks and any other damage.

SC(H4SO)-24
11LE_US.book 25 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Battery
STARTING/CHARGING SYSTEMS

4. Battery • Ventilate sufficiently when using or charging

battery in enclosed space.
A: REMOVAL • Before starting work, remove rings, metal
1) After disconnecting the battery ground terminal, watch-bands, and other metal jewelry.
remove the terminal cover, then disconnect the • Never allow metal tools to contact the posi-
positive terminal. tive battery terminal and anything connected to
2) Remove the battery cable holder from the bat- it while you are at the same time in contact with
tery rod. any other metallic portion of the vehicle.
3) Remove flange nut from the battery rod and re- 1. EXTERNAL PARTS
move battery holder.
Check the battery case, top cover, vent plugs, and
terminal posts for dirt or cracks. If necessary, clean
with water and wipe with a dry cloth.
Apply a thin coat of grease on the terminal posts to
prevent corrosion.
2. ELECTROLYTE LEVEL
Check the electrolyte level in each cell. If the level
is below MIN level, bring the level to MAX level by
pouring distilled water into the battery cell. Do not
SC-02377 fill beyond MAX level.
4) Remove the battery. 3. SPECIFIC GRAVITY OF ELECTROLYTE
B: INSTALLATION 1) Measure specific gravity of electrolyte using a
hydrometer and a thermometer.
Install in the reverse order of removal. Specific gravity varies with temperature of electro-
Tightening torque: lyte so that it must be corrected at 20°C (68°F) us-
3.5 N·m (0.4 kgf-m, 2.6 ft-lb) ing the following calculation:
NOTE: S20 = St + 0.0007 × (t – 20)
• Clean the battery cable terminals and apply S20: Specific gravity corrected at electrolyte
grease to retard the formation of corrosion. temperature of 20°C (68°F)
• Connect the battery positive (+) terminal, and St: Measured specific gravity
then connect the negative (–) terminal. t: Measured temperature (°C)
• After the battery is installed, initial diagnosis of Judge whether or not battery must be
the electronic throttle control is performed. Wait for charged, according to corrected specific
10 seconds or more after turning the ignition switch gravity.
to ON, and then start the engine. Standard specific gravity: 1.220 — 1.290 [at
20°C (68°F)]
C: INSPECTION 2) Measuring the specific gravity of the electrolyte
WARNING: in the battery will disclose the state of charge of the
• Electrolyte is corrosive acid, and has toxici- battery. The relation between specific gravity and
ty; be careful of handling the fluid. state of charge is as shown in the figure.
• Make sure the electrode does not come into 1.28
Specific gravity [20˚C (68˚F)]

contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Especially 1.26

at contact with eyes, flush with water for 15 1.24

minutes and get prompt medical attention. 1.22

• In addition, be careful not to let the electrode 1.20

1.18
contact with the coated parts.
1.16
• Be careful when handling the batteries be- 1.14
cause they produce explosive gases. 1.12
• Be sure to keep battery away from any fire. 100% 75% 50% 22% 0%
Complete charge Charging condition (%)
• For safety, in case an explosion does occur, Specific gravity and state of charge SC-00094
wear eye protection or shield your eyes when
working near any battery. In addition, never
lean over the battery.

SC(H4SO)-25
11LE_US.book 26 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Battery
STARTING/CHARGING SYSTEMS

D: MEASUREMENT Since a large current flow raises electrolyte temper-

ature, the battery is subject to damage if the large
WARNING: current is used for prolonged time. For this reason,
Do not bring an open flame close to the battery quick charging must be carried out within a current
when working. range that will not raise the electrolyte temperature
CAUTION: to 40°C (104°F) or more.
• Prior to charging, corroded terminals should Also the quick charging is a temporary mean to
be cleaned with a brush and common caustic bring battery voltage up to some level, and battery
soda solution. should be charged slowly with low current as a rule.
• Be careful since battery electrolyte overflows
while charging the battery.
• Observe instructions when handling the bat-
tery charger.
• Before charging the battery on the vehicle,
disconnect the battery ground terminal to pre-
vent damage of generator diodes or other elec-
trical units.
1. JUDGMENT OF BATTERY IN CHARGED
CONDITION
1) Specific gravity of electrolyte should be held
within the specific range from 1.250 to 1.290 for
one hour or more.
2) Voltage per battery cell should be held at a spe-
cific value in a range from 2.5 to 2.8 V for one hour
or more.
2. CHECK CONDITION OF CHARGE WITH
HYDROMETER
Hydrometer State of
Corrective action
indicator charge
Green dot 65% or more Load test
Dark dot 65% or less Charge battery
Low electro- Replace the battery.*
Clear dot
lyte (If cranking is difficult)
* Check electrical system before replacement.

3. NORMAL CHARGING
Charge the battery at the current value specified by
manufacturer or at approximately 1/10 of battery’s
ampere-hour rating.
4. QUICK CHARGING
CAUTION:
• Observe the items in “3. NORMAL CHARG-
ING”.
• Never use 10 A or more when charging the
battery because it will shorten the battery life.
Quick charging is a method that the battery is
charged in a short period of time with a relatively
large current by using a quick charger.

SC(H4SO)-26
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

EN(H4SO)(diag)
Page
1. Basic Diagnostic Procedure .......................................................................2
2. Check List for Interview ..............................................................................4
3. General Description ...................................................................................6
4. Electrical Component Location ..................................................................9
5. Engine Control Module (ECM) I/O Signal ................................................17
6. Engine Condition Data .............................................................................26
7. Data Link Connector ................................................................................27
8. General Scan Tool ...................................................................................28
9. Subaru Select Monitor ..............................................................................33
10. Read Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) .....................................................40
11. Inspection Mode .......................................................................................41
12. Drive Cycle ...............................................................................................46
13. Clear Memory Mode .................................................................................51
14. System Operation Check Mode ...............................................................52
15. Malfunction Indicator Light .......................................................................53
16. Diagnostics for Engine Starting Failure ....................................................62
17. List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) ....................................................75
18. Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) ....................82
19. General Diagnostic Table .......................................................................282
 Basic Diagnostic Procedure
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

1. Basic Diagnostic Procedure

A: PROCEDURE
1. ENGINE
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK ENGINE START FAILURE. Does the engine start? Go to step 2. Inspection using
1) Ask the customer when and how the trouble “Diagnostics for
occurred using the interview check list. <Ref. to Engine Start Fail-
EN(H4SO)(diag)-4, CHECK, Check List for ure”. <Ref. to
Interview.> EN(H4SO)(diag)-
2) Start the engine. 62, Diagnostics for
Engine Starting
Failure.>
2 CHECK ILLUMINATION OF MALFUNCTION Does the malfunction indicator Go to step 3. Inspection using
INDICATOR LIGHT. light illuminate? “General Diagnos-
tic Table”. <Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
282, INSPEC-
TION, General
Diagnostic Table.>
3 CHECK COMMUNICATION STATUS. Does Subaru Select Monitor or Go to step 4. Inspection using
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. general scan tool communicate LAN system “Diag-
2) Connect the Subaru Select Monitor or gen- with vehicle normally? nostic Procedure
eral scan tool to the data link connector. with Diagnostic
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and run the Trouble Code
Subaru Select Monitor or general scan tool. (DTC)”. <Ref. to
NOTE: LAN(diag)-48,
• Subaru Select Monitor COMMUNICA-
For detailed procedures, refer to “Subaru Select TION FOR INI-
Monitor”. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru TIALIZING
Select Monitor.> IMPOSSIBLE,
• General scan tool Diagnostic Proce-
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the dure with Diagnos-
general scan tool operation manual. tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
4 CHECK DTC. Is DTC displayed on Subaru Record the DTC. Repair the related
Read DTC using Subaru Select Monitor or gen- Select Monitor or general scan Repair the trouble parts.
eral scan tool. tool? cause. <Ref. to NOTE:
NOTE: EN(H4SO)(diag)- If DTC is not
• Subaru Select Monitor 75, List of Diagnos- shown on display
Refer to “Read Diagnostic Trouble Code” for tic Trouble Code although the mal-
detailed operation procedure. <Ref. to (DTC).> function indicator
EN(H4SO)(diag)-40, Read Diagnostic Trouble Go to step 5. light illuminates,
Code (DTC).> perform the diag-
• General scan tool nosis of malfunc-
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the tion indicator light
general scan tool operation manual. circuit or combina-
tion meter. <Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
53, Malfunction In-
dicator Light.>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-2
 Basic Diagnostic Procedure
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

5 CHECK FREEZE FRAME DATA. Is freeze frame data displayed Record the freeze Go to step 6.
Check the freeze frame data using the Subaru on Subaru Select Monitor or frame data. Repair
Select Monitor or general scan tool. general scan tool? the cause of fault,
NOTE: and go to the next
• Subaru Select Monitor step. Go to step 6.
For detailed procedures, refer to “Subaru Select
Monitor”. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru
Select Monitor.>
• General scan tool
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the
general scan tool operation manual.
6 PERFORM DIAGNOSIS. Is DTC displayed on Subaru Inspect using Finish the diagno-
1) Perform the Clear Memory Mode. <Ref. to Select Monitor or general scan “Diagnostic Proce- sis.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-51, Clear Memory Mode.> tool? dure with Diagnos-
2) Perform the Inspection Mode or Drive Cycle. tic Trouble Code
<Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, Inspection (DTC)”. <Ref. to
Mode.> <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-46, Drive EN(H4SO)(diag)-
Cycle.> 82, Diagnostic Pro-
cedure with Diag-
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-3
11LE_US.book 4 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Check List for Interview

ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

2. Check List for Interview

A: CHECK
1. CHECK LIST NO. 1
Check the following item when problem has occurred.
NOTE:
Use copies of this page for interviewing customers.
Customer’s name Engine No.
Date of purchase Fuel type
Date of repair km
Odometer reading
V.I.N. miles
Weather Fine
Cloudy
Rainy
Snowy
Various/Others:
Ambient air temperature °C (°F)
Hot
Warm
Cool
Cold
Place Highway
Suburbs
Inner city
Uphill
Downhill
Rough road
Others:
Engine temperature Cold
Warming-up
After warming-up
Any temperature
Others:
Engine speed rpm
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
Driving conditions Not affected
At starting
While idling
At racing
While accelerating
While cruising
While decelerating
While turning (RH/LH)
Headlight ON/ OFF Rear defogger ON/ OFF
Blower ON/ OFF Audio ON/ OFF
A/C compressor ON/ OFF Rear entertainment system ON/ OFF
Radiator fan ON/ OFF Car phone ON/ OFF
Front wiper ON/ OFF Wireless device ON/ OFF
Rear wiper ON/ OFF

EN(H4SO)(diag)-4
11LE_US.book 5 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Check List for Interview

ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

2. CHECK LIST NO. 2

Check the following item about the vehicle’s state when the malfunction indicator light turns on.
NOTE:
Use copies of this page for interviewing customers.
a) Other warning lights or indicators illuminate. Yes / No
Low fuel warning light
Charge warning light
Engine coolant temperature warning light
Oil pressure warning light
ATF temperature warning light or SPORT indicator light
Driver’s control center differential indicator light
ABS warning light
VDC warning light
Cruise indicator light
SI-CRUISE warning light
Immobilizer indicator light
STEERING warning light
Electronic parking brake warning light
Glow indicator light
Sedimentor warning light
Others:
b) Fuel level
• Lack of fuel: Yes / No
• Indicator position of fuel gauge:
• Experienced running out of fuel: Yes / No
c) Intentional connecting or disconnecting of harness connectors or spark plug cords: Yes / No
• What:
d) Intentional connecting or disconnecting of hoses: Yes / No
• What:
e) Installing of other parts except genuine parts: Yes / No
• What:
• Where:
f) Occurrence of noise: Yes / No
• From where:
• What kind:
g) Occurrence of smell: Yes / No
• From where:
• What kind:
h) Intrusion of water into engine compartment or passenger compartment: Yes / No
i) Troubles occurred
Engine does not start.
Engine stalls during idling.
Engine stalls while driving.
Engine speed decreases.
Engine speed does not decrease.
Rough idling
Poor acceleration
Back fire
After fire
Does not shift.
Excessive shift shock

EN(H4SO)(diag)-5
 General Description
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

3. General Description 7) Use ECM mounting stud bolts at the body side
grounding point when measuring voltage and resis-
A: CAUTION tance inside the passenger compartment.
1) Airbag system wiring harness is routed near the
ECM, main relay and fuel pump relay.
CAUTION:
• Do not use electrical test equipment on the
airbag system circuits.
• Be careful not to damage the airbag system
wiring harness when servicing the ECM, TCM, (A)
main relay and fuel pump relay.
2) Never connect the battery in reverse polarity.
Doing so will damage the ECM instantly, and other EN-07713
parts will also be damaged.
(A) Stud bolt
3) Do not disconnect the battery terminals while the
engine is running. A large counter electromotive 8) Use the engine ground terminal or engine as-
force will be generated in the generator, and this sembly for the grounding point to chassis when
voltage may damage electronic parts such as ECM measuring the voltage and resistance in engine
etc. compartment.
4) Before disconnecting the connectors of each
sensor and ECM, be sure to turn the ignition switch
to OFF. Perform the Clear Memory Mode after con-
necting the connectors. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-
51, Clear Memory Mode.>
5) When measuring the voltage or resistance of in-
dividual sensor or all electrical control modules,
use a tapered pin with a diameter of less than 0.6
mm (0.024 in). Do not insert the pin 4 mm (0.16 in)
or more into the part.
EN-07710
CAUTION:
When replacing the ECM, be careful not to use 9) Every engine control system-related part is a
the wrong spec. ECM to avoid any damage on precision part. Do not drop them.
the fuel injection system. 10) Observe the following cautions when installing
NOTE: a radio in vehicle.
When replacing the ECM of the models with Immo- CAUTION:
bilizer, immobilizer system must be registered. To • The antenna must be kept as far apart as pos-
do so, all ignition keys and ID cards need to be pre- sible from control module. (ECM is installed at
pared. Refer to the “PC application help for Subaru the back of the glove box.)
Select Monitor”. • The antenna feeder must be placed as far
6) Take care not to allow water to get into the con- apart as possible from the ECM and engine
nectors when servicing or washing the vehicle in control system harness.
rainy weather. Avoid exposure to water even if the • Carefully adjust the antenna for correct
connectors are waterproof. matching.
• When mounting a large power type radio, pay
special attention to the three items mentioned
above.
• Incorrect installation of the radio may affect
the operation of ECM.
11) When disconnecting the fuel hose, release the
fuel pressure. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-48, RELEASING
OF FUEL PRESSURE, PROCEDURE, Fuel.>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-6
 General Description
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

12) Warning lights may illuminate when performing • The OBD system stores freeze frame engine
driving test with jacked-up or lifted-up condition, but condition data (engine load, engine coolant tem-
this is not a system malfunction. The reason for this perature, fuel trim, engine speed and vehicle
is the speed difference between the front and rear speed, etc.) into on-board computer when it detects
wheels. When engine control system diagnosis is a malfunction.
finished, perform the VDC memory clearance pro- • Freeze frame engine condition data are stored
cedure of self-diagnosis function. <Ref. to VDC(di- until the DTCs are cleared. However when such
ag)-25, Clear Memory Mode.> malfunctions as fuel trim fault and misfire are de-
tected with the freeze frame engine condition data
B: INSPECTION stored, they are rewritten into those related to the
Before performing diagnostics, check the following fuel trim fault and misfire.
item which might affect engine problems. • When the malfunction does not occur again for
1. BATTERY three consecutive driving cycles, malfunction indi-
cator light is turned off, but DTC remains at on-
1) Measure the battery voltage and specific gravity board computer.
of the electrolyte. • When performing diagnosis, connect the Subaru
Standard voltage: 12 V Select Monitor or general scan tool to the vehicle.
Specific gravity: 1.260 or more
2) Check the condition of the main and other fuses,
and harnesses and connectors. Also check for
proper grounding.
2. ENGINE GROUND
Make sure that the engine ground terminal has no
contamination, corrosion or looseness and is prop-
erly connected to the engine.

EN-07710

C: NOTE
• The on-board diagnostic (OBD) system detects
and indicates a fault in various inputs and outputs
of the complex electronic control. Malfunction indi-
cator light in the combination meter indicates oc-
currence of a fault or trouble.
• Further, against such a failure of sensors as may
disable the drive, the fail-safe function is provided
to ensure the minimal drivability.
• The OBD system incorporated with the vehicles
within this type of engine complies with OBD-II reg-
ulations. The OBD system monitors the compo-
nents and the system malfunction listed in “Engine
Section” which affects on emissions.
• When the system decides that a malfunction oc-
curs, malfunction indicator light illuminates. At the
same time of the malfunction indicator light illumi-
nation or blinking, a DTC and a freeze frame en-
gine conditions are stored into on-board computer.

EN(H4SO)(diag)-7
11LE_US.book 8 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Description
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

D: PREPARATION TOOL
ILLUSTRATION TOOL NUMBER DESCRIPTION REMARKS
1B022XU0 SUBARU SELECT Used for troubleshooting the electrical system.
MONITOR III KIT

ST1B022XU0
499987500 CRANKSHAFT Used for rotating crankshaft.
SOCKET

ST-499987500

EN(H4SO)(diag)-8
11LE_US.book 9 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Electrical Component Location

ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

4. Electrical Component Location

A: LOCATION
1. CONTROL MODULE

(1)

(3) (2) (4)

EN-07690

(1) Engine control module (ECM) (3) Delivery (test) mode fuse (4) Data link connector
(2) Malfunction indicator light

(1)

CHECK
ENGINE

CHECK
ENGINE (2)
EN-07715 EN-07716

(3)

(4)

EN-07511 EN-07717

EN(H4SO)(diag)-9
11LE_US.book 10 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Electrical Component Location

ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

2. SENSOR

(3) (4) (2)

(1) (8) (7) (5) (6)

EN-07691

(1) Mass air flow and intake air tem- (4) Electronic throttle control (7) Crankshaft position sensor
perature sensor
(2) Manifold absolute pressure sensor (5) Knock sensor (8) Oil temperature sensor
(3) Engine coolant temperature sen- (6) Camshaft position sensor
sor

EN(H4SO)(diag)-10
11LE_US.book 11 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Electrical Component Location

ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

(2)

(1)

EN-07595 EN-07596

(3)

(4)

EN-07597 EN-07598

(5) (6)

EN-07599 EN-07600

(7)

(8)

EN-07601 EN-07602

EN(H4SO)(diag)-11
11LE_US.book 12 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Electrical Component Location

ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

(4)
(2)

(3)

(1)

EN-07603

(1) Front oxygen (A/F) sensor (3) Front catalytic converter (4) Rear catalytic converter
(2) Rear oxygen sensor

(1) (2) (3)

(4)
EN-07692

(1) Fuel level sensor (3) Fuel tank pressure sensor (4) Fuel sub level sensor
(2) Fuel temperature sensor

(3)

(1)

(2)

EN-07718 EN-07719

EN(H4SO)(diag)-12
11LE_US.book 13 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Electrical Component Location

ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

(4)

EN-07720

EN(H4SO)(diag)-13
11LE_US.book 14 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Electrical Component Location

ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

3. SOLENOID VALVE, ACTUATOR, EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM PARTS AND IGNITION

SYSTEM PARTS

(3) (4) (2) (1)

(4) (3)
EN-07693

(1) Purge control solenoid valve (3) Oil switching solenoid valve (4) Variable valve lift diagnosis oil
pressure switch
(2) EGR valve

(3)
(1)

(2)

EN-07605 EN-07606

EN(H4SO)(diag)-14
11LE_US.book 15 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Electrical Component Location

ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

(4)

EN-08625

(3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (2)

(8) (9) (10) (1) (11) (13) (12) (14)

EN-07694

(1) Starter (6) Electronic throttle control relay (11) Starter relay
(2) Fuel pump (7) Fuel pump relay (12) Canister
(3) Main relay (8) Radiator main fan relay 1 (13) Drain valve
(4) IG relay (9) Radiator main fan relay 2 (14) Drain filter
(5) A/F, oxygen sensor relay (10) Radiator sub fan relay

(2)

(1)

EN-07512 EN-07752

EN(H4SO)(diag)-15
11LE_US.book 16 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Electrical Component Location

ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

(3)
(4)
(5)
(9)
(6)
(8)
(7)
(10)

EN-07721 EN-07514

(14)
(13)

(12)
(11)
EN-07722 EN-07723

4. TRANSMISSION

(2)

(1)

EN-07518 EN-07724

(1) Inhibitor switch (CVT model) (2) Neutral position switch (MT
model)

EN(H4SO)(diag)-16
11LE_US.book 17 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Engine Control Module (ECM) I/O Signal

ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

5. Engine Control Module (ECM) I/O Signal

A: ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

TO A: B134 TO B: B135 TO C: B136 TO D: B137

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18
34 33 32 31 30 29 28 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 31 30 29 28 27 26

EN-05288

Termi- Signal (V)

Connector
Description nal Ignition SW ON Engine ON Note
No.
No. (engine OFF) (idling)
Crankshaft Signal (+) B137 17 0 –7 — +7 Waveform
position sen- Signal (–) B137 25 0 0 —
sor Shield B137 31 0 0 —
Camshaft Signal (+) B137 24 0 –7 — +7 Waveform
position sen- Signal (–) B137 30 0 0 —
sor Shield B137 31 0 0 —
Approx. 0.9 Approx. 0.6 — 0.7
Fully closed: Approx. 0.6
Main B134 18 (After engine is (After engine is
Fully open: Approx. 4.0
warmed up.) warmed up.)
Approx. 1.7 Approx. 1.5 — 1.6
Fully closed: Approx. 1.5
Electronic Sub B134 28 (After engine is (After engine is
Fully open: Approx. 4.2
throttle control warmed up.) warmed up.)
Power
B134 19 5 5 —
supply
Ground
B134 29 0 0 —
(sensor)
Electronic throttle control
B134 2 Duty waveform Duty waveform Drive frequency: 500 Hz
motor (+)
Electronic throttle control
B134 1 Duty waveform Duty waveform Drive frequency: 500 Hz
motor (–)
Electronic throttle control
B135 7 10 — 13 12 — 14 —
motor power supply
Electronic throttle control ON: 0 ON: 0 When ignition switch is
B135 17
motor relay OFF: 10 — 13 OFF: 12 — 14 turned to ON: ON

EN(H4SO)(diag)-17
11LE_US.book 18 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Engine Control Module (ECM) I/O Signal

ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Termi- Signal (V)

Connector
Description nal Ignition SW ON Engine ON Note
No.
No. (engine OFF) (idling)
Main sen- Fully closed: 1.0 Fully closed: 1.0
B135 23 —
sor signal Fully opened: 3.5 Fully opened: 3.5
Main
power sup- B135 21 5 5 —
ply
Ground
Accelerator (Main sen- B135 29 0 0 —
pedal position sor)
sensor Sub sen- Fully closed: 1.0 Fully closed: 1.0
B135 31 —
sor signal Fully opened: 3.5 Fully opened: 3.5
Sub power
B135 22 5 5 —
supply
Ground
(Sub sen- B135 30 0 0 —
sor)
Signal (+) B136 19 — 2.7 — 2.9 —
Front oxygen
Signal (–) B136 18 — 2.35 — 2.25 —
(A/F) sensor
Shield B136 9 0 0 —
Rear oxygen Signal B136 20 0 0 — 0.9 —
sensor Shield B136 9 0 0 —
Front oxygen Signal 1 B136 6 10 — 13 1 — 14 Duty waveform
(A/F) sensor
heater Signal 2 B136 5 10 — 13 1 — 14 Duty waveform
Rear oxygen sensor heater
B135 6 10 — 13 1 — 14 Duty waveform
signal
Engine coolant temperature
B137 22 1.0 — 1.4 1.0 — 1.4 After engine is warmed up.
sensor
CVT model
Cranking: 8 — 14
Starter switch B136 16 0 0 MT model
Cranking with the clutch
pedal pressed: 8 — 14
ON: 0.5 or less ON: 0.5 or less
Starter relay control B135 26 —
OFF: 10 — 13 OFF: 12 — 14
Ignition switch B136 30 10 — 13 12 — 14 —
CVT model: Switch is ON
when select lever is in “P”
ON: 0 range or “N” range.
Neutral position switch B136 35
OFF: 12±0.5 MT model: Switch is ON
when the shift lever is in
neutral.
Delivery (test) mode switch B136 34 10 — 13 13 — 14 When fuse is installed: 0
Signal B137 2 2.5 2.5 —
Knock sensor
Shield B137 8 0 0 —
Ignition switch “OFF”: 10
Back-up power supply B136 2 10 — 13 12 — 14
— 13
Control module power sup- B137 7 10 — 13 12 — 14 —
ply B136 1 10 — 13 12 — 14 —
#1 B134 21 0 0 or 5 Waveform
#2 B134 22 0 0 or 5 Waveform
Ignition control
#3 B134 31 0 0 or 5 Waveform
#4 B134 32 0 0 or 5 Waveform

EN(H4SO)(diag)-18
11LE_US.book 19 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Engine Control Module (ECM) I/O Signal

ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Termi- Signal (V)

Connector
Description nal Ignition SW ON Engine ON Note
No.
No. (engine OFF) (idling)
#1 B134 10 10 — 13 1 — 14 Waveform
#2 B134 11 10 — 13 1 — 14 Waveform
Fuel injector
#3 B134 12 10 — 13 1 — 14 Waveform
#4 B134 13 10 — 13 1 — 14 Waveform
ON: 0.5 or less ON: 0.5 or less
Fuel pump relay control B136 33 —
OFF: 10 — 13 OFF: 12 — 14
ON: 0.5 or less ON: 0.5 or less
Radiator fan relay 1 control B135 11 —
OFF: 10 — 13 OFF: 12 — 14
ON: 0.5 or less ON: 0.5 or less
Radiator fan relay 2 control B135 12 —
OFF: 10 — 13 OFF: 12 — 14
Self-shutoff control B135 13 0.5 or less 0.5 or less —
Light “ON”: 1 or less
Malfunction indicator light B135 33 — —
Light “OFF”: 10 — 14
Engine speed output B135 15 — 0 — 13 or more Waveform
Oil temperature sensor sig-
B137 21 1.0 — 1.4 1.0 — 1.4 After engine is warmed up.
nal
ON: 1 or less ON: 1 or less
Purge control solenoid valve B137 6 Duty waveform
OFF: 10 — 13 OFF: 12 — 14
Signal 1 B134 8 0 or 10 — 13 0 or 12 — 14 Waveform
Signal 2 B134 9 0 or 10 — 13 0 or 12 — 14 Waveform
EGR valve
Signal 3 B134 20 0 or 10 — 13 0 or 12 — 14 Waveform
Signal 4 B134 30 0 or 10 — 13 0 or 12 — 14 Waveform
Power steering oil pressure ON: 1 or less ON: 1 or less
B137 28 —
switch OFF: 10 — 13 OFF: 12 — 14
Oil level switch B136 26 0 0 Oil level LOW: 10 — 14
Oil switching Signal (+) B134 7 0 Duty waveform Drive frequency: 300 Hz
solenoid valve
RH Signal (–) B134 15 0 0 —
Oil switching Signal (+) B134 5 0 Duty waveform Drive frequency: 300 Hz
solenoid valve
LH Signal (–) B134 14 0 0 —
Variable valve lift diagnosis
B137 14 0 0 —
oil pressure switch RH
Variable valve lift diagnosis
B137 13 0 0 —
oil pressure switch LH
Manifold absolute pressure
B137 20 3.4 — 3.8 1.4 — 1.8 —
sensor
Signal B136 22 — 0.3 — 4.5 —
Air flow sensor Shield B136 10 0 0 —
Ground B136 11 0 0 —
Intake air temperature sen-
B136 31 0.3 — 4.6 0.3 — 4.6 —
sor signal
1 or less ←→ 4 or
Immobilizer communication B135 25 1 or less ←→ 4 or more —
more
1 or less ←→ 4 or
SSM communication B135 14 1 or less ←→ 4 or more —
more
B134 19 5 5 —
Sensor power supply
B135 22 5 5 —

EN(H4SO)(diag)-19
11LE_US.book 20 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Engine Control Module (ECM) I/O Signal

ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Termi- Signal (V)

Connector
Description nal Ignition SW ON Engine ON Note
No.
No. (engine OFF) (idling)
B134 29 0 0 —
Sensor
B135 30 0 0 —
Engine 1 B134 6 0 0 —
Engine 2 B134 4 0 0 —
Ground
Engine 3 B134 3 0 0 —
Engine 4 B137 1 0 0 —
Engine 5 B137 3 0 0 —
Body B136 4 0 0 —
When clutch pedal is When clutch pedal is
depressed: 0 depressed: 0
Clutch switch B135 9 —
When clutch pedal is When clutch pedal is
released: 10 — 13 released: 12 — 14
When brake pedal is When brake pedal is
Brake switch 1 depressed: 0 depressed: 0
B136 15 —
(brake switch) When brake pedal is When brake pedal is
released: 10 — 13 released: 12 — 14
When brake pedal is When brake pedal is
Brake switch 2 depressed: 10 — 13 depressed: 12 — 14
B136 3 —
(stop light switch) When brake pedal is When brake pedal is
released: 0 released: 0
ON: 0 ON: 0
Cruise control main switch B136 13 —
OFF: 5 OFF: 5
When operating
When operating noth- nothing: 3.5 — 4.5
ing: 3.5 — 4.5 When operating
When operating RES/ RES/ACC: 2.5 —
Cruise control command ACC: 2.5 — 3.5 3.5
B136 12 —
switch When operating SET/ When operating
COAST: 0.5 — 1.5 SET/COAST: 0.5 —
When operating CAN- 1.5
CEL: 0 — 0.5 When operating
CANCEL: 0 — 0.5
Ambient temperature:
Fuel temperature sensor B136 23 2.5 — 3.8 2.5 — 3.8
25°C (77°F)
Value after removing fuel
Fuel tank pressure sensor B136 21 2.3 — 2.7 2.3 — 2.7 filler cap and installing
again
ON: 1 or less ON: 1 or less
Drain valve B135 4 —
OFF: 10 — 13 OFF: 12 — 14
CAN commu- (Hi) B136 17 2.5 — 3.5 2.5 — 3.5 Waveform
nication (Lo) B136 28 1.5 — 2.5 1.5 — 2.5 Waveform
Input/output name:
• Crankshaft position sensor
• Camshaft position sensor
Measuring condition:
• After warming-up

EN(H4SO)(diag)-20
11LE_US.book 21 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Engine Control Module (ECM) I/O Signal

ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

• At idling

CRANKSHAFT
POSITION SENSOR 0

ONE CRANKSHAFT ROTATION

CAMSHAFT
POSITION SENSOR 0

10 ms

5V ONE CAMSHAFT ROTATION

EN-07430

EN(H4SO)(diag)-21
11LE_US.book 22 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Engine Control Module (ECM) I/O Signal

ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

F/B FUSE No. 4

DATA LINK
M/B FUSE No. 12 CONNECTOR

CVT

CVT

MT
C2 B9
MT
STARTER RELAY
CLUTCH
SWITCH
IGNITION SWITCH
B26
F/B FUSE No. 21 CVT
MT

MT
B14

CLUTCH START
SWITCH DELIVERY (TEST)
MODE FUSE

1 C34
NEUTRAL
POSITION SWITCH

1 MT

JOINT
CONNECTOR
C4
MT

INHIBITOR SWITCH C35

CVT CVT
P R N D
MT

B23
CVT

C16
STARTER MOTOR

ACCELERATOR PEDAL
POSITION SENSOR
B21

B31

C30
F/B FUSE No. 12

M/B FUSE No. 20

B29
FUEL
PUMP B22
RELAY
C33

FUEL
PUMP FUEL TANK
C21
PRESSURE
SENSOR

POWER STEERING
OIL PRESSURE B30 JOINT
SWITCH CONNECTOR
D28

2 3 4

EN-08626

EN(H4SO)(diag)-22
11LE_US.book 23 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Engine Control Module (ECM) I/O Signal

ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

M/B FUSE No. 16

M/B FUSE No. 13
M/B FUSE No. 15
M/B FUSE No. 14
SENSOR RELAY
A/F, OXYGEN

RELAY
RELAY
MAIN

IG

A21
IGNITION COIL
B13 No. 1

A22
ELECTRONIC IGNITION COIL
THROTTLE 5 No. 2
CONTROL
RELAY
A31
IGNITION COIL
B7 No. 3
B17
A32
IGNITION COIL
No. 4

7
C1

D7
B15

COMBINATION METER
B33
PURGE CONTROL D6
SOLENOID VALVE

A5
A8 OIL SWITCHING
A14 SOLENOID VALVE LH

A7
OIL SWITCHING
A9 A15 SOLENOID VALVE RH

EGR VALVE

A20

VVL DIAGNOSIS
D13
OIL PRESSURE
SWITCH LH
A30

VVL DIAGNOSIS
6 D14
OIL PRESSURE
SWITCH RH

EN-08627

EN(H4SO)(diag)-23
11LE_US.book 24 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Engine Control Module (ECM) I/O Signal

ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

6
4
FUEL INJECTOR A10
No. 1
A18

FUEL INJECTOR A11

A28
No. 2 ELECTRONIC
THROTTLE
A1 CONTROL

A2
FUEL INJECTOR A12
No. 3 A19

FUEL INJECTOR A13

No. 4

MANIFOLD
D20 ABSOLUTE
PRESSURE
SENSOR
B4
DRAIN VALVE

D21
OIL
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR

D22 ENGINE
MASS AIR FLOW &

COOLANT
TEMPERATURE

TEMPERATURE
INTAKE AIR

C31
SENSOR

SENSOR

C11

C10
D2
C22
D8 KNOCK
SENSOR
A29

8 9

EN-08628

EN(H4SO)(diag)-24
11LE_US.book 25 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Engine Control Module (ECM) I/O Signal

ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

BODY INTEGRATED UNIT B25

(IMMOBILIZER)

C17 3
BODY INTEGRATED UNIT FUEL
(CAN COMMUNICATION) C28 C23 TEMPERATURE
SENSOR

OIL LEVEL SWITCH

C13
C26

CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH

C12
B12
MAIN FAN RELAY

C3
STOP LIGHT SWITCH

B11
SUB FAN RELAY

C15
BRAKE SWITCH

C5
8 5
C6
FRONT
OXYGEN C18 D17
CRANKSHAFT
(A/F)
C19 D25 POSITION
SENSOR
SENSOR

C20

REAR D24 CAMSHAFT

OXYGEN POSITION
D30
SENSOR SENSOR
B6 D31

7 C9
9
D3

A3 A4

D1 A6

ENGINE GROUND ENGINE GROUND

EN-08629

EN(H4SO)(diag)-25
11LE_US.book 26 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Engine Condition Data

ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

6. Engine Condition Data

A: ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION
Contents Specifications
17.6 — 40.5 (%): Idling
Engine load
14.7 — 29.8 (%): 2,500 rpm racing

Measuring condition:
• After engine is warmed up.
• Set the select lever in “P” range or “N” range, or the shift lever in neutral.
• Turn the A/C to OFF.
• Turn all the accessory switches to OFF.

EN(H4SO)(diag)-26
11LE_US.book 27 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Data Link Connector

ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

7. Data Link Connector

A: NOTE
This connector is used for Subaru Select Monitor.
CAUTION:
Do not connect any scan tools other than Subaru Select Monitor or general scan tool because the cir-
cuit for Subaru Select Monitor may be damaged.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

EN-07824

Terminal No. Contents Terminal No. Contents

1 Blank 9 Blank
2 Blank 10 Blank
3 Blank 11 Blank
4 Ground 12 Blank
5 Ground 13 Blank
6 CAN communication (Hi) 14 CAN communication (Lo)
7 Subaru Select Monitor signal 15 Blank
8 Blank 16 Power supply

EN(H4SO)(diag)-27
 General Scan Tool
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

8. General Scan Tool

A: OPERATION
1. HOW TO USE GENERAL SCAN TOOL
1) Prepare a scan tool (general scan tool) required
by SAE J1978.
2) Connect the general scan tool to data link con-
nector located in the lower portion of the instrument
panel (on the driver’s side).

EN-07712

3) Using the general scan tool, call up each data.

General scan tool functions consist of:
(1) MODE $01: Current powertrain diagnostic
data
(2) MODE $02: Powertrain freeze frame data
(3) MODE $03: Emission-related powertrain
DTC
(4) MODE $04: Clear/Reset emission-related
diagnostic information
(5) MODE $06: Request on-board monitoring
test results for intermittently monitored systems
(6) MODE $07: Request on-board monitoring
test results for continuously monitored systems
(7) MODE $09: Request vehicle information
4) Read out the data according to repair proce-
dures. (For detailed operation procedure, refer to
the general scan tool operation manual.)
NOTE:
For details concerning DTC, refer to “List of Diag-
nostic Trouble Code (DTC)”. <Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-75, List of Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-28
11LE_US.book 29 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Scan Tool

ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

2. MODE $01: (CURRENT POWERTRAIN DIAGNOSTIC DATA)

Refer to data denoting the current operating condition of analog input/output, digital input/output or the pow-
ertrain system.
A list of the support data and PID (Parameter Identification) codes are shown in the following table.
PID Data Unit of measure
Number of emission-related powertrain DTC, and malfunction indicator light status and diag-
$01 —
nosis support information
$03 Fuel system control status —
$04 Calculated engine load value %
$05 Engine coolant temperature °C
$06 Short term fuel trim %
$07 Long term fuel trim %
$0B Intake manifold absolute pressure kPa
$0C Engine speed rpm
$0D Vehicle speed MPH
$0E Ignition timing advance °
$0F Intake air temperature °C
$10 Intake air amount g/s
$11 Throttle valve opening angle %
$13 Air fuel ratio sensor —
Oxygen sensor output voltage and short term fuel trim associated with oxygen sensor (Bank 1
$15 V and %
Sensor 2)
$1C Supporting OBD system —
$1F Elapsed time after starting the engine sec
$21 Travel distance after the malfunction indicator light illuminates miles
$24 A/F value and A/F sensor output voltage (Bank 1 Sensor 1) – and V
$2C Target EGR %
$2D EGR deviation %
$2E Evaporative purge %
$2F Fuel level %
$30 Number of warm ups after DTC clear —
$31 Travel distance after DTC clear miles
$32 Fuel tank pressure Pa
$33 Barometric pressure kPa
$34 A/F value and A/F sensor current (Bank 1 Sensor 1) – and mA
$3C Catalyst temperature #1 °C
$41 Diagnostic monitor of each drive cycle —
$42 ECM power voltage V
$43 Absolute load %
$44 A/F target lambda —
$45 Relative throttle opening angle %
$46 Ambient temperature °C
$47 Absolute throttle opening angle 2 %
$49 Absolute accelerator opening angle 1 %
$4A Absolute accelerator opening angle 2 %
$4C Target throttle opening angle %
$4D Engine operating time while malfunction indicator lit min
$4E Elapsed time after DTC clear min
$51 Fuel used —
$5A Relative accelerator opening angle %
$65 Neutral status —

EN(H4SO)(diag)-29
 General Scan Tool
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

NOTE:
Refer to general scan tool manufacturer’s instruction manual to access generic OBD-II PIDs (MODE $01).
3. MODE $02 (POWERTRAIN FREEZE FRAME DATA)
Refer to data denoting the operating condition when trouble is detected by on-board diagnosis system.
A list of the support data and PID (Parameter Identification) codes are shown in the following table.
PID Data Unit of measure
$02 DTC that caused the freeze frame data storage required by CARB —
$03 Fuel system control status —
$04 Calculated engine load value %
$05 Engine coolant temperature °C
$06 Short term fuel trim (Bank 1 Sensor 1) %
$07 Long term fuel trim (Bank 1 Sensor 1) %
$0B Intake manifold absolute pressure kPa
$0C Engine speed rpm
$0D Vehicle speed MPH
$0E Ignition timing advance °
$0F Intake air temperature °C
$10 Intake air amount g/s
$11 Throttle valve opening angle %
$13 Air fuel ratio sensor —
Oxygen sensor output voltage and short term fuel trim associated with oxygen sensor (Bank 1
$15 V and %
Sensor 2)
$1C Supporting OBD system —
$1F Elapsed time after starting the engine sec
$2C Target EGR %
$2D EGR deviation %
$2E Evaporative purge %
$2F Fuel level %
$32 Fuel tank pressure Pa
$33 Barometric pressure kPa
$42 ECM power voltage V
$43 Absolute load %
$44 A/F target lambda —
$45 Relative throttle opening angle %
$46 Ambient temperature °C
$47 Absolute throttle opening angle 2 %
$49 Absolute accelerator opening angle 1 %
$4A Absolute accelerator opening angle 2 %
$4C Target throttle opening angle %
$65 Neutral status —

NOTE:
Refer to general scan tool manufacturer’s instruction manual to access freeze frame data (MODE $02).
4. MODE $03 (EMISSION-RELATED POWERTRAIN DTC)
Refer to “List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)” for information about data denoting emission-related pow-
ertrain DTC. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-75, List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-30
11LE_US.book 31 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Scan Tool

ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

5. MODE $04 (CLEAR/RESET EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION)

Refer to the mode used to clear or reset emission-related diagnostic information (OBD-II trouble diagnostic
information).
NOTE:
• Refer to general scan tool manufacturer’s instruction manual to clear the emission-related diagnostic in-
formation (MODE $04).
• Initial diagnosis of electronic throttle control is performed after memory clearance. Wait for 10 seconds or
more after turning the ignition switch to ON, and then start the engine.
6. MODE $06
Refer to test value of troubleshooting and data of test limit indicated on the support data bit sequence table.
A list of the support data is shown in the following table.
OBDMID TID SID Diagnostic item
$81 $0A
$82 $8D A/F sensor continuity failure (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
$83 $14
$01
$84 $1E
A/F sensor range failure (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
$85 $1E
$86 $20 A/F sensor response failure (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
$87 $0B
Oxygen sensor circuit failure (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
$88 $0B
$07 $0B
$02 $08 $0B Oxygen sensor drop failure (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
$A5 $0B
$05 $10
Oxygen sensor response failure (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
$06 $10
$21 $89 $20 Catalyst deterioration diagnosis (Bank 1)
$31 $8A $FD EGR system diagnosis
$39 $93 $FE Evaporative emission control system (Cap off)
$94 $FE
$3B $95 $FE Evaporative emission control system (0.04 inch leak)
$A6 $FE
$96 $FE
$3C Evaporative emission control system (0.02 inch leak)
$97 $FE
$3D $98 $FE Evaporative emission control system (Purge flow)
$99 $24
A/F sensor heater failure (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
$41 $9A $24
$9B $14 A/F sensor heater characteristics failure (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
$9C $24
$42 Oxygen sensor heater failure (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
$9D $24
$0B $24
$A1 Misfire monitoring (All cylinders)
$0C $24
$0B $24
$A2 Misfire monitoring (#1 cylinder)
$0C $24
$0B $24
$A3 Misfire monitoring (#2 cylinder)
$0C $24
$0B $24
$A4 Misfire monitoring (#3 cylinder)
$0C $24
$0B $24
$A5 Misfire monitoring (#4 cylinder)
$0C $24

EN(H4SO)(diag)-31
11LE_US.book 32 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Scan Tool

ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

7. MODE $07
Refer to the data of DTC (pending code) for troubleshooting result about emission in the first time.
8. MODE $09
Refer to data of vehicle specification (V.I.N., calibration ID, diagnosis frequency etc.).

EN(H4SO)(diag)-32
11LE_US.book 33 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Subaru Select Monitor

ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

9. Subaru Select Monitor

A: OPERATION
1. HOW TO USE SUBARU SELECT MONITOR
NOTE:
For detailed operation procedures, refer to “PC application help for Subaru Select Monitor”.

EN(H4SO)(diag)-33
11LE_US.book 34 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Subaru Select Monitor

ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

2. READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE (NORMAL MODE)

NOTE:
• For detailed operation procedures, refer to “PC application help for Subaru Select Monitor”.
• A list of the support data is shown in the following table.
• *: For models without cruise control, the brake switch signal does not change.
Unit of mea-
Contents Display Note (at idling)
sure
Engine load Engine Load % 21.0%
85°C or 185°F or more
Engine coolant temperature signal Coolant Temp. °C or °F
(after warm-up)
A/F correction #1 A/F Correction #1 % –0.8%
A/F learning #1 A/F Learning #1 % 0.0%
200 — 300 mmHg,
mmHg, kPa,
Intake manifold absolute pressure Mani. Absolute Pressure 26.7 — 40 kPa, 7.8 — 11.8 inHg
inHg or psig
or 3.8 — 5.8 psig
700 rpm (Agree with the
Engine speed signal Engine Speed rpm
tachometer indication)
Meter vehicle speed signal Vehicle Speed km/h or MPH 0 km/h or 0 MPH (at parking)
Ignition timing signal Ignition Timing deg 14 — 16 deg
Intake air temperature signal Intake Air Temp. °C or °F (Ambient air temperature)
Intake air amount Mass Air Flow g/s or lb/m 2.5 g/s or 0.33 lb/m
Throttle opening angle signal Throttle Opening Angle % 2.0%
Rear oxygen sensor voltage Rear O2 Sensor V 0.1 — 0.7 V
Battery voltage Battery Voltage V 12 — 14 V
Mass air flow voltage Air Flow Sensor Voltage V 1.26 V
Injection 1 pulse width Fuel Injection #1 Pulse ms 2.82 ms
mmHg, kPa,
Atmospheric pressure signal Atmosphere Pressure (Atmospheric pressure)
inHg or psig
mmHg, kPa, (Air intake absolute pressure –
Intake manifold relative pressure Mani. Relative Pressure
inHg or psig Atmospheric pressure)
Learned ignition timing Learned Ignition Timing deg 0 deg
Acceleration opening angle signal Accel. Opening Angle % 0.0%
Fuel temperature signal Fuel Temp. °C or °F +20°C or +68°F
Purge control solenoid duty ratio CPC Valve Duty Ratio % 0 — 3%
Number of EGR steps No. of EGR steps STEP 0 STEP
A/F sensor current value 1 A/F Sensor #1 Current mA –0.2 — 0.2 mA
A/F sensor resistance value 1 A/F Sensor #1 Resistance Ω 32 Ω
A/F sensor output lambda 1 A/F Sensor #1 — 1.0
A/F correction #3 A/F Correction #3 % 0.3%
A/F learning #3 A/F Learning #3 % 0.00%
Throttle motor duty Throttle Motor Duty % –15%
Throttle motor voltage Throttle Motor Voltage V (Battery voltage)
Sub throttle sensor voltage Sub-Throttle Sensor V 1.52 V
Main throttle sensor voltage Main-Throttle Sensor V 0.66 V
Sub accelerator sensor voltage Sub-Accelerator Sensor V 0.68 V
Main acceleration sensor voltage Main-Accelerator Sensor V 0.68 V
Memory vehicle speed Memorized Cruise Speed km/h or MPH 0 km/h or 0 MPH
Fuel level sensor signal Fuel level resistance Ω 2 — 96 Ω
Engine oil temperature Oil Temperature °C ≥ 85°C (after warm-up)
Oil switching solenoid valve duty RH OSV Duty R % 16.9%
Oil switching solenoid valve duty LH OSV Duty L % 16.9%
Oil switching solenoid valve current RH OSV Current R mA 192 mA
Oil switching solenoid valve current LH OSV Current L mA 192 mA

EN(H4SO)(diag)-34
11LE_US.book 35 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Subaru Select Monitor

ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Unit of mea-
Contents Display Note (at idling)
sure
Variable valve lift lift mode VVL Lift Mode — 1
#1 cylinder roughness monitor Roughness Monitor #1 — 0
#2 cylinder roughness monitor Roughness Monitor #2 — 0
#3 cylinder roughness monitor Roughness Monitor #3 — 0
#4 cylinder roughness monitor Roughness Monitor #4 — 0
Knock sensor correction Knocking Correction deg 0.0 deg
mmHg, kPa, +7.7 mmHg, +1.1 kPa, +0.31
Fuel tank pressure signal Fuel Tank Pressure
inHg or psig inHg or +0.15 psig
AT vehicle ID signal AT Vehicle ID Signal — ON/OFF
D-check require Flag D-check Require Flag — OFF
Delivery Mode Connector — OFF
Delivery (test) mode terminal
(Test Mode Connector)
Neutral position switch signal Neutral Position Switch — ON
Soft idle switch signal Idle Switch Signal — ON
Ignition switch signal Ignition Switch — ON
Power steering switch signal P/S Switch — OFF (when OFF)
Air conditioning switch signal A/C Switch — OFF (when OFF)
Starter switch signal Starter Switch — OFF
Rear oxygen monitor Rear O2 Rich Signal — Rich/Lean
Knocking signal Knocking Signal — OFF
Crankshaft position sensor signal Crankshaft Position Sig. — ON
Camshaft position sensor signal Camshaft Position Sig. — ON
Rear defogger switch signal Rear Defogger SW — OFF (when OFF)
Blower fan switch signal Blower Fan SW — OFF (when OFF)
Light switch signal Light Switch — OFF (when OFF)
Radiator fan relay 1 signal Radiator Fan Relay #1 — OFF (when OFF)
Radiator fan relay 2 signal Radiator Fan Relay #2 — OFF (when OFF)
Fuel pump relay signal Fuel Pump Relay — ON output
Drain valve signal Vent. Solenoid Valve — OFF output
Variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure
Eng. Oil Press. SW 1 — ON
switch signal 1
Variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure
Eng. Oil Press. SW 2 — ON
switch signal 2
AT coordinate retard angle demand signal Retard Signal from AT — OFF
AT coordinate fuel cut demand signal Fuel Cut signal from AT — OFF
Vehicle dynamics control (VDC) torque
Ban of Torque Down — ON
down prohibition output
Vehicle dynamics control (VDC) torque
Request Torque Down VDC — OFF
down demand
Allowed
AT coordinate permission signal Torque permission signal —
(prohibited on MT vehicles)
Electronic throttle control motor relay signal ETC Motor Relay — ON
Clutch switch signal Clutch Switch — OFF (when OFF)
Stop light switch signal Stop Light Switch — OFF (when OFF)
SET/COAST switch signal SET/COAST Switch — OFF (when OFF)
RES/ACC switch signal RESUME/ACCEL Switch — OFF (when OFF)
Brake switch signal* Brake Switch — OFF (when OFF)
Main switch signal Main Switch — OFF (when OFF)
Cruise control cancel switch signal CC Cancel SW — OFF (when OFF)
Malfunction indicator light signal MIL On Flag — OFF (when unlit)
Oil level switch Oil level switch — HIGH level

EN(H4SO)(diag)-35
11LE_US.book 36 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Subaru Select Monitor

ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

3. READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE (OBD MODE)

NOTE:
• For detailed operation procedures, refer to “PC application help for Subaru Select Monitor”.
• A list of the support data is shown in the following table.
Unit of mea-
Contents Display Note (at idling)
sure
Number of diagnosis code Number of Diag. Code: 0 —
Condition of malfunction indicator light MI(MIL) OFF —
Monitoring test of misfire Misfire monitoring (Supp) YES —
Monitoring test of misfire Misfire monitoring (Rdy) YES —
Fuel system monitoring
Monitoring test of fuel system YES —
(Supp)
Monitoring test of fuel system Fuel system monitoring (Rdy) YES —
Component monitoring
Monitoring test of comprehensive component YES —
(Supp)
Monitoring test of comprehensive component Component monitoring (Rdy) YES —
Test of catalyst Catalyst Diagnosis (Supp) YES —
Test of catalyst Catalyst Diagnosis (Rdy) NO —
Test of heating-type catalyst Heated catalyst (Supp) NO —
Test of heating-type catalyst Heated catalyst (Rdy) N/A —
Evaporative purge system
Test of evaporative emission purge control system YES —
(Supp)
Evaporative purge system
Test of evaporative emission purge control system NO —
(Rdy)
Secondary air system test Secondary air system (Supp) NO —
Secondary air system test Secondary air system (Rdy) N/A —
Test of air conditioning system refrigerant A/C system refrigerant (Supp) NO —
Test of air conditioning system refrigerant A/C system refrigerant (Rdy) N/A —
Test of oxygen sensor Oxygen sensor (Supp) YES —
Test of oxygen sensor Oxygen sensor (Rdy) NO —
Test of oxygen sensor heater O2 Heater Diagnosis (Supp) YES —
Test of oxygen sensor heater O2 Heater Diagnosis (Rdy) NO —
Test of EGR system EGR system (Supp) YES —
Test of EGR system EGR system (Rdy) NO —
Air fuel ratio control system for bank 1 Fuel system for Bank 1 Cl_normal —
Engine load data Calculated load value 23.0 %
Engine coolant temperature signal Coolant Temp. 92 °C
Short term fuel trim by front oxygen (A/F) sensor
Short term fuel trim B1 –0.8 %
(Bank 1)
Long term fuel trim by front oxygen (A/F) sensor
Long term fuel trim B1 0.0 %
(Bank 1)
Intake manifold absolute pressure signal Mani. Absolute Pressure 28 kPa
Engine speed signal Engine Speed 700 rpm
Vehicle speed signal Vehicle Speed 0 km/h
#1 Cylinder ignition timing Ignition timing adv. #1 16.0 °
Intake air temperature signal Intake Air Temp. 36 °C
Intake air amount Mass Air Flow 2.7 g/s
Throttle position signal Throttle Opening Angle 13 %
Oxygen sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 2) Oxygen sensor #12 0.7 V
A/F correction (Bank 1 Sensor 2) Short term fuel trim #12 0.0 %
On-board diagnostic system OBD System OBD/OBD2 —
Front oxygen (A/F) sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 1) Oxygen sensor #11 Supported —

EN(H4SO)(diag)-36
11LE_US.book 37 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Subaru Select Monitor

ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Unit of mea-
Contents Display Note (at idling)
sure
Oxygen sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 2) Oxygen sensor #12 Supported —
Elapsed time after engine start Time Since Engine Start — sec
Travel distance after the malfunction indicator light
Lighted MI lamp history — km
illuminates
A/F lambda signal (Bank 1 Sensor 1) A/F Sensor #11 1.001 —
A/F sensor output signal (Bank 1 Sensor 1) A/F Sensor #11 2.79 V
Target EGR Commanded EGR — %
EGR deviation EGR Error — %
Evaporative purge Commanded Evap Purge 0 %
Fuel level signal Fuel Level — %
Number of warm ups after DTC clear Number of warm-ups — —
Travel distance after DTC clear Meter since DTC cleared — km
Fuel tank pressure signal Fuel Tank Pressure –32.00 Pa
Atmospheric pressure signal Atmosphere Pressure Atmospheric pressure kPa
A/F lambda signal (Bank 1 Sensor 1) A/F Sensor #11 1.001 —
A/F sensor current (Bank 1 Sensor 1) A/F Sensor #11 0.00 mA
Catalyst temperature #1 Catalyst Temperature #11 — °C
Monitoring test of misfire Misfire monitoring (Enable) YES —
Monitoring test of misfire Misfire monitoring (Comp) NO —
Fuel system monitoring
Monitoring test of fuel system YES —
(Enable)
Fuel system monitoring
Monitoring test of fuel system NO —
(Comp)
Component monitoring
Monitoring test of comprehensive component YES —
(Enable)
Component monitoring
Monitoring test of comprehensive component NO —
(Comp)
Test of catalyst Catalyst Diagnosis (Enable) YES —
Test of catalyst Catalyst Diagnosis (Comp) NO —
Test of heating-type catalyst Heated catalyst (Enable) N/A —
Test of heating-type catalyst Heated catalyst (Comp) N/A —
Evaporative purge system
Test of evaporative emission purge control system YES —
(Enable)
Evaporative purge system
Test of evaporative emission purge control system NO —
(Comp)
Secondary air system
Secondary air system test N/A —
(Enable)
Secondary air system test Secondary air system (Comp) N/A —
A/C system refrigerant
Test of air conditioning system refrigerant N/A —
(Enable)
A/C system refrigerant
Test of air conditioning system refrigerant N/A —
(Comp)
Test of oxygen sensor Oxygen sensor (Enable) YES —
Test of oxygen sensor Oxygen sensor (Comp) NO —
Test of oxygen sensor heater O2 Heater Diagnosis (Enable) YES —
Test of oxygen sensor heater O2 Heater Diagnosis (Comp) NO —
Test of EGR system EGR system (Enable) YES —
Test of EGR system EGR system (Comp) NO —
ECM power supply voltage Control module voltage 13.789 V
Absolute load Absolute Load Value 22 %
A/F target lambda Target Equivalence Ratio 0.976 —

EN(H4SO)(diag)-37
11LE_US.book 38 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Subaru Select Monitor

ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Unit of mea-
Contents Display Note (at idling)
sure
Relative throttle opening angle Relative Throttle Pos. 2 %
Ambient temperature Ambient Temperature Ambient air temperature °C
Absolute throttle opening angle 2 Absolute Throttle Pos.#2 32 %
Absolute accelerator opening angle 1 Accelerator Pedal Pos.#1 13 %
Absolute accelerator opening angle 2 Accelerator Pedal Pos.#2 13 %
Target throttle opening angle Target Throt. Act. Cont. 0 %
Engine operating time while malfunction indicator light
Time while MIL lighted — min
lit
Elapsed time after DTC clear Time since DTC cleared — min
Type of fuel Type of fuel GAS —
Relative acceleration opening angle Relative Accelera. Pos. 0 %
AT drive status/MT gear sta-
Neutral condition NEUT —
tus

EN(H4SO)(diag)-38
11LE_US.book 39 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Subaru Select Monitor

ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

4. READ FREEZE FRAME DATA FOR ENGINE (OBD MODE)

NOTE:
• For detailed operation procedures, refer to “PC application help for Subaru Select Monitor”.
• A list of the support data is shown in the following table.
Description Display Unit of measure
DTCs of freeze frame data Freeze frame data —
Air fuel ratio control system for bank 1 Fuel system for Bank 1 —
Engine load data Calculated load value %
Engine coolant temperature signal Coolant Temp. °C or °F
Short term fuel trim by front oxygen (A/F) sensor Short term fuel trim B1 %
Long term fuel trim by front oxygen (A/F) sensor Long term fuel trim B1 %
Intake manifold absolute pressure signal Mani. Absolute Pressure mmHg, kPa, inHg or psig
Engine speed signal Engine Speed rpm
Vehicle speed signal Vehicle Speed km/h or MPH
Ignition timing advance for #1 cylinder Ignition timing adv. #1 °
Intake air temperature signal Intake Air Temp. °C or °F
Intake air amount Mass Air Flow g/s or lb/m
Throttle position signal Throttle Opening Angle %
Oxygen sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 2) Oxygen sensor #12 V
A/F correction (Bank 1 Sensor 2) Short term fuel trim #12 %
On-board diagnostic system OBD System —
Front oxygen (A/F) sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 1) Oxygen sensor #11 —
Oxygen sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 2) Oxygen sensor #12 —
Elapsed time after engine start Time Since Engine Start sec
Target EGR Commanded EGR %
EGR deviation EGR Error %
Evaporative purge Commanded Evap Purge %
Fuel level signal Fuel Level %
Fuel tank pressure signal Fuel Tank Pressure mmHg, kPa, inHg or psig
Atmospheric pressure Atmosphere Pressure mmHg, kPa, inHg or psig
ECM power supply voltage Control module voltage V
Absolute load Absolute Load Value %
A/F target lambda Target Equivalence Ratio —
Relative throttle opening angle Relative Throttle Pos. %
Ambient temperature Ambient Temperature °C or °F
Absolute throttle opening angle 2 Absolute Throttle Pos.#2 %
Absolute accelerator opening angle 1 Accelerator Pedal Pos.#1 %
Absolute accelerator opening angle 2 Accelerator Pedal Pos.#2 %
Target throttle opening angle Target Throt. Act. Cont. %
Neutral condition AT drive status/MT gear status —

5. V.I.N REGISTRATION
1) On «Main Menu» display, select {Each System Check}.
2) On «System Selection Menu» display, select {Engine Control System}.
3) Click the [OK] button after the information of engine type has been displayed.
4) On the «Engine Diagnosis» display, select {Entry VIN}.
5) Perform the procedures shown on the display screen.

EN(H4SO)(diag)-39
 Read Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

10.Read Diagnostic Trouble

Code (DTC)
A: OPERATION
1. SUBARU SELECT MONITOR
NOTE:
• For detailed operation procedures, refer to “PC
application help for Subaru Select Monitor”.
• For details concerning DTC, refer to “List of Diag-
nostic Trouble Code (DTC)”. <Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-75, List of Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
2. GENERAL SCAN TOOL
Refer to data denoting emission-related powertrain
DTC.
For details concerning DTC, refer to “List of Diag-
nostic Trouble Code (DTC)”. <Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-75, List of Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
NOTE:
Refer to general scan tool manufacturer’s instruc-
tion manual to access powertrain DTC (MODE
$03).

EN(H4SO)(diag)-40
 Inspection Mode
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

11.Inspection Mode
A: PROCEDURE
Perform the diagnosis shown in the following DTC table.
When performing the diagnosis not listed in “List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)”, refer to the item on the
drive cycle. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-46, Drive Cycle.>
DTC Item Condition
P0031 HO2S Heater Control Circuit Low (Bank 1 Sensor 1) —
P0032 HO2S Heater Control Circuit High (Bank 1 Sensor 1) —
P0037 HO2S Heater Control Circuit Low (Bank 1 Sensor 2) —
P0038 HO2S Heater Control Circuit High (Bank 1 Sensor 2) —
P0077 Intake Valve Control Solenoid Circuit High (Bank 1) —
P0083 Intake Valve Control Solenoid Circuit High (Bank 2) —
P0102 Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit Low Input —
P0103 Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit High Input —
P0107 Manifold Absolute Pressure/Barometric Pressure Circuit Low Input —
P0108 Manifold Absolute Pressure/Barometric Pressure Circuit High Input —
P0112 Intake Air Temperature Sensor 1 Circuit Low —
P0113 Intake Air Temperature Sensor 1 Circuit High —
P0117 Engine Coolant Temperature Circuit Low —
P0118 Engine Coolant Temperature Circuit High —
P0122 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch “A” Circuit Low —
P0123 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch “A” Circuit High —
P0131 O2 Sensor Circuit Low Voltage (Bank 1 Sensor 1) —
P0132 O2 Sensor Circuit High Voltage (Bank 1 Sensor 1) —
P0137 O2 Sensor Circuit Low Voltage (Bank 1 Sensor 2) —
P0138 O2 Sensor Circuit High Voltage (Bank 1 Sensor 2) —
P0140 O2 Sensor Circuit No Activity Detected (Bank 1 Sensor 2) —
P0182 Fuel Temperature Sensor “A” Circuit Low Input —
P0183 Fuel Temperature Sensor “A” Circuit High Input —
P0197 Engine Oil Temperature Sensor Low —
P0198 Engine Oil Temperature Sensor High —
P0222 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch “B” Circuit Low —
P0223 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch “B” Circuit High —
P0327 Knock Sensor 1 Circuit Low (Bank 1 or Single Sensor) —
P0328 Knock Sensor 1 Circuit High (Bank 1 or Single Sensor) —
P0335 Crankshaft Position Sensor “A” Circuit —
P0336 Crankshaft Position Sensor “A” Circuit Range/Performance —
P0340 Camshaft Position Sensor “A” Circuit (Bank 1 or Single Sensor) —
Camshaft Position Sensor “A” Circuit Range/Performance (Bank 1 or Sin-
P0341 —
gle Sensor)
P0447 Evaporative Emission Control System Vent Control Circuit Open —
P0448 Evaporative Emission Control System Vent Control Circuit Shorted —
P0452 Evaporative Emission Control System Pressure Sensor Low Input —
P0453 Evaporative Emission Control System Pressure Sensor High Input —
P0458 Evaporative Emission System Purge Control Valve Circuit Low —
P0462 Fuel Level Sensor “A” Circuit Low —
P0463 Fuel Level Sensor “A” Circuit High —
P0500 Vehicle Speed Sensor “A” —
P0512 Starter Request Circuit —
P0513 Incorrect Immobilizer Key —

EN(H4SO)(diag)-41
11LE_US.book 42 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Inspection Mode
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

DTC Item Condition

P0604 Internal Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) Error —
P0605 Internal Control Module Read Only Memory (ROM) Error —
P0607 Throttle Control System Circuit Range/Performance —
P0638 Throttle Actuator Control Range/Performance (Bank 1) —
P0700 Transmission Control System (MIL Request) —
P0851 Park/Neutral Switch Input Circuit Low —
P0852 Park/Neutral Switch Input Circuit High —
P1152 O2 Sensor Circuit Range/Performance (Low) (Bank1 Sensor1) —
P1153 O2 Sensor Circuit Range/Performance (High) (Bank1 Sensor1) —
P1160 Return Spring Failure —
P1518 Starter Switch Circuit Low Input —
P1560 Back-Up Voltage Circuit Malfunction —
P1570 Antenna —
P1571 Reference Code Incompatibility —
P1572 IMM Circuit Failure —
P1574 Key Communication Failure —
P1576 EGI Control Module EEPROM —
P1577 IMM Control Module EEPROM —
P1578 Meter Failure —
P2101 Throttle Actuator Control Motor Circuit Range/Performance —
P2102 Throttle Actuator Control Motor Circuit Low —
P2103 Throttle Actuator Control Motor Circuit High —
P2109 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor “A” Minimum Stop Performance —
P2122 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch “D” Circuit Low Input —
P2123 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch “D” Circuit High Input —
P2127 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch “E” Circuit Low Input —
P2128 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch “E” Circuit High Input —
P2135 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch “A”/“B” Voltage Correlation —
P2138 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch “D”/“E” Voltage Correlation —
P2227 Atmospheric Pressure Sensor Range/Performance —
P2228 Barometric Pressure Circuit Low —
P2229 Barometric Pressure Circuit High —

EN(H4SO)(diag)-42
 Inspection Mode
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

1. PREPARATION FOR THE INSPECTION 2. SUBARU SELECT MONITOR

MODE 1) Check that no DTC remains after clearing mem-
1) Check that the battery voltage is 12 V or more ory. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51, Clear Memory
and fuel remains approx. half [20 — 40 2 (5.3 — Mode.>
10.6 US gal, 4.4 — 8.8 Imp gal)]. 2) Warm up the engine.
2) Lift up the vehicle using a garage jack and place 3) Prepare the Subaru Select Monitor kit. <Ref. to
it on rigid racks, or drive the vehicle onto free roll- EN(H4SO)(diag)-8, PREPARATION TOOL, Gen-
ers. eral Description.>
WARNING:
• Before lifting up the vehicle, ensure parking
brake is applied.
• Do not use a pantograph jack in place of a rig-
id rack.
• Secure a rope or wire to the front or rear tow-
ing hooks to prevent the lateral runout of front
wheels.
• Before rotating the wheels, make sure that
there is no one in front of the vehicle. Besides EN-05692
while the wheels are rotating, make sure that no 4) Prepare PC with Subaru Select Monitor in-
one approaches the vehicle front side. stalled.
• Make sure that there is nothing around the 5) Connect the USB cable to SDI (Subaru Diagno-
wheels. For AWD model, pay special attention sis Interface) and USB port on the personal com-
to all four wheels. puter (dedicated port for the Subaru Select
• While servicing, do not depress or release Monitor).
the clutch pedal or accelerator pedal quickly re-
gardless of the engine speed. Quick operation NOTE:
may cause the vehicle to drop off the free roller. The dedicated port for the Subaru Select Monitor
• To prevent the vehicle from slipping due to means the USB port which was used to install the
vibration, do not place anything between rigid Subaru Select Monitor.
rack and the vehicle. 6) Connect the diagnosis cable to SDI.
7) Install the delivery (test) mode fuse (A) of the
fuse box.

(A)

(A)

EN-07555

(B)
EN-00041

(A) Rigid rack

(B) Free roller

EN(H4SO)(diag)-43
 Inspection Mode
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

8) Connect SDI to data link connector located in the 3. GENERAL SCAN TOOL
lower portion of the instrument panel (on the driv- 1) After performing the diagnostics and clearing the
er’s side). memory, check that no DTC remains. <Ref. to
CAUTION: EN(H4SO)(diag)-31, MODE $04 (CLEAR/RESET
Do not connect the scan tools except for Suba- EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMA-
ru Select Monitor and general scan tool. TION), OPERATION, General Scan Tool.>
2) Warm up the engine.
3) Install the delivery (test) mode fuse (A) of the
main fuse box.

(A)

EN-07712

9) Start the PC.

10) Turn the ignition switch to ON (engine OFF)
EN-07555
and run the “PC application for Subaru Select Mon-
itor”. 4) Connect the general scan tool to data link con-
11) On «Main Menu» display, select {Each System nector located in the lower portion of the instrument
Check}. panel (on the driver’s side).
12) On «System Selection Menu» display, select CAUTION:
{Engine Control System}. Do not connect the scan tools except for Suba-
13) Click the [OK] button after the information of ru Select Monitor and general scan tool.
engine type has been displayed.
14) On «Engine Diagnosis» display, select {Dealer
Check Mode Procedure}.
15) When the «Perform Inspection (Dealer Check)
Mode ?» is shown on the screen, click the [Next]
button.
16) Perform subsequent procedures as instructed
on the display screen.
• If trouble still remains in the memory, the corre-
sponding DTC appears on the display screen.
EN-07712
NOTE:
• For detailed operation procedures, refer to 5) Start the engine.
“PC application help for Subaru Select Monitor”. NOTE:
• For details concerning DTC, refer to “List of Di- • Ensure the selector lever is placed in the “P”
agnostic Trouble Code (DTC)”. <Ref. to range before starting. (CVT model)
EN(H4SO)(diag)-75, List of Diagnostic Trouble • Depress the clutch pedal when starting engine.
Code (DTC).> (MT model)
• Release the parking brake. 6) Turn the neutral position switch to ON using se-
• The speed difference between front and rear lect lever or shift lever.
wheels may illuminate the ABS warning light, but 7) Depress the brake pedal to turn the brake switch
this does not indicate a malfunction. When en- ON. (CVT model)
gine control system diagnosis is finished, per- 8) Keep the engine speed in 2,500 — 3,000 rpm
form the VDC memory clearance procedure of range for 40 seconds.
self-diagnosis function. <Ref. to VDC(diag)-25,
Clear Memory Mode.>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-44
 Inspection Mode
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

9) Place the select lever or shift lever in “D” position

(CVT model) or “1st gear” (MT model) and drive the
vehicle at 5 to 10 km/h (3 to 6 MPH).
NOTE:
• For AWD model, release the parking brake.
• The speed difference between front and rear
wheels may illuminate the ABS warning light, but
this does not indicate a malfunction. When engine
control system diagnosis is finished, perform the
VDC memory clearance procedure of self-diagno-
sis function. <Ref. to VDC(diag)-25, Clear Memory
Mode.>
10) Using the general scan tool, check for DTC and
record the result(s).
NOTE:
• For detailed operation procedures, refer to the
general scan tool operation manual.
• For details concerning DTC, refer to “List of Diag-
nostic Trouble Code (DTC)”.
<Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-75, List of Diagnostic
Trouble Code (DTC).>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-45
 Drive Cycle
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

12.Drive Cycle
A: PROCEDURE
It is necessary to perform the drive cycle listed below if DTC is not found in the Inspection Mode. It is possible
to complete diagnosis of the DTC by performing the indicated drive cycle. After the repair for the DTC, per-
form a necessary drive cycle and make sure the function recovers and the DTC is recorded.
1. PREPARATION FOR DRIVE CYCLE
1) Check that the battery voltage is 12 V or more and fuel remains approx. half [20 — 40 2 (5.3 — 10.6 US
gal, 4.4 — 8.8 Imp gal)].
2) After performing the diagnostics and Clear Memory Mode, check that no DTC remains. <Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-51, Clear Memory Mode.>
3) Check the delivery (test) mode fuse is removed.
NOTE:
• Perform the drive cycle after warming up the engine except when the engine coolant temperature at en-
gine start is specified.
• Perform the drive cycle twice if the DTC in the list is marked with *. After completing the first drive cycle,
stop the engine and perform second diagnosis in same condition.
2. DRIVE CYCLE A
DTC Item Condition
Engine coolant temperature at
*P0125 Insufficient Coolant Temperature for Closed Loop Fuel Control
engine start is less than 20°C (68°F).
*P0126 Insufficient Engine Coolant Temperature for Stable Operation —
Coolant Thermostat (Engine Coolant Temperature Below Thermostat Regu-
*P0128 —
lating Temperature)
*P0133 O2 Sensor Circuit Slow Response (Bank 1 Sensor 1) —
*P0141 O2 Sensor Heater Circuit (Bank1 Sensor2) —
Complete diagnosis with drive cycle
*P0171 System Too Lean (Bank 1)
B or C as well.
Complete diagnosis with drive cycle
*P0172 System Too Rich (Bank 1)
B or C as well.
*P0196 Engine Oil Temperature Sensor Circuit Range/Performance —
Complete diagnosis with drive cycle
*P0301 Cylinder 1 Misfire Detected
B or C as well.
Complete diagnosis with drive cycle
*P0302 Cylinder 2 Misfire Detected
B or C as well.
Complete diagnosis with drive cycle
*P0303 Cylinder 3 Misfire Detected
B or C as well.
Complete diagnosis with drive cycle
*P0304 Cylinder 4 Misfire Detected
B or C as well.
*P0420 Catalyst System Efficiency Below Threshold (Bank 1) —
Engine coolant temperature at
*P0442 Evaporative Emission Control System Leak Detected (Small Leak)
engine start is less than 30°C (86°F).
*P0451 Evaporative Emission Control System Pressure Sensor —
Engine coolant temperature at
*P0456 Evaporative Emission Control System Leak Detected (Very Small Leak)
engine start is less than 30°C (86°F).
Engine coolant temperature at
*P0457 Evaporative Emission Control System Leak Detected (Fuel Cap Loose/Off)
engine start is less than 30°C (86°F).
*P0459 Evaporative Emission System Purge Control Valve Circuit High —
P1443 Vent Control Solenoid Valve Function Problem —
Complete diagnosis with drive cycle
*P2096 Post Catalyst Fuel Trim System Too Lean (Bank 1)
B or C as well.
Complete diagnosis with drive cycle
*P2097 Post Catalyst Fuel Trim System Too Rich (Bank 1)
B or C as well.

EN(H4SO)(diag)-46
11LE_US.book 47 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Drive Cycle
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Diagnostic procedure:
1) Drive for 20 minutes or more at a constant speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) or more.
2) Stop the vehicle and idle for one minute.
3. DRIVE CYCLE B
DTC Item Condition
Complete diagnosis with drive
*P0171 System Too Lean (Bank 1)
cycle A or C as well.
Complete diagnosis with drive
*P0172 System Too Rich (Bank 1)
cycle A or C as well.
Complete diagnosis with drive
*P0301 Cylinder 1 Misfire Detected
cycle A or C as well.
Complete diagnosis with drive
*P0302 Cylinder 2 Misfire Detected
cycle A or C as well.
Complete diagnosis with drive
*P0303 Cylinder 3 Misfire Detected
cycle A or C as well.
Complete diagnosis with drive
*P0304 Cylinder 4 Misfire Detected
cycle A or C as well.
*P0464 Fuel Level Sensor Circuit Intermittent —
*P0506 Idle Air Control System RPM Lower Than Expected —
*P0507 Idle Air Control System RPM Higher Than Expected —
Complete diagnosis with drive
*P2096 Post Catalyst Fuel Trim System Too Lean (Bank 1)
cycle A or C as well.
Complete diagnosis with drive
*P2097 Post Catalyst Fuel Trim System Too Rich (Bank 1)
cycle A or C as well.

Diagnostic procedure:
1) Drive at 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more.
2) Stop the vehicle and idle for ten minutes.
4. DRIVE CYCLE C
DTC Item Condition
P0026 Intake Valve Control Solenoid Circuit Range/Performance (Bank 1) —
P0028 Intake Valve Control Solenoid Circuit Range/Performance (Bank 2) —
*P0030 HO2S Heater Control Circuit (Bank 1 Sensor 1) —
*P0068 MAP/MAF - Throttle Position Correlation —
P0076 Intake Valve Control Solenoid Circuit Low (Bank 1) —
P0082 Intake Valve Control Solenoid Circuit Low (Bank 2) —
*P0101 Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit Range/Performance —
P0134 O2 Sensor Circuit No Activity Detected (Bank 1 Sensor 1) —
*P0139 O2 Sensor Circuit Slow Response (Bank 1 Sensor 2) —
Complete diagnosis with drive
*P0171 System Too Lean (Bank 1)
cycle A or B as well.
Complete diagnosis with drive
*P0172 System Too Rich (Bank 1)
cycle A or B as well.
Complete diagnosis with drive
*P0301 Cylinder 1 Misfire Detected
cycle A or B as well.
Complete diagnosis with drive
*P0302 Cylinder 2 Misfire Detected
cycle A or B as well.
Complete diagnosis with drive
*P0303 Cylinder 3 Misfire Detected
cycle A or B as well.
Complete diagnosis with drive
*P0304 Cylinder 4 Misfire Detected
cycle A or B as well.
*P0400 Exhaust Gas Recirculation Flow —

EN(H4SO)(diag)-47
11LE_US.book 48 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Drive Cycle
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

DTC Item Condition

P1492 EGR Solenoid Valve Signal #1 Circuit Malfunction (Low Input) —
P1493 EGR Solenoid Valve Signal #1 Circuit Malfunction (High Input) —
P1494 EGR Solenoid Valve Signal #2 Circuit Malfunction (Low Input) —
P1495 EGR Solenoid Valve Signal #2 Circuit Malfunction (High Input) —
P1496 EGR Solenoid Valve Signal #3 Circuit Malfunction (Low Input) —
P1497 EGR Solenoid Valve Signal #3 Circuit Malfunction (High Input) —
P1498 EGR Solenoid Valve Signal #4 Circuit Malfunction (Low Input) —
P1499 EGR Solenoid Valve Signal #4 Circuit Malfunction (High Input) —
Complete diagnosis with drive
*P2096 Post Catalyst Fuel Trim System Too Lean (Bank 1)
cycle A or B as well.
Complete diagnosis with drive
*P2097 Post Catalyst Fuel Trim System Too Rich (Bank 1)
cycle A or B as well.
Diagnostic procedure:
Drive according to the drive pattern described below.

(H)

(C)
97 (60)

(D) (F) (G)

64 (40)
(B) (E)

(A)
0
50 100 150 (I)

EN-00842

(A) Idle the engine for 10 seconds or (D) Decelerate with fully closed throt- (G) Stop the vehicle with throttle fully
more. tle to 64 km/h (40 MPH) or less. closed.
(B) Accelerate to 97 km/h (60 MPH) (E) Drive for 20 seconds or more at 64 (H) Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
or more within 20 seconds. km/h (40 MPH) or less.
(C) Drive for 20 seconds or more at 97 (F) Accelerate to 97 km/h (60 MPH) (I) Sec.
km/h (60 MPH) or more. or more within 10 seconds.

EN(H4SO)(diag)-48
 Drive Cycle
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

5. DRIVE CYCLE D
DTC Item Condition
*P0181 Fuel Temperature Sensor “A” Circuit Range/Performance —

NOTE:
In drive cycle D, one drive cycle will be established when both the drift diagnosis and stuck diagnosis have
completed.
Diagnostic procedure:
DRIFT DIAGNOSIS
1) Make sure of the items below before starting the engine.
• Engine coolant temperature is less than 30°C (86°F).
• Remaining fuel is 10 2 (2.6 US gal, 2.2 Imp gal) or more.
• Battery voltage is 10.9 V or more.
2) Idle the engine until engine coolant temperature is at least 10°C (18°F) higher than it was when engine
started.
3) After the engine has reached the state of procedure 2), idle the engine for another 5 minutes or more.
STUCK DIAGNOSIS
1) Make sure that the battery voltage is 10.9 V or more.
2) Perform the Clear Memory Mode. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51, Clear Memory Mode.>
3) Drive for approximately 50 2 (13.2 US gal, 11 Imp gal) of fuel.
NOTE:
• It is acceptable to drive the vehicle intermittently.
• Do not disconnect the battery terminals during stuck diagnosis. (Data will be cleared by disconnecting the
battery terminals.)
6. DRIVE CYCLE E
DTC Item Condition
*P0461 Fuel Level Sensor “A” Circuit Range/Performance —

Diagnostic procedure:
1) Make sure that the battery voltage is 10.9 V or more.
2) Perform the Clear Memory Mode. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51, Clear Memory Mode.>
3) Drive for approximately 30 2 (7.9 US gal, 6.6 Imp gal) of fuel.
NOTE:
• It is acceptable to drive the vehicle intermittently.
• Do not disconnect the battery terminals while diagnosing. (Data will be cleared by disconnecting the bat-
tery terminals.)
7. DRIVE CYCLE F
DTC Item Condition
*P0111 Intake Air Temperature Sensor 1 Circuit Range/Performance —

Diagnostic procedure:
1) Make sure that the engine coolant temperature is less than 30°C (86°F).

EN(H4SO)(diag)-49
 Drive Cycle
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

2) Drive according to the drive pattern described below.

(A)

(2) (4) (6)

80 km/h
(50 MPH)

0
(3) (5) (7) (B)
(1)

EN-07588

(A) Vehicle speed (B) Elapsed time

(1) Idle the engine for 10 seconds or (4) Drive for 30 seconds or more at a (6) Drive for 30 seconds or more at a
more after engine start. constant speed of 80 km/h (50 constant speed of 80 km/h (50
MPH) or more. MPH) or more.
(2) Drive for 8 minutes or more at a (5) Stop the vehicle and idle for 30 (7) Stop the vehicle and idle for 30 sec-
constant speed of 80 km/h (50 seconds or more. onds.
MPH) or more.
(3) Stop the vehicle and idle for 30
seconds or more.

NOTE:
• There is no given transition time between idling and cruising.
• Driving at constant speed only on a downhill causes smaller engine load and may result in failure to obtain
a right diagnostic result.
• When the engine stops while performing drive cycle F, perform it again from the state of procedure 1).
8. DRIVE CYCLE H
DTC Item Condition
*P050A Cold Start Idle Air Control System Performance —
*P050B Cold Start Ignition Timing Performance —

Diagnostic procedure:
1) Perform the Clear Memory Mode. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51, Clear Memory Mode.>
2) With the ignition switch ON (engine OFF), read the engine coolant temperature, intake air temperature and
fuel temperature. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-34, READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE (NORMAL MODE),
OPERATION, Subaru Select Monitor.>
3) If the values from step 2) satisfy the following two conditions, idle the engine for one minute.
Condition:
|Engine coolant temperature — Intake air temperature | ≤ 5°C (41°F)
|Engine coolant temperature — Fuel temperature | ≤ 2°C (36°F)
NOTE:
• If the conditions are not satisfied, turn the ignition switch to OFF and wait until the parameters are satisfied.
• For CVT models, hold the select lever to “P” range or “N” range at idling, and for MT models, the shift lever
in the neutral position at idling.

EN(H4SO)(diag)-50
11LE_US.book 51 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Clear Memory Mode

ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

13.Clear Memory Mode

A: OPERATION
1. SUBARU SELECT MONITOR
NOTE:
• Initial diagnosis of electronic throttle control is
performed after memory clearance. Wait for 10
seconds or more after turning the ignition switch to
ON, and then start the engine.
• For detailed operation procedures, refer to “PC
application help for Subaru Select Monitor”.
2. GENERAL SCAN TOOL
For clear memory procedures using the general
scan tool, refer to “General Scan Tool Instruction
Manual”.
NOTE:
Initial diagnosis of electronic throttle control is per-
formed after memory clearance. Wait for 10 sec-
onds or more after turning the ignition switch to ON,
and then start the engine.

EN(H4SO)(diag)-51
 System Operation Check Mode
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

14.System Operation Check

Mode
A: OPERATION
CAUTION:
After executing the system operation check
mode, execute the Clear Memory Mode. <Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-51, OPERATION, Clear Memo-
ry Mode.>
NOTE:
For detailed operation procedures, refer to “PC ap-
plication help for Subaru Select Monitor”.

EN(H4SO)(diag)-52
 Malfunction Indicator Light
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

15.Malfunction Indicator Light

A: PROCEDURE
1. Activation of malfunction indicator light. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-54, ACTIVATION OF MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT,
Malfunction Indicator Light.>
↓
2. Malfunction indicator light does not come on. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-55, MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT
COME ON, Malfunction Indicator Light.>
↓
3. Malfunction indicator light does not go off <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-57, MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT GO
OFF, Malfunction Indicator Light.>
↓
4. Malfunction indicator light does not blink <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-58, MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT BLINK,
Malfunction Indicator Light.>
↓
5. Malfunction indicator light remains blinking <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-60, MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT REMAINS
BLINKING, Malfunction Indicator Light.>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-53
 Malfunction Indicator Light
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

B: ACTIVATION OF MALFUNCTION
(1)
INDICATOR LIGHT
(2)
1) When the ignition switch is turned to ON (engine
OFF), the malfunction indicator light (A) in the com- (3)
bination meter illuminates.
(4)
NOTE: (6)
If the malfunction indicator light does not illuminate,
perform diagnostics of the malfunction indicator (5)

light circuit or the combination meter circuit. <Ref. EN-01680

to EN(H4SO)(diag)-55, MALFUNCTION INDICA-
TOR LIGHT DOES NOT COME ON, Malfunction (1) ON
Indicator Light.> (2) OFF
(3) Ignition switch ON
(4) Engine start
(5) Misfire start
(6) 1 second
CHECK
ENGINE

4) Install the delivery (test) mode fuse (A) with igni-

tion switch to OFF.
CHECK
ENGINE (A)
EN-07714
(A)
2) After starting the engine, the malfunction indica-
tor light goes out. If it does not go off, any of the en-
gine and emission control system has malfunction.
(1)
(3)

(4)
EN-07555
(2)
(3) (1) When the ignition switch is turned to ON
(engine OFF), the malfunction indicator light il-
(4) luminates.
(5) (2) After the engine starts, malfunction indicator
(6)
light blinks in a cycle of 0.5 Hz. (During diagno-
EN-01679 sis)
(3) Malfunction indicator light blinks at a cycle of
(1) No faulty 3 Hz after diagnosis if there is no trouble. Mal-
(2) Trouble occurs function indicator light illuminates if faulty.
(3) ON
(4) OFF
(1)
(5) Ignition switch ON
(6) Engine start (2)

3) If the diagnostic system detects a misfire which (4)

could damage the catalyst, the malfunction indica-
tor light will blink at a cycle of 1 Hz. (3)

EN-01681

(1) ON
(2) OFF
(3) Ignition switch ON
(4) 1 second

EN(H4SO)(diag)-54
 Malfunction Indicator Light
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

C: MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT COME ON

DIAGNOSIS:
The malfunction indicator light circuit is open or shorted.
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
When the ignition switch is turned to ON (engine OFF), malfunction indicator light does not illuminate.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

B72 IGNITION SWITCH BATTERY

F/B No. 5 SBF-5 MAIN SBF
1 3

E
19

COMBINATION
METER
i10
6

M/B
DELIVERY
(TEST) MODE
FUSE No. 36 B138
1 2
*
: TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL
i3
* * ARRANGEMENT
18

B38
C34
B33

C4

B : B135 C : B136 ECM

B138 i10 B: B135 C: B136

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6
5 6 7 8 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
B72 B38

1 2
1 2 3
4 5 6 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19
EN-07700

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL OF ECM. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 5. Go to step 2.
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON.
2) Measure the voltage between ECM connec-
tor and chassis ground.
Connector & terminal
(B135) No. 33 (+) — Chassis ground (–):

EN(H4SO)(diag)-55
 Malfunction Indicator Light
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 3. Repair the harness
COMBINATION METER CONNECTOR. and connector.
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. NOTE:
2) Remove the combination meter. <Ref. to In this case, repair
IDI-20, Combination Meter.> the following item:
3) Disconnect the connector from ECM and • Open circuit in
combination meter. harness between
4) Measure the resistance of harness between ECM and combi-
ECM and combination meter connector. nation meter con-
Connector & terminal nector
(B135) No. 33 — (i10) No. 6: • Poor contact of
coupling connector
3 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of combi- Repair the poor Go to step 4.
Check for poor contact of combination meternation meter connector? contact of combi-
connector. nation meter con-
nector.
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN COMBINA- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Replace the meter Check the follow-
TION METER AND IGNITION SWITCH CON- case assembly of ing item and repair
NECTOR. combination meter. if necessary.
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. <Ref. to IDI-20, NOTE:
2) Measure the voltage between combination Combination • Blown out of fuse
meter connector and chassis ground. Meter.> (F/B No. 5)
Connector & terminal • Open circuit or
(i10) No. 19 (+) — Chassis ground (–): short circuit to
ground in harness
of power supply
circuit
5 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Does the malfunction indicator Repair the poor Go to step 6.
Check for poor connection by shaking or pulling light illuminate? contact of ECM
ECM harness. connector.
6 CHECK ECM CONNECTOR. Is the ECM connector correctly Replace the ECM. Repair the connec-
Check the connection of ECM connector. connected? <Ref. to tion of ECM con-
FU(H4SO)-41, nector.
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-56
 Malfunction Indicator Light
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

D: MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT GO OFF

DIAGNOSIS:
The malfunction indicator light circuit is shorted.
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Although malfunction indicator light comes on when the engine runs, DTC is not shown on the Subaru Select
Monitor or general scan tool display.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

B72 IGNITION SWITCH BATTERY

F/B No. 5 SBF-5 MAIN SBF
1 3

E
19

COMBINATION
METER
i10
6

M/B
DELIVERY
(TEST) MODE
FUSE No. 36 B138
1 2
*
: TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL
i3
* * ARRANGEMENT
18

B38
C34
B33

C4

B : B135 C : B136 ECM

B138 i10 B: B135 C: B136

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6
5 6 7 8 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
B72 B38

1 2
1 2 3
4 5 6 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19
EN-07700

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Does the malfunction indicator Repair the ground Replace the ECM.
COMBINATION METER CONNECTOR. light illuminate? short circuit of har- <Ref. to
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ness between FU(H4SO)-41,
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. ECM and combi- Engine Control
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. nation meter con- Module (ECM).>
nector.

EN(H4SO)(diag)-57
11LE_US.book 58 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Malfunction Indicator Light

ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

E: MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT BLINK

DIAGNOSIS:
• The malfunction indicator light circuit is open or shorted.
• The delivery (test) mode fuse circuit is open.
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Malfunction indicator light does not blink during Inspection Mode.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

B72 IGNITION SWITCH BATTERY

F/B No. 5 SBF-5 MAIN SBF
1 3

E
19

COMBINATION
METER
i10
6

M/B
DELIVERY
(TEST) MODE
FUSE No. 36 B138
1 2
*
: TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL
i3
* * ARRANGEMENT
18

B38
C34
B33

C4

B : B135 C : B136 ECM

B138 i10 B: B135 C: B136

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6
5 6 7 8 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
B72 B38

1 2
1 2 3
4 5 6 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19
EN-07700

EN(H4SO)(diag)-58
 Malfunction Indicator Light
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK STATUS OF MALFUNCTION INDI- Does the malfunction indicator Go to step 2. Repair the mal-
CATOR LIGHT. light illuminate? function indicator
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. light circuit. <Ref.
2) Check the delivery (test) mode fuse is to
removed. EN(H4SO)(diag)-
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. (engine OFF) 55, MALFUNC-
TION INDICATOR
LIGHT DOES NOT
COME ON, Mal-
function Indicator
Light.>
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Does the malfunction indicator Repair the ground Go to step 3.
COMBINATION METER CONNECTOR. light illuminate? short circuit of har-
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ness between
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. ECM and combi-
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. nation meter con-
nector.
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND DE- Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 4. Repair the harness
LIVERY (TEST) MODE FUSE. and connector.
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. NOTE:
2) Install the delivery (test) mode fuse of the In this case, repair
main fuse box. the following item:
3) Measure the resistance of harness between • Open circuit of
ECM connectors. harness between
Connector & terminal ECM and delivery
(B136) No. 34 — (B136) No. 4: (test) mode fuse
• Poor contact of
joint connector
4 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of ECM Repair the poor Replace the ECM.
Check for poor contact of ECM connector. connector? contact of ECM <Ref. to
connector. FU(H4SO)-41,
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-59
 Malfunction Indicator Light
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

F: MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT REMAINS BLINKING

DIAGNOSIS:
The delivery (test) mode fuse circuit is shorted.
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Malfunction indicator light blinks when delivery (test) mode fuse is not connected.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

B72 IGNITION SWITCH BATTERY

F/B No. 5 SBF-5 MAIN SBF
1 3

E
19

COMBINATION
METER
i10
6

M/B
DELIVERY
(TEST) MODE
FUSE No. 36 B138
1 2
*
: TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL
i3
* * ARRANGEMENT
18

B38
C34
B33

C4

B : B135 C : B136 ECM

B138 i10 B: B135 C: B136

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6
5 6 7 8 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
B72 B38

1 2
1 2 3
4 5 6 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19
EN-07700

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK DELIVERY (TEST) MODE FUSE. Does the malfunction indicator Go to step 2. System is normal.
1) Check the delivery (test) mode fuse is light blink? NOTE:
removed. Malfunction indica-
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. tor light blinks
when delivery
(test) mode fuse is
connected.

EN(H4SO)(diag)-60
 Malfunction Indicator Light
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Repair the short Replace the ECM.
CHASSIS GROUND. circuit to ground in <Ref. to
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. harness between FU(H4SO)-41,
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. ECM and delivery Engine Control
3) Measure the resistance of harness between (test) mode fuse. Module (ECM).>
ECM and chassis ground.
Connector & terminal
(B136) No. 34 — Chassis ground:

EN(H4SO)(diag)-61
 Diagnostics for Engine Starting Failure
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

16.Diagnostics for Engine Starting Failure

A: PROCEDURE
1. Check of the fuel amount
↓
2. Inspection of starter motor circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-63, STARTER MOTOR CIRCUIT, Diagnostics for Engine Starting
Failure.>
↓
3. Inspection of ECM power supply and ground line <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-67, CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND LINE
OF ENGINE CONTROL MODULE (ECM), Diagnostics for Engine Starting Failure.>
↓
4. Inspection of ignition control system <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-69, IGNITION CONTROL SYSTEM, Diagnostics for Engine
Starting Failure.>
↓
5. Inspection of fuel pump circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-71, FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT, Diagnostics for Engine Starting Failure.>
↓
6. Inspection of fuel injector circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-73, FUEL INJECTOR CIRCUIT, Diagnostics for Engine Starting Fail-
ure.>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-62
 Diagnostics for Engine Starting Failure
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

B: STARTER MOTOR CIRCUIT

CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

F/B No. 21
6
BATTERY
SBF-5 MAIN SBF
2 3
2

4
IGNITION SWITCH
B72

STARTER RELAY
B493
E
1

INHIBITOR SWITCH
P R N D
MT CVT 12 6
11 9
MT

B12 T3 T7
CVT
2

CLUTCH STROKE
SENSOR (CLUTCH STARTER MOTOR
MT

START SWITCH)

B501
CVT
1

CVT
B14

MT M
B26

C16

B : B135
ECM
C : B136

B493 B501 B72 T7 B12 B : B135 C : B136

1 2 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 5 6 7 8 14 15 16
3 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
4 5 6 9 10 11 12 25 26 27
4 6 7 8 9 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35

EN-07701

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK BATTERY. Is the voltage 12 V or more? Go to step 2. Charge or replace
Check the battery voltage. the battery.
2 CHECK OPERATION OF STARTER MOTOR. Does the starter motor oper- Go to step 3. Go to step 4.
ate?

EN(H4SO)(diag)-63
 Diagnostics for Engine Starting Failure
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

3 CHECK DTC. Is DTC displayed? <Ref. to Check the appro- The circuit has
EN(H4SO)(diag)-40, OPERA- priate DTC using returned to a nor-
TION, Read Diagnostic Trouble the “List of Diag- mal condition at
Code (DTC).> nostic Trouble this time. Repro-
Code (DTC)”. duce the failure,
<Ref. to and then perform
EN(H4SO)(diag)- the diagnosis
75, List of Diagnos- again.
tic Trouble Code NOTE:
(DTC).> In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector,
temporary open or
short circuit of har-
ness may be the
cause.
4 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL FOR STARTER MO- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Check the starter Go to step 5.
TOR. motor. <Ref. to
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. SC(H4SO)-9,
2) Disconnect the connector from starter Starter.>
motor.
3) Turn the ignition switch to START.
4) Measure the voltage between the starter
motor connector and the engine ground.
Connector & terminal
(B14) No. 1 (+) — Engine ground (–):
NOTE:
For CVT model, place the select lever in “P”
range or “N” range. For MT model, depress the
clutch pedal.
5 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN BATTERY Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 6. Repair the power
AND IGNITION SWITCH CONNECTOR. supply circuit.
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
2) Disconnect the connector from ignition
switch.
3) Measure the voltage between ignition
switch connector and chassis ground.
Connector & terminal
(B72) No. 3 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
6 CHECK IGNITION SWITCH. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 7. Replace the igni-
Measure the resistance between ignition switch tion switch. <Ref.
terminals after turning the ignition switch to to SL-60,
START position. REPLACEMENT,
Terminals Ignition Key Lock.>
No. 3 — No. 2:
No. 3 — No. 6:
7 CHECK INPUT VOLTAGE OF STARTER RE- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 8. Repair open or
LAY. short circuit to
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ground in harness
2) Remove the starter relay. between starter
3) Connect the connector to ignition switch. relay and ignition
4) Measure the input voltage between starter switch connector.
relay connector and chassis ground after turn-
ing the ignition switch to START position.
Connector & terminal
(B493) No. 2 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
(B493) No. 4 (+) — Chassis ground (–):

EN(H4SO)(diag)-64
 Diagnostics for Engine Starting Failure
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

8 CHECK STARTER RELAY. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 9. Replace the starter
1) Connect the battery to starter relay termi- relay. <Ref. to
nals No. 1 and No. 2. EN(H4SO)(diag)-
2) Measure the resistance between starter 9, Electrical Com-
relay terminals. ponent Location.>
Terminals
No. 3 — No. 4:
9 CHECK TRANSMISSION TYPE. Is the transmission type CVT? Go to step 10. Go to step 14.
10 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 11. Repair the open
STARTER RELAY CONNECTOR. circuit of harness
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. between ECM and
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. starter relay con-
3) Measure the resistance of harness connec- nector.
tor between ECM and starter relay.
Connector & terminal
(B493) No. 1 — (B135) No. 26:
11 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN STARTER RE- Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 12. Repair the harness
LAY AND INHIBITOR SWITCH CONNEC- and connector.
TOR. NOTE:
1) Disconnect the connector from inhibitor In this case, repair
switch. the following item:
2) Measure the resistance of harness between • Open circuit in
starter relay connector and inhibitor relay con- harness between
nector. starter relay con-
Connector & terminal nector and inhibitor
(B493) No. 3 — (T7) No. 6: switch connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
12 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN INHIBITOR Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 13. Repair the harness
SWITCH AND STARTER MOTOR. and connector.
Measure the resistance of harness between the NOTE:
inhibitor switch and starter motor. In this case, repair
Connector & terminal the following item:
(T7) No. 9 — (B14) No. 1: • Open circuit in
harness between
inhibitor switch
connector and
starter motor
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
13 CHECK INHIBITOR SWITCH. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Check the ECM Replace the inhibi-
1) Place the select lever in “P” range or “N” power supply and tor switch. <Ref. to
range. ground line. <Ref. CVT-94, Inhibitor
2) Measure the resistance between inhibitor to Switch.>
switch terminals. EN(H4SO)(diag)-
Terminals 67, CHECK
No. 6 — No. 9: POWER SUPPLY
AND GROUND
LINE OF ENGINE
CONTROL MOD-
ULE (ECM), Diag-
nostics for Engine
Starting Failure.>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-65
 Diagnostics for Engine Starting Failure
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

14 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN STARTER RE- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 15. Repair the open
LAY AND CLUTCH STROKE SENSOR CON- circuit in harness
NECTOR. between starter
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. relay connector
2) Disconnect the connector from clutch stroke and clutch stroke
sensor. sensor connector.
3) Measure the resistance of harness between
starter relay connector and clutch stroke sensor
connector.
Connector & terminal
(B493) No. 1 — (B501) No. 2:
15 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 16. Repair the open
CLUTCH STROKE SENSOR CONNECTOR. circuit of harness
1) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. between ECM and
2) Measure the resistance of harness between clutch stroke sen-
ECM and clutch stroke sensor connector. sor connector.
Connector & terminal
(B135) No. 26 — (B501) No. 1:
16 CHECK CLUTCH STROKE SENSOR. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 17. Replace the clutch
Measure the resistance between clutch stroke stroke sensor.
sensor terminals while depressing the clutch. <Ref. to PB(diag)-
Terminals 10, Electrical Com-
No. 1 — No. 2: ponent Location.>
17 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN STARTER RE- Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Check the ECM Repair the open
LAY AND STARTER MOTOR. power supply and circuit of the har-
Measure the resistance of harness between ground line. <Ref. ness between
starter relay connector and starter motor. to starter relay con-
Connector & terminal EN(H4SO)(diag)- nector and starter
(B493) No. 3 — (B14) No. 1: 67, CHECK motor.
POWER SUPPLY
AND GROUND
LINE OF ENGINE
CONTROL MOD-
ULE (ECM), Diag-
nostics for Engine
Starting Failure.>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-66
 Diagnostics for Engine Starting Failure
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

C: CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND LINE OF ENGINE CONTROL MOD-

ULE (ECM)
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

MAIN RELAY
M/B No. 16
4
3 M/B No. 12
1
2 B72 IGNITION SWITCH
BATTERY
B220 F/B No. 12 SBF-5 MAIN SBF
1 3
C30
B13
C1
D7

C2

A : B134
E
B : B135
ECM
C : B136

D : B137
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1

B21
40
35
34
37
36

E2

E E

B21 A: B134 B: B135 B220

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 17
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 1 5 9 13
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 2 6 10 14
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 19
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54 B72 C: B136 D: B137

1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-07702

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK MAIN RELAY. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 2. Replace the main
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. relay. <Ref. to
2) Remove the main relay. FU(H4SO)-42,
3) Connect the battery to main relay terminals Main Relay.>
No. 1 and No. 2.
4) Measure the resistance between main relay
terminals.
Terminals
No. 3 — No. 4:

EN(H4SO)(diag)-67
 Diagnostics for Engine Starting Failure
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

2 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR ECM. Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Go to step 3. Repair the harness
1) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. and connector.
2) Measure the resistance of harness between NOTE:
ECM and chassis ground. In this case, repair
Connector & terminal the following item:
(B134) No. 3 — Chassis ground: • Open circuit in
(B134) No. 4 — Chassis ground: harness between
(B134) No. 6 — Chassis ground: ECM and engine
(B137) No. 1 — Chassis ground: ground terminal
(B137) No. 3 — Chassis ground: • Poor contact of
coupling connector
3 CHECK INPUT VOLTAGE OF ECM. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 4. Repair the open or
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. ground short circuit
2) Measure the voltage between ECM and of harness of
chassis ground. power supply cir-
Connector & terminal cuit.
(B136) No. 2 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
(B136) No. 30 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
4 CHECK INPUT VOLTAGE OF MAIN RELAY. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 5. Repair the open or
Measure the voltage between main relay con- ground short circuit
nector and chassis ground. of harness of
Connector & terminal power supply cir-
(B220) No. 1 (+) — Chassis ground (–): cuit.
(B220) No. 4 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
5 CHECK INPUT VOLTAGE OF ECM. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 6. Repair the open
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. circuit in harness
2) Install the main relay. between ECM and
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. main relay connec-
4) Measure the voltage between ECM and tor.
chassis ground.
Connector & terminal
(B135) No. 13 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
6 CHECK INPUT VOLTAGE OF ECM. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Check ignition con- Repair the harness
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. trol system. <Ref. and connector.
2) Connect the connector to ECM. to NOTE:
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. EN(H4SO)(diag)- In this case, repair
4) Measure the voltage between ECM and 69, IGNITION the following item:
chassis ground. CONTROL SYS- • Open circuit in
Connector & terminal TEM, Diagnostics harness between
(B136) No. 1 (+) — Chassis ground (–): for Engine Starting ECM and main re-
(B137) No. 7 (+) — Chassis ground (–): Failure.> lay connector
• Poor contact of
main relay connec-
tor
• Poor contact of
ECM connector

EN(H4SO)(diag)-68
 Diagnostics for Engine Starting Failure
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

D: IGNITION CONTROL SYSTEM

CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY
M/B No. 14 B134 ECM

21

22

31

32
E

IG RELAY

8
7

B220 B21
49

32

33

11
5
E2

E31 E32 E33 E34

1

3
E

IGNITION COIL IGNITION COIL IGNITION COIL IGNITION COIL

No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4

E31 E33 B21 B220 B134

E32 E34 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1 5 9 13
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
2 6 10 14
19 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
1
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
2
42 43 44 45 46 47
3
48 49 50 51 52 53 54

EN-07703

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK SPARK PLUG CONDITION. Is the spark plug condition nor- Go to step 2. Replace the spark
1) Remove the spark plug. <Ref. to IG(H4SO)- mal? plug. <Ref. to
3, REMOVAL, Spark Plug.> IG(H4SO)-3,
2) Check the spark plug condition. <Ref. to Spark Plug.>
IG(H4SO)-3, INSPECTION, Spark Plug.>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-69
 Diagnostics for Engine Starting Failure
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

2 CHECK IGNITION SYSTEM FOR SPARKS. Does spark occur at each cylin- Check fuel pump Go to step 3.
1) Connect the spark plug to ignition coil. der? system. <Ref. to
2) Release the fuel pressure. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-
FU(H4SO)-48, RELEASING OF FUEL PRES- 71, FUEL PUMP
SURE, PROCEDURE, Fuel.> CIRCUIT, Diag-
3) Contact the spark plug thread portion to nostics for Engine
engine. Starting Failure.>
4) While opening the throttle valve fully, crank
the engine to check that spark occurs at each
cylinder.
3 CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 4. Repair the harness
CIRCUIT. and connector.
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. NOTE:
2) Disconnect the connector from ignition coil. In this case, repair
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. the following item:
4) Measure the voltage between ignition coil • Open circuit or
connector and engine ground. short circuit to
Connector & terminal ground in harness
(E31) No. 1 (+) — Engine ground (–): of power supply
(E32) No. 1 (+) — Engine ground (–): circuit
(E33) No. 1 (+) — Engine ground (–): • Poor contact of
(E34) No. 1 (+) — Engine ground (–): coupling connector
• Blown out of fuse
(M/B No. 14)
4 CHECK HARNESS OF IGNITION COIL Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Go to step 5. Repair the open
GROUND CIRCUIT. circuit in harness
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. between ignition
2) Measure the resistance of harness between coil connector and
ignition coil connector and engine ground. engine grounding
Connector & terminal terminal.
(E31) No. 3 — Engine ground:
(E32) No. 3 — Engine ground:
(E33) No. 3 — Engine ground:
(E34) No. 3 — Engine ground:
5 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND IG- Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 6. Repair the harness
NITION COIL CONNECTOR. and connector.
1) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. NOTE:
2) Measure the resistance of harness between In this case, repair
ECM and ignition coil connector. the following item:
Connector & terminal • Open circuit of
(B134) No. 21 — (E31) No. 2: harness between
(B134) No. 22 — (E32) No. 2: ECM and ignition
(B134) No. 31 — (E33) No. 2: coil connector
(B134) No. 32 — (E34) No. 2: • Poor contact of
coupling connector
6 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND IG- Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 7. Repair the ground
NITION COIL CONNECTOR. more? short circuit of har-
Measure the resistance of harness between ness between
ECM and engine ground. ECM and ignition
Connector & terminal: coil connector.
(B134) No. 21 — Engine ground:
(B134) No. 22 — Engine ground:
(B134) No. 31 — Engine ground:
(B134) No. 32 — Engine ground:
7 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of ECM Repair the poor Replace the igni-
Check for poor contact of ECM connector. connector? contact of ECM tion coil. <Ref. to
connector. IG(H4SO)-5, Igni-
tion Coil.>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-70
 Diagnostics for Engine Starting Failure
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

E: FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT

CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

M/B No. 20

IGNITION
B72 BATTERY
SWITCH
F/B No. 12 SBF-5 MAIN SBF
1 3
FUEL PUMP RELAY

21
17
19 33
20 E
B136 ECM
B220

B38
14

i3

i155
2

R333
FUEL PUMP

5 1

M 6 2

R58 R57 R15

B72 R58 B38 B136 B220

1 2
1 2 3 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6
4 5 6 3 4 5 6 17
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 9 10 11 12 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 2 6 10 14
5 6 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 19
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35

i155

R57

1 2
3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11
EN-07704

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK OPERATING SOUND OF FUEL Does the fuel pump emit oper- Check the fuel Go to step 2.
PUMP. ating sound? injector circuit.
Check if the fuel pump operates for two seconds <Ref. to
when turning the ignition switch to ON. EN(H4SO)(diag)-
NOTE: 73, FUEL INJEC-
Fuel pump operation can be executed using the TOR CIRCUIT,
Subaru Select Monitor. Diagnostics for
For detailed procedures, refer to “SYSTEM OP- Engine Starting
ERATION CHECK MODE”. <Ref. to Failure.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-52, System Operation Check
Mode.>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-71
 Diagnostics for Engine Starting Failure
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

2 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT OF FUEL PUMP. Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Go to step 3. Repair the harness
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. and connector.
2) Remove the fuel pump access hole lid. NOTE:
3) Disconnect the connector from fuel pump. In this case, repair
4) Measure the resistance of harness connec- the following item:
tor between fuel pump and chassis ground. • Open circuit in
Connector & terminal harness between
(R58) No. 6 — Chassis ground: fuel pump connec-
tor and chassis
grounding terminal
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
3 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO FUEL PUMP. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Replace the fuel Go to step 4.
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. pump. <Ref. to
2) Measure the voltage between fuel pump FU(H4SO)-60,
connector and chassis ground. Fuel Pump.>
Connector & terminal
(R58) No. 5 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN FUEL PUMP Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 5. Repair the harness
AND FUEL PUMP RELAY CONNECTOR. and connector.
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. NOTE:
2) Measure the resistance of harness between In this case, repair
fuel pump connector and fuel pump relay con- the following item:
nector. • Open circuit in
Connector & terminal harness between
(R58) No. 5 — (B220) No. 20: fuel pump connec-
tor and fuel pump
relay connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
5 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN FUEL PUMP Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 6. Repair the short
AND FUEL PUMP RELAY CONNECTOR. more? circuit to ground in
Measure the resistance of harness between harness between
fuel pump and fuel pump relay connector. fuel pump connec-
Connector & terminal tor and fuel pump
(R58) No. 5 — Chassis ground: relay connector.
6 CHECK FUEL PUMP RELAY. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 7. Replace the fuel
1) Remove the fuel pump relay. pump relay. <Ref.
2) Connect the battery to fuel pump relay ter- to FU(H4SO)-44,
minals No. 17 and No. 19. Fuel Pump Relay.>
3) Measure the resistance between fuel pump
relay terminals.
Terminals
No. 20 — No. 21:
7 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 8. Repair the open
FUEL PUMP RELAY CONNECTOR. circuit of harness
1) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. between ECM and
2) Measure the resistance of harness between fuel pump relay
ECM and fuel pump relay connector. connector.
Connector & terminal
(B136) No. 33 — (B220) No. 19:
8 CHECK POWER SUPPLY OF FUEL PUMP Is the voltage 10 V or more? Repair the poor Repair the open or
RELAY. contact of ECM ground short circuit
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. connector. of harness of
2) Measure the voltage between fuel pump power supply cir-
relay connector and chassis ground. cuit.
Connector & terminal
(B220) No. 17 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
(B220) No. 21 (+) — Chassis ground (–):

EN(H4SO)(diag)-72
 Diagnostics for Engine Starting Failure
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

F: FUEL INJECTOR CIRCUIT

CAUTION:
• Check or repair only faulty parts.
• After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No. 16
4
3

2
1
E
B220

B134 ECM
10

11

12

13
B21
48

42

43

44

45
E2

E5 E16 E6 E17
2

FUEL INJECTOR FUEL INJECTOR FUEL INJECTOR FUEL INJECTOR

No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4

E5 E16 B21 B134 B220

E6 E17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 2 6 10 14
1 2 19
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54

EN-07705

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK OPERATION OF EACH FUEL INJEC- Does the fuel pump emit oper- Check the fuel Go to step 2.
TOR. ating sound? pressure. <Ref. to
While cranking the engine, check each fuel ME(H4SO)-28,
injector emits operating sound. Use a sound INSPECTION,
scope or attach a screwdriver to the injector to Fuel Pressure.>
listen to sounds for this check.

EN(H4SO)(diag)-73
 Diagnostics for Engine Starting Failure
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

2 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO EACH FUEL IN- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 3. Repair the harness
JECTOR. and connector.
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. NOTE:
2) Disconnect the connector from fuel injector. In this case, repair
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. the following item:
4) Measure the voltage between fuel injector • Open circuit in
connector and the engine ground. harness between
Connector & terminal main relay connec-
#1 (E5) No. 2 (+) — Engine ground (–): tor and fuel injector
#2 (E16) No. 2 (+) — Engine ground (–): connector
#3 (E6) No. 2 (+) — Engine ground (–): • Poor contact of
#4 (E17) No. 2 (+) — Engine ground (–): main relay connec-
tor
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 4. Repair the harness
FUEL INJECTOR CONNECTOR. and connector.
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. NOTE:
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. In this case, repair
3) Measure the resistance of harness between the following item:
ECM and fuel injector connector. • Open circuit in
Connector & terminal harness between
#1 (B134) No. 10 — (E5) No. 1: ECM and fuel in-
#2 (B134) No. 11 — (E16) No. 1: jector connector
#3 (B134) No. 12 — (E6) No. 1: • Poor contact of
#4 (B134) No. 13 — (E17) No. 1: coupling connector
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 5. Repair the short
FUEL INJECTOR CONNECTOR. more? circuit to ground in
Measure the resistance between ECM and harness between
chassis ground. ECM and fuel
Connector & terminal injector connector.
#1 (B134) No. 10 — Chassis ground:
#2 (B134) No. 11 — Chassis ground:
#3 (B134) No. 12 — Chassis ground:
#4 (B134) No. 13 — Chassis ground:
5 CHECK EACH FUEL INJECTOR. Is the resistance 5 — 20 Ω? Go to step 6. Replace the faulty
Measure the resistance between each fuel fuel injector. <Ref.
injector terminals. to FU(H4SO)-34,
Terminals Fuel Injector.>
No. 1 — No. 2:
6 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of ECM Repair the poor Inspection using
Check for poor contact of ECM connector. connector? contact of ECM “General Diagnos-
connector. tic Table”. <Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
282, INSPEC-
TION, General
Diagnostic Table.>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-74
 List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

17.List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)

A: LIST
DTC Item Note
P0026 Intake Valve Control Solenoid Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-82, DTC P0026 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLE-
Range/Performance (Bank 1) NOID CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure
with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0028 Intake Valve Control Solenoid Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-84, DTC P0028 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLE-
Range/Performance (Bank 2) NOID CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (BANK 2), Diagnostic Procedure
with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0030 HO2S Heater Control Circuit (Bank 1 <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-86, DTC P0030 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIR-
Sensor 1) CUIT (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P0031 HO2S Heater Control Circuit Low <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-88, DTC P0031 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIR-
(Bank 1 Sensor 1) CUIT LOW (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
P0032 HO2S Heater Control Circuit High <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-90, DTC P0032 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIR-
(Bank 1 Sensor 1) CUIT HIGH (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
P0037 HO2S Heater Control Circuit Low <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-92, DTC P0037 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIR-
(Bank 1 Sensor 2) CUIT LOW (BANK 1 SENSOR 2), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
P0038 HO2S Heater Control Circuit High <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-94, DTC P0038 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIR-
(Bank 1 Sensor 2) CUIT HIGH (BANK 1 SENSOR 2), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
P0068 MAP/MAF - Throttle Position Correla- <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-96, DTC P0068 MAP/MAF - THROTTLE POSITION
tion CORRELATION, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0076 Intake Valve Control Solenoid Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-97, DTC P0076 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLE-
Low (Bank 1) NOID CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P0077 Intake Valve Control Solenoid Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-99, DTC P0077 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLE-
High (Bank 1) NOID CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
P0082 Intake Valve Control Solenoid Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-101, DTC P0082 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLE-
Low (Bank 2) NOID CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 2), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P0083 Intake Valve Control Solenoid Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-103, DTC P0083 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLE-
High (Bank 2) NOID CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 2), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
P0101 Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-105, DTC P0101 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW
Range/Performance CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0102 Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit Low <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-106, DTC P0102 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW
Input CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P0103 Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit High <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-108, DTC P0103 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW
Input CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P0107 Manifold Absolute Pressure/Baromet- <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-110, DTC P0107 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRES-
ric Pressure Circuit Low Input SURE/BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Proce-
dure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0108 Manifold Absolute Pressure/Baromet- <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-112, DTC P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRES-
ric Pressure Circuit High Input SURE/BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Proce-
dure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0111 Intake Air Temperature Sensor 1 Cir- <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-114, DTC P0111 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE
cuit Range/Performance SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-75
 List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

DTC Item Note

P0112 Intake Air Temperature Sensor 1 Cir- <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-115, DTC P0112 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE
cuit Low SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P0113 Intake Air Temperature Sensor 1 Cir- <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-117, DTC P0113 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE
cuit High SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P0117 Engine Coolant Temperature Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-119, DTC P0117 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERA-
Low TURE CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P0118 Engine Coolant Temperature Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-121, DTC P0118 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERA-
High TURE CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P0122 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-123, DTC P0122 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION
“A” Circuit Low SENSOR/SWITCH “A” CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0123 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-125, DTC P0123 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION
“A” Circuit High SENSOR/SWITCH “A” CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0125 Insufficient Coolant Temperature for <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-127, DTC P0125 INSUFFICIENT COOLANT TEM-
Closed Loop Fuel Control PERATURE FOR CLOSED LOOP FUEL CONTROL, Diagnostic Procedure
with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0126 Insufficient Engine Coolant Tempera- <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-128, DTC P0126 INSUFFICIENT ENGINE COOL-
ture for Stable Operation ANT TEMPERATURE FOR STABLE OPERATION, Diagnostic Procedure with
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0128 Coolant Thermostat (Engine Coolant <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-129, DTC P0128 COOLANT THERMOSTAT
Temperature Below Thermostat Reg- (ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE BELOW THERMOSTAT REGULATING
ulating Temperature) TEMPERATURE), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P0131 O2 Sensor Circuit Low Voltage (Bank <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-130, DTC P0131 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW
1 Sensor 1) VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
P0132 O2 Sensor Circuit High Voltage (Bank <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-132, DTC P0132 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH
1 Sensor 1) VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
P0133 O2 Sensor Circuit Slow Response <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-134, DTC P0133 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT SLOW
(Bank 1 Sensor 1) RESPONSE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0134 O2 Sensor Circuit No Activity <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-135, DTC P0134 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIV-
Detected (Bank 1 Sensor 1) ITY DETECTED (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0137 O2 Sensor Circuit Low Voltage (Bank <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-137, DTC P0137 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW
1 Sensor 2) VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 2), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
P0138 O2 Sensor Circuit High Voltage (Bank <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-139, DTC P0138 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH
1 Sensor 2) VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 2), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
P0139 O2 Sensor Circuit Slow Response <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-141, DTC P0139 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT SLOW
(Bank 1 Sensor 2) RESPONSE (BANK 1 SENSOR 2), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0140 O2 Sensor Circuit No Activity <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-143, DTC P0140 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIV-
Detected (Bank1 Sensor2) ITY DETECTED (BANK1 SENSOR2), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0141 O2 Sensor Heater Circuit (Bank1 <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-145, DTC P0141 O2 SENSOR HEATER CIRCUIT
Sensor2) (BANK1 SENSOR2), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P0171 System Too Lean (Bank 1) <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-145, DTC P0171 SYSTEM TOO LEAN (BANK 1),
Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-76
 List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

DTC Item Note

P0172 System Too Rich (Bank 1) <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-146, DTC P0172 SYSTEM TOO RICH (BANK 1),
Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0181 Fuel Temperature Sensor “A” Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-148, DTC P0181 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Range/Performance “A” CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnos-
tic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0182 Fuel Temperature Sensor “A” Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-149, DTC P0182 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Low Input “A” CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P0183 Fuel Temperature Sensor “A” Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-151, DTC P0183 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
High Input “A” CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P0196 Engine Oil Temperature Sensor Cir- <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-153, DTC P0196 ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE
cuit Range/Performance SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0197 Engine Oil Temperature Sensor Low <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-154, DTC P0197 ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE
SENSOR LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0198 Engine Oil Temperature Sensor High <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-156, DTC P0198 ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE
SENSOR HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0222 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-158, DTC P0222 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION
“B” Circuit Low SENSOR/SWITCH “B” CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0223 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-160, DTC P0223 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION
“B” Circuit High SENSOR/SWITCH “B” CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0301 Cylinder 1 Misfire Detected <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-162, DTC P0301 CYLINDER 1 MISFIRE
DETECTED, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0302 Cylinder 2 Misfire Detected <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-162, DTC P0302 CYLINDER 2 MISFIRE
DETECTED, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0303 Cylinder 3 Misfire Detected <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-162, DTC P0303 CYLINDER 3 MISFIRE
DETECTED, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0304 Cylinder 4 Misfire Detected <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-163, DTC P0304 CYLINDER 4 MISFIRE
DETECTED, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0327 Knock Sensor 1 Circuit Low (Bank 1 <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-169, DTC P0327 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT
or Single Sensor) LOW (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0328 Knock Sensor 1 Circuit High (Bank 1 <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-171, DTC P0328 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT
or Single Sensor) HIGH (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0335 Crankshaft Position Sensor “A” Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-173, DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SEN-
SOR “A” CIRCUIT, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P0336 Crankshaft Position Sensor “A” Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-175, DTC P0336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SEN-
Range/Performance SOR “A” CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0340 Camshaft Position Sensor “A” Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-176, DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
(Bank 1 or Single Sensor) “A” CIRCUIT (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR), Diagnostic Procedure with
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0341 Camshaft Position Sensor “A” Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-178, DTC P0341 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
Range/Performance (Bank 1 or Single “A” CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR),
Sensor) Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0400 Exhaust Gas Recirculation Flow <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-180, DTC P0400 EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION
FLOW, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0420 Catalyst System Efficiency Below <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-181, DTC P0420 CATALYST SYSTEM EFFICIENCY
Threshold (Bank 1) BELOW THRESHOLD (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-77
 List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

DTC Item Note

P0442 Evaporative Emission Control Sys- <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-185, DTC P0442 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CON-
tem Leak Detected (Small Leak) TROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (SMALL LEAK), Diagnostic Procedure
with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0447 Evaporative Emission Control Sys- <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-187, DTC P0447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CON-
tem Vent Control Circuit Open TROL SYSTEM VENT CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN, Diagnostic Procedure
with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0448 Evaporative Emission Control Sys- <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-189, DTC P0448 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CON-
tem Vent Control Circuit Shorted TROL SYSTEM VENT CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED, Diagnostic Proce-
dure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0451 Evaporative Emission Control Sys- <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-191, DTC P0451 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CON-
tem Pressure Sensor TROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0452 Evaporative Emission Control Sys- <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-192, DTC P0452 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CON-
tem Pressure Sensor Low Input TROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure
with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0453 Evaporative Emission Control Sys- <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-194, DTC P0453 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CON-
tem Pressure Sensor High Input TROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure
with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0456 Evaporative Emission Control Sys- <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-196, DTC P0456 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CON-
tem Leak Detected (Very Small Leak) TROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (VERY SMALL LEAK), Diagnostic Proce-
dure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0457 Evaporative Emission Control Sys- <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-198, DTC P0457 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CON-
tem Leak Detected (Fuel Cap Loose/ TROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (FUEL CAP LOOSE/OFF), Diagnostic
Off) Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0458 Evaporative Emission System Purge <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-200, DTC P0458 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYS-
Control Valve Circuit Low TEM PURGE CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0459 Evaporative Emission System Purge <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-202, DTC P0459 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYS-
Control Valve Circuit High TEM PURGE CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0461 Fuel Level Sensor “A” Circuit Range/ <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-204, DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR “A” CIR-
Performance CUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
P0462 Fuel Level Sensor “A” Circuit Low <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-204, DTC P0462 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR “A” CIR-
CUIT LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0463 Fuel Level Sensor “A” Circuit High <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-204, DTC P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR “A” CIR-
CUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0464 Fuel Level Sensor Circuit Intermittent <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-205, DTC P0464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT
INTERMITTENT, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0500 Vehicle Speed Sensor “A” <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-205, DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR “A”,
Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0506 Idle Air Control System RPM Lower <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-206, DTC P0506 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM
Than Expected RPM LOWER THAN EXPECTED, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
P0507 Idle Air Control System RPM Higher <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-207, DTC P0507 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM
Than Expected RPM HIGHER THAN EXPECTED, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
P050A Cold Start Idle Air Control System <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-208, DTC P050A COLD START IDLE AIR CON-
Performance TROL SYSTEM PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
Trouble Code (DTC).>
P050B Cold Start Ignition Timing Perfor- <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-216, DTC P050B COLD START IGNITION TIMING
mance PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P0512 Starter Request Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-217, DTC P0512 STARTER REQUEST CIRCUIT,
Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-78
 List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

DTC Item Note

P0513 Incorrect Immobilizer Key <Ref. to IM(diag)-16, DTC P0513 INCORRECT IMMOBILIZER KEY, Diagnos-
tic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0604 Internal Control Module Random <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-219, DTC P0604 INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE
Access Memory (RAM) Error RANDOM ACCESS MEMORY (RAM) ERROR, Diagnostic Procedure with
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0605 Internal Control Module Read Only <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-219, DTC P0605 INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE
Memory (ROM) Error READ ONLY MEMORY (ROM) ERROR, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0607 Throttle Control System Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-220, DTC P0607 THROTTLE CONTROL SYSTEM
Range/Performance CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0638 Throttle Actuator Control Range/Per- <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-221, DTC P0638 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CON-
formance (Bank 1) TROL RANGE/PERFORMANCE (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diag-
nostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0700 Transmission Control System (MIL <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-221, DTC P0700 TRANSMISSION CONTROL SYS-
Request) TEM (MIL REQUEST), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P0851 Park/Neutral Switch Input Circuit Low <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-222, DTC P0851 PARK/NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT
(AT Model) CIRCUIT LOW (AT MODEL), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P0851 Neutral Switch Input Circuit Low (MT <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-224, DTC P0851 NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIR-
Model) CUIT LOW (MT MODEL), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P0852 Park/Neutral Switch Input Circuit High <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-226, DTC P0852 PARK/NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT
(AT Model) CIRCUIT HIGH (AT MODEL), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P0852 Neutral Switch Input Circuit High (MT <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-228, DTC P0852 NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIR-
Model) CUIT HIGH (MT MODEL), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P1152 O2 Sensor Circuit Range/Perfor- <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-230, DTC P1152 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/
mance (Low) (Bank1 Sensor1) PERFORMANCE (LOW) (BANK1 SENSOR1), Diagnostic Procedure with
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P1153 O2 Sensor Circuit Range/Perfor- <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-232, DTC P1153 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/
mance (High) (Bank1 Sensor1) PERFORMANCE (HIGH) (BANK1 SENSOR1), Diagnostic Procedure with
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P1160 Return Spring Failure <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-233, DTC P1160 RETURN SPRING FAILURE,
Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P1443 Vent Control Solenoid Valve Function <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-234, DTC P1443 VENT CONTROL SOLENOID
Problem VALVE FUNCTION PROBLEM, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P1492 EGR Solenoid Valve Signal #1 Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-235, DTC P1492 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL
Malfunction (Low Input) #1 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (LOW INPUT), Diagnostic Procedure with Diag-
nostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P1493 EGR Solenoid Valve Signal #1 Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-235, DTC P1493 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL
Malfunction (High Input) #1 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (HIGH INPUT), Diagnostic Procedure with Diag-
nostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P1494 EGR Solenoid Valve Signal #2 Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-235, DTC P1494 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL
Malfunction (Low Input) #2 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (LOW INPUT), Diagnostic Procedure with Diag-
nostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P1495 EGR Solenoid Valve Signal #2 Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-235, DTC P1495 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL
Malfunction (High Input) #2 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (HIGH INPUT), Diagnostic Procedure with Diag-
nostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P1496 EGR Solenoid Valve Signal #3 Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-235, DTC P1496 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL
Malfunction (Low Input) #3 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (LOW INPUT), Diagnostic Procedure with Diag-
nostic Trouble Code (DTC).>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-79
 List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

DTC Item Note

P1497 EGR Solenoid Valve Signal #3 Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-235, DTC P1497 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL
Malfunction (High Input) #3 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (HIGH INPUT), Diagnostic Procedure with Diag-
nostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P1498 EGR Solenoid Valve Signal #4 Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-236, DTC P1498 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL
Malfunction (Low Input) #4 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (LOW INPUT), Diagnostic Procedure with Diag-
nostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P1499 EGR Solenoid Valve Signal #4 Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-239, DTC P1499 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL
Malfunction (High Input) #4 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (HIGH INPUT), Diagnostic Procedure with Diag-
nostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P1518 Starter Switch Circuit Low Input <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-242, DTC P1518 STARTER SWITCH CIRCUIT
LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P1560 Back-Up Voltage Circuit Malfunction <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-244, DTC P1560 BACK-UP VOLTAGE CIRCUIT
MALFUNCTION, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P1570 Antenna <Ref. to IM(diag)-17, DTC P1570 ANTENNA, Diagnostic Procedure with Diag-
nostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P1571 Reference Code Incompatibility <Ref. to IM(diag)-19, DTC P1571 REFERENCE CODE INCOMPATIBILITY,
Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P1572 IMM Circuit Failure <Ref. to IM(diag)-20, DTC P1572 IMM CIRCUIT FAILURE (EXCEPT
ANTENNA CIRCUIT), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P1574 Key Communication Failure <Ref. to IM(diag)-22, DTC P1574 KEY COMMUNICATION FAILURE, Diag-
nostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P1576 EGI Control Module EEPROM <Ref. to IM(diag)-22, DTC P1576 EGI CONTROL MODULE EEPROM, Diag-
nostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P1577 IMM Control Module EEPROM <Ref. to IM(diag)-23, DTC P1577 IMM CONTROL MODULE EEPROM, Diag-
nostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P1578 Meter Failure <Ref. to IM(diag)-24, DTC P1578 METER FAILURE, Diagnostic Procedure
with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P2096 Post Catalyst Fuel Trim System Too <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-246, DTC P2096 POST CATALYST FUEL TRIM
Lean (Bank 1) SYSTEM TOO LEAN (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P2097 Post Catalyst Fuel Trim System Too <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-252, DTC P2097 POST CATALYST FUEL TRIM
Rich (Bank 1) SYSTEM TOO RICH (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P2101 Throttle Actuator Control Motor Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-258, DTC P2101 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CON-
Range/Performance TROL MOTOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure
with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P2102 Throttle Actuator Control Motor Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-263, DTC P2102 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CON-
Low TROL MOTOR CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P2103 Throttle Actuator Control Motor Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-265, DTC P2103 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CON-
High TROL MOTOR CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P2109 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor “A” <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-266, DTC P2109 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION
Minimum Stop Performance SENSOR “A” MINIMUM STOP PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P2122 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-267, DTC P2122 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION
“D” Circuit Low Input SENSOR/SWITCH “D” CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure with
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P2123 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-269, DTC P2123 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION
“D” Circuit High Input SENSOR/SWITCH “D” CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure with
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P2127 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-271, DTC P2127 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION
“E” Circuit Low Input SENSOR/SWITCH “E” CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure with
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-80
 List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

DTC Item Note

P2128 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-273, DTC P2128 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION
“E” Circuit High Input SENSOR/SWITCH “E” CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure with
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P2135 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-275, DTC P2135 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION
“A”/“B” Voltage Correlation SENSOR/SWITCH “A”/“B” VOLTAGE CORRELATION, Diagnostic Procedure
with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P2138 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-278, DTC P2138 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION
“D”/“E” Voltage Correlation SENSOR/SWITCH “D”/“E” VOLTAGE CORRELATION, Diagnostic Procedure
with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P2227 Atmospheric Pressure Sensor Range/ <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-280, DTC P2227 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIR-
Performance CUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
P2228 Barometric Pressure Circuit Low <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-280, DTC P2228 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIR-
CUIT LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P2229 Barometric Pressure Circuit High <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-281, DTC P2229 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIR-
CUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
U0073 CAN Failure, Bus ‘OFF’ Detection <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-281, DTC U0073 CAN FAILURE, BUS ‘OFF’
DETECTION, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
U0101 CAN (TCU) Data not Loaded <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-281, DTC U0101 CAN (TCU) DATA NOT LOADED,
Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
U0122 CAN (VDC) Data not Loaded <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-281, DTC U0122 CAN (VDC) DATA NOT LOADED,
Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
U0140 CAN (BCU) Data not Loaded <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-281, DTC U0140 CAN (BCU) DATA NOT LOADED,
Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
U0402 CAN (TCU) Data Abnormal <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-281, DTC U0402 CAN (TCU) DATA ABNORMAL,
Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
U0416 CAN (VDC) Data Abnormal <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-281, DTC U0416 CAN (VDC) DATA ABNORMAL,
Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
U0422 CAN (BCU) Data Abnormal <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-281, DTC U0422 CAN (BCU) DATA ABNORMAL,
Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-81
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

18.Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)

A: DTC P0026 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT RANGE/PER-
FORMANCE (BANK 1)
DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Immediately at fault recognition
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-8, DTC P0026 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID
CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

B21

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
B137 ECM 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33

34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
14

48 49 50 51 52 53 54

B137

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31

B21
21

E2

E71

VVL DIAGNOSIS
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH RH

EN-07708

EN(H4SO)(diag)-82
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 2. Repair the harness
VARIABLE VALVE LIFT DIAGNOSIS OIL and connector.
PRESSURE SWITCH RH CONNECTOR. NOTE:
1) Warm up the engine. In this case, repair
2) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. the following item:
3) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM • Open circuit in
and variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure harness between
switch RH. ECM and variable
4) Measure the resistance of harness between valve lift diagnosis
ECM and variable valve lift diagnosis oil pres- oil pressure switch
sure switch RH connector. RH connector
Connector & terminal • Poor contact of
(B137) No. 14 — (E71) No. 1: coupling connector
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 3. Repair the ground
VARIABLE VALVE LIFT DIAGNOSIS OIL more? short circuit in har-
PRESSURE SWITCH RH CONNECTOR. ness between
Measure the resistance between the variable ECM and variable
valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch RH con- valve lift diagnosis
nector and engine ground. oil pressure switch
Connector & terminal RH connector.
(E71) No. 1 — Engine ground:
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 10 V or more? Repair the short Go to step 4.
VARIABLE VALVE LIFT DIAGNOSIS OIL circuit to power
PRESSURE SWITCH RH CONNECTOR. supply in harness
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. between ECM and
2) Measure the voltage between the variable variable valve lift
valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch RH con- diagnosis oil pres-
nector and engine ground. sure switch RH
Connector & terminal connector.
(E71) No. 1 (+) — Engine ground (–):
4 CHECK DTC. Is DTC displayed? Replace the oil End.
1) Perform the Clear Memory Mode. switching solenoid
2) After idling the engine, check the DTC. valve RH. <Ref. to
NOTE: ME(H4SO)-89, Oil
For detailed procedures, refer to “Clear Memory Switching Solenoid
Mode”. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51, Clear Valve.> After
Memory Mode.> replacement, go to
the next step. Go to
step 5.
5 CHECK DTC. Is DTC displayed? Check for oil rout- End.
1) Perform the Clear Memory Mode. ing.
2) After idling the engine, check the DTC.
NOTE:
For detailed procedures, refer to “Clear Memory
Mode”. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51, Clear
Memory Mode.>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-83
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

B: DTC P0028 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT RANGE/PER-

FORMANCE (BANK 2)
DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Immediately at fault recognition
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-10, DTC P0028 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID
CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (BANK 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

B21

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
B137 ECM 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33

34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
13

48 49 50 51 52 53 54

B137

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31

B21
22

E2

E72

VVL DIAGNOSIS
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH LH

EN-07709

EN(H4SO)(diag)-84
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 2. Repair the harness
VARIABLE VALVE LIFT DIAGNOSIS OIL and connector.
PRESSURE SWITCH LH CONNECTOR. NOTE:
1) Warm up the engine. In this case, repair
2) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. the following item:
3) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM • Open circuit in
and variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure harness between
switch LH. ECM and variable
4) Measure the resistance of harness between valve lift diagnosis
ECM and variable valve lift diagnosis oil pres- oil pressure switch
sure switch LH connector. LH connector
Connector & terminal • Poor contact of
(B137) No. 13 — (E72) No. 1: coupling connector
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 3. Repair the ground
VARIABLE VALVE LIFT DIAGNOSIS OIL more? short circuit in har-
PRESSURE SWITCH LH CONNECTOR. ness between
Measure the resistance between the variable ECM and variable
valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch LH con- valve lift diagnosis
nector and engine ground. oil pressure switch
Connector & terminal LH connector.
(E72) No. 1 — Engine ground:
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 10 V or more? Repair the short Go to step 4.
VARIABLE VALVE LIFT DIAGNOSIS OIL circuit to power
PRESSURE SWITCH LH CONNECTOR. supply in harness
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. between ECM and
2) Measure the voltage between the variable variable valve lift
valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch LH con- diagnosis oil pres-
nector and engine ground. sure switch LH
Connector & terminal connector.
(E72) No. 1 (+) — Engine ground (–):
4 CHECK DTC. Is DTC displayed? Replace the oil End.
1) Perform the Clear Memory Mode. switching solenoid
2) After idling the engine, check the DTC. valve LH. <Ref. to
NOTE: ME(H4SO)-89, Oil
For detailed procedures, refer to “Clear Memory Switching Solenoid
Mode”. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51, Clear Valve.> After
Memory Mode.> replacement, go to
the next step. Go to
step 5.
5 CHECK DTC. Is DTC displayed? Check for oil rout- End.
1) Perform the Clear Memory Mode. ing.
2) After idling the engine, check the DTC.
NOTE:
For detailed procedures, refer to “Clear Memory
Mode”. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51, Clear
Memory Mode.>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-85
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

C: DTC P0030 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Detected when two consecutive driving cycles with fault occur.
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-11, DTC P0030 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT
(BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

E24
A/F, OXYGEN SENSOR RELAY BATTERY
M/B No.15
12 2 1
4 3
11
10
9
FRONT
E A: B134
B220 OXYGEN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
(A/F)
SENSOR 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
E24
4
3
2
1

C: B136

1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
E2
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
50
51
4
3

B21
E D: B137

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
C18
C19
C5
C6

C9

26 27 28 29 30 31

B21
A : B134

C : B136 ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
D : B137 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33

34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1

42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54

B21
37
36
40
35
34

E2
B220

17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
E 2 6 10 14
19

EN-08630

EN(H4SO)(diag)-86
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 2. Repair the harness
FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR CONNEC- and connector.
TOR. NOTE:
1) Start and warm up the engine. In this case, repair
2) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. the following item:
3) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and • Open circuit in
front oxygen (A/F) sensor. harness between
4) Measure the resistance of harness between ECM and front oxy-
ECM and front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector. gen (A/F) sensor
Connector & terminal connector
(B136) No. 5 — (E24) No. 3: • Poor contact of
(B136) No. 6 — (E24) No. 3: coupling connector
(B136) No. 18 — (E24) No. 2:
(B136) No. 19 — (E24) No. 1:
2 CHECK FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR. Is the resistance 2 — 3 Ω? Go to step 3. Replace the front
Measure the resistance between front oxygen oxygen (A/F) sen-
(A/F) sensor connector terminals. sor. <Ref. to
Terminals FU(H4SO)-37,
No. 3 — No. 4: Front Oxygen (A/F)
Sensor.>
3 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of ECM or Repair the poor Replace the front
Check for poor contact of ECM and front oxygen front oxygen (A/F) sensor con- contact of ECM or oxygen (A/F) sen-
(A/F) sensor connector. nector? front oxygen (A/F) sor. <Ref. to
sensor connector. FU(H4SO)-37,
Front Oxygen (A/F)
Sensor.>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-87
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

D: DTC P0031 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Immediately at fault recognition
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-13, DTC P0031 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT
LOW (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

E24
A/F, OXYGEN SENSOR RELAY BATTERY
M/B No.15
12 2 1
4 3
11
10
9
FRONT
E A: B134
B220 OXYGEN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
(A/F)
SENSOR 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
E24
4
3
2
1

C: B136

1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
E2
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
50
51
4
3

B21
E D: B137

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
C18
C19
C5
C6

C9

26 27 28 29 30 31

B21
A : B134

C : B136 ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
D : B137 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33

34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1

42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54

B21
37
36
40
35
34

E2
B220

17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
E 2 6 10 14
19

EN-08630

EN(H4SO)(diag)-88
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO FRONT OXY- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 2. Repair the power
GEN (A/F) SENSOR. supply line.
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. NOTE:
2) Disconnect the connectors from front oxy- In this case, repair
gen (A/F) sensor. the following item:
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. • Open circuit in
4) Measure the voltage between front oxygen harness between
(A/F) sensor connector and engine ground. A/F, oxygen sen-
Connector & terminal sor relay connector
(E24) No. 4 (+) — Engine ground (–): and front oxygen
(A/F) sensor con-
nector
• Poor contact of
A/F, oxygen sen-
sor relay connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
• Malfunction of A/
F, oxygen sensor
relay
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 3. Repair the harness
FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR CONNEC- and connector.
TOR. NOTE:
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. In this case, repair
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. the following item:
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and • Open circuit in
front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector. harness between
Connector & terminal ECM and front oxy-
(B136) No. 5 — (E24) No. 3: gen (A/F) sensor
(B136) No. 6 — (E24) No. 3: connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
3 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR ECM. Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Go to step 4. Repair the harness
Measure the resistance of harness between and connector.
ECM and chassis ground. NOTE:
Connector & terminal In this case, repair
(B134) No. 3 — Chassis ground: the following item:
(B134) No. 4 — Chassis ground: • Open circuit of
(B134) No. 6 — Chassis ground: harness between
(B137) No. 1 — Chassis ground: ECM and engine
(B137) No. 3 — Chassis ground: ground
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR. Is the resistance 2 — 3 Ω? Repair the poor Replace the front
Measure the resistance between front oxygen contact of ECM oxygen (A/F) sen-
(A/F) sensor connector terminals. connector. sor. <Ref. to
Terminals FU(H4SO)-37,
No. 3 — No. 4: Front Oxygen (A/F)
Sensor.>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-89
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

E: DTC P0032 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Immediately at fault recognition
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-15, DTC P0032 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT
HIGH (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

E24
A/F, OXYGEN SENSOR RELAY BATTERY
M/B No.15
12 2 1
4 3
11
10
9
FRONT
E A: B134
B220 OXYGEN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
(A/F)
SENSOR 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
E24
4
3
2
1

C: B136

1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
E2
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
50
51
4
3

B21
E D: B137

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
C18
C19
C5
C6

C9

26 27 28 29 30 31

B21
A : B134

C : B136 ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
D : B137 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33

34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1

42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54

B21
37
36
40
35
34

E2
B220

17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
E 2 6 10 14
19

EN-08630

EN(H4SO)(diag)-90
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 10 V or more? Repair the short Go to step 2.
FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR CONNEC- circuit to power in
TOR. the harness
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. between ECM and
2) Measure the voltage between ECM and front oxygen (A/F)
chassis ground. sensor connector.
Connector & terminal
(B136) No. 5 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
(B136) No. 6 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
2 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR ECM. Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Repair the poor Repair the harness
1) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. contact of ECM and connector.
2) Measure the resistance between ECM and connector. NOTE:
chassis ground. In this case, repair
Connector & terminal the following item:
(B134) No. 3 — Chassis ground: • Open circuit of
(B134) No. 4 — Chassis ground: harness between
(B134) No. 6 — Chassis ground: ECM and engine
(B137) No. 1 — Chassis ground: ground
(B137) No. 3 — Chassis ground: • Poor contact of
coupling connector

EN(H4SO)(diag)-91
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

F: DTC P0037 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)

DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Detected when two consecutive driving cycles with fault occur.
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-17, DTC P0037 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT
LOW (BANK 1 SENSOR 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

A/F, OXYGEN SENSOR RELAY BATTERY E25

M/B No.15
12
11 1 2
10 3 4

9
E
REAR
B220
OXYGEN
SENSOR A: B134 B: B135

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
E25
2
1
4
3

18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35

E2
C: B136 D: B137
50
53
19
1

B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
E 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
A29
C20
B6

C9

A : B134 B21

B : B135
ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
C : B136 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
D : B137
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1

48 49 50 51 52 53 54

B21
37
36
40
35
34

E2 B220

17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
2 6 10 14
E 19

EN-08631

EN(H4SO)(diag)-92
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO REAR OXY- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 2. Repair the power
GEN SENSOR. supply line.
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. NOTE:
2) Disconnect the connector from rear oxygen In this case, repair
sensor. the following item:
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. • Open circuit in
4) Measure the voltage between rear oxygen harness between
sensor connector and engine ground. A/F, oxygen sen-
Connector & terminal sor relay connector
(E25) No. 2 (+) — Engine ground (–): and rear oxygen
sensor connector
• Poor contact of
A/F, oxygen sen-
sor relay connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 3. Repair the harness
REAR OXYGEN SENSOR CONNECTOR. and connector.
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. NOTE:
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. In this case, repair
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and the following item:
oxygen sensor connector. • Open circuit in
Connector & terminal harness between
(B135) No. 6 — (E25) No. 1: ECM and rear oxy-
gen sensor con-
nector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
3 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR ECM. Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Go to step 4. Repair the harness
Measure the resistance of harness between and connector.
ECM and chassis ground. NOTE:
Connector & terminal In this case, repair
(B134) No. 3 — Chassis ground: the following item:
(B134) No. 4 — Chassis ground: • Open circuit of
(B134) No. 6 — Chassis ground: harness between
(B137) No. 1 — Chassis ground: ECM and engine
(B137) No. 3 — Chassis ground: ground
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK REAR OXYGEN SENSOR. Is the resistance 5 — 7 Ω? Repair the poor Replace the rear
Measure the resistance between rear oxygen contact of ECM oxygen sensor.
sensor connector terminals. connector. <Ref. to
Terminals FU(H4SO)-39,
No. 2 — No. 1: Rear Oxygen Sen-
sor.>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-93
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

G: DTC P0038 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)

DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Detected when two consecutive driving cycles with fault occur.
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-19, DTC P0038 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT
HIGH (BANK 1 SENSOR 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

A/F, OXYGEN SENSOR RELAY BATTERY E25

M/B No.15
12
11 1 2
10 3 4

9
E
REAR
B220
OXYGEN
SENSOR A: B134 B: B135

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
E25
2
1
4
3

18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35

E2
C: B136 D: B137
50
53
19
1

B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
E 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
A29
C20
B6

C9

A : B134 B21

B : B135
ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
C : B136 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
D : B137
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1

48 49 50 51 52 53 54

B21
37
36
40
35
34

E2 B220

17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
2 6 10 14
E 19

EN-08631

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 10 V or more? Repair the short Go to step 2.
REAR OXYGEN SENSOR CONNECTOR. circuit to power in
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. the harness
2) Measure the voltage between ECM and between ECM and
chassis ground. rear oxygen sensor
Connector & terminal connector.
(B135) No. 6 (+) — Chassis ground (–):

EN(H4SO)(diag)-94
11LE_US.book 95 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)

ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

2 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR ECM. Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Repair the poor Repair the harness
1) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. contact of ECM and connector.
2) Measure the resistance between ECM and connector. NOTE:
chassis ground. In this case, repair
Connector & terminal the following item:
(B134) No. 3 — Chassis ground: • Open circuit of
(B134) No. 4 — Chassis ground: harness between
(B134) No. 6 — Chassis ground: ECM and engine
(B137) No. 1 — Chassis ground: ground
(B137) No. 3 — Chassis ground: • Poor contact of
coupling connector

EN(H4SO)(diag)-95
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

H: DTC P0068 MAP/MAF - THROTTLE POSITION CORRELATION

DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Detected when two consecutive driving cycles with fault occur.
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-21, DTC P0068 MAP/MAF - THROTTLE POSITION
CORRELATION, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK AIR INTAKE SYSTEM. Are there holes, loose bolts or Repair the air Go to step 2.
disconnection of hose on air intake system.
intake system?
2 CHECK MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE Is the measured value 73.3 — Go to step 3. Replace the mani-
SENSOR. 106.6 kPa (550 — 800 mmHg, fold absolute pres-
1) Start the engine and warm up engine until 21.65 — 31.50 inHg) when the sure sensor. <Ref.
coolant temperature is higher than 75°C ignition is turned ON, and 20.0 to FU(H4SO)-32,
(167°F). — 46.7 kPa (150 — 350 mmHg, Manifold Absolute
2) For CVT models, set the select lever to “P” 5.91 — 13.78 inHg) during Pressure Sensor.>
range or “N” range, and for MT models, place idling?
the shift lever in the neutral position.
3) Turn the A/C switch to OFF.
4) Turn all the accessory switches to OFF.
5) Read the data of intake manifold pressure
sensor signal using Subaru Select Monitor or
general scan tool.
NOTE:
• Subaru Select Monitor
For detailed operation procedures, refer to
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref.
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni-
tor.>
• General scan tool
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the
“General Scan Tool Instruction Manual”.
3 CHECK THROTTLE OPENING ANGLE. Is the measured value less than Go to step 4. Replace the elec-
Read the data of throttle position signal using 5% when throttle is fully tronic throttle con-
Subaru Select Monitor or general scan tool. closed? trol. <Ref. to
NOTE: FU(H4SO)-15,
• Subaru Select Monitor Throttle Body.>
For detailed operation procedures, refer to
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref.
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni-
tor.>
• General scan tool
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the
“General Scan Tool Instruction Manual”.
4 CHECK THROTTLE OPENING ANGLE. Is the measured value 85% or Replace the mani- Replace the elec-
more when throttle is fully fold absolute pres- tronic throttle con-
open? sure sensor. <Ref. trol. <Ref. to
to FU(H4SO)-32, FU(H4SO)-15,
Manifold Absolute Throttle Body.>
Pressure Sensor.>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-96
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

I: DTC P0076 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1)

DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Immediately at fault recognition
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-23, DTC P0076 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID
CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

B134 ECM
B134

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
15
7

18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34

B21

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
B21 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
23

24

E2 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54

E69

1 2
E69
1

OIL SWITCHING SOLENOID VALVE RH

EN-07625

EN(H4SO)(diag)-97
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND OIL Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 2. Repair the harness
SWITCHING SOLENOID VALVE RH CON- and connector.
NECTOR. NOTE:
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. In this case, repair
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM the following item:
and oil switching solenoid valve RH. • Open circuit in
3) Measure the resistance of harness between harness between
ECM and oil switching solenoid valve RH. ECM and oil
Connector & terminal switching solenoid
(B134) No. 7 — (E69) No. 1: valve RH connec-
(B134) No. 15 — (E69) No. 2: tor
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND OIL Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 3. Repair the short
SWITCHING SOLENOID VALVE RH CON- more? circuit to ground in
NECTOR. harness between
Measure the resistance between ECM and ECM and oil
chassis ground. switching solenoid
Connector & terminal valve RH connec-
(B134) No. 7 — Chassis ground: tor.
(B134) No. 15 — Chassis ground:
3 CHECK OIL SWITCHING SOLENOID VALVE Is the resistance 6 — 12 Ω? Repair the poor Replace the oil
RH. contact of ECM switching solenoid
Measure the resistance between oil switching and oil switching valve RH. <Ref. to
solenoid valve RH terminals. solenoid valve RH ME(H4SO)-89, Oil
Terminals connector. Switching Solenoid
No. 1 — No. 2: Valve.>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-98
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

J: DTC P0077 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1)

DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Immediately at fault recognition
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-24, DTC P0077 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID
CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

B134 ECM
B134

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
15
7

18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34

B21

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
B21 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
23

24

E2 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54

E69

1 2
E69
1

OIL SWITCHING SOLENOID VALVE RH

EN-07625

EN(H4SO)(diag)-99
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND OIL Is the voltage less than 1 V? Go to step 2. Repair the short
SWITCHING SOLENOID VALVE RH CON- circuit to power
NECTOR. supply in harness
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. between ECM and
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM oil switching sole-
and oil switching solenoid valve RH. noid valve RH con-
3) Measure the voltage between ECM and nector.
chassis ground.
Connector & terminal
(B134) No. 7 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
(B134) No. 15 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND OIL Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 3. Repair the harness
SWITCHING SOLENOID VALVE RH CON- and connector.
NECTOR. NOTE:
Measure the resistance of harness between In this case, repair
ECM and oil switching solenoid valve RH con- the following item:
nector. • Open circuit in
Connector & terminal harness between
(B134) No. 7 — (E69) No. 1: ECM and oil
(B134) No. 15 — (E69) No. 2: switching solenoid
valve RH connec-
tor
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
3 CHECK OIL SWITCHING SOLENOID VALVE Is the resistance 6 — 12 Ω? Repair the poor Replace the oil
RH. contact of ECM switching solenoid
Measure the resistance between oil switching and oil switching valve RH. <Ref. to
solenoid valve RH terminals. solenoid valve RH ME(H4SO)-89, Oil
Terminals connector. Switching Solenoid
No. 1 — No. 2: Valve.>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-100
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

K: DTC P0082 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 2)

DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Immediately at fault recognition
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-25, DTC P0082 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID
CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

B134 ECM
B134

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
14
5

18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34

B21

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
B21 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
27

28

E2 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54

E70

1 2
E70
1

OIL SWITCHING SOLENOID VALVE LH

EN-07626

EN(H4SO)(diag)-101
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND OIL Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 2. Repair the harness
SWITCHING SOLENOID VALVE LH CON- and connector.
NECTOR. NOTE:
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. In this case, repair
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM the following item:
and oil switching solenoid valve LH. • Open circuit in
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and harness between
oil switching solenoid valve LH. ECM and oil
Connector & terminal switching solenoid
(B134) No. 5 — (E70) No. 1: valve LH connec-
(B134) No. 14 — (E70) No. 2: tor
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND OIL Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 3. Repair the short
SWITCHING SOLENOID VALVE LH CON- more? circuit to ground in
NECTOR. harness between
Measure the resistance between ECM and ECM and oil
chassis ground. switching solenoid
Connector & terminal valve LH connec-
(B134) No. 5 — Chassis ground: tor.
(B134) No. 14 — Chassis ground:
3 CHECK OIL SWITCHING SOLENOID VALVE Is the resistance 6 — 12 Ω? Repair the poor Replace the oil
LH. contact of ECM switching solenoid
Measure the resistance between oil switching and oil switching valve LH. <Ref. to
solenoid valve LH terminals. solenoid valve LH ME(H4SO)-89, Oil
Terminals connector. Switching Solenoid
No. 1 — No. 2: Valve.>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-102
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

L: DTC P0083 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 2)

DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Immediately at fault recognition
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-25, DTC P0083 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID
CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

B134 ECM
B134

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
14
5

18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34

B21

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
B21 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
27

28

E2 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54

E70

1 2
E70
1

OIL SWITCHING SOLENOID VALVE LH

EN-07626

EN(H4SO)(diag)-103
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND OIL Is the voltage less than 1 V? Go to step 2. Repair the short
SWITCHING SOLENOID VALVE LH CON- circuit to power
NECTOR. supply in harness
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. between ECM and
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM oil switching sole-
and oil switching solenoid valve LH. noid valve LH con-
3) Measure the voltage between ECM and nector.
chassis ground.
Connector & terminal
(B134) No. 5 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
(B134) No. 14 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND OIL Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 3. Repair the harness
SWITCHING SOLENOID VALVE LH CON- and connector.
NECTOR. NOTE:
Measure the resistance between ECM and oil In this case, repair
switching solenoid valve LH connector. the following item:
Connector & terminal • Open circuit in
(B134) No. 5 — (E70) No. 1: harness between
(B134) No. 14 — (E70) No. 2: ECM and oil
switching solenoid
valve LH connec-
tor
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
3 CHECK OIL SWITCHING SOLENOID VALVE Is the resistance 6 — 12 Ω? Repair the poor Replace the oil
LH. contact of ECM switching solenoid
Measure the resistance between oil switching and oil switching valve LH. <Ref. to
solenoid valve LH terminals. solenoid valve LH ME(H4SO)-89, Oil
Terminals connector. Switching Solenoid
No. 1 — No. 2: Valve.>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-104
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

M: DTC P0101 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFOR-

MANCE
DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Detected when two consecutive driving cycles with fault occur.
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-26, DTC P0101 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT
RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
• Engine stalls.
• Poor driving performance
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is any other DTC displayed? Check the appro- Replace the mass
priate DTC using air flow and intake
the “List of Diag- air temperature
nostic Trouble sensor. <Ref. to
Code (DTC)”. FU(H4SO)-31,
<Ref. to Mass Air Flow and
EN(H4SO)(diag)- Intake Air Temper-
75, List of Diagnos- ature Sensor.>
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-105
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

N: DTC P0102 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Immediately at fault recognition
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-29, DTC P0102 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT
LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
• Engine stalls.
• Poor driving performance
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No.16
4
3

2
1
3

B220

MASS AIR FLOW & E

INTAKE AIR
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR

B3
2

* * : TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT

*
B83
C31
C10

C22
B30

C11

ECM

B: B135 C: B136

B3 B: B135 C: B136 B220

B83
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 17
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1 5 9 13
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 4 5 6 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 2 6 10 14
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 19
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35

EN-08674

EN(H4SO)(diag)-106
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the voltage less than 0.2 V? Go to step 2. Even if DTC is
1) Start the engine. detected, the cir-
2) Read the data of air flow sensor signal using cuit has returned to
Subaru Select Monitor or general scan tool. a normal condition
NOTE: at this time. Repro-
• Subaru Select Monitor duce the failure,
For detailed operation procedures, refer to and then perform
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref. the diagnosis
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni- again.
tor.> NOTE:
• General scan tool In this case, tem-
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the porary poor con-
general scan tool operation manual. tact of connector,
temporary open or
short circuit of har-
ness may be the
cause.
2 CHECK POWER SUPPLY OF MASS AIR Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 3. Repair the harness
FLOW AND INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE and connector.
SENSOR. NOTE:
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. In this case, repair
2) Disconnect the connectors from the mass the following item:
air flow and intake air temperature sensor. • Open circuit in
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. harness between
4) Measure the voltage between mass air flow main relay and
and intake air temperature sensor connector mass air flow and
and engine ground. intake air tempera-
Connector & terminal ture sensor con-
(B3) No. 3 (+) — Engine ground (–): nector
• Poor contact of
main relay connec-
tor
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 4. Repair the open
MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR TEM- circuit in harness
PERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR. between ECM and
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. the mass air flow
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. and intake air tem-
3) Measure the resistance of harness between perature sensor
ECM and the mass air flow and intake air tem- connector.
perature sensor connector.
Connector & terminal
(B136) No. 22 — (B3) No. 5:
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 5. Repair the short
MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR TEM- more? circuit to ground in
PERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR. harness between
Measure the resistance between ECM and ECM and mass air
chassis ground. flow and intake air
Connector & terminal temperature sen-
(B136) No. 22 — Chassis ground: sor connector.
5 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of ECM or Repair the poor Replace the mass
Check for poor contact of ECM and mass air mass air flow and intake air contact of ECM or air flow and intake
flow and intake air temperature sensor connec- temperature sensor connector? mass air flow and air temperature
tor. intake air tempera- sensor. <Ref. to
ture sensor con- FU(H4SO)-31,
nector. Mass Air Flow and
Intake Air Temper-
ature Sensor.>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-107
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

O: DTC P0103 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT

DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Immediately at fault recognition
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-31, DTC P0103 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT
HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
• Engine stalls.
• Poor driving performance
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No.16
4
3

2
1
3

B220

MASS AIR FLOW & E

INTAKE AIR
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR

B3
2

* * : TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT

*
B83
C31
C10

C22
B30

C11

ECM

B: B135 C: B136

B3 B: B135 C: B136 B220

B83
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 17
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1 5 9 13
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 4 5 6 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 2 6 10 14
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 19
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35

EN-08674

EN(H4SO)(diag)-108
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the voltage 5 V or more? Go to step 2. Even if DTC is
1) Start the engine. detected, the cir-
2) Read the data of air flow sensor signal using cuit has returned to
Subaru Select Monitor or general scan tool. a normal condition
NOTE: at this time. Repro-
• Subaru Select Monitor duce the failure,
For detailed operation procedures, refer to and then perform
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref. the diagnosis
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni- again.
tor.> NOTE:
• General scan tool In this case, tem-
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the porary poor con-
general scan tool operation manual. tact of connector,
temporary open or
short circuit of har-
ness may be the
cause.
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 5 V or more? Repair the short Go to step 3.
MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR TEM- circuit of harness
PERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR. to power supply
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. between ECM and
2) Disconnect the connectors from the mass mass air flow and
air flow and intake air temperature sensor. intake air tempera-
3) Start the engine. ture sensor con-
4) Read the data of air flow sensor signal using nector.
Subaru Select Monitor or general scan tool.
NOTE:
• Subaru Select Monitor
For detailed operation procedures, refer to
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref.
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni-
tor.>
• General scan tool
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the
general scan tool operation manual.
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Go to step 4. Repair the harness
MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR TEM- and connector.
PERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR. NOTE:
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. In this case, repair
2) Measure the resistance of harness between the following item:
mass air flow and intake air temperature sensor • Open circuit in
connector and engine ground. harness between
Connector & terminal ECM and mass air
(B3) No. 4 — Engine ground: flow and intake air
temperature sen-
sor connector
• Poor contact of
ECM connector
4 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of mass Repair the poor Replace the mass
Check for poor contact of mass air flow and air flow and intake air tempera- contact of mass air air flow and intake
intake air temperature sensor connector. ture sensor connector? flow and intake air air temperature
temperature sen- sensor. <Ref. to
sor connector. FU(H4SO)-31,
Mass Air Flow and
Intake Air Temper-
ature Sensor.>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-109
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

P: DTC P0107 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE/BAROMETRIC PRESSURE

CIRCUIT LOW INPUT
DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Immediately at fault recognition
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-33, DTC P0107 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE/
BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

MANIFOLD
ABSOLUTE
PRESSURE E21
SENSOR

1 2 3
2
1
3

E21

A: B134

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34

E2
20
19
7

B21

D: B137

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31

B21

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
A29
D20
A19

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33

34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
A: B134
42 43 44 45 46 47
ECM
D: B137 48 49 50 51 52 53 54

EN-07628

EN(H4SO)(diag)-110
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the measured value less than Go to step 2. Even if DTC is
1) Start the engine. 13.3 kPa (100 mmHg, 3.94 detected, the cir-
2) Read the data of intake manifold absolute inHg)? cuit has returned to
pressure signal using Subaru Select Monitor or a normal condition
general scan tool. at this time. Repro-
NOTE: duce the failure,
• Subaru Select Monitor and then perform
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the diagnosis
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref. again.
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni- NOTE:
tor.> In this case, tem-
• General scan tool porary poor con-
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the tact of connector,
general scan tool operation manual. temporary open or
short circuit of har-
ness may be the
cause.
2 CHECK POWER SUPPLY OF MANIFOLD Is the voltage 4.5 V or more? Go to step 3. Repair the harness
ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR. and connector.
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. NOTE:
2) Disconnect the connector from manifold In this case, repair
absolute pressure sensor. the following item:
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. • Open circuit of
4) Measure the voltage between manifold harness between
absolute pressure sensor connector and ECM and manifold
engine ground. absolute pressure
Connector & terminal sensor connector.
(E21) No. 3 (+) — Engine ground (–): • Poor contact of
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 4. Repair the harness
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SEN- and connector.
SOR CONNECTOR. NOTE:
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. In this case, repair
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. the following item:
3) Measure the resistance of harness between • Open circuit of
ECM and manifold absolute pressure sensor harness between
connector. ECM and manifold
Connector & terminal absolute pressure
(B137) No. 20 — (E21) No. 1: sensor connector.
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 5. Repair ground
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SEN- more? short circuit of har-
SOR CONNECTOR. ness between
Measure the resistance between ECM and ECM and manifold
chassis ground. absolute pressure
Connector & terminal sensor connector.
(B137) No. 20 — Chassis ground:
5 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of ECM or Repair the poor Replace the mani-
Check for poor contact of ECM and manifold manifold absolute pressure contact of ECM or fold absolute pres-
absolute pressure sensor connector. sensor connector? manifold absolute sure sensor. <Ref.
pressure sensor to FU(H4SO)-32,
connector. Manifold Absolute
Pressure Sensor.>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-111
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Q: DTC P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE/BAROMETRIC PRESSURE

CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT
DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Immediately at fault recognition
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-35, DTC P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE/
BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

MANIFOLD
ABSOLUTE
PRESSURE E21
SENSOR

1 2 3
2
1
3

E21

A: B134

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34

E2
20
19
7

B21

D: B137

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31

B21

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
A29
D20
A19

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33

34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
A: B134
42 43 44 45 46 47
ECM
D: B137 48 49 50 51 52 53 54

EN-07628

EN(H4SO)(diag)-112
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the measured value 119.5 Go to step 2. Even if DTC is
1) Start the engine. kPa (896.5 mmHg, 35.29 inHg) detected, the cir-
2) Read the data of intake manifold absolute or more? cuit has returned to
pressure signal using Subaru Select Monitor or a normal condition
general scan tool. at this time. Repro-
NOTE: duce the failure,
• Subaru Select Monitor and then perform
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the diagnosis
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref. again.
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni- NOTE:
tor.> In this case, tem-
• General scan tool porary poor con-
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the tact of connector,
general scan tool operation manual. temporary open or
short circuit of har-
ness may be the
cause.
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the measured value 119.5 Repair the short Go to step 3.
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SEN- kPa (896.5 mmHg, 35.29 inHg) circuit to power in
SOR CONNECTOR. or more? harness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ECM and manifold
2) Disconnect the connector from manifold absolute pressure
absolute pressure sensor. sensor connector.
3) Start the engine.
4) Read the data of intake manifold absolute
pressure signal using Subaru Select Monitor or
general scan tool.
NOTE:
• Subaru Select Monitor
For detailed operation procedures, refer to
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref.
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni-
tor.>
• General scan tool
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the
general scan tool operation manual.
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Go to step 4. Repair the harness
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SEN- and connector.
SOR CONNECTOR. NOTE:
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. In this case, repair
2) Measure the resistance of harness between the following item:
manifold absolute pressure sensor connector • Open circuit of
and engine ground. harness between
Connector & terminal ECM and manifold
(E21) No. 2 — Engine ground: absolute pressure
sensor connector.
• Poor contact of
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of mani- Repair the poor Replace the mani-
Check for poor contact of manifold absolute fold absolute pressure sensor contact of mani- fold absolute pres-
pressure sensor connector. connector? fold absolute pres- sure sensor. <Ref.
sure sensor to FU(H4SO)-32,
connector. Manifold Absolute
Pressure Sensor.>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-113
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

R: DTC P0111 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT RANGE/PER-

FORMANCE
DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Detected when two consecutive driving cycles with fault occur.
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-37, DTC P0111 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1 CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
• Poor driving performance
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERA- Is the engine coolant tempera- Replace the mass Check for DTC
TURE. ture 75°C (167°F) or higher? air flow and intake P0125. <Ref. to
1) Start the engine and warm up completely. air temperature EN(H4SO)(diag)-
2) Measure the engine coolant temperature sensor. <Ref. to 127, DTC P0125
using the Subaru Select Monitor or general FU(H4SO)-31, INSUFFICIENT
scan tool. Mass Air Flow and COOLANT TEM-
NOTE: Intake Air Temper- PERATURE FOR
• Subaru Select Monitor ature Sensor.> CLOSED LOOP
For detailed operation procedures, refer to FUEL CONTROL,
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref. Diagnostic Proce-
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni- dure with Diagnos-
tor.> tic Trouble Code
• General scan tool (DTC).>
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the
general scan tool operation manual.

EN(H4SO)(diag)-114
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

S: DTC P0112 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW

DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Immediately at fault recognition
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-39, DTC P0112 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1 CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
• Poor driving performance
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No.16
4
3

2
1
3

B220

MASS AIR FLOW & E

INTAKE AIR
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR

B3
2

* * : TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT

*
B83
C31
C10

C22
B30

C11

ECM

B: B135 C: B136

B3 B: B135 C: B136 B220

B83
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 17
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1 5 9 13
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 4 5 6 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 2 6 10 14
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 19
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35

EN-08674

EN(H4SO)(diag)-115
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the intake air temperature Go to step 2. Even if DTC is
1) Start the engine. 120°C (248°F) or more? detected, the cir-
2) Read the data of intake air temperature sen- cuit has returned to
sor signal using Subaru Select Monitor or gen- a normal condition
eral scan tool. at this time. Repro-
NOTE: duce the failure,
• Subaru Select Monitor and then perform
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the diagnosis
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref. again.
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni- NOTE:
tor.> In this case, tem-
• General scan tool porary poor con-
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the tact of connector,
general scan tool operation manual. temporary open or
short circuit of har-
ness may be the
cause.
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Replace the mass Repair the short
MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR TEM- more? air flow and intake circuit to ground in
PERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR. air temperature harness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. sensor. <Ref. to ECM and mass air
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM and FU(H4SO)-31, flow and intake air
the mass air flow and intake air temperature Mass Air Flow and temperature sen-
sensor. Intake Air Temper- sor connector.
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and ature Sensor.>
chassis ground.
Connector & terminal
(B136) No. 31 — Chassis ground:

EN(H4SO)(diag)-116
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

T: DTC P0113 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH

DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Immediately at fault recognition
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-41, DTC P0113 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1 CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
• Poor driving performance
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No.16
4
3

2
1
3

B220

MASS AIR FLOW & E

INTAKE AIR
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR

B3
2

* * : TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT

*
B83
C31
C10

C22
B30

C11

ECM

B: B135 C: B136

B3 B: B135 C: B136 B220

B83
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 17
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1 5 9 13
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 4 5 6 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 2 6 10 14
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 19
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35

EN-08674

EN(H4SO)(diag)-117
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the intake air temperature Go to step 2. Even if DTC is
1) Start the engine. less than –40°C (–40°F)? detected, the cir-
2) Read the data of intake air temperature sen- cuit has returned to
sor signal using Subaru Select Monitor or gen- a normal condition
eral scan tool. at this time. Repro-
NOTE: duce the failure,
• Subaru Select Monitor and then perform
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the diagnosis
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref. again.
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni- NOTE:
tor.> In this case, tem-
• General scan tool porary poor con-
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the tact of connector,
general scan tool operation manual. temporary open or
short circuit of har-
ness may be the
cause.
2 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of ECM or Repair the poor Go to step 3.
Check for poor contact of ECM and mass air mass air flow and intake air contact of ECM or
flow and intake air temperature sensor connec- temperature sensor connector? mass air flow and
tor. intake air tempera-
ture sensor con-
nector.
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 4. Repair the harness
MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR TEM- and connector.
PERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR. NOTE:
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. In this case, repair
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM and the following item:
the mass air flow and intake air temperature • Open circuit in
sensor. harness between
3) Measure the resistance of harness between ECM and mass air
ECM and the mass air flow and intake air tem- flow and intake air
perature sensor connector. temperature sen-
Connector & terminal sor connector
(B136) No. 31 — (B3) No. 1: • Poor contact of
(B135) No. 30 — (B3) No. 2: joint connector
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 5 V or more? Repair the short Replace the mass
MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR TEM- circuit of harness air flow and intake
PERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR. to power supply air temperature
1) Connect all connectors. between ECM and sensor. <Ref. to
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. mass air flow and FU(H4SO)-31,
3) Measure the voltage between ECM and intake air tempera- Mass Air Flow and
chassis ground. ture sensor con- Intake Air Temper-
Connector & terminal nector. ature Sensor.>
(B136) No. 31 (+) — Chassis ground (–):

EN(H4SO)(diag)-118
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

U: DTC P0117 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT LOW

DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Immediately at fault recognition
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-43, DTC P0117 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Hard to start
• Improper idling
• Poor driving performance
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
2

E8

E2
19
8

B21
D22

A29

A: B134
ECM
D: B137

B21

E8 A: B134 D: B137 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
1 2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 26 27 28 29 30 31 42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54

EN-08632

EN(H4SO)(diag)-119
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the engine coolant tempera- Go to step 2. Even if DTC is
1) Start the engine. ture 150°C (302°F) or higher? detected, the cir-
2) Read the data of engine coolant tempera- cuit has returned to
ture sensor signal using Subaru Select Monitor a normal condition
or general scan tool. at this time. Repro-
NOTE: duce the failure,
• Subaru Select Monitor and then perform
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the diagnosis
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref. again.
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni- NOTE:
tor.> In this case, tem-
• General scan tool porary poor con-
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the tact of connector,
general scan tool operation manual. temporary open or
short circuit of har-
ness may be the
cause.
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND EN- Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Replace the Repair short cir-
GINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR more? engine coolant cuit in harness to
CONNECTOR. temperature sen- ground between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. sor. <Ref. to ECM and engine
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and FU(H4SO)-23, coolant tempera-
engine coolant temperature sensor. Engine Coolant ture sensor con-
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and Temperature Sen- nector.
chassis ground. sor.>
Connector & terminal
(B137) No. 22 — Chassis ground:

EN(H4SO)(diag)-120
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

V: DTC P0118 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT HIGH

DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Immediately at fault recognition
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-45, DTC P0118 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Hard to start
• Improper idling
• Poor driving performance
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
2

E8

E2
19
8

B21
D22

A29

A: B134
ECM
D: B137

B21

E8 A: B134 D: B137 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
1 2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 26 27 28 29 30 31 42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54

EN-08632

EN(H4SO)(diag)-121
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the engine coolant tempera- Go to step 2. Even if DTC is
1) Start the engine. ture less than –40°C (–40°F)? detected, the cir-
2) Read the data of engine coolant tempera- cuit has returned to
ture sensor signal using Subaru Select Monitor a normal condition
or general scan tool. at this time. Repro-
NOTE: duce the failure,
• Subaru Select Monitor and then perform
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the diagnosis
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref. again.
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni- NOTE:
tor.> In this case, tem-
• General scan tool porary poor con-
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the tact of connector,
general scan tool operation manual. temporary open or
short circuit of har-
ness may be the
cause.
2 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of ECM or Repair the poor Go to step 3.
Check for poor contact of ECM and engine cool- engine coolant temperature contact of ECM or
ant temperature sensor connector. sensor connector? engine coolant
temperature sen-
sor connector.
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND EN- Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 4. Repair the harness
GINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR and connector.
CONNECTOR. NOTE:
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. In this case, repair
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and the following item:
engine coolant temperature sensor. • Open circuit in
3) Measure the resistance of harness between harness between
ECM and engine coolant temperature sensor ECM and engine
connector. coolant tempera-
Connector & terminal ture sensor con-
(B137) No. 22 — (E8) No. 2: nector
(B134) No. 29 — (E8) No. 1: • Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND EN- Is the voltage 5 V or more? Repair the short Replace the
GINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR circuit to power in engine coolant
CONNECTOR. harness between temperature sen-
1) Connect all connectors. ECM and engine sor. <Ref. to
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. coolant tempera- FU(H4SO)-23,
3) Measure the voltage between ECM and ture sensor con- Engine Coolant
chassis ground. nector. Temperature Sen-
Connector & terminal sor.>
(B137) No. 22 (+) — Chassis ground (–):

EN(H4SO)(diag)-122
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

W: DTC P0122 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “A” CIRCUIT

LOW
DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Immediately at fault recognition
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-47, DTC P0122 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SEN-
SOR/SWITCH “A” CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
• Engine stalls.
• Poor driving performance
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

BATTERY
ELECTRONIC M/B No. 13
THROTTLE
B220
CONTROL RELAY
16 M/B No. 16
13 3 4
14
MAIN RELAY B220
15
E
B17
B7

ECM

A : B134 B : B135 C : B136 D : B137

A 29
A 19

A 28

A 18
D3
A6

A3

A1
A2
A4

D1

C4

*
*
B138

B21
37
36

35
40

34

20
39
38

17
18
19

E2
5

6
1

: TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL

* ARRANGEMENT
E E ELECTRONIC E
E57 THROTTLE
CONTROL

E57 B138 B21 A: B134 B: B135

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1 2 3 4 5 6 5 6 7 8 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
B220 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47 C: B136 D: B137
17 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2 6 10 14
19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-07785

EN(H4SO)(diag)-123
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 2. Repair the short
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL CON- more? circuit to ground in
NECTOR. harness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ECM and elec-
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and tronic throttle con-
electronic throttle control. trol connector.
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and
chassis ground.
Connector & terminal
(B134) No. 19 — Chassis ground:
(B134) No. 18 — Chassis ground:
(B134) No. 18 — (B136) No. 4:
2 CHECK SHORT CIRCUIT INSIDE THE ECM. Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Replace the elec- Repair the short
1) Connect the connector to ECM. more? tronic throttle con- circuit to ground in
2) Measure the resistance between electronic trol. <Ref. to harness between
throttle control connector and engine ground. FU(H4SO)-15, ECM and elec-
Connector & terminal Throttle Body.> tronic throttle con-
(E57) No. 6 — Engine ground: trol connector.
Replace the ECM if
defective. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-41,
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-124
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

X: DTC P0123 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “A” CIRCUIT

HIGH
DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Immediately at fault recognition
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-49, DTC P0123 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SEN-
SOR/SWITCH “A” CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
• Engine stalls.
• Poor driving performance
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

BATTERY
ELECTRONIC M/B No. 13
THROTTLE
B220
CONTROL RELAY
16 M/B No. 16
13 3 4
14
MAIN RELAY B220
15
E
B17
B7

ECM

A : B134 B : B135 C : B136 D : B137

A 29
A 19

A 28

A 18
D3
A6

A3

A1
A2
A4

D1

C4

*
*
B138

B21
37
36

35
40

34

20
39
38

17
18
19

E2
5

6
1

: TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL

* ARRANGEMENT
E E ELECTRONIC E
E57 THROTTLE
CONTROL

E57 B138 B21 A: B134 B: B135

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1 2 3 4 5 6 5 6 7 8 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
B220 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47 C: B136 D: B137
17 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2 6 10 14
19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-07785

EN(H4SO)(diag)-125
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 2. Repair the harness
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL CON- and connector.
NECTOR. NOTE:
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. In this case, repair
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and the following item:
electronic throttle control. • Open circuit in
3) Measure the resistance of harness between harness between
ECM and electronic throttle control connector. ECM and electron-
Connector & terminal ic throttle control
(B134) No. 18 — (E57) No. 6: connector
(B134) No. 29 — (E57) No. 3: • Poor contact of
coupling connector
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Go to step 3. Repair the harness
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL CON- and connector.
NECTOR. NOTE:
1) Connect the connector to ECM. In this case, repair
2) Measure the resistance between electronic the following item:
throttle control connector and engine ground. • Open circuit of
Connector & terminal harness between
(E57) No. 3 — Engine ground: ECM and engine
ground
• Poor contact of
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 5 V or more? Repair the short Go to step 4.
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL CON- circuit to power in
NECTOR. harness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. ECM and elec-
2) Measure the voltage between electronic tronic throttle con-
throttle control connector and engine ground. trol connector.
Connector & terminal
(E57) No. 6 (+) — Engine ground (–):
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Repair the poor Repair the short
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL CON- more? contact of elec- circuit to power in
NECTOR. tronic throttle con- harness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. trol connector. ECM and elec-
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. Replace the elec- tronic throttle con-
3) Measure the resistance between ECM con- tronic throttle con- trol connector.
nectors. trol if defective.
Connector & terminal <Ref. to
(B134) No. 19 — (B134) No. 18: FU(H4SO)-15,
Throttle Body.>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-126
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Y: DTC P0125 INSUFFICIENT COOLANT TEMPERATURE FOR CLOSED LOOP

FUEL CONTROL
DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Detected when two consecutive driving cycles with fault occur.
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-51, DTC P0125 INSUFFICIENT COOLANT TEMPERA-
TURE FOR CLOSED LOOP FUEL CONTROL, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Engine does not return to idle.
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK TIRE SIZE. Is the tire size as specified and Go to step 2. Replace the tire.
the same size as three other
wheels?
2 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT. Is the engine coolant normal? Go to step 3. Fill or replace the
Check the following items: engine coolant.
• Amount of engine coolant <Ref. to
• Engine coolant freeze CO(H4SO)-13,
• Contamination of engine coolant REPLACEMENT,
Engine Coolant.>
3 CHECK THERMOSTAT. Does the thermostat remain Replace the ther- Replace the
opened? mostat. <Ref. to engine coolant
CO(H4SO)-17, temperature sen-
Thermostat.> sor. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-23,
Engine Coolant
Temperature Sen-
sor.>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-127
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Z: DTC P0126 INSUFFICIENT ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE FOR STA-

BLE OPERATION
DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Detected when two consecutive driving cycles with fault occur.
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-53, DTC P0126 INSUFFICIENT ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE FOR STABLE OPERATION, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Hard to start
• Improper idling
• Poor driving performance
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Is the resistance of engine cool- Repair the poor Replace the
SENSOR. ant temperature sensor differ- contact of ECM engine coolant
1) Disconnect the connectors from the engine ent between when engine connector. temperature sen-
coolant temperature sensor. coolant is cold and after sor. <Ref. to
2) Measure the resistance between engine warmed up? FU(H4SO)-23,
coolant temperature sensor terminals when the Engine Coolant
engine coolant is cold and after warmed up. Temperature Sen-
Terminals sor.>
No. 1 — No. 2:

EN(H4SO)(diag)-128
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

AA:DTC P0128 COOLANT THERMOSTAT (ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

BELOW THERMOSTAT REGULATING TEMPERATURE)
DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Detected when two consecutive driving cycles with fault occur.
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-55, DTC P0128 COOLANT THERMOSTAT (ENGINE
COOLANT TEMPERATURE BELOW THERMOSTAT REGULATING TEMPERATURE), Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Thermostat remains open.
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT. Is the engine coolant amount Go to step 2. Refill the engine
normal? coolant. <Ref. to
CO(H4SO)-13,
Engine Coolant.>
2 CHECK RADIATOR FAN. Does the radiator fan continu- Repair radiator fan Replace the ther-
1) Start the engine. ously rotate for 3 minutes or circuit. <Ref. to mostat. <Ref. to
2) Check the radiator fan operation. more during idling? CO(H4SO)-23, CO(H4SO)-17,
Radiator Main Fan Thermostat.>
and Fan Motor.>
and <Ref. to
CO(H4SO)-24,
Radiator Sub Fan
and Fan Motor.>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-129
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

AB:DTC P0131 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Immediately at fault recognition
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-57, DTC P0131 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE
(BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

E24
A/F, OXYGEN SENSOR RELAY BATTERY
M/B No.15
12 2 1
4 3
11
10
9
FRONT
E A: B134
B220 OXYGEN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
(A/F)
SENSOR 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
E24
4
3
2
1

C: B136

1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
E2
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
50
51
4
3

B21
E D: B137

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
C18
C19
C5
C6

C9

26 27 28 29 30 31

B21
A : B134

C : B136 ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
D : B137 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33

34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1

42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54

B21
37
36
40
35
34

E2
B220

17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
E 2 6 10 14
19

EN-08630

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR Has water entered the connec- Completely Go to step 2.
CONNECTOR AND COUPLING CONNEC- tor? remove any water
TOR. inside.

EN(H4SO)(diag)-130
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 3. Repair the ground
FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR CONNEC- more? short circuit of har-
TOR. ness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ECM and front oxy-
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and gen (A/F) sensor
front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector. connector.
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and
chassis ground.
Connector & terminal
(B136) No. 18 — Chassis ground:
(B136) No. 19 — Chassis ground:
3 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of front Repair the poor Replace the front
Check for poor contact of the front oxygen (A/F) oxygen (A/F) sensor connec- contact of front oxygen (A/F) sen-
sensor connector. tor? oxygen (A/F) sen- sor. <Ref. to
sor connector. FU(H4SO)-37,
Front Oxygen (A/F)
Sensor.>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-131
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

AC:DTC P0132 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Immediately at fault recognition
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-59, DTC P0132 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE
(BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

E24
A/F, OXYGEN SENSOR RELAY BATTERY
M/B No.15
12 2 1
4 3
11
10
9
FRONT
E A: B134
B220 OXYGEN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
(A/F)
SENSOR 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
E24
4
3
2
1

C: B136

1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
E2
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
50
51
4
3

B21
E D: B137

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
C18
C19
C5
C6

C9

26 27 28 29 30 31

B21
A : B134

C : B136 ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
D : B137 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33

34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1

42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54

B21
37
36
40
35
34

E2
B220

17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
E 2 6 10 14
19

EN-08630

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR Has water entered the connec- Completely Go to step 2.
CONNECTOR AND COUPLING CONNEC- tor? remove any water
TOR. inside.

EN(H4SO)(diag)-132
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 8 V or more? Repair the short Replace the front
FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR CONNEC- circuit to power in oxygen (A/F) sen-
TOR. the harness sor. <Ref. to
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. between ECM and FU(H4SO)-37,
2) Disconnect the connectors from front oxy- front oxygen (A/F) Front Oxygen (A/F)
gen (A/F) sensor. sensor connector. Sensor.>
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON.
4) Measure the voltage between ECM and
chassis ground.
Connector & terminal
(B136) No. 18 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
(B136) No. 19 (+) — Chassis ground (–):

EN(H4SO)(diag)-133
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

AD:DTC P0133 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT SLOW RESPONSE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Detected when two consecutive driving cycles with fault occur.
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-61, DTC P0133 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT SLOW RE-
SPONSE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM. Is there any fault in exhaust Repair the exhaust Replace the front
NOTE: system? system. oxygen (A/F) sen-
Check the following items. sor. <Ref. to
• Loose installation of front portion of exhaust FU(H4SO)-37,
pipe onto cylinder heads Front Oxygen (A/F)
• Loose connection between front exhaust pipe Sensor.>
and front catalytic converter
• Damage of exhaust pipe resulting in a hole

EN(H4SO)(diag)-134
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

AE:DTC P0134 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIVITY DETECTED (BANK 1 SEN-

SOR 1)
DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Immediately at fault recognition
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-64, DTC P0134 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIVITY
DETECTED (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

E24
A/F, OXYGEN SENSOR RELAY BATTERY
M/B No.15
12 2 1
4 3
11
10
9
FRONT
E A: B134
B220 OXYGEN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
(A/F)
SENSOR 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
E24
4
3
2
1

C: B136

1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
E2
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
50
51
4
3

B21
E D: B137

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
C18
C19
C5
C6

C9

26 27 28 29 30 31

B21
A : B134

C : B136 ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
D : B137 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33

34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1

42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54

B21
37
36
40
35
34

E2
B220

17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
E 2 6 10 14
19

EN-08630

EN(H4SO)(diag)-135
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 2. Repair the harness
FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR CONNEC- and connector.
TOR. NOTE:
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. In this case, repair
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and the following item:
front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector. • Open circuit in
3) Measure the resistance of harness between harness between
ECM and front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector. ECM and front oxy-
Connector & terminal gen (A/F) sensor
(B136) No. 18 — (E24) No. 2: connector
(B136) No. 19 — (E24) No. 1: • Poor contact of
coupling connector
2 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of ECM or Repair the poor Replace the front
Check for poor contact of ECM and front oxygen front oxygen (A/F) sensor con- contact of ECM or oxygen (A/F) sen-
(A/F) sensor connector. nector? front oxygen (A/F) sor. <Ref. to
sensor connector. FU(H4SO)-37,
Front Oxygen (A/F)
Sensor.>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-136
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

AF:DTC P0137 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)

DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Detected when two consecutive driving cycles with fault occur.
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-66, DTC P0137 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE
(BANK 1 SENSOR 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

A/F, OXYGEN SENSOR RELAY BATTERY E25

M/B No.15
12
11 1 2
10 3 4

9
E
REAR
B220
OXYGEN
SENSOR A: B134 B: B135

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
E25
2
1
4
3

18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35

E2
C: B136 D: B137
50
53
19
1

B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
E 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
A29
C20
B6

C9

A : B134 B21

B : B135
ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
C : B136 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
D : B137
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1

48 49 50 51 52 53 54

B21
37
36
40
35
34

E2 B220

17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
2 6 10 14
E 19

EN-08631

EN(H4SO)(diag)-137
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK REAR OXYGEN SENSOR DATA. Is the voltage 490 mV or more? Go to step 5. Go to step 2.
1) Warm up the engine until engine coolant
temperature is higher than 75°C (167°F), and
keep the engine speed at 3,000 rpm. (2 minutes
maximum)
2) Read the data of rear oxygen sensor signal
using Subaru Select Monitor or general scan
tool.
NOTE:
• Subaru Select Monitor
For detailed operation procedures, refer to
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref.
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni-
tor.>
• General scan tool
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the
general scan tool operation manual.
2 CHECK REAR OXYGEN SENSOR CONNEC- Has water entered the connec- Completely Go to step 3.
TOR AND COUPLING CONNECTOR. tor? remove any water
inside.
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 4. Repair the harness
REAR OXYGEN SENSOR CONNECTOR. and connector.
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. NOTE:
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM and In this case, repair
rear oxygen sensor. the following item:
3) Measure the resistance of harness between • Open circuit in
ECM and rear oxygen sensor connector. harness between
Connector & terminal ECM and rear oxy-
(B136) No. 20 — (E25) No. 3: gen sensor con-
(B134) No. 29 — (E25) No. 4: nector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 0.2 — 0.5 V? Replace the rear Repair the harness
REAR OXYGEN SENSOR CONNECTOR. oxygen sensor. and connector.
1) Connect the connector to ECM. <Ref. to NOTE:
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. FU(H4SO)-39, In this case, repair
3) Measure the voltage between rear oxygen Rear Oxygen Sen- the following item:
sensor connector and chassis ground. sor.> • Open circuit in
Connector & terminal harness between
(E25) No. 3 (+) — Chassis ground (–): ECM and rear oxy-
gen sensor con-
nector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
• Poor contact of
ECM connector
5 CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM. Is there any fault in exhaust Repair or replace Replace the rear
Check exhaust system parts. system? faulty parts. oxygen sensor.
NOTE: <Ref. to
Check the following items. FU(H4SO)-39,
• Looseness and improper fitting of exhaust Rear Oxygen Sen-
system parts sor.>
• Damage (crack, hole etc.) of parts
• Loose part and improper installation between
front oxygen (A/F) sensor and rear oxygen sen-
sor

EN(H4SO)(diag)-138
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

AG:DTC P0138 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)

DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Detected when two consecutive driving cycles with fault occur.
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-69, DTC P0138 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE
(BANK 1 SENSOR 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

A/F, OXYGEN SENSOR RELAY BATTERY E25

M/B No.15
12
11 1 2
10 3 4

9
E
REAR
B220
OXYGEN
SENSOR A: B134 B: B135

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
E25
2
1
4
3

18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35

E2
C: B136 D: B137
50
53
19
1

B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
E 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
A29
C20
B6

C9

A : B134 B21

B : B135
ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
C : B136 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
D : B137
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1

48 49 50 51 52 53 54

B21
37
36
40
35
34

E2 B220

17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
2 6 10 14
E 19

EN-08631

EN(H4SO)(diag)-139
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK REAR OXYGEN SENSOR DATA. Is the voltage 250 mV or less? Go to step 5. Go to step 2.
1) Warm up the engine until engine coolant
temperature is higher than 75°C (167°F), and
rapidly reduce the engine speed from 3,000
rpm.
2) Read the data of rear oxygen sensor signal
using Subaru Select Monitor or general scan
tool.
NOTE:
• Subaru Select Monitor
For detailed operation procedures, refer to
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref.
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni-
tor.>
• General scan tool
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the
general scan tool operation manual.
2 CHECK REAR OXYGEN SENSOR CONNEC- Has water entered the connec- Completely Go to step 3.
TOR AND COUPLING CONNECTOR. tor? remove any water
inside.
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 4. Repair the harness
REAR OXYGEN SENSOR CONNECTOR. and connector.
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. NOTE:
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM and In this case, repair
rear oxygen sensor. the following item:
3) Measure the resistance of harness between • Open circuit in
ECM and rear oxygen sensor connector. harness between
Connector & terminal ECM and rear oxy-
(B136) No. 20 — (E25) No. 3: gen sensor con-
(B134) No. 29 — (E25) No. 4: nector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 0.2 — 0.5 V? Replace the rear Repair the harness
REAR OXYGEN SENSOR CONNECTOR. oxygen sensor. and connector.
1) Connect the connector to ECM. <Ref. to NOTE:
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. FU(H4SO)-39, In this case, repair
3) Measure the voltage between rear oxygen Rear Oxygen Sen- the following item:
sensor connector and chassis ground. sor.> • Open circuit in
Connector & terminal harness between
(E25) No. 3 (+) — Chassis ground (–): ECM and rear oxy-
gen sensor con-
nector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
• Poor contact of
ECM connector
5 CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM. Is there any fault in exhaust Repair or replace Replace the rear
Check exhaust system parts. system? faulty parts. oxygen sensor.
NOTE: <Ref. to
Check the following items. FU(H4SO)-39,
• Looseness and improper fitting of exhaust Rear Oxygen Sen-
system parts sor.>
• Damage (crack, hole etc.) of parts
• Loose part and improper installation between
front oxygen (A/F) sensor and rear oxygen sen-
sor

EN(H4SO)(diag)-140
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

AH:DTC P0139 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT SLOW RESPONSE (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)

DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Detected when two consecutive driving cycles with fault occur.
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-70, DTC P0139 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT SLOW RE-
SPONSE (BANK 1 SENSOR 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

A/F, OXYGEN SENSOR RELAY BATTERY E25

M/B No.15
12
11 1 2
10 3 4

9
E
REAR
B220
OXYGEN
SENSOR A: B134 B: B135

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
E25
2
1
4
3

18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35

E2
C: B136 D: B137
50
53
19
1

B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
E 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
A29
C20
B6

C9

A : B134 B21

B : B135
ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
C : B136 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
D : B137
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1

48 49 50 51 52 53 54

B21
37
36
40
35
34

E2 B220

17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
2 6 10 14
E 19

EN-08631

EN(H4SO)(diag)-141
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 2. Repair the harness
REAR OXYGEN SENSOR CONNECTOR. and connector.
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. NOTE:
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM and In this case, repair
rear oxygen sensor. the following item:
3) Measure the resistance of harness between • Open circuit in
ECM and rear oxygen sensor connector. harness between
Connector & terminal ECM and rear oxy-
(B136) No. 20 — (E25) No. 3: gen sensor con-
nector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 3. Repair the ground
REAR OXYGEN SENSOR CONNECTOR. more? short circuit of har-
Measure the resistance between rear oxygen ness between
sensor connector and chassis ground. ECM and rear oxy-
Connector & terminal gen sensor con-
(E25) No. 3 — Chassis ground: nector.
3 CHECK REAR OXYGEN SENSOR. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Replace the rear Even if DTC is
Measure the resistance between rear oxygen oxygen sensor. detected, the cir-
sensor terminals. <Ref. to cuit has returned to
Terminals FU(H4SO)-39, a normal condition
No. 3 — No. 4 Rear Oxygen Sen- at this time. Repro-
sor.> duce the failure,
and then perform
the diagnosis
again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector,
temporary open or
short circuit of har-
ness may be the
cause.

EN(H4SO)(diag)-142
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

AI: DTC P0140 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIVITY DETECTED (BANK1

SENSOR2)
DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Detected when two consecutive driving cycles with fault occur.
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-78, DTC P0140 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIVITY
DETECTED (BANK1 SENSOR2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

A/F, OXYGEN SENSOR RELAY BATTERY E25

M/B No.15
12
11 1 2
10 3 4

9
E
REAR
B220
OXYGEN
SENSOR A: B134 B: B135

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
E25
2
1
4
3

18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35

E2
C: B136 D: B137
50
53
19
1

B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
E 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
A29
C20
B6

C9

A : B134 B21

B : B135
ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
C : B136 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
D : B137
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1

48 49 50 51 52 53 54

B21
37
36
40
35
34

E2 B220

17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
2 6 10 14
E 19

EN-08631

EN(H4SO)(diag)-143
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK REAR OXYGEN SENSOR DATA. Is the voltage 490 mV or more? Go to step 6. Go to step 2.
1) Warm up the engine until engine coolant
temperature is higher than 75°C (167°F), and
keep the engine speed at 3,000 rpm. (2 minutes
maximum)
2) Read the data of rear oxygen sensor signal
using Subaru Select Monitor or general scan
tool.
NOTE:
• Subaru Select Monitor
For detailed operation procedures, refer to
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref.
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni-
tor.>
• General scan tool
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the
general scan tool operation manual.
2 CHECK REAR OXYGEN SENSOR DATA. Is the voltage 250 mV or less? Go to step 6. Go to step 3.
1) Warm up the engine until engine coolant
temperature is higher than 75°C (167°F), and
rapidly reduce the engine speed from 3,000
rpm.
2) Read the data of rear oxygen sensor signal
using Subaru Select Monitor or general scan
tool.
NOTE:
• Subaru Select Monitor
For detailed operation procedures, refer to
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref.
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni-
tor.>
• General scan tool
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the
general scan tool operation manual.
3 CHECK REAR OXYGEN SENSOR CONNEC- Has water entered the connec- Completely Go to step 4.
TOR AND COUPLING CONNECTOR. tor? remove any water
inside.
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 5. Repair the harness
REAR OXYGEN SENSOR CONNECTOR. and connector.
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. NOTE:
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM and In this case, repair
rear oxygen sensor. the following item:
3) Measure the resistance of harness between • Open circuit in
ECM and rear oxygen sensor connector. harness between
Connector & terminal ECM and rear oxy-
(B136) No. 20 — (E25) No. 3: gen sensor con-
(B134) No. 29 — (E25) No. 4: nector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector

EN(H4SO)(diag)-144
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

5 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 0.2 — 0.5 V? Replace the rear Repair the harness
REAR OXYGEN SENSOR CONNECTOR. oxygen sensor. and connector.
1) Connect the connector to ECM. <Ref. to NOTE:
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. FU(H4SO)-39, In this case, repair
3) Measure the voltage between rear oxygen Rear Oxygen Sen- the following item:
sensor connector and chassis ground. sor.> • Open circuit in
Connector & terminal harness between
(E25) No. 3 (+) — Chassis ground (–): ECM and rear oxy-
gen sensor con-
nector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
• Poor contact of
ECM connector
6 CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM. Is there any fault in exhaust Repair or replace Replace the rear
Check exhaust system parts. system? faulty parts. oxygen sensor.
NOTE: <Ref. to
Check the following items. FU(H4SO)-39,
• Looseness and improper fitting of exhaust Rear Oxygen Sen-
system parts sor.>
• Damage (crack, hole etc.) of parts
• Loose part and improper installation between
front oxygen (A/F) sensor and rear oxygen sen-
sor

AJ:DTC P0141 O2 SENSOR HEATER CIRCUIT (BANK1 SENSOR2)

Refer to DTC P0037 for diagnostic procedure. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-92, DTC P0037 HO2S HEATER
CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1 SENSOR 2), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
AK:DTC P0171 SYSTEM TOO LEAN (BANK 1)
Refer to DTC P0172 for diagnostic procedure. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-146, DTC P0172 SYSTEM TOO
RICH (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-145
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

AL:DTC P0172 SYSTEM TOO RICH (BANK 1)

DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Detected when two consecutive driving cycles with fault occur.
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-83, DTC P0172 SYSTEM TOO RICH (BANK 1), Diagnos-
tic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
• Engine stalls.
• Poor driving performance
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM. Are there holes or loose bolts Repair the exhaust Go to step 2.
on exhaust system? system.
2 CHECK AIR INTAKE SYSTEM. Are there holes, loose bolts or Repair the air Go to step 3.
disconnection of hose on air intake system.
intake system?
3 CHECK FUEL PRESSURE. Is the measured value 340 — Go to step 4. Repair the follow-
WARNING: 400 kPa (3.5 — 4.1 kg/cm2, 49 ing item.
Place “NO OPEN FLAMES” signs near the — 58 psi)? Fuel pressure is
working area. too high:
CAUTION: • Clogged fuel line
Be careful not to spill fuel. or bent hose
Measure the fuel pressure. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)- Fuel pressure is
28, INSPECTION, Fuel Pressure.> too low:
CAUTION: • Improper fuel
Release fuel pressure before removing the pump discharge
fuel pressure gauge. • Clogged fuel line
4 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Is the engine coolant tempera- Go to step 5. Replace the
SENSOR. ture 75°C (167°F) or higher? engine coolant
1) Start the engine and warm up completely. temperature sen-
2) Read the data of engine coolant tempera- sor. <Ref. to
ture sensor signal using Subaru Select Monitor FU(H4SO)-23,
or general scan tool. Engine Coolant
NOTE: Temperature Sen-
• Subaru Select Monitor sor.>
For detailed operation procedures, refer to
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref.
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni-
tor.>
• General scan tool
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the
general scan tool operation manual.

EN(H4SO)(diag)-146
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

5 CHECK MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR Is the measured value 2.0 — Go to step 6. Replace the mass
TEMPERATURE SENSOR. 5.0 g/s (0.26 — 0.66 lb/m)? air flow and intake
1) Start the engine and warm up engine until air temperature
coolant temperature is higher than 75°C sensor. <Ref. to
(167°F). FU(H4SO)-31,
2) For CVT models, set the select lever to “P” Mass Air Flow and
range or “N” range, and for MT models, place Intake Air Temper-
the shift lever in the neutral position. ature Sensor.>
3) Turn the A/C switch to OFF.
4) Turn all the accessory switches to OFF.
5) Read the data of the mass air flow and
intake air temperature sensor signal using Sub-
aru Select Monitor or general scan tool.
NOTE:
• Subaru Select Monitor
For detailed operation procedures, refer to
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref.
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni-
tor.>
• General scan tool
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the
general scan tool operation manual.
6 CHECK MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR Subtract ambient temperature Repair the poor Check the mass air
TEMPERATURE SENSOR. from intake air temperature. Is contact of ECM flow and intake air
1) Start the engine and warm up engine until the obtained value –10 — 50°C connector. temperature sen-
coolant temperature is higher than 70°C (–18 — 90°F)? sor. <Ref. to
(158°F). FU(H4SO)-31,
2) For CVT models, set the select lever to “P” Mass Air Flow and
range or “N” range, and for MT models, place Intake Air Temper-
the shift lever in the neutral position. ature Sensor.>
3) Turn the A/C switch to OFF.
4) Turn all the accessory switches to OFF.
5) Open the front hood.
6) Measure the ambient temperature.
7) Read the data of the mass air flow and
intake air temperature sensor signal using Sub-
aru Select Monitor or general scan tool.
NOTE:
• Subaru Select Monitor
For detailed operation procedures, refer to
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref.
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni-
tor.>
• General scan tool
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the
general scan tool operation manual.

EN(H4SO)(diag)-147
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

AM:DTC P0181 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFOR-

MANCE
DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Detected when two consecutive driving cycles with fault occur.
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-85, DTC P0181 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR “A”
CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is any other DTC displayed? Check the appro- Replace the fuel
priate DTC using temperature sen-
the “List of Diag- sor. <Ref. to
nostic Trouble EC(H4SO)-13,
Code (DTC)”. Fuel Temperature
<Ref. to Sensor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
75, List of Diagnos-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-148
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

AN:DTC P0182 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Immediately at fault recognition
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-88, DTC P0182 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR “A”
CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

FUEL TEMPERATURE
SENSOR

2
3
R58

R57
11
7

R15

R333
3
8

i155

i3
11
5

B38

: TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT

*
*
*
B83
C23
B30

B: B135
ECM
C: B136

R58 R57 B38 B: B135 C: B136

B83
i155 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6
3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1 2 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
3 4 1 2 3 7 8 9 10 11 12
4 5 6 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
4 5 6 3 7 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
5 6 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
8 9 10 11

EN-08675

EN(H4SO)(diag)-149
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the temperature 120°C Go to step 2. Even if DTC is
1) Start the engine. (248°F) or higher? detected, the cir-
2) Read the data of fuel temperature sensor cuit has returned to
signal using Subaru Select Monitor. a normal condition
NOTE: at this time. Repro-
For detailed operation procedures, refer to duce the failure,
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref. and then perform
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni- the diagnosis
tor.> again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector,
temporary open or
short circuit of har-
ness may be the
cause.
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Replace the fuel Repair the ground
FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR CONNEC- more? temperature sen- short circuit of har-
TOR. sor. <Ref. to ness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. EC(H4SO)-13, ECM and fuel
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and Fuel Temperature pump.
fuel temperature sensor. Sensor.>
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and
chassis ground.
Connector & terminal
(B136) No. 23 — Chassis ground:

EN(H4SO)(diag)-150
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

AO:DTC P0183 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT

DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Immediately at fault recognition
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-90, DTC P0183 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR “A”
CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

FUEL TEMPERATURE
SENSOR

2
3
R58

R57
11
7

R15

R333
3
8

i155

i3
11
5

B38

: TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT

*
*
*
B83
C23
B30

B: B135
ECM
C: B136

R58 R57 B38 B: B135 C: B136

B83
i155 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6
3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1 2 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
3 4 1 2 3 7 8 9 10 11 12
4 5 6 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
4 5 6 3 7 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
5 6 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
8 9 10 11

EN-08675

EN(H4SO)(diag)-151
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the temperature less than – Go to step 2. Even if DTC is
1) Start the engine. 40°C (–40°F)? detected, the cir-
2) Read the data of fuel temperature sensor cuit has returned to
signal using Subaru Select Monitor. a normal condition
NOTE: at this time. Repro-
For detailed operation procedures, refer to duce the failure,
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref. and then perform
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni- the diagnosis
tor.> again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector,
temporary open or
short circuit of har-
ness may be the
cause.
2 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of the Repair any poor Go to step 3.
Repair any poor contact between the ECM and ECM or fuel temperature sen- contact between
fuel temperature sensor connectors. sor connectors? the ECM and fuel
temperature sen-
sor connectors.
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 4. Repair the harness
FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR CONNEC- and connector.
TOR. NOTE:
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. In this case, repair
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and the following item:
fuel temperature sensor. • Open circuit in
3) Measure the resistance of the harness harness between
between the ECM and fuel temperature sensor ECM and fuel tem-
connector. perature sensor
Connector & terminal connector
(B136) No. 23 — (R58) No. 2: • Poor contact of
(B135) No. 30 — (R58) No. 3: coupling connector
• Poor contact of
joint connector
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 5 V or more? Repair the short Replace the fuel
FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR CONNEC- circuit to power in temperature sen-
TOR. the harness sor. <Ref. to
1) Connect all connectors. between the ECM EC(H4SO)-13,
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. and fuel tempera- Fuel Temperature
3) Measure the voltage between ECM and ture sensor con- Sensor.>
chassis ground. nector.
Connector & terminal
(B136) No. 23 (+) — Chassis ground (–):

EN(H4SO)(diag)-152
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

AP:DTC P0196 ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PER-

FORMANCE
DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Detected when two consecutive driving cycles with fault occur.
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-92, DTC P0196 ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Hard to start
• Improper idling
• Poor driving performance
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is any other DTC displayed? Check the appro- Replace the oil
priate DTC using temperature sen-
the “List of Diag- sor. <Ref. to
nostic Trouble FU(H4SO)-36, Oil
Code (DTC)”. Temperature Sen-
<Ref. to sor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
75, List of Diagnos-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-153
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

AQ:DTC P0197 ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR LOW

DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Immediately at fault recognition
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-94, DTC P0197 ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Hard to start
• Improper idling
• Poor driving performance
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

E75

1 2
OIL
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
2

E75

A: B134

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34

E2
19
6

D: B137
B21

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31

B21

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
D21

A29

23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33

34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
A: B134 42 43 44 45 46 47
ECM 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
D: B137

EN-07787

EN(H4SO)(diag)-154
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the oil temperature 215°C Go to step 2. Even if DTC is
1) Start the engine. (419°F) or more? detected, the cir-
2) Read the data of the oil temperature sensor cuit has returned to
signal using the Subaru Select Monitor or gen- a normal condition
eral scan tool. at this time. Repro-
NOTE: duce the failure,
• Subaru Select Monitor and then perform
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the diagnosis
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref. again.
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni- NOTE:
tor.> In this case, tem-
• General scan tool porary poor con-
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the tact of connector,
general scan tool operation manual. temporary open or
short circuit of har-
ness may be the
cause.
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND OIL Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Replace the oil Repair the short
TEMPERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR. more? temperature sen- circuit to ground in
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. sor. <Ref. to harness between
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM and oil FU(H4SO)-36, Oil ECM and oil tem-
temperature sensor. Temperature Sen- perature sensor
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and sor.> connector.
chassis ground.
Connector & terminal
(B137) No. 21 — Chassis ground:

EN(H4SO)(diag)-155
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

AR:DTC P0198 ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR HIGH

DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Immediately at fault recognition
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-95, DTC P0198 ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Hard to start
• Improper idling
• Poor driving performance
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

E75

1 2
OIL
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
2

E75

A: B134

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34

E2
19
6

D: B137
B21

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31

B21

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
D21

A29

23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33

34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
A: B134 42 43 44 45 46 47
ECM 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
D: B137

EN-07787

EN(H4SO)(diag)-156
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the oil temperature less than Go to step 2. Even if DTC is
1) Start the engine. –40°C (–40°F)? detected, the cir-
2) Read the data of the oil temperature sensor cuit has returned to
signal using the Subaru Select Monitor or gen- a normal condition
eral scan tool. at this time. Repro-
NOTE: duce the failure,
• Subaru Select Monitor and then perform
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the diagnosis
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref. again.
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni- NOTE:
tor.> In this case, tem-
• General scan tool porary poor con-
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the tact of connector,
general scan tool operation manual. temporary open or
short circuit of har-
ness may be the
cause.
2 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of ECM or Repair the poor Go to step 3.
Check for poor contact of ECM and oil tempera- oil temperature sensor connec- contact of ECM or
ture sensor connector. tor? the oil temperature
sensor connector.
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND OIL Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 4. Repair the harness
TEMPERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR. and connector.
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. NOTE:
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM and oil In this case, repair
temperature sensor. the following item:
3) Measure the resistance of the harness • Open circuit in
between ECM and oil temperature sensor con- harness between
nector. ECM and oil tem-
Connector & terminal perature sensor
(B137) No. 21 — (E75) No. 2: connector
(B134) No. 29 — (E75) No. 1: • Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND OIL Is the voltage 5 V or more? Repair the short Replace the oil
TEMPERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR. circuit to power temperature sen-
1) Connect all connectors. supply in harness sor. <Ref. to
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. between ECM and FU(H4SO)-36, Oil
3) Measure the voltage between ECM and oil temperature Temperature Sen-
chassis ground. sensor connector. sor.>
Connector & terminal
(B137) No. 21 (+) — Chassis ground (–):

EN(H4SO)(diag)-157
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

AS:DTC P0222 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “B” CIRCUIT

LOW
DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Immediately at fault recognition
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-96, DTC P0222 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SEN-
SOR/SWITCH “B” CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
• Poor driving performance
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

BATTERY
ELECTRONIC M/B No. 13
THROTTLE
B220
CONTROL RELAY
16 M/B No. 16
13 3 4
14
MAIN RELAY B220
15
E
B17
B7

ECM

A : B134 B : B135 C : B136 D : B137

A 29
A 19

A 28

A 18
D3
A6

A3

A1
A2
A4

D1

C4

*
*
B138

B21
37
36

35
40

34

20
39
38

17
18
19

E2
5

6
1

: TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL

* ARRANGEMENT
E E ELECTRONIC E
E57 THROTTLE
CONTROL

E57 B138 B21 A: B134 B: B135

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1 2 3 4 5 6 5 6 7 8 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
B220 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47 C: B136 D: B137
17 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2 6 10 14
19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-07785

EN(H4SO)(diag)-158
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 2. Repair the short
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL CON- more? circuit to ground in
NECTOR. harness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ECM and elec-
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and tronic throttle con-
electronic throttle control. trol connector.
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and
chassis ground.
Connector & terminal
(B134) No. 19 — Chassis ground:
(B134) No. 28 — Chassis ground:
2 CHECK SHORT CIRCUIT INSIDE THE ECM. Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Replace the elec- Repair the short
1) Connect the connector to ECM. more? tronic throttle con- circuit to ground in
2) Measure the resistance between electronic trol. <Ref. to harness between
throttle control connector and engine ground. FU(H4SO)-15, ECM and elec-
Connector & terminal Throttle Body.> tronic throttle con-
(E57) No. 4 — Engine ground: trol connector.
Replace the ECM if
defective. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-41,
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-159
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

AT:DTC P0223 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “B” CIRCUIT

HIGH
DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Immediately at fault recognition
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-98, DTC P0223 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SEN-
SOR/SWITCH “B” CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
• Poor driving performance
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

BATTERY
ELECTRONIC M/B No. 13
THROTTLE
B220
CONTROL RELAY
16 M/B No. 16
13 3 4
14
MAIN RELAY B220
15
E
B17
B7

ECM

A : B134 B : B135 C : B136 D : B137

A 29
A 19

A 28

A 18
D3
A6

A3

A1
A2
A4

D1

C4

*
*
B138

B21
37
36

35
40

34

20
39
38

17
18
19

E2
5

6
1

: TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL

* ARRANGEMENT
E E ELECTRONIC E
E57 THROTTLE
CONTROL

E57 B138 B21 A: B134 B: B135

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1 2 3 4 5 6 5 6 7 8 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
B220 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47 C: B136 D: B137
17 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2 6 10 14
19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-07785

EN(H4SO)(diag)-160
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 2. Repair the harness
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL CON- and connector.
NECTOR. NOTE:
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. In this case, repair
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and the following item:
electronic throttle control. • Open circuit in
3) Measure the resistance of harness between harness between
ECM and electronic throttle control connector. ECM and electron-
Connector & terminal ic throttle control
(B134) No. 28 — (E57) No. 4: connector
(B134) No. 29 — (E57) No. 3: • Poor contact of
coupling connector
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Go to step 3. Repair the harness
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL CON- and connector.
NECTOR. NOTE:
1) Connect the connector to ECM. In this case, repair
2) Measure the resistance between electronic the following item:
throttle control connector and engine ground. • Open circuit of
Connector & terminal harness between
(E57) No. 3 — Engine ground: ECM and engine
ground
• Poor contact of
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 5 V or more? Repair the short Go to step 4.
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL CON- circuit to power in
NECTOR. harness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. ECM and elec-
2) Measure the voltage between electronic tronic throttle con-
throttle control connector and engine ground. trol connector.
Connector & terminal
(E57) No. 4 (+) — Engine ground (–):
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Repair the poor Repair the short
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL CON- more? contact of elec- circuit to power in
NECTOR. tronic throttle con- harness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. trol connector. ECM and elec-
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. Replace the elec- tronic throttle con-
3) Measure the resistance between ECM con- tronic throttle con- trol connector.
nectors. trol if defective.
Connector & terminal <Ref. to
(B134) No. 19 — (B134) No. 28: FU(H4SO)-15,
Throttle Body.>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-161
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

AU:DTC P0301 CYLINDER 1 MISFIRE DETECTED

NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to DTC P0304. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-163, DTC P0304 CYLINDER 4
MISFIRE DETECTED, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
AV:DTC P0302 CYLINDER 2 MISFIRE DETECTED
NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to DTC P0304. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-163, DTC P0304 CYLINDER 4
MISFIRE DETECTED, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
AW:DTC P0303 CYLINDER 3 MISFIRE DETECTED
NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to DTC P0304. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-163, DTC P0304 CYLINDER 4
MISFIRE DETECTED, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-162
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

AX:DTC P0304 CYLINDER 4 MISFIRE DETECTED

DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Detected when two consecutive driving cycles with fault occur.
• Immediately at fault recognition (A misfire which could damage catalyst occurs.)
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-106, DTC P0304 CYLINDER 4 MISFIRE DETECTED, Di-
agnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine stalls.
• Improper idling
• Rough driving
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No. 16
4
3

2
1
E
B220

B134 ECM
10

11

12

13

B21
48

42

43

44

45

E2

E5 E16 E6 E17
2

FUEL INJECTOR FUEL INJECTOR FUEL INJECTOR FUEL INJECTOR

No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4

E5 E16 B21 B134 B220

E6 E17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 2 6 10 14
1 2 19
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54

EN-07705

EN(H4SO)(diag)-163
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL OF ECM. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 6. Go to step 2.
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON.
2) Measure the voltage between ECM and
chassis ground on faulty cylinders.
Connector & terminal
#1 (B134) No. 10 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
#2 (B134) No. 11 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
#3 (B134) No. 12 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
#4 (B134) No. 13 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 3. Repair the short
FUEL INJECTOR CONNECTOR. more? circuit to ground in
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. harness between
2) Disconnect the connector from fuel injector ECM and fuel
on faulty cylinders. injector connector.
3) Measure the resistance between fuel injec-
tor connector and engine ground on faulty cylin-
ders.
Connector & terminal
#1 (E5) No. 1 — Engine ground:
#2 (E16) No. 1 — Engine ground:
#3 (E6) No. 1 — Engine ground:
#4 (E17) No. 1 — Engine ground:
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 4. Repair the harness
FUEL INJECTOR CONNECTOR. and connector.
Measure the resistance of harness between NOTE:
ECM and fuel injector connector on faulty cylin- In this case, repair
ders. the following item:
Connector & terminal • Open circuit in
#1 (B134) No. 10 — (E5) No. 1: harness between
#2 (B134) No. 11 — (E16) No. 1: ECM and fuel in-
#3 (B134) No. 12 — (E6) No. 1: jector connector
#4 (B134) No. 13 — (E17) No. 1: • Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK FUEL INJECTOR. Is the resistance 5 — 20 Ω? Go to step 5. Replace the faulty
Measure the resistance between fuel injector fuel injector. <Ref.
terminals on faulty cylinder. to FU(H4SO)-34,
Terminals Fuel Injector.>
No. 1 — No. 2:
5 CHECK POWER SUPPLY LINE. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Repair the poor Repair the harness
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. contact of all con- and connector.
2) Measure the voltage between fuel injector nectors in fuel NOTE:
and engine ground on faulty cylinders. injector circuit. In this case, repair
Connector & terminal the following item:
#1 (E5) No. 2 (+) — Engine ground (–): • Open circuit in
#2 (E16) No. 2 (+) — Engine ground (–): harness between
#3 (E6) No. 2 (+) — Engine ground (–): the main relay con-
#4 (E17) No. 2 (+) — Engine ground (–): nector and fuel in-
jector connector on
faulty cylinders
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
• Poor contact of
main relay connec-
tor

EN(H4SO)(diag)-164
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

6 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 10 V or more? Repair the short Go to step 7.
FUEL INJECTOR CONNECTOR. circuit to power in
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. harness between
2) Disconnect the connector from fuel injector ECM and fuel
on faulty cylinders. injector connector.
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON.
4) Measure the voltage between ECM and
chassis ground on faulty cylinders.
Connector & terminal
#1 (B134) No. 10 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
#2 (B134) No. 11 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
#3 (B134) No. 12 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
#4 (B134) No. 13 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
7 CHECK FUEL INJECTOR. Is the resistance 5 — 20 Ω? Replace the faulty Go to step 8.
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. fuel injector. <Ref.
2) Measure the resistance between fuel injec- to FU(H4SO)-34,
tor terminals on faulty cylinder. Fuel Injector.>
Terminals
No. 1 — No. 2:
8 CHECK INSTALLATION CONDITION OF Is the camshaft position sensor Tighten the cam- Go to step 9.
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR/CRANK- or crankshaft position sensor shaft position sen-
SHAFT POSITION SENSOR. loosely installed? sor or crankshaft
position sensor.
9 CHECK CRANK SPROCKET. Is the crank sprocket rusted or Replace the crank Go to step 10.
Remove the timing belt cover. <Ref. to does it have broken teeth? sprocket. <Ref. to
ME(H4SO)-46, REMOVAL, Timing Belt Cover.> ME(H4SO)-53,
Crank Sprocket.>
10 CHECK INSTALLATION CONDITION OF Is the timing belt dislocated Repair the installa- Go to step 11.
TIMING BELT. from its proper position? tion condition of
Turn the crankshaft using ST, and align the timing belt. <Ref. to
alignment mark on crank sprocket with align- ME(H4SO)-47,
ment mark on cylinder block. Timing Belt.>
ST 499987500 CRANKSHAFT
SOCKET
11 CHECK FUEL LEVEL. Is the fuel meter indication Go to step 12. Refill the fuel so
higher than the “Lower” level? that the fuel meter
indication is higher
than the “Lower”
level, and proceed
to the next step. Go
to step 12.
12 CHECK STATUS OF MALFUNCTION INDI- Does the malfunction indicator Go to step 14. Go to step 13.
CATOR LIGHT. light illuminate or blink?
1) Clear the memory using the Subaru Select
Monitor or general scan tool.
<Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51, Clear Memory
Mode.>
2) Start the engine, and drive the vehicle 10
minutes or more.

EN(H4SO)(diag)-165
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

13 CHECK CAUSE OF MISFIRE. Was the cause of misfire identi- Finish diagnostics Repair the poor
fied when the engine is run- operation, if the contact of connec-
ning? engine has no tor.
abnormality. NOTE:
In this case, repair
the following item:
• Poor contact of
ignition coil con-
nector
• Poor contact of
fuel injector con-
nector on faulty
cylinders
• Poor contact of
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
14 CHECK AIR INTAKE SYSTEM. Is there any fault in air intake Repair the air Go to step 15.
system? intake system.
NOTE:
Check the follow-
ing items.
• Are there air
leaks or air suction
caused by loose or
dislocated nuts
and bolts?
• Are there cracks
or any disconnec-
tion of hoses?
15 CHECK MISFIRE SYMPTOM. Does the Subaru Select Moni- Go to step 20. Go to step 16.
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. tor or general scan tool indicate
2) Check for DTC. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)- only one DTC?
40, Read Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
16 CHECK DTC. Is DTC P0301 and P0302 dis- Go to step 21. Go to step 17.
played on the Subaru Select
Monitor or general scan tool?
17 CHECK DTC. Is DTC P0303 and P0304 dis- Go to step 22. Go to step 18.
played on the Subaru Select
Monitor or general scan tool?
18 CHECK DTC. Is DTC P0301 and P0303 dis- Go to step 23. Go to step 19.
played on the Subaru Select
Monitor or general scan tool?
19 CHECK DTC. Is DTC P0302 and P0304 dis- Go to step 24. Go to step 25.
played on the Subaru Select
Monitor or general scan tool?
20 ONLY ONE CYLINDER. Is there any fault in the cylin- Repair or replace Go to DTC P0171.
der? faulty parts. <Ref. to
NOTE: EN(H4SO)(diag)-
Check the follow- 145, DTC P0171
ing items. SYSTEM TOO
• Spark plug LEAN (BANK 1),
• Spark plug cord Diagnostic Proce-
• Fuel injector dure with Diagnos-
• Compression ra- tic Trouble Code
tio (DTC).>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-166
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

21 GROUP OF #1 AND #2 CYLINDERS. Are there any faults in #1 and Repair or replace Go to DTC P0171.
#2 cylinders? faulty parts. <Ref. to
NOTE: EN(H4SO)(diag)-
• Check the fol- 145, DTC P0171
lowing items. SYSTEM TOO
• Spark plug LEAN (BANK 1),
• Fuel injector Diagnostic Proce-
• Ignition coil dure with Diagnos-
• Compression tic Trouble Code
ratio (DTC).>
• If any fault are
not found, check
the “IGNITION
CONTROL SYS-
TEM” of #1 and #2
cylinders side.
<Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
69, IGNITION
CONTROL SYS-
TEM, Diagnostics
for Engine Starting
Failure.>
22 GROUP OF #3 AND #4 CYLINDERS. Are there any faults in #3 and Repair or replace Go to DTC P0171.
#4 cylinders? faulty parts. <Ref. to
NOTE: EN(H4SO)(diag)-
• Check the fol- 145, DTC P0171
lowing items. SYSTEM TOO
• Spark plug LEAN (BANK 1),
• Fuel injector Diagnostic Proce-
• Ignition coil dure with Diagnos-
• Compression tic Trouble Code
ratio (DTC).>
• If any fault are
not found, check
the “IGNITION
CONTROL SYS-
TEM” of #3 and #4
cylinders side.
<Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
69, IGNITION
CONTROL SYS-
TEM, Diagnostics
for Engine Starting
Failure.>
23 GROUP OF #1 AND #3 CYLINDERS. Are there any faults in #1 and Repair or replace Go to DTC P0171.
#3 cylinders? faulty parts. <Ref. to
NOTE: EN(H4SO)(diag)-
Check the follow- 145, DTC P0171
ing items. SYSTEM TOO
• Spark plug LEAN (BANK 1),
• Fuel injector Diagnostic Proce-
• Compression ra- dure with Diagnos-
tio tic Trouble Code
• Skipping timing (DTC).>
belt teeth

EN(H4SO)(diag)-167
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

24 GROUP OF #2 AND #4 CYLINDERS. Are there any faults in #2 and Repair or replace Go to DTC P0171.
#4 cylinders? faulty parts. <Ref. to
NOTE: EN(H4SO)(diag)-
Check the follow- 145, DTC P0171
ing items. SYSTEM TOO
• Spark plug LEAN (BANK 1),
• Fuel injector Diagnostic Proce-
• Compression ra- dure with Diagnos-
tio tic Trouble Code
• Skipping timing (DTC).>
belt teeth
25 CYLINDER AT RANDOM. Is the engine idle rough? Go to DTC P0171. Repair or replace
<Ref. to faulty parts.
EN(H4SO)(diag)- NOTE:
145, DTC P0171 Check the follow-
SYSTEM TOO ing items.
LEAN (BANK 1), • Spark plug
Diagnostic Proce- • Fuel injector
dure with Diagnos- • Compression ra-
tic Trouble Code tio
(DTC).>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-168
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

AY:DTC P0327 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SEN-

SOR)
DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Immediately at fault recognition
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-107, DTC P0327 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW
(BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Poor driving performance
• Knocking occurs.
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

KNOCK SENSOR

E14
1

E14
1 2

A: B134

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
E2
16

19

B21

E
D: B137

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31

B21

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
A29
D8

D2

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33

34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
A: B134
42 43 44 45 46 47
ECM
D: B137 48 49 50 51 52 53 54

EN-07632

EN(H4SO)(diag)-169
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 600 kΩ or Go to step 2. Repair the poor
KNOCK SENSOR CONNECTOR. more? contact of ECM
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. connector.
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM.
3) Measure the resistance between ECM con-
nectors.
Connector & terminal
(B137) No. 2 — (B134) No. 29:
2 CHECK KNOCK SENSOR. Is the resistance 600 kΩ or Replace the knock Repair the harness
1) Disconnect the connector from the knock more? sensor. <Ref. to and connector.
sensor. FU(H4SO)-28, NOTE:
2) Measure the resistance between knock Knock Sensor.> In this case, repair
sensor terminals. the following item:
Terminals • Open circuit in
No. 1 — No. 2: harness between
ECM and knock
sensor connector
• Poor contact of
knock sensor con-
nector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector

EN(H4SO)(diag)-170
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

AZ:DTC P0328 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SEN-

SOR)
DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Immediately at fault recognition
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-109, DTC P0328 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH
(BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Poor driving performance
• Knocking occurs.
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

KNOCK SENSOR

E14
1

E14
1 2

A: B134

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
E2
16

19

B21

E
D: B137

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31

B21

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
A29
D8

D2

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33

34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
A: B134
42 43 44 45 46 47
ECM
D: B137 48 49 50 51 52 53 54

EN-07632

EN(H4SO)(diag)-171
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 500 Go to step 2. Go to step 3.
KNOCK SENSOR CONNECTOR. kΩ?
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM.
3) Measure the resistance between ECM con-
nectors.
Connector & terminal
(B137) No. 2 — (B134) No. 29:
2 CHECK KNOCK SENSOR. Is the resistance less than 500 Replace the knock Repair the short
1) Disconnect the connector from the knock kΩ? sensor. <Ref. to circuit to ground in
sensor. FU(H4SO)-28, harness between
2) Measure the resistance between knock Knock Sensor.> ECM and knock
sensor terminals. sensor connector.
Terminals NOTE:
No. 1 — No. 2: The harness be-
tween both con-
nectors are
shielded. Remove
the shield and re-
pair the short cir-
cuit of harness.
3 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF ECM. Is the voltage 2 V or more? Even if DTC is Repair the poor
1) Connect the connector to ECM. detected, the cir- contact of ECM
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. cuit has returned to connector.
3) Measure the voltage between ECM and a normal condition
chassis ground. at this time. Repro-
Connector & terminal duce the failure,
(B137) No. 2 (+) — Chassis ground (–): and then perform
the diagnosis
again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector,
temporary open or
short circuit of har-
ness may be the
cause.

EN(H4SO)(diag)-172
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

BA:DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT

DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Immediately at fault recognition
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-111, DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR “A”
CIRCUIT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine stalls.
• Failure of engine to start
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

CRANKSHAFT
POSITION
SENSOR E10

1 2
2
1

E10

B137

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31

B21

E2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
15
14

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
B21 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
E
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
25
17
31

B137 ECM

EN-07639

EN(H4SO)(diag)-173
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK INSTALLATION CONDITION OF Is the crankshaft position sen- Go to step 2. Tighten the crank-
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR. sor installation bolt tightened shaft position sen-
securely? sor installation bolt
securely. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-24,
Crankshaft Posi-
tion Sensor.>
2 CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR. Is the resistance between 1 and Go to step 3. Replace the crank-
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 4 kΩ? shaft position sen-
2) Remove the crankshaft position sensor. sor. <Ref. to
3) Measure the resistance between terminals FU(H4SO)-24,
of crankshaft position sensor connector. Crankshaft Posi-
Terminals tion Sensor.>
No. 1 — No. 2:
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Repair the poor Repair the harness
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR CON- contact of ECM and connector.
NECTOR. and crankshaft NOTE:
1) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. position sensor In this case, repair
2) Measure the resistance of harness between connector. the following item:
ECM and crankshaft position sensor connector. • Open circuit in
Connector & terminal harness between
(B137) No. 17 — (E10) No. 1: ECM and crank-
(B137) No. 25 — (E10) No. 2: shaft position sen-
sor connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector

EN(H4SO)(diag)-174
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

BB:DTC P0336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT RANGE/PER-

FORMANCE
DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Detected when two consecutive driving cycles with fault occur.
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-113, DTC P0336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR “A”
CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine stalls.
• Failure of engine to start
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK CONDITION OF CRANKSHAFT PO- Is the crankshaft position sen- Go to step 2. Tighten the crank-
SITION SENSOR. sor installation bolt tightened shaft position sen-
Turn the ignition switch to OFF. securely? sor installation bolt
securely. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-24,
Crankshaft Posi-
tion Sensor.>
2 CHECK CRANK SPROCKET. Are crank sprocket teeth Replace the crank Go to step 3.
Remove the timing belt cover. cracked or damaged? sprocket. <Ref. to
ME(H4SO)-53,
Crank Sprocket.>
3 CHECK INSTALLATION CONDITION OF Is the timing belt dislocated Repair the installa- Replace the crank-
TIMING BELT. from its proper position? tion condition of shaft position sen-
Turn the crankshaft, and align alignment mark timing belt. <Ref. to sor. <Ref. to
on crank sprocket with alignment mark on cylin- ME(H4SO)-47, FU(H4SO)-24,
der block. Timing Belt.> Crankshaft Posi-
ST 499987500 CRANKSHAFT tion Sensor.>
SOCKET

EN(H4SO)(diag)-175
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

BC:DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT (BANK 1 OR SIN-

GLE SENSOR)
DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Immediately at fault recognition
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-115, DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR “A”
CIRCUIT (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine stalls.
• Failure of engine to start
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

CAMSHAFT
POSITION
E15
SENSOR

1 2
2
1

E15

B137

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31

B21

E2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
13
12

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
B21 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
E
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
30
24
31

B137 ECM

EN-07640

EN(H4SO)(diag)-176
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 2. Repair the harness
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR CONNEC- and connector.
TOR. NOTE:
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. In this case, repair
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and the following item:
camshaft position sensor. • Open circuit in
3) Measure the resistance of harness between harness between
ECM and camshaft position sensor connector. ECM and camshaft
Connector & terminal position sensor
(B137) No. 24 — (E15) No. 1: connector
(B137) No. 30 — (E15) No. 2: • Poor contact of
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 3. Repair short cir-
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR CONNEC- more? cuit to ground in
TOR. harness between
Measure the resistance between camshaft ECM and camshaft
position sensor connector and engine ground. position sensor
Connector & terminal connector.
(E15) No. 1 — Engine ground: NOTE:
The harness be-
tween both con-
nectors are
shielded. Remove
the shield and re-
pair the ground
short circuit of the
harness circuit.
3 CHECK INSTALLATION CONDITION OF Is the camshaft position sensor Go to step 4. Tighten the cam-
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR. installation bolt tightened shaft position sen-
securely? sor installation bolt
securely. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-26,
Camshaft Position
Sensor.>
4 CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR. Is the resistance between 1 and Repair the poor Replace the cam-
1) Remove the camshaft position sensor. 4 kΩ? contact of ECM or shaft position sen-
2) Measure the resistance between terminals camshaft position sor. <Ref. to
of camshaft position sensor connector. sensor connector. FU(H4SO)-26,
Terminals Camshaft Position
No. 1 — No. 2: Sensor.>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-177
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

BD:DTC P0341 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFOR-

MANCE (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR)
DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Detected when two consecutive driving cycles with fault occur.
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-117, DTC P0341 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR “A”
CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) De-
tecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine stalls.
• Failure of engine to start
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

CAMSHAFT
POSITION
E15
SENSOR

1 2
2
1

E15

B137

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31

B21

E2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
13
12

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
B21 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
E
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
30
24
31

B137 ECM

EN-07640

EN(H4SO)(diag)-178
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 2. Repair the harness
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR CONNEC- and connector.
TOR. NOTE:
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. In this case, repair
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and the following item:
camshaft position sensor. • Open circuit in
3) Measure the resistance of harness between harness between
ECM and camshaft position sensor connector. ECM and camshaft
Connector & terminal position sensor
(B137) No. 24 — (E15) No. 1: connector
(B137) No. 30 — (E15) No. 2: • Poor contact of
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 3. Repair short cir-
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR CONNEC- more? cuit to ground in
TOR. harness between
Measure the resistance between camshaft ECM and camshaft
position sensor connector and engine ground. position sensor
Connector & terminal connector.
(E15) No. 1 — Engine ground: NOTE:
The harness be-
tween both con-
nectors are
shielded. Remove
the shield and re-
pair the ground
short circuit of the
harness circuit.
3 CHECK INSTALLATION CONDITION OF Is the camshaft position sensor Go to step 4. Tighten the cam-
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR. installation bolt tightened shaft position sen-
securely? sor installation bolt
securely. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-26,
Camshaft Position
Sensor.>
4 CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR. Is the resistance between 1 and Go to step 5. Replace the cam-
1) Remove the camshaft position sensor. 4 kΩ? shaft position sen-
2) Measure the resistance between terminals sor. <Ref. to
of camshaft position sensor connector. FU(H4SO)-26,
Terminals Camshaft Position
No. 1 — No. 2: Sensor.>
5 CHECK CAM SPROCKET. Are cam sprocket teeth cracked Replace the cam Go to step 6.
Remove the timing belt cover. <Ref. to or damaged? sprocket. <Ref. to
ME(H4SO)-46, Timing Belt Cover.> ME(H4SO)-52,
Cam Sprocket.>
6 CHECK INSTALLATION CONDITION OF Is the timing belt dislocated Repair the installa- Replace the cam-
TIMING BELT. from its proper position? tion condition of shaft position sen-
Turn the crankshaft using the ST, and align the timing belt. <Ref. to sor. <Ref. to
alignment mark on the cam sprocket with the ME(H4SO)-47, FU(H4SO)-26,
alignment mark on the timing belt cover LH. Timing Belt.> Camshaft Position
ST 499987500 CRANKSHAFT Sensor.>
SOCKET

EN(H4SO)(diag)-179
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

BE:DTC P0400 EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION FLOW

DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Detected when two consecutive driving cycles with fault occur.
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-119, DTC P0400 EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION
FLOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Movement performance problem when engine is low speed.
• Improper idling
• Movement performance problem
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the measured value 53.3 kPa Make sure that the Go to step 2.
1) Start the engine. (400 mmHg, 15.75 inHg) or EGR valve, mani-
2) Read data of intake manifold absolute pres- more? fold absolute pres-
sure signal using Subaru Select Monitor or gen- sure sensor and
eral scan tool. throttle body are
NOTE: installed securely.
• Subaru Select Monitor
For detailed operation procedures, refer to
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref.
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni-
tor.>
• General scan tool
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the
general scan tool operation manual.
2 CHECK EGR VALVE. Are there any holes, clogged Repair the EGR Replace the EGR
Remove the EGR valve. lines or foreign matters in the system. valve. <Ref. to
EGR system? FU(H4SO)-33,
EGR Valve.>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-180
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

BF:DTC P0420 CATALYST SYSTEM EFFICIENCY BELOW THRESHOLD (BANK

1)
DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Detected when two consecutive driving cycles with fault occur.
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-122, DTC P0420 CATALYST SYSTEM EFFICIENCY BE-
LOW THRESHOLD (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine stalls.
• Idle mixture is out of specifications.
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

A/F, OXYGEN SENSOR RELAY BATTERY E25

M/B No.15
12
11 1 2
10 3 4

9
E
REAR
B220
OXYGEN
SENSOR A: B134 B: B135

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
E25
2
1
4
3

18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35

E2
C: B136 D: B137
50
53
19
1

B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
E 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
A29
C20
B6

C9

A : B134 B21

B : B135
ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
C : B136 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
D : B137
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1

48 49 50 51 52 53 54

B21
37
36
40
35
34

E2 B220

17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
2 6 10 14
E 19

EN-08631

EN(H4SO)(diag)-181
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM. Is there any fault in exhaust Repair or replace Go to step 2.
Check for gas leaks or air suction caused by system? the exhaust sys-
loose or dislocated nuts and bolts, and open tem. <Ref. to
hole at exhaust pipes. EX(H4SO)-2, Gen-
NOTE: eral Description.>
Check the following positions.
• Between cylinder head and front exhaust
pipe
• Between front exhaust pipe and front catalytic
converter
• Between front catalytic converter and rear
catalytic converter
• Loose or improperly attached front oxygen
(A/F) sensor or rear oxygen sensor
2 CHECK WAVEFORM DATA ON THE SUBA- Is a normal waveform dis- Even if DTC is Go to step 3.
RU SELECT MONITOR (WHILE DRIVING). played? detected, the cir-
1) Drive at a constant speed between 80 — cuit has returned to
112 km/h (50 — 70 MPH). a normal condition
2) After 5 minutes have elapsed in the condi- at this time. Repro-
tion of step 1), use the Subaru Select Monitor duce the failure,
while still driving to read the waveform data. and then perform
• At normal condition the diagnosis
again.
1
NOTE:
REAR OXYGEN In this case, tem-
SENSOR VOLTAGE porary poor con-
(V)
tact of connector,
0 temporary open or
1.5
short circuit of har-
A/F SENSOR
ness may be the
OUTPUT LAMBDA 1 cause.

0.5
10 sec/div
EN-06666
• At abnormal condition (numerous inversion)

REAR OXYGEN
SENSOR VOLTAGE
(V)

0
1.5

A/F SENSOR
OUTPUT LAMBDA 1

0.5
10 sec/div
EN-06667

EN(H4SO)(diag)-182
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

3 CHECK WAVEFORM DATA ON THE SUBA- Is a normal waveform dis- Go to step 4. • The waveform is
RU SELECT MONITOR (WHILE IDLING). played? displayed at abnor-
1) Run the engine at idle. mal condition 1: Go
2) In the condition of step 1), use the Subaru to step 4.
Select Monitor to read the waveform data. • The waveform is
• At normal condition displayed at abnor-
mal condition 2: Go
1
to step 5.

REAR OXYGEN
SENSOR VOLTAGE
(V)

0
10 sec/div
EN-06668
• At abnormal condition 1 (numerous inversion)

REAR OXYGEN
SENSOR VOLTAGE
(V)

0
10 sec/div
EN-06669
• At abnormal condition 2 (noise input)

REAR OXYGEN
SENSOR VOLTAGE
(V)

0
10 sec/div
EN-06670
4 CHECK CATALYTIC CONVERTER. Is the catalytic converter dam- Replace the cata- Go to step 5.
aged? lytic converter.
<Ref. to
EC(H4SO)-3,
Front Catalytic
Converter.>
5 CHECK REAR OXYGEN SENSOR CONNEC- Has water entered the connec- Completely Go to step 6.
TOR AND COUPLING CONNECTOR. tor? remove any water
inside.

EN(H4SO)(diag)-183
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

6 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 7. Repair the harness
REAR OXYGEN SENSOR CONNECTOR. and connector.
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. NOTE:
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM and In this case, repair
rear oxygen sensor. the following item:
3) Measure the resistance of harness between • Open circuit in
ECM and rear oxygen sensor connector. harness between
Connector & terminal ECM and rear oxy-
(B136) No. 20 — (E25) No. 3: gen sensor con-
(B134) No. 29 — (E25) No. 4: nector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
7 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 0.2 — 0.5 V? Go to step 8. Repair the harness
REAR OXYGEN SENSOR CONNECTOR. and connector.
1) Connect the connector to ECM. NOTE:
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. Repair the follow-
3) Measure the voltage between rear oxygen ing locations.
sensor connector and chassis ground. • Open circuit in
Connector & terminal harness between
(E25) No. 3 (+) — Chassis ground (–): ECM and rear oxy-
gen sensor con-
nector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
• Poor contact of
ECM connector
8 CHECK REAR OXYGEN SENSOR SHIELD. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Replace the rear Repair the open
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. oxygen sensor. circuit of rear oxy-
2) Expose the rear oxygen sensor connector <Ref. to gen sensor har-
body side harness sensor shield. FU(H4SO)-39, ness.
3) Measure the resistance between sensor Rear Oxygen Sen-
shield and chassis ground. sor.>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-184
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

BG:DTC P0442 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECT-

ED (SMALL LEAK)
DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Detected when two consecutive driving cycles with fault occur.
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-125, DTC P0442 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL
SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (SMALL LEAK), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Fuel odor
• There is a hole of more than 1.0 mm (0.04 in) dia. in evaporation system or fuel tank.
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP. Is the fuel filler cap tightened Go to step 2. Tighten fuel filler
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. securely? cap securely.
2) Check the fuel filler cap.
NOTE:
The DTC is stored in memory if fuel filler cap is
or was loose or if the cap chain has caught while
tightening.
2 CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP. Is the fuel filler cap genuine? Go to step 3. Replace with a
genuine fuel filler
cap.
3 CHECK FUEL FILLER PIPE GASKET. Is there any damage to the seal Repair or replace Go to step 4.
between fuel filler cap and fuel the fuel filler cap
filler pipe? and fuel filler pipe.
<Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-57,
Fuel Filler Pipe.>
4 CHECK DRAIN VALVE. Does the drain valve operate? Go to step 5. Replace the drain
1) Install the delivery (test) mode fuse. valve. <Ref. to
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. EC(H4SO)-18,
3) Operate the drain valve using the Subaru Drain Valve.>
Select Monitor.
NOTE:
The drain valve can be operated using Subaru
Select Monitor. For detailed procedures, refer
to “SYSTEM OPERATION CHECK MODE”.
<Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-52, System Opera-
tion Check Mode.>
5 CHECK PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID Does the purge control sole- Go to step 6. Replace the purge
VALVE. noid valve operate? control solenoid
Operate the purge control solenoid valve using valve. <Ref. to
the Subaru Select Monitor. EC(H4SO)-9,
NOTE: Purge Control
Purge control solenoid valve operation can be Solenoid Valve.>
executed using Subaru Select Monitor. For de-
tailed procedures, refer to “SYSTEM OPERA-
TION CHECK MODE”. <Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-52, System Operation Check
Mode.>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-185
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

6 CHECK EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CON- Is there any hole of more than Repair or replace Go to step 7.
TROL SYSTEM LINE. 1.0 mm (0.04 in) dia. on evapo- the evaporation
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ration line? line. <Ref. to
2) Check the delivery (test) mode fuse is FU(H4SO)-68,
removed. Fuel Delivery and
Evaporation
Lines.>
7 CHECK CANISTER. Is the canister damaged or is Repair or replace Go to step 8.
there a hole of more than 1.0 the canister. <Ref.
mm (0.04 in) dia. in it? to EC(H4SO)-5,
Canister.>
8 CHECK FUEL TANK. Is the fuel tank damaged or is Repair or replace Go to step 9.
Remove the fuel tank. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-50, there any hole of more than 1.0 the fuel tank. <Ref.
Fuel Tank.> mm (0.04 in) dia. in it? to FU(H4SO)-50,
Fuel Tank.>
9 CHECK ANY OTHER MECHANICAL TROU- Is there any hole of more than Repair or replace Repair the poor
BLE IN EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CON- 1.0 mm (0.04 in) dia., crack, the hoses or pipes. contact of ECM
TROL SYSTEM. clogging, or disconnection, connector.
bend, misconnection of hoses
or pipes in evaporative emis-
sion control system?

EN(H4SO)(diag)-186
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

BH:DTC P0447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM VENT CONTROL

CIRCUIT OPEN
DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Immediately at fault recognition
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-138, DTC P0447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL
SYSTEM VENT CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No.16
4
3

2
1
B: B135 D: B137 ECM
B220 E

D6
B4

B38 B21
15

48

41
1

i3 E2

i54
12

11

R99

R144 E4
1

DRAIN VALVE PURGE CONTROL

SOLENOID VALVE

B220
E4 R144
B21
17
1 5 9 13
1 2 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
2 6 10 14
1 2 19 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33

B38 D: B137 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
B: B135
42 43 44 45 46 47
i54
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
1 2 3 4 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
5 6 7 8 9 10 7 8 9 10 11 12 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
11 12 13 14 15 16 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31

EN-08633

EN(H4SO)(diag)-187
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL OF ECM. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 2. Go to step 3.
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON.
2) Measure the voltage between ECM and
chassis ground.
Connector & terminal
(B135) No. 4 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
2 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of ECM Repair the poor Even if DTC is
Check for poor contact of ECM connector. connector? contact of ECM detected, the cir-
connector. cuit has returned to
a normal condition
at this time. Repro-
duce the failure,
and then perform
the diagnosis
again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary open or
short circuit of har-
ness or temporary
poor contact of
connector may be
the cause.
3 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO DRAIN VALVE. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 4. Repair the power
Measure the voltage between drain valve and supply circuit.
chassis ground.
Connector & terminal
(R144) No. 1 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 5. Repair the ground
DRAIN VALVE CONNECTOR. more? short circuit of har-
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ness between
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM ECM and drain
and drain valve. valve connector.
3) Measure the resistance between the drain
valve connector and chassis ground.
Connector & terminal
(R144) No. 2 — Chassis ground:
5 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 6. Repair the harness
DRAIN VALVE CONNECTOR. and connector.
Measure the resistance of harness between NOTE:
ECM and drain valve connector. In this case, repair
Connector & terminal the following item:
(B135) No. 4 — (R144) No. 2: • Open circuit of
harness between
ECM and drain
valve connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
6 CHECK DRAIN VALVE. Is the resistance 10 — 100 Ω? Repair the poor Replace the drain
Measure the resistance between drain valve contact of drain valve. <Ref. to
terminals. valve connector. EC(H4SO)-18,
Terminals Drain Valve.>
No. 1 — No. 2:

EN(H4SO)(diag)-188
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

BI: DTC P0448 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM VENT CONTROL

CIRCUIT SHORTED
DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Immediately at fault recognition
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-140, DTC P0448 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL
SYSTEM VENT CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No.16
4
3

2
1
B: B135 D: B137 ECM
B220 E

D6
B4

B38 B21
15

48

41
1

i3 E2

i54
12

11

R99

R144 E4
1

DRAIN VALVE PURGE CONTROL

SOLENOID VALVE

B220
E4 R144
B21
17
1 5 9 13
1 2 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
2 6 10 14
1 2 19 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33

B38 D: B137 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
B: B135
42 43 44 45 46 47
i54
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
1 2 3 4 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
5 6 7 8 9 10 7 8 9 10 11 12 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
11 12 13 14 15 16 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31

EN-08633

EN(H4SO)(diag)-189
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 10 V or more? Repair the short Go to step 2.
DRAIN VALVE CONNECTOR. circuit to power in
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. the harness
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM between ECM and
and drain valve. drain valve con-
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. nector.
4) Measure the voltage between ECM and
chassis ground.
Connector & terminal
(B135) No. 4 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
2 CHECK DRAIN VALVE. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Replace the drain Repair the poor
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. valve. <Ref. to contact of ECM
2) Measure the resistance between drain valve EC(H4SO)-18, connector.
terminals. Drain Valve.>
Terminals
No. 1 — No. 2:

EN(H4SO)(diag)-190
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

BJ:DTC P0451 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SEN-

SOR
DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Detected when two consecutive driving cycles with fault occur.
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-142, DTC P0451 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL
SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP. Is the fuel filler cap tightened Go to step 2. Tighten fuel filler
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. securely? cap securely.
2) Open the fuel flap.
2 CHECK PRESSURE VACUUM LINE. Is there any fault in pressure/ Repair or replace Replace the fuel
NOTE: vacuum line? the hoses and tank pressure sen-
Check the following items. pipes. sor. <Ref. to
• Disconnection, leakage and clogging of the EC(H4SO)-15,
vacuum hoses and pipes between fuel tank Fuel Tank Pres-
pressure sensor and fuel tank sure Sensor.>
• Disconnection, leakage and clogging of air
ventilation hoses and pipes between fuel filler
pipe and fuel tank

EN(H4SO)(diag)-191
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

BK:DTC P0452 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE

SENSOR LOW INPUT
DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Immediately at fault recognition
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-144, DTC P0452 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL
SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

FUEL TANK
PRESSURE
SENSOR

1
R47

R57
10

R15

R333
11

10
9

i155

i3
12
2

B38

*
*
B83
: TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT
*
B22

C21

B30

B: B135
ECM
C: B136

R57 B38 B: B135 C: B136 R47

B83
i155 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6
3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 7 8 9 10 11 12 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
4 5 6
3 4 5 6 7 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
8 9 10 11
EN-08676

EN(H4SO)(diag)-192
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the measured value less than Go to step 2. Even if DTC is
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. –7.41 kPa (–55.6 mmHg, –2.19 detected, the cir-
2) Read the data of fuel tank pressure sensor inHg)? cuit has returned to
signal using the Subaru Select Monitor or gen- a normal condition
eral scan tool. at this time. Repro-
NOTE: duce the failure,
• Subaru Select Monitor and then perform
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the diagnosis
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref. again.
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni- NOTE:
tor.> In this case, tem-
• General scan tool porary poor con-
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the tact of connector,
general scan tool operation manual. temporary open or
short circuit of har-
ness may be the
cause.
2 CHECK FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR Is the voltage 4.5 V or more? Go to step 3. Repair the harness
POWER SUPPLY. and connector.
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. NOTE:
2) Disconnect the connector from the fuel tank In this case, repair
pressure sensor. the following item:
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. • Open circuit of
4) Measure the voltage between the fuel tank harness between
pressure sensor connector and chassis ground. ECM and fuel tank
Connector & terminal pressure sensor
(R47) No. 3 (+) — Chassis ground (–): connector
• Poor contact of
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 4. Repair the harness
FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR CONNEC- and connector.
TOR. NOTE:
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. In this case, repair
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. the following item:
3) Measure the resistance of harness between • Open circuit of
the ECM and fuel tank pressure sensor connec- harness between
tor. ECM and fuel tank
Connector & terminal pressure sensor
(B136) No. 21 — (R47) No. 2: connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 5. Repair the ground
FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR CONNEC- more? short circuit of har-
TOR. ness between
Measure the resistance between ECM and ECM and fuel tank
chassis ground. pressure sensor
Connector & terminal connector.
(B136) No. 21 — Chassis ground:
5 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of the Repair the poor Replace the fuel
Check for poor contact between the ECM and ECM or fuel tank pressure sen- contact of the ECM tank pressure sen-
fuel tank pressure sensor connector. sor connector? or fuel tank pres- sor. <Ref. to
sure sensor con- EC(H4SO)-15,
nector. Fuel Tank Pres-
sure Sensor.>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-193
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

BL:DTC P0453 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE

SENSOR HIGH INPUT
DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Immediately at fault recognition
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-146, DTC P0453 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL
SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

FUEL TANK
PRESSURE
SENSOR

1
R47

R57
10

R15

R333
11

10
9

i155

i3
12
2

B38

*
*
B83
: TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT
*
B22

C21

B30

B: B135
ECM
C: B136

R57 B38 B: B135 C: B136 R47

B83
i155 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6
3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 7 8 9 10 11 12 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
4 5 6
3 4 5 6 7 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
8 9 10 11
EN-08676

EN(H4SO)(diag)-194
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the measured value 7.95 kPa Go to step 2. Even if DTC is
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. (59.6 mmHg, 2.35 inHg) or detected, the cir-
2) Read the data of fuel tank pressure sensor more? cuit has returned to
signal using the Subaru Select Monitor or gen- a normal condition
eral scan tool. at this time. Repro-
NOTE: duce the failure,
• Subaru Select Monitor and then perform
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the diagnosis
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref. again.
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni- NOTE:
tor.> In this case, tem-
• General scan tool porary poor con-
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the tact of connector,
general scan tool operation manual. temporary open or
short circuit of har-
ness may be the
cause.
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the measured value 7.95 kPa Repair the short Go to step 3.
FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR CONNEC- (59.6 mmHg, 2.35 inHg) or circuit to power in
TOR. more? the harness
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. between ECM and
2) Disconnect the connector from the fuel tank fuel tank pressure
pressure sensor. sensor connector.
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON.
4) Read the data of fuel tank pressure sensor
signal using the Subaru Select Monitor or gen-
eral scan tool.
NOTE:
• Subaru Select Monitor
For detailed operation procedures, refer to
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref.
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni-
tor.>
• General scan tool
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the
general scan tool operation manual.
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Go to step 4. Repair the harness
FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR CONNEC- and connector.
TOR. NOTE:
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. In this case, repair
2) Measure the resistance of harness between the following item:
fuel tank pressure sensor connector and engine • Open circuit of
ground. harness between
Connector & terminal ECM and fuel tank
(R47) No. 1 — Engine ground: pressure sensor
connector
• Poor contact of
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
• Poor contact of
joint connector
4 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of fuel Repair the poor Replace the fuel
Check for poor contact of the fuel tank pressure tank pressure sensor connec- contact of fuel tank tank pressure sen-
sensor connector. tor? pressure sensor sor. <Ref. to
connector. EC(H4SO)-15,
Fuel Tank Pres-
sure Sensor.>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-195
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

BM:DTC P0456 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECT-

ED (VERY SMALL LEAK)
DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Detected when two consecutive driving cycles with fault occur.
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-148, DTC P0456 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL
SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (VERY SMALL LEAK), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Fuel odor
• There is a hole of more than 0.5 mm (0.020 in) dia. in evaporation system or fuel tank.
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP. Is the fuel filler cap tightened Go to step 2. Tighten fuel filler
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. securely? cap securely.
2) Check the fuel filler cap.
NOTE:
The DTC is stored in memory if fuel filler cap is
or was loose or if the cap chain has caught while
tightening.
2 CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP. Is the fuel filler cap genuine? Go to step 3. Replace with a
genuine fuel filler
cap.
3 CHECK FUEL FILLER PIPE GASKET. Is there any damage to the seal Repair or replace Go to step 4.
between fuel filler cap and fuel the fuel filler cap
filler pipe? and fuel filler pipe.
<Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-57,
Fuel Filler Pipe.>
4 CHECK DRAIN VALVE. Does the drain valve operate? Go to step 5. Replace the drain
1) Install the delivery (test) mode fuse. valve. <Ref. to
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. EC(H4SO)-18,
3) Operate the drain valve using the Subaru Drain Valve.>
Select Monitor.
NOTE:
Drain valve can be operated using the Subaru
Select Monitor. For detailed procedures, refer
to “SYSTEM OPERATION CHECK MODE”.
<Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-52, System Opera-
tion Check Mode.>
5 CHECK PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID Does the purge control sole- Go to step 6. Replace the purge
VALVE. noid valve operate? control solenoid
Operate the purge control solenoid valve using valve. <Ref. to
the Subaru Select Monitor. EC(H4SO)-9,
NOTE: Purge Control
Purge control solenoid valve operation can be Solenoid Valve.>
executed using Subaru Select Monitor. For de-
tailed procedures, refer to “SYSTEM OPERA-
TION CHECK MODE”. <Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-52, System Operation Check
Mode.>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-196
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

6 CHECK EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CON- Is there any hole of more than Repair or replace Go to step 7.
TROL SYSTEM LINE. 0.5 mm (0.020 in) dia. on evap- the evaporation
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. oration line? line. <Ref. to
2) Check the delivery (test) mode fuse is FU(H4SO)-68,
removed. Fuel Delivery and
Evaporation
Lines.>
7 CHECK CANISTER. Is the canister damaged or is Repair or replace Go to step 8.
there a hole of more than 0.5 the canister. <Ref.
mm (0.020 in) dia. in it? to EC(H4SO)-5,
Canister.>
8 CHECK FUEL TANK. Is the fuel tank damaged or is Repair or replace Go to step 9.
Remove the fuel tank. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-50, there any hole of more than 0.5 the fuel tank. <Ref.
Fuel Tank.> mm (0.020 in) dia. in it? to FU(H4SO)-50,
Fuel Tank.>
9 CHECK ANY OTHER MECHANICAL TROU- Is there any hole of more than Repair or replace Repair the poor
BLE IN EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CON- 0.5 mm (0.020 in) dia., crack, the hoses or pipes. contact of ECM
TROL SYSTEM. clogging, or disconnection, connector.
bend, misconnection of hoses
or pipes in evaporative emis-
sion control system?

EN(H4SO)(diag)-197
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

BN:DTC P0457 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECT-

ED (FUEL CAP LOOSE/OFF)
DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Detected when two consecutive driving cycles with fault occur.
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-148, DTC P0457 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL
SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (FUEL CAP LOOSE/OFF), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Fuel odor
• Fuel filler cap loose or lost
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP. Is the fuel filler cap tightened Go to step 2. Tighten fuel filler
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. securely? cap securely.
2) Check the fuel filler cap.
NOTE:
The DTC is stored in memory if fuel filler cap is
or was loose or if the cap chain has caught while
tightening.
2 CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP. Is the fuel filler cap genuine? Go to step 3. Replace with a
genuine fuel filler
cap.
3 CHECK FUEL FILLER PIPE GASKET. Is there any damage to the seal Repair or replace Go to step 4.
between fuel filler cap and fuel the fuel filler cap
filler pipe? and fuel filler pipe.
<Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-57,
Fuel Filler Pipe.>
4 CHECK DRAIN VALVE. Does the drain valve operate? Go to step 5. Replace the drain
1) Install the delivery (test) mode fuse. valve. <Ref. to
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. EC(H4SO)-18,
3) Operate the drain valve using the Subaru Drain Valve.>
Select Monitor.
NOTE:
Drain valve can be operated using the Subaru
Select Monitor. For detailed procedures, refer
to “SYSTEM OPERATION CHECK MODE”.
<Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-52, System Opera-
tion Check Mode.>
5 CHECK PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID Does the purge control sole- Go to step 6. Replace the purge
VALVE. noid valve operate? control solenoid
Operate the purge control solenoid valve using valve. <Ref. to
the Subaru Select Monitor. EC(H4SO)-9,
NOTE: Purge Control
Purge control solenoid valve operation can be Solenoid Valve.>
executed using Subaru Select Monitor. For de-
tailed procedures, refer to “SYSTEM OPERA-
TION CHECK MODE”. <Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-52, System Operation Check
Mode.>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-198
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

6 CHECK EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CON- Is there any disconnection, Repair or replace Go to step 7.
TROL SYSTEM LINE. damage or clogging on the the evaporation
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. evaporation line? line. <Ref. to
2) Check the delivery (test) mode fuse is FU(H4SO)-68,
removed. Fuel Delivery and
Evaporation
Lines.>
7 CHECK CANISTER. Is the canister damaged? Repair or replace Go to step 8.
the canister. <Ref.
to EC(H4SO)-5,
Canister.>
8 CHECK FUEL TANK. Is the fuel tank damaged? Repair or replace Go to step 9.
Remove the fuel tank. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-50, the fuel tank. <Ref.
Fuel Tank.> to FU(H4SO)-50,
Fuel Tank.>
9 CHECK ANY OTHER MECHANICAL TROU- Are there holes, cracks, clog- Repair or replace Repair the poor
BLE IN EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CON- ging, or disconnection, miscon- the hoses or pipes. contact of ECM
TROL SYSTEM. nection of hoses or pipes in connector.
evaporative emission control
system?

EN(H4SO)(diag)-199
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

BO:DTC P0458 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM PURGE CONTROL VALVE

CIRCUIT LOW
DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Detected when two consecutive driving cycles with fault occur.
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-149, DTC P0458 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
PURGE CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No.16
4
3

2
1
B: B135 D: B137 ECM
B220 E

D6
B4

B38 B21
15

48

41
1

i3 E2

i54
12

11

R99

R144 E4
1

DRAIN VALVE PURGE CONTROL

SOLENOID VALVE

B220
E4 R144
B21
17
1 5 9 13
1 2 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
2 6 10 14
1 2 19 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33

B38 D: B137 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
B: B135
42 43 44 45 46 47
i54
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
1 2 3 4 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
5 6 7 8 9 10 7 8 9 10 11 12 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
11 12 13 14 15 16 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31

EN-08633

EN(H4SO)(diag)-200
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL OF ECM. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 2. Go to step 3.
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON.
2) Measure the voltage between ECM and
chassis ground.
Connector & terminal
(B137) No. 6 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
2 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of ECM Repair the poor Even if DTC is
Check for poor contact of ECM connector. connector? contact of ECM detected, the cir-
connector. cuit has returned to
a normal condition
at this time. Repro-
duce the failure,
and then perform
the diagnosis
again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary open or
short circuit of har-
ness or temporary
poor contact of
connector may be
the cause.
3 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO PURGE CON- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 4. Repair the power
TROL SOLENOID VALVE. supply circuit.
Measure the voltage between purge control
solenoid valve and engine ground.
Connector & terminal
(E4) No. 1 (+) — Engine ground (–):
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 5. Repair the ground
PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CON- more? short circuit of har-
NECTOR. ness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ECM and purge
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and control solenoid
purge control solenoid valve. valve connector.
3) Measure the resistance between the purge
control solenoid valve connector and engine
ground.
Connector & terminal
(E4) No. 2 — Engine ground:
5 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 6. Repair the harness
PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CON- and connector.
NECTOR. NOTE:
Measure the resistance of harness between In this case, repair
ECM and purge control solenoid valve. the following item:
Connector & terminal • Open circuit in
(B137) No. 6 — (E4) No. 2: harness between
ECM and purge
control solenoid
valve connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
6 CHECK PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID Is the resistance 10 — 100 Ω? Repair the poor Replace the purge
VALVE. contact of purge control solenoid
1) Remove the purge control solenoid valve. control solenoid valve. <Ref. to
2) Measure the resistance between purge con- valve connector. EC(H4SO)-9,
trol solenoid valve terminals. Purge Control
Terminals Solenoid Valve.>
No. 1 — No. 2:

EN(H4SO)(diag)-201
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

BP:DTC P0459 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM PURGE CONTROL VALVE

CIRCUIT HIGH
DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Detected when two consecutive driving cycles with fault occur.
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-151, DTC P0459 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
PURGE CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No.16
4
3

2
1
B: B135 D: B137 ECM
B220 E

D6
B4

B38 B21
15

48

41
1

i3 E2

i54
12

11

R99

R144 E4
1

DRAIN VALVE PURGE CONTROL

SOLENOID VALVE

B220
E4 R144
B21
17
1 5 9 13
1 2 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
2 6 10 14
1 2 19 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33

B38 D: B137 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
B: B135
42 43 44 45 46 47
i54
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
1 2 3 4 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
5 6 7 8 9 10 7 8 9 10 11 12 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
11 12 13 14 15 16 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31

EN-08633

EN(H4SO)(diag)-202
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 10 V or more? Repair the short Go to step 2.
PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CON- circuit to power in
NECTOR. the harness
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. between ECM and
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and purge control sole-
purge control solenoid valve. noid valve connec-
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. tor.
4) Measure the voltage between ECM and
chassis ground.
Connector & terminal
(B137) No. 6 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
2 CHECK PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Replace the purge Repair the poor
VALVE. control solenoid contact of ECM
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. valve. <Ref. to connector.
2) Measure the resistance between purge con- EC(H4SO)-9,
trol solenoid valve terminals. Purge Control
Terminals Solenoid Valve.>
No. 1 — No. 2:

EN(H4SO)(diag)-203
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

BQ:DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE

DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Detected when two consecutive driving cycles with fault occur.
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-153, DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT
RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is any other DTC displayed? Check the appro- Replace the fuel
priate DTC using level sensor and
the “List of Diag- fuel sub level sen-
nostic Trouble sor. <Ref. to
Code (DTC)”. FU(H4SO)-62,
<Ref. to Fuel Level Sen-
EN(H4SO)(diag)- sor.> <Ref. to
75, List of Diagnos- FU(H4SO)-64,
tic Trouble Code Fuel Sub Level
(DTC).> Sensor.>

BR:DTC P0462 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT LOW

NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to DTC P0463. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-204, DTC P0463 FUEL LEVEL
SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
BS:DTC P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT HIGH
DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Detected when two consecutive driving cycles with fault occur.
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-157, DTC P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT
HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is DTC P0462 or P0463 dis- Check the combi- Even if DTC is
played on the Subaru Select nation meter. <Ref. detected, the cir-
Monitor? to IDI-12, CHECK cuit has returned to
FUEL LEVEL a normal condition
SENSOR, at this time. Repro-
INSPECTION, duce the failure,
Combination Meter and then perform
System.> the diagnosis
again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector,
temporary open or
short circuit of har-
ness may be the
cause.

EN(H4SO)(diag)-204
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

BT:DTC P0464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT INTERMITTENT

DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Detected when two consecutive driving cycles with fault occur.
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-159, DTC P0464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT IN-
TERMITTENT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is DTC P0464 displayed on the Check the combi- Even if DTC is
display? nation meter. <Ref. detected, the cir-
to IDI-12, CHECK cuit has returned to
FUEL LEVEL a normal condition
SENSOR, at this time. Repro-
INSPECTION, duce the failure,
Combination Meter and then perform
System.> the diagnosis
again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector,
temporary open or
short circuit of har-
ness may be the
cause.

BU:DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR “A”

DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Immediately at fault recognition
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-162, DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR “A”, Diag-
nostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK DTC OF VDC. Is DTC of VDC displayed? Perform the diag- Repair the poor
Check DTC of VDC. nosis according to contact of ECM
DTC. <Ref. to connector.
VDC(diag)-35, List
of Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-205
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

BV:DTC P0506 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM RPM LOWER THAN EXPECTED
DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Detected when two consecutive driving cycles with fault occur.
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-163, DTC P0506 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM RPM
LOWER THAN EXPECTED, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Hard to start the engine.
• Engine does not start.
• Improper idling
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is any other DTC displayed? Check the appro- Go to step 2.
priate DTC using
the “List of Diag-
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC)”.
<Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
75, List of Diagnos-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
2 CHECK AIR CLEANER ELEMENT. Is there excessive clogging on Replace the air Go to step 3.
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. air cleaner element? cleaner element.
2) Check the air cleaner element. <Ref. to IN(H4SO)-
4, Air Cleaner Ele-
ment.>
3 CHECK ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CON- Are foreign matter found inside Remove foreign Perform the diag-
TROL. electronic throttle control? matter from elec- nosis of DTC
1) Remove the electronic throttle control. tronic throttle con- P2101. <Ref. to
<Ref. to FU(H4SO)-15, REMOVAL, Throttle trol. EN(H4SO)(diag)-
Body.> 258, DTC P2101
2) Check the electronic throttle control. THROTTLE
ACTUATOR CON-
TROL MOTOR
CIRCUIT RANGE/
PERFORMANCE,
Diagnostic Proce-
dure with Diagnos-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-206
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

BW:DTC P0507 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM RPM HIGHER THAN EXPECTED
DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Detected when two consecutive driving cycles with fault occur.
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-164, DTC P0507 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM RPM
HIGHER THAN EXPECTED, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Engine keeps running at higher speed than specified idle speed.
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is any other DTC displayed? Check the appro- Go to step 2.
priate DTC using
the “List of Diag-
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC)”.
<Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
75, List of Diagnos-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
2 CHECK AIR INTAKE SYSTEM. Is there any fault in air intake Repair air suction Go to step 3.
1) Start and idle the engine. system? and leaks.
2) Check the following items.
• Loose installation of intake manifold and
throttle body
• Cracks of intake manifold gasket and throttle
body gasket
• Disconnection of vacuum hoses
3 CHECK ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CON- Are foreign matter found inside Remove foreign Perform the diag-
TROL. electronic throttle control? matter from elec- nosis of DTC
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. tronic throttle con- P2101. <Ref. to
2) Remove the electronic throttle control. trol. EN(H4SO)(diag)-
<Ref. to FU(H4SO)-15, REMOVAL, Throttle 258, DTC P2101
Body.> THROTTLE
3) Check the electronic throttle control. ACTUATOR CON-
TROL MOTOR
CIRCUIT RANGE/
PERFORMANCE,
Diagnostic Proce-
dure with Diagnos-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-207
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

BX:DTC P050A COLD START IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Detected when two consecutive driving cycles with fault occur.
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-165, DTC P050A COLD START IDLE AIR CONTROL
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine keeps running at higher speed than specified idle speed.
• Engine keeps running at a lower speed than the specified idle speed.
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No. 16
4
3

2
1
E
B220

B134 ECM
10

11

12

13

B21
48

42

43

44

45

E2

E5 E16 E6 E17
2

FUEL INJECTOR FUEL INJECTOR FUEL INJECTOR FUEL INJECTOR

No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4

E5 E16 B21 B134 B220

E6 E17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 2 6 10 14
1 2 19
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54

EN-07705

EN(H4SO)(diag)-208
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

BATTERY
ELECTRONIC M/B No. 13
THROTTLE
B220
CONTROL RELAY
16 M/B No. 16
13 3 4
14
MAIN RELAY B220
15
E

B17
B7
ECM

A : B134 B : B135 C : B136 D : B137

A 29
A 19

A 28

A 18
D3
A6

A3

A1
A2
A4

D1

C4
*
*
B138

B21
37
36

35
40

34

20
39
38

17
18
19

E2
5

6
1

: TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL

* ARRANGEMENT
E E ELECTRONIC E
E57 THROTTLE
CONTROL

E57 B138 B21 A: B134 B: B135

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1 2 3 4 5 6 5 6 7 8 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
B220 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47 C: B136 D: B137
17 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2 6 10 14
19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-07785

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is any other DTC displayed? Check the appro- Go to step 2.
priate DTC using
the “List of Diag-
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC)”.
<Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
75, List of Diagnos-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
2 CHECK ENGINE OIL. Is there a proper amount of Go to step 3. Replace engine oil.
engine oil? <Ref. to
LU(H4SO)-13,
REPLACEMENT,
Engine Oil.>
3 CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM. Are there holes or loose bolts Repair the exhaust Go to step 4.
on exhaust system? system.

EN(H4SO)(diag)-209
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

4 CHECK AIR INTAKE SYSTEM. Are there holes, loose bolts or Repair the air Go to step 5.
disconnection of hose on air intake system.
intake system?
5 CHECK FUEL PRESSURE. Is the measured value 340 — Go to step 6. Repair the follow-
WARNING: 400 kPa (3.5 — 4.1 kg/cm2, 49 ing item.
Place “NO OPEN FLAMES” signs near the — 58 psi)? Fuel pressure is
working area. too high:
CAUTION: • Clogged fuel line
Be careful not to spill fuel. or bent hose
Measure the fuel pressure. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)- Fuel pressure is
28, INSPECTION, Fuel Pressure.> too low:
CAUTION: • Improper fuel
Release fuel pressure before removing the pump discharge
fuel pressure gauge. • Clogged fuel line
6 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Is the engine coolant tempera- Go to step 7. Replace the
SENSOR. ture 75°C (167°F) or higher? engine coolant
1) Start the engine and warm up completely. temperature sen-
2) Read the data of engine coolant tempera- sor. <Ref. to
ture sensor signal using Subaru Select Monitor FU(H4SO)-23,
or general scan tool. Engine Coolant
NOTE: Temperature Sen-
• Subaru Select Monitor sor.>
For detailed operation procedures, refer to
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref.
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni-
tor.>
• General scan tool
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the
general scan tool operation manual.
7 CHECK MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR Is the measured value 2.0 — Go to step 8. Replace the mass
TEMPERATURE SENSOR. 5.0 g/s (0.26 — 0.66 lb/m)? air flow and intake
1) Start the engine and warm up engine until air temperature
coolant temperature is higher than 75°C sensor. <Ref. to
(167°F). FU(H4SO)-31,
2) For CVT models, set the select lever to “P” Mass Air Flow and
range or “N” range, and for MT models, place Intake Air Temper-
the shift lever in the neutral position. ature Sensor.>
3) Turn the A/C switch to OFF.
4) Turn all the accessory switches to OFF.
5) Read the data of the mass air flow and
intake air temperature sensor signal using Sub-
aru Select Monitor or general scan tool.
NOTE:
• Subaru Select Monitor
For detailed operation procedures, refer to
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref.
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni-
tor.>
• General scan tool
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the
general scan tool operation manual.

EN(H4SO)(diag)-210
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

8 CHECK MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR Subtract ambient temperature Go to step 9. Check the mass air
TEMPERATURE SENSOR. from intake air temperature. Is flow and intake air
1) Start the engine and warm up engine until the obtained value –10 — 50°C temperature sen-
coolant temperature is higher than 75°C (–18 — 90°F)? sor. <Ref. to
(167°F). FU(H4SO)-31,
2) For CVT models, set the select lever to “P” Mass Air Flow and
range or “N” range, and for MT models, place Intake Air Temper-
the shift lever in the neutral position. ature Sensor.>
3) Turn the A/C switch to OFF.
4) Turn all the accessory switches to OFF.
5) Open the front hood.
6) Measure the ambient temperature.
7) Read the data of the mass air flow and
intake air temperature sensor signal using Sub-
aru Select Monitor or general scan tool.
NOTE:
• Subaru Select Monitor
For detailed operation procedures, refer to
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref.
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni-
tor.>
• General scan tool
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the
general scan tool operation manual.
9 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL OF ECM. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 14. Go to step 10.
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON.
2) Measure the voltage between ECM and
chassis ground on faulty cylinders.
Connector & terminal
#1 (B134) No. 10 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
#2 (B134) No. 11 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
#3 (B134) No. 12 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
#4 (B134) No. 13 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
10 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 11. Repair the short
FUEL INJECTOR CONNECTOR. more? circuit to ground in
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. harness between
2) Disconnect the connector from fuel injector ECM and fuel
on faulty cylinders. injector connector.
3) Measure the resistance between fuel injec-
tor connector and engine ground on faulty cylin-
ders.
Connector & terminal
#1 (E5) No. 1 — Engine ground:
#2 (E16) No. 1 — Engine ground:
#3 (E6) No. 1 — Engine ground:
#4 (E17) No. 1 — Engine ground:
11 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 12. Repair the harness
FUEL INJECTOR CONNECTOR. and connector.
Measure the resistance of harness between NOTE:
ECM and fuel injector on faulty cylinders. In this case, repair
Connector & terminal the following item:
#1 (B134) No. 10 — (E5) No. 1: • Open circuit in
#2 (B134) No. 11 — (E16) No. 1: harness between
#3 (B134) No. 12 — (E6) No. 1: ECM and fuel in-
#4 (B134) No. 13 — (E17) No. 1: jector connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector

EN(H4SO)(diag)-211
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

12 CHECK FUEL INJECTOR. Is the resistance 5 — 20 Ω? Go to step 13. Replace the faulty
Measure the resistance between fuel injector fuel injector. <Ref.
terminals on faulty cylinder. to FU(H4SO)-34,
Terminals Fuel Injector.>
No. 1 — No. 2:
13 CHECK POWER SUPPLY LINE. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Repair the poor Repair the harness
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. contact of all con- and connector.
2) Measure the voltage between fuel injector nectors in fuel NOTE:
and engine ground on faulty cylinders. injector circuit. In this case, repair
Connector & terminal the following item:
#1 (E5) No. 2 (+) — Engine ground (–): • Open circuit in
#2 (E16) No. 2 (+) — Engine ground (–): harness between
#3 (E6) No. 2 (+) — Engine ground (–): the main relay con-
#4 (E17) No. 2 (+) — Engine ground (–): nector and fuel in-
jector connector on
faulty cylinders
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
• Poor contact of
main relay connec-
tor
14 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 10 V or more? Repair the short Go to step 15.
FUEL INJECTOR CONNECTOR. circuit to power in
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. the harness
2) Disconnect the connector from fuel injector between the ECM
on faulty cylinders. and fuel injector.
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON.
4) Measure the voltage between ECM and
chassis ground on faulty cylinders.
Connector & terminal
#1 (B134) No. 10 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
#2 (B134) No. 11 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
#3 (B134) No. 12 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
#4 (B134) No. 13 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
15 CHECK FUEL INJECTOR. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Replace the faulty Go to step 16.
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. fuel injector. <Ref.
2) Measure the resistance between fuel injec- to FU(H4SO)-34,
tor terminals on faulty cylinder. Fuel Injector.>
Terminals
No. 1 — No. 2:
16 CHECK INSTALLATION CONDITION OF Is the camshaft position sensor Tighten the cam- Go to step 17.
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR/CRANK- or crankshaft position sensor shaft position sen-
SHAFT POSITION SENSOR. loosely installed? sor or crankshaft
position sensor.
<Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-26,
Camshaft Position
Sensor.> <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-24,
Crankshaft Posi-
tion Sensor.>
17 CHECK CRANK SPROCKET. Is the crank sprocket rusted or Replace the crank Go to step 18.
Remove the timing belt cover. <Ref. to does it have broken teeth? sprocket. <Ref. to
ME(H4SO)-46, REMOVAL, Timing Belt Cover.> ME(H4SO)-53,
Crank Sprocket.>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-212
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

18 CHECK INSTALLATION CONDITION OF Is the timing belt dislocated Repair the installa- Go to step 19.
TIMING BELT. from its proper position? tion condition of
Turn the crankshaft using ST, and align the timing belt. <Ref. to
alignment mark on crank sprocket with align- ME(H4SO)-47,
ment mark on cylinder block. Timing Belt.>
ST 499987500 CRANKSHAFT
SOCKET
19 CHECK ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CON- Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 20. Replace the elec-
TROL RELAY. tronic throttle con-
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. trol relay. <Ref. to
2) Remove the electronic throttle control relay. FU(H4SO)-46,
3) Connect the battery to terminals No. 13 and Electronic Throttle
No. 14 of electronic throttle control relay. Control Relay.>
4) Measure the resistance between electronic
throttle control relay terminals.
Terminals
No. 15 — No. 16:
20 CHECK POWER SUPPLY OF ELECTRONIC Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 21. Repair the open or
THROTTLE CONTROL RELAY. ground short circuit
Measure the voltage between electronic throttle of power supply
control relay connector and chassis ground. circuit.
Connector & terminal
(B220) No. 16 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
21 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 10 V or more? Repair the short Go to step 22.
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL RE- circuit to power in
LAY CONNECTOR. the harness
1) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. between ECM and
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. electronic throttle
3) Measure the voltage between electronic control relay con-
throttle control relay connector and chassis nector.
ground.
Connector & terminal
(B220) No. 14 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
22 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 23. Repair the short
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL RE- more? circuit in harness
LAY CONNECTOR. to ground between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ECM and elec-
2) Measure the resistance between electronic tronic throttle con-
throttle control relay connector and chassis trol relay
ground. connector.
Connector & terminal
(B220) No. 14 — Chassis ground:
(B220) No. 15 — Chassis ground:
23 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 24. Repair the open
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL RE- circuit in harness
LAY CONNECTOR. between ECM and
Measure the resistance between ECM and electronic throttle
electronic throttle control relay connector. control relay con-
Connector & terminal nector.
(B135) No. 17 — (B220) No. 14:
(B135) No. 7 — (B220) No. 15:

EN(H4SO)(diag)-213
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

24 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 25. Repair the short
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL CON- more? circuit to ground in
NECTOR. harness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ECM and elec-
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and tronic throttle con-
electronic throttle control. trol connector.
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and
chassis ground.
Connector & terminal
(B134) No. 19 — Chassis ground:
(B134) No. 18 — Chassis ground:
(B134) No. 18 — (B136) No. 4:
(B134) No. 28 — Chassis ground:
25 CHECK SHORT CIRCUIT INSIDE THE ECM. Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 26. Repair the short
1) Connect the connector to ECM. more? circuit to ground in
2) Measure the resistance between electronic harness between
throttle control connector and engine ground. ECM and elec-
Connector & terminal tronic throttle con-
(E57) No. 6 — Engine ground: trol connector.
(E57) No. 4 — Engine ground: Replace the ECM if
defective. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-41,
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>
26 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 27. Repair the harness
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL CON- and connector.
NECTOR. NOTE:
1) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. In this case, repair
2) Measure the resistance of harness between the following item:
ECM and electronic throttle control connector. • Open circuit in
Connector & terminal harness between
(B134) No. 18 — (E57) No. 6: ECM and electron-
(B134) No. 28 — (E57) No. 4: ic throttle control
(B134) No. 29 — (E57) No. 3: connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
27 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Go to step 28. Repair the harness
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL CON- and connector.
NECTOR. NOTE:
1) Connect the connector to ECM. In this case, repair
2) Measure the resistance between electronic the following item:
throttle control connector and engine ground. • Open circuit of
Connector & terminal harness between
(E57) No. 3 — Engine ground: ECM and engine
ground
• Poor contact of
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
28 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 5 V or more? Repair the short Go to step 29.
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL CON- circuit to power in
NECTOR. harness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. ECM and elec-
2) Measure the voltage between electronic tronic throttle con-
throttle control connector and engine ground. trol connector.
Connector & terminal
(E57) No. 6 (+) — Engine ground (–):
(E57) No. 4 (+) — Engine ground (–):

EN(H4SO)(diag)-214
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

29 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 30. Repair the short
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL CON- more? circuit to power in
NECTOR. harness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ECM and elec-
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. tronic throttle con-
3) Measure the resistance between ECM con- trol connector.
nectors.
Connector & terminal
(B134) No. 19 — (B134) No. 18:
(B134) No. 19 — (B134) No. 28:
30 CHECK SENSOR OUTPUT. Is the voltage 0.81 — 0.87 V? Go to step 31. Repair the poor
1) Connect all connectors. contact of elec-
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. tronic throttle con-
3) Read the data of main throttle sensor signal trol connector.
using Subaru Select Monitor. Replace the elec-
NOTE: tronic throttle con-
For detailed operation procedures, refer to trol if defective.
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref. <Ref. to
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni- FU(H4SO)-15,
tor.> Throttle Body.>
31 CHECK SENSOR OUTPUT. Is the voltage 1.64 — 1.70 V? Go to step 32. Repair the poor
Read the data of sub throttle sensor signal contact of elec-
using Subaru Select Monitor. tronic throttle con-
NOTE: trol connector.
Subaru Select Monitor Replace the elec-
For detailed operation procedures, refer to tronic throttle con-
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref. trol if defective.
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni- <Ref. to
tor.> FU(H4SO)-15,
Throttle Body.>
32 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 33. Repair the harness
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL CON- and connector.
NECTOR. NOTE:
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. In this case, repair
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and the following item:
electronic throttle control. • Open circuit in
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and harness between
electronic throttle control connector. ECM and electron-
Connector & terminal ic throttle control
(B134) No. 2 — (E57) No. 2: connector
(B134) No. 1 — (E57) No. 1: • Poor contact of
coupling connector
33 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 5 V or more? Repair the short Go to step 34.
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL CON- circuit to power in
NECTOR. the harness
1) Connect the connector to ECM. between ECM and
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. electronic throttle
3) Measure the voltage between electronic control.
throttle control connector and engine ground.
Connector & terminal
(E57) No. 2 (+) — Engine ground (–):
(E57) No. 1 (+) — Engine ground (–):

EN(H4SO)(diag)-215
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

34 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 35. Repair the short
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL CON- more? circuit to ground in
NECTOR. harness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ECM and elec-
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. tronic throttle con-
3) Measure the resistance between electronic trol connector.
throttle control connector and engine ground.
Connector & terminal
(E57) No. 2 — Engine ground:
(E57) No. 1 — Engine ground:
35 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ELECTRONIC Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 36. Repair the short
THROTTLE CONTROL CONNECTOR. more? circuit of harness
Measure the resistance between electronic between ECM and
throttle control connectors. electronic throttle
Connector & terminal control connector.
(E57) No. 2 — (E57) No. 1:
36 CHECK ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CON- Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Go to step 37. Repair the harness
TROL GROUND CIRCUIT. and connector.
Measure the resistance between ECM and NOTE:
chassis ground. In this case, repair
Connector & terminal the following item:
(B134) No. 3 — Chassis ground: • Open circuit of
(B134) No. 4 — Chassis ground: harness between
(B134) No. 6 — Chassis ground: ECM and engine
(B137) No. 1 — Chassis ground: ground
(B137) No. 3 — Chassis ground: • Poor contact of
coupling connector
37 CHECK ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CON- Is the resistance 50 Ω or less? Go to step 38. Replace the elec-
TROL. tronic throttle con-
Measure the resistance between electronic trol. <Ref. to
throttle control terminals. FU(H4SO)-15,
Terminals Throttle Body.>
No. 2 — No. 1:
38 CHECK ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CON- Does the valve return to the Repair the poor Replace the elec-
TROL. specified position? Standard contact of ECM tronic throttle con-
Move the throttle valve to the fully open and fully value: 3 mm (0.12 in) from fully connector. trol. <Ref. to
closed positions with fingers. closed position FU(H4SO)-15,
Check that the valve returns to the specified Throttle Body.>
position when releasing fingers.

BY:DTC P050B COLD START IGNITION TIMING PERFORMANCE

NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to DTC P050A. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-208, DTC P050A COLD
START IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-216
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

BZ:DTC P0512 STARTER REQUEST CIRCUIT

DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Immediately at fault recognition
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-168, DTC P0512 STARTER REQUEST CIRCUIT, Diag-
nostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Failure of engine to start
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

F/B No. 21
6
BATTERY
SBF-5 MAIN SBF
2 3
2

IGNITION SWITCH
B72

STARTER RELAY
B493
E
1

INHIBITOR SWITCH
P R N D
MT CVT 12 6
11 9
MT

B12 T3 T7
CVT
2

CLUTCH STROKE
SENSOR (CLUTCH STARTER MOTOR
MT

START SWITCH)

B501
CVT
1

CVT
B14

MT M
B26

C16

B : B135
ECM
C : B136

B493 B501 B72 T7 B12 B : B135 C : B136

1 2 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 5 6 7 8 14 15 16
3 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
4 5 6 9 10 11 12 25 26 27
4 6 7 8 9 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35

EN-07701

EN(H4SO)(diag)-217
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is any other DTC displayed? Check the appro- Go to step 2.
priate DTC using
the “List of Diag-
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC)”.
<Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
75, List of Diagnos-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 10 V or more? Repair the short Repair the poor
STARTER RELAY CONNECTOR. circuit to power contact of ECM
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. supply in harness connector.
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. between ECM and
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. starter relay con-
4) Measure the voltage between ECM and nector.
chassis ground.
Connector & terminal
(B136) No. 16 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
NOTE:
For CVT model, place the select lever in “P”
range or “N” range.

EN(H4SO)(diag)-218
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

CA:DTC P0604 INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE RANDOM ACCESS MEMORY

(RAM) ERROR
DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Immediately at fault recognition
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-170, DTC P0604 INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE RAN-
DOM ACCESS MEMORY (RAM) ERROR, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine does not start.
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is any other DTC displayed? Check the appro- Even if DTC is
priate DTC using detected, the cir-
the “List of Diag- cuit has returned to
nostic Trouble a normal condition
Code (DTC)”. at this time. Repro-
<Ref. to duce the failure,
EN(H4SO)(diag)- and then perform
75, List of Diagnos- the diagnosis
tic Trouble Code again.
(DTC).> NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector,
temporary open or
short circuit of har-
ness may be the
cause.

CB:DTC P0605 INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE READ ONLY MEMORY (ROM)

ERROR
NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to DTC P0607. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-220, DTC P0607 THROTTLE
CONTROL SYSTEM CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-219
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

CC:DTC P0607 THROTTLE CONTROL SYSTEM CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFOR-

MANCE
DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Immediately at fault recognition
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-172, DTC P0607 THROTTLE CONTROL SYSTEM CIR-
CUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
• Poor driving performance
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY
M/B No. 16
4
3
M/B No. 12
1
2 B72 IGNITION
SWITCH BATTERY
B220 F/B No. 12 SBF-5 MAIN SBF
1 3
B13

C30
C1
D7

C2

ECM

A : B134 B: B135 C : B136 D : B137

A19

A29

A18
A28
A1
A2
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1

C4

E
B138

*
*
B21
18

17
20

38
19
39
37
36

35
34
40

: TERMINAL No.
E2 * OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT
6
4
2
5

3
1

E E E57 ELECTRONIC E
THROTTLE CONTROL

B138 B21 B72 E57 B220

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 17
5 6 7 8 4 5 6 1 5 9 13
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 1 2 3 4 5 6 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
2 6 10 14
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 19

34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54

A: B134 B: B135 C: B136 D: B137

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-07791

EN(H4SO)(diag)-220
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK INPUT VOLTAGE OF ECM. Is the voltage 10 — 13 V? Go to step 2. Repair the open or
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. ground short circuit
2) Measure the voltage between ECM and of power supply
chassis ground. circuit.
Connector & terminal
(B136) No. 1 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
(B137) No. 7 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
2 CHECK INPUT VOLTAGE OF ECM. Is the voltage 13 — 15 V? Go to step 3. Repair the open or
1) Start the engine. ground short circuit
2) Measure the voltage between ECM and of power supply
chassis ground. circuit.
Connector & terminal
(B136) No. 1 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
(B137) No. 7 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 4. Repair the harness
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL CON- and connector.
NECTOR. NOTE:
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. In this case, repair
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and the following item:
electronic throttle control. • Open circuit in
3) Measure the resistance of harness between harness between
ECM and electronic throttle control connector. ECM and electron-
Connector & terminal ic throttle control
(B134) No. 19 — (E57) No. 5: connector
(B134) No. 29 — (E57) No. 3: • Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK ECM GROUND HARNESS. Is the voltage less than 1 V? Repair the poor Repair the follow-
1) Connect all connectors. contact of ECM ing item.
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. connector. • Open circuit in
3) Measure the voltage between ECM and ground circuit
chassis ground. • Further tighten-
Connector & terminal ing of the engine
(B134) No. 3 (+) — Chassis ground (–): ground terminal
(B134) No. 4 (+) — Chassis ground (–): • Poor contact of
(B134) No. 6 (+) — Chassis ground (–): coupling connector
(B137) No. 1 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
(B137) No. 3 (+) — Chassis ground (–):

CD:DTC P0638 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL RANGE/PERFORMANCE

(BANK 1)
NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to DTC P2101. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-258, DTC P2101 THROTTLE
ACTUATOR CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnos-
tic Trouble Code (DTC).>
CE:DTC P0700 TRANSMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM (MIL REQUEST)
NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to CVT section. <Ref. to CVT(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-221
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

CF:DTC P0851 PARK/NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT LOW (AT MODEL)

DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Detected when two consecutive driving cycles with fault occur.
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-177, DTC P0851 PARK/NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIR-
CUIT LOW (AT MODEL), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

C: B136
C: B136 ECM
: TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT 1 2 3 4 5 6
* 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
35

B138 B25

1 2
*
*
B25 T2 T2 B25

B12
MT 2 1
1 2 3 4
CVT

NEUTRAL
5 6 7 8
POSITION
9 10 11 12
SWITCH

T7
INHIBITOR SWITCH
P R N D
1 2 3 4 5
12 6
6 7 8 9
11 9

B12 T3 T7

B138

1 2 3 4
STARTER MOTOR (MAGNET) 5 6 7 8
CVT

M
MT

B14
CVT

MT

TO STARTER RELAY
EN-07792

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK SELECT CABLE. Is there any fault in select Repair or adjust Go to step 2.
cable? the select cable.
<Ref. to CS-41,
Select Cable.>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-222
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

2 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF ECM. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Repair the poor Go to step 3.
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. contact of ECM
2) Place the select lever in other than “P” range connector.
and “N” range.
3) Measure the voltage between ECM and
chassis ground.
Connector & terminal
(B136) No. 35 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 4. Repair the ground
TRANSMISSION HARNESS CONNECTOR. more? short circuit of har-
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ness between
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and ECM and transmis-
transmission harness connector (T3). sion harness con-
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and nector.
chassis ground.
Connector & terminal
(B136) No. 35 — Chassis ground:
4 CHECK TRANSMISSION HARNESS CON- Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Replace the inhibi- Repair short cir-
NECTOR. more? tor switch. <Ref. to cuit to ground in
1) Disconnect the connector from inhibitor CVT-94, Inhibitor harness between
switch. Switch.> transmission har-
2) Measure the resistance between transmis- ness connector
sion harness connector and engine ground. and inhibitor switch
Connector & terminal connector.
(T3) No. 12 — Engine ground:

EN(H4SO)(diag)-223
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

CG:DTC P0851 NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT LOW (MT MODEL)

DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Detected when two consecutive driving cycles with fault occur.
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-178, DTC P0851 NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT
LOW (MT MODEL), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

C: B136
C: B136 ECM
: TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT 1 2 3 4 5 6
* 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
35

B138 B25

1 2
*
*
B25 T2 T2 B25

B12
MT 2 1
1 2 3 4
CVT

NEUTRAL
5 6 7 8
POSITION
9 10 11 12
SWITCH

T7
INHIBITOR SWITCH
P R N D
1 2 3 4 5
12 6
6 7 8 9
11 9

B12 T3 T7

B138

1 2 3 4
STARTER MOTOR (MAGNET) 5 6 7 8
CVT

M
MT

B14
CVT

MT

TO STARTER RELAY
EN-07792

EN(H4SO)(diag)-224
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF ECM. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Repair the poor Go to step 2.
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. contact of ECM
2) Place the shift lever in a position other than connector.
neutral.
3) Measure the voltage between ECM and
chassis ground.
Connector & terminal
(B136) No. 35 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Replace the neu- Repair the short
NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH CONNEC- more? tral position switch. circuit to ground
TOR. <Ref. to 6MT-37, harness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. Switches and Har- ECM and neutral
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and ness.> position switch
neutral position switch. connector.
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and
chassis ground.
Connector & terminal
(B136) No. 35 — Chassis ground:

EN(H4SO)(diag)-225
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

CH:DTC P0852 PARK/NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH (AT MODEL)

DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Detected when two consecutive driving cycles with fault occur.
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-179, DTC P0852 PARK/NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIR-
CUIT HIGH (AT MODEL), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

C: B136
C: B136 ECM
: TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT 1 2 3 4 5 6
* 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
35

B138 B25

1 2
*
*
B25 T2 T2 B25

B12
MT 2 1
1 2 3 4
CVT

NEUTRAL
5 6 7 8
POSITION
9 10 11 12
SWITCH

T7
INHIBITOR SWITCH
P R N D
1 2 3 4 5
12 6
6 7 8 9
11 9

B12 T3 T7

B138

1 2 3 4
STARTER MOTOR (MAGNET) 5 6 7 8
CVT

M
MT

B14
CVT

MT

TO STARTER RELAY
EN-07792

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK SELECT CABLE. Is there any fault in select Repair or adjust Go to step 2.
cable? the select cable.
<Ref. to CS-41,
Select Cable.>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-226
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

2 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF ECM. Is the voltage less than 1 V? Repair the poor Go to step 3.
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. contact of ECM
2) Measure the voltage between ECM and connector.
chassis ground with select lever at “P” range
and “N” range.
Connector & terminal
(B136) No. 35 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND IN- Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 4.
Repair the harness
HIBITOR SWITCH CONNECTOR. and connector.
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. NOTE:
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and In this case, repair
inhibitor switch. the following item:
3) Measure the resistance of harness between • Open circuit in
ECM and inhibitor switch connector. harness between
Connector & terminal ECM and inhibitor
(B136) No. 35 — (T7) No. 6: switch connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK INHIBITOR SWITCH GROUND LINE. Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Replace the inhibi- Repair the harness
Measure the resistance of harness between tor switch. <Ref. to and connector.
inhibitor switch connector and engine ground. CVT-94, Inhibitor NOTE:
Connector & terminal Switch.> In this case, repair
(T7) No. 9 — Engine ground: the following item:
• Open circuit of
harness between
inhibitor switch
connector and
starter motor
ground line
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
• Poor contact of
starter motor con-
nector
• Poor contact of
starter motor
ground
• Starter motor

EN(H4SO)(diag)-227
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

CI: DTC P0852 NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH (MT MODEL)
DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Detected when two consecutive driving cycles with fault occur.
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-180, DTC P0852 NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT
HIGH (MT MODEL), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

C: B136
C: B136 ECM
: TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT 1 2 3 4 5 6
* 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
35

B138 B25

1 2
*
*
B25 T2 T2 B25

B12
MT 2 1
1 2 3 4
CVT

NEUTRAL
5 6 7 8
POSITION
9 10 11 12
SWITCH

T7
INHIBITOR SWITCH
P R N D
1 2 3 4 5
12 6
6 7 8 9
11 9

B12 T3 T7

B138

1 2 3 4
STARTER MOTOR (MAGNET) 5 6 7 8
CVT

M
MT

B14
CVT

MT

TO STARTER RELAY
EN-07792

EN(H4SO)(diag)-228
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF ECM. Is the voltage less than 1 V? Repair the poor Go to step 2.
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. contact of ECM
2) Place the shift lever in neutral. connector.
3) Measure the voltage between ECM and
chassis ground.
Connector & terminal
(B136) No. 35 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 3. Repair the harness
NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH CONNEC- and connector.
TOR. NOTE:
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. In this case, repair
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and the following item:
neutral position switch. • Open circuit in
3) Measure the resistance of harness between harness between
ECM and neutral position switch connector. ECM and neutral
Connector & terminal position switch
(B136) No. 35 — (B25) No. 2: connector
(B136) No. 4 — (B25) No. 1: • Poor contact of
joint connector
3 CHECK NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Repair the poor Replace the neu-
1) Place the shift lever in neutral. contact of neutral tral position switch.
2) Measure the resistance between neutral position switch <Ref. to 6MT-37,
position switch terminals. connector. Switches and Har-
Terminals ness.>
No. 1 — No. 2:

EN(H4SO)(diag)-229
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

CJ:DTC P1152 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (LOW) (BANK1

SENSOR1)
DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Detected when two consecutive driving cycles with fault occur.
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-181, DTC P1152 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PER-
FORMANCE (LOW) (BANK1 SENSOR1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

E24
A/F, OXYGEN SENSOR RELAY BATTERY
M/B No.15
12 2 1
4 3
11
10
9
FRONT
E A: B134
B220 OXYGEN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
(A/F)
SENSOR 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
E24
4
3
2
1

C: B136

1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
E2
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
50
51
4
3

B21
E D: B137

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
C18
C19
C5
C6

C9

26 27 28 29 30 31

B21
A : B134

C : B136 ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
D : B137 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33

34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1

42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54

B21
37
36
40
35
34

E2
B220

17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
E 2 6 10 14
19

EN-08630

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR Has water entered the connec- Completely Go to step 2.
CONNECTOR AND COUPLING CONNEC- tor? remove any water
TOR. inside.

EN(H4SO)(diag)-230
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 3. Repair the harness
FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR CONNEC- and connector.
TOR. NOTE:
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. In this case, repair
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and the following item:
front oxygen (A/F) sensor. • Open circuit in
3) Measure the resistance of harness between harness between
ECM and front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector. ECM and front oxy-
Connector & terminal gen (A/F) sensor
(B136) No. 18 — (E24) No. 2: connector
(B136) No. 19 — (E24) No. 1: • Poor contact of
coupling connector
3 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of front Repair the poor Replace the front
Check for poor contact of the front oxygen (A/F) oxygen (A/F) sensor connec- contact of front oxygen (A/F) sen-
sensor connector. tor? oxygen (A/F) sen- sor. <Ref. to
sor connector. FU(H4SO)-37,
Front Oxygen (A/F)
Sensor.>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-231
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

CK:DTC P1153 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (HIGH) (BANK1

SENSOR1)
DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Detected when two consecutive driving cycles with fault occur.
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-183, DTC P1153 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PER-
FORMANCE (HIGH) (BANK1 SENSOR1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

E24
A/F, OXYGEN SENSOR RELAY BATTERY
M/B No.15
12 2 1
4 3
11
10
9
FRONT
E A: B134
B220 OXYGEN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
(A/F)
SENSOR 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
E24
4
3
2
1

C: B136

1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
E2
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
50
51
4
3

B21
E D: B137

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
C18
C19
C5
C6

C9

26 27 28 29 30 31

B21
A : B134

C : B136 ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
D : B137 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33

34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1

42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54

B21
37
36
40
35
34

E2
B220

17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
E 2 6 10 14
19

EN-08630

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR Has water entered the connec- Completely Go to step 2.
CONNECTOR AND COUPLING CONNEC- tor? remove any water
TOR. inside.

EN(H4SO)(diag)-232
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 3. Repair the ground
FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR CONNEC- more? short circuit of har-
TOR. ness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ECM and front oxy-
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. gen (A/F) sensor
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and connector.
chassis ground.
Connector & terminal
(B136) No. 18 — Chassis ground:
(B136) No. 19 — Chassis ground:
3 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL FOR ECM. Is the voltage 4.5 V or more? Go to step 5. Go to step 4.
1) Connect the connector to ECM.
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON.
3) Measure the voltage between ECM and
chassis ground.
Connector & terminal
(B136) No. 19 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
4 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL FOR ECM. Is the voltage 4.95 V or more? Go to step 5. Replace the front
Measure the voltage between ECM and chassis oxygen (A/F) sen-
ground. sor. <Ref. to
Connector & terminal FU(H4SO)-37,
(B136) No. 18 (+) — Chassis ground (–): Front Oxygen (A/F)
Sensor.>
5 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL FOR ECM. Is the voltage 8 V or more? Repair the short Repair the poor
Measure the voltage between ECM and chassis circuit to power in contact of ECM
ground. the harness connector.
Connector & terminal between ECM and
(B136) No. 18 (+) — Chassis ground (–): front oxygen (A/F)
(B136) No. 19 (+) — Chassis ground (–): sensor connector.
After repair,
replace the ECM.
<Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-41,
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>

CL:DTC P1160 RETURN SPRING FAILURE

NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to DTC P2101. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-258, DTC P2101 THROTTLE
ACTUATOR CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnos-
tic Trouble Code (DTC).>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-233
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

CM:DTC P1443 VENT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION PROBLEM

DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Immediately at fault recognition
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-186, DTC P1443 VENT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
FUNCTION PROBLEM, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper fuel supply
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is any other DTC displayed? Check the appro- Go to step 2.
priate DTC using
the “List of Diag-
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC)”.
<Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
75, List of Diagnos-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
2 CHECK DRAIN HOSE. Is there clogging in the drain Replace the drain Go to step 3.
Check the drain hose for clogging. hose? hose.
3 CHECK DRAIN VALVE OPERATION. Does the drain valve operate? Repair the poor Replace the drain
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. contact of ECM valve. <Ref. to
2) Install the delivery (test) mode fuse. connector. EC(H4SO)-18,
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. Drain Valve.>
4) Operate the drain valve.
NOTE:
Drain valve can be operated using the Subaru
Select Monitor. For detailed procedures, refer
to “SYSTEM OPERATION CHECK MODE”.
<Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-52, System Opera-
tion Check Mode.>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-234
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

CN:DTC P1492 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #1 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

(LOW INPUT)
NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to DTC P1498. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-236, DTC P1498 EGR SOLE-
NOID VALVE SIGNAL #4 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (LOW INPUT), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
Trouble Code (DTC).>
CO:DTC P1493 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #1 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION
(HIGH INPUT)
NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to DTC P1499. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-239, DTC P1499 EGR SOLE-
NOID VALVE SIGNAL #4 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (HIGH INPUT), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
Trouble Code (DTC).>
CP:DTC P1494 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #2 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION
(LOW INPUT)
NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to DTC P1498. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-236, DTC P1498 EGR SOLE-
NOID VALVE SIGNAL #4 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (LOW INPUT), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
Trouble Code (DTC).>
CQ:DTC P1495 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #2 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION
(HIGH INPUT)
NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to DTC P1499. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-239, DTC P1499 EGR SOLE-
NOID VALVE SIGNAL #4 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (HIGH INPUT), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
Trouble Code (DTC).>
CR:DTC P1496 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #3 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION
(LOW INPUT)
NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to DTC P1498. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-236, DTC P1498 EGR SOLE-
NOID VALVE SIGNAL #4 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (LOW INPUT), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
Trouble Code (DTC).>
CS:DTC P1497 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #3 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION
(HIGH INPUT)
NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to DTC P1499. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-239, DTC P1499 EGR SOLE-
NOID VALVE SIGNAL #4 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (HIGH INPUT), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
Trouble Code (DTC).>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-235
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

CT:DTC P1498 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #4 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

(LOW INPUT)
DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Immediately at fault recognition
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-188, DTC P1492 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #1
CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (LOW INPUT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.> <Ref. to
GD(H4SO)-192, DTC P1494 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #2 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (LOW IN-
PUT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.> <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-192, DTC P1496 EGR SO-
LENOID VALVE SIGNAL #3 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (LOW INPUT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Detecting Criteria.> <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-192, DTC P1498 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #4 CIRCUIT
MALFUNCTION (LOW INPUT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
• Poor driving performance
• Engine breathing
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.

EN(H4SO)(diag)-236
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

WIRING DIAGRAM:

E18

MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No. 16 1 2 3
4 4 5 6
3

2 B21
1 48
E2 B220
B220

17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
2 6 10 14
19
5
2

EGR B21
VALVE E
E18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
6
3
4
1

34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
E2 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
30
25
29
26

B21
A30

A20
A8

A9

A: B134

A: B134 ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
D: B137 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1

D: B137

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
B21 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
37
36
40
35
34

18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
E2 26 27 28 29 30 31

E E
EN-07788

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO EGR VALVE. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 2. Repair the harness
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. and connector.
2) Disconnect the connector from EGR valve. NOTE:
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. In this case, repair
4) Measure the voltage between EGR valve the following item:
connector and engine ground. • Open circuit in
Connector & terminal harness between
(E18) No. 2 (+) — Engine ground (–): EGR valve and
(E18) No. 5 (+) — Engine ground (–): main relay connec-
tor
• Poor contact of
coupling connector

EN(H4SO)(diag)-237
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 3. Repair the harness
EGR VALVE CONNECTOR. and connector.
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. NOTE:
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. In this case, repair
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and the following item:
EGR valve connector. • Open circuit in
Connector & terminal harness between
DTC P1492; (B134) No. 8 — (E18) No. 3: ECM and EGR
DTC P1494; (B134) No. 9 — (E18) No. 1: valve connector
DTC P1496; (B134) No. 20 — (E18) No. 4: • Poor contact of
DTC P1498; (B134) No. 30 — (E18) No. 6: coupling connector
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 4. Repair the ground
EGR VALVE CONNECTOR. more? short in harness
1) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. between ECM and
2) Measure the resistance between ECM and EGR valve con-
chassis ground. nector.
Connector & terminal
DTC P1492; (B134) No. 8 — Chassis
ground:
DTC P1494; (B134) No. 9 — Chassis
ground:
DTC P1496; (B134) No. 20 — Chassis
ground:
DTC P1498; (B134) No. 30 — Chassis
ground:
4 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of ECM or Repair the poor Replace the EGR
Check for poor contact of ECM and EGR valve EGR valve connector? contact of ECM or valve. <Ref. to
connector. EGR valve con- FU(H4SO)-33,
nector. EGR Valve.>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-238
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

CU:DTC P1499 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #4 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

(HIGH INPUT)
DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Immediately at fault recognition
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-190, DTC P1493 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #1
CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (HIGH INPUT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.> <Ref. to
GD(H4SO)-192, DTC P1495 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #2 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (HIGH IN-
PUT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.> <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-192, DTC P1497 EGR SO-
LENOID VALVE SIGNAL #3 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (HIGH INPUT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Detecting Criteria.> <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-192, DTC P1499 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #4 CIRCUIT
MALFUNCTION (HIGH INPUT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
• Poor driving performance
• Engine breathing
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.

EN(H4SO)(diag)-239
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

WIRING DIAGRAM:

E18

MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No. 16 1 2 3
4 4 5 6
3

2 B21
1 48
E2 B220
B220

17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
2 6 10 14
19
5
2

EGR B21
VALVE E
E18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
6
3
4
1

34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
E2 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
30
25
29
26

B21
A30

A20
A8

A9

A: B134

A: B134 ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
D: B137 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1

D: B137

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
B21 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
37
36
40
35
34

18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
E2 26 27 28 29 30 31

E E
EN-07788

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 10 V or more? Repair the short Go to step 2.
EGR VALVE CONNECTOR. circuit to power
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. supply in harness
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and between ECM and
EGR valve. EGR valve con-
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. nector.
4) Measure the voltage between ECM and
chassis ground.
Connector & terminal
DTC P1493; (B134) No. 8 (+) — Chassis
ground (–):
DTC P1495; (B134) No. 9 (+) — Chassis
ground (–):
DTC P1497; (B134) No. 20 (+) — Chassis
ground (–):
DTC P1499; (B134) No. 30 (+) — Chassis
ground (–):

EN(H4SO)(diag)-240
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

2 CHECK EGR VALVE. Is the resistance 20 Ω or more? Repair the poor Replace the EGR
Measure the resistance between EGR valve contact of ECM valve. <Ref. to
terminals. connector. FU(H4SO)-33,
Terminals EGR Valve.>
DTC P1493; No. 2 — No. 3:
DTC P1493; No. 5 — No. 3:
DTC P1495; No. 2 — No. 1:
DTC P1495; No. 5 — No. 1:
DTC P1497; No. 2 — No. 4:
DTC P1497; No. 5 — No. 4:
DTC P1499; No. 2 — No. 6:
DTC P1499; No. 5 — No. 6:

EN(H4SO)(diag)-241
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

CV:DTC P1518 STARTER SWITCH CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Immediately at fault recognition
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-193, DTC P1518 STARTER SWITCH CIRCUIT LOW IN-
PUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

F/B No. 21
6
BATTERY
SBF-5 MAIN SBF
2 3
2

IGNITION SWITCH
B72

STARTER RELAY
B493
E
1

INHIBITOR SWITCH
P R N D
MT CVT 12 6
11 9
MT

B12 T3 T7
CVT
2

CLUTCH STROKE
SENSOR (CLUTCH STARTER MOTOR
MT

START SWITCH)

B501
CVT
1

CVT
B14

MT M
B26

C16

B : B135
ECM
C : B136

B493 B501 B72 T7 B12 B : B135 C : B136

1 2 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 5 6 7 8 14 15 16
3 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
4 5 6 9 10 11 12 25 26 27
4 6 7 8 9 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35

EN-07701

EN(H4SO)(diag)-242
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is any other DTC displayed? Check DTC using Go to step 2.
“List of Diagnostic
Trouble Code
(DTC)”. <Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
75, List of Diagnos-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 3. NOTE:
STARTER RELAY CONNECTOR. Check the follow-
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ing item and repair
2) Remove the starter relay. or replace if neces-
3) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and sary.
starter motor. • Open circuit of
4) Measure the resistance of harness between harness between
ECM and starter relay connector. ECM and starter
Connector & terminal relay connector
(B136) No. 16 — (B493) No. 3: • Poor contact of
NOTE: coupling connector
For CVT model, place the select lever in “P”
range or “N” range.
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Repair the poor Repair the short
STARTER RELAY CONNECTOR. more? contact of ECM circuit to ground in
Measure the resistance between ECM and connector. harness between
chassis ground. ECM and starter
Connector & terminal relay connector.
(B136) No. 16 — Chassis ground:

EN(H4SO)(diag)-243
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

CW:DTC P1560 BACK-UP VOLTAGE CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Immediately at fault recognition
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-194, DTC P1560 BACK-UP VOLTAGE CIRCUIT MAL-
FUNCTION, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

MAIN RELAY
M/B No. 16
4
3 M/B No. 12
1
2 B72 IGNITION SWITCH
BATTERY
B220 F/B No. 12 SBF-5 MAIN SBF
1 3
C30
B13
C1
D7

C2

A : B134
E
B : B135
ECM
C : B136

D : B137
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1

B21
40
35
34
37
36

E2

E E

B21 A: B134 B: B135 B220

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 17
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 1 5 9 13
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 2 6 10 14
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 19
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54 B72 C: B136 D: B137

1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-07702

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF ECM. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Repair the poor Go to step 2.
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. contact of ECM
2) Measure the voltage between ECM and connector.
chassis ground.
Connector & terminal
(B136) No. 2 (+) — Chassis ground (–):

EN(H4SO)(diag)-244
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 3. Repair the ground
MAIN FUSE BOX CONNECTOR. more? short circuit of har-
1) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. ness between
2) Measure the resistance between ECM and ECM and battery
chassis ground. terminal.
Connector & terminal
(B136) No. 2 — Chassis ground:
3 CHECK M/B NO. 12 FUSE. Is the fuse blown out? Replace the fuse. Repair the harness
and connector.
NOTE:
In this case, repair
the following item:
• Open circuit in
harness between
ECM and battery
• Poor contact of
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
battery terminal

EN(H4SO)(diag)-245
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

CX:DTC P2096 POST CATALYST FUEL TRIM SYSTEM TOO LEAN (BANK 1)
DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Detected when two consecutive driving cycles with fault occur.
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-196, DTC P2096 POST CATALYST FUEL TRIM SYS-
TEM TOO LEAN (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

E24
A/F, OXYGEN SENSOR RELAY BATTERY
M/B No.15
12 2 1
4 3
11
10
9
FRONT
E A: B134
B220 OXYGEN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
(A/F)
SENSOR 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
E24
4
3
2
1

C: B136

1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
E2
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
50
51
4
3

B21
E D: B137

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
C18
C19
C5
C6

C9

26 27 28 29 30 31

B21
A : B134

C : B136 ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
D : B137 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33

34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1

42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54

B21
37
36
40
35
34

E2
B220

17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
E 2 6 10 14
19

EN-08630

EN(H4SO)(diag)-246
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

A/F, OXYGEN SENSOR RELAY BATTERY E25

M/B No.15
12
11 1 2
10 3 4

9
E
REAR
B220
OXYGEN
SENSOR A: B134 B: B135

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
E25
2
1
4
3
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35

E2
C: B136 D: B137
50
53
19
1

B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
E 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
A29
C20
B6

C9

A : B134 B21

B : B135
ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
C : B136 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
D : B137
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1

48 49 50 51 52 53 54

B21
37
36
40
35
34

E2 B220

17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
2 6 10 14
E 19

EN-08631

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is any other DTC displayed? Check DTC using Go to step 2.
“List of Diagnostic
Trouble Code
(DTC)”. <Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
75, List of Diagnos-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
2 CHECK FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR Has water entered the connec- Completely Go to step 3.
CONNECTOR AND COUPLING CONNEC- tor? remove any water
TOR. inside.

EN(H4SO)(diag)-247
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 4. Repair the harness
FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR CONNEC- and connector.
TOR. NOTE:
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. In this case, repair
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and the following item:
front oxygen (A/F) sensor. • Open circuit in
3) Measure the resistance of harness between harness between
ECM and front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector. ECM and front oxy-
Connector & terminal gen (A/F) sensor
(B136) No. 19 — (E24) No. 1: connector
(B136) No. 18 — (E24) No. 2: • Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 5. Repair the ground
FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR CONNEC- more? short circuit of har-
TOR. ness between
Measure the resistance between ECM and ECM and front oxy-
chassis ground. gen (A/F) sensor
Connector & terminal connector.
(B136) No. 19 — Chassis ground:
(B136) No. 18 — Chassis ground:
5 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL FOR ECM. Is the voltage 4.5 V or more? Go to step 7. Go to step 6.
1) Connect the connector to ECM.
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON.
3) Measure the voltage between front oxygen
(A/F) sensor connector and chassis ground.
Connector & terminal
(E24) No. 1 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
6 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL FOR ECM. Is the voltage 4.95 V or more? Go to step 7. Go to step 8.
Measure the voltage between front oxygen (A/
F) sensor connector and chassis ground.
Connector & terminal
(E24) No. 2 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
7 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL FOR ECM. Is the voltage 8 V or more? Repair the short Repair the poor
Measure the voltage between front oxygen (A/ circuit to power in contact of ECM
F) sensor connector and chassis ground. the harness connector.
Connector & terminal between ECM and
(E24) No. 1 (+) — Chassis ground (–): front oxygen (A/F)
(E24) No. 2 (+) — Chassis ground (–): sensor connector.
After repair,
replace the ECM.
<Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-41,
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>
8 CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM. Are there holes or loose bolts Repair the exhaust Go to step 9.
on exhaust system? system.
9 CHECK AIR INTAKE SYSTEM. Are there holes, loose bolts or Repair the air Go to step 10.
disconnection of hose on air intake system.
intake system?

EN(H4SO)(diag)-248
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

10 CHECK FUEL PRESSURE. Is the measured value 340 — Go to step 11. Repair the follow-
WARNING: 400 kPa (3.5 — 4.1 kg/cm2, 49 ing item.
Place “NO OPEN FLAMES” signs near the — 58 psi)? Fuel pressure is
working area. too high:
CAUTION: • Clogged fuel line
Be careful not to spill fuel. or bent hose
1) Connect the front oxygen (A/F) sensor con- Fuel pressure is
nector. too low:
2) Measure the fuel pressure. <Ref. to • Improper fuel
ME(H4SO)-28, INSPECTION, Fuel Pressure.> pump discharge
CAUTION: • Clogged fuel line
Release fuel pressure before removing the
fuel pressure gauge.
11 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Is the engine coolant tempera- Go to step 12. Replace the
SENSOR. ture 75°C (167°F) or higher? engine coolant
1) Start the engine and warm up completely. temperature sen-
2) Read the data of engine coolant tempera- sor. <Ref. to
ture sensor signal using Subaru Select Monitor FU(H4SO)-23,
or general scan tool. Engine Coolant
NOTE: Temperature Sen-
• Subaru Select Monitor sor.>
For detailed operation procedures, refer to
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref.
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni-
tor.>
• General scan tool
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the
general scan tool operation manual.
12 CHECK MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR Is the measured value 2.0 — Go to step 13. Replace the mass
TEMPERATURE SENSOR. 5.0 g/s (0.26 — 0.66 lb/m)? air flow and intake
1) Start the engine and warm up engine until air temperature
coolant temperature is higher than 75°C sensor. <Ref. to
(167°F). FU(H4SO)-31,
2) For CVT models, set the select lever to “P” Mass Air Flow and
range or “N” range, and for MT models, place Intake Air Temper-
the shift lever in the neutral position. ature Sensor.>
3) Turn the A/C switch to OFF.
4) Turn all the accessory switches to OFF.
5) Read the data of the mass air flow and
intake air temperature sensor signal using Sub-
aru Select Monitor or general scan tool.
NOTE:
• Subaru Select Monitor
For detailed operation procedures, refer to
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref.
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni-
tor.>
• General scan tool
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the
general scan tool operation manual.

EN(H4SO)(diag)-249
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

13 CHECK MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR Subtract ambient temperature Go to step 14. Check the mass air
TEMPERATURE SENSOR. from intake air temperature. Is flow and intake air
1) Start the engine and warm up engine until the obtained value –10 — 50°C temperature sen-
coolant temperature is higher than 75°C (–18 — 90°F)? sor. <Ref. to
(167°F). FU(H4SO)-31,
2) For CVT models, set the select lever to “P” Mass Air Flow and
range or “N” range, and for MT models, place Intake Air Temper-
the shift lever in the neutral position. ature Sensor.>
3) Turn the A/C switch to OFF.
4) Turn all the accessory switches to OFF.
5) Open the front hood.
6) Measure the ambient temperature.
7) Read the data of the mass air flow and
intake air temperature sensor signal using Sub-
aru Select Monitor or general scan tool.
NOTE:
• Subaru Select Monitor
For detailed operation procedures, refer to
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref.
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni-
tor.>
• General scan tool
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the
general scan tool operation manual.
14 CHECK REAR OXYGEN SENSOR DATA. Is the voltage 490 mV or more? Go to step 15. Go to step 16.
1) Warm up the engine until engine coolant
temperature is higher than 75°C (167°F), and
keep the engine speed at 3,000 rpm. (2 minutes
maximum)
2) Read the data of rear oxygen sensor signal
using Subaru Select Monitor or general scan
tool.
NOTE:
• Depress the clutch pedal. (MT model)
• Subaru Select Monitor
For detailed operation procedures, refer to
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref.
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni-
tor.>
• General scan tool
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the
general scan tool operation manual.
15 CHECK REAR OXYGEN SENSOR DATA. Is the voltage 250 mV or less? Go to step 17. Go to step 16.
1) Warm up the engine until engine coolant
temperature is higher than 75°C (167°F), and
rapidly reduce the engine speed from 3,000
rpm.
2) Read the data of rear oxygen sensor signal
using Subaru Select Monitor or general scan
tool.
NOTE:
• Depress the clutch pedal. (MT model)
• Subaru Select Monitor
For detailed operation procedures, refer to
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref.
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni-
tor.>
• General scan tool
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the
general scan tool operation manual.

EN(H4SO)(diag)-250
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

16 CHECK REAR OXYGEN SENSOR CONNEC- Has water entered the connec- Completely Go to step 18.
TOR AND COUPLING CONNECTOR. tor? remove any water
inside.
17 CHECK FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR US- Is a voltage of 250 mV or less Replace the front Go to step 18.
ING REAR OXYGEN SENSOR SIGNAL. maintained for 5 minutes or oxygen (A/F) sen-
1) Warm up the engine until engine coolant more? sor. <Ref. to
temperature is higher than 75°C (167°F), then FU(H4SO)-37,
keep the engine idling for 5 minutes or more. Front Oxygen (A/F)
2) Read the data of rear oxygen sensor signal Sensor.>
using Subaru Select Monitor or general scan
tool.
NOTE:
• Subaru Select Monitor
For detailed operation procedures, refer to
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref.
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni-
tor.>
• General scan tool
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the
general scan tool operation manual.
18 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 19. Repair the harness
REAR OXYGEN SENSOR CONNECTOR. and connector.
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. NOTE:
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM and In this case, repair
rear oxygen sensor. the following item:
3) Measure the resistance of harness between • Open circuit in
ECM and rear oxygen sensor connector. harness between
Connector & terminal ECM and rear oxy-
(B136) No. 20 — (E25) No. 3: gen sensor con-
(B134) No. 29 — (E25) No. 4: nector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
19 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 0.2 — 0.5 V? Replace the rear Repair the harness
REAR OXYGEN SENSOR CONNECTOR. oxygen sensor. and connector.
1) Connect the connector to ECM. <Ref. to NOTE:
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. FU(H4SO)-39, In this case, repair
3) Measure the voltage between rear oxygen Rear Oxygen Sen- the following item:
sensor connector and chassis ground. sor.> • Open circuit in
Connector & terminal harness between
(E25) No. 3 (+) — Chassis ground (–): ECM and rear oxy-
gen sensor con-
nector
• Poor contact of
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector

EN(H4SO)(diag)-251
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

CY:DTC P2097 POST CATALYST FUEL TRIM SYSTEM TOO RICH (BANK 1)
DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Detected when two consecutive driving cycles with fault occur.
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-198, DTC P2097 POST CATALYST FUEL TRIM SYS-
TEM TOO RICH (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

E24
A/F, OXYGEN SENSOR RELAY BATTERY
M/B No.15
12 2 1
4 3
11
10
9
FRONT
E A: B134
B220 OXYGEN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
(A/F)
SENSOR 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
E24
4
3
2
1

C: B136

1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
E2
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
50
51
4
3

B21
E D: B137

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
C18
C19
C5
C6

C9

26 27 28 29 30 31

B21
A : B134

C : B136 ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
D : B137 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33

34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1

42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54

B21
37
36
40
35
34

E2
B220

17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
E 2 6 10 14
19

EN-08630

EN(H4SO)(diag)-252
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

A/F, OXYGEN SENSOR RELAY BATTERY E25

M/B No.15
12
11 1 2
10 3 4

9
E
REAR
B220
OXYGEN
SENSOR A: B134 B: B135

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
E25
2
1
4
3
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35

E2
C: B136 D: B137
50
53
19
1

B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
E 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
A29
C20
B6

C9

A : B134 B21

B : B135
ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
C : B136 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
D : B137
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1

48 49 50 51 52 53 54

B21
37
36
40
35
34

E2 B220

17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
2 6 10 14
E 19

EN-08631

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is any other DTC displayed? Check DTC using Go to step 2.
“List of Diagnostic
Trouble Code
(DTC)”. <Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
75, List of Diagnos-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
2 CHECK FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR Has water entered the connec- Completely Go to step 3.
CONNECTOR AND COUPLING CONNEC- tor? remove any water
TOR. inside.

EN(H4SO)(diag)-253
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 4. Repair the harness
FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR CONNEC- and connector.
TOR. NOTE:
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. In this case, repair
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and the following item:
front oxygen (A/F) sensor. • Open circuit in
3) Measure the resistance of harness between harness between
ECM and front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector. ECM and front oxy-
Connector & terminal gen (A/F) sensor
(B136) No. 19 — (E24) No. 1: connector
(B136) No. 18 — (E24) No. 2: • Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 5. Repair the ground
FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR CONNEC- more? short circuit of har-
TOR. ness between
Measure the resistance between ECM and ECM and front oxy-
chassis ground. gen (A/F) sensor
Connector & terminal connector.
(B136) No. 19 — Chassis ground:
(B136) No. 18 — Chassis ground:
5 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL FOR ECM. Is the voltage 4.5 V or more? Go to step 7. Go to step 6.
1) Connect the connector to ECM.
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON.
3) Measure the voltage between front oxygen
(A/F) sensor connector and chassis ground.
Connector & terminal
(E24) No. 1 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
6 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL FOR ECM. Is the voltage 4.95 V or more? Go to step 7. Go to step 8.
Measure the voltage between front oxygen (A/
F) sensor connector and chassis ground.
Connector & terminal
(E24) No. 2 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
7 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL FOR ECM. Is the voltage 8 V or more? Repair the short Repair the poor
Measure the voltage between front oxygen (A/ circuit to power in contact of ECM
F) sensor connector and chassis ground. the harness connector.
Connector & terminal between ECM and
(E24) No. 1 (+) — Chassis ground (–): front oxygen (A/F)
(E24) No. 2 (+) — Chassis ground (–): sensor connector.
After repair,
replace the ECM.
<Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-41,
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>
8 CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM. Are there holes or loose bolts Repair the exhaust Go to step 9.
on exhaust system? system.
9 CHECK AIR INTAKE SYSTEM. Are there holes, loose bolts or Repair the air Go to step 10.
disconnection of hose on air intake system.
intake system?

EN(H4SO)(diag)-254
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

10 CHECK FUEL PRESSURE. Is the measured value 340 — Go to step 11. Repair the follow-
WARNING: 400 kPa (3.5 — 4.1 kg/cm2, 49 ing item.
Place “NO OPEN FLAMES” signs near the — 58 psi)? Fuel pressure is
working area. too high:
CAUTION: • Clogged fuel line
Be careful not to spill fuel. or bent hose
1) Connect the front oxygen (A/F) sensor con- Fuel pressure is
nector. too low:
2) Measure the fuel pressure. <Ref. to • Improper fuel
ME(H4SO)-28, INSPECTION, Fuel Pressure.> pump discharge
CAUTION: • Clogged fuel line
Release fuel pressure before removing the
fuel pressure gauge.
11 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Is the engine coolant tempera- Go to step 12. Replace the
SENSOR. ture 75°C (167°F) or higher? engine coolant
1) Start the engine and warm up completely. temperature sen-
2) Read the data of engine coolant tempera- sor. <Ref. to
ture sensor signal using Subaru Select Monitor FU(H4SO)-23,
or general scan tool. Engine Coolant
NOTE: Temperature Sen-
• Subaru Select Monitor sor.>
For detailed operation procedures, refer to
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref.
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni-
tor.>
• General scan tool
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the
general scan tool operation manual.
12 CHECK MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR Is the measured value 2.0 — Go to step 13. Replace the mass
TEMPERATURE SENSOR. 5.0 g/s (0.26 — 0.66 lb/m)? air flow and intake
1) Start the engine and warm up engine until air temperature
coolant temperature is higher than 75°C sensor. <Ref. to
(167°F). FU(H4SO)-31,
2) For CVT models, set the select lever to “P” Mass Air Flow and
range or “N” range, and for MT models, place Intake Air Temper-
the shift lever in the neutral position. ature Sensor.>
3) Turn the A/C switch to OFF.
4) Turn all the accessory switches to OFF.
5) Read the data of the mass air flow and
intake air temperature sensor signal using Sub-
aru Select Monitor or general scan tool.
NOTE:
• Subaru Select Monitor
For detailed operation procedures, refer to
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref.
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni-
tor.>
• General scan tool
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the
general scan tool operation manual.

EN(H4SO)(diag)-255
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

13 CHECK MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR Subtract ambient temperature Go to step 14. Check the mass air
TEMPERATURE SENSOR. from intake air temperature. Is flow and intake air
1) Start the engine and warm up engine until the obtained value –10 — 50°C temperature sen-
coolant temperature is higher than 75°C (–18 — 90°F)? sor. <Ref. to
(167°F). FU(H4SO)-31,
2) For CVT models, set the select lever to “P” Mass Air Flow and
range or “N” range, and for MT models, place Intake Air Temper-
the shift lever in the neutral position. ature Sensor.>
3) Turn the A/C switch to OFF.
4) Turn all the accessory switches to OFF.
5) Open the front hood.
6) Measure the ambient temperature.
7) Read the data of the mass air flow and
intake air temperature sensor signal using Sub-
aru Select Monitor or general scan tool.
NOTE:
• Subaru Select Monitor
For detailed operation procedures, refer to
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref.
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni-
tor.>
• General scan tool
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the
general scan tool operation manual.
14 CHECK REAR OXYGEN SENSOR DATA. Is the voltage 490 mV or more? Go to step 15. Go to step 16.
1) Warm up the engine until engine coolant
temperature is higher than 75°C (167°F), and
keep the engine speed at 3,000 rpm. (2 minutes
maximum)
2) Read the data of rear oxygen sensor signal
using Subaru Select Monitor or general scan
tool.
NOTE:
• Depress the clutch pedal. (MT model)
• Subaru Select Monitor
For detailed operation procedures, refer to
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref.
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni-
tor.>
• General scan tool
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the
general scan tool operation manual.
15 CHECK REAR OXYGEN SENSOR DATA. Is the voltage 250 mV or less? Go to step 17. Go to step 16.
1) Warm up the engine until engine coolant
temperature is higher than 75°C (167°F), and
rapidly reduce the engine speed from 3,000
rpm.
2) Read the data of rear oxygen sensor signal
using Subaru Select Monitor or general scan
tool.
NOTE:
• Depress the clutch pedal. (MT model)
• Subaru Select Monitor
For detailed operation procedures, refer to
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref.
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni-
tor.>
• General scan tool
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the
general scan tool operation manual.

EN(H4SO)(diag)-256
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

16 CHECK REAR OXYGEN SENSOR CONNEC- Has water entered the connec- Completely Go to step 18.
TOR AND COUPLING CONNECTOR. tor? remove any water
inside.
17 CHECK FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR US- Is a voltage of 0.8 V or more Replace the front Go to step 18.
ING REAR OXYGEN SENSOR SIGNAL. maintained for 5 minutes or oxygen (A/F) sen-
1) Warm up the engine until engine coolant more? sor. <Ref. to
temperature is higher than 75°C (167°F), then FU(H4SO)-37,
keep the engine idling for 5 minutes or more. Front Oxygen (A/F)
2) Read the data of rear oxygen sensor signal Sensor.>
using Subaru Select Monitor or general scan
tool.
NOTE:
• Subaru Select Monitor
For detailed operation procedures, refer to
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref.
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni-
tor.>
• General scan tool
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the
general scan tool operation manual.
18 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 19. Repair the harness
REAR OXYGEN SENSOR CONNECTOR. and connector.
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. NOTE:
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM and In this case, repair
rear oxygen sensor. the following item:
3) Measure the resistance of harness between • Open circuit in
ECM and rear oxygen sensor connector. harness between
Connector & terminal ECM and rear oxy-
(B136) No. 20 — (E25) No. 3: gen sensor con-
(B134) No. 29 — (E25) No. 4: nector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
19 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 0.2 — 0.5 V? Replace the rear Repair the harness
REAR OXYGEN SENSOR CONNECTOR. oxygen sensor. and connector.
1) Connect the connector to ECM. <Ref. to NOTE:
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. FU(H4SO)-39, In this case, repair
3) Measure the voltage between rear oxygen Rear Oxygen Sen- the following item:
sensor connector and chassis ground. sor.> • Open circuit in
Connector & terminal harness between
(E25) No. 3 (+) — Chassis ground (–): ECM and rear oxy-
gen sensor con-
nector
• Poor contact of
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector

EN(H4SO)(diag)-257
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

CZ:DTC P2101 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT RANGE/

PERFORMANCE
DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Immediately at fault recognition
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-200, DTC P2101 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL
MOTOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
• Poor driving performance
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

BATTERY
ELECTRONIC M/B No. 13
THROTTLE
B220
CONTROL RELAY
16 M/B No. 16
13 3 4
14
MAIN RELAY B220
15
E
B17
B7

ECM

A : B134 B : B135 C : B136 D : B137

A 29
A 19

A 28

A 18
D3
A6

A3

A1
A2
A4

D1

C4

*
*
B138

B21
37
36

35
40

34

20
39
38

17
18
19

E2
5

6
1

: TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL

* ARRANGEMENT
E E ELECTRONIC E
E57 THROTTLE
CONTROL

E57 B138 B21 A: B134 B: B135

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1 2 3 4 5 6 5 6 7 8 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
B220 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47 C: B136 D: B137
17 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2 6 10 14
19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-07785

EN(H4SO)(diag)-258
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CON- Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 2. Replace the elec-
TROL RELAY. tronic throttle con-
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. trol relay. <Ref. to
2) Remove the electronic throttle control relay. FU(H4SO)-46,
3) Connect the battery to terminals No. 13 and Electronic Throttle
No. 14 of electronic throttle control relay. Control Relay.>
4) Measure the resistance between electronic
throttle control relay terminals.
Terminals
No. 15 — No. 16:
2 CHECK POWER SUPPLY OF ELECTRONIC Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 3. Repair the open or
THROTTLE CONTROL RELAY. ground short circuit
Measure the voltage between electronic throttle of power supply
control relay connector and chassis ground. circuit.
Connector & terminal
(B220) No. 16 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 10 V or more? Repair the short Go to step 4.
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL RE- circuit to power in
LAY CONNECTOR. the harness
1) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. between ECM and
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. electronic throttle
3) Measure the voltage between electronic control relay con-
throttle control relay connector and chassis nector.
ground.
Connector & terminal
(B220) No. 14 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 5. Repair the short
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL RE- more? circuit in harness
LAY CONNECTOR. to ground between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ECM and elec-
2) Measure the resistance between electronic tronic throttle con-
throttle control relay connector and chassis trol relay
ground. connector.
Connector & terminal
(B220) No. 14 — Chassis ground:
(B220) No. 15 — Chassis ground:
5 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 6. Repair the open
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL RE- circuit in harness
LAY CONNECTOR. between ECM and
Measure the resistance between ECM and electronic throttle
electronic throttle control relay connector. control relay con-
Connector & terminal nector.
(B135) No. 17 — (B220) No. 14:
(B135) No. 7 — (B220) No. 15:
6 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 7. Repair the short
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL CON- more? circuit to ground in
NECTOR. harness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ECM and elec-
2) Disconnect the connectors from electronic tronic throttle con-
throttle control. trol connector.
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and
chassis ground.
Connector & terminal
(B134) No. 19 — Chassis ground:
(B134) No. 18 — Chassis ground:
(B134) No. 18 — (B136) No. 4:
(B134) No. 28 — Chassis ground:

EN(H4SO)(diag)-259
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

7 CHECK SHORT CIRCUIT INSIDE THE ECM. Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 8. Repair the short
1) Connect the connector to ECM. more? circuit to ground in
2) Measure the resistance between electronic harness between
throttle control connector and engine ground. ECM and elec-
Connector & terminal tronic throttle con-
(E57) No. 6 — Engine ground: trol connector.
(E57) No. 4 — Engine ground: Replace the ECM if
defective. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-41,
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>
8 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 9. Repair the harness
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL CON- and connector.
NECTOR. NOTE:
1) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. In this case, repair
2) Measure the resistance of harness between the following item:
ECM and electronic throttle control connector. • Open circuit in
Connector & terminal harness between
(B134) No. 18 — (E57) No. 6: ECM and electron-
(B134) No. 28 — (E57) No. 4: ic throttle control
(B134) No. 29 — (E57) No. 3: connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
9 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Go to step 10. Repair the harness
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL CON- and connector.
NECTOR. NOTE:
1) Connect the connector to ECM. In this case, repair
2) Measure the resistance between electronic the following item:
throttle control connector and engine ground. • Open circuit of
Connector & terminal harness between
(E57) No. 3 — Engine ground: ECM and engine
ground
• Poor contact of
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
10 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 5 V or more? Repair the short Go to step 11.
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL CON- circuit to power in
NECTOR. harness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. ECM and elec-
2) Measure the voltage between electronic tronic throttle con-
throttle control connector and engine ground. trol connector.
Connector & terminal
(E57) No. 6 (+) — Engine ground (–):
(E57) No. 4 (+) — Engine ground (–):
11 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 12. Repair the short
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL CON- more? circuit to power in
NECTOR. harness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ECM and elec-
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. tronic throttle con-
3) Measure the resistance between ECM con- trol connector.
nectors.
Connector & terminal
(B134) No. 19 — (B134) No. 18:
(B134) No. 19 — (B134) No. 28:

EN(H4SO)(diag)-260
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

12 CHECK SENSOR OUTPUT. Is the voltage 0.81 — 0.87 V? Go to step 13. Repair the poor
1) Connect all connectors. contact of elec-
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. tronic throttle con-
3) Read the data of main throttle sensor signal trol connector.
using Subaru Select Monitor. Replace the elec-
NOTE: tronic throttle con-
For detailed operation procedures, refer to trol if defective.
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref. <Ref. to
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni- FU(H4SO)-15,
tor.> Throttle Body.>
13 CHECK SENSOR OUTPUT. Is the voltage 1.64 — 1.70 V? Go to step 14. Repair the poor
Read the data of sub throttle sensor signal contact of elec-
using Subaru Select Monitor. tronic throttle con-
NOTE: trol connector.
Subaru Select Monitor Replace the elec-
For detailed operation procedures, refer to tronic throttle con-
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref. trol if defective.
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni- <Ref. to
tor.> FU(H4SO)-15,
Throttle Body.>
14 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 15. Repair the harness
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL CON- and connector.
NECTOR. NOTE:
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. In this case, repair
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and the following item:
electronic throttle control. • Open circuit in
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and harness between
electronic throttle control connector. ECM and electron-
Connector & terminal ic throttle control
(B134) No. 2 — (E57) No. 2: connector
(B134) No. 1 — (E57) No. 1: • Poor contact of
coupling connector
15 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 5 V or more? Repair the short Go to step 16.
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL CON- circuit to power in
NECTOR. harness between
1) Connect the connector to ECM. ECM and elec-
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. tronic throttle con-
3) Measure the voltage between electronic trol connector.
throttle control connector and engine ground.
Connector & terminal
(E57) No. 2 (+) — Engine ground (–):
(E57) No. 1 (+) — Engine ground (–):
16 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 17. Repair the short
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL CON- more? circuit to ground in
NECTOR. harness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ECM and elec-
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. tronic throttle con-
3) Measure the resistance between electronic trol connector.
throttle control connector and engine ground.
Connector & terminal
(E57) No. 2 — Engine ground:
(E57) No. 1 — Engine ground:
17 CHECK ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CON- Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 18. Repair the short
TROL CONNECTOR HARNESS. more? circuit of harness
Measure the resistance between electronic between ECM and
throttle control connectors. electronic throttle
Connector & terminal control connector.
(E57) No. 2 — (E57) No. 1:

EN(H4SO)(diag)-261
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

18 CHECK ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CON- Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Go to step 19. Repair the harness
TROL GROUND CIRCUIT. and connector.
Measure the resistance between ECM and NOTE:
chassis ground. In this case, repair
Connector & terminal the following item:
(B134) No. 3 — Chassis ground: • Open circuit of
(B134) No. 4 — Chassis ground: harness between
(B134) No. 6 — Chassis ground: ECM and engine
(B137) No. 1 — Chassis ground: ground
(B137) No. 3 — Chassis ground: • Poor contact of
coupling connector
19 CHECK ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CON- Is the resistance 50 Ω or less? Go to step 20. Replace the elec-
TROL. tronic throttle con-
Measure the resistance between electronic trol. <Ref. to
throttle control terminals. FU(H4SO)-15,
Terminals Throttle Body.>
No. 2 — No. 1:
20 CHECK ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CON- Does the valve return to the Repair the poor Replace the elec-
TROL. specified position? Standard contact of ECM tronic throttle con-
Move the throttle valve to the fully open and fully value: 3 mm (0.12 in) from fully connector. trol. <Ref. to
closed positions with fingers. closed position FU(H4SO)-15,
Check that the valve returns to the specified Throttle Body.>
position when releasing fingers.

EN(H4SO)(diag)-262
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

DA:DTC P2102 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT LOW

DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Immediately at fault recognition
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-202, DTC P2102 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL
MOTOR CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
• Poor driving performance
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

BATTERY
ELECTRONIC M/B No. 13
THROTTLE
B220
CONTROL RELAY
16 M/B No. 16
13 3 4
14
MAIN RELAY B220
15
E
B17
B7

ECM

A : B134 B : B135 C : B136 D : B137

A 29
A 19

A 28

A 18
D3
A6

A3

A1
A2
A4

D1

C4

*
*
B138

B21
37
36

35
40

34

20
39
38

17
18
19

E2
5

6
1

: TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL

* ARRANGEMENT
E E ELECTRONIC E
E57 THROTTLE
CONTROL

E57 B138 B21 A: B134 B: B135

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1 2 3 4 5 6 5 6 7 8 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
B220 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47 C: B136 D: B137
17 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2 6 10 14
19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-07785

EN(H4SO)(diag)-263
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CON- Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 2. Replace the elec-
TROL RELAY. tronic throttle con-
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. trol relay. <Ref. to
2) Remove the electronic throttle control relay. FU(H4SO)-46,
3) Connect the battery to terminals No. 13 and Electronic Throttle
No. 14 of electronic throttle control relay. Control Relay.>
4) Measure the resistance between electronic
throttle control relay terminals.
Terminals
No. 15 — No. 16:
2 CHECK POWER SUPPLY OF ELECTRONIC Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 3. Repair the open or
THROTTLE CONTROL RELAY. ground short circuit
Measure the voltage between electronic throttle of power supply
control relay connector and chassis ground. circuit.
Connector & terminal
(B220) No. 16 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 10 V or more? Repair the short Go to step 4.
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL RE- circuit to power in
LAY CONNECTOR. the harness
1) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. between ECM and
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. electronic throttle
3) Measure the voltage between electronic control relay con-
throttle control relay connector and chassis nector.
ground.
Connector & terminal
(B220) No. 14 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 5. Repair the short
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL RE- more? circuit in harness
LAY CONNECTOR. to ground between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ECM and elec-
2) Measure the resistance between electronic tronic throttle con-
throttle control relay connector and chassis trol relay
ground. connector.
Connector & terminal
(B220) No. 14 — Chassis ground:
(B220) No. 15 — Chassis ground:
5 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Repair the poor Repair the open
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL RE- contact of ECM circuit in harness
LAY CONNECTOR. connector. between ECM and
Measure the resistance between ECM and electronic throttle
electronic throttle control relay connector. control relay con-
Connector & terminal nector.
(B135) No. 17 — (B220) No. 14:
(B135) No. 7 — (B220) No. 15:

EN(H4SO)(diag)-264
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

DB:DTC P2103 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT HIGH

DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Immediately at fault recognition
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-203, DTC P2103 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL
MOTOR CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

BATTERY
ELECTRONIC M/B No. 13
THROTTLE
B220
CONTROL RELAY
16 M/B No. 16
13 3 4
14
MAIN RELAY B220
15
E
B17
B7

ECM

A : B134 B : B135 C : B136 D : B137

A 29
A 19

A 28

A 18
D3
A6

A3

A1
A2
A4

D1

C4

*
*
B138

B21
37
36

35
40

34

20
39
38

17
18
19

E2
5

6
1

: TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL

* ARRANGEMENT
E E ELECTRONIC E
E57 THROTTLE
CONTROL

E57 B138 B21 A: B134 B: B135

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1 2 3 4 5 6 5 6 7 8 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
B220 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47 C: B136 D: B137
17 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2 6 10 14
19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-07785

EN(H4SO)(diag)-265
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CON- Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 2. Replace the elec-
TROL RELAY. more? tronic throttle con-
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. trol relay. <Ref. to
2) Remove the electronic throttle control relay. FU(H4SO)-46,
3) Measure the resistance between electronic Electronic Throttle
throttle control relay terminals. Control Relay.>
Terminals
No. 15 — No. 16:
2 CHECK SHORT CIRCUIT OF ELECTRONIC Is the voltage 10 V or more? Repair the short Go to step 3.
THROTTLE CONTROL RELAY POWER SUP- circuit to power in
PLY. the harness
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. between ECM and
2) Measure the voltage between electronic electronic throttle
throttle control relay connector and chassis control relay con-
ground. nector.
Connector & terminal
(B220) No. 15 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Repair the poor Repair the short
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL RE- more? contact of ECM circuit in harness
LAY CONNECTOR. connector. to ground between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ECM and elec-
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. tronic throttle con-
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and trol relay
chassis ground. connector.
Connector & terminal
(B135) No. 17 — Chassis ground:

DC:DTC P2109 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR “A” MINIMUM STOP

PERFORMANCE
NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to DTC P2101. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-258, DTC P2101 THROTTLE
ACTUATOR CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnos-
tic Trouble Code (DTC).>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-266
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

DD:DTC P2122 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “D” CIRCUIT

LOW INPUT
DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Immediately at fault recognition
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-205, DTC P2122 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SEN-
SOR/SWITCH “D” CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
• Poor driving performance
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

B315
ACCELERATOR
PEDAL POSITION 1 2 3 4 5 6
SENSOR

B83 B138
4

B315
1 2 3 1 2 3 4
4 5 6 5 6 7 8

B21

: TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT

* 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
*
* 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
* B83
42 43 44 45 46 47
* 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21

B23
B29

B22

B31

B30
C4

B138

A: B134
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
B: B135 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
ECM 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
C: B136 28 29 30 31 32 33 34

D: B137
B: B135
A4
D3

A6

A3

D1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35

B21 C: B136
37
36

34
40

35

E2 1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35

D: B137

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E E 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31

EN-08677

EN(H4SO)(diag)-267
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND AC- Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 2. Repair the short
CELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR more? circuit to ground in
CONNECTOR. harness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ECM and accelera-
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and tor pedal position
accelerator pedal position sensor. sensor connector.
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and
chassis ground.
Connector & terminal
(B135) No. 21 — Chassis ground:
(B135) No. 23 — Chassis ground:
(B135) No. 23 — (B136) No. 4:
2 CHECK SHORT CIRCUIT INSIDE THE ECM. Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Replace the accel- Repair the short
1) Connect the connector to ECM. more? erator pedal. <Ref. circuit to ground in
2) Measure the resistance between accelera- to SP(H4SO)-4, harness between
tor pedal position sensor connector and chassis Accelerator ECM and accelera-
ground. Pedal.> tor pedal position
Connector & terminal sensor connector.
(B315) No. 6 — Chassis ground: Replace the ECM if
defective. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-41,
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-268
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

DE:DTC P2123 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “D” CIRCUIT

HIGH INPUT
DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Immediately at fault recognition
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-207, DTC P2123 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SEN-
SOR/SWITCH “D” CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
• Poor driving performance
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

B315
ACCELERATOR
PEDAL POSITION 1 2 3 4 5 6
SENSOR

B83 B138
4

B315
1 2 3 1 2 3 4
4 5 6 5 6 7 8

B21

: TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT

* 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
*
* 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
* B83
42 43 44 45 46 47
* 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21

B23
B29

B22

B31

B30
C4

B138

A: B134
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
B: B135 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
ECM 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
C: B136 28 29 30 31 32 33 34

D: B137
B: B135
A4
D3

A6

A3

D1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35

B21 C: B136
37
36

34
40

35

E2 1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35

D: B137

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E E 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31

EN-08677

EN(H4SO)(diag)-269
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND AC- Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 2. Repair the open
CELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR circuit in harness
CONNECTOR. between ECM and
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. accelerator pedal
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and position sensor
accelerator pedal position sensor. connector.
3) Measure the resistance of harness between
ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor
connector.
Connector & terminal
(B135) No. 23 — (B315) No. 6:
(B135) No. 29 — (B315) No. 5:
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND AC- Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Go to step 3. Repair the harness
CELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR and connector.
CONNECTOR. NOTE:
1) Connect the connector to ECM. In this case, repair
2) Measure the resistance between accelera- the following item:
tor pedal position sensor connector and chassis • Open circuit of
ground. harness between
Connector & terminal ECM and engine
(B315) No. 5 — Chassis ground: ground
• Poor contact of
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND AC- Is the voltage 5 V or more? Repair the short Go to step 4.
CELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR circuit to power
CONNECTOR. supply in the har-
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. ness between the
2) Measure the voltage between accelerator ECM and accelera-
pedal position sensor connector and chassis tor pedal position
ground. sensor connector.
Connector & terminal
(B315) No. 6 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND AC- Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Repair the poor Repair the short
CELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR more? contact of acceler- circuit to power
CONNECTOR. ator pedal position supply in the har-
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. sensor connector. ness between the
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. Replace the accel- ECM and accelera-
3) Measure the resistance between ECM con- erator pedal if tor pedal position
nectors. defective. <Ref. to sensor connector.
Connector & terminal SP(H4SO)-4,
(B135) No. 21 — (B135) No. 23: Accelerator
Pedal.>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-270
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

DF:DTC P2127 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “E” CIRCUIT

LOW INPUT
DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Immediately at fault recognition
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-209, DTC P2127 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SEN-
SOR/SWITCH “E” CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
• Poor driving performance
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

B315
ACCELERATOR
PEDAL POSITION 1 2 3 4 5 6
SENSOR

B83 B138
4

B315
1 2 3 1 2 3 4
4 5 6 5 6 7 8

B21

: TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT

* 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
*
* 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
* B83
42 43 44 45 46 47
* 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21

B23
B29

B22

B31

B30
C4

B138

A: B134
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
B: B135 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
ECM 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
C: B136 28 29 30 31 32 33 34

D: B137
B: B135
A4
D3

A6

A3

D1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35

B21 C: B136
37
36

34
40

35

E2 1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35

D: B137

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E E 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31

EN-08677

EN(H4SO)(diag)-271
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND AC- Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 2. Repair the short
CELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR more? circuit to ground in
CONNECTOR. harness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ECM and accelera-
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and tor pedal position
accelerator pedal position sensor. sensor connector.
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and
chassis ground.
Connector & terminal
(B135) No. 22 — Chassis ground:
(B135) No. 31 — Chassis ground:
2 CHECK SHORT CIRCUIT INSIDE THE ECM. Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Replace the accel- Repair the short
1) Connect the connector to ECM. more? erator pedal. <Ref. circuit to ground in
2) Measure the resistance between accelera- to SP(H4SO)-4, harness between
tor pedal position sensor connector and chassis Accelerator ECM and accelera-
ground. Pedal.> tor pedal position
Connector & terminal sensor connector.
(B315) No. 3 — Chassis ground: Replace the ECM if
defective. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-41,
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-272
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

DG:DTC P2128 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “E” CIRCUIT

HIGH INPUT
DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Immediately at fault recognition
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-211, DTC P2128 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SEN-
SOR/SWITCH “E” CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
• Poor driving performance
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

B315
ACCELERATOR
PEDAL POSITION 1 2 3 4 5 6
SENSOR

B83 B138
4

B315
1 2 3 1 2 3 4
4 5 6 5 6 7 8

B21

: TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT

* 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
*
* 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
* B83
42 43 44 45 46 47
* 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21

B23
B29

B22

B31

B30
C4

B138

A: B134
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
B: B135 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
ECM 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
C: B136 28 29 30 31 32 33 34

D: B137
B: B135
A4
D3

A6

A3

D1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35

B21 C: B136
37
36

34
40

35

E2 1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35

D: B137

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E E 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31

EN-08677

EN(H4SO)(diag)-273
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND AC- Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 2. Repair the harness
CELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR and connector.
CONNECTOR. NOTE:
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. In this case, repair
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and the following item:
accelerator pedal position sensor. • Open circuit in
3) Measure the resistance of harness between harness between
ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor ECM and acceler-
connector. ator pedal position
Connector & terminal sensor connector
(B135) No. 31 — (B315) No. 3: • Poor contact of
(B135) No. 30 — (B315) No. 2: joint connector
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND AC- Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 3. Repair the harness
CELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR and connector.
CONNECTOR. NOTE:
1) Connect the connector to ECM. In this case, repair
2) Measure the resistance between accelera- the following item:
tor pedal position sensor connector and chassis • Open circuit of
ground. harness between
Connector & terminal ECM and engine
(B315) No. 2 — Chassis ground: ground
• Poor contact of
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
joint connector
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND AC- Is the voltage 5 V or more? Repair the short Go to step 4.
CELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR circuit to power
CONNECTOR. supply in the har-
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. ness between the
2) Measure the voltage between accelerator ECM and accelera-
pedal position sensor connector and chassis tor pedal position
ground. sensor connector.
Connector & terminal
(B315) No. 3 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND AC- Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Repair the poor Repair the short
CELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR more? contact of acceler- circuit to power
CONNECTOR. ator pedal position supply in the har-
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. sensor connector. ness between the
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. Replace the accel- ECM and accelera-
3) Measure the resistance between ECM con- erator pedal if tor pedal position
nectors. defective. <Ref. to sensor connector.
Connector & terminal SP(H4SO)-4,
(B135) No. 22 — (B135) No. 31: Accelerator
Pedal.>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-274
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

DH:DTC P2135 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “A”/“B” VOLT-

AGE CORRELATION
DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Immediately at fault recognition
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-213, DTC P2135 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SEN-
SOR/SWITCH “A”/“B” VOLTAGE CORRELATION, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
• Poor driving performance
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

BATTERY
ELECTRONIC M/B No. 13
THROTTLE
B220
CONTROL RELAY
16 M/B No. 16
13 3 4
14
MAIN RELAY B220
15
E
B17
B7

ECM

A : B134 B : B135 C : B136 D : B137

A 29
A 19

A 28

A 18
D3
A6

A3

A1
A2
A4

D1

C4

*
*
B138

B21
37
36

35
40

34

20
39
38

17
18
19

E2
5

6
1

: TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL

* ARRANGEMENT
E E ELECTRONIC E
E57 THROTTLE
CONTROL

E57 B138 B21 A: B134 B: B135

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1 2 3 4 5 6 5 6 7 8 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
B220 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47 C: B136 D: B137
17 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2 6 10 14
19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-07785

EN(H4SO)(diag)-275
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 2. Repair the short
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL CON- more? circuit to ground in
NECTOR. harness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ECM and elec-
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and tronic throttle con-
electronic throttle control. trol connector.
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and
chassis ground.
Connector & terminal
(B134) No. 19 — Chassis ground:
(B134) No. 18 — Chassis ground:
(B134) No. 18 — (B136) No. 4:
(B134) No. 28 — Chassis ground:
2 CHECK SHORT CIRCUIT INSIDE THE ECM. Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 3. Repair the short
1) Connect the connector to ECM. more? circuit to ground in
2) Measure the resistance between electronic harness between
throttle control connector and engine ground. ECM and elec-
Connector & terminal tronic throttle con-
(E57) No. 6 — Engine ground: trol connector.
(E57) No. 4 — Engine ground: Replace the ECM if
defective. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-41,
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 4. Repair the harness
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL CON- and connector.
NECTOR. NOTE:
1) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. In this case, repair
2) Measure the resistance of harness between the following item:
ECM and electronic throttle control connector. • Open circuit in
Connector & terminal harness between
(B134) No. 18 — (E57) No. 6: ECM and electron-
(B134) No. 28 — (E57) No. 4: ic throttle control
(B134) No. 29 — (E57) No. 3: connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Go to step 5. Repair the harness
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL CON- and connector.
NECTOR. NOTE:
1) Connect the connector to ECM. In this case, repair
2) Measure the resistance between electronic the following item:
throttle control connector and engine ground. • Open circuit of
Connector & terminal harness between
(E57) No. 3 — Engine ground: ECM and engine
ground
• Poor contact of
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
5 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 5 V or more? Repair the short Go to step 6.
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL CON- circuit to power in
NECTOR. harness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. ECM and elec-
2) Measure the voltage between electronic tronic throttle con-
throttle control connector and engine ground. trol connector.
Connector & terminal
(E57) No. 6 (+) — Engine ground (–):
(E57) No. 4 (+) — Engine ground (–):

EN(H4SO)(diag)-276
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

6 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Repair the poor Repair the short
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL CON- more? contact of elec- circuit to power in
NECTOR. tronic throttle con- harness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. trol connector. ECM and elec-
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. Replace the elec- tronic throttle con-
3) Measure the resistance between ECM con- tronic throttle con- trol connector.
nectors. trol if defective.
Connector & terminal <Ref. to
(B134) No. 19 — (B134) No. 18: FU(H4SO)-15,
(B134) No. 19 — (B134) No. 28: Throttle Body.>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-277
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

DI: DTC P2138 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “D”/“E” VOLT-

AGE CORRELATION
DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Immediately at fault recognition
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-215, DTC P2138 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SEN-
SOR/SWITCH “D”/“E” VOLTAGE CORRELATION, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
• Poor driving performance
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

B315
ACCELERATOR
PEDAL POSITION 1 2 3 4 5 6
SENSOR

B83 B138
4

B315
1 2 3 1 2 3 4
4 5 6 5 6 7 8

B21

: TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT

* 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
*
* 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
* B83
42 43 44 45 46 47
* 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21

B23
B29

B22

B31

B30
C4

B138

A: B134
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
B: B135 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
ECM 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
C: B136 28 29 30 31 32 33 34

D: B137
B: B135
A4
D3

A6

A3

D1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35

B21 C: B136
37
36

34
40

35

E2 1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35

D: B137

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E E 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31

EN-08677

EN(H4SO)(diag)-278
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Is the difference in measured Go to step 3. Go to step 2.
SENSOR OUTPUT. values for the main accelerator
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. pedal position sensor signal
2) Measure the voltage between ECM and and the sub accelerator pedal
chassis ground. position sensor signal 0 V?
Connector & terminal
Main accelerator pedal position sensor
signal
(B135) No. 23 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
Sub accelerator pedal position sensor
signal
(B135) No. 31 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
2 CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Is the difference in measured Replace the accel- Repair the harness
SENSOR OUTPUT. values for the main accelerator erator pedal. <Ref. and connector.
1) Measure the voltage between accelerator pedal position sensor signal to SP(H4SO)-4, NOTE:
pedal position sensor connector and chassis and the sub accelerator pedal Accelerator In this case, repair
ground. position sensor signal 0 V? Pedal.> the following item:
Connector & terminal • Open circuit in
(B315) No. 6 (+) — Chassis ground (–): harness between
(B315) No. 3 (+) — Chassis ground (–): ECM and acceler-
ator pedal position
sensor connector
• Short circuit to
ground in harness
between ECM and
accelerator pedal
position sensor
connector
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND AC- Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Repair the poor Repair the harness
CELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR contact of ECM and connector.
CONNECTOR. connector. NOTE:
Measure the resistance of harness between the In this case, repair
accelerator pedal position sensor connector the following item:
and chassis ground. • Open circuit in
Connector & terminal harness between
(B315) No. 5 — Chassis ground: ECM and acceler-
(B315) No. 2 — Chassis ground: ator pedal position
sensor connector
• Open circuit of
harness between
ECM and engine
ground
• Poor contact of
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
joint connector

EN(H4SO)(diag)-279
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

DJ:DTC P2227 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE

DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Detected when two consecutive driving cycles with fault occur.
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-217, DTC P2227 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT
RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is any other DTC displayed? Check DTC using Replace the ECM.
“List of Diagnostic <Ref. to
Trouble Code FU(H4SO)-41,
(DTC)”. <Ref. to Engine Control
EN(H4SO)(diag)- Module (ECM).>
75, List of Diagnos- NOTE:
tic Trouble Code The barometric
(DTC).> pressure sensor is
built into the ECM.

DK:DTC P2228 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT LOW

DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Immediately at fault recognition
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-218, DTC P2228 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT
LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is any other DTC displayed? Check DTC using Replace the ECM.
“List of Diagnostic <Ref. to
Trouble Code FU(H4SO)-41,
(DTC)”. <Ref. to Engine Control
EN(H4SO)(diag)- Module (ECM).>
75, List of Diagnos- NOTE:
tic Trouble Code The barometric
(DTC).> pressure sensor is
built into the ECM.

EN(H4SO)(diag)-280
 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

DL:DTC P2229 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT HIGH

DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Immediately at fault recognition
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-219, DTC P2229 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT
HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is any other DTC displayed? Check DTC using Replace the ECM.
“List of Diagnostic <Ref. to
Trouble Code FU(H4SO)-41,
(DTC)”. <Ref. to Engine Control
EN(H4SO)(diag)- Module (ECM).>
75, List of Diagnos- NOTE:
tic Trouble Code The barometric
(DTC).> pressure sensor is
built into the ECM.

DM:DTC U0073 CAN FAILURE, BUS ‘OFF’ DETECTION

NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to LAN section. <Ref. to LAN(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.>
DN:DTC U0101 CAN (TCU) DATA NOT LOADED
NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to LAN section. <Ref. to LAN(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.>
DO:DTC U0122 CAN (VDC) DATA NOT LOADED
NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to LAN section. <Ref. to LAN(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.>
DP:DTC U0140 CAN (BCU) DATA NOT LOADED
NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to LAN section. <Ref. to LAN(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.>
DQ:DTC U0402 CAN (TCU) DATA ABNORMAL
NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to LAN section. <Ref. to LAN(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.>
DR:DTC U0416 CAN (VDC) DATA ABNORMAL
NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to LAN section. <Ref. to LAN(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.>
DS:DTC U0422 CAN (BCU) DATA ABNORMAL
NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to LAN section. <Ref. to LAN(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.>

EN(H4SO)(diag)-281
 General Diagnostic Table
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

19.General Diagnostic Table

A: INSPECTION
1. ENGINE
NOTE:
Malfunction of parts other than those listed is also possible. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-95, Engine Trouble in Gen-
eral.>
Symptoms Faulty parts
1) Manifold absolute pressure sensor
2) Mass air flow and intake air temperature sensor
3) Ignition parts (*1)
4) Engine coolant temperature sensor (*2)
1. Engine stalls during idling.
5) Crankshaft position sensor (*3)
6) Camshaft position sensor (*3)
7) Fuel injection parts (*4)
8) Electronic throttle control
1) Manifold absolute pressure sensor
2) Mass air flow and intake air temperature sensor
3) Engine coolant temperature sensor (*2)
4) Ignition parts (*1)
5) Air intake system (*5)
6) Fuel injection parts (*4)
2. Rough idling 7) Electronic throttle control
8) Crankshaft position sensor (*3)
9) Camshaft position sensor (*3)
10) Oxygen sensor
11) Fuel pump and fuel pump relay
12) EGR valve
13) Oil switching solenoid valve
1) Engine coolant temperature sensor
2) Electronic throttle control
3) Manifold absolute pressure sensor
3. Engine does not return to idle. 4) Mass air flow and intake air temperature sensor
5) EGR valve
6) Accelerator pedal position sensor
7) Oil temperature sensor
1) Manifold absolute pressure sensor
2) Mass air flow and intake air temperature sensor
3) Electronic throttle control
4) Fuel injection parts (*4)
5) Fuel pump and fuel pump relay
6) Engine coolant temperature sensor (*2)
7) Crankshaft position sensor (*3)
4. Poor acceleration
8) Camshaft position sensor (*3)
9) Engine torque control signal circuit
10) Ignition parts (*1)
11) EGR valve
12) Accelerator pedal position sensor
13) Oil temperature sensor
14) Oil switching solenoid valve

EN(H4SO)(diag)-282
11LE_US.book 283 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Diagnostic Table

ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

Symptoms Faulty parts

1) Manifold absolute pressure sensor
2) Mass air flow and intake air temperature sensor
3) Engine coolant temperature sensor (*2)
4) Crankshaft position sensor (*3)
5. Engine stalls, hesitates, or sputters at accelera- 5) Camshaft position sensor (*3)
tion. 6) Purge control solenoid valve
7) Fuel injection parts (*4)
8) Electronic throttle control
9) Fuel pump and fuel pump relay
10) EGR valve
1) Mass air flow and intake air temperature sensor
2) Manifold absolute pressure sensor
3) Engine coolant temperature sensor (*2)
4) Crankshaft position sensor (*3)
6. Surging 5) Camshaft position sensor (*3)
6) Fuel injection parts (*4)
7) Electronic throttle control
8) Fuel pump and fuel pump relay
9) EGR valve
1) Mass air flow and intake air temperature sensor
2) Manifold absolute pressure sensor
3) Engine coolant temperature sensor
4) Knock sensor
7. Spark knock
5) Fuel injection parts (*4)
6) Fuel pump and fuel pump relay
7) EGR valve
8) Oil switching solenoid valve
1) Mass air flow and intake air temperature sensor
2) Manifold absolute pressure sensor
8. After burning in exhaust system 3) Engine coolant temperature sensor (*2)
4) Fuel injection parts (*4)
5) Fuel pump and fuel pump relay
*1:
Check ignition coil and spark plug.
*2: Indicate the symptom occurring only in cold temperatures.
*3: Ensure the secure installation.
*4: Check fuel injector, fuel pressure regulator and fuel filter.
*5: Inspect air leak in air intake system.

EN(H4SO)(diag)-283
11LE_US.book 284 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

General Diagnostic Table

ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)

EN(H4SO)(diag)-284
GENERAL DESCRIPTION

GD(H4SO)
Page
1. List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) ......................................................2
2. Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria ....................................8
 List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1. List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)

A: LIST
DTC Item Index
P0026 Intake Valve Control Solenoid Circuit <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-8, DTC P0026 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID
Range/Performance (Bank 1) CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0028 Intake Valve Control Solenoid Circuit <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-10, DTC P0028 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID
Range/Performance (Bank 2) CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (BANK 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0030 HO2S Heater Control Circuit (Bank 1 <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-11, DTC P0030 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT
Sensor 1) (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0031 HO2S Heater Control Circuit Low <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-13, DTC P0031 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW
(Bank 1 Sensor 1) (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0032 HO2S Heater Control Circuit High <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-15, DTC P0032 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH
(Bank 1 Sensor 1) (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0037 HO2S Heater Control Circuit Low <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-17, DTC P0037 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW
(Bank 1 Sensor 2) (BANK 1 SENSOR 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0038 HO2S Heater Control Circuit High <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-19, DTC P0038 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH
(Bank 1 Sensor 2) (BANK 1 SENSOR 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0068 MAP/MAF - Throttle Position Correla- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-21, DTC P0068 MAP/MAF - THROTTLE POSITION
tion CORRELATION, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0076 Intake Valve Control Solenoid Circuit <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-23, DTC P0076 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID
Low (Bank 1) CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0077 Intake Valve Control Solenoid Circuit <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-24, DTC P0077 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID
High (Bank 1) CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0082 Intake Valve Control Solenoid Circuit <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-25, DTC P0082 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID
Low (Bank 2) CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0083 Intake Valve Control Solenoid Circuit <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-25, DTC P0083 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID
High (Bank 2) CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0101 Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-26, DTC P0101 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT
Range/Performance RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0102 Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit Low <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-29, DTC P0102 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT
Input LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0103 Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit High <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-31, DTC P0103 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT
Input HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0107 Manifold Absolute Pressure/Baromet- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-33, DTC P0107 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE/
ric Pressure Circuit Low Input BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0108 Manifold Absolute Pressure/Baromet- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-35, DTC P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE/
ric Pressure Circuit High Input BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0111 Intake Air Temperature Sensor 1 Cir- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-37, DTC P0111 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1
cuit Range/Performance CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detect-
ing Criteria.>
P0112 Intake Air Temperature Sensor 1 Cir- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-39, DTC P0112 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1
cuit Low CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0113 Intake Air Temperature Sensor 1 Cir- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-41, DTC P0113 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1
cuit High CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0117 Engine Coolant Temperature Circuit <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-43, DTC P0117 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
Low CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0118 Engine Coolant Temperature Circuit <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-45, DTC P0118 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
High CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0122 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-47, DTC P0122 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SEN-
“A” Circuit Low SOR/SWITCH “A” CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting
Criteria.>

GD(H4SO)-2
 List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
GENERAL DESCRIPTION

DTC Item Index

P0123 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-49, DTC P0123 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SEN-
“A” Circuit High SOR/SWITCH “A” CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting
Criteria.>
P0125 Insufficient Coolant Temperature for <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-51, DTC P0125 INSUFFICIENT COOLANT TEMPERA-
Closed Loop Fuel Control TURE FOR CLOSED LOOP FUEL CONTROL, Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0126 Insufficient Engine Coolant Tempera- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-53, DTC P0126 INSUFFICIENT ENGINE COOLANT
ture for Stable Operation TEMPERATURE FOR STABLE OPERATION, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Detecting Criteria.>
P0128 Coolant Thermostat (Engine Coolant <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-55, DTC P0128 COOLANT THERMOSTAT (ENGINE
Temperature Below Thermostat Reg- COOLANT TEMPERATURE BELOW THERMOSTAT REGULATING TEM-
ulating Temperature) PERATURE), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0131 O2 Sensor Circuit Low Voltage (Bank <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-57, DTC P0131 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE
1 Sensor 1) (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0132 O2 Sensor Circuit High Voltage (Bank <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-59, DTC P0132 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE
1 Sensor 1) (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0133 O2 Sensor Circuit Slow Response <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-61, DTC P0133 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT SLOW
(Bank 1 Sensor 1) RESPONSE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting
Criteria.>
P0134 O2 Sensor Circuit No Activity <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-64, DTC P0134 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIVITY
Detected (Bank 1 Sensor 1) DETECTED (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting
Criteria.>
P0137 O2 Sensor Circuit Low Voltage (Bank <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-66, DTC P0137 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE
1 Sensor 2) (BANK 1 SENSOR 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0138 O2 Sensor Circuit High Voltage (Bank <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-69, DTC P0138 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE
1 Sensor 2) (BANK 1 SENSOR 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0139 O2 Sensor Circuit Slow Response <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-70, DTC P0139 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT SLOW
(Bank 1 Sensor 2) RESPONSE (BANK 1 SENSOR 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting
Criteria.>
P0140 O2 Sensor Circuit No Activity <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-78, DTC P0140 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIVITY
Detected (Bank1 Sensor2) DETECTED (BANK1 SENSOR2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting
Criteria.>
P0141 O2 Sensor Heater Circuit (Bank1 <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-80, DTC P0141 O2 SENSOR HEATER CIRCUIT (BANK1
Sensor2) SENSOR2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0171 System Too Lean (Bank 1) <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-82, DTC P0171 SYSTEM TOO LEAN (BANK 1), Diagnos-
tic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0172 System Too Rich (Bank 1) <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-83, DTC P0172 SYSTEM TOO RICH (BANK 1), Diagnos-
tic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0181 Fuel Temperature Sensor “A” Circuit <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-85, DTC P0181 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR “A”
Range/Performance CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detect-
ing Criteria.>
P0182 Fuel Temperature Sensor “A” Circuit <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-88, DTC P0182 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR “A”
Low Input CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0183 Fuel Temperature Sensor “A” Circuit <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-90, DTC P0183 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR “A”
High Input CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0196 Engine Oil Temperature Sensor Cir- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-92, DTC P0196 ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
cuit Range/Performance CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detect-
ing Criteria.>
P0197 Engine Oil Temperature Sensor Low <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-94, DTC P0197 ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0198 Engine Oil Temperature Sensor High <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-95, DTC P0198 ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0222 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-96, DTC P0222 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SEN-
“B” Circuit Low SOR/SWITCH “B” CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting
Criteria.>

GD(H4SO)-3
 List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
GENERAL DESCRIPTION

DTC Item Index

P0223 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-98, DTC P0223 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SEN-
“B” Circuit High SOR/SWITCH “B” CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting
Criteria.>
P0301 Cylinder 1 Misfire Detected <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-100, DTC P0301 CYLINDER 1 MISFIRE DETECTED,
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0302 Cylinder 2 Misfire Detected <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-106, DTC P0302 CYLINDER 2 MISFIRE DETECTED,
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0303 Cylinder 3 Misfire Detected <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-106, DTC P0303 CYLINDER 3 MISFIRE DETECTED,
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0304 Cylinder 4 Misfire Detected <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-106, DTC P0304 CYLINDER 4 MISFIRE DETECTED,
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0327 Knock Sensor 1 Circuit Low (Bank 1 <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-107, DTC P0327 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW
or Single Sensor) (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting
Criteria.>
P0328 Knock Sensor 1 Circuit High (Bank 1 <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-109, DTC P0328 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH
or Single Sensor) (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting
Criteria.>
P0335 Crankshaft Position Sensor “A” Circuit <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-111, DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
“A” CIRCUIT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0336 Crankshaft Position Sensor “A” Circuit <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-113, DTC P0336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
Range/Performance “A” CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Detecting Criteria.>
P0340 Camshaft Position Sensor “A” Circuit <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-115, DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR “A”
(Bank 1 or Single Sensor) CIRCUIT (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Detecting Criteria.>
P0341 Camshaft Position Sensor “A” Circuit <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-117, DTC P0341 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR “A”
Range/Performance (Bank 1 or Single CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR), Diag-
Sensor) nostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0400 Exhaust Gas Recirculation Flow <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-119, DTC P0400 EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION
FLOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0420 Catalyst System Efficiency Below <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-122, DTC P0420 CATALYST SYSTEM EFFICIENCY
Threshold (Bank 1) BELOW THRESHOLD (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting
Criteria.>
P0442 Evaporative Emission Control Sys- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-125, DTC P0442 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL
tem Leak Detected (Small Leak) SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (SMALL LEAK), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Detecting Criteria.>
P0447 Evaporative Emission Control Sys- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-138, DTC P0447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL
tem Vent Control Circuit Open SYSTEM VENT CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Detecting Criteria.>
P0448 Evaporative Emission Control Sys- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-140, DTC P0448 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL
tem Vent Control Circuit Shorted SYSTEM VENT CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED, Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0451 Evaporative Emission Control Sys- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-142, DTC P0451 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL
tem Pressure Sensor SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting
Criteria.>
P0452 Evaporative Emission Control Sys- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-144, DTC P0452 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL
tem Pressure Sensor Low Input SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Detecting Criteria.>
P0453 Evaporative Emission Control Sys- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-146, DTC P0453 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL
tem Pressure Sensor High Input SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0456 Evaporative Emission Control Sys- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-148, DTC P0456 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL
tem Leak Detected (Very Small Leak) SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (VERY SMALL LEAK), Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC) Detecting Criteria.>

GD(H4SO)-4
 List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
GENERAL DESCRIPTION

DTC Item Index

P0457 Evaporative Emission Control Sys- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-148, DTC P0457 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL
tem Leak Detected (Fuel Cap Loose/ SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (FUEL CAP LOOSE/OFF), Diagnostic Trouble
Off) Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0458 Evaporative Emission System Purge <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-149, DTC P0458 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
Control Valve Circuit Low PURGE CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Detecting Criteria.>
P0459 Evaporative Emission System Purge <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-151, DTC P0459 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
Control Valve Circuit High PURGE CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Detecting Criteria.>
P0461 Fuel Level Sensor “A” Circuit Range/ <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-153, DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT
Performance RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0462 Fuel Level Sensor “A” Circuit Low <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-155, DTC P0462 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT
LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0463 Fuel Level Sensor “A” Circuit High <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-157, DTC P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT
HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0464 Fuel Level Sensor Circuit Intermittent <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-159, DTC P0464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT
INTERMITTENT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0500 Vehicle Speed Sensor “A” <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-162, DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR “A”, Diag-
nostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0506 Idle Air Control System RPM Lower <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-163, DTC P0506 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM RPM
Than Expected LOWER THAN EXPECTED, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0507 Idle Air Control System RPM Higher <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-164, DTC P0507 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM RPM
Than Expected HIGHER THAN EXPECTED, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P050A Cold Start Idle Air Control System <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-165, DTC P050A COLD START IDLE AIR CONTROL SYS-
Performance TEM PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P050B Cold Start Ignition Timing Perfor- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-167, DTC P050B COLD START IGNITION TIMING PER-
mance FORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0512 Starter Request Circuit <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-168, DTC P0512 STARTER REQUEST CIRCUIT, Diag-
nostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0513 Incorrect Immobilizer Key <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-169, DTC P0513 INCORRECT IMMOBILIZER KEY, Diag-
nostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0604 Internal Control Module Random <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-170, DTC P0604 INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE RAN-
Access Memory (RAM) Error DOM ACCESS MEMORY (RAM) ERROR, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Detecting Criteria.>
P0605 Internal Control Module Read Only <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-171, DTC P0605 INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE READ
Memory (ROM) Error ONLY MEMORY (ROM) ERROR, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting
Criteria.>
P0607 Throttle Control System Circuit <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-172, DTC P0607 THROTTLE CONTROL SYSTEM CIR-
Range/Performance CUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting
Criteria.>
P0638 Throttle Actuator Control Range/Per- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-174, DTC P0638 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL
formance (Bank 1) RANGE/PERFORMANCE (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detect-
ing Criteria.>
P0700 Transmission Control System (MIL <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-176, DTC P0700 TRANSMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
Request) (MIL REQUEST), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0851 Park/Neutral Switch Input Circuit Low <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-177, DTC P0851 PARK/NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIR-
(AT Model) CUIT LOW (AT MODEL), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0851 Neutral Switch Input Circuit Low (MT <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-178, DTC P0851 NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT
Model) LOW (MT MODEL), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0852 Park/Neutral Switch Input Circuit High <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-179, DTC P0852 PARK/NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIR-
(AT Model) CUIT HIGH (AT MODEL), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0852 Neutral Switch Input Circuit High (MT <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-180, DTC P0852 NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT
Model) HIGH (MT MODEL), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P1152 O2 Sensor Circuit Range/Perfor- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-181, DTC P1152 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PER-
mance (Low) (Bank1 Sensor1) FORMANCE (LOW) (BANK1 SENSOR1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Detecting Criteria.>

GD(H4SO)-5
 List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
GENERAL DESCRIPTION

DTC Item Index

P1153 O2 Sensor Circuit Range/Perfor- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-183, DTC P1153 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PER-
mance (High) (Bank1 Sensor1) FORMANCE (HIGH) (BANK1 SENSOR1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Detecting Criteria.>
P1160 Return Spring Failure <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-185, DTC P1160 RETURN SPRING FAILURE, Diagnostic
Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P1443 Vent Control Solenoid Valve Function <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-186, DTC P1443 VENT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Problem FUNCTION PROBLEM, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P1492 EGR Solenoid Valve Signal #1 Circuit <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-188, DTC P1492 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #1
Malfunction (Low Input) CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (LOW INPUT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Detecting Criteria.>
P1493 EGR Solenoid Valve Signal #1 Circuit <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-190, DTC P1493 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #1
Malfunction (High Input) CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (HIGH INPUT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Detecting Criteria.>
P1494 EGR Solenoid Valve Signal #2 Circuit <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-192, DTC P1494 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #2
Malfunction (Low Input) CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (LOW INPUT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Detecting Criteria.>
P1495 EGR Solenoid Valve Signal #2 Circuit <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-192, DTC P1495 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #2
Malfunction (High Input) CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (HIGH INPUT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Detecting Criteria.>
P1496 EGR Solenoid Valve Signal #3 Circuit <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-192, DTC P1496 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #3
Malfunction (Low Input) CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (LOW INPUT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Detecting Criteria.>
P1497 EGR Solenoid Valve Signal #3 Circuit <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-192, DTC P1497 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #3
Malfunction (High Input) CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (HIGH INPUT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Detecting Criteria.>
P1498 EGR Solenoid Valve Signal #4 Circuit <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-192, DTC P1498 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #4
Malfunction (Low Input) CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (LOW INPUT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Detecting Criteria.>
P1499 EGR Solenoid Valve Signal #4 Circuit <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-192, DTC P1499 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #4
Malfunction (High Input) CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (HIGH INPUT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Detecting Criteria.>
P1518 Starter Switch Circuit Low Input <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-193, DTC P1518 STARTER SWITCH CIRCUIT LOW
INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P1560 Back-Up Voltage Circuit Malfunction <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-194, DTC P1560 BACK-UP VOLTAGE CIRCUIT MAL-
FUNCTION, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P1570 Antenna <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-195, DTC P1570 ANTENNA, Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P1571 Reference Code Incompatibility <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-195, DTC P1571 REFERENCE CODE INCOMPATIBIL-
ITY, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P1572 IMM Circuit Failure <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-195, DTC P1572 IMM CIRCUIT FAILURE (EXCEPT
ANTENNA CIRCUIT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P1574 Key Communication Failure <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-195, DTC P1574 KEY COMMUNICATION FAILURE,
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P1576 EGI Control Module EEPROM <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-195, DTC P1576 EGI CONTROL MODULE EEPROM,
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P1577 IMM Control Module EEPROM <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-195, DTC P1577 IMM CONTROL MODULE EEPROM,
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P1578 Meter Failure <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-195, DTC P1578 METER FAILURE, Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P2096 Post Catalyst Fuel Trim System Too <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-196, DTC P2096 POST CATALYST FUEL TRIM SYSTEM
Lean (Bank 1) TOO LEAN (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P2097 Post Catalyst Fuel Trim System Too <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-198, DTC P2097 POST CATALYST FUEL TRIM SYSTEM
Rich (Bank 1) TOO RICH (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P2101 Throttle Actuator Control Motor Circuit <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-200, DTC P2101 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL
Range/Performance MOTOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Detecting Criteria.>

GD(H4SO)-6
 List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
GENERAL DESCRIPTION

DTC Item Index

P2102 Throttle Actuator Control Motor Circuit <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-202, DTC P2102 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL
Low MOTOR CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P2103 Throttle Actuator Control Motor Circuit <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-203, DTC P2103 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL
High MOTOR CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P2109 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor “A” <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-204, DTC P2109 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SEN-
Minimum Stop Performance SOR “A” MINIMUM STOP PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Detecting Criteria.>
P2122 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-205, DTC P2122 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SEN-
“D” Circuit Low Input SOR/SWITCH “D” CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Detecting Criteria.>
P2123 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-207, DTC P2123 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SEN-
“D” Circuit High Input SOR/SWITCH “D” CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Detecting Criteria.>
P2127 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-209, DTC P2127 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SEN-
“E” Circuit Low Input SOR/SWITCH “E” CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Detecting Criteria.>
P2128 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-211, DTC P2128 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SEN-
“E” Circuit High Input SOR/SWITCH “E” CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Detecting Criteria.>
P2135 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-213, DTC P2135 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SEN-
“A”/“B” Voltage Correlation SOR/SWITCH “A”/“B” VOLTAGE CORRELATION, Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P2138 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-215, DTC P2138 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SEN-
“D”/“E” Voltage Correlation SOR/SWITCH “D”/“E” VOLTAGE CORRELATION, Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P2227 Atmospheric Pressure Sensor Range/ <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-217, DTC P2227 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT
Performance RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P2228 Barometric Pressure Circuit Low <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-218, DTC P2228 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT
LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P2229 Barometric Pressure Circuit High <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-219, DTC P2229 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT
HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
U0073 CAN Failure, Bus ‘OFF’ Detection <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-220, DTC U0073 CAN FAILURE, BUS ‘OFF’ DETEC-
TION, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
U0101 CAN (TCU) Data not Loaded <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-221, DTC U0101 CAN (TCU) DATA NOT LOADED, Diag-
nostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
U0122 CAN (VDC) Data not Loaded <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-221, DTC U0122 CAN (VDC) DATA NOT LOADED, Diag-
nostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
U0140 CAN (BCU) Data not Loaded <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-221, DTC U0140 CAN (BCU) DATA NOT LOADED, Diag-
nostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
U0402 CAN (TCU) Data Abnormal <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-221, DTC U0402 CAN (TCU) DATA ABNORMAL, Diag-
nostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
U0416 CAN (VDC) Data Abnormal <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-221, DTC U0416 CAN (VDC) DATA ABNORMAL, Diag-
nostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
U0422 CAN (BCU) Data Abnormal <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-221, DTC U0422 CAN (BCU) DATA ABNORMAL, Diag-
nostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>

GD(H4SO)-7
11LE_US.book 8 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

2. Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

A: DTC P0026 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT RANGE/PER-
FORMANCE (BANK 1)
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Judge as NG with either Low NG or High NG.
A variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch is installed for diagnosis. It is possible to determine whether
the intake valve is in high mode (increase the amount of lift) or in low mode (suppressing the amount of lift)
when the variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch is turned ON or OFF.
• Normal
Variable valve lift diagnosis
Oil switching solenoid valve duty Intake valve
oil pressure switch
Large High mode OFF
Minimum Low mode ON

• Low NG
When the variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch remains ON even though the intake valve tried to
enter high mode (oil switching solenoid valve duty is large), this is judged as a Low NG.
• High NG
When the variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch remains OFF even though the intake valve tried to
enter low mode (oil switching solenoid valve duty is small), this is judged as a High NG.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The variable valve lift system optimizes the intake valve lift by switching between the low lift cam and the high
lift cam according to the engine speed. The amount of intake valve lift is varied by controlling the oil switching
solenoid valve duty according to signals from the ECM.

(A)

(B)

EN-05565

(A) Low lift (B) High lift

GD(H4SO)-8
11LE_US.book 9 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V
After engine starting ≥ 6000 ms
Engine oil temperature ≥ 15 °C (59 °F)
Variable valve lift control Operation

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Perform the diagnosis continuously 6 seconds after engine start while variable valve lift is being controlled.
5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Low
Duty ratio ≥ 62 %
Variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch ON
High
Duty ratio < 33 %
Variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch OFF

Time Needed for Diagnosis:

Low side: 784 ms
High side: 3000 ms
Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Low
Duty ratio ≥ 62 %
Variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch OFF
High
Duty ratio < 33 %
Variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch ON

Time Needed for Diagnosis:

Low side: 208 ms
High side: 3000 ms

GD(H4SO)-9
 Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria
GENERAL DESCRIPTION

B: DTC P0028 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT RANGE/PER-

FORMANCE (BANK 2)
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
NOTE:
For the detection standard, refer to DTC P0026. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-8, DTC P0026 INTAKE VALVE CON-
TROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting
Criteria.>

GD(H4SO)-10
11LE_US.book 11 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

C: DTC P0030 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect functional errors of the front oxygen (A/F) sensor heater.
Judge as NG when it is determined that the front oxygen (A/F) sensor impedance is large when looking at en-
gine status such as deceleration fuel cut.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(1) (2) (3) (4)

(5)

EN-07655

(1) Element cover (outer) (3) Sensor element (5) Sensor housing
(2) Element cover (inner) (4) Ceramic heater

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Condition established time ≥ 42000 ms
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V
Heater current Permitted
Control duty ≥ 35 % Experienced
After fuel cut ≥ 20000 ms

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Perform the diagnosis continuously after 42000 ms or more have passed since the engine started.

GD(H4SO)-11
11LE_US.book 12 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Front oxygen (A/F) sensor impedance > 50 Ω

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 10000 ms

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy-
cles.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Front oxygen (A/F) sensor impedance ≤ 50 Ω

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 10000 ms

GD(H4SO)-12
11LE_US.book 13 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

D: DTC P0031 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect front oxygen (A/F) sensor heater open or short circuit.
The front oxygen (A/F) sensor heater performs duty control, and the output terminal voltage at ON is 0 V, and
the output terminal voltage at OFF is the battery voltage.
Judge as NG when the terminal voltage remains Low.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(A)

OFF

(B)

ON (D)
0V

(C)

EN-01792

(A) Battery voltage (B) Front oxygen (A/F) sensor heater (C) 128 ms
output voltage
(D) Low error

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Always perform the diagnosis continuously.

GD(H4SO)-13
11LE_US.book 14 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Output voltage level Low
Front oxygen (A/F) sensor heater control duty < 87.5 %

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 4 ms × 250 time(s)

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Output voltage level High

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

GD(H4SO)-14
11LE_US.book 15 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

E: DTC P0032 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect front oxygen (A/F) sensor heater open or short circuit.
The front oxygen (A/F) sensor heater performs duty control, and the output terminal voltage at ON is 0 V, and
the output terminal voltage at OFF is the battery voltage.
Judge as NG when the terminal voltage remains High.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(A)

(D) OFF

(B)

ON
0V

(C)

EN-01793

(A) Battery voltage (B) Front oxygen (A/F) sensor heater (C) 128 ms
output voltage
(D) High error

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Always perform the diagnosis continuously.

GD(H4SO)-15
11LE_US.book 16 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Output voltage level High
Front oxygen (A/F) sensor heater control duty ≥ 12.5 %

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 4 ms × 500 time(s)

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Output voltage level Low

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

GD(H4SO)-16
11LE_US.book 17 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

F: DTC P0037 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect the rear oxygen sensor heater open or short circuit.
The rear oxygen sensor heater performs duty control, and the output terminal voltage at ON is 0 V, and the
output terminal voltage at OFF is the battery voltage.
Judge as NG when the terminal voltage remains Low.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(A)

OFF

(B)

ON (D)
0V

(C)

EN-01792

(A) Battery voltage (B) Output voltage of the rear oxygen (C) 256 ms (cycle)
sensor heater
(D) Low error

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V
Elapsed time after starting the engine ≥ 1 second
Engine speed < 8000 rpm

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

After starting the engine, perform the diagnosis continuously when engine is low speed.

GD(H4SO)-17
11LE_US.book 18 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Output voltage level Low
Rear oxygen sensor heater control duty < 75 %

Time Needed for Diagnosis:8 ms × 1250 time(s)

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy-
cles.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Output voltage level High

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

GD(H4SO)-18
11LE_US.book 19 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

G: DTC P0038 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect the rear oxygen sensor heater open or short circuit.
The rear oxygen sensor heater performs duty control, and the output terminal voltage at ON is 0 V, and the
output terminal voltage at OFF is the battery voltage.
Judge as NG when the terminal voltage remains High.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(A)

(D) OFF

(B)

ON
0V

(C)

EN-01793

(A) Battery voltage (B) Output voltage of the rear oxygen (C) 256 ms (cycle)
sensor heater
(D) High error

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V
Elapsed time after starting the engine ≥ 1 second
Engine speed < 8000 rpm

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

After starting the engine, perform the diagnosis continuously when engine is low speed.

GD(H4SO)-19
11LE_US.book 20 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Output voltage level High
Rear oxygen sensor heater control duty ≥ 20 %

Time Needed for Diagnosis:8 ms × 1250 time (s)

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy-
cles.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Output voltage level Low

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

GD(H4SO)-20
11LE_US.book 21 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

H: DTC P0068 MAP/MAF - THROTTLE POSITION CORRELATION

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect problems in the intake manifold pressure sensor output properties.
Judge as NG when the intake air pressure AD value is Low whereas it seemed to be High from the viewpoint
of engine condition, or when it is High whereas it seemed to be Low from the engine condition.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(1) (2)

(A)

(B)
(3)

EN-01765

(A) Output voltage (B) Absolute pressure

(1) Connector (2) Terminals (3) O-ring

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Engine coolant temperature ≥ 60 °C (140 °F)

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Perform the diagnosis continuously after idling.

GD(H4SO)-21
11LE_US.book 22 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
Judge as NG when Low side or High side becomes NG.
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Low
Engine speed < 2500 rpm
Throttle position ≥ 12 °
Output voltage < 1.46 V
Engine load > 0.5 g/rev (0.02 oz/rev) (AT model)
> 0.45 g/rev (0.02 oz/rev) (MT model)
High
Engine speed 600 rpm — 900 rpm
Throttle position < 4.4 ° (AT model)
< 3.6 ° (MT model)
Output voltage ≥ 2.5 V
Engine load < 0.4 g/rev (0.01 oz/rev)

Time Needed for Diagnosis:

Low side: 5000 ms
High side: 10000 ms
Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy-
cles.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG when both Low side and High side become OK.
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as OK.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Low
Engine speed < 2500 rpm
Throttle position ≥ 12 °
Output voltage ≥ 1.46 V
Engine load > 0.5 g/rev (0.02 oz/rev) (AT model)
> 0.45 g/rev (0.02 oz/rev) (MT model)
High
Engine speed 600 rpm — 900 rpm
Throttle position < 4.4 ° (AT model)
< 3.6 ° (MT model)
Output voltage < 2.5 V
Engine load < 0.4 g/rev (0.01 oz/rev)

Time Needed for Diagnosis:

Low side: Less than 1 second
High side: Less than 1 second

GD(H4SO)-22
11LE_US.book 23 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

I: DTC P0076 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1)

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect the open circuit of the oil switching solenoid valve.
Judge as NG when the current is small even though the output duty is large.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V

3. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Always perform the diagnosis continuously.
4. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Duty ratio ≥ 30 %
Control current < 0.026 A

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 2000 ms

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
|Oil switching solenoid valve target current value < 0.08 A
– Oil switching solenoid valve current value|
Target current ≥ 0.11 A

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 2000 ms

GD(H4SO)-23
11LE_US.book 24 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

J: DTC P0077 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1)

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect short circuits of the oil switching solenoid valve.
Judge as a short NG when the current is large even though the output duty is small.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V

3. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Always perform the diagnosis continuously.
4. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Duty ratio <7%
Control current ≥ 0.465 A

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 2000 ms

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
|Oil switching solenoid valve target current value < 0.08 A
– Oil switching solenoid valve current value|

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 2000 ms

GD(H4SO)-24
 Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria
GENERAL DESCRIPTION

K: DTC P0082 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 2)

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
NOTE:
For the detection standard, refer to DTC P0076. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-23, DTC P0076 INTAKE VALVE CON-
TROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
L: DTC P0083 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 2)
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
NOTE:
For the detection standard, refer to DTC P0077. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-24, DTC P0077 INTAKE VALVE CON-
TROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>

GD(H4SO)-25
11LE_US.book 26 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

M: DTC P0101 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect the malfunction of air flow sensor output properties.
Judge as a low side NG when the air flow voltage indicates a small value regardless of running in a state
where the air flow voltage increases. Judge as a high side NG when the air flow voltage indicates a large val-
ue regardless of running in a state where the air flow voltage decreases. Judge air flow sensor property NG
when the Low side or High side becomes NG.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(1)
(3)

(2)
(A)

(4)

EN-01766

(A) Air

(1) Air flow sensor (3) Voltage (V) (4) Amount of intake air (kg (lb)/s)
(2) Intake air temperature sensor

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Engine coolant temperature ≥ 60 °C (140 °F)

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Perform the diagnosis continuously after idling.

GD(H4SO)-26
11LE_US.book 27 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
Judge as NG when Low side or High side becomes NG.
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Low
Output voltage < 1.49 V (AT model)
< 1.47 V (MT model)
Engine speed ≥ 2500 rpm (AT model)
≥ 2000 rpm (MT model)
Throttle opening angle ≥ 12 °
Intake manifold pressure ≥ 66.7 kPa (500 mmHg, 19.7 inHg)
High (1)
Output voltage ≥ 2.66 V
Engine speed 600 rpm — 900 rpm
Throttle opening angle < 4.4 ° (AT model)
< 3.6 ° (MT model)
Intake manifold pressure ≥ 40 kPa (300 mmHg, 11.8 inHg)
High (2)
Output voltage ≥ 1.55 V (AT model)
≥ 1.45 V (MT model)
Engine speed 600 rpm — 900 rpm
Throttle opening angle < 4.4 ° (AT model)
< 3.6 ° (MT model)
Intake manifold pressure ≥ 40 kPa (300 mmHg, 11.8 inHg)
Fuel system diagnosis Rich side malfunction

Time Needed for Diagnosis:

Low: 5000 ms
High: 10000 ms
Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy-
cles.

GD(H4SO)-27
11LE_US.book 28 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG when both Low side and High side become OK.
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Low
Output voltage ≥ 1.49 V (AT model)
≥ 1.47 V (MT model)
Engine speed ≥ 2500 rpm (AT model)
≥ 2000 rpm (MT model)
Throttle opening angle ≥ 12 °
Intake manifold pressure ≥ 66.7 kPa (500 mmHg, 19.7 inHg)
High
Output voltage < 2.66 V
Engine speed 600 rpm — 900 rpm
Throttle opening angle < 4.4 ° (AT model)
< 3.6 ° (MT model)
Intake manifold pressure < 40 kPa (300 mmHg, 11.8 inHg)
Fuel system diagnosis Rich side normal

Time Needed for Diagnosis:

Low: Less than 1 second
High: Less than 1 second

GD(H4SO)-28
11LE_US.book 29 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

N: DTC P0102 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect open or short circuits of the air flow sensor.
Judge as NG if out of specification.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(1)
(3)

(2)
(A)

(4)

EN-01766

(A) Air

(1) Air flow sensor (3) Voltage (V) (4) Amount of intake air (kg (lb)/s)
(2) Intake air temperature sensor

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
None

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Always perform the diagnosis continuously.

GD(H4SO)-29
11LE_US.book 30 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Output voltage ≤ 0.22 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 500 ms

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Output voltage > 0.22 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

GD(H4SO)-30
11LE_US.book 31 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

O: DTC P0103 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect open or short circuits of the air flow sensor.
Judge as NG if out of specification.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(1)
(3)

(2)
(A)

(4)

EN-01766

(A) Air

(1) Air flow sensor (3) Voltage (V) (4) Amount of intake air (kg (lb)/s)
(2) Intake air temperature sensor

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
None

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Always perform the diagnosis continuously.

GD(H4SO)-31
11LE_US.book 32 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Output voltage ≥ 4.19 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 500 ms

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Output voltage < 4.19 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

GD(H4SO)-32
11LE_US.book 33 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

P: DTC P0107 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE/BAROMETRIC PRESSURE

CIRCUIT LOW INPUT
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect the open or short circuit of intake manifold pressure sensor.
Judge as NG if out of specification.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(1) (2)

(A)

(B)
(3)

EN-01765

(A) Output voltage (B) Absolute pressure

(1) Connector (2) Terminals (3) O-ring

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
None

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Always perform the diagnosis continuously.

GD(H4SO)-33
11LE_US.book 34 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Output voltage ≤ 0.573 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 500 ms

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Output voltage > 0.573 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

GD(H4SO)-34
11LE_US.book 35 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Q: DTC P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE/BAROMETRIC PRESSURE

CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect the open or short circuit of intake manifold pressure sensor.
Judge as NG if out of specification.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(1) (2)

(A)

(B)
(3)

EN-01765

(A) Output voltage (B) Absolute pressure

(1) Connector (2) Terminals (3) O-ring

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
None

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Always perform the diagnosis continuously.

GD(H4SO)-35
11LE_US.book 36 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Output voltage ≥ 4.388 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 500 ms

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Output voltage < 4.388 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

GD(H4SO)-36
11LE_US.book 37 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

R: DTC P0111 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT RANGE/PER-

FORMANCE
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect the malfunction of intake air temperature sensor output property.
Judge as NG when the intake air temperature is not varied whereas it seemed to be varied from the viewpoint
of engine condition.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(1) (3)

(2)
(A)

(4)

EN-01767

(A) Air

(1) Air flow sensor (3) Resistance value (Ω) (4) Intake air temperature °C (°F)
(2) Intake air temperature sensor

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Engine coolant temperature at engine starting < 35 °C (95 °F)
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V
Continuous time when the vehicle speed is less ≥ 600 s
than 140 km/h (87 MPH)
Engine coolant temperature ≥ 75 °C (167 °F)
Intake air amount sum value ≥ Value of Map 1

Number of experiences under conditions below ≥ 3 time(s)

• Continuous time when vehicle speed is less than ≥ Value from Map 2
4 km/h (2.5 MPH)
• Continuous time when vehicle speed is 40 km/h ≥ 15 s
(24.9 MPH) or more
and
Establishing time of 1, 2 ≥ 15 s
1. Intake air amount ≥ 10 g/s (0.35 oz/s)
2. Vehicle speed ≥ 4 km/h (2.5 MPH)

GD(H4SO)-37
11LE_US.book 38 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Map 1
Engine coolant temperature –20 –10 0 10 20
°C (°F) (–4) (14) (32) (50) (68)
50000 7400 6600 5800 4500
Intake air amount sum value (g (oz)/s)
(1763.5) (261) (232.78) (204.57) (158.72)

Map 2
Engine coolant temperature –30 0 10 20
°C (°F) (–22) (32) (50) (68)
Continuous time (s) when vehicle
250 40 32 24
speed is less than 4 km/h (2.5 MPH)

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Perform the diagnosis when the vehicle speed condition is met after warming up from a cold condition.
5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
Judge as NG when the following conditions are established.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Output voltage difference between Max. and Min. < 0.02 V(Equivalent to approximately
0.5°C (0.9°F) near 25°C)

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy-
cles.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the following conditions are established.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Output voltage difference between Max. and Min. ≥ 0.02 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

GD(H4SO)-38
11LE_US.book 39 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

S: DTC P0112 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect open or short circuit of the intake air temperature sensor.
Judge as NG if out of specification.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(1) (3)

(2)
(A)

(4)

EN-01767

(A) Air

(1) Air flow sensor (3) Resistance value (Ω) (4) Intake air temperature °C (°F)
(2) Intake air temperature sensor

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
None

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Always perform the diagnosis continuously.

GD(H4SO)-39
11LE_US.book 40 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Output voltage < 0.231 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 500 ms

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Output voltage ≥ 0.231 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

GD(H4SO)-40
11LE_US.book 41 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

T: DTC P0113 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect open or short circuit of the intake air temperature sensor.
Judge as NG if out of specification.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(1) (3)

(2)
(A)

(4)

EN-01767

(A) Air

(1) Air flow sensor (3) Resistance value (Ω) (4) Intake air temperature °C (°F)
(2) Intake air temperature sensor

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
None

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Always perform the diagnosis continuously.

GD(H4SO)-41
11LE_US.book 42 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Output voltage ≥ 4.716 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 500 ms

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Output voltage < 4.716 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

GD(H4SO)-42
11LE_US.book 43 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

U: DTC P0117 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT LOW

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect the open or short circuit of the engine coolant temperature sensor.
Judge as NG if out of specification.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(1)

(A)

(B)

(2)
EN-02917

(A) Resistance value (kΩ) (B) Temperature °C (°F)

(1) Connector (2) Thermistor element

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
None

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Always perform the diagnosis continuously.

GD(H4SO)-43
11LE_US.book 44 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Output voltage < 0.275 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 500 ms

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Output voltage ≥ 0.275 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

GD(H4SO)-44
11LE_US.book 45 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

V: DTC P0118 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT HIGH

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect the open or short circuit of the engine coolant temperature sensor.
Judge as NG if out of specification.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(1)

(A)

(B)

(2)
EN-02917

(A) Resistance value (kΩ) (B) Temperature °C (°F)

(1) Connector (2) Thermistor element

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
None

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Always perform the diagnosis continuously.

GD(H4SO)-45
11LE_US.book 46 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Output voltage ≥ 4.716 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 500 ms

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Output voltage < 4.716 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

GD(H4SO)-46
11LE_US.book 47 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

W: DTC P0122 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “A” CIRCUIT

LOW
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect the open or short circuit of throttle position sensor 1.
Judge as NG if out of specification.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(3)
(4)

(1)

(2)

EN-01859

(1) Throttle position sensor 1 signal (3) Throttle position sensor (4) Engine control module (ECM)
(2) Throttle position sensor 2 signal

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Ignition switch ON
Battery voltage ≥6V

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Always perform the diagnosis continuously.

GD(H4SO)-47
11LE_US.book 48 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Sensor 1 input voltage ≤ 0.217 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 24 ms

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Sensor 1 input voltage > 0.217 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 24 ms

GD(H4SO)-48
11LE_US.book 49 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

X: DTC P0123 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “A” CIRCUIT

HIGH
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect the open or short circuit of throttle position sensor 1.
Judge as NG if out of specification.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(3)
(4)

(1)

(2)

EN-01859

(1) Throttle position sensor 1 signal (3) Throttle position sensor (4) Engine control module (ECM)
(2) Throttle position sensor 2 signal

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Ignition switch ON
Battery voltage ≥6V

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Always perform the diagnosis continuously.

GD(H4SO)-49
11LE_US.book 50 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Sensor 1 input voltage ≥ 4.858 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 24 ms

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Sensor 1 input voltage < 4.858 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 24 ms

GD(H4SO)-50
11LE_US.book 51 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Y: DTC P0125 INSUFFICIENT COOLANT TEMPERATURE FOR CLOSED LOOP

FUEL CONTROL
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect the malfunction of engine coolant temperature output property.
Judge as NG when the engine coolant temperature does not rise in driving conditions where it should.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(1)

(A)

(B)

(2)
EN-02917

(A) Resistance value (kΩ) (B) Temperature °C (°F)

(1) Connector (2) Thermistor element

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Engine speed ≥ Value from Map
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V

Map
Engine coolant temperature –40 –30 –20 –10 0 10 20 30
°C (°F) (–40) (–22) (–4) (14) (32) (50) (68) (86)
Engine speed
500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500
rpm

Engine coolant temperature 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110

°C (°F) (104) (122) (140) (158) (176) (194) (212) (230)
Engine speed
500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500
rpm

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Perform the diagnosis only once after engine start.

GD(H4SO)-51
11LE_US.book 52 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
Judge as NG if the criteria below are met.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Engine coolant temperature < 20 °C (68 °F)
Timer for diagnosis after engine start ≥ Judgment value of
timer after engine start

Timer for diagnosis after engine start

a. Timer stop at fuel cut
b. During the driving conditions except a) above, timer counts up as follows.
64 ms + TWCNT ms (at 64 ms)
TWCNT is defined as follows,
TWCNT = 0 at idle switch ON,
TWCNT show on the following table at idle switch OFF.
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
0 (0) 8 (5) 16 (9.9) 24 (14.9) 32 (19.9) 40 (24.9) 48 (29.8) 56 (34.8)
–20 (–4) 0 ms 32.076 ms 39.977 ms 47.879 ms 82.544 ms 117.209 ms 154.214 ms 185.26 ms
–10 (14) 0 ms 25.704 ms 33.606 ms 41.508 ms 68.52 ms 95.532 ms 125.667 ms 155.802 ms
Temperature
0 (32) 0 ms 17.646 ms 25.548 ms 33.45 ms 53.652 ms 73.855 ms 97.12 ms 120.386 ms
°C (°F)
10 (50) 0 ms 7.901 ms 15.802 ms 23.704 ms 37.941 ms 52.177 ms 68.573 ms 82.538 ms
20 (68) 0 ms 7.901 ms 15.802 ms 23.704 ms 37.941 ms 52.177 ms 68.573 ms 82.538 ms

Judgment value of timer after engine starting

t = 573669 ms – 33924 ms × Ti
Ti : The lowest coolant temperature after engine start
Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second
Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy-
cles.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Engine coolant temperature ≥ 20 °C (68 °F)

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

GD(H4SO)-52
11LE_US.book 53 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Z: DTC P0126 INSUFFICIENT ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE FOR STA-

BLE OPERATION
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect the malfunction of the engine coolant temperature sensor characteristics.
Memorize the engine coolant temperature and fuel temperature at the last engine stop, and use them to
judge as NG when the engine coolant temperature does not decrease when it should.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(1)

(A)

(B)

(2)
EN-02917

(A) Resistance value (kΩ) (B) Temperature °C (°F)

(1) Connector (2) Thermistor element

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V
Refueling from the last engine stop till None
the current engine start
Fuel level ≥ 15 2 (3.96 US gal, 3.3 Imp gal)
Engine coolant temperature at the last ≥ 75 °C (167 °F)
engine stop

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Perform the diagnosis only once after starting the engine.

GD(H4SO)-53
11LE_US.book 54 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Engine coolant temperature at the last < 2.5 °C (4.5°F)
engine stop – Minimum engine coolant
temperature after the engine start
Fuel temperature at the last engine stop ≥ 5 °C (9°F)
– fuel temperature
Intake air temperature – fuel temperature < 2.5 °C (4.5°F)
Fuel temperature < 35 °C (95 °F)

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 2500 ms

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy-
cles.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Engine coolant temperature at the last ≥ 2.5 °C (4.5°F)
engine stop – Minimum engine coolant
temperature after the engine start

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

GD(H4SO)-54
11LE_US.book 55 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

AA:DTC P0128 COOLANT THERMOSTAT (ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

BELOW THERMOSTAT REGULATING TEMPERATURE)
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect malfunctions of the thermostat function.
Judge as NG when the engine coolant temperature is lower than the estimated engine coolant temperature
and the difference between them is large. Judge as OK when the engine coolant temperature becomes to
75°C (167°F), and the difference is small, before judging NG.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(8) (2)
(2)

(7)

(6) (5)

(4) (1)
(9)

(3)

EN-01692

(1) Valve (4) Piston (7) Stop ring

(2) Spring (5) Guide (8) Wax element
(3) Stopper (6) Rubber seal (9) Jiggle valve

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
None

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Always perform the diagnosis continuously.

GD(H4SO)-55
11LE_US.book 56 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V
Estimate ambient temperature ≥ –7 °C (19.4 °F)
Thermostat malfunction diagnosis Incomplete
Engine coolant temperature at engine starting < 55 °C (131 °F)
Estimated coolant temperature ≥ 77 °C (170.6 °F)
Engine coolant temperature ≤ 77 °C (170.6 °F)
(Estimated – Measured) Engine coolant temperature > 30 °C (54°F)
Vehicle speed ≥ 30 km/h (18.6 MPH)

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 64 ms × 3 time(s) × 152 time(s)

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy-
cles.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V
Estimate ambient temperature ≥ –7 °C (19.4 °F)
Thermostat malfunction diagnosis Incomplete
Engine coolant temperature at engine starting < 55 °C (131 °F)
Engine coolant temperature ≥ 77 °C (170.6 °F)
(Estimated – Measured) Engine coolant temperature ≤ 30 °C (54°F)

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

GD(H4SO)-56
11LE_US.book 57 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

AB:DTC P0131 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect the open or short circuit of sensor.
Judge as NG, when the element voltage is out of the specified range.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(3)
(1)

(A)

(2) (2)

(C) (B) (D)

(4)
EN-01693

(A) Electromotive force (B) Air fuel ratio (C) Lean

(D) Rich

(1) Atmosphere (3) ZrO2 (4) Ceramic heater

(2) Exhaust gas

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Always perform the diagnosis continuously.

GD(H4SO)-57
11LE_US.book 58 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Input voltage (+) < 1.128 V
or
Input voltage (–) < 0.23 V
or
|Input voltage (+) – Input voltage (–)| < 0.644 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis:

Input voltage (+): 1000 ms
Input voltage (–): 1000 ms
|Input voltage (+) – Input voltage (–)|: 1000 ms
Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Input voltage (+) ≥ 1.128 V
Input voltage (–) ≥ 0.23 V
|Input voltage (+) – Input voltage (–)| ≥ 0.644 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

GD(H4SO)-58
11LE_US.book 59 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

AC:DTC P0132 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect the open or short circuit of sensor.
Judge as NG, when the element voltage is out of the specified range.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(3)
(1)

(A)

(2) (2)

(C) (B) (D)

(4)
EN-01693

(A) Electromotive force (B) Air fuel ratio (C) Lean

(D) Rich

(1) Atmosphere (3) ZrO2 (4) Ceramic heater

(2) Exhaust gas

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Always perform the diagnosis continuously.

GD(H4SO)-59
11LE_US.book 60 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Input voltage (+) > 3.589 V
or
Input voltage (–) > 3.541 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis:

Input voltage (+): 1000 ms
Input voltage (–): 1000 ms
Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Input voltage (+) ≤ 3.589 V
Input voltage (–) ≤ 3.541 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

GD(H4SO)-60
11LE_US.book 61 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

AD:DTC P0133 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT SLOW RESPONSE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect the slow response of front oxygen (A/F) sensor.
Front oxygen (A/F) sensor cover has some ventilation holes for exhaust gas. Clogged ventilation holes are
diagnosed.
When the holes are clogged, the A/F output variation becomes slow comparing with the actual A/F variation
because oxygen which reaches the zirconia layer is insufficient. Therefore, if the sensor cover holes are
clogged, the rich to lean judgment in the ECM is delayed when the actual change from rich to lean occurs.
Judge as NG when the actual movement in comparison to the ECM control amount is slow.

(2) (3)

(1)

EN-01694

(1) Cover (2) Zirconia (3) Clogging

GD(H4SO)-61
11LE_US.book 62 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(3)
(1)

(A)

(2) (2)

(C) (B) (D)

(4)
EN-01693

(A) Electromotive force (B) Air fuel ratio (C) Lean

(D) Rich

(1) Atmosphere (3) ZrO2 (4) Ceramic heater

(2) Exhaust gas

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Time needed for all secondary parameters ≥ 1024 ms
to be in enable conditions
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V
Barometric pressure > 75 kPa (563 mmHg, 22.2 inHg)
Closed loop control with main feedback Operation
Front oxygen (A/F) sensor impedance 0 Ω — 50 Ω
Elapsed time after starting the engine ≥ 120000 ms
Engine coolant temperature ≥ 75 °C (167 °F)
Engine speed 1000 rpm — 3200 rpm
Vehicle speed 10 km/h — 120 km/h (6.2 MPH — 74.6 MPH)
Amount of intake air 10 g/s — 40 g/s (0.35 oz/s — 1.41 oz/s)
Engine load < 0.02 g/rev (0 oz/rev)
Learning value of EVAP conc. during purge < 0.2
Total time of operating canister purge ≥ 19.9 s

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Perform diagnosis only once at a constant speed of 10 km/h — 120 km/h (6.2 MPH — 74.6 MPH) 120000 ms
or more after starting the engine.

GD(H4SO)-62
11LE_US.book 63 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
Calculate faf difference every 32 ms × 4, and the λ value difference. Calculate the diagnosis value after cal-
culating 820 time(s).
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
parafca = td2faf/td2lmd > 0.3
where,
td2faf (N) = td2faf (n–1) + |d2faf (n)|
td2lmd (N) = td2lmd (n–1) + |d2lmd (n)|
add up to 32 ms × 4 × 820 time(s).
d2faf (n) = (faf (n) – faf (n–1)) – (faf (n–1) – faf (n–2))
d2lmd (n) = (lmd (n) – lmd (n–1)) – (lmd (n–1) – lmd (n–2))
faf = main feedback compensation coefficient every 128 milliseconds
lmd = output lambda every 128 milliseconds

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 32 ms × 4 × 820 time(s)

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy-
cles.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
parafca = td2faf/td2lmd ≤ 0.3
where,
td2faf (N) = td2faf (n–1) + |d2faf (n)|
td2lmd (N) = td2lmd (n–1) + |d2lmd (n)|
add up to 32 ms × 4 × 820 time(s).
d2faf (n) = (faf (n) – faf (n–1)) – (faf (n–1) – faf (n–2))
d2lmd (n) = (lmd (n) – lmd (n–1)) – (lmd (n–1) – lmd (n–2))
faf = main feedback compensation coefficient every 128 milliseconds
lmd = output lambda every 128 milliseconds

Time Needed for Diagnosis:32 ms × 4 × 820 time(s)

GD(H4SO)-63
11LE_US.book 64 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

AE:DTC P0134 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIVITY DETECTED (BANK 1

SENSOR 1)
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect open circuits of the sensor.
Judge as NG when the impedance of the element is large.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(3)
(1)

(A)

(2) (2)

(C) (B) (D)

(4)
EN-01693

(A) Electromotive force (B) Air fuel ratio (C) Lean

(D) Rich

(1) Atmosphere (3) ZrO2 (4) Ceramic heater

(2) Exhaust gas

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
None

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Always perform the diagnosis continuously.

GD(H4SO)-64
11LE_US.book 65 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V
Time of heater control duty at 70 % or more ≥ 36000 ms
Front oxygen (A/F) sensor impedance. > 500 Ω

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 5000 ms

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V
Front oxygen (A/F) sensor impedance. ≤ 500 Ω

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

GD(H4SO)-65
11LE_US.book 66 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

AF:DTC P0137 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect continuity NG of the oxygen sensor. If the oxygen sensor voltage reading is not within the probable
range considering the operating conditions, judge as NG.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(E)
(3)
V (1)

(A) (F)

(2) (2)

(C) (B) (D)

EN-01696

(A) Electromotive force (B) Air fuel ratio (C) Rich

(D) Lean (E) Theoretical air fuel ratio (F) Comparative voltage

(1) Atmosphere (2) Exhaust gas (3) Electromotive force

GD(H4SO)-66
11LE_US.book 67 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Used for abnormality judgment
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
High
Secondary air system Not in operation
Closed loop control at the oxygen sensor In operation
Misfire detection every 200 rotations < 5 time(s)
Front oxygen (A/F) sensor compensation coefficient Not in limit value
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V
Engine coolant temperature ≥ 75 °C (167 °F)
Low (1)
Secondary air system Not in operation
Closed loop control at the oxygen sensor In operation
Misfire detection every 200 rotations < 5 time(s)
Front oxygen (A/F) sensor compensation coefficient Not in limit value
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V
Engine coolant temperature ≥ 75 °C (167 °F)
Amount of intake air ≥ 10 g/s (0.35 oz/s)
Low (2)
Secondary air system Not in operation
Closed loop control at the oxygen sensor In operation
Misfire detection every 200 rotations < 5 time(s)
Front oxygen (A/F) sensor compensation coefficient Not in limit value
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V
Engine coolant temperature ≥ 75 °C (167 °F)
Amount of intake air < 10 g/s (0.35 oz/s)
Current continuation time of the rear oxygen sensor heater ≥ 30000 ms
Low (3)
Secondary air system Not in operation
Closed loop control at the oxygen sensor In operation
Misfire detection every 200 rotations < 5 time(s)
Front oxygen (A/F) sensor compensation coefficient Not in limit value
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V
Engine coolant temperature ≥ 75 °C (167 °F)
Amount of intake air < 10 g/s (0.35 oz/s)
Current continuation time of the rear oxygen sensor heater ≥ 30000 ms
Fuel cut Experienced

Used for normality judgment

Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Secondary air system Not in operation
Closed loop control at the oxygen sensor In operation
Misfire detection every 200 rotations < 5 time(s)
Front oxygen (A/F) sensor compensation coefficient Not in limit value
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V
Engine coolant temperature ≥ 75 °C (167 °F)

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

After starting the engine, continuously perform the diagnosis with the same engine condition.

GD(H4SO)-67
11LE_US.book 68 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value DTC
High P0138
Sensor output voltage > 1.2 V
Low P0137
Sensor output voltage < 0.03 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis:

High: 2500 ms
Low (1): 20000 ms
Low (2): 40000 ms
Low (3): Value from Map
Map
Fuel cut time (ms) 0 2000 10000
Time Needed for Diagnosis (ms) 40000 40000 60000

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy-
cles.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value DTC
High P0138
Sensor output voltage ≤ 1.2 V
Low P0137
Sensor output voltage ≥ 0.03 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis:

High: Less than 1 second
Low (1): Less than 1 second
Low (2): Less than 1 second
Low (3): Less than 1 second

GD(H4SO)-68
 Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria
GENERAL DESCRIPTION

AG:DTC P0138 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
NOTE:
For the detection standard, refer to DTC P0137. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-66, DTC P0137 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT
LOW VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>

GD(H4SO)-69
11LE_US.book 70 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

AH:DTC P0139 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT SLOW RESPONSE (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect the slow response of the oxygen sensor.
Judge as NG if either the rich to lean response diagnosis or lean to rich response diagnosis is NG, and Judge
as OK if both are OK.
[Rich → lean diagnosis response]
1. Measure the response time for oxygen sensor output changes when the A/F ratio changes to rich to lean.
If the measured response time is larger than the threshold value, it is NG. If it is smaller, it is OK. Response
time calculation is categorized in two by voltage difference.
• Response time in small voltage difference: Intermediate
• Response time in large voltage difference: Wide
2. Judge as NG when the oxygen sensor voltage is large (rich) even after deceleration fuel cut has occurred.
[Lean → rich diagnosis response]
1. Measure the response time for oxygen sensor output changes when the A/F ratio changes to lean to rich.
If the measured response time is larger than the threshold value, it is NG.
2. Judge as NG when the oxygen sensor voltage remains small when recovering from a deceleration fuel
cut.
Diagnostic method
Measure the response time of the output change of the oxygen sensor when the A/F ratio changes to rich to
lean. And Judge as NG when the measured response time is larger than the threshold value.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(E)
(3)
V (1)

(A) (F)

(2) (2)

(C) (B) (D)

EN-01696

(A) Electromotive force (B) Air fuel ratio (C) Rich

(D) Lean (E) Theoretical air fuel ratio (F) Comparative voltage

(1) Atmosphere (2) Exhaust gas (3) Electromotive force

GD(H4SO)-70
11LE_US.book 71 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Rich → lean diagnosis response
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V
A/F main feedback control condition Complete
Deceleration fuel cut time of 5000 ms or more (intermediate) Experienced
Deceleration fuel cut time of 5000 ms or more (wide)
After fuel cut ≥ 2000 ms (Intermediate)
≥ 2000 ms (Wide)
Estimated temperature of the rear oxygen sensor element ≥ 500 °C (932 °F) (Intermediate)
≥ 500 °C (932 °F) (Wide)
Number of deceleration fuel cut ≥ 1 time(s)

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Perform diagnosis once during deceleration fuel cut from a constant and high speed driving, when rear oxy-
gen sensor is warmed up sufficiently. (Pay attention to the oxygen sensor voltage for the timing of the decel-
eration.)

GD(H4SO)-71
11LE_US.book 72 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Intermediate
When the oxygen sensor output voltage changes from 0.55 V (rich) to 0.15 V (lean), calculate the minimum
response time for output change between 0.5 V and 0.2 V for the judgment criteria.

Diagnosis execution condition

(A)
(B)

Rear oxygen sensor (V)

(G)

(C)
(D)
(E)

Fuel cut on deceleration

(F)

(H)

EN-05566

(A) 0.55 V (B) 0.5 V (C) 0.2 V

(D) 0.15 V (E) 0V (F) More than 5000 ms
(G) Measure the response time. (H) Execute the malfunction judg-
ment in 2000 ms from the recov-
ery of fuel cut on deceleration.

GD(H4SO)-72
11LE_US.book 73 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

• Wide
When the oxygen sensor output voltage changes from 0.65 V (rich) to 0.05 V (lean), calculate the minimum
response time for output change between 0.6 V and 0.1 V for the judgment criteria.

Diagnosis execution condition

(A)
(B)

Rear oxygen sensor (V)

(G)

(C)
(D)
(E)

Fuel cut on deceleration

(F)

(H)

EN-05566

(A) 0.65 V (B) 0.6 V (C) 0.1 V

(D) 0.05 V (E) 0V (F) More than 5000 ms
(G) Measure the response time. (H) Execute the malfunction judg-
ment in 2000 ms from the recov-
ery of fuel cut on deceleration.

GD(H4SO)-73
11LE_US.book 74 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

• Abnormality Judgment
1) Judge as NG when the judgment value is larger than the threshold value after deceleration fuel cut.
Response time (diagnosis value) > threshold value → abnormal
NOTE:
Perform NG judgment only during fuel cut, when exhaust gas apparently changes from rich → lean. Even
without deceleration fuel cut, judge as OK if the value is below the threshold.
2) Judge as NG when the oxygen sensor voltage at a deceleration fuel cut is large.
Judge as NG when oxygen sensor voltage is large even after a long period of deceleration fuel cut has com-
pleted.
Judgment value (Intermediate)
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Shortest time change from rich (0.5 V O2 output) to lean > 491 ms
(0.2 V) when voltage reduces from 0.55 V to 0.15 V
or
Longest time over 0.55 V ≥ 2000 ms

Judgment value (Wide)

Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Shortest time change from rich (0.6 V O2 output) to lean > Value from Map
(0.1 V) when voltage reduces from 0.65 V to 0.05 V
or
Longest time over 0.65 V ≥ 2000 ms

Map
Estimated temperature of rear
oxygen sensor element when 0 450 500 1000
fuel cut starts (32) (842) (932) (1832)
°C (°F)
Longest time in rich status
2000 2000 2000 2000
after fuel cut (ms)

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 1 time(s)

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy-
cles.

GD(H4SO)-74
11LE_US.book 75 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

• Normality Judgment
1) Regardless of a deceleration fuel cut, if the response time (diagnosis value) when the oxygen sensor volt-
age has changed from rich to lean is shorter than the threshold value (judgment value), judge as a normal
condition.
Response time (diagnosis value) ≤ threshold value → normal
2) Do not judge as a normal condition.
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the following conditions are established.
Judgment value (Intermediate)
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Shortest time change from rich (0.5 V O2 output) to lean ≤ 491 ms
(0.2 V) when voltage reduces from 0.55 V to 0.15 V

Judgment value (Wide)

Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Shortest time change from rich (0.6 V O2 output) to lean ≤ 2000 ms
(0.1 V) when voltage reduces from 0.65 V to 0.05 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 1 time(s)

6. ENABLE CONDITION
Lean → rich response diagnosis
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V
A/F main feedback control condition Complete
Deceleration fuel cut time is 6000 ms or more. Experienced
After fuel cut ≥ 2000 ms
Number of deceleration fuel cut ≥ 1 time(s)

7. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Perform diagnosis once during deceleration fuel cut from a constant and high speed driving, when rear oxy-
gen sensor is warmed up sufficiently. (Pay attention to the oxygen sensor voltage for the timing of the decel-
eration.)

GD(H4SO)-75
11LE_US.book 76 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

8. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
When the oxygen sensor output voltage changes from 0.25 V (lean) to 0.55 V (rich), calculate the minimum
response time for output change between 0.3 V and 0.5 V for the judgment criteria.

Diagnosis execution condition

(H)

(A)
(B)

Rear oxygen sensor (V)

(C)
(D)
(E)

(J)

(G)
Fuel cut on deceleration

(F)

(I)

EN-05567

(A) 0.55 V (B) 0.5 V (C) 0.3 V

(D) 0.25 V (E) 0V (F) More than 5 seconds
(G) More than 120000 ms (H) Measure the response time (diag- (I) Execute the malfunction judg-
nostic value). ment in 4000 ms from the recov-
ery of fuel cut on deceleration.
(J) Judge NG when the voltage of
rear oxygen sensor is 0.25 V or
less for 120000 ms or more after
recovery of fuel cut on decelera-
tion.

GD(H4SO)-76
11LE_US.book 77 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

• Abnormality Judgment
1) Judge as NG when the judgment value is larger than the threshold value after deceleration fuel cut.
Response time (diagnosis value) > threshold value → abnormal
2) If the oxygen sensor voltage is small after recovering from a deceleration fuel cut, and remains small,
judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Shortest time change from lean (0.3 V O2 output) to rich > 4000 ms
(0.5 V) when voltage changes from 0.25 V to 0.55 V
or
Longest time under 0.25 V ≥ 120000 ms

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 1 time(s)

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy-
cles.
• Normality Judgment
1) Regardless of a deceleration fuel cut, if the response time (diagnosis value) when the oxygen sensor volt-
age has changed from rich to lean is shorter than the threshold value (judgment value), judge as a normal
condition.
Response time (diagnosis value) ≤ threshold value → normal
2) Do not judge as a normal condition.
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the following conditions are established.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Shortest time change from lean (0.3 V O2 output) to rich ≤ 4000 ms
(0.5 V) when voltage changes from 0.25 V to 0.55 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 1 time(s)

GD(H4SO)-77
11LE_US.book 78 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

AI: DTC P0140 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIVITY DETECTED (BANK1

SENSOR2)
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect the rear oxygen sensor open or short circuit. Judge as NG when the rear oxygen sensor voltage can
be determined to be abnormal considering conditions such as intake air amount, engine coolant tempera-
ture, main feedback control and deceleration fuel cut.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(E)
(3)
V (1)

(A) (F)

(2) (2)

(C) (B) (D)

EN-01696

(A) Electromotive force (B) Air fuel ratio (C) Rich

(D) Lean (E) Theoretical air fuel ratio (F) Comparative voltage

(1) Atmosphere (2) Exhaust gas (3) Electromotive force

3. ENABLE CONDITION (USED ONLY FOR MALFUNCTION JUDGMENT)

Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Closed loop control at the rear oxygen sensor In operation
Target output voltage of rear oxygen sensor ≥ 0.55 V + 0.05 V
Amount of intake air ≥ 10 g/s (0.35 oz/s)
Engine coolant temperature ≥ 75 °C (167 °F)
Misfire detection every 200 rotations < 5 time(s)
Front oxygen (A/F) sensor compensation coefficient Not in limit value
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V
Deceleration fuel cut of 5000 ms or more. Experienced

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Perform the diagnosis once after starting the engine.

GD(H4SO)-78
11LE_US.book 79 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Minimum output voltage > 0.15 V
or
Maximum output voltage < 0.55 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 200000 ms

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy-
cles.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the following conditions are established.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Diagnosis of the rear oxygen sensor volt- Incomplete
age low side
Minimum output voltage ≤ 0.15 V
Maximum output voltage ≥ 0.55 V

GD(H4SO)-79
11LE_US.book 80 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

AJ:DTC P0141 O2 SENSOR HEATER CIRCUIT (BANK1 SENSOR2)

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect the malfunction of rear oxygen sensor heater.
While observing the engine condition, judge as NG if the rear oxygen sensor impedance is great.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(1) (2) (3) (4)

(5)

EN-07655

(1) Element cover (outer) (3) Sensor element (5) Sensor housing
(2) Element cover (inner) (4) Ceramic heater

3. ENABLE CONDITIONS
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V
Elapsed time after starting the engine ≥ 1000 ms
Engine coolant temperature ≥ 75 °C (167 °F)
A/F sensor element impedance ≤ 50 Ω
A/F sensor heater control duty ≤ 75 %
Rear oxygen sensor heater control duty < 70 %

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Perform the diagnosis continuously after 1000 ms seconds or more have passed since the engine started.

GD(H4SO)-80
11LE_US.book 81 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Output terminal for heater characteristics Low
fault detection

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 4 ms × 2500 time (s)

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy-
cles.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Output terminal for heater characteristics High
fault detection

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 4 ms × 2500 time (s)

GD(H4SO)-81
11LE_US.book 82 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

AK:DTC P0171 SYSTEM TOO LEAN (BANK 1)

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect fuel system malfunction by the amount of main feedback control.
Diagnostic method
Fuel system is diagnosed by comparing the target air fuel ratio calculated by ECM with the actual air fuel ratio
measured by sensor.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
A/F main learning system In operation
Engine coolant temperature ≥ 75 °C (167 °F)
Engine load change < 0.02 g/rev (0 oz/rev)
Engine load ≥ Value of Map 1

Map 1
Engine speed (rpm) Idling 650 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500
0.208 0.201 0.185 0.183 0.193 0.206 0.206 0.225 0.245
Measured value (g (oz)/rev) na
(0.01) (0.01) (0.01) (0.01) (0.01) (0.01) (0.01) (0.01) (0.01)

3. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Perform the diagnosis continuously at idling or at a constant speed after warming up the engine.
4. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
Compare the diagnosed value (fsobd) with the threshold value, and if a condition meeting the malfunction cri-
teria below continues for 10 s × 5 time(s) or more, judge that there is a fault in the fuel system.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
fsobd = (sglmd – tglmda) + faf + flaf ≥ Value from Map 2
In this case: sglmd = measured lambda
tglmda = target lambda
faf = Main feedback compensation coefficient
(every 64 ms)
flaf = main feedback learning compensation
coefficient

Map 2
3.2 6.4 9.6 12.8 16 19.2
Amount of air (g (oz)/s) 0 (0)
(0.11) (0.23) (0.34) (0.45) (0.56) (0.68)
fsobdL1 (%) 1.4 1.4 1.332 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 10 s × 5 time(s)

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy-
cles.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
fsobd = (sglmd – tglmda) + faf + flaf < 1.2

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 10 s

GD(H4SO)-82
11LE_US.book 83 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

AL:DTC P0172 SYSTEM TOO RICH (BANK 1)

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect fuel system malfunction by the amount of main feedback control.
Diagnostic method
Fuel system is diagnosed by comparing the target air fuel ratio calculated by ECM with the actual air fuel ratio
measured by sensor.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
A/F main learning system In operation
Engine coolant temperature ≥ 75 °C (167 °F)
Engine load change ≤ 0.02 g/rev (0 oz/rev)
Learning value of EVAP conc. < 0.15
Cumulative time of canister purge after engine start ≥ 20 s
Continuous period after canister purge starting ≥ 29884 ms
Engine load ≥ Value of Map 1

Map 1
Engine speed (rpm) Idling 650 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500
0.208 0.201 0.185 0.183 0.193 0.206 0.206 0.225 0.245
Measured value (g (oz)/rev) na
(0.01) (0.01) (0.01) (0.01) (0.01) (0.01) (0.01) (0.01) (0.01)

3. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Perform the diagnosis continuously at idling or at a constant speed after warming up the engine.

GD(H4SO)-83
11LE_US.book 84 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

4. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
Compare the diagnosed value (fsobd) with the threshold value, and if a condition meeting the malfunction cri-
teria below continues for 10 s × 5 time(s) or more, judge that there is a fault in the fuel system.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
fsobd = (sglmd – tglmda) + faf + flaf < Value of Map 2
In this case: sglmd = measured lambda
tglmda = target lambda
faf = Main feedback compensation coefficient
(every 64 ms)
flaf = main feedback learning compensation
coefficient

Map 2
3.2 6.4 9.6 12.8 16 19.2
Amount of air (g (oz)/s) 0 (0)
(0.11) (0.23) (0.34) (0.45) (0.56) (0.68)
fsobdL1 (%) 0.6 0.6 0.668 0.735 0.735 0.735 0.735

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 10 s × 5 time(s)

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy-
cles.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK when the malfunction criteria below are met for 10 seconds.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
fsobd = (sglmd – tglmda) + faf + flaf ≥ 0.8

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 10 s

GD(H4SO)-84
11LE_US.book 85 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

AM:DTC P0181 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFOR-

MANCE
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect faults in the fuel temperature sensor output properties.
Diagnosis is performed in two methods (drift diagnosis and stuck diagnosis). If either is NG, judge as NG. If
both are OK, Judge as OK and clear the NG.
Drift Diagnosis
Normally fuel temperature is lower than engine coolant temperature. When the fuel temperature becomes
higher than the engine coolant temperature, the range is considered to be shifted, and judged as NG.
Stuck Diagnosis
As the engine warms up (cumulative amount of intake air after starting is large), if the fuel temperature which
should rise does not, determine as being stuck and NG.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(A)

(B)

EN-01700

(A) Resistance value (Ω) (B) Fuel temperature °C (°F)

3. ENABLE CONDITION
DRIFT DIAGNOSIS
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
None

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Always perform the diagnosis continuously.

GD(H4SO)-85
11LE_US.book 86 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Fuel level ≥ 9.6 2 (2.54 US gal, 2.11 Imp gal)
Elapsed time after starting the engine ≥ 20 s
Engine coolant temperature – Engine coolant > 10 °C (18°F)
temperature at engine start
Fuel temperature – Engine coolant temperature ≥ 10 °C (18°F)
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 120 s

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy-
cles.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Fuel level ≥ 9.6 2 (2.54 US gal, 2.11 Imp gal)
Elapsed time after starting the engine ≥ 20 s
Engine coolant temperature – Engine coolant > 10 °C (18°F)
temperature at engine start
Fuel temperature – Engine coolant temperature < 10 °C (18°F)
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V
Engine coolant temperature < 75 °C (167 °F)

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

6. ENABLE CONDITION
Stuck Diagnosis
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Elapsed time after starting the engine ≥ 20000 ms
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V

7. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Perform the diagnosis continuously 20 seconds after starting engine.

GD(H4SO)-86
11LE_US.book 87 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

8. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
Judge as NG when the following conditions are established.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Accumulated amount of intake air ≥ 551043 g (19435.29 oz)
Fuel temperature difference between < 2 °C (3.6°F)
Max. and Min.

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy-
cles.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the following conditions are established.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Fuel temperature difference between ≥ 2 °C (3.6°F)
Max. and Min.

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

GD(H4SO)-87
11LE_US.book 88 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

AN:DTC P0182 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect the open or short circuit of fuel temperature sensor.
Judge as NG if out of specification.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(A)

(B)

EN-01700

(A) Resistance value (Ω) (B) Fuel temperature °C (°F)

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
None

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Always perform the diagnosis continuously.

GD(H4SO)-88
11LE_US.book 89 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Output voltage < 0.573 V
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 2500 ms

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Output voltage ≥ 0.573 V
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

GD(H4SO)-89
11LE_US.book 90 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

AO:DTC P0183 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect the open or short circuit of fuel temperature sensor.
Judge as NG if out of specification.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(A)

(B)

EN-01700

(A) Resistance value (Ω) (B) Fuel temperature °C (°F)

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
None

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Always perform the diagnosis continuously.

GD(H4SO)-90
11LE_US.book 91 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Output voltage ≥ 4.716 V
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 2500 ms

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Output voltage < 4.716 V
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

GD(H4SO)-91
11LE_US.book 92 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

AP:DTC P0196 ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PER-

FORMANCE
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect for abnormal values in the oil temperature sensor output properties.
Judge as NG when the oil temperature does not rise even though the engine is running under a condition
where it should rise.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V
Engine speed ≥ Value from Map

Map
Engine coolant temperature –40 –30 –20 –10 0 10 20 30
°C (°F) (–40) (–22) (–4) (14) (32) (50) (68) (86)
Engine speed
500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500
rpm

Engine coolant temperature 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110

°C (°F) (104) (122) (140) (158) (176) (194) (212) (230)
Engine speed
500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500
rpm

3. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Perform the diagnosis continuously after starting the engine.

GD(H4SO)-92
11LE_US.book 93 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

4. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
Judge as NG when the following conditions are established.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Engine oil temperature < 15 °C (59 °F)
After engine start oil temperature sensor ≥ Judgment value for after engine start oil tem-
characteristic diagnosis timer. perature sensor characteristic diagnosis timer

After engine start oil temperature sensor characteristic diagnosis timer (timer for diagnosis).
a. Timer stop at fuel cut
b. During the driving conditions except a) above, timer counts up as follows.
64 ms + TOILCNT ms (at 64 ms)
Where, TOILCNT is determined as follows,
TOILCNT = 0 at idle switch ON
For TOILCNT at Idle switch off, refer to the following table.
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
0 (0) 8 (5) 16 (9.9) 24 (14.9) 32 (19.9) 40 (24.9) 48 (29.8) 56 (34.8)
–30 (–22) 64 ms 73.2 ms 83.9 ms 96.3 ms 113.2 ms 133.9 ms 160.2 ms 194.6 ms
–20 (–4) 64 ms 73.3 ms 84 ms 96.6 ms 113.7 ms 135 ms 162 ms 197.4 ms
Temperature
–10 (14) 64 ms 73.4 ms 84.2 ms 96.9 ms 114.5 ms 136.4 ms 164.4 ms 201.5 ms
°C (°F)
0 (32) 64 ms 73.5 ms 84.5 ms 97.4 ms 115.6 ms 138.5 ms 168 ms 207.6 ms
10 (50) 102.2 ms 114.8 ms 129.4 ms 146.7 ms 171.7 ms 203.4 ms 245.1 ms 302.1 ms

After engine start oil temperature characteristic diagnosis timer judgment value (t).
t = 1882940 ms – 43302 ms × Ti (t ≥ 2400000)
Ti = The lowest coolant temperature after starting the engine.
Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second
Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy-
cles.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the following conditions are established.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Engine oil temperature ≥ 15 °C (59 °F)

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

GD(H4SO)-93
11LE_US.book 94 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

AQ:DTC P0197 ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR LOW

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect the open or short circuit of the oil temperature sensor.
Judge as NG when outside of the judgment value.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
None

3. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Always perform the diagnosis continuously.
4. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Output voltage < 0.166 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 500 ms

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Output voltage ≥ 0.166 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

GD(H4SO)-94
11LE_US.book 95 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

AR:DTC P0198 ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR HIGH

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect the open or short circuit of the oil temperature sensor.
Judge as NG when outside of the judgment value.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
None

3. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Always perform the diagnosis continuously.
4. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Output voltage ≥ 4.716 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 500 ms

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Output voltage < 4.716 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

GD(H4SO)-95
11LE_US.book 96 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

AS:DTC P0222 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “B” CIRCUIT

LOW
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect the open or short circuit of throttle position sensor 2.
Judge as NG if out of specification.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(3)
(4)

(1)

(2)

EN-01859

(1) Throttle position sensor 1 signal (3) Throttle position sensor (4) Engine control module (ECM)
(2) Throttle position sensor 2 signal

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Ignition switch ON
Battery voltage ≥6V

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Always perform the diagnosis continuously.

GD(H4SO)-96
11LE_US.book 97 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Sensor 2 input voltage ≤ 0.926 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 24 ms

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Sensor 2 input voltage > 0.926 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 24 ms

GD(H4SO)-97
11LE_US.book 98 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

AT:DTC P0223 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “B” CIRCUIT

HIGH
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect the open or short circuit of throttle position sensor 2.
Judge as NG if out of specification.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(3)
(4)

(1)

(2)

EN-01859

(1) Throttle position sensor 1 signal (3) Throttle position sensor (4) Engine control module (ECM)
(2) Throttle position sensor 2 signal

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Ignition switch ON
Battery voltage ≥6V

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Always perform the diagnosis continuously.

GD(H4SO)-98
11LE_US.book 99 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Sensor 2 input voltage ≥ 4.858 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 24 ms

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Sensor 2 input voltage < 4.858 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 24 ms

GD(H4SO)-99
11LE_US.book 100 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

AU:DTC P0301 CYLINDER 1 MISFIRE DETECTED

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect the presence of misfire occurrence. (Revolution fluctuation method)
Monitoring Misfire which influences exhaust deterioration (1.5 times of FTP) and catalyst damage is made
obligatory by the law. Misfire affecting these two has two patterns below. :
• Intermittent misfire (The same cylinder misfires in random, or different cylinders misfire in random.) : FTP
1.5 times misfire
• Every time misfire (The same cylinder misfires every time.) : FTP 1.5 times misfire, Catalyst damage mis-
fire
The following detecting methods are adopted for these detection.
1) Intermittent misfire: FTP 1.5 times misfire
• 180° Interval Difference Method (MT: 1,800 rpm or less; AT: None)
• 360° Interval Difference Method (whole range)
• 720° Interval Difference Method (3,000 rpm or more)
2) Misfire every time: FTP 1.5 times misfire, Catalyst damage misfire
• 360° Interval Difference Method
2. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
All secondary parameters enable conditions ≥ 1024 ms
Intake manifold pressure change at 180° CA < Value of Map 1
Throttle position variation for 16 ms < 21 °
Fuel shut-off function Not in operation
Fuel level ≥ 9.6 2 (2.54 US gal, 2.11 Imp gal)
Vehicle dynamic control or AT torque control Not in operation
Evaporative system leak check Not in operation
Engine speed 500 rpm — 6300 rpm
Intake manifold pressure ≥ Value from Map 2
Battery voltage ≥8V
Fuel parameter determination Not extremely low volatility
Elapsed time after starting the engine ≥ 0 ms
Engine speed variation for 32 ms < 1000 rpm

Map 1
• AT model
rpm 700 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000 5500 6000 6300
kPa 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3
(mmHg, (100, (100, (100, (100, (100, (100, (100, (100, (100, (100, (100, (100, (100,
inHg) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9)

• MT model
rpm 650 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000 5500 6000 6300
kPa 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3
(mmHg, (100, (100, (100, (100, (100, (100, (100, (100, (100, (100, (100, (100, (100,
inHg) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9)

GD(H4SO)-100
11LE_US.book 101 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Map 2
• AT model
rpm 700 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000 5500 6000 6300
kPa 27.6 25.6 22.9 23.2 23.9 23.6 26.8 29.7 32.3 34.1 36 37.9 40
(mmHg, (207.0, (192.0, (172.0, (174.0, (179.0, (177.0, (201.0, (223.0, (242.0, (256.0, (270.0, (284.0, (300.0,
inHg) 8.1) 7.6) 6.8) 6.9) 7) 7) 7.9) 8.8) 9.5) 10.1) 10.6) 11.2) 11.8)

• MT model
Vehicle speed < 64 km/h (39.8 MPH)
rpm 650 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000 5500 6000 6300
kPa 26.4 24.8 21.1 20.1 20.3 20.9 26.2 30.2 34.1 34.7 34.7 34.7 34.7
(mmHg, (198, (186, (158, (151, (152, (157, (196.6666667, (226.3333333, (256, (260, (260, (260, (260,
inHg) 7.8) 7.3) 6.2) 5.9) 6) 6.2) 7.7) 8.9) 10.1) 10.2) 10.2) 10.2) 10.2)

Vehicle speed ≥ 68 km/h (42.3 MPH)

rpm 650 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000 5500 6000 6300
kPa 38.7 38.7 41.3 42 40 43.1 40 37.3 40.7 37.3 36.9 40.1 43.2
(mmHg, (290, (290, (310, (315, (300, (323, (300, (280, (305, (280, (277, (301, (324,
inHg) 11.4) 11.4) 12.2) 12.4) 11.8) 12.7) 11.8) 11) 12) 11) 10.9) 11.9) 12.8)

3. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

• If conditions are met, it is possible to detect the misfires from idling to high engine speed. However, to
avoid excessive load or harm to the engine, perform diagnosis at idle.
• Perform the diagnosis continuously.

GD(H4SO)-101
11LE_US.book 102 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

4. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
When a misfire occurs, the engine speed will decrease and the crankshaft position speed will change. Cal-
culate the interval difference value (diagnostic value) from crankshaft position speed by the following formu-
la, and judge whether a misfire is occurring or not comparing the calculated result with judgment value. Count
the number of misfires, if the misfire ratio is higher during 1000 revs. or 200 revs., judge corresponding cyl-
inders as NG.
Diagnostic value calculation Misfire detection every single ignition NG judgment (Misfire occurrence judg-
(Calculate from angle speed) → (Compare diagnostic value with judgment value) → ment required by the law) (Compare
number of misfire with judgment)
• 180° Interval Difference Method • FTP 1.5 times misfire NG judgment
• 360° Interval Difference Method • Catalyst damage misfire NG judgment
• 720° Interval Difference Method

As shown in the following figure, pick a cylinder as the standard and name it omg 0. And the former crank-
shaft position speed is named omg 1, the second former crankshaft position speed is named omg 2, the third
is named omg 3, etc.

(A) #3 #2 #4 #1 #3 #2 #4 #1 #3 #2

(B) omg7 omg6 omg5 omg4 omg3 omg2 omg1 omg0

EN-01774

(A) Ignition order (B) Crankshaft position speed

GD(H4SO)-102
11LE_US.book 103 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

180° Interval Difference Method

Diagnostic value domg 180 = (omg 1 – omg 0) – (omg 5 – omg 1)/4
Judge as a misfire in the following cases.
• domg 180 > judgment value of positive side
• domg 180 ≤ judgment value of negative side
(Judgment value before 180° CA)

domg180

Threshold valve (positive number)

domg180

Threshold valve (negative number)

Judged as misfire.

EN-02877

360° Interval Difference Method

Diagnostic value domg 360 = (omg 1 – omg 0) – (omg 3 – omg 2)
Misfire judgment domg 360 > Judgment value → Judge as misfire

domg360
Threshold valve

domg360

Judged as misfire.

EN-03273

GD(H4SO)-103
11LE_US.book 104 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

720° Interval Difference Method

Diagnostic value domg 720 = (omg 1 – omg 0) – (omg 5 – omg 4)
Misfire judgment domg 720 > Judgment value → Judge as misfire

domg720

Threshold valve

domg720

Judged as misfire.

EN-03274

• FTP 1.5 times misfire (Misfire occurrence level which influences exhaust gas)
• Abnormality Judgment
Judgment Value (Judge that malfunction occurs when the misfire ratio is high in 1000 engine revs.)
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
FTP emission judgment value ≥ 18 × 100/2000% in 1000 revs.
(PZEV AT model)
≥ 20 × 100/2000% in 1000 revs.
(PZEV MT model)
≥ 30 × 100/2000% in 1000 revs.
(except for PZEV model)

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 1000 engine revs.

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy-
cles.
• Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
FTP emission judgment value < 18 × 100/2000% in 1000 revs.
(PZEV AT model)
< 20 × 100/2000% in 1000 revs.
(PZEV MT model)
< 30 × 100/2000% in 1000 revs.
(except for PZEV model)

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 1000 engine revs.

GD(H4SO)-104
11LE_US.book 105 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

• Catalyst damage misfire (Misfire occurrence level damaging catalyst)

• Abnormality Judgment
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Catalyst damage misfire judgment value ≥ Value from Map 3

Map 3
Intake air (g(oz)/rev)
0.16 (0.01) 0.28 (0.01) 0.4 (0.01) 0.52 (0.02) 0.64 (0.02) 0.76 (0.03) 0.92 (0.03) 1.1 (0.04)
700 100 100 100 100 90 80 64 48
1000 100 100 100 100 90 80 63 44
1500 100 100 90 80 73 67 54 40
2000 80 80 80 80 68 57 51 44
2500 80 80 73 67 62 57 51 44
Engine 3000 67 67 62 57 51 44 44 44
speed 3500 67 67 56 44 40 36 34 31
(rpm) 4000 57 57 44 31 24 20 20 20
4500 44 44 33 31 20 20 20 20
5000 44 44 38 31 20 20 20 20
5500 36 36 31 27 20 20 20 20
6000 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
6300 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 200 engine revs.

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.
• Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Catalyst damage misfire judgment value < Value of Map 3

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 200 engine revs.

GD(H4SO)-105
 Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria
GENERAL DESCRIPTION

AV:DTC P0302 CYLINDER 2 MISFIRE DETECTED

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
NOTE:
For the detection standard, refer to DTC P0301. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-100, DTC P0301 CYLINDER 1 MIS-
FIRE DETECTED, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
AW:DTC P0303 CYLINDER 3 MISFIRE DETECTED
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
NOTE:
For the detection standard, refer to DTC P0301. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-100, DTC P0301 CYLINDER 1 MIS-
FIRE DETECTED, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
AX:DTC P0304 CYLINDER 4 MISFIRE DETECTED
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
NOTE:
For the detection standard, refer to DTC P0301. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-100, DTC P0301 CYLINDER 1 MIS-
FIRE DETECTED, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>

GD(H4SO)-106
11LE_US.book 107 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

AY:DTC P0327 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR)

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect the open or short circuit of knock sensor.
Judge as NG if out of specification.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(1) (4) (5)

(2)
(A)

(3)

EN-01707

(A) To knock sensor harness

(1) Case (3) Piezoelectric element (5) Resistance

(2) Weight (4) Nut

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
None

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Always perform the diagnosis continuously.

GD(H4SO)-107
11LE_US.book 108 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Output voltage < 0.243 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 1000 ms

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Output voltage ≥ 0.243 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

GD(H4SO)-108
11LE_US.book 109 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

AZ:DTC P0328 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR)

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect the open or short circuit of knock sensor.
Judge as NG if out of specification.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(1) (4) (5)

(2)
(A)

(3)

EN-01707

(A) To knock sensor harness

(1) Case (3) Piezoelectric element (5) Resistance

(2) Weight (4) Nut

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
None

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Always perform the diagnosis continuously.

GD(H4SO)-109
11LE_US.book 110 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Output voltage ≥ 4.709 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 1000 ms

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Output voltage < 4.709 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

GD(H4SO)-110
11LE_US.book 111 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

BA:DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect the open or short circuit of the crankshaft position sensor.
Judge as NG when the crank signal is not input even though the starter was rotated.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(A)

#1BTDC10 CA #3BTDC10 CA #2BTDC10 CA #4BTDC10 CA #1BTDC10 CA

(B)

10 CA 30 CA 30 CA

EN-05538

(A) Cam signal (B) Crankshaft signal

(1)

(3)

(2)
EN-05539

(1) Crankshaft position sensor (2) Crank sprocket (3) Crankshaft half-turn

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
None

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Always perform the diagnosis continuously.

GD(H4SO)-111
11LE_US.book 112 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Starter switch ON
Crankshaft position sensor signal Not detected
Battery voltage ≥8V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 3000 ms

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Crankshaft position sensor signal Input exists
Battery voltage ≥8V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

GD(H4SO)-112
11LE_US.book 113 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

BB:DTC P0336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT RANGE/PER-

FORMANCE
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect for faults in crankshaft position sensor output properties.
Judge as NG when there is a problem in the number of crankshaft signals for every revolution of crankshaft.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(A)

#1BTDC10 CA #3BTDC10 CA #2BTDC10 CA #4BTDC10 CA #1BTDC10 CA

(B)

10 CA 30 CA 30 CA

EN-05538

(A) Cam signal (B) Crankshaft signal

(1)

(3)

(2)
EN-05539

(1) Crankshaft position sensor (2) Crank sprocket (3) Crankshaft half-turn

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Battery voltage ≥8V
Engine speed < 4000 rpm

GD(H4SO)-113
11LE_US.book 114 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Perform the diagnosis continuously under 3000 rpm engine speed.
5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
Judge as NG when the following conditions are established.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Cylinder number identification Completed
Amount of crank sensor signal during 1 rev Not = 30
of crankshaft.

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 10 engine revs.

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy-
cles.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Cylinder number identification Completed
Amount of crank sensor signal during 1 rev = 30
of crankshaft.

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

GD(H4SO)-114
11LE_US.book 115 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

BC:DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT (BANK 1 OR SIN-

GLE SENSOR)
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect the open or short circuit of the camshaft position sensor.
Judge as NG when the number of camshaft signals remains abnormal.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

Number of camshaft signal = 2 is normal at two engine revolution.

(A)

#1BTDC10 CA #3BTDC10 CA #2BTDC10 CA #4BTDC10 CA #1BTDC10 CA

(B)

10 CA 30 CA 30 CA

EN-05541

(A) Camshaft signal (B) Crankshaft signal

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
None

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Always perform the diagnosis continuously.

GD(H4SO)-115
11LE_US.book 116 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Battery voltage ≥8V
Amount of camshaft sensor signal during Not = 2
2 revs of crankshaft.

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Two engine revs. × 4 time(s)

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.
Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Voltage ≥8V
Amount of camshaft sensor signal during =2
2 revs.

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Two engine revs.

GD(H4SO)-116
11LE_US.book 117 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

BD:DTC P0341 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFOR-

MANCE (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR)
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect the malfunction of camshaft position sensor output property.
Judge as NG when the camshaft line signal input timing is shifted from the crankshaft signal because of tim-
ing belt tooth chip etc.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

OK NG OK NG

(A)

#1BTDC10 CA #3BTDC10 CA #2BTDC10 CA #4BTDC10 CA #1BTDC10 CA

(B)

10 CA 30 CA 30 CA

EN-05542

(A) Cam signal (B) Crankshaft signal

(1) (4)
(3)

(1)

(5)

(2)

EN-01782

(1) Boss (3) Air gap (5) Camshaft one revolution (crank-
shaft two revolutions)
(2) Cam sprocket (4) Camshaft position sensor

GD(H4SO)-117
11LE_US.book 118 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Cylinder number identification Completed
Battery voltage ≥8V
Engine speed 550 rpm — 1000 rpm
Engine operation Idling
Misfire Not detected
Engine speed variation for 4 ms ≤ 12799.8 rpm

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Always perform the diagnosis continuously at idle speed.
5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Position of camshaft position sensor signal Not between BTDC 10°CA
and BTDC 80°CA

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 10 engine revs.

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy-
cles.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Position of camshaft position sensor signal Between BTDC10°CA and
BTDC80°CA

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Two engine revolutions

GD(H4SO)-118
11LE_US.book 119 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

BE:DTC P0400 EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION FLOW

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect EGR system malfunction.
Intake manifold pressure (negative pressure) is constant because the throttle valve is fully closed during de-
celeration fuel cut. At this time, when the EGR valve is opened/closed, the intake manifold pressure will
change. EGR System OK/NG is judged by the range of this change.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(7)

(1)

(6)

(5)
(2)

(4)
(3)

EN-02192

(1) ECM (4) CPU (6) Main relay

(2) Detecting circuit (5) EGR valve (7) Battery power supply
(3) Switching circuit

GD(H4SO)-119
11LE_US.book 120 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Elapsed time after starting the engine ≥ 40 s
Engine coolant temperature ≥ 75 °C(167 °F)
Engine speed 1200 rpm — 2950 rpm
Intake manifold pressure (absolute pressure) < 44 kPa (330 mmHg, 13 inHg)
Ambient air temperature ≥ 5 °C(41 °F)
Throttle position < 0.25 °
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V
Atmospheric pressure ≥ 75 kPa (563 mmHg, 22.2 inHg)
Vehicle speed ≥53 km/h (32.9 MPH)
Fuel shut-off function In operation
Neutral switch OFF
After neutral switch ON/OFF change ≥ Value from Map
No load change (A/C, power steering, lighting, ≥ 5000 ms
rear defogger, heater fan and radiator fan)

Map
Engine coolant temperature –40 –30 –20 –10 0 10 20 30
°C (°F) (–40) (–22) (–4) (14) (32) (50) (68) (86)
After neutral switch change
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
msec

Engine coolant temperature 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110

°C (°F) (104) (122) (140) (158) (176) (194) (212) (230)
After neutral switch change
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
msec

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

During deceleration fuel cut from 53 km/h (approx. 33 MPH) or more, perform diagnosis once.
Be careful of vehicle speed and engine speed. (Diagnosis will not be completed if the vehicle speed and en-
gine speed conditions become out of specification due to deceleration.)
5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
Measure the pressure values when the enable conditions are established, and perform diagnosis by calcu-
lating those results.
1. Label the intake manifold pressure value as PMOF1, which is observed when enable conditions are es-
tablished, and set the EGR target step to 50 steps (nearly full open).
2. Name the intake manifold pressure value as PMON one second after the target EGR step is set to 50
(when the enabled conditions were established). Then set the target EGR step to 0.
3. Name the intake manifold pressure value as PMOF2 one second after the target EGR step is set to 0 (two
seconds after the enabled conditions were established).
• Abnormality Judgment
Judge as NG when the following conditions are established.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
PMON – (PMOF1 + PMOF2)/2 < 2.5 kPa (18.63 mmHg, 0.7 inHg)

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 1 time

GD(H4SO)-120
11LE_US.book 121 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy-
cles.
Start dignosis

(A) (B) (C)

ON
Deceleration fuel cut
OFF

Diagnosis enable condition

(Open)
(D)
EGR target step
(Close)

(Open)

EGR actual step

(Close)

PMON
Intake manifold pressure
(During normal condition) PMOF2
PMOF1

DIagnostic mode timer

EN-05568

(A) 3000 ms (B) 1000 ms (C) 1000 ms

(D) 45 step(s)

• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the following conditions are established.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
PMON – (PMOF1 + PMOF2)/2 ≥ 2.5 kPa (18.63 mmHg, 0.7 inHg)

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 1 time

GD(H4SO)-121
11LE_US.book 122 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

BF:DTC P0420 CATALYST SYSTEM EFFICIENCY BELOW THRESHOLD (BANK 1)

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect the deterioration of the catalyst function.
Though the front oxygen sensor output would change slowly with a new catalyst, the sensor output with a de-
teriorated catalyst becomes high and the inversion time is shortened.
For this reason, the catalyst diagnosis is carried out by monitoring the front oxygen sensor output and com-
paring it with the front oxygen (A/F) sensor output.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(1) (2)

(A) (3)

(B) (3)

(C) (D)

EN-01713

(A) Normal (B) Deterioration (C) Output waveform from the front
oxygen (A/F) sensor
(D) Output waveform from the front
oxygen sensor

(1) Front oxygen (A/F) sensor (2) Front oxygen sensor (3) Catalytic converter

GD(H4SO)-122
11LE_US.book 123 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V
Atmospheric pressure ≥ 75 kPa (563 mmHg, 22.2 inHg)
Engine coolant temperature ≥ 75 °C (167 °F) (PZEV model)
≥ 70 °C (158 °F) (AT model except for PZEV)
≥ 75 °C (167 °F) (MT model except for PZEV)
Estimated catalyst temperature ≥ 580 °C (1076 °F) (AT model)
≥ 600 °C (1112 °F) (MT model)
Misfire detection every 200 rotations < 5 time(s)
Learning value of evaporation gas density < 0.2
Sub feedback In operation
Evaporative system diagnosis Not in operation
Time of difference (< 0.10) between actual ≥ 1000 ms
lambda and target lambda
Vehicle speed > 75 km/h (46.6 MPH)
Amount of intake air ≥ 5 g/s (0.18 oz/s) (PZEV AT model)
≥ 7 g/s (0.25 oz/s) (except for PZEV AT model)
and
< 40 g/s (1.41 oz/s)
Engine load change every 0.5 engine revs. < 0.02 g/rev (0 oz/rev)
Rear oxygen output change from 660 mV or Experienced after fuel cut
less to 660 mV or more
Elapsed time after starting the engine ≥ 225 s (PZEV model)
≥ 218 s (except for PZEV model)
Purge execution calculated time ≥0s

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Perform the diagnosis only once at a constant 75 km/h (46.6 MPH) or higher.

GD(H4SO)-123
11LE_US.book 124 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
After the enable conditions have been established, calculate the front oxygen (A/F) sensor lambda value de-
viation sum value (Σ |(sglmdn – sglmdn–1 )|), and rear oxygen sensor output voltage deviation sum value (Σ
|(ro2sadn – ro2sadn–1)|) in every 32 ms × 4 times. If the front oxygen (A/F) sensor lambda value deviation
sum value (Σ |(sglmdn – sglmdn–1 )|) is the predetermined value or more, calculate the judgment value.
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is within the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Σ |(ro2sadn – ro2sadn–1)| / Σ |(sglmdn – sglmdn–1)| > 11 (PZEV model)
> 19.5 (AT model except for PZEV)
> 16 (MT model except for PZEV)

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 30 — 55 seconds

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy-
cles.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is within
the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Σ |(ro2sadn – ro2sadn–1)| / Σ |(sglmdn – sglmdn–1)| ≤ 11 (PZEV model)
≤ 19.5 (AT model except for PZEV)
≤ 16 (MT model except for PZEV)

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 30 — 55 seconds

GD(H4SO)-124
11LE_US.book 125 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

BG:DTC P0442 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED

(SMALL LEAK)
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Check if there is a leakage in fuel system or not, and perform the function diagnosis of valve.

(4)
(1) (3)
(2)

(5)
(14)

(13)
(15)
(8)
(7)
(9)

(11) (10)
(12) (6)

EN-07995

(1) Fuel gauge (6) Canister (11) Fuel level sensor

(2) Intake manifold (7) Drain valve (12) Fuel tank
(3) Throttle body (8) Drain filter (13) Fuel cut valve
(4) Purge control solenoid valve (9) Shut-off valve (14) Fuel tank pressure sensor
(5) Engine control module (ECM) (10) Fuel temperature sensor (15) Vent valve

In this system diagnosis, check for leakage and valve function is conducted by changing the fuel tank pres-
sure and monitoring the pressure change using the fuel tank pressure sensor. When in 0.04 inch diagnosis,
perform in the order of mode Z → mode A → mode B → mode C and mode D; When in 0.02 inch diagnosis,
perform in the order of mode A → mode B → mode C → mode D and mode E.

GD(H4SO)-125
11LE_US.book 126 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

0.04-inch Diagnosis

Mode OK Mode OK Mode OK Mode OK Mode OK

Z A B C D

NG
Early OK

Large leakage judgement END

Cancel

NG
Mode
NG
Z
Extend OK

EN-02872

Mode Mode Description Diagnosis Period

Mode Z 5000 ms + 3000 ms —
Perform purge control solenoid valve opening failure diagnosis from
(Purge control solenoid valve 5000 ms + 3000 ms +
the size of tank pressure variation from diagnosis start.
opening failure diagnosis) 13000 ms
Mode A
Calculate the tank pressure change amount (P1). 10000 ms
(Estimated evaporation amount)
Mode B Decrease the pressure in the tank to the target value by introducing
0 — 10000 ms + 25000
(Sealed negative pressure, the intake manifold pressure to the fuel tank.
ms
large leakage judgment) If the tank pressure cannot be reduced, it is diagnosed as large leak.
Mode C Wait until the tank pressure returns to the target (start level of P2
(Pressure increase check, calculation). If the tank pressure does not become the value, make 0 — 14013 ms
advanced OK judgment) advanced OK judgment.
Mode D
Calculate the tank pressure variation (P2), and obtain the diagnostic
(Negative pressure variation
value using P1 found in Mode A. 0 ms + 10000 ms
measurement, evaporation
Perform the evaporation diagnosis using the diagnostic value.
leakage diagnosis)

Mode Table for Evaporative Emission Control System Diagnosis

Mode Behavior of tank internal pressure under normal conditions Diagnostic item DTC
Roughly the same as barometric pressure (Same as 0 kPa Purge control solenoid valve is judged
Mode Z P0457
(0 mmHg, 0 inHg)) to be open.
Pressure is in proportion to amount of evaporative emis-
Mode A — None
sion.
Negative pressure is formed due to intake manifold nega-
Mode B Large leak P0457
tive pressure
Mode C Reaches target pressure — None
EVAP system large leak determina-
Mode D Pressure change is small. P0442
tion. [1.0 mm (0.04 in)]

GD(H4SO)-126
11LE_US.book 127 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

0.02-inch Diagnosis

Mode A OK Mode B OK Mode C OK Mode D OK Mode E

Cancel

Early OK 2

END
Cancel

Early OK 1

Cancel

Cancel

Cancel

EN-02871

Mode Mode Description Diagnosis Period

Mode A When the pressure in the tank is not near 0 mmHg, wait until it
0 — Value of Map 1
(0 point compensation) returns to 0 point (near 0 mmHg).
Mode B Decrease the pressure in the tank to the target value by introducing
0 — Value of Map 2
(Negative pressure introduced) the intake manifold pressure to the fuel tank.
Mode C Wait until the tank pressure returns to the target (start level of P2
Value from Map 3
(Negative pressure maintained) calculation).
Mode D Calculate the time it takes for the tank pressure to change to the
0 — 0 ms + Value from
(Negative pressure change Mode E shifting pressure. If the tank pressure does not change to
Map 4
calculated) the Mode E shifting pressure, make advanced OK judgment.
Mode E Calculate the amount of evaporation (P1). 0 — 0 ms + Value from
(Evaporation generated Map 4 + Value from
amount calculation) Map 5

Map 1
Fuel level (2, US gal, Imp gal) 10 20, 5.28, 4.4 30, 7.93, 6.6 40, 10.57, 8.8 50, 13.21, 11 60, 15.85, 13.2
Time Needed for Diagnosis (ms) 6400 6530 6660 7020 7380 7380

Map 2
Fuel level (2, US gal, Imp gal) 10.5 27, 7.13, 5.94 43, 11.36, 9.46 59.5, 15.72, 13.09
Time Needed for Diagnosis (ms) 20280 20621 21816 21816

Map 3
Fuel level (2, US gal, Imp gal) 10.5 27, 7.13, 5.94 43, 11.36, 9.46 59.5, 15.72, 13.09
Time Needed for Diagnosis (ms) 21208 19288 9742 8057

GD(H4SO)-127
11LE_US.book 128 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Map4
Fuel level (2, US gal, Imp gal) 10 20, 5.28, 4.4 30, 7.93, 6.6 40, 10.57, 8.8 50, 13.21, 11 60, 15.85, 13.2
Time Needed for Diagnosis (ms) 200000 200000 200000 200000 200000 200000

Map 5
Fuel level (2, US gal, Imp gal) 10 20, 5.28, 4.4 30, 7.93, 6.6 40, 10.57, 8.8 50, 13.21, 11 60, 15.85, 13.2
Time Needed for Diagnosis (ms) 80000 70000 60000 60000 60000 60000

2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Drain valve controls the ambient air to be introduced to the canister.

EN-02293

GD(H4SO)-128
11LE_US.book 129 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

3. ENABLE CONDITION
0.04-inch Diagnosis
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V
Atmospheric pressure ≥ 75 kPa (563 mmHg, 22.2 inHg)
Total time of canister purge operation ≥ 120000 ms
Learning value of evaporation gas density < 0.08
Engine speed 1050 rpm — 4000 rpm
Fuel tank pressure ≥ –4 kPa (–30 mmHg, –1.2 inHg)
Intake manifold relative vacuum (relative pressure) ≥ – 13.3 kPa (– 100 mmHg, – 3.9 inHg)
Continuous time of the status where fuel level is 10.5 2 ≥ 37000 ms
(2.77 US gal, 2.31 Imp gal) — 59.5 2 (15.72 US gal,
13.09 Imp gal)
Closed air/fuel ratio control In operation
Fuel temperature –10 °C (14 °F) — 45 °C (113 °F)
Intake air temperature ≥ –10 °C (14 °F)
Pressure change every 1 second < 1.7 mmHg (Mode A)
< 1.7 mmHg (Mode D)
Minimum pressure change value every one second – < 1.7 mmHg (Mode A)
Maximum pressure change value every one second < 1.7 mmHg (Mode D)
Fuel level change every 128 milliseconds < Value of Map 6
Air fuel ratio 0.76 — 1.25
Elapsed time after starting the engine ≥ 855 s
or
Elapsed time after starting the engine ≥ 335 s
and
Vehicle speed 65 km/h (40.4 MPH) or more
or
Elapsed time after starting the engine ≥ 335 s
and
Continue for 40000 ms or more at a vehicle speed of 50 km/h
(31.1 MPH) or more
or
Elapsed time after starting the engine ≥ 335 s
and
Continue for 83000 ms or more at a vehicle speed of 24 km/h
(14.9 MPH) or more

Map 6
10, 20, 25, 30, 43, 45, 50, 60,
Fuel level (2, US gal, Imp gal) 2.64, 5.28, 6.61, 7.93, 11.36, 11.89, 13.21, 15.85,
2.2 4.4 5.5 6.6 9.46 9.9 11 13.2
4, 5, 6.5, 4, 5, 5, 6, 8,
Change (2, US gal, Imp gal) 1.06, 1.32, 1.72, 1.06, 1.32, 1.32, 1.59, 2.11,
0.88 1.1 1.43 0.88 1.1 1.1 1.32 1.76

GD(H4SO)-129
11LE_US.book 130 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

0.02-inch Diagnosis
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
At starting a diagnosis
Evap. diagnosis Incomplete
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V
Atmospheric pressure ≥ 75 kPa (563 mmHg, 22.2 inHg)
Time since last incomplete 0.02-inch leakage diagnosis
When cancelling in mode A > 120000 ms
When cancelling in other than mode A > 230000 ms
Total time of canister purge operation ≥ 120000 ms
Elapsed time after starting the engine ≥ 120 s
Fuel temperature –10 °C (14 °F) — 55 °C (131 °F)
Continuous time of the status where fuel level is 10.5 2 ≥ 37000 ms
(2.77 US gal, 2.31 Imp gal) — 59.5 2 (15.72 US gal,
13.09 Imp gal)
Intake manifold relative vacuum (relative pressure) ≥ – 8 kPa (– 60 mmHg, – 2.4 inHg)
Fuel tank pressure –0.7 kPa (–5 mmHg, –0.2 inHg) — 0.4 kPa (2.9 mmHg, 0.1 inHg)
Closed air/fuel ratio control In operation
Engine speed 1050 rpm — 4000 rpm
Vehicle speed Continue the status of 50 km/h (31.1 MPH) — 510 km/h (316.9 MPH)
for 125000 ms or more.
or
≥ 100 km/h (62.1 MPH)
or
Continue for 40000 ms or more at a vehicle speed of 90 km/h
(55.9 MPH) or more
or
Continue for 90000 ms or more at a vehicle speed of 80 km/h
(49.7 MPH) or more
During diagnosis
Change of fuel level ≤ Value of Map 7
Pressure change every 1 second < 0.1 kPa (0.44 mmHg, 0 inHg)
Minimum pressure change value every one second – < 0.1 kPa (0.51 mmHg, 0 inHg) (Mode D)
Maximum pressure change value every one second
| Tank pressure change every 1 second | ≤ 0.1 kPa (0.75 mmHg, 0 inHg)
Barometric pressure change –0.5 kPa (–3.6 mmHg, –0.1 inHg) — 0.3 kPa (2.4 mmHg, 0.1 inHg)
(Mode D)
–0.3 kPa (–2.4 mmHg, –0.1 inHg) — 0.3 kPa (2.4 mmHg, 0.1 inHg)
(Mode E)

Map 7
10, 20, 25, 30, 43, 45, 50, 60,
Fuel level (2, US gal, Imp gal) 2.64, 5.28, 6.61, 7.93, 11.36, 11.89, 13.21, 15.85,
2.2 4.4 5.5 6.6 9.46 9.9 11 13.2
4, 5, 6.5, 4, 5, 5, 6, 8,
Change (2, US gal, Imp gal) 1.06, 1.32, 1.72, 1.06, 1.32, 1.32, 1.59, 2.11,
0.88 1.1 1.43 0.88 1.1 1.1 1.32 1.76

GD(H4SO)-130
11LE_US.book 131 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

0.04-inch Diagnosis
• Perform the diagnosis only once in 335 seconds or more after starting the engine, at a constant speed of
24 km/h (15 MPH) or more for 83 seconds or more.
• Pay attention to the fuel temperature and fuel level.
0.02-inch Diagnosis
• Perform the diagnosis after 125 seconds or more have elapsed at a constant engine speed of 50 km/h (31
MPH) or higher to judge as NG or OK.
• If judgment cannot be made, repeat the diagnosis.
• Pay attention to the fuel level.
5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
Purge control solenoid valve stuck open fault diagnosis
DTC
P0457 Evaporative Emission Control System Leak Detected (Fuel Cap Loose/Off)
Purpose of Mode Z
When performing the leakage diagnosis of EVAP system, the purge control solenoid valve must operate nor-
mally. Therefore, mode Z is used to diagnose the purge control solenoid valve stuck open condition. Note
that if a purge control solenoid valve stuck open fault is detected, the EVAP system leakage diagnosis is can-
celled.
Diagnostic method
Purge control solenoid valve functional diagnosis is performed by monitoring the tank pressure in mode Z.
• Abnormality Judgment
If OK judgment cannot be made, extend Mode Z, and Judge as NG when the following conditions are estab-
lished after predetermined amount of time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value DTC
evptez – evptezha > 0.9 kPa (6.5 mmHg, 0.3 inHg) P0457
evptezini ≤ 0.4 kPa (2.9 mmHg, 0.1 inHg)
Time with no fuel sloshing equal to or ≥ 40000 ms
over the value of Map 6

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 5000 ms + 3000 ms + 13000 ms

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy-
cles.
When judgment for purge control solenoid valve stuck open NG is made, end the evaporative diagnosis.
Cancel the evaporative diagnosis when the OK/NG judgment for purge control solenoid valve stuck open
cannot be made in Mode Z.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and change to Mode A when the following conditions are established after 3000 ms has passed
since Mode Z started.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value DTC
evptez – evptezha ≤ 0.4 kPa (3 mmHg, 0.1 inHg) P0457

GD(H4SO)-131
11LE_US.book 132 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Normal

(1)

(2)

evptez

evptezha
evptezini
(3)

0 (4)

(5)

EN-02869

(1) Mode Z (3) Fuel tank pressure (5) OK judgment

(2) 3000 ms (4) 0.4 kPa (3 mmHg, 0.1 inHg)

evptez – evptezha ≤ 0.4 kPa (3 mmHg, 0.1 inHg) Normal when above is established
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 5000 ms + 3000 ms

GD(H4SO)-132
11LE_US.book 133 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Purge control solenoid valve Open Fixation

(1) (2)

(3)
(6)

evptez

(4) evptezini

0 (5)

evptezha

(7)

(8)

EN-02870

(1) Mode Z (4) Fuel tank pressure (7) 40000 ms no fuel sloshing
(2) Extended mode Z (5) 0.9 kPa (6.5 mmHg, 0.3 inHg) (8) NG judgment
(3) 5000 ms + 3000 ms + 13000 ms (6) 0.4 kPa (2.9 mmHg, 0.1 inHg)

• evptezini ≤ 0.4 kPa (2.9 mmHg, 0.1 inHg)

• evptez – evptezha > 0.9 kPa (6.5 mmHg, 0.3 inHg)
• No fuel sloshing with value from Map 6 or more lasts for 40000 ms.
Judge as abnormal when all are established.

GD(H4SO)-133
11LE_US.book 134 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Leak Diagnosis
DTC
P0442 Evaporative Emission Control System Leak Detected (Small Leak)
P0457 Evaporative Emission Control System Leak Detected (Fuel Cap Loose/Off)
• The diagnostic consists of creating a sealed vacuum in the fuel tank and then determining the presence of
leakage from the speed at which the tank internal pressure returns to barometric pressure.
• The diagnosis is divided into the following five phases.
Mode A: (Estimated evaporation gas amount)
Calculate the tank pressure change amount (P1) when using mode A. After calculating P1, switch to mode B.
Mode B: (Negative pressure sealed)
Introduce negative pressure in the intake manifold to the tank.
Approx. 0 → –1.4 kPa (0 → –10.5 mmHg, 0 → –0.4 inHg)
When the pressure above (desired negative pressure) is reached, enters Mode C.
In this case, if the tank pressure does not reach the target negative pressure, judge that there is a large leak-
age in the system and terminate the evaporative emission control system diagnosis.
Abnormality Judgment
Judge as NG (large leakage) when the following conditions are established.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value DTC
Time to reach target negative pressure ≥ 10000 ms + 25000 ms P0457
or
Mode B time ≥ 10000 ms
(Min. pressure value in tank when in mode B) – > –0.5 kPa (–4 mmHg, –0.2 inHg)
(Tank pressure when mode B started)

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 5000 ms + 3000 ms + 10000 ms + 10000 ms + 25000 ms

Mode C: (Check pressure rise)
Stop the introduction of negative pressure. (Wait until the tank pressure returns to the start level of P2 cal-
culation.)
Change to Mode D when the tank pressure returns to the start level of P2 calculation.
Judge immediate OK and change to Mode E when it does not return in spite of spending the specified time.
Tank pressure when starting Time for advanced OK
calculation of P2 judgment
–1.3 kPa (–9.75 mmHg, –0.4 inHg) 14013 ms

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 5000 ms + 3000 ms + 10000 ms + 10000 ms + 25000 ms + 14013 ms
Mode D: (Measure amount of negative pressure change)
Monitor the tank pressure change amount when using mode D. In this case, the tank pressure increases,
(nears barometric pressure) because evaporation occurs. However, if any leakage exists, the pressure in-
creases additionally in proportion to this leakage. The pressure variation of this tank is P2.
After calculating P2, perform a small leak diagnosis according to the items below.
When Mode D is ended
Assign tank variations measured in Mode A and Mode D, P1 and P2, to the formula below, judge small leaks
in the system. If the measured judgment value exceeds the threshold value, it is judged to be a malfunction.

GD(H4SO)-134
11LE_US.book 135 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Abnormality Judgment
Judge as NG when the following conditions are established within the predetermined time. Judge as OK and
clear the NG if the following conditions are not established within the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value DTC
P2 – 1.5 – × P1 > Value of Map 8 P0442
P2: Tank pressure that changes every 10000 ms in mode D
P1: Tank pressure that changes every 10000 ms in mode A

*1.5 –: Evaporation amount compensation value when below negative pressure (Amount of evaporation occurrence increases as
a vacuum condition increases.)
Map 8 Malfunction criteria limit for evaporation diagnosis
Fuel temperature vs. Fuel
15 °C (59 °F) 25 °C (77 °F) 35 °C (95 °F) 45 °C (113 °F)
level
10.5 2 0.3 kPa 0.3 kPa 0.3 kPa 0.3 kPa
(2.77 US gal, 2.31 Imp gal) (2.1 mmHg, 0.1 inHg) (2.1 mmHg, 0.1 inHg) (2.3 mmHg, 0.1 inHg) (2.4 mmHg, 0.1 inHg)
27 2 0.3 kPa 0.3 kPa 0.4 kPa 0.4 kPa
(7.13 US gal, 5.94 Imp gal) (2.32 mmHg, 0.1 inHg) (2.5 mmHg, 0.1 inHg) (2.73 mmHg, 0.1 inHg) (2.88 mmHg, 0.1 inHg)
43 2 0.4 kPa 0.4 kPa 0.4 kPa 0.5 kPa
(11.36 US gal, 9.46 Imp gal) (2.88 mmHg, 0.1 inHg) (2.97 mmHg, 0.1 inHg) (3.23 mmHg, 0.1 inHg) (3.43 mmHg, 0.1 inHg)
59.5 2 0.5 kPa 0.5 kPa 0.5 kPa 0.5 kPa
(15.72 US gal, 13.09 Imp gal) (3.5 mmHg, 0.1 inHg) (3.5 mmHg, 0.1 inHg) (3.5 mmHg, 0.1 inHg) (3.7 mmHg, 0.1 inHg)

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 5000 ms + 3000 ms + 10000 ms + 10000 ms + 25000 ms + 14013 ms + 10000
ms
Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy-
cles.
Leak Diagnosis
DTC
P0456 Evaporative Emission Control System Leak Detected (very small leak)
• The diagnostic consists of creating a sealed vacuum in the fuel tank and then determining the presence of
leakage from the speed at which the tank internal pressure returns to barometric pressure.
• The diagnosis is divided into the following five phases.
Mode A: (0 point compensation)
When the pressure in the tank is not near 0 mmHg, wait until it returns to 0 point (near 0 mmHg). Shift to mode
B when returned to the 0 point. Cancel the diagnosis when 0 point does not return in the specified time.
Mode B: (Negative pressure introduced)
Introduce negative pressure in the intake manifold to the tank.
Approx. 0 → –2 kPa (0 → –15 mmHg, 0 → –0.6 inHg)
When the pressure above (desired negative pressure) is reached, enters Mode C.
When the tank internal pressure does not reach the target negative pressure, the diagnosis is cancelled.
Mode C: (Negative pressure maintained)
Stop the introduction of negative pressure. (Wait until the tank pressure returns to the start level of P2 cal-
culation.)
Change to Mode D either when the tank pressure returns to the start level of P2 calculation, or when the pre-
determined amount of time has passed.
Mode D: (Calculate the amount of negative pressure change)
Monitor the tank pressure in mode D, calculate the pressure change in the tank (P2), and measure the time
(evpdset) for the tank pressure to change to the Mode E shifting pressure. When the Mode E shifting pres-
sure is reached, Mode E is entered. If it does not change to the Mode E shifting pressure after the predeter-
mined amount of time has passed, make advanced OK judgment or cancel the diagnosis according to the
value of P2.

GD(H4SO)-135
11LE_US.book 136 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Normality Judgment
Judge as OK when the following conditions are established.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Advanced OK judgment 1
Mode D time ≥ 0 ms + 20000 ms
Tank internal pressure ≤ Value of Map 9
Advanced OK judgment 2
Mode D time ≥ 0 ms + Value of Map 10
P2 ≤ Value of Map 11

Map 9
Fuel level (2, US gal, Imp gal) 10.5, 2.77, 2.31 27, 7.13, 5.94 43, 11.36, 9.46 59.5, 15.72, 13.09
Tank pressure (kPa, mmHg, inHgl) –1.9, –14.61, –0.6 –1.9, –14.61, –0.6 –1.8, –13.64, –0.5 –1.8, –13.13, –0.5

Map 10
Fuel level (2, US gal, Imp gal) 10, 2.64, 2.2 20, 5.28, 4.4 30, 7.93, 6.6 40, 10.57, 8.8 50, 13.21, 11 60, 15.85, 13.2
Time Needed for Diagnosis (ms) 200000 200000 200000 200000 200000 200000

Map 11
Fuel level (2, US gal, Imp gal) 10.5, 2.77, 2.31 27, 7.13, 5.94 43, 11.36, 9.46 59.5, 15.72, 13.09
Tank pressure (kPa, mmHg, inHgl) 1.1, 8.52, 0.3 1.1, 8.52, 0.3 1.3, 10, 0.4 1.3, 10, 0.4

Mode E: (Evaporation occurrence amount calculation)

Calculate the change of tank pressure with the time evpdset (P1) to judge as NG/OK according to the value
of P1. (ambiguous determination acceptable).
• Abnormality Judgment
Judge as NG when the following conditions are established.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
P1 < Value of Map 12

Map 12 Malfunction criteria limit for evaporation diagnosis

Time (evpdset)
40000 ms 60000 ms 105000 ms 110000 ms 140000 ms 160000 ms 180000 ms 200000 ms
vs. Fuel level
10.5 2 0 kPa 0.1 kPa 0.3 kPa 0.3 kPa 0.3 kPa 0.4 kPa 0.4 kPa 0.4 kPa
(2.77 US gal, (0.00 mmHg, (0.70 mmHg, (2.18 mmHg, (2.23 mmHg, (2.53 mmHg, (2.72 mmHg, (2.90 mmHg, (2.90 mmHg,
2.31 Imp gal) 0 inHg) 0 inHg) 0.1 inHg) 0.1 inHg) 0.1 inHg) 0.1 inHg) 0.1 inHg) 0.1 inHg)
27 2 0 kPa 0.2 kPa 0.3 kPa 0.3 kPa 0.4 kPa 0.4 kPa 0.4 kPa 0.4 kPa
(7.13 US gal, (0.00 mmHg, (1.81 mmHg, (2.46 mmHg, (2.53 mmHg, (2.90 mmHg, (2.90 mmHg, (2.90 mmHg, (2.90 mmHg,
5.94 Imp gal) 0 inHg) 0.1 inHg) 0.1 inHg) 0.1 inHg) 0.1 inHg) 0.1 inHg) 0.1 inHg) 0.1 inHg)
43 2 0 kPa 0.2 kPa 0.3 kPa 0.3 kPa 0.3 kPa 0.3 kPa 0.3 kPa 0 kPa
(11.36 US gal, (0.00 mmHg, (1.53 mmHg, (2.49 mmHg, (2.60 mmHg, (2.60 mmHg, (2.60 mmHg, (2.60 mmHg, (0.00 mmHg,
9.46 Imp gal) 0 inHg) 0.1 inHg) 0.1 inHg) 0.1 inHg) 0.1 inHg) 0.1 inHg) 0.1 inHg) 0 inHg)
59.5 2 0 kPa 0.2 kPa 0.3 kPa 0.3 kPa 0.3 kPa 0.3 kPa 0.2 kPa 0 kPa
(15.72 US gal, (0.00 mmHg, (1.31 mmHg, (2.53 mmHg, (2.53 mmHg, (2.53 mmHg, (2.53 mmHg, (1.26 mmHg, (0.00 mmHg,
13.09 Imp gal) 0 inHg) 0.1 inHg) 0.1 inHg) 0.1 inHg) 0.1 inHg) 0.1 inHg) 0 inHg) 0 inHg)

Time needed for diagnosis: Value from Map 1 + Value from Map 2 + Value from Map 3 + 0 ms + Value from
Map 4 + 0 ms + Value from Map 4 + Value from Map 5
Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy-
cles.

GD(H4SO)-136
11LE_US.book 137 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK when the following conditions are established.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
P1 > Value of Map 13

Map 13 Malfunction criteria limit for evaporation diagnosis

Time (evpdset)
20000 ms 60000 ms 105000 ms 110000 ms 140000 ms 160000 ms 180000 ms 200000 ms
vs. Fuel level
10.5 2 0 kPa 0.3 kPa 0.5 kPa 0.5 kPa 0.5 kPa 0.6 kPa 0.6 kPa 0.6 kPa
(2.77 US gal, (0.00 mmHg, (2.20 mmHg, (3.68 mmHg, (3.73 mmHg, (4.03 mmHg, (4.22 mmHg, (4.40 mmHg, (4.40 mmHg,
2.31 Imp gal) 0 inHg) 0.1 inHg) 0.1 inHg) 0.1 inHg) 0.2 inHg) 0.2 inHg) 0.2 inHg) 0.2 inHg)
27 2 0 kPa 0.4 kPa 0.5 kPa 0.5 kPa 0.6 kPa 0.6 kPa 0.6 kPa 0.6 kPa
(7.13 US gal, (0.00 mmHg, (3.31 mmHg, (3.96 mmHg, (4.03 mmHg, (4.40 mmHg, (4.40 mmHg, (4.40 mmHg, (4.40 mmHg,
5.94 Imp gal) 0 inHg) 0.1 inHg) 0.2 inHg) 0.2 inHg) 0.2 inHg) 0.2 inHg) 0.2 inHg) 0.2 inHg)
43 2 0 kPa 0.4 kPa 0.5 kPa 0.5 kPa 0.5 kPa 0.5 kPa 0.5 kPa 0.2 kPa
(11.36 US gal, (0.00 mmHg, (3.03 mmHg, (3.99 mmHg, (4.10 mmHg, (4.10 mmHg, (4.10 mmHg, (4.10 mmHg, (1.50 mmHg,
9.46 Imp gal) 0 inHg) 0.1 inHg) 0.2 inHg) 0.2 inHg) 0.2 inHg) 0.2 inHg) 0.2 inHg) 0.1 inHg)
59.5 2 0 kPa 0.4 kPa 0.5 kPa 0.5 kPa 0.5 kPa 0.5 kPa 0.4 kPa 0.2 kPa
(15.72 US gal, (0.00 mmHg, (2.81 mmHg, (4.03 mmHg, (4.03 mmHg, (4.03 mmHg, (4.03 mmHg, (2.76 mmHg, (1.50 mmHg,
13.09 Imp gal) 0 inHg) 0.1 inHg) 0.2 inHg) 0.2 inHg) 0.2 inHg) 0.2 inHg) 0.1 inHg) 0.1 inHg)

Time needed for diagnosis: Value from Map 1 + Value from Map 2 + Value from Map 3 + 0 ms + Value from
Map 4 + 0 ms + Value from Map 4 + Value from Map 5

GD(H4SO)-137
11LE_US.book 138 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

BH:DTC P0447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM VENT CONTROL

CIRCUIT OPEN
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect open or short circuit of the drain valve.
Judge as NG when the ECM output level differs from the actual terminal level.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(19) (14) (15) (16) (8) (7) (4) (5) (6) (19) (18)

(9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (17) (2) (1) (3)

EN-02294

(1) Bobbin (8) Magnetic plate (15) Diaphragm

(2) Coil (9) Shaft (16) Movable core
(3) Diode (10) Plate (17) Spring
(4) Stator core (11) Valve (18) Cover
(5) End plate (12) Housing (19) O-ring
(6) Body (13) Filter
(7) Yoke (14) Retainer

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
None

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Always perform the diagnosis continuously.

GD(H4SO)-138
11LE_US.book 139 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V
Elapsed time after starting the engine ≥ 1 second
Terminal output voltage when ECM outputs Low
OFF signal

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 2500 ms

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V
Elapsed time after starting the engine ≥ 1 second
Terminal output voltage when ECM outputs High
OFF signal

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

GD(H4SO)-139
11LE_US.book 140 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

BI: DTC P0448 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM VENT CONTROL

CIRCUIT SHORTED
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect open or short circuit of the drain valve.
Judge as NG when the ECM output level differs from the actual terminal level.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(19) (14) (15) (16) (8) (7) (4) (5) (6) (19) (18)

(9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (17) (2) (1) (3)

EN-02294

(1) Bobbin (8) Magnetic plate (15) Diaphragm

(2) Coil (9) Shaft (16) Movable core
(3) Diode (10) Plate (17) Spring
(4) Stator core (11) Valve (18) Cover
(5) End plate (12) Housing (19) O-ring
(6) Body (13) Filter
(7) Yoke (14) Retainer

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
None

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Always perform the diagnosis continuously.

GD(H4SO)-140
11LE_US.book 141 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V
Elapsed time after starting the engine ≥ 1 second
Terminal output voltage when ECM outputs High
ON signal

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 2500 ms

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V
Elapsed time after starting the engine ≥ 1 second
Terminal output voltage when ECM outputs Low
ON signal

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

GD(H4SO)-141
11LE_US.book 142 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

BJ:DTC P0451 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SEN-

SOR
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect the tank pressure sensor output property abnormality.
Judge as NG when there is no pressure variation, which should exist in the tank, considering the engine sta-
tus.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(A)
(1) (2)

(B)
(C)

EN-04462

(A) Output voltage (B) Input voltage (C) To fuel tank

(1) Connector (2) Terminals

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Elapsed time after starting the engine ≥ 60 s
Fuel level ≥ 9.6 2 (2.54 US gal, 2.11 Imp gal)
Fuel temperature < 35 °C (95 °F)
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V
Barometric pressure ≥ 75 kPa (563 mmHg, 22.2 inHg)

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

• Perform the diagnosis continuously after 60 s have passed since the engine started.
• Pay attention to the fuel level and temperature.

GD(H4SO)-142
11LE_US.book 143 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Number of times that the difference between the ≥ 16 time(s)
Max. fuel level every 60 s and Min. fuel level every
60 s is 2 2 (0.53 US gal, 0.44 Imp gal) or more
(with enable condition established)
Maximum – Minimum tank pressure (with enable < 0 kPa (0.375 mmHg, 0 inHg)
condition completed)
Maximum – Minimum fuel temperature (with enable ≥ 7 °C (12.6°F)
condition completed)

If the difference between the Max. fuel level every 60 s and Min. fuel level every 60 s is less than 2 2 (0.53
US gal, 0.44 Imp gal), extend 60 s and make judgment with the Max. and Min. values for the fuel level in 60
s × 2. If there is no difference after the extension of 60 s, extend the time (60 s × 3, 60 s × 4, 60 s × 5) and
continue the judgment. If the difference between the Max. fuel level every 60 s and Min. fuel level every 60
s is 2 2 (0.53 US gal, 0.44 Imp gal) or more, the diagnosis counter counts up.
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 60 s × 16 time(s) or more
Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy-
cles.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Maximum – Minimum tank pressure ≥ 0 kPa (0.375 mmHg, 0 inHg)

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

GD(H4SO)-143
11LE_US.book 144 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

BK:DTC P0452 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE

SENSOR LOW INPUT
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect the open or short circuit of the fuel tank pressure sensor.
Judge as NG if out of specification.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(A)
(1) (2)

(B)
(C)

EN-04462

(A) Output voltage (B) Input voltage (C) To fuel tank

(1) Connector (2) Terminals

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
None

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Always perform the diagnosis continuously.

GD(H4SO)-144
11LE_US.book 145 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Fuel tank pressure < –7.4 kPa (–55.6 mmHg, –2.2 inHg)
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 15000 ms

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Fuel tank pressure ≥ –7.4 kPa (–55.6 mmHg, –2.2 inHg)
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

GD(H4SO)-145
11LE_US.book 146 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

BL:DTC P0453 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE

SENSOR HIGH INPUT
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect the open or short circuit of the fuel tank pressure sensor.
Judge as NG if out of specification.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(A)
(1) (2)

(B)
(C)

EN-04462

(A) Output voltage (B) Input voltage (C) To fuel tank

(1) Connector (2) Terminals

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Time needed for all secondary parameters to be ≥ 5000 ms
in enable conditions
Vehicle speed ≥ 2 km/h (1.2 MPH)
All conditions of EVAP canister purge Completed
Learning value of evaporation gas concentration < 0.08
(left and right)
Main feedback compensation coefficient (left ≥ 0.9
and right)
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Perform the diagnosis when purging enable conditions are met without idling.

GD(H4SO)-146
11LE_US.book 147 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Fuel tank pressure ≥ 7.9 kPa (59.6 mmHg, 2.3 inHg)
Fuel temperature < 35 °C (95 °F)
Atmospheric pressure ≥ 75 kPa (563 mmHg, 22.2 inHg)

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 15000 ms

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Fuel tank pressure < 7.9 kPa (59.6 mmHg, 2.3 inHg)

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

GD(H4SO)-147
 Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria
GENERAL DESCRIPTION

BM:DTC P0456 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED

(VERY SMALL LEAK)
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
NOTE:
For the detection standard, refer to DTC P0442. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-125, DTC P0442 EVAPORATIVE
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (SMALL LEAK), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) De-
tecting Criteria.>
BN:DTC P0457 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED
(FUEL CAP LOOSE/OFF)
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
NOTE:
For the detection standard, refer to DTC P0442. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-125, DTC P0442 EVAPORATIVE
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (SMALL LEAK), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) De-
tecting Criteria.>

GD(H4SO)-148
11LE_US.book 149 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

BO:DTC P0458 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM PURGE CONTROL VALVE

CIRCUIT LOW
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect open or short circuit of the purge control solenoid valve.
Judge as NG when the ECM output level differs from the actual terminal level.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
(B) (A)

EN-02197

(A) To canister (B) To intake manifold

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V
Elapsed time after starting the engine ≥ 1 second

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Always perform the diagnosis after starting the engine.

GD(H4SO)-149
11LE_US.book 150 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Duty ratio of “ON” < 0.75
Terminal output voltage Low

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 2500 ms

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy-
cles.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Terminal output voltage High

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

GD(H4SO)-150
11LE_US.book 151 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

BP:DTC P0459 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM PURGE CONTROL VALVE

CIRCUIT HIGH
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect open or short circuit of the purge control solenoid valve.
Judge as NG when the ECM output level differs from the actual terminal level.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
(B) (A)

EN-02197

(A) To canister (B) To intake manifold

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V
Elapsed time after starting the engine ≥ 1 second

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Always perform the diagnosis after starting the engine.

GD(H4SO)-151
11LE_US.book 152 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Duty ratio of “ON” ≥ 0.25
Terminal output voltage High

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 2500 ms

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy-
cles.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Terminal output voltage Low

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

GD(H4SO)-152
11LE_US.book 153 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

BQ:DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect malfunctions of the fuel level sensor output property.
If the fuel level does not vary in a particular driving condition / engine condition where it should, judge as NG.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(A)

0 (B)

EN-01734

(A) Fuel level (B) Resistance

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
None

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Always perform the diagnosis continuously.

GD(H4SO)-153
11LE_US.book 154 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
Judge as NG when the following conditions are established.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Accumulated amount of intake air ≥ 330957 g (11672.85 oz)
Max. – min. values of fuel level output < 2.6 2 (0.69 US gal, 0.57 Imp gal)
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V
Engine speed < 4000 rpm
Elapsed time after starting the engine ≥ 5000 ms

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy-
cles.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the following conditions are established.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Accumulated amount of intake air ≥ 330957 g (11672.85 oz)
Max. – min. values of fuel level output ≥ 2.6 2 (0.69 US gal, 0.57 Imp gal)
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V
Engine speed < 4000 rpm
Elapsed time after starting the engine ≥ 5000 ms

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

GD(H4SO)-154
11LE_US.book 155 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

BR:DTC P0462 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT LOW

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect the open or short circuit of fuel level sensor. Judge as NG if out of specification.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(1) (5)

(4)
(2) (3)

EN-05371

(1) Engine control module (ECM) (3) Fuel sub level sensor (4) Detecting circuit
(2) Fuel level sensor (5) Body integrated unit

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
None

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Always perform the diagnosis continuously.

GD(H4SO)-155
11LE_US.book 156 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V
Elapsed time after starting the engine ≥ 3000 ms
Output voltage < 0.173 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 2500 ms

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy-
cles.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V
Elapsed time after starting the engine ≥ 3000 ms
Output voltage ≥ 0.173 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

GD(H4SO)-156
11LE_US.book 157 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

BS:DTC P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT HIGH

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect the open or short circuit of fuel level sensor. Judge as NG if out of specification.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(1) (5)

(4)
(2) (3)

EN-05371

(1) Engine control module (ECM) (3) Fuel sub level sensor (4) Detecting circuit
(2) Fuel level sensor (5) Body integrated unit

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
None

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Always perform the diagnosis continuously.

GD(H4SO)-157
11LE_US.book 158 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V
Elapsed time after starting the engine ≥ 3000 ms
Output voltage ≥ 7.212 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 1000 ms

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy-
cles.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V
Elapsed time after starting the engine ≥ 3000 ms
Output voltage < 7.212 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

GD(H4SO)-158
11LE_US.book 159 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

BT:DTC P0464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT INTERMITTENT

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect the unstable output faults from the fuel level sensor caused by noise. Judge as NG when the max. val-
ue and cumulative value of output voltage variation of the fuel level sensor is larger than the threshold value.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Engine speed ≥ 500 rpm
Elapsed time after starting the engine ≥ 1 second
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V
Idle switch ON
Fuel level ≥ 10.5 2 (2.77 US gal, 2.31 Imp gal)
and
< 59.5 2 (15.72 US gal, 13.09 Imp gal)
Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH) ≥ 10000 ms

3. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

• Always perform the diagnosis continuously at idle speed.
• Pay attention to the fuel level.

GD(H4SO)-159
11LE_US.book 160 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

4. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
Calculate the Max. value (DELFLMAX) and cumulative value (SUMFL) of output voltage variation of fuel level
sensor during 12.2 seconds. Judge it normal when both max. and cumulative values are not over the thresh-
old value. Otherwise, when either of them is over the threshold value, the diagnosis counter counts up. Judge
as NG if the counter indicated 4 time(s).

Diagnosis condition

(A)

Diagnosis timer

Fuel level sensor (C)

A/D value (D)

Amount of Fuel level

output voltage variation

Calculate the Max. value (DELFLMAX)

and the cumulative value (SUMFL).

6
5
4
3
2
1
Diagnosis counter 0

(B)

EN-05569

(A) 12288 ms (B) NG at 4 time(s) counts (C) Malfunction

(D) Normal

GD(H4SO)-160
11LE_US.book 161 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Integrated times of the condition reaching follows, ≥ 4 time(s)
DELFLMAX ≥ Value from Map
or
SUMFL ≥ 23.8 V
At this time,
DELFLMAX: Maximum difference of sensor output for 12288 ms
SUMFL: Integrated value of the sensor output deviation for12288 ms

Map
Fuel level (2, US gal, Imp gal) 10, 2.64, 2.2 20, 5.28, 4.4 25, 6.61, 5.5 30, 7.93, 6.6 43, 11.36, 9.46 45, 11.89, 9.9 50, 13.21, 11
Measured voltage (V) 0.248 0.519 0.796 0.6 1.025 1.069 1.402

The diagnosis counter does not count up when the following conditions are completed within 12288 ms.
Maximum value – minimum value of change ≥ 0 kPa (0.375 mmHg, 0 inHg)
of tank pressure during 12288 ms
Maximum value – minimum value of battery ≥ 1.09 V
voltage during 12288 ms

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 12288 ms × 4 time(s)

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy-
cles.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
DELFLMAX < Value from Map
SUMFL < 23.8 V
At this time,
DELFLMAX: Maximum difference of sensor output for 12288 ms
SUMFL: Integrated value of the sensor output deviation for12288 ms

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 12288 ms

GD(H4SO)-161
11LE_US.book 162 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

BU:DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR “A”

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Judge as NG when outside of the judgment value.
Judge NG when the received data from VDCCM&H/U is abnormal vehicle speed, and the vehicle speed data
is impossible.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Vehicle speed signals are taken in to the VDC control module and hydraulic control unit, and normal/errone-
ous data of the ABS wheel speed sensor is received by CAN communication from the VDC control module
and hydraulic control unit.
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V
Elapsed time after starting the engine ≥ 2000 ms

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Always perform diagnosis more than 2000 ms after starting the engine.
5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Front ABS wheel speed sensor status Malfunction
Either of the following is established
Front left wheel speed ≥ 300 km/h (186.4 MPH)
Front right wheel speed ≥ 300 km/h (186.4 MPH)

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 2500 ms

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Front left wheel speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH)
and
< 300 km/h (186.4 MPH)
Front right wheel speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH)
and
< 300 km/h (186.4 MPH)

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 2500 ms

GD(H4SO)-162
11LE_US.book 163 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

BV:DTC P0506 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM RPM LOWER THAN EXPECTED
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect the malfunction that actual engine speed is not close to target engine speed during idling. Judge as
NG when actual engine speed is not close to target engine speed during idling.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Engine coolant temperature ≥ 75 °C (167 °F)
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V
Atmospheric pressure ≥ 75 kPa (563 mmHg, 22.2 inHg)
Fuel level ≥ 9.6 2 (2.54 US gal, 2.11 Imp gal)
Elapsed time after starting the engine ≥ 10.49 s
Feedback of ISC In operation
Lambda value (left and right) ≥ 0.81
and
< 1.1
After switching air conditioner to ON/OFF ≥ 5.1 s
After intake manifold pressure changes by 4 kPa > 5.1 s
(30 mmHg, 1.2 inHg) or more.
Elapsed time after switching neutral position switch > 5.1 s
to ON/OFF
Vehicle speed 0 km/h (0 MPH)

3. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Perform the diagnosis continuously at idling after warming up engine.
4. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Actual engine speed – Targeted engine speed < –100 rpm
Feedback compensation for ISC Max.

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 10 s × 3 time(s)

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy-
cles.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Actual engine speed – Targeted engine speed ≥ –100 rpm

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 10 s

GD(H4SO)-163
11LE_US.book 164 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

BW:DTC P0507 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM RPM HIGHER THAN EXPECTED
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect the malfunction that actual engine speed is not close to target engine speed during idling. Judge as
NG when actual engine speed is not close to target engine speed during idling.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Engine coolant temperature ≥ 75 °C (167 °F)
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V
Atmospheric pressure ≥ 75 kPa (563 mmHg, 22.2 inHg)
Fuel level ≥ 9.6 2 (2.54 US gal, 2.11 Imp gal)
Elapsed time after starting the engine ≥ 10.49 s
Feedback of ISC In operation
Lambda value (left and right) ≥ 0.81
and
< 1.1
After switching air conditioner to ON/OFF ≥ 5.1 s
After intake manifold pressure changes by 4 kPa > 5.1 s
(30 mmHg, 1.2 inHg) or more.
Elapsed time after switching neutral position switch > 5.1 s
to ON/OFF
Vehicle speed 0 km/h (0 MPH)

3. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Perform the diagnosis continuously at idling after warming up engine.
4. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Actual – Target engine speed ≥ 200 rpm
Feedback value for ISC Min.

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 10 s × 3 time(s)

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy-
cles.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Actual – Target engine speed < 200 rpm

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 10 s

GD(H4SO)-164
11LE_US.book 165 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

BX:DTC P050A COLD START IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect malfunctions of the catalyst advanced idling retard angle control.
Judge as NG when ECM is not controlling the angle properly during catalyst advanced idling retard angle
control.
Judge as NG if there is exhaust gas temperature diagnosis and idle speed diagnosis, and if any one of them
is NG.
• Exhaust gas temperature diagnosis
Judge as NG when the estimated exhausted gas temperature in 14 seconds after the cold start is below the
specified value.
• Idle speed diagnosis
Judge as NG when actual engine speed is not close to target engine speed after terminating the retard angle
control.
2. ENABLE CONDITIONS
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Atmospheric pressure ≥ 75 kPa (563 mmHg, 22.2 inHg)
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V
Cold start diagnosis Incomplete
Vehicle speed < 2 km/h (1.2 MPH)
Misfire in 200 engine revs. <5
Time after starting = 14 s

3. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Perform the diagnosis at cold start.
4. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Exhaust gas temperature diagnosis
Abnormality Judgment
Calculate the estimated exhaust gas temperature when the diagnostic enable condition is established. Judge
as NG when the following conditions are established after engine starting within the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Estimated exhaust gas temperature < Value from Map

Map
• PZEV model
Coolant tempera-
–40 °C –30 °C –20 °C –10 °C 0 °C 10 °C 20 °C 30 °C 40 °C 50 °C
ture after starting
(–40 °F) (–22 °F) (–4 °F) (14 °F) (32 °F) (50 °F) (68 °F) (86 °F) (104 °F) (122 °F)
the engine
Estimated exhaust
140 °C 140 °C 140 °C 140 °C 140 °C 138 °C 138 °C 138 °C 138 °C 138 °C
gas temperature
(284 °F) (284 °F) (284 °F) (284 °F) (284 °F) (280.4 °F) (280.4 °F) (280.4 °F) (280.4 °F) (280.4 °F)
(AT model)
Estimated exhaust
140 °C 140 °C 140 °C 140 °C 138 °C 138 °C 138 °C 138 °C 125 °C 115 °C
gas temperature
(284 °F) (284 °F) (284 °F) (284 °F) (280.4 °F) (280.4 °F) (280.4 °F) (280.4 °F) (257 °F) (239 °F)
(MT model)

GD(H4SO)-165
11LE_US.book 166 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

• Except for PZEV model

Coolant tempera-
–40 °C –30 °C –20 °C –10 °C 0 °C 10 °C 20 °C 30 °C 40 °C 50 °C
ture after starting
(–40 °F) (–22 °F) (–4 °F) (14 °F) (32 °F) (50 °F) (68 °F) (86 °F) (104 °F) (122 °F)
the engine
Estimated exhaust
140 °C 140 °C 140 °C 140 °C 140 °C 140 °C 135 °C 130 °C 125 °C 125 °C
gas temperature
(284 °F) (284 °F) (284 °F) (284 °F) (284 °F) (284 °F) (275 °F) (266 °F) (257 °F) (257 °F)
(AT model)
Estimated exhaust
140 °C 140 °C 140 °C 140 °C 140 °C 140 °C 135 °C 130 °C 120 °C 115 °C
gas temperature
(284 °F) (284 °F) (284 °F) (284 °F) (284 °F) (284 °F) (275 °F) (266 °F) (248 °F) (239 °F)
(MT model)

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 14 seconds

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy-
cles.
Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the following conditions are established.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Estimated exhaust gas temperature ≥ Value from Map

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

• Idle speed diagnosis
Abnormality Judgment
Judge as NG when the following conditions are established after the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Continuous time of (Target engine speed – Actual ≥ 6000 ms
engine speed > –300 rpm)
Continuous time of (actual retard amount > 30 °CA) ≥ 0 ms

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 14 seconds

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy-
cles.
Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the following conditions are established.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Continuous time of (Target engine speed – Actual < 6000 ms
engine speed > –300 rpm)
Continuous time of (actual retard amount > 30 °CA) < 0 ms

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

GD(H4SO)-166
11LE_US.book 167 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

BY:DTC P050B COLD START IGNITION TIMING PERFORMANCE

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect malfunctions of the catalyst advanced idling retard angle control.
Judge as NG when ECM is not controlling the angle properly during catalyst advanced idling retard angle
control.
Judge as NG when actual retard amount is under the specified value at cold start.
2. ENABLE CONDITIONS
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Atmospheric pressure ≥ 75 kPa (563 mmHg, 22.2 inHg)
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V
Cold start diagnosis Incomplete
Vehicle speed < 2 km/h (1.2 MPH)
Misfire in 200 engine revs. <5
Time after starting = 14 s

3. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Perform the diagnosis at cold start.
4. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
Judge as NG when the following conditions are established with diagnosis enable conditions successful.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Duration time of (Standard ignition timing > 5000 ms
– Actual ignition timing ≤ 0 °CA)

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 5000 ms

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy-
cles.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the following conditions are established.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Duration time of (Standard ignition timing > 1000 ms
– Actual ignition timing > 0 °CA)

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 1000 ms

GD(H4SO)-167
11LE_US.book 168 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

BZ:DTC P0512 STARTER REQUEST CIRCUIT

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect the open or short circuit of starter SW.
Judge as ON NG when the starter SW signal remains ON.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
None

3. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Always perform the diagnosis continuously.
4. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Engine condition After engine starting
Starter OFF signal Not detected
Battery voltage ≥8V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 60000 ms

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy-
cles.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Starter OFF signal Detected
Battery voltage ≥8V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

GD(H4SO)-168
11LE_US.book 169 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

CA:DTC P0513 INCORRECT IMMOBILIZER KEY

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
DTC Item Outline of Diagnosis
P0513 Incorrect Immobilizer Key Incorrect immobilizer key (Use of unregistered key in body integrated unit)
P1570 Antenna Faulty antenna
P1571 Reference Code Incompatibility Reference code incompatibility between body integrated unit and ECM
IMM Circuit Failure (Except
P1572 Communication failure between body integrated unit and ECM
Antenna Circuit)
Failure of body integrated unit to verify key (transponder) ID code or tran-
P1574 Key Communication Failure
sponder failure
P1576 EGI Control Module EEPROM ECM malfunctioning
P1577 IMM Control Module EEPROM Body integrated unit malfunctioning
Reference code incompatibility between body integrated unit and combina-
P1578 Meter Failure
tion meter

2. ENABLE CONDITION
When starting the engine.
3. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE
Perform the diagnosis only after starting the engine.
4. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
Judge as NG when the conditions for the outline of the diagnosis of the top are established.

GD(H4SO)-169
11LE_US.book 170 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

CB:DTC P0604 INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE RANDOM ACCESS MEMORY

(RAM) ERROR
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect the malfunction of microcomputer (RAM).
When there is a problem in the CPU normal RAM, judge as NG.
If it is possible to write data to the whole area of RAM in the initial routine, and is possible to read the same
data, it is judged as OK, and if not, NG.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
None

Diagnosis with the initial routine.

3. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE
Perform the diagnosis as soon as the ignition switch is turned to ON.
4. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
Judge as NG when the following conditions are established.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Write the specified value into the RAM. The written value cannot be read.

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the following conditions are established.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Write the specified value into the RAM. The written value can be read.

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

GD(H4SO)-170
11LE_US.book 171 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

CC:DTC P0605 INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE READ ONLY MEMORY (ROM)

ERROR
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Judge as NG when SUM value of ROM is outside the standard value.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Ignition switch ON

3. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Always perform the diagnosis continuously.
4. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
Abnormality Judgment
Judge as NG if the criteria below are met.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
SUM value of ROM Standard

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Undetermined

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.

GD(H4SO)-171
11LE_US.book 172 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

CD:DTC P0607 THROTTLE CONTROL SYSTEM CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFOR-

MANCE
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Judge as NG when any one of the followings is established.
(1) Monitoring IC operates abnormally. (Monitoring IC malfunction)
(2) Input amplifier circuit of throttle position sensor 1 operates abnormally. (fourfold amplifier malfunction)
(3) CPU operates abnormally. (Instruction/flow check)
(4) A/D converter operates abnormally. (ADC malfunction)
(5) EEPROM operates abnormally. (EEPROM malfunction)
(6) Output IC operates abnormally. (Output driver malfunction)
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(9) (1)

(2)
(8) (7)

(12) (10)
(3)
(7)

(4)

(5)
(7)
(13) (11)

(6)
(7)

EN-08016

(1) Throttle position sensor (6) Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 (10) CPU
(2) Throttle position sensor 1 (7) I/F circuit (11) Monitoring IC
(3) Throttle position sensor 2 (8) Amplifier circuit (12) EEPROM
(4) Accelerator pedal position sensor (9) Engine control module (ECM) (13) Output IC
(5) Accelerator pedal position sensor 1

GD(H4SO)-172
11LE_US.book 173 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
(1) Battery voltage ≥6V
(2) Ignition switch ON
(2) Battery voltage ≥6V
(3) Ignition switch ON
(3) ETC control Permitted
(4) Ignition switch ON
(4) Battery voltage ≥6V
(5) Starter switch OFF
(5) Battery voltage >6V
(6) Ignition switch ON
(6) Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Always perform the diagnosis continuously.
5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
(1) Monitoring IC operation The result and estimated
value match.
(2) | Throttle position sensor 1 opening <3°
angle – (Throttle position sensor 1 opening
angle after passing amplifier)/4 |
(3) Main CPU calculation result The result and estimated
value match.
(4) | Standard voltage – Voltage reading | < 0.078125 V
(5) EEPROM writing Writing completed
(6) Communication with output IC Possible to communicate

Time Needed for Diagnosis:

(1): 200 ms
(2): 24 ms
(3): 192 ms
(4): 200 ms
(5): 48 ms
(6): 2500 ms
Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.

GD(H4SO)-173
11LE_US.book 174 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

CE:DTC P0638 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL RANGE/PERFORMANCE

(BANK 1)
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Judge as NG when the target opening angle and actual opening angle is mismatched or the current to motor
is the specified duty or more for specified time continuously.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(3) (1)

(4)

(2)

EN-01863

(1) Motor (3) Engine control module (ECM) (4) Drive circuit
(2) Throttle position sensor

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Ignition switch ON
Normal operation of electronic throttle control ON

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Always perform the diagnosis continuously when the electronic throttle control is operating.
5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Difference between target opening angle Within the OK range of judgment
and actual opening angle value detail
Output duty to drive circuit < 95 %

Time Needed for Diagnosis:

• Difference between target opening angle and actual opening angle:
• NG judgment: Refer to the judgment time detail.
• OK judgment: 2000 ms
• Output duty to drive circuit: 2000 ms

GD(H4SO)-174
11LE_US.book 175 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Details of Judgment Value

(Y5)

Difference between
target opening angle
and
actual opening angle ( ) (NG area)

(Y4)
(Y3)
(Y1) (OK area)
(Y2)
0
0
(X1) (X2) (X3) (X4) (X5)

Target throttle opening angle ( )

EN-08017

(X1) 6.915 ° (X2) 11.565 ° (X3) 15.785 °

(X4) 21.285 ° (X5) 29.965 °

(Y1) 4.65 ° (Y2) 4.22 ° (Y3) 5.5 °

(Y4) 8.68 ° (Y5) 25 °

Judgment time detail

(Y1)

Judgment time
(milliseconds)

(Y2)
(Y3)
(Y4)

0
0
(X1) (X2) (X3) (X4)

Throttle position sensor 1 opening angle (˚)

EN-08018

(X1) 8.049999237 ° (X2) 9.5 ° (X3) 14.5 °

(X4) 23.5 °

(Y1) 1000 ms (Y2) 400 ms (Y3) 304 ms

(Y4) 248 ms

NOTE:
Judgment time is constantly 1000 ms with Actual opening angle ≤ Target opening angle.
Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.

GD(H4SO)-175
11LE_US.book 176 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

CF:DTC P0700 TRANSMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM (MIL REQUEST)

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Judge as NG when there is CAN communication with the TCM and there is a MIL lighting request.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
None

3. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Always perform the diagnosis continuously.
4. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V
MIL lighting request from TCM Yes

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 2500 ms

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.
• Normality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V
MIL lighting request from TCM None

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

GD(H4SO)-176
11LE_US.book 177 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

CG:DTC P0851 PARK/NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT LOW (AT MODEL)

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Judge the open or short circuit of the neutral SW.
Judge as NG when the ECM neutral terminal input differs from the reception data from TCM.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V
Starter relay OFF

3. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Perform the diagnosis continuously in 2 seconds after starting the engine.
4. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Neutral switch signal in ECM when “P”/“N” LOW (ON)
range in TCM are “OFF” and when the other
switches are “ON”

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 100 time(s)

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy-
cles.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Neutral switch signal in ECM when “P”/“N” HIGH (OFF)
range in TCM are “OFF” and when the other
switches are “ON”

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

GD(H4SO)-177
11LE_US.book 178 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

CH:DTC P0851 NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT LOW (MT MODEL)

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect the open or short circuit of neutral SW.
Judge as NG when there is no change in the neutral SW even if the driving shift was applied. (There is neutral
SW ON/OFF inversion from the vehicle speed and engine speed.)
2. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V
Starter relay OFF

3. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Perform the diagnosis continuously in 2 seconds after starting the engine.
4. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
Judge NG when the malfunction criteria below are completed determined times or more after the neutral SW
change.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Neutral switch signal (while changing LOW (ON) continues.
from a to b below)
Driving condition change From a) to b)
a) Engine speed 600 rpm — 900 rpm &
Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH)
b) Engine speed 1600 rpm — 2550 rpm
& Vehicle speed ≥ 64 km/h (39.8 MPH)

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 3 time(s)

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy-
cles.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear NG when there is change in the neutral SW.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Neutral switch signal (while changing Changes to HIGH (OFF).
from a to b below)
Driving condition change From a) to b)
a) Engine speed 600 rpm — 900 rpm &
Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH)
b) Engine speed 1600 rpm — 2550 rpm
& Vehicle speed ≥ 64 km/h (39.8 MPH)

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

GD(H4SO)-178
11LE_US.book 179 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

CI: DTC P0852 PARK/NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH (AT MODEL)
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Judge the open or short circuit of the neutral SW.
Judge as NG when the ECM neutral terminal input differs from the reception data from TCM.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V
Starter relay OFF

3. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Perform the diagnosis continuously in 2 seconds after starting the engine.
4. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Neutral switch signal in ECM when “P”/“N” HIGH (OFF)
range in TCM are “ON” and when the other
switches are “OFF”

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 100 time(s)

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy-
cles.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Neutral switch signal in ECM when “P”/“N” LOW (ON)
range in TCM are “ON” and when the other
switches are “OFF”

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

GD(H4SO)-179
11LE_US.book 180 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

CJ:DTC P0852 NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH (MT MODEL)

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect the open or short circuit of neutral SW.
Judge as NG when there is no change in the neutral SW even if the driving shift was applied. (There is neutral
SW ON/OFF inversion from the vehicle speed and engine speed.)
2. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V
Starter relay OFF

3. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Perform the diagnosis continuously in 2 seconds after starting the engine.
4. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
Judge NG when the malfunction criteria below are completed determined times or more after the neutral SW
change.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Neutral switch signal (while changing HIGH (OFF) continues.
from a to b below)
Driving condition change From a) to b)
a) Engine speed 600 rpm — 900 rpm &
Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH)
b) Engine speed 1600 rpm — 2550 rpm
& Vehicle speed ≥ 64 km/h (39.8 MPH)

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 3 time(s)

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy-
cles.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear NG when there is change in the neutral SW.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Neutral switch signal (while changing Changes to LOW (ON).
from a to b below)
Driving condition change From a) to b)
a) Engine speed 600 rpm — 900 rpm &
Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH)
b) Engine speed 1600 rpm — 2550 rpm
& Vehicle speed ≥ 64 km/h (39.8 MPH)

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

GD(H4SO)-180
11LE_US.book 181 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

CK:DTC P1152 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (LOW) (BANK1

SENSOR1)
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect that λ value remains low.
Judge as NG when lambda value is abnormal in accordance with λ value of front oxygen (A/F) sensor and
running conditions such as vehicle speed, amount of intake air, engine coolant temperature, sub feedback
control, etc.
λ value = Actual air fuel ratio/Theoretical air fuel ratio
λ > 1: Lean
λ < 1: Rich

2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(3)
(1)

(A)

(2) (2)

(C) (B) (D)

(4)
EN-01693

(A) Electromotive force (B) Air fuel ratio (C) Lean

(D) Rich

(1) Atmosphere (3) ZrO2 (4) Ceramic heater

(2) Exhaust gas

GD(H4SO)-181
11LE_US.book 182 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Time needed for all secondary parameters to be in enable conditions ≥ 4096 ms
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V
Atmospheric pressure ≥ 75 kPa (563 mmHg, 22.2 inHg)
Rear oxygen sensor sub feedback Execution
Rear oxygen sensor output voltage – Feedback target voltage – 0.2 V — 0.1 V
or rear oxygen sensor sub feedback compensation coefficient On Min.
or rear oxygen sensor sub feedback compensation coefficient On Max.
Elapsed time after starting the engine ≥ 60000 ms
Engine coolant temperature ≥ 75 °C (167 °F)
Vehicle speed ≥ 20 km/h (12.4 MPH)
Amount of intake air ≥ 6 g/s (0.21 oz/s)
Load change at 180° CA < 0.02 g/rev (0 oz/rev)
Front oxygen (A/F) sensor impedance 0 Ω — 50 Ω
Learning value of evaporation gas density < 0.2
Total time of operating canister purge ≥ 19.9 s
Targeted lambda value load compensation coefficient –0.03 — 0.000

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Perform diagnosis continuously at a constant speed of 20 km/h (12.4 MPH) or more after 60000 ms have
passed since the engine started.
5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
λ value < 0.85

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 10000 ms

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy-
cles.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
λ value ≥ 0.85

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

GD(H4SO)-182
11LE_US.book 183 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

CL:DTC P1153 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (HIGH) (BANK1

SENSOR1)
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect that λ value remains high.
Judge as NG when lambda value is abnormal in accordance with λ value of front oxygen (A/F) sensor and
running conditions such as vehicle speed, amount of intake air, engine coolant temperature, sub feedback
control, etc.
λ value = Actual air fuel ratio/Theoretical air fuel ratio
λ > 1: Lean
λ < 1: Rich

2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(3)
(1)

(A)

(2) (2)

(C) (B) (D)

(4)
EN-01693

(A) Electromotive force (B) Air fuel ratio (C) Lean

(D) Rich

(1) Atmosphere (3) ZrO2 (4) Ceramic heater

(2) Exhaust gas

GD(H4SO)-183
11LE_US.book 184 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Time needed for all secondary parameters to be in enable conditions ≥ 4096 ms
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V
Atmospheric pressure ≥ 75 kPa (563 mmHg, 22.2 inHg)
Rear oxygen sensor sub feedback Execution
Rear oxygen sensor output voltage – Feedback target voltage – 0.2 V — 0.1 V
or rear oxygen sensor sub feedback compensation coefficient On Min.
or rear oxygen sensor sub feedback compensation coefficient On Max.
Elapsed time after starting the engine ≥ 60000 ms
Engine coolant temperature ≥ 75 °C (167 °F)
Vehicle speed ≥ 20 km/h (12.4 MPH)
Amount of intake air ≥ 6 g/s (0.21 oz/s)
Load change at 180° CA < 0.02 g/rev (0 oz/rev)
Front oxygen (A/F) sensor impedance 0 Ω — 50 Ω
Learning value of evaporation gas density < 0.2
Total time of operating canister purge ≥ 19.9 s
Targeted lambda value load compensation coefficient –0.03 — 0.000

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Perform diagnosis continuously at a constant speed of 20 km/h (12.4 MPH) or more after 60000 ms have
passed since the engine started.
5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
λ value > 1.15

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 10000 ms

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy-
cles.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
λ value ≤ 1.15

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

GD(H4SO)-184
11LE_US.book 185 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

CM:DTC P1160 RETURN SPRING FAILURE

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Judge as NG when the valve is opened more than the default opening angle, but does not move to the close
direction with the motor power stopped.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(1) (8)

S S
(3) (7)

(6)
(2)
(4) (5)

EN-01866

(1) Opener spring (4) Full closed stopper (7) DC motor

(2) Return spring (5) Throttle valve (8) Main and sub throttle sensor
(3) Intermediate stopper (6) Gear

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Motor continuity OFF

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

• Ignition switch ON → OFF
• Ignition switch OFF → ON (Only after clearing memory)
5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Opening variation after continuity is set to OFF ≥ 2°

Time Needed for Diagnosis:1880 ms

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.

GD(H4SO)-185
11LE_US.book 186 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

CN:DTC P1443 VENT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION PROBLEM

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect the abnormal function (stuck closed) of the drain valve.
Judge as NG when fuel tank pressure is low.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(19) (14) (15) (16) (8) (7) (4) (5) (6) (19) (18)

(9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (17) (2) (1) (3)

EN-02294

(1) Bobbin (8) Magnetic plate (14) Retainer

(2) Coil (9) Shaft (15) Diaphragm
(3) Diode (10) Plate (16) Movable core
(4) Stator core (11) Valve (17) Spring
(5) End plate (12) Housing (18) Cover
(6) Body (13) Filter (19) O-ring
(7) Yoke

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Drain valve Open
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V
Barometric pressure ≥ 75 kPa (563 mmHg, 22.2 inHg)
Tank pressure when starter is OFF → ON –0.4 kPa (–3.2 mmHg, –0.1 inHg)
and
1.4 kPa (10.7 mmHg, 0.4 inHg)

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Always perform the diagnosis continuously.

GD(H4SO)-186
11LE_US.book 187 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Fuel tank pressure ≤ –4 kPa (–30 mmHg, –1.2 inHg)

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 3000 s

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Fuel tank pressure > –4 kPa (–30 mmHg, –1.2 inHg)
Cumulative time when all the malfunction ≥ 30000 s
criteria below are met.
Purge control solenoid valve duty Not = 0
Fuel temperature –10 °C (14 °F) — 70 °C (158 °F)
Intake manifold relative pressure ≥ – 26.7 kPa (– 200 mmHg, – 7.9 inHg)

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

GD(H4SO)-187
11LE_US.book 188 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

CO:DTC P1492 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #1 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

(LOW INPUT)
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
• Detects open or short circuit of EGR.
• Judge as NG when the ECM output level differs from the actual terminal level.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(5)

(1)

(6)

(3)

(2)
(4)

EN-02051

(1) Engine control module (ECM) (3) Detecting circuit (5) Battery voltage
(2) Computer unit (CPU) (4) Switch circuit (6) Main relay

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Elapsed time after starting the engine ≥ 1 second
EGR valve target position > 0 step
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Perform diagnosis continuously during EGR operation.

GD(H4SO)-188
11LE_US.book 189 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Terminal voltage level when ECM outputs OFF signal Low level
or
Terminal voltage level when EGR operates Low level

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 2500 ms

Malfunction Indicator Light: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Terminal voltage level when ECM outputs OFF signal High level
Terminal voltage level when EGR operates High level

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 256 ms

GD(H4SO)-189
11LE_US.book 190 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

CP:DTC P1493 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #1 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

(HIGH INPUT)
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
• Detects open or short circuit of EGR.
• Judge as NG when the ECM output level differs from the actual terminal level.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(5)

(1)

(6)

(3)

(2)
(4)

EN-02051

(1) Engine control module (ECM) (3) Detecting circuit (5) Battery voltage
(2) Computer unit (CPU) (4) Switch circuit (6) Main relay

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Elapsed time after starting the engine ≥ 1 second
EGR valve target position > 0 step
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Always perform the diagnosis continuously.

GD(H4SO)-190
11LE_US.book 191 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Terminal voltage level when ECM outputs ON signal High level
or
Terminal voltage level when EGR operates High level

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 2500 ms

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Terminal voltage level when ECM outputs ON signal Low level
Terminal voltage level when EGR operates Low level

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 256 ms

GD(H4SO)-191
 Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria
GENERAL DESCRIPTION

CQ:DTC P1494 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #2 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

(LOW INPUT)
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
NOTE:
For the detection standard, refer to DTC P1492. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-188, DTC P1492 EGR SOLENOID
VALVE SIGNAL #1 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (LOW INPUT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Cri-
teria.>
CR:DTC P1495 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #2 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION
(HIGH INPUT)
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
NOTE:
For the detection standard, refer to DTC P1493. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-190, DTC P1493 EGR SOLENOID
VALVE SIGNAL #1 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (HIGH INPUT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting
Criteria.>
CS:DTC P1496 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #3 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION
(LOW INPUT)
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
NOTE:
For the detection standard, refer to DTC P1492. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-188, DTC P1492 EGR SOLENOID
VALVE SIGNAL #1 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (LOW INPUT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Cri-
teria.>
CT:DTC P1497 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #3 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION
(HIGH INPUT)
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
NOTE:
For the detection standard, refer to DTC P1493. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-190, DTC P1493 EGR SOLENOID
VALVE SIGNAL #1 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (HIGH INPUT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting
Criteria.>
CU:DTC P1498 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #4 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION
(LOW INPUT)
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
NOTE:
For the detection standard, refer to DTC P1492. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-188, DTC P1492 EGR SOLENOID
VALVE SIGNAL #1 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (LOW INPUT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Cri-
teria.>
CV:DTC P1499 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #4 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION
(HIGH INPUT)
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
NOTE:
For the detection standard, refer to DTC P1493. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-190, DTC P1493 EGR SOLENOID
VALVE SIGNAL #1 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (HIGH INPUT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting
Criteria.>

GD(H4SO)-192
11LE_US.book 193 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

CW:DTC P1518 STARTER SWITCH CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect the open or short circuit of starter SW.
Judge as OFF NG when it becomes after engine start despite no starter ON experience.
2. ENABLE CONDITIONS
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
None

3. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Always perform the diagnosis continuously.
4. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
Judge as OFF NG when the following conditions are established.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Vehicle speed < 1 km/h (0.6 MPH)
Starter ON signal Not detected
Engine condition Changed from before start to
after start
Battery voltage ≥8V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy-
cles.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OFF OK and clear the NG if the following conditions are established.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Starter ON Experienced
Starter ON diagnosis No diagnosis experience
Battery voltage ≥8V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

GD(H4SO)-193
11LE_US.book 194 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

CX:DTC P1560 BACK-UP VOLTAGE CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect the open/short circuit of back-up power supply circuit.
Judge as NG when the backup power voltage is low.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
None

3. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Always perform the diagnosis continuously.
4. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Voltage of back-up power supply Low
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V
Engine condition After engine starting

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 2500 ms

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Voltage of back-up power supply High
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V
Engine condition After engine starting

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

GD(H4SO)-194
 Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria
GENERAL DESCRIPTION

CY:DTC P1570 ANTENNA

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
NOTE:
For the detection standard, refer to DTC P0513. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-169, DTC P0513 INCORRECT IMMO-
BILIZER KEY, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CZ:DTC P1571 REFERENCE CODE INCOMPATIBILITY
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
NOTE:
For the detection standard, refer to DTC P0513. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-169, DTC P0513 INCORRECT IMMO-
BILIZER KEY, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
DA:DTC P1572 IMM CIRCUIT FAILURE (EXCEPT ANTENNA CIRCUIT)
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
NOTE:
For the detection standard, refer to DTC P0513. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-169, DTC P0513 INCORRECT IMMO-
BILIZER KEY, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
DB:DTC P1574 KEY COMMUNICATION FAILURE
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
NOTE:
For the detection standard, refer to DTC P0513. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-169, DTC P0513 INCORRECT IMMO-
BILIZER KEY, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
DC:DTC P1576 EGI CONTROL MODULE EEPROM
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
NOTE:
For the detection standard, refer to DTC P0513. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-169, DTC P0513 INCORRECT IMMO-
BILIZER KEY, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
DD:DTC P1577 IMM CONTROL MODULE EEPROM
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
NOTE:
For the detection standard, refer to DTC P0513. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-169, DTC P0513 INCORRECT IMMO-
BILIZER KEY, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
DE:DTC P1578 METER FAILURE
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
NOTE:
For the detection standard, refer to DTC P0513. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-169, DTC P0513 INCORRECT IMMO-
BILIZER KEY, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>

GD(H4SO)-195
11LE_US.book 196 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

DF:DTC P2096 POST CATALYST FUEL TRIM SYSTEM TOO LEAN (BANK 1)
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect the malfunction of fuel system from the size of the sub feedback learning value.
Control the sub feedback learning and judge as NG when the learning value is in the lean zone.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(E)
(3)
V (1)

(A) (F)

(2) (2)

(C) (B) (D)

EN-01696

(A) Electromotive force (B) Air fuel ratio (C) Rich

(D) Lean (E) Theoretical air fuel ratio (F) Comparative voltage

(1) Atmosphere (2) Exhaust gas (3) Electromotive force

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Conditions for carrying out the sub feedback learning Completed
Continuous time when all conditions are established. ≥1s

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Perform the diagnosis continuously when the vehicle is idling or running at a constant speed of 80 km/h (50
MPH) or more.

GD(H4SO)-196
11LE_US.book 197 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Sub feedback learning value < –0.032

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 5 s × 1 time(s)

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy-
cles.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Sub feedback learning value ≥ –0.032 + 0

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 5 s

GD(H4SO)-197
11LE_US.book 198 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

DG:DTC P2097 POST CATALYST FUEL TRIM SYSTEM TOO RICH (BANK 1)
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect the malfunction of fuel system from the size of the sub feedback learning value.
Sub feedback learning is being performed. When the learning value goes to the rich side, judge as NG.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(E)
(3)
V (1)

(A) (F)

(2) (2)

(C) (B) (D)

EN-01696

(A) Electromotive force (B) Air fuel ratio (C) Rich

(D) Lean (E) Theoretical air fuel ratio (F) Comparative voltage

(1) Atmosphere (2) Exhaust gas (3) Electromotive force

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Conditions for carrying out the sub feedback learning Completed
Continuous time when all conditions are established. ≥1s

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Perform the diagnosis continuously when the vehicle is idling or running at a constant speed of 80 km/h (50
MPH) or more.

GD(H4SO)-198
11LE_US.book 199 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Sub feedback learning value ≥ 0.032 (PZEV model)
≥ 0.02 (except for PZEV model)

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 5 s × 1 time(s)

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy-
cles.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Sub feedback learning value < 0.032 + 0 (PZEV model)
< 0.02 + 0 (except for PZEV model)

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 5 s

GD(H4SO)-199
11LE_US.book 200 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

DH:DTC P2101 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT RANGE/

PERFORMANCE
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Judge as NG when the motor current becomes large or drive circuit is heated.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
12V 12V

(1)

(6)

(2) (3)

(4) (7)

(2) (5)

EN-01867

(1) Engine control module (ECM) (4) Drive circuit (6) Electronic throttle control relay
(2) Detecting circuit (5) Temperature detection circuit (7) Motor
(3) Overcurrent detection circuit

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Under control of electronic throttle control ON

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Always perform the diagnosis continuously.

GD(H4SO)-200
11LE_US.book 201 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Motor current ≤8A
Drive circuit inner temperature ≤ 175°C (347°F)

Time Needed for Diagnosis:

• 500 ms (NG judgment)
• 2000 ms (OK judgment)
Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.

GD(H4SO)-201
11LE_US.book 202 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

DI: DTC P2102 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT LOW

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Judge as NG when the electronic throttle control power is not supplied even when ECM sets the electronic
throttle control relay to ON.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
12V 12V

(1)

(4)

(2)

(3) (5)

EN-01868

(1) Engine control module (ECM) (3) Drive circuit (5) Motor
(2) Voltage detection circuit (4) Electronic throttle control relay

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Electronic throttle control relay output ON

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Always perform the diagnosis continuously.
5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Motor power voltage ≥5V

Time Needed for Diagnosis:

• 400 ms (NG judgment)
• 2000 ms (OK judgment)
Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.

GD(H4SO)-202
11LE_US.book 203 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

DJ:DTC P2103 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT HIGH

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Judge as NG when the electronic throttle control power is supplied even when ECM sets the electronic throt-
tle control relay to OFF.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
12V 12V

(1)

(4)

(2)

(3) (5)

EN-01868

(1) Engine control module (ECM) (3) Drive circuit (5) Motor
(2) Voltage detection circuit (4) Electronic throttle control relay

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Electronic throttle control relay output OFF

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

• When ignition switch ON → OFF
• Ignition switch OFF → ON (Only after clearing memory)
5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Motor power voltage ≤5V

Time Needed for Diagnosis:

• 600 ms (NG judgment)
• 400 ms (OK judgment)
Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.

GD(H4SO)-203
11LE_US.book 204 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

DK:DTC P2109 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR “A” MINIMUM STOP

PERFORMANCE
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Judge as NG when full close point learning cannot conducted or abnormal value is detected.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(1) (3)

(2)

(4)

EN-01869

(1) Engine control module (ECM) (3) Motor (4) Throttle position sensor
(2) Drive circuit

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Ignition switch ON → OFF
Ignition switch (only after clear memory) OFF → ON

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Perform the diagnosis at full closed point learning.
5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Throttle sensor opening angle at full close point learning 10.127° or more,
19.872° or less
Throttle opening angle when the ignition switch is ON – ≥ 1.683°
Throttle minimum stop position

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 8 — 80 ms

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.

GD(H4SO)-204
11LE_US.book 205 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

DL:DTC P2122 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “D” CIRCUIT

LOW INPUT
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect the open or short circuit of accelerator pedal position sensor 1.
Judge as NG if out of specification.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(4)
(1)

(2)

(3)

EN-01861

(1) Engine control module (ECM) (3) Accelerator pedal position sensor (4) Accelerator pedal position sensor
2 signal
(2) Accelerator pedal position sensor
1 signal

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Ignition switch ON
Battery voltage ≥6V

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Always perform the diagnosis continuously.

GD(H4SO)-205
11LE_US.book 206 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Sensor 1 input voltage < 0.217 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 100 ms

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Sensor 1 input voltage ≥ 0.217 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 100 ms

GD(H4SO)-206
11LE_US.book 207 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

DM:DTC P2123 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “D” CIRCUIT

HIGH INPUT
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect the open or short circuit of accelerator pedal position sensor 1.
Judge as NG if out of specification.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(4)
(1)

(2)

(3)

EN-01861

(1) Engine control module (ECM) (3) Accelerator pedal position sensor (4) Accelerator pedal position sensor
2 signal
(2) Accelerator pedal position sensor
1 signal

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Ignition switch ON
Battery voltage ≥6V

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Always perform the diagnosis continuously.

GD(H4SO)-207
11LE_US.book 208 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Sensor 1 input voltage ≥ 4.783 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 32 ms

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Sensor 1 input voltage < 4.783 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 32 ms

GD(H4SO)-208
11LE_US.book 209 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

DN:DTC P2127 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “E” CIRCUIT

LOW INPUT
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect the open or short circuit of accelerator pedal position sensor 2.
Judge as NG if out of specification.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(4)
(1)

(2)

(3)

EN-01861

(1) Engine control module (ECM) (3) Accelerator pedal position sensor (4) Accelerator pedal position sensor
2 signal
(2) Accelerator pedal position sensor
1 signal

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Ignition switch ON
Battery voltage ≥6V

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Always perform the diagnosis continuously.

GD(H4SO)-209
11LE_US.book 210 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Sensor 2 input voltage < 0.217 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 100 ms

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Sensor 2 input voltage ≥ 0.217 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 100 ms

GD(H4SO)-210
11LE_US.book 211 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

DO:DTC P2128 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “E” CIRCUIT

HIGH INPUT
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect the open or short circuit of accelerator pedal position sensor 2.
Judge as NG if out of specification.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(4)
(1)

(2)

(3)

EN-01861

(1) Engine control module (ECM) (3) Accelerator pedal position sensor (4) Accelerator pedal position sensor
2 signal
(2) Accelerator pedal position sensor
1 signal

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Ignition switch ON
Battery voltage ≥6V

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Always perform the diagnosis continuously.

GD(H4SO)-211
11LE_US.book 212 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Sensor 2 input voltage ≥ 4.783 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 100 ms

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Sensor 2 input voltage < 4.783 V

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 100 ms

GD(H4SO)-212
11LE_US.book 213 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

DP:DTC P2135 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “A”/“B” VOLT-

AGE CORRELATION
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Judge as NG when the signal level of throttle position sensor 1 is different from the throttle position sensor 2.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(3)
(4)

(1)

(2)

EN-01859

(1) Throttle position sensor 1 signal (3) Throttle position sensor (4) Engine control module (ECM)
(2) Throttle position sensor 2 signal

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Ignition switch ON
Battery voltage ≥6V

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Always perform the diagnosis continuously.

GD(H4SO)-213
11LE_US.book 214 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Signal difference between two sensors Within the NG range of judgment
value detail

Details of Judgment Value

(Y5) (NG area)

(Y4)

Sensor output (Y3)

difference (˚)
(Y2)
(Y1) (OK area)

0
0
(X1) (X2) (X3) (X4)

Throttle position sensor 1 opening angle (˚)

EN-08032

(X1) 2.125 ° (X2) 4.25 ° (X3) 9°

(X4) 31.625 °

(Y1) 5.15 ° (Y2) 6.15 ° (Y3) 8.28 °

(Y4) 10.4 ° (Y5) 12.4 °

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 212 ms

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Signal difference between two sensors Within the OK range of judgment
value detail

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 24 ms

GD(H4SO)-214
11LE_US.book 215 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

DQ:DTC P2138 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “D”/“E” VOLT-

AGE CORRELATION
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Judge as NG when the signal level of throttle position sensor 1 is different from the throttle position sensor 2.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

(4)
(1)

(2)

(3)

EN-01861

(1) Engine control module (ECM) (3) Accelerator pedal position sensor (4) Accelerator pedal position sensor
2 signal
(2) Accelerator pedal position sensor
1 signal

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Ignition switch ON
Battery voltage ≥6V

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Always perform the diagnosis continuously.

GD(H4SO)-215
11LE_US.book 216 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Signal difference between two sensors Within the NG range of judgment
value detail

Details of Judgment Value

(Y5)

(Y4) (NG area)

Sensor output
(Y3)
difference (˚)
(Y2)
(Y1)
(OK area)

0
0 (X1) (X2) (X3) (X4)

Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 opening angle (˚)

EN-08033

(X1) 0.6 ° (X2) 1.2 ° (X3) 2°

(X4) 4°

(Y1) 1.465 ° (Y2) 1.597 ° (Y3) 1.663 °

(Y4) 2.455 ° (Y5) 3.116 °

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 116 ms

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Signal difference between two sensors Within the OK range of judgment
value detail

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 116 ms

GD(H4SO)-216
11LE_US.book 217 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

DR:DTC P2227 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect the malfunction of barometric pressure sensor output property.
Judge as NG when the barometric pressure sensor output is largely different from the intake manifold pres-
sure at engine start.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The barometric pressure sensor is built into the ECM.
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Engine speed < 300 rpm
Vehicle speed < 1 km/h (0.6 MPH)

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Perform the diagnosis once at ignition switch ON.
5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
|Barometric pressure – Intake manifold pressure| ≥ 26.7 kPa (200 mmHg, 7.9 inHg)
|Intake manifold pressure at engine start – Intake < 1.3 kPa (9.99 mmHg, 0.4 inHg)
manifold pressure|

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 328 ms

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy-
cles.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
|Barometric pressure – Intake manifold pressure| < 26.7 kPa (200 mmHg, 7.9 inHg)

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 262 ms

GD(H4SO)-217
11LE_US.book 218 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

DS:DTC P2228 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT LOW

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect the open/short circuit of the barometric pressure sensor.
Judge as NG if out of specification.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The barometric pressure sensor is built into the ECM.
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
None

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Always perform the diagnosis continuously.
5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Output voltage < 1.707 V (PZEV AT model)
< 2.006 V (except for PZEV AT model)

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 500 ms

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Output voltage ≥ 1.707 V (PZEV AT model)
≥ 2.006 V (except for PZEV AT model)

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

GD(H4SO)-218
11LE_US.book 219 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

DT:DTC P2229 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT HIGH

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect the open/short circuit of the barometric pressure sensor.
Judge as NG if out of specification.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The barometric pressure sensor is built into the ECM.
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
None

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Always perform the diagnosis continuously.
5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Output voltage ≥ 4.234 V (PZEV AT model)
≥ 4.016 V (except for PZEV AT model)

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 500 ms

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Output voltage < 4.234 V (PZEV AT model)
< 4.016 V (except for PZEV AT model)

Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second

GD(H4SO)-219
11LE_US.book 220 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

DU:DTC U0073 CAN FAILURE, BUS ‘OFF’ DETECTION

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Detect malfunction of CAN communication.
When CAN communications is not possible, and CAN communications with TCM, VDC CM and body integrat-
ed unit is not possible, judge as NG if data from the TCM, VDC CM and body integrated unit are not normal.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
ECM, TCM, VDC CM and body integrated unit are connected by high speed CAN.
(Common Specifications)
CAN Protocol 2.0 B (Active)
Frame Format: 11 Bit ID Frame (Standard Frame)
(High speed CAN)
Conforms to ISO11898
Communication Speed: 500 kbps
3. ENABLE CONDITIONS
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
None

4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Perform the diagnosis continuously after starting the engine.
5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
Judge as NG when the following conditions are established.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Battery voltage > 10.9 V
Starter switch OFF
Engine run
bus off flag or error warning flag set (error)
or
ID received from control module connected to driving system CAN None during 500 milliseconds
or
Data updated from control module connected to driving system CAN None during 2000 milliseconds

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 2 seconds

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Battery voltage > 10.9 V
Starter switch OFF
Engine run
bus off flag or error warning flag clear (No error)
ID received from control module connected to driving system CAN Yes
Data updated from control module connected to driving system CAN Yes

Time Needed for Diagnosis: 1000 ms

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.

GD(H4SO)-220
 Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria
GENERAL DESCRIPTION

DV:DTC U0101 CAN (TCU) DATA NOT LOADED

1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
NOTE:
For the detection standard, refer to DTC U0073. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-220, DTC U0073 CAN FAILURE, BUS
‘OFF’ DETECTION, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
DW:DTC U0122 CAN (VDC) DATA NOT LOADED
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
NOTE:
For the detection standard, refer to DTC U0073. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-220, DTC U0073 CAN FAILURE, BUS
‘OFF’ DETECTION, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
DX:DTC U0140 CAN (BCU) DATA NOT LOADED
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
NOTE:
For the detection standard, refer to DTC U0073. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-220, DTC U0073 CAN FAILURE, BUS
‘OFF’ DETECTION, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
DY:DTC U0402 CAN (TCU) DATA ABNORMAL
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
NOTE:
For the detection standard, refer to DTC U0073. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-220, DTC U0073 CAN FAILURE, BUS
‘OFF’ DETECTION, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
DZ:DTC U0416 CAN (VDC) DATA ABNORMAL
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
NOTE:
For the detection standard, refer to DTC U0073. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-220, DTC U0073 CAN FAILURE, BUS
‘OFF’ DETECTION, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
EA:DTC U0422 CAN (BCU) DATA ABNORMAL
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
NOTE:
For the detection standard, refer to DTC U0073. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-220, DTC U0073 CAN FAILURE, BUS
‘OFF’ DETECTION, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>

GD(H4SO)-221
11LE_US.book 222 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

GD(H4SO)-222
2011 LEGACY SERVICE MANUAL QUICK REFERENCE INDEX

ENGINE 2 SECTION

FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS) FU(H4DOTC)

EMISSION CONTROL
EC(H4DOTC)
(AUX. EMISSION CONTROL DEVICES)

INTAKE (INDUCTION) IN(H4DOTC)

MECHANICAL ME(H4DOTC)
This service manual has been prepared
to provide SUBARU service personnel
with the necessary information and data EXHAUST EX(H4DOTC)
for the correct maintenance and repair
of SUBARU vehicles.
COOLING CO(H4DOTC)
This manual includes the procedures
for maintenance, disassembling, reas-
sembling, inspection and adjustment of LUBRICATION LU(H4DOTC)
components and diagnostics for guid-
ance of experienced mechanics.
Please peruse and utilize this manual SPEED CONTROL SYSTEMS SP(H4DOTC)
fully to ensure complete repair work for
satisfying our customers by keeping
their vehicle in optimum condition. IGNITION IG(H4DOTC)
When replacement of parts during
repair work is needed, be sure to use
SUBARU genuine parts. STARTING/CHARGING SYSTEMS SC(H4DOTC)

EN(H4DOTC)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)
(diag)

GENERAL DESCRIPTION GD(H4DOTC)

All information, illustration and specifi-

cations contained in this manual are
based on the latest product information
available at the time of publication
approval.

FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD. G2470BE3